Apte: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary

Based on Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona : 1890

Input by Cologne Digital Sanskrit Lexicon (CDSL)
[GRETIL-Version vom 08.09.2017]

This file is based on pwg.txt, available at
(C) Copyright 2014 The Sanskrit Library and Thomas Malten under the following license:

All rights reserved other than those granted under the Creative Commons Attribution
Non-Commercial Share Alike license available in full at
http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/3.0/legalcode, and summarized at
http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/3.0/ .
Permission is granted to build upon this work non-commercially, as long as credit is explicitly
acknowledged exactly as described herein and derivative work is distributed under the same license.

Sanskrit passages


Text converted to Unicode (UTF-8).
(This file is to be used with a UTF-8 font and your browser's VIEW configuration
set to UTF-8.)

description:multibyte sequence:
long a ā
long A Ā
long i ī
long I Ī
long u ū
long U Ū
vocalic r
vocalic R
long vocalic r
vocalic l
vocalic L
long vocalic l
velar n
velar N
palatal n ñ
palatal N Ñ
retroflex t
retroflex T
retroflex d
retroflex D
retroflex n
retroflex N
palatal s ś
palatal S Ś
retroflex s
retroflex S
long e ē
long o ō
l underbar
r underbar
n underbar
k underbar
t underbar

Unless indicated otherwise, accents have been dropped in order
to facilitate word search.

For a comprehensive list of GRETIL encodings and formats see:

For further information see:


a The first letter of the Nāgarī Alphabet. --aḥ [avati, atati sātatvena tiṣṭhatīti vā; av-at vā, ḍa Tv.]
     (1) N. of Viṣṇu, the first of the three sounds constituting the sacred syllable om; akāro viṣṇuruddiṣṭa ukārastu maheśvaraḥ . makārastu smṛto brahmā praṇavastu trayātmakaḥ ..; for more explanation of the three syllables a, u, m see om.
     (2) N. of Śiva, Brahmā, Vāyu, or Vaiśvānara. --ind.
     (1) A prefix corresponding to Latin in, Eng. in or un, Gr. a or an, and joined to nouns, adjectives, indeclinables (or even to verbs) as a substitute for the negative particle nañ, and changed to an before vowels except in the word a-ṛṇin. The senses of na usually enumerated are six-
          (a) sādṛśya 'likeness' or 'resemblance'; abrāhmaṇaḥ one like a Brāhmaṇa (wearing the sacred thread &c.), but not a Brāhmaṇa, but a Kshatriya, or Vaiśya; anikṣu: a reed appearing like ikṣu, but not a true ikṣu.
          (b) abhāva 'absence', 'negation', 'want', 'privation'; ajñānaṃ absence of knowledge, ignorance; akrodhaḥ, anaṃgaḥ, akaṃṭakaḥ, aghaṭaḥ &c.
          (c) bheda 'difference' or 'distinction'; apaṭaḥ not a cloth, something different from, or other than, a cloth.
          (d) alpatā 'smallness', 'diminution', used as a diminutive particle; anudarā having a slender waist (kṛśodarī or tanumadhyamā).
          (e) aprāśastya 'badness,' 'unfitness,' having a depreciative sense; akālaḥ wrong or improper time; akāryaṃ not fit to be done, improper, unworthy, bad act.
          (f) virodha 'opposition', 'contrariety'; anītiḥ the opposite of morality, immorality; asita not white, black; asura not a god, a demon &c. These senses are put together in the following verse: tatsādṛśyamabhāvaśca tadanyatvaṃ tadalpatā . aprāśastyaṃ virodhaśca nañarthāḥ ṣaṭ prakīrtitāḥ .. See na also. With verbal derivatives, such as gerunds, infinitives, participles, it has usually the sense of 'not'; adagdhvā not having burnt: apaśyan not seeing; so asakṛt not once; amṛṣā, akasmāt &c. Sometimes a does not affect the sense of the second member; a-paścima that which has no last, i. e. last; anuttama having no superior, unsurpassed, most excellent; for examples see the words.
     (2) An interjection of
          (a) Pity (ah!) a avadyaṃ P. I. 1. 14 Sk.
          (b) Reproach, censure (fie, shame); apacasi tvaṃ jālma P. VI. 3. 73 Vart. See akaraṇi, ajīvani also.
          (c) Used in addressing; a anaṃta.
          (d) It is also used as a particle of prohibition.
     (3) The augment prefixed to the root in the formation of the Imperfect, Aorist and Conditional Tenses.
     N-B. --The application of this privative prefix is practically unlimited; to give every possible case would almost amount to a dictionary itself. No attempt will, therefore, be made to give every possible combination of this prefix with a following word; only such words as require a special explanation, or such as most frequently occur in the literature and enter into compounds, with other words, will be given; others will be found self-explaining when the English 'in,' 'un,' or 'not,' is substituted for a or an before the meaning of the second word, or the sense may be expressed by 'less,' 'free from,' 'devoid or destitute of' &c; akathya unspeakable; adarpa without pride, or freedom from pride; apragalbha not bold; abhaga unfortunate; avitta destitute of wealth &c. &c. In many cases such compounds will be found explained under the second member. Most compounds beginning with a or an are either Tatpurusha or Bahuvrīhi (to be determined by the sense) and should be so dissolved.

aṛṇin a. ( being regarded as a consonant) Not a debtor, free from debt; divasasyāṣṭame bhāge śākaṃ pacati yo naraḥ . aṛṇī cāpravāsī ca sa vāricara modate .. Mb. The form anṛṇin also occurs in this sense.

aṃś 10 U. aṃśayati-te To divide, distribute, share among; also aṃśāpayati in this sense.

aṃśaḥ [aṃś ac]
     (1) A share, part, portion, division; member; sakṛdaṃśo nipatati Ms. 9. 47; turyāṃśaḥ a fourth part; ṣaṣṭha-; mamaivāṃśo jīvaloke jīvabhūtaḥ sanātanaḥ Bg. 15. 7; bhuvamaṃśāviva dharmayorgatau R. 8. 16; aṃśena darśitānukūlatā K. 159 partly.
     (2) A share in property, inheritance; svatoṃśataḥ Ms. 8. 408; anaṃśau klībapatitau 9. 201; patnyaḥ kāryāḥ samāṃśikāḥ Y. 2. 115.
     (3) The numerator of a fraction; anyonyahārābhihatau harāṃśau Līlā.; sometimes used for fraction itself.
     (4) A degree of latitude (or longitude); akṣasyāṃśāḥ samākhyātāḥ ṣaṣṭyuttaraśatatrayam; sa ca aṃśaḥ ṣaṣṭikalātmakaḥ, kalā tu ṣaṣṭivikalātmikā.
     (5) The shoulder (more generally written aṃsa, q. v.).
     (6) N. of one of the Ādityas. The senses of 'party', 'a share of booty,' 'earnest money', which are said to occur in the Veda are traceable to 1. above.
     -- Comp.
          --aṃśaḥ [ṣa. ta.] a secondary incarnation; part of a portion.
          --aṃśi adv. share by share.
          --avatāraḥ --taraṇaṃ [ṣa. ta.] descent (on earth) of parts of deities, partial incarnation; -tāra iva dharmasya Dk. 153; -ramiva kṛtāṃtasya K. 31; uccaiḥśravasaḥ 79; so aṃśāvatīrṇamiva 108; N. of Adhyāyas 64-67 of Ādiparvan of Bhārata.
          --bhāj, --hara, --hārin m. f. [upa. samāsa] one who takes or has a share, one entitled to a share in the ancestral property, an heir, a coheir; piṃḍadoṃśaharaścaiṣāṃ pūrvābhāve paraḥ paraḥ Y. 2. 132; jātopi dāsyāṃ śūdreṇa kāmatoṃśaharo bhavet 133.
          --vivartin a. [sa. ta.] slightly turned away, or turned away towards the shoulder; mukhamaṃśavivarti pakṣmalākṣyāḥ S. 3. 26 v. l. for aṃsavivarti. --savarṇanaṃ [ṣa. ta.] reduction of fractions to the same denominator (atulyacchedayo rāśyoḥ samacchedakaraṇaṃ) anyonyahārābhihatau harāṃśau rāśyoḥ samacchedavidhānamevam Līlā.
          --svaraḥ the keynote.

aṃśakaḥ [aṃa-nvul; aṃśikā f.]
     (1) One having a share, a coheir, relative.
     (2) (svārthe kan) A share, portion, division; triṃśāṃśakastathā rāśerbhāgaityabhidhīyate; dvibhartṛkā meṣanavāṃśake syāt, vṛṣāṃśake sā paśuśīlayuktā. --kaṃ A solar day.

aṃśala a. (aṃśaṃ lāti; lā-ka)
     (1) Having, or entitled to, a share (aṃśagrāhaka).
     (2) aṃsala, q. v.

aṃśanam [aṃś-lyuṭ] Act of dividing.

aṃśayitṛ m. (aṃś-tṛc) A divider, sharer.

aṃśin a. [aṃśa-ini]
     (1) A sharer, coheir; (punarvibhāgakaraṇe) sarve vā syuḥ samāṃśinaḥ Y. 2. 114 entitled to the same share.
     (2) Having parts or members (avayavin); aṃśinaḥ svāṃśagātyaṃtābhāvaṃ prati mṛṣātmatāṃ -- V. Paribhāṣā.

aṃśya a. [aṃś-karmaṇi yat] Divisible.

aṃśuḥ [aṃś-mṛga- ku.]
     (1) A ray, beam of light; caṃḍa-, gharma- hot-rayed, the sun; sūryāṃśubhirbhinnamivāraviṃdaṃ Ku. 1. 32; lustre, brilliance; ratna-, nakha- &c.
     (2) A point or end.
     (3) A small or minute particle.
     (4) End of a thread.
     (5) A filament, especially of the Soma plant (Ved).
     (6) Garment; decoration.
     (7) N. of a sage or of a prince.
     (8) Speed, velocity (vega).
     -- Comp.
          --jālaṃ a collection of rays, a blaze or halo of light.
          --dharaḥ, --patiḥ --bhṛt, --bāṇaḥ--bhartṛ. --svāmī the sun, (bearer of rays or lord of rays).
          --padṛṃ a kind of silken cloth (aṃśunā sūkṣmasūtreṇa yuktaṃ paṭṭaṃ) Y. 1. 186, Ms. 5. 120.
          --mālā a garland of light, halo.
          --mālin m. [aṃśavaḥ māleva, tataḥ astyarthe ini] 1. the sun (wreathed with, surrounded by, rays). 2. the number twelve. 3. having a collection of rays.
          --hastaḥ [aṃśuḥ hasta iva yasya] the sun (who draws up water from the earth by means of his 1000 hands in the form of rays).

aṃśumat a. [aṃśu-astyarthe matup]
     (1) Luminous, radiant; jyotiṣāṃ raviraṃśumān Bg. 10. 21.
     (2) Pointed.
     (3) Fibrous, abounding in filaments (Ved.). --m. (mān)
     (1) The sun; vālakhilyairivāṃśumān R. 15. 10, Ki. 11. 6, Y. 3. 144; sometimes the moon also.
     (2) N. of the grandson of Sagara, son of Asamanjasa and father of Dilīpa.
     (3) N. of a mountain; -matphalā N. of a plant kadalī Musa Sapientum or Paradisiaca. --tī 1 N. of a plant sālaparṇī (Mar. ḍavalā, sālavaṇa) Hedysarum Gangeticum.
     (2) N. of the river Yamunā.

aṃśukam [aṃśavaḥ sūtrāṇi viṣayo yasya; aṃśu ṛśyādi- ka]
     (1) A cloth, garment in general; stana- a breastcloth; sitāṃśukā V. 3. 12; yatrāṃśukākṣepavilajjitānāṃ Ku. 1. 14; cīnāṃśukamiva ketoḥ S. 1. 34.
     (2) A fine or white cloth; dhunvan kalpadrumakisalayānyaṃśukānīva vātaiḥ Me. 62; usually silken or muslin.
     (3) An upper garment; a mantle; also an under garment; kararuddhanīvigaladaṃśukāḥ striyaḥ Śi. 13. 31.
     (4) A leaf.
     (5) Mild or gentle blaze of light (nātidīpti) (kaḥ also; svārthekas.).

aṃśula a. Radiant, luminous. --laḥ [aṃśuṃ prabhāṃ buddhipratibhāṃ lāti, lā-ka] N. of the sage Chāṇakya; of any sage.

aṃs aṃsayati, aṃsāpayati See aṃś.

aṃsaḥ [aṃs karmabhāvādau ac]
     (1) A part, portion; See aṃśa.
     (2) The shoulder, shoulder-blade.
     (3) N. of a Prince. (--sau) The two angles of an altar. [cf. Goth. amsa; L. ansa, humerus; Gr. asilla.]
     -- Comp.
          --kūṭaḥ [aṃsaḥ kūṭa iva bṛhattvāt] a bull's hump, the protuberance between the shoulders; rājanyoccāṃsakūṭakrathanapaṭuraṭadghoradhāraḥ kuṭhāraḥ Prab. 1. 7
          --traṃ [upa. sa.] 1 an armour to protect the shoulders. 2. a bow.
          --phalakaḥ the upper part of the spine.
          --bhāraḥ (aṃse-) [aṃse dhṛto bhāraḥ śāka. ta. vā aluk] a burden or yoke put upon the shoulder.
          --bhārika, --bhārin a. (aṃse-) [bhastrādi gaṇa, aṃsa (se) bhāreṇa harati; ṣṭhan] bearing a yoke or burden on the shoulder.
          --vivartin a. [upa. sa.] turned towards the shoulders; mukhamaṃsavivarti pakṣmalākṣyāḥ S. 3. 26.

aṃsala a. [aṃsa lac, balavati ityarthe; P. V. 2. 98] Strong, lusty, powerful, having strong shoulders; yuvā yugavyāyatabāhuraṃsalaḥ R. 3. 34; bhujena upaitu yogaṃ punaraṃsalena 16. 84; -puruṣaprayatnaduścalaṃ Dk. 169.

aṃsya a. [aṃse bhavaḥ aṃsa-yat.] Belonging to the shoulder; ye aṃsyā ye aṃgyāḥ sūcikāḥ Rv. 1. 191. 7.

aṃh 1 A aṃhate, aṃhituṃ To go; approach; set out, Bk. 3. 25, 46; 14. 51, 4. 4. &c. --Caus.
     (1) To send; tamāṃjihanmaithilayajñabhūmiṃ Bk. 2. 40, 15. 75.
     (2) To shine.
     (3) To speak.

aṃhura a. [aṃhṛ-madgurādi urac] Moving (gatiyukta); Rv. 10. 5. 6; distressed, straitened, sinful (?).

aṃhūraṇa a. Ved. distressing, troublesome; sinful; straitened. --ṇaṃ A sin, distress (?).

aṃhoyu a. Troublesome, free from sin (?).

aṃhatiḥ --tī f. [han-ati, aṃhādeśaśca; haṃteratiḥ syādaṃhādeśaśca dhātoḥ Uṇ. 4. 62; haṃti duritamanayā dānaṃ]
     (1) A gift.
     (2) Anxiety, trouble, care, distress, illness (Ved).

aṃhas n. aṃhaḥ --hasī &c. [am asun hukaca Uṇ. 4. 212, amati gacchati prāyaścittena]
     (1) A sin; sahasā saṃhatimaṃhasāṃ vihaṃtuṃ ... alaṃ Ki. 5. 17; kṛtaḥ kṛtārthosmi nibarhitāṃhasā Śi. 1. 29; leaving one's religion or duty (svadharmatyāga).
     (2) Trouble, anxiety, care. [cf. agha, āgas; Gr. agos; ahos]. -muc a. freeing from distress.

aṃhasaspatiḥ Ved. The intercalary month (lord of distress or perplexity?)

aṃhasvat a. Sinful.

aṃhitiḥ --tī f. [aṃh ktin grahāditvāt iṭ Tv.] A gift.

aṃhu a. [aṃh mṛga- ku] Ved. Sinful, wicked, injurious (pāpakārin, hananaśīla;) strait, narrow (?) --hu n.
     (1) Anxiety, distress; sin, crime (?).
     (2) Pudendum Muliebre (?). [cf. L. angustus, anxius; Goth. aggvus]. --bheda --dī having a narrow slit; having the pudendum divided (?).

aṃhriḥ [aṃh vaṃkryādi krin, aṃhate gacchatyanena]
     (1) A foot.
     (2) The root of a tree, cf. aṃghri.
     (3) The number four.
     -- Comp.
          --paḥ 'foot-drinker', a tree; (mūlena pibati siktatoyaṃ). --skaṃdhaḥ [aṃhreḥ skaṃdha iva] the upper part of the sole of the foot.

ak 1 P(akati) To go, move tortuously like a serpent [cf. L. angulus, Gr. agkai].

aka a. Moving tortuously.

akam [na kaṃ sukhaṃ] Absence of happiness; pain, misery; (as in nāka na akaṃ duḥkhaṃ yatra;) sin nāsti kaṃ sukhaṃ yasmāt.

akaca a. [na. ba.] Bald. --caḥ N. of Ketu (the descending node), who is represented as a headless trunk. Tv. explains it thus: akāya duḥkhāya cāyate; cāy-ḍa; ketugrahasya udayena lokopaplavasya śāstraprasiddhiḥ; e. g. upaplavāya lokānāṃ dhūmaketurivotthitaḥ Ku. 2. 32.

akaḍamaṃ, akathahaṃ, -cakram N. of a mystical circle (cakra) or diagram with the letters of the alphabet, such as a, ka, ḍa, ma, a, ka, tha, ha &c. written therein and used in determining the auspicious or inauspicious stars of a person; (grāhyagopālamaṃtrasya-taṃtroktamaṃtragrahaṇārthaṃ-tattanmaṃtrāṇāṃ śubhāśubhavicāropayogī cakrabhedaḥ Tv.)

akathita a. 'Not told,' not otherwise mentioned by way of any of the other case-relations, such as apādāna &c; a name given to the indirect (gauṇa) object governed by verbs like duh, yāc &c.

akaniṣṭha a. Not the youngest (such as eldest, middle); elder, superior. --ṣṭhaḥ [ake vedaniṃdārūpe pāpe niṣṭhā yasya saḥ] N. of Buddha Gautama; of a deified Buddhist saint (pl. in this latter sense.)
     -- Comp.
          --paḥ (gaḥ also) [akaniṣṭhān buddhān pātīti; pā-ka.] N. of Buddha, lord of Buddhists.

akanyā [na. ta.] No virgin, a maid that is not so any longer; akanyeti tuyaḥ kanyāṃ brūyāt dveṣeṇa mānavaḥ Ms. 8. 225. 6.

akaṃpana a. [na. ta.] Not shaking. --naḥ N. of a Rākṣasa.

akaṃpita a. [na. ta.] Unshaken, firm, resolute; not tremulous. --taḥ N. of a Jaina or Buddha saint, a pupil of the last Tirthamkāra (kaṃpitaṃ buddhivṛtteścālanaṃ tannāsti yasya).

akara a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Handless, maimed.
     (2) Exempt from tax or duty.
     (3) [na. ta.] Not doing or acting; not disposed to work, ceasing from work. --rā N. of a plant āmalakī, Emblic Myrobalan, Phyllanthus Emblica (akaṃ duḥkhaṃ sevanāt lokānāṃ rāti gṛhṇāti nāśayatīti; rā-ka Tv.)

akaraṇam [kṛ-bhāve lyuṭ na. ta.] Not doing, absence of action; akaraṇāt maṃdakaraṇaṃ śreyaḥ; cf. the English phrases "Something is better than nothing," "Better late than never". --ṇa a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Not artificial, natural. --2. Devoid of all organs, epithet of the Supreme Spirit.

akaraṇiḥ f. [nañ-kṛ-ākrośe aniḥ; ākrośe nañi aniḥ P. III. 3. 112.] Failure, disappointment, non-accomplishment, mostly used in imprecations; tasyākaraṇirevāstu Sk. may he be disappointed, or experience a failure!

akarṇa a. [nāsti karṇo yasya]
     (1) Devoid of ears; deaf.
     (2) Destitute of Karṇa; anarjunamakarṇaṃ vājagadadyeti niścitaḥ Mb. --rṇaḥ A serpent (tasya cakṣuṣaiva śravaṇāt, hence also called cakṣuḥśravāḥ)

akarṇya a. [na. ta.] Not fit for the ears; not in the ears.

akartana a. [kṛt-bhāve lyuṭ na. ta.]
     (1) Not cutting.
     (2) [kṛt-yuc na. ba.; uccasthaṃ phalaṃ kartituṃ śīlamasya Tv.] Dwarfish.

akartṛ m. [na. ta.] Not an agent; akartari ca kārake P. III. 3. 19; puruṣo'kartā bhoktā Sāṅkhya; a subordinate agent; -tvaṃ-tā an inferior or subordinate position.

akarman a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Without work, idle; inefficient.
     (2) Disqualified for performing the necessary rites, wicked, degraded; akarmā dasyurabhi no Rv. 10. 22. 8.
     (3) (Gram.) Intransitive, generally in this sense akarmaka. --n. (rma).
     (1) Absence of work; absence of necessary observances; neglect of essential observances; inaction; karmaṇo hyapi boddhavyaṃ boddhavyaṃ ca vikarmaṇaḥ . akarmaṇaśca boddhavyaṃ gahanā karmaṇo gatiḥ Bg. 4. 17, 18.
     (2) An improper act; crime, sin.
     -- Comp.
          --anvita a. 1. unengaged, unoccupied, idle. 2. criminal.
          --kṛt a. free from action, or doing an improper act.
          --bhogaḥ 1. enjoyment of freedom from the fruits of action. 2. renunciation of self-righteousness.
          --śīla a. lazy, indolent.

akarmaka a. [nāsti karma yasya ba. kap] Intransitive; phalavyāpārayorekaniṣṭhatāyāmakarmakaḥ Hari; (f) akarmikā; prasiddheravivakṣātaḥ karmaṇo'karmikā kriyā ibid.

akarmaṇya a. [na. ta.]
     (1) Unable to work, inefficient, unfit for work.
     (2) Unfit to be done.

akala a. [nāsti kalā avayavo yasya] Not in parts, without parts, epithet of the Supreme Spirit.

akalka a. [nāsti kalko yatra]
     (1) Free from sediment, pure.
     (2) Sinless. --lkā Moonlight.

akalkatā Honesty, integrity.

akalkana --ka a. [nāsti kalkanaṃ daṃbhaḥ, kalko vā yasmin] Free from pride, humble, modest; honest.

akalpa a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Uncontrolled, not subject to control or rules, unrestrained, unfettered.
     (2) Weak, unable.
     (3) Incomparable.

akalpita a. [na. ta.] Not artificial or manufactured; natural, genuine.

akalya a. [kalāsu sādhuḥ kalyaḥ nirāmayaḥ na. ta.]
     (1) Unwell, ill, indisposed.
     (2) [kalyate iti kal-yat kalyaṃ mithyābhūtaṃ; na. ta.] True; (taṃ) anīnayadakalyasaṃdho baṃdhanāgāraṃ Dk. 31.

akalyāṇa a. [na. ta.] Inauspicious, unlucky. --ṇaṃ Inauspiciousness, ill, evil, adversity.

akava --vā a. [na kavyate varṇyate; kav-ā na. ta.] Indescribable (avarṇanīya); not contemptible, not bad; -ariḥ = kutsitā arayo yasya sa kavāriḥ; na kavāriḥ a-; or yasya śatravopyakutsitā vṛtrādayaḥ; or akutsitaṃ iyati aiśvaryaṃ prāpnoti.

akavi a. Ved. Unwise, foolish.

akasmāt ind. [na kasmāt kiṃcitkāraṇādhīnatvaṃ yatra aluk sa.]
     (1) Accidentally, suddenly, unexpectedly, all of a sudden; akasmādāgaṃtunā saha viśvāso na yuktaḥ H. 1 coming by chance, an accidental visitor.
     (2) Without cause or ground, causelessly, in vain; nākasmāt śāṃḍilī mātā vikrīṇāti tilaistilān Pt. 2. 65; -deva bhartṛdveṣyatāṃ gatāsi Dk. 135; nākasmādapriyaṃ vadet Y. 1. 132; atha nu ripurakasmād dveṣṭi naḥ putrabhāṃḍe Mv. 2. 44; kathaṃ tvāṃ tyajedakasmātpatirāryavṛttaḥ R. 14. 55, 73.

akāṃḍa a. [nāsti kāṃḍaṃ avasaraḥ ucitakālaḥ yasya]
     (1) Accidental, untoward, unexpected, sudden; akāṃḍapāṃḍuraghanapraspardhi Mv. 5. 39 out of season; punarakāṃḍavivartanadāruṇaḥ U. 4. 15; -pracaṃḍakalahayoḥ U. 6; patatu śirasyakāṃḍayamadaṃḍa ivaiṣa bhujaḥ Mal. 5. 31; -bhaṃguratāṃ saṃsārasukhānāṃ K. 172.
     (2) Destitute of stem or stock.
     -- Comp.
          --jāta a. Suddenly born or produced.
          --pātaḥ unexpected occurrence; -upanatā kaṃ na lakṣmīrvimohayet Ks. 5. 2.
          --pātajāta a. dying as soon as born; perishing soon after birth H. 4. 83.
          --śūlaṃ a sudden attack of colic.

akāṃḍe adv. Unexpectedly, all of a sudden, suddenly; darbhāṃkureṇa caraṇaḥ kṣata ityakāṃḍe tanvī sthitā katicideva padāni gatvā S. 2. 12; lajjāṃ vijitya vinayaṃ vinivārya dhairyamunmathya mathaṃravivekamakāṃḍa eva Mal. 1. 18 unexpectedly; tātastu tamakāṃḍa eva prāṇaharamapratikāramupaplavamālokya K. 33.

akāma a. [nāsti kāmo yasya]
     (1) Free from desire, affection, love; akāmasya kriyā kāciddṛśyate neha karhicit Ms. 2. 4 every thing is an act of his will.
     (2) Reluctant, unwilling; -māṃ kanyāṃ 4. 364; so nākāmo dātumarhati.
     (3) Uninfluenced by, not subject to, love; bhayādakāmāpi hi dṛṣṭivibhramaṃ S. 1. 23.
     (4) Unconscious, unintentional; akāmopanateneva sādhorhṛdayamenasā R. 10. 39 unconsciously committed.
     (5) The Sandhi which causes the dropping of a final r before a following r.
     -- Comp.
          --karśana a. Ved. not frustrating desires.
          --hata a. not smitten with desire or affection, free from desire, calm.

akāmataḥ adv. [akāma-paṃcamyāstasil] Unwillingly, reluctantly, unintentionally, unconsciously; itare kṛtavaṃtastu pāpānyetānyakāmataḥ Ms. 9. 242; akāmataḥ kṛtaṃ pāpaṃ vedābhyāsena śudhyati 11. 46, 45.

akāmatā Absence of desire; na caivehāstyakāmatā Ms. 2. 2.

akāya a. [nāsti kāyo yasya]
     (1) Without body, incorporeal.
     (2) An epithet of Rāhu, who is represented as having no body, but only a head.
     (3) Epithet of the Supreme Spirit (without body, parts &c.)

akāra a. [karotīti kāraḥ kṛ-ghañ aṇ vā na. ta.] Not doing or acting, void of action (kriyārahita). --raḥ The letter a; akṣarāṇāmakārosmi Bg. 10. 33.

akāraṇa a. [na. ba.] Causeless, groundless, spontaneous; -mitrāṇi satāṃ cetāṃsi K. 37 disinterested friends; īdṛśo māṃ pratyamīṣāṃ -snehaḥ U. 6. --ṇaṃ Absence of a cause, motive, or ground; akāraṇāt parityajya K. 167 causelessly, without cause or ground; kimakāraṇameva darśanaṃ vilapaṃtyai rataye na dīyate Ku. 4. 7; -parityaktā mātāpitrorgurostathā Ms. 3. 157; akāraṇāt-raṇaṃ-ṇe causelessly, in vain; tyakto vā syādakāraṇāt Ms. 9. 177; kimakāraṇe kupyāsi, akāraṇe ātmānamāyāsayasi Ratn. 2 in vain.

akārṇaveṣṭakika a. Not adapted for ear-rings (P. VI. 2. 155).

akārpaṇya a. [na. ba.] Got without meanness; akārpaṇyamaśanaṃ Bh. 3. 51.

akārya a. [na. ta.] Improper, not fit to be done. --ryaṃ An improper, unworthy or bad act, a criminal or sinful action; mā nāma vaiklavyādakāryaṃ kuryāt Mk. 3 (ātmaghātādirūpaṃ).
     -- Comp.
          --kārin a. 1. an evil-doer, one who commits a misdeed; mahāpātakinaścaiva śeṣāścākāryakāriṇaḥ Ms. 11. 240. 2. one that neglects one's duty; dānenākāryakāriṇaḥ (śudhyaṃti) 5. 107.

akāla a. [nāsti ucitaḥ kālo yasya]
     (1) Untimely, premature, inopportune, unseasonable, out of season; na prajāsu -mṛtyuścarati U. 2, R. 15. 44; -mṛtyu haraṇaṃ ... auṣadhaṃ jāhnavītoyaṃ; -vātāvalī Ratn. 3.
     (2) [na kāṃlaḥ] Not black, white. --laḥ [na. ta.] Wrong, inauspicious or unseasonable time, not the proper time (for any thing); -laḥ svabalapradhānavirodhasya Ve. 3; -laḥ kulajanasya nivartituṃ Mu. 7; akāle bodhito bhrātā R. 12. 81 at an improper time; atyārūḍho hi nārīṇāmakālajño manobhavaḥ 12. 33 takes no account of proper or improper time; akāle vīkṣito viṣṇurhaṃti puṇyaṃ purākṛtaṃ; nākāle mriyate kāścit prāpte kāle na jīvati; nākāle mriyate jaṃtuḥ H. 1. 17 does not die a premature death; kāle prāptastvakāle vā nāsyānaśnan gṛhe vaset Ms. 3. 105 in season or out of season.
     -- Comp.
          --kusumaṃ, -puṣpaṃ a flower blossoming out of season; -kusumānīva bhayaṃ saṃjanayaṃti hi H. 3. 23, a bad omen boding some evil.
          --kūṣmāṃḍaḥ a pumpkin produced out of season; (fig.) useless birth.
          --ja, --utpanna, --jāta a. produced out of season, premature; unseasonable.
          --jaladaḥ an untimely cloud; N. of the great-grandfather of the poet Rājaśekhara.
          --jaladodayaḥ, --meghodayaḥ an unseasonable rise or gathering of clouds; bālātapamivābjānāmakālajaladodayaḥ R. 4. 61. 2. mist or fog.
          --velā unseasonable or improper time.
          --saha a. 1. not enduring delay or loss of time, impatient, not biding one's time. 2. not able to hold out (for a long time), unable to stand a protracted siege (as a durga) H. 3. 137.

akiṃcana a. [nāsti kiṃcana yasya] Without any thing, quite poor, utterly destitute, indigent, penniless; akiṃcanaḥ san prabhavaḥ sa saṃpadāṃ Ku. 5. 77; na dvaṃdvaduḥkhamiha kiṃcidakiṃcanoṃpi Śi. 4. 64 disinterested. --naṃ That which is worth nothing.

akiṃcanatā Renunciation of every thing, voluntary poverty (saṃnyāsāṃgaṃ yamaviśeṣaḥ); vrataṃ dānaṃ parivrajyā tapasyā niyamasthitiḥ . ahiṃsāsūyatāsteyabrahmākiṃcanatā yamaḥ .. -tvaṃ Poverty; akiṃcanatvaṃ makhajaṃ vyanakti R. 5. 16.

akiṃcaniman m. [pṛthvādigaṇa] Poverty, utter destitution.

akiṃcijjña a. Not knowing anything, quite ignorant; yadā 'kiṃcijjñohaṃ dvipa iva madāṃdhaḥ samabhavaṃ Bh. 2. 8.

akiṃcitkara a. Not productive of anything, useless, immaterial; -ronyatra paṃcaśaropi sa eva K. 242 powerless to do anything; parataṃtramidamakiṃcitkaraṃ ca Ve. 3.

akīrtiḥ [apraśastā kīrtiḥ na. ta.] Infamy, ill-repute, disgrace.

akuṃṭha a. [na. ta.]
     (1) Not blunted, unobstructed; āśastragrahaṇādakuṃṭhaparaśoḥ Ve. 2. 2.
     (2) Vigorous, able to work. --3. Fixed; -dhiṣṇyaṃ Heaven.

akuṃṭhita a. Not blunted; śāstreṣvakuṃṭhitā buddhiḥ R. 1. 19 penetrating all sciences; bibhratostramacalepyakuṃṭhitaṃ 11. 74 taking effect on, prevailing against, even mountains.

akutaḥ adv. [na kutaḥ na. ta.] Not from any where (in comp. only).
     -- Comp.
          --calaḥ N. of Śiva (not moveable from any cause).
          --bhaya a [nāsti kutopi bhayaṃ yasya] Secure, not threatened from any quarter, free from danger or fear, safe; mādṛśānāmapi -yaḥ saṃcāro jātaḥ U. 2; yāni trīṇyakutobhayāni ca padānyāsankharāyodhane v. l. for aparāṅmukhāṇi 5. 35. akutāścidbhaya also in the same sense.

akudhryaṃc a. Ved. Fruitless, worthless (etym. doubtful).

akupyam [na kupyaṃ na. ta.]
     (1) Not a base metal, gold or silver; akupyaṃ vasu Ki. 1. 35 gold or silver.
     (2) Any base metal.

akula a. [apraśastaṃ kulaṃ yasya] Low, mean, of a low family. --laḥ --laṃ akulaṃ śiva ityuktaḥ kulaṃ śaktiḥ prakīrtitā N. of Śiva. --lā N. of Pārvatī.

akulīna a. [na. ta.]
     (1) Low-born, of no high descent.
     (2) Not belonging to the earth, not earthly; divyayoṣitamiva akulīnāṃ K. 11 (a pun on the word; na kau pṛthvyāṃ līnā sthitā).

akuśala a. [na. ta.] 1. Inauspicious, evil; unlucky, unfortunate.
     (2) Not clever or skilful. --laM Evil; sa snigdho'kuśalānnivārayati yaḥ H. 2. 141 guards from evils.

akuha a. [na. ta.] One who does not cheat, an honest man.

akūpāra a.
     (1) Resulting in good, having a good issue.
     (2) Unlimited, unbounded. --raḥ [na kuṃ pṛthvīṃ piparti; pṛ-aṇ bā - dīrghaḥ; na kutsitaṃ pāraṃ gaṃtavyadeśo yasya vā, pṛṣo. dīrghaḥ]
     (1) The sea, the receptacle of waters (samudropyakūpāra ucyate akūpāro bhavati mahāpāraḥ Nir.)
     (2) The sun (ādityopyakūpāra ucyate akūpāro bhavati dūrapāraḥ.)
     (3) A tortoise in general (na kūpamṛcchāti).
     (4) King of tortoises sustaining the world.
     (5) A stone or rock.

akūvāra = akūpāra above.

akūrca a. [nāsti kūrcaṃ yasya]
     (1) Not deceitful.
     (2) Bald; beardless. --rcaḥ Buddha; a deified saint.

akṛcchra a. [na. ba.] Free from difficulty. --cchraṃ Absence of difficulty, ease, facility.

akṛta a. [kṛ-karmaṇi ktaḥ, na. ta.]
     (1) Not done; undone; unperformed; sarvān balakṛtānarthānakṛtān manurabravīt Ms. 8. 168; kṛtaṃ cāpyakṛtaṃ bhavet 117
     (2) Wrongly or differently done; kṛtākṛtāvekṣaṇādau brahmā ṛtvik niyujyate iti yājñikāḥ.
     (3) Incomplete, not ready (as food); akṛtaṃ ca kṛtātkṣetrāt (adoṣavat) Ms. 10. 114 not cultivated (anuptaśasyaṃ Kull.); kṛtānnaṃ cākṛtānnena (nirmātavyaṃ) 10. 94 (siddhānnaṃ cāmānnena Kull.)
     (4) Uncreated.
     (5) One who has done no works.
     (6) Not developed or perfected, unripe, immature. --tā One not legally regarded as a daughter and placed on a level with sons, (putrikātvena akalpitā); akṛtā vā kṛtā vāpi yaṃ viṃdetsadṛśātsutaṃ Ms. 9. 136; according to some, a daughter who is not by a formal declaration but only mentally appointed to supply an heir for her father (abhisaṃdhimātrakṛtā vāgvyavahāreṇa kṛtā; kṛtā = yadapatyaṃ bhavedasyāṃ tanmamaṃ syātsvadhākaraṃ ityābhidhāya kanyādānakāle varānumatyā yā kriyate Kull.). --taṃ An unperformed act; non-performance of an act; an unheard-of deed; akṛtaṃ vai prajāpatiḥ karoti Ait. Br.
     -- Comp.
          --artha a. unsuccessful.
          --astra a. unpractised in arms.
          --ātman a. 1. ignorant, foolish, having an unformed mind. 2. not identified with Brahmā or the Supreme Spirit.
          --udvāha a. unmarried.
          --enas a. not sinful or guilty, innocent.
          --kāraṃ adv. as has not been done before; -raṃ karoti P. III. 4. 36.
          --jña a. ungrateful.
          --dhī, --buddhi a. ignorant; -ddhitvāt Bg. 18. 16 through unrefined understanding.

akṛtin a. [na. ta.] Not skilful or clever, clumsy, awkward; unfit for doing anything.

akṛtya a. Unfit to be done. --tyaṃ A crime, an improper act.

akṛtta a. [na. ta.] Uncut, undiminished or unimpaired; -ruc of unimpaired splendour.

akṛśa a. [na. ta] Not slender or weak, full, entire, strong.
     -- Comp.
          --aśvaḥ N. of a king of Ayodhyā.
          --lakṣmī a. enjoying full prosperity;
          --kṣmīḥ great splendour or prosperity Ki. 5. 52.

akṛṣṭa a. [na. ta.] Not tilled; not drawn.
     -- Comp.
          --pacya a. [akṛṣṭe kṣetre pacyate] growing or ripening in unploughed land, growing exuberant or wild; -cyā iva śasyasaṃpadaḥ Ki. 1. 17; so -cyā oṣadhayaḥ, -cyaṃ aśanaṃ, dhānyaṃ &c.
          --rohin = -pacya; bījaṃ ca bāleyamakṛṣṭarohi R. 14. 77.

akṛṣṇa a. [na. ta.] Not black, white, pure. --ṣṇaḥ [nāsti kṛṣṇo malo yasya] The spotless moon; caṃdramā vai brahmā 'kṛṣṇaḥ iti śrutiḥ.
     -- Comp.
          --karman a. virtuous, free from black deeds, innocent.

aketu a. [nāsti ketuścihnaṃ yasya] Unconscious (ajñāna); ketuṃ kṛṇvannaketave Rv. 1. 6. 3. (ajñānāya); shapeless (?)

akeśa a. [avidyamānāḥ, alpāḥ, apraśastā vā keśā yasya] Hairless, bald; having very few or very bad hair.

akoṭaḥ [na kuṭati vakrībhavati skaṃdhādiṣu] The betelnut palm, Areca (without a koṭa or bend, as it grows with a straight stem).

akkā [ak-ka, acyate ityak, aṃc kvip gatiḥ tasyai kāyati, kai-ka vā Tv.] A mother.

akta See under añj.

aktuḥ m. f. Ved. [aṃj gatau ktu]
     (1) Night; darkness, gloom.
     (2) Light, ray.
     (3) Ointment.

aktram [aṃj-bā -ktra] An armour (varman)

akra a. Ved. [aṃc gatau-rak]
     (1) Inactive, steady, firm (sthira).
     (2) Bootless, profitless. --kraH A fortification or rampart (prākāra); banner (?).

akratu a. [nāsti kraturyasya]
     (1) Without sacrifices; devoid of energy, powerless; unwise.
     (2) Devoid of will or volition (saṃkalparahita) epithet of God.

akrama a. [nāsti kramaḥ pādaḥ kramaṇaṃ vā yasya]
     (1) Devoid of order, confused.
     (2) Without the power of going or moving (pādaśūnya, ākramaṇaśūnya). --maḥ
     (1) Want of order, confusion, irregularity (kramābhāvaḥ)
     (2) Absence of motion or movement.
     (3) Breach of propriety or decorum; kamakramaṃ kartumabhūdapekṣā vailakṣyabhājāṃ na mahīpatīnāṃ Vikr. 10. 3; kanyāṃtaḥpuramakramāt praviśatā Mv. 2. 50 indecently, immodestly; valīmukhacakramakramamuccalitaṃ Mv. 6. in disorder.

akrāṃta a. [na. ta.] Unsurpassed; unconquered. --tā [na kramyate kaṃṭakāvṛtatvāt kram-kta, na. ta.] The egg plant (bṛhatī), Solanum Melongena.

akriya a. [nāsti kriyā yasya na. ba.]
     (1) Inactive, dull, torpid.
     (2) Without essential works.
     (3) Abstaining from religious rites.
     (4) Without action of any kind, epithet of God.
     (5) Worthless, good for nothing. --yā [na. ta] Inactivity; neglect of duty; pradhānasyākriyā yatra sāṃgaṃ tatkriyate punaḥ . tadaṃgasyākriyāyāṃ tu nāvṛttirna ca tatkriyā ..

akrūra a. [na. ta.] Not cruel. --raḥ N. of a Yādava, a friend and uncle of Kṛṣṇa. [It was he who induced Rāma and Kṛṣṇa to go to Mathurā and kill Kamsa. He told the two brothers how their father Ānaka-Dundubhi, the princess Devakī and even his own father Ugrasena had been insulted by the iniquitous demon Kamsa, and told them why he had been despatched to them. Kṛṣṇa consented to go and promised to slay the demon within 3 nights, which he succeeded in doing.]

akrodha a. [nāsti krodho yasya] Free from anger. --dhaḥ [na. ta.] Absence or suppression of anger; akrodhastapasaḥ (vibhūṣaṇaṃ) Bh. 2. 82; regarded as one of the ten duties of an ascetic.

akrodhana a. Free from anger. --naḥ N. of a prince, son of Ayutāyu.

aklikā the Indigo plant.

aklinna a. Not wet or moist; -vartman a sort of disease of the eyes.

akliṣṭa a. [na. ta.]
     (1) Unwearied, untroubled, not annoyed, undisturbed, indefatigable.
     (2) Not marred, unimpaired,; idamupanatamevaṃ rūpamakliṣṭakāṃti S. 5. 19 of unimpaired or unblemished beauty; anyathā kathamiyaṃ -tā lāvaṇyasya K. 12 unmarred state, perfection.
     (3) Not laboured or elaborate.
     -- Comp.
          --karman, -kārin a. unwearied in actions.
          --varṇa a. not confused, distinct; -rṇāṃ gamanābhyanujñāṃ K. 293 given in plain, distinct terms (of unfaded colour).
          --vrata a. not swerving from religious vows, unwearied in observing them.

akṣ 1. 5. P. [akṣati, akṣṇoti, ānakṣa, ākṣiṣyati-akṣyati, ākṣīt, akṣituṃ-aṣṭuṃ akṣitvā-aṣṭravā, aṣṭa]
     (1) To reach.
     (2) To pass through, pervade, penetrate (mostly Ved. in these senses).
     (3) To accumulate, increase. --Caus. To cause to pervade.

akṣaḥ [aś-saḥ]
     (1) An axis, axle, pivot; -bhaṃge Ms. 8. 291; dṛḍhadhūḥ akṣaḥ P. V. 4. 74; Śi. 12. 2, 18. 7; jyotiścakrākṣadaṃḍaḥ Dk. 1 axle-pole.
     (2) The pole of a cart.
     (3) A cart, car; also a wheel.
     (4) The beam of a balance.
     (5) Terrestrial latitude.
     (6) A die for playing with; cube.
     (7) The seed of which rosaries are made.
     (8) A weight equal to 16 māṣas and called karṣa.
     (9) N. of the plant Terminalia Belerica (bibhītaka) the seed of which is used as a die; also the nut of this plant; yathā vai dve vāmalake dve vā kole dvau vākṣau muṣṭiranubhavati Chan. Up; so dhārābhirakṣamātrābhiḥ. (10) A shrub producing the rosary seed, Eleocarpus Ganitrus; the seed of this plant, as also of another plant (iṃdrākṣa).
     (11) A serpent; hence a curve.
     (12) Garuda.
     (13) N. of a son of Rāvaṇa.
     (14) The soul.
     (15) Knowledge (usually, sacred).
     (16) Law; a lawsuit; legal procedure.
     (17) A person born blind.
     (18) The lower part of the temples (karṇanetrayormadhye śaṃkhādadhobhāgaḥ). --kṣaṃ (aśnute vyāpnoti viṣayān svavṛttyā saṃyogena vā)
     (1) An organ of sense; nirodhāccetaso'kṣāṇi niruddhānyakhilānyapi Pt. 2. 154; an object of sense; m. also niyacchedviṣayebhyokṣān Bhāg.
     (2) The eye, only at the end of Comp.; jalajākṣa, kamalākṣa, &c.
     (3) Sochal salt, sea-salt.
     (4) Blue vitriol (from it crystallized shape). [cf. L. axis; Gr. akshon or axon, old Germ. ahsa; Germ. achse].
     -- Comp.
          --agraṃ the axle or its end; the anterior end of the pole of a car.
          --agrakīlaḥ --lakaḥ a linch-pin, a pin which fastens the yoke to the pole.
          --āvapanaṃ [akṣān pāśān āvapati kṣipatyasmin; ā-vap-ādhāre lyuṭ] a dice-board (akṣā upyaṃtesminniti akṣāvapanaṃ akṣasthānāvapanapātraṃsāyaṇa). --āvāpaḥ [akṣān āvapati kṣipati; āvap-aṇ] a gambler, keeper of the dice or gambling table; also -ativāpaḥ (akṣāvāpo nāma akṣāṇāṃ kṣeptā akṣagoptā vā dyūtakāraḥ). --karṇaḥ hypotenuse, particularly of the triangle formed with the gnomon of a dial and its shadow; (astr.) argument of the latitude.
          --kuśala, -śauṃḍa a. [sa. ta.] skilful in gambling.
          --kūṭaḥ [akṣasya kūṭa iva] the pupil of the eye.
          --kovida, --jña a. skilled in dice; so -vid, -vettṛ &c.
          --kṣetraṃ [akṣanimittaṃ kṣetraṃ] an astronomical figure (akṣasādhanārthaṃ kṣetratayā kalpitānāṃ akṣabhavānāmaṣṭānāṃ kṣetrāṇāmekaṃ). --glahaḥ [tṛ. ta.] gambling, playing at dice.
          --cakraṃ the circle of sensual passions; dṛḍhaniyamita -kraḥ K. 37 (also axis and wheels).
          --jaṃ [akṣāt jāyate; jan-ḍa] 1 direct knowledge or cognition. 2. a thunderbolt (vajraṃ asthirūpāvayavajātatvāttasya tannāmatvaṃ). 3. a diamond. 4. akṣakṣetraṃ q. v. (m. in some of these senses).
          --jaḥ N. of Viṣṇu.
          --tattvaṃ, -vidyā the science of gambling; -vida skilled in the principles of gambling.
          --darśakaḥ, --dṛś [akṣāṇāṃ ṛṇādānādivyavahārāṇāṃ darśakaḥ dṛś-ṇvul, akṣān paśyatīti dṛś kvip kutvaṃ] 1. a judge (one who tries law-suits). 2. a superintendent of gambling.
          --devin m. [akṣairdīvyati, div-ṇini] a gambler, gamester; so akṣadyūḥ, div-kvip ūṭh P. VI. 4. 19.
          --ṭhyūtaḥ [akṣairṭhyūtaṃ yasya] a gambler, dicer.
          --taṃ dice play, gambling; -tādigaṇaḥ a class of words mentioned in P. IV. 4. 19.
          --dyūtikaṃ [akṣaṭhyūta-ṭhak] dispute at play.
          --drugdha a. [akṣaiḥ drugdhaḥ] unlucky at dice (opposed to akṣapriya fond of dice, or lucky in gambling).
          --dharaḥ [akṣaṃ cakraṃ rathāvayavaṃ tatkīlakamiva kaṃṭakaṃ vā dharatīti; dhṛacṣa. ta.] 1. N. of Viṣṇu. 2. N. of the plant (śākhoṭa) Trophis Aspera. 3. a wheel. 4. any one who bears a wheel, or who holds dice.
          --dhūḥ (dhur) the yoke attached to the fore-part of the pole of a car.
          --dhūrtaḥ [akṣe taddevane dhūrtaḥ] 'dice-rogue,' a gamester, a gambler.
          --dhūrtilaḥ [akṣasya śakaṭasya dhūrtiṃ bhāraṃ lāti, lā-ka; or akṣa-dhur tilapratyayaḥ] a bull or ox yoked to the pole of a cart.
          --paṭala [ṣa. ta.] 1. a court of law. 2. depository of legal documents. 3. = akṣipaṭalaṃ, q. v.
          --laḥ [akṣāṇāṃ vyavahārāṇāṃ paṭalamastyasya ac] a judge.
          --pari ind. [akṣeṇa viparītaṃ vṛttaṃ P. II. 1. 10 ṭhyūtavyavahāre parājaye evāyaṃ samāsaḥ si. kau.] so as to be a loser (by an unlucky throw of dice) (pāśakakrīḍāyāṃ yathā guṭikāpāte jayo bhavati tadviparītapātaḥ Tv.)
          --pāṭaḥ = -vāṭaḥ, q. v.
          --pāṭakaḥ [akṣe vyavahāre pāṭayati; paṭ dīptau-ṇvul] one who is well-versed in law, a judge.
          --pātaḥ [ṣa. ta.] cast of dice.
          --pādaḥ N. of the sage Gautama, founder of the Nyāya system of philosophy, or a follower of that system (akṣaṃ netraṃ darśanasādhanatayā jātaḥ pādo 'sya; akṣapādo hi svamatadūṣakasya vyāsasya mukhadarśanaṃ cakṣuṣā na kartavyaṃ iti pratijñāya paścāt vyāsena prasāditaḥ pāde netraṃ prakāśya taṃ dṛṣṭavān iti prasiddhiḥ Tv.)
          --pīḍā [ṣa. ta.] 1. injury to the organs. 2. [akṣaṃ iṃdriyarasanārūpaṃ pīḍayati āsvādanāt; pīḍac] N. of the plant yavatiktā. --bhāgaḥ (-aṃśaḥ) a degree of latitude.
          --bhāraḥ [ṣa. ta.] a cart-load.
          --madaḥ [ca. ta.] mad passion for gambling.
          --mātraṃ [akṣo mātrā yasya] 1. any thing as large as dice; dice. 2. a moment of time (nimiṣaḥ), twinkling of an eye.
          --mālā, -sūtraṃ [akṣāṇāṃ mālā-sūtraṃ] a rosary, string of beads (akārādikṣakārāṃtaḥ akṣaḥ tatkṛtā tatpratinidhibhūtāvā mālā); kṛtokṣasūtrapraṇayī tayā karaḥ Ku. 5. 11, 6. 6; -mālāmupayācitumāgatosmi K. 151. It is made of rudrākṣa seeds, corals, crystals, rubies, gems &c. 2. N. of aruṃdhatī; akṣamālā vaśiṣṭhena saṃyuktādhamayonijā jagāmābhyarhaṇīyatāṃ Ms. 9. 23 (akṣasya nakṣatracakrasya māleva bhūṣaṇatvāt; sā hi uttarasyāṃdiśi gagane saptarṣimaṃḍale mālārūpeṇa vasiṣṭhasamīpe vartate sarvebhyaśca ujjvalatvāttasyā mālārūpeṇa sthitatvācca nakṣatracakrabhūṣaṇatvaṃ Tv).
          --rājaḥ [akṣāṇāṃ rājeva] one addicted to gambling.
          --vāmaḥ [sa. ta.] an unfair gambler.
          --vāṭaḥ [akṣāṇāṃ pāśakakrīḍānāṃ vāṭaḥ vāsasthānaṃ] 1. a gambling house; the gambling table. 2. [akṣasya rathacakrasya kṣuṇṇasthānasya iva vāṭaḥ] a place of contest, arena, wrestling ground (tatra hi rathacakrakṣuṇṇapāṃśusadṛśapāṃśumattvāt tatsadṛśatvaṃ Tv.)
          --vṛtta a. [akṣe vṛttaḥ vyāpṛtaḥ sa. ta.] engaged in, addicted to, gambling; what has occurred in gambling.
          --ttaṃ rāśicakrarūpaṃ vṛttakṣetraṃ the zodiacal circle.
          --stuṣaḥ Beleric Myrobalan.
          --hṛdayaṃ perfect skill in, or conversancy with, gambling (lit. the heart or innermost nature of dice or gambling); vaśīkṛtākṣahṛdayāṃ K. 131.

akṣakaḥ [akṣa iva kāyati, kai-ka.] N. of a tree tiniśa.

akṣavatī [akṣāḥ sādhanatvena yasyāṃ; akṣamatup] Gaming, playing with dice, a game at dice.

akṣānah n. [akṣe cakre ānadyate badhyate; ānah-kvip] A kind or part of wood relating to a wheel (cakrasaṃbāṃdhikāṣṭhabhedaḥ); tied to the cart or its pole (?).

akṣaṇa a. [nāsti kṣaṇo yogyakālo yasya] Inopportune, unseasonable.

akṣaṇika a. [na. ta.] Steady, firm, not frail or transitory; steadfast (as gaze or look).

akṣaṇvat a. [akṣa asyāsti, akṣan matup, masya vaḥ P. VIII. 2. 16, annaṃtānmatornuṭ syāt Sk.] Having eyes; akṣaṇvaṃtaḥ karṇavaṃtaḥ Rv. 10. 71. 7.

akṣata a. [na. ta.]
     (1) (a.) Uninjured, unhurt; tvamanaṃgaḥ kathamakṣatā ratiḥ Ku. 4. 9; -vigrahā vāhāḥ Dk. 3; paṃcākṣatāste vayaṃ Ve. 6. 43, 4. 4, Mu. 6. 8, R. 2. 56. (b.) Unbroken, whole; not crushed, undivided; mama nāsikāmakṣatāṃ kurvaṃtu Pt. 1, -saktūnāṃ navaṃ kalaśaṃ pūrayitvā Asvalāyana. --taḥ 1. Śiva.
     (2) Thrashed and winnowed rice dried in the sun; (pl.) whole grain, entire unhusked and pounded rice washed with water, and used as an article of worship in all religious and sacred ceremonies; akṣatāḥ pāṃtu pāṃtvakṣatāḥ iti śrāddhamaṃtraḥ; akṣatairnārcayedviṣṇuṃ na tulasyā vināyakaṃ iti taṃtraṃ; sākṣatapātrahastā R. 2. 21, ārdrākṣatāropaṇamanvabhūtāṃ 7. 28.
     (3) Barley (yavāḥ); akṣatāśca yavāḥ proktāḥ; said to be also n. (dūrvākṣatāni). --taṃ
     (1) Corn, grain of any kind.
     (2) Absence of loss or ruin; good, well-being; akṣataṃ cāriṣṭaṃ cāstu iti śrāddhamaṃtraḥ.
     (3) Eunuch (also m.). --tā A virgin, a maiden not deflowered, blemished or enjoyed; akṣatā vā kṣatā vāpi.
     (2) N. of a plant karkaṭaśṛṃgī.
     -- Comp.
          --yoniḥ a virgin, not yet blemished by sexual intercourse; sā cedakṣatayoniḥ syāt Ms. 9. 176; patnīṣvakṣatayoniṣu 10. 5.

akṣatra a. [nāsti kṣatraṃ kṣatriyatvaṃ kṣatriyā jātirvā yatra, na. ba.] Devoid of the Kshatriya caste; nābrahṃa kṣatramṛdhnoti nākṣatraṃ brahma vardhate Ms. 9. 322.

akṣan n. [akṣ-bāhu -kanin] The eye (Ved.); bhadraṃ paśyemākṣabhiryajatrāḥ Rv. 1. 89. 8; dakṣiṇe'kṣan Br. Ar. Up. In classical literature used only in the declension of akṣi.

akṣama a. [na. ta.]
     (1) Unfit, incompetent, unable; kārya, -palāyana-, upavāsa- &c.
     (2) Unable to bear or endure, not forbearing, non-forbearing; impatient; -mā kālaharaṇasya S. 3 unable to brook delay, admitting of no delay; māmakṣamaṃ maṃḍanakālahāneḥ R. 13. 16. --mā [na. ta]
     (1) Impatience, intolerance; envy, jealousy; dhāvaṃtyamī mṛgajavākṣamayeva rathyāḥ S. 1. 8 as if envying (jealous of) the deer's speed.
     (2) Anger, passion.

akṣaya a. [nāsti kṣayo yasya]
     (1) Undecaying, exempt from decay, imperishable, undying, unfailing, inexhaustible; sadopayogepi gurustvamakṣayonidhiḥ Śi. 1. 28; sa saṃdhāryaḥ prayatnena svargamakṣayamicchatā Ms. 3. 79; yajñanirvṛtimakṣayāṃ 4. 23; gayāyāmakṣayavaṭe pitṝṇāṃ dattamakṣayaṃ Vāyu; trisādhanā śaktirivārthamakṣayaṃ R. 3. 13.
     (2) Poor, without house or habitation, such as a hermit or saṃnyāsin (kṣayovāsaḥtacchūnyaḥaniketanaḥsaṃnyāsī daridrovā. --yaḥ
     (1) The Supreme Spirit paramātman.
     (2) N. of the 20th year in the cycle of Jupiter. --yā [akṣayaṃ puṇyaṃ yatrāsti-ac] N. of a day which is said to confer undying religious merit; amaiva somavāreṇa ravivāreṇa saptamī . caturthī bhaumavāreṇa akṣayādapi cākṣayā ..
     -- Comp.
          --guṇaḥ, --puruhūtaḥ Śiva (possessing imperishable qualities).
          --tṛtīyā the festival falling on the third day of the bright half of Vaiśākha (the first day of satyayuga) which is said to secure permanence to all actions performed on that day (vaiśākhe māsi rājeṃdra śuklapakṣe tṛtīyikā . akṣayā sā tithiḥ proktā kṛttikārohiṇīyutā .. tasyāṃ dānādikaṃ sarvamakṣayaṃ samudāhṛtaṃ). --lokaḥ the heaven.

akṣayālalitā N. of a festival observed by women on the 7th day of the dark half of Bhādra (?).

akṣayiṇī Pārvatī.

akṣayya a. [kṣetuṃ śakyaṃ; kṣi-yat; na. ta.] That which cannot decay, imperishable; tapaḥṣaḍbhāgamakṣayyaṃ dadatyāraṇyakā hi naḥ S. 2. 13; astyatra bhogyavastu varṣaśatenāpyakṣayyaṃ Dk. 109 inexhaustible.
     -- Comp.
          --udakaṃ a libation of water mixed with honey and sesamum, offered in Śrāddha ceremonies after the piṃḍadāna (akṣayyodakadānaṃ tu arghyadānavadiṣyate . ṣaṣṭhyaiva nityaṃ tatkuryānna caturthyā kadācana). --navamī the 9th day of the bright half of Aśvina.

akṣara a. [na kṣaratīti; kṣar calane ac-na. ta.]
     (1) Imperishable, indestructible, undecaying, epithet of the Supreme as well as the Individual soul; yamakṣaraṃ kṣetravido vidustamātmānamātmanyavalokayaṃtaṃ Ku. 3. 50; dvāvimau puruṣau loke kṣaraścākṣara eva ca .. kṣaraḥ sarvāṇi bhūtāni kūṭastho'kṣara ucyate .. Bg. 15. 16; yasmātkṣaramatītohamakṣarādapi cottamaḥ . atosmi loke vede ca prathitaḥ puruṣottamaḥ; the unconcerned (Spirit); akṣaraṃ paramaṃ brahma.
     (2) Fixed, firm, unalterable. --raḥ
     (1) Śiva.
     (2) Viṣṇu.
     (3) A sword. --rā Sound, word, speech (Ved.). --raṃ [aś-saraḥ Uṇ. 3. 70, aśeḥ saraḥ; aśnute vyāpnoti vedādiśāstrāṇi.]
          (a) A letter of the alphabet; akṣarāṇāmakārosmi Bg. 10. 33; mudrākṣarāṇi, madhura-, tryakṣara &c.
          (b) a syllable; ekākṣaraṃ paraṃ brahma Ms. 2. 83 the monosyllable; ekamakṣaraṃ Bg. 10. 25, Ms. 2. 78, 84, 125 (sacred syllable). Hence
          (c) a word or words, speech collectively; pratiṣedha- viklavābhirāmaṃ S. 3. 25; aho saṃdīpanānyakṣarāṇi U. 4; bharturetāni praṇayamayānyakṣarāṇi M. 3 words; brāhmaṇasaṃkramitākṣareṇa pitāmahena V. 3; akṣaraṃ varṇanirmāṇaṃ varṇamapyakṣaraṃ viduḥ . akṣaraṃ na kṣaraṃ vidyādaśnotervā sare 'kṣaraṃ ..
     (2) A document (letter &c.), sacred writing; writing in general (in pl.); tatra bhuktiḥ pramāṇaṃ syānna sākṣī nākṣarāṇi ca Pt. 3. 94; tatrabhavatyā akṣarāṇi visṛṣṭāni syuḥ V. 2.
     (3) The highest deity or Godhead, the indestructible spirit, Brahma (paramabrahman, mūlakāraṇaṃ); akṣaraṃ paramaṃ brahma Bg. 8. 3; karma brahmodbhavaṃ viddhi brahmākṣarasamudbhavaṃ 3. 15; yathā sataḥ puruṣātkeśalomāni tathākṣarātsaṃbhavatīha viśvaṃ Chān. Up.
     (4) Religious austerity, penance.
     (5) Sacrifice.
     (6) Water.
     (7) The sky.
     (8) Final beatitude, emancipation from further transmigration.
     (9) Continuance, permanence. (10) Right, justice (Ved. in these two senses).
     (11) N. of a plant, Achyranthes Aspera.
     (12) A measure of time, equal to one-fifth of a Kāṣṭhā.
     -- Comp.
          --aṃgaṃ 1. a part of a syllable. 2. alphabet.
          --arthaḥ [ṣa. ta.] meaning (of words); kiṃ tāvat gītyāavagato'kṣarārthaḥ S. 5
          --caṃ(cuṃ)cuḥ --caṇaḥ, --naḥ [akṣareṇa varṇavinyāsalipyā vittaḥ akṣara-caṇap or caṃ(cuṃ)cup P. V. 2. 26.] a scribe, writer, copyist; so -jīvakaḥ, jīvī, akṣareṇa jīvati; jīva ṇini or ṇvul; also -jīvikaḥ. --cyutakaṃ [akṣaraṃ cyutaṃ luptaṃ yatra; ba. kap] getting out a different meaning by the omission of a letter (e.g. kurvan divākaraśleṣaṃ dadhaccaraṇaḍaṃbaraṃ . deva yauṣmākasenayoḥ kareṇuḥ prasaratyasau where another meaning may be got by omitting ka in kareṇuḥ i. e. by taking reṇuḥ). --chaṃdas n.
          --vṛttaṃ 1. a metre regulated by the number of syllables it contains; chaṃdastu dvividhaṃ proktaṃ vṛttaṃ jātiriti dvidhā . vṛttamakṣarasaṃkhyātaṃ jātirmātrākṛtā bhavet .. 2. of unshaken resolve, resolute (akṣaraṃ niścalaṃ chaṃdo'bhiprāyo yasya); an epithet of paramātman. --jananī, --tūlikā [akṣarāṇāṃ jananīva; tallipilekhānāṃ tūlikeva vā sādhanatvāt] a reed or pen.
          --(vi) nyāsaḥ [ṣa. ta. bhāve ghañ] writing, arrangement of letters; bhūrjapatragato -saḥ V. 2. 2. the alphabet. 3. scripture. 4. hṛdayādyādhārasparśapūrvakaṃ tadakṣarāṇāṃ smaraṇoccāraṇarūpastaṃtraprasiddho varṇanyāsaḥ. --paṃkti a. 1. having 5 syllables (paṃkti = Gr. pentas five) su mat pad vaga de ityeṣa vai yajño'kṣarapaṃktiḥ Ait. Br. (tānyetānyakṣarāṇi hotṛjapādau prayoktavyāni). 2. N. of a metre of four lines (dvipadā virāj) each having five syllables (one dactyl and one spondee).
          --bhāj a. having a share in the syllables (of a prayer?).
          --bhūmikā tablet R. 18. 46
          --mukhaḥ [akṣarāṇi tanmayāni śāstrāṇi vā mukhe yasya] a scholar, student.
          --khaṃ [ṣa. ta.] the beginning of the alphabet; the letter a. --muṣṭikā 'finger-speech', speaking by means of finger-signs.
          --varjita a. unlettered, illiterate, not knowing how to read or write.
          --vyaktiḥ f. [ṣa. ta]. distinct articulation of syllables.
          --śikṣā [ṣa. ta.] the science of (mystic) syllables; theory of brahma (brahmatatva); mahyaṃ -kṣāṃ vidhāya Dk. 11.
          --saṃsthānaṃ [akṣarāṇāṃ saṃsthānaṃ yatra] arrangement of letters, writing, alphabet.

akṣarakam [svārthe kan] A vowel, a letter.

akṣaraśaḥ adv. [akṣaramakṣaramiti vīpsārthakārake śas] 1. Syllable by syllable.
     (2) To the very letter; literally.

akṣarya a. [gavādigaṇa] Relating to letters or syllables.

akṣarī [aśnute gaganābhogaṃ meghaiḥ; aśsaran, gaurā- ṅīṣ] The rainy season.

akṣānah See under akṣ.

akṣāṃtiḥ f. [na. ta.] Intolerance, non-forbearance; envy, jealousy, anger, impatience.

akṣāra a. [nāsti kṣāraṃ yatra] Free from artificial salt. --raḥ Natural salt gokṣīraṃgoghṛtaṃcaivadhānyamudgāstilāyavāḥ . sāmudrasaiṃdhavaṃcaiva -lavaṇaṃsmṛtam ..
     -- Comp.
          --lavaṇaṃ (--rā-) [kṣāreṇa ūṣaramṛttikayā nirvṛttaṃaṇ kṣāraṃ kṛtrimaṃ lavaṇaṃ; na. ta.] natural salt; munyannāni payaḥ somo māṃsaṃ yaccānupaskṛtam . akṣāralavaṇaṃ caiva prakṛtyā havirucyate .. Ms. 3. 257 (akṛtrimalavaṇaṃ saiṃdhavādi); -ṇānnāḥ syuḥ 5. 73; caturthakālamaśnīyādakṣāralavaṇaṃ mitaṃ 11. 110; sometimes used for food that may be eaten at times unfit for the performance of religious duties; a class of objects such as cow's milk, ghee, rice, &c.

akṣi n. [aśnute viṣayān; aś-ksi, aśorṇit Uṇ. 3. 155-6] akṣiṇī, akṣīṇi, akṣṇā, akṣṇaḥ &c.
     (1) The eye (which grasps or sees objects); changed to akṣa at the end of Bahuvrīhi Comp; f. -kṣī when a limb of the body is indicated, as jalajākṣī, otherwise dīrghākṣāveṇuyaṣṭiḥ; in Avyayī. comp. also it is changed to akṣa, (samakṣaṃ, parokṣaṃ &c.).
     (2) The number two; (--kṣiṇī) the sun and moon. [cf. L. oculus; Ger. auge; Gr. okos, okkos, Zend ashi.]
     -- Comp.
          --kaṃpaḥ twinkling; nākṣikaṃpaṃ vyatiṣṭhata R. 15. 67.
          --kūṭaḥ --ṭakaḥ, --golaḥ, --tārā [ṣa. ta.] the eyeball, pupil of the eye.
          --gata a. [akṣṇi gataḥ sarvadā bhāvanāvaśāt akṣyasannikṛṣṭopi upasthita iva] 1 visible, present; na vibhāvayatyaniśamakṣigatāmapi māṃ bhavānatisamīpatayā Śi. 9. 81. 2. rankling in the eye, an eye-sore, being a thorn in the eye, hated; -tohamasya hāsyo jātaḥ Dk. 159.
          --jāhaḥ [ṣa. ta.] the root of the eye.
          --pakṣman, --loman n. [ṣa. ta.] the eyelash.
          --paṭalaṃ [ṣa. ta.]. a coat of the eye. 2. a disease of the eye pertaining to this coat.
          --pat a. Ved. falling into the eye, hence hurtful. --adv. a little, as much as a mote (as much as could fall into the eye).
          --bhū a. [akṣṇo bhūrviṣayaḥ] visible, perceptible, manifest; (hence) true, real.
          --bheṣajaṃ [ṣa. ta.] collyrium, a kind of balm (for the eyes).
          --jaḥ (jaṃ also) N. of a plant (paṭṭikālodhravṛkṣa) used to heal some varieties of the eye-disease.
          --bhruvaṃ [samāhāradvaṃdva] the eye and the eyebrows taken collectively.
          --vikūṇitaṃ, --vikūśitaṃ [akṣṇaḥ vikūṇitaṃ lajjādinā samyak prasārābhāvāt saṃkoco yatra] a side-look, leer, a look with the eyelids partially closed.

akṣikaḥ [akṣāya cakrāvayavāya hitaḥ --ṭhak] N. of a tree (raṃjanadruma,) akṣīka also; See akṣaka.

akṣiṇī One of the 8 conditions or privileges attached to landed property (?).

akṣita a. [na. ta.] Undecayed, permanent, uninjured, undecaying, unfailing. --taṃ
     (1) Water.
     (2) 100000 million.
     -- Comp.
          --ūti-vasu (tā-) N. of Indra, giving permanent help, or having unfailing wealth (?)

akṣitaram [akṣīva tarati; tṛ-ac Tv.] Water (nirbhalatvānnetratulyatvaṃ).

akṣiti a. [na. ba.] Imperishable. --tiḥ f. Imperishable nature.

akṣiyat a. [na. ta.] Ved. Not decreasing in wealth; destitute of a dwelling, unsettled (?).

akṣivaḥ [akṣi vāti prīṇāti aṃjanena; vā. ka.] N. of a plant, śobhāṃjanavṛkṣa Guilandina or Hyperanthera Moringa. --vaṃ Sea-salt.

akṣīka See akṣaka or akṣika.

akṣīva--(ba) a. [na. ta.] Not intoxicated. --vaḥ [na kṣīvate mādyati, kṣīv-ka kta vā, na. ta.] N. of the tree śobhāṃjana (Mar. śevagā, śegaṭa). --vaṃ Sea-salt.

akṣu a. Ved. [akṣ-u] Quick (śīghra); according to others (kṣuḥ) a kind of net.

akṣuṇṇa a. [na. ta.]
     (1) Unbroken uncurtailed.
     (2) Not conquered or defeated, successful; akṣuṇṇonunayaḥ Ve. 1. 2.
     (3) Not trodden or beaten, unusual, strange; abhīkṣṇamakṣuṇṇatayātidurgamaṃ Śi. 1. 32 being not practised or experienced.
     (4) Inexperienced, not expert.

akṣudra a. [na. ta.] Not small or insignificant. --draḥ N. of Śiva.

akṣudh f. [na. ta.] Absence of hunger, satiety.

akṣudhya a. [akṣudhe hitaṃ; akṣudh --yat.] Ved.
     (1) That which tends to cause absence of hunger (kṣudhābhāvasādhanaṃ dravyaṃ).
     (2) Not liable to hunger.

akṣetra a. [na. ba.] Destitute of fields; uncultivated. --traṃ
     (1) A bad field (apraśastaṃ kṣetraṃ); akṣetre bījamutsṛṣṭamaṃtaraiva vinaśyati Ms. 10. 71.
     (2) Not a good geometrical figure.
     (3) (fig.) A bad pupil, unworthy recipient or receptacle (of any thing).
     -- Comp.
          --vid a. [kṣetraṃ dehatattvaṃ tattvato na jānāti; vid-kvip] destitute of spiritual knowledge; not knowing the true nature of the kṣetra or body (kṣetratattvānabhijñaḥ ātmatvena dehābhimānī jīvaḥ); so akṣetrajña.

akṣetrin a. [kṣetraṃ śasyotpattisthānaṃ kalatraṃ vā; matvarthe ini na. ta.] Having no field, not the master of a field; ye' kṣetriṇo bījavaṃtaḥ parakṣetrapravāpiṇaḥ Ms. 9. 49.

akṣoṭaḥ [akṣ-oṭa; akṣasya bibhītakasyeva uṭāni parṇānyasya vā Tv.]
     (1) N. of a tree parvatīyapīlu (Mar. ḍoṃgarī akroḍa).
     (2) A walnut; a tree bearing an oily nut.

akṣoḍaḥ [akṣ-oḍa; akṣaḥ bibhītakaḥ iva oḍati patraiḥ saṃhanyate; uḍ-ac vā Tv.] also written as akṣoṭa-ḍa-ḍaka, ākṣoṭa, ākhoḍa, ākhoḍaka &c.

akṣobha a. [nāsti kṣobho yasya] Not agitated, unmoved. --bhaḥ
     (1) Absence of agitation.
     (2) The tying post of an elephant.

akṣobhya a. [kṣobhyate vicālyate; kṣubh-ṇic karmaṇi yat. na. ta.] Immoveable, imperturbable; akṣobhyaḥ sa navopyāsīt R. 17. 44 was unassailable --bhyaḥ
     (1) A particular sage (taṃtrokto dvitīyavidyopāsakaḥ taddevatāyāḥ śirasi nāgarūpeṇa sthitaḥ ṛṣibhedaḥ; akṣobhyosyā ṛṣiḥ proktaḥ --Tv.).
     (2) N. of a Buddha.
     (3) An immense number, said to be 100 vivara.
     -- Comp.
          --kavacaṃ [akṣobhāya hitaṃ akṣobhyaṃ] a sort of kavaca or armour referred to in Tantras.

akṣauhiṇī [ūhaḥ samūhaḥ saṃvikalpajñānaṃ vā so'syāmasti ini, akṣāṇāṃ rathānāṃ sarveṣāmiṃdriyāṇāṃ vā ūhinī; ṇatvaṃ vṛddhiśca P. VI. 1. 89 Vart.] A large army consisting of 21870 chariots, as many elephants, 65610 horse, and 109350 foot.

akṣṇa a. [aśnute vyāpnoti aś-ksna Uṇ. 3. 17] Unbroken (akhaṃḍa). --kṣṇaṃ Time.

akṣṇayā ind. Ved.
     (1) Tortuously, circuitously, in a crooked way; tānakṣṇayā saṃtṛṃdaṃti. Śat. Br. (vakramārgeṇa, kauṭilyena).
     (2) Wrongly; -druh Ved. seeking to hurt in a wrongful way.

akṣṇayāvan a. Going through, penetrating.

akhaṭṭaḥ [khaṭṭ-ac na. ta.] N. of a tree (priyāla) Buchanania Latifolia.

akhaṭṭiḥ m. f. [khaṭṭ-i, na. ta. vā ṅīp] Bad conduct (aśiṣṭavyavahāra); a childish freak or whim.

akhaṃḍa a. [khaṃḍ-ghañ, na. ta.] Unbroken, whole, entire, complete; akhaṃḍaṃ puṇyānāṃ phalamiva S. 2. 10; akhaṃḍakalaḥ śaśī Mal. 2. 2 with undiminished orb, full; nirjigāya mukhamiṃdumakhaṃḍaṃ Ki. 9. 38; akhaṃḍena tapasā 10. 63 undisturbed; suṃdastrīdamanepyakhaṃḍayaśasaḥ U. 5. 35 of untarnished, unsullied, fame; -dvādaśī the 12th day of the bright half of mārgaśīrṣa. --ḍaṃ adv. Uninterruptedly Ki. 1. 29.

akhaṃḍana a. [na khaṃḍyate niravayavatvāt; khaṃḍ --lyuṭ na. ta.]
     (1) Unbroken, not capable of being broken or divided, epithet of paramātman.
     (2) Full, entire. --naṃ [na. ta.]
     (1) Not breaking, leaving entire.
     (2) Non-refutation. --naḥ Time.

akhaṃḍita a. [na. ta.]
     (1) Unbroken, undivided.
     (2) Uninterrupted, perpetual, undisturbed, continuous; -tā me vāṇijyā Mu. 1; akhaṃḍitaṃ prema labhasva patyuḥ Ku. 7. 28 everlasting, unbroken.
     (3) Unimpaired; unrefuted &c; bhaṭṭinyā akhaṃḍitāt praṇayāt M. 3 never disappointed; śatamakhaṃ tamakhaṃḍitapauruṣaṃ R. 9. 13 whose prowess knows no repulse or defeat.
     -- Comp.
          --utsava a. always festive.
          --ṛtuḥ [akhaṃḍitaḥ ṛtuḥ tatsaṃpat puṣpādiprasavarūpā yatra] time or season which yields its usual produce of flowers &c. (a.) fruitful, bearing fruit in due season.

akharva a. [na. ta.] Not dwarfish, short or stunted; not small, great; akharveṇa garveṇa virājamānaḥ Dk. 3.

akhāta a. [na. ta.] Not dug; not buried. --taḥ --taṃ A natural lake or pool of water; a bay; especially a pool before a temple.

akhidra a. Ved. [khid-rak na. ta.] Unwearied; maruto yātemakhidrayāmabhiḥ Rv. 1. 38. 11 unwearied in their course.

akhinna a. [na. ta.]
     (1) Not fatigued or wearied.
     (2) Not involving fatigue.

akhila a. [nāsti khilaṃ avaśiṣṭaṃ yasya Tv.]
     (1) Whole, entire, complete; oft. with sarva; etaddhi mattodhijage sarvameṣokhilaṃ muniḥ Ms. 1. 59; -lena entirely.
     (2) Not uncultivated or fallow, ploughed (land); -ātman the universal spirit.

akheṭikaḥ [na kheṭatyasmāt; khiṭ bhaye ṣikan Tv.]
     (1) A tree in general.
     (2) (ākheṭika) A dog trained to the chase.

akhedin a. Not wearisome, not fatigued; -tvaṃ continuous flow of speech regarded as one of the vāgguṇas of the Jainas.

akhkhala ind. An exclamation of joy; -līkṛ to utter this exclamation.

akhyātiḥ f. Infamy, ill-repute; -kara a. disgraceful, disreputable.

ag 1 P. (agati, āgīt, agiṣyati, agituṃ)
     (1) To wind, curl, move tortuously, or in a zig-zag way.
     (2) To go (aṃgati, āṃgīt &c.).

aga a. [na gacchatīti; gam-ḍa. na. ta].
     (1) Unable to walk, not going, not in a position to go; ago vṛṣalaḥ śītena P. VI. 3. 77 Sk.
     (2) Unapproachable. --gaḥ
     (1) A tree; sadānato yena viṣāṇinā'gaḥ Śi. 4. 63.
     (2) A mountain; also a stone; pratyāpagaṃ pratyagaṃ Mahānāṭaka.
     (3) A snake.
     (4) The sun (na gacchati vakragatyā paścimaṃ, tasya hi vakragatyabhāvo jyotiṣaprasiddhaḥ; or, 'not going', the earth by its diurnal rotation causing day and night).
     (5) A water-jar, as in agastya (kuṃbhastyāna).
     (6) The number seven (from the seven kulācalas).
     -- Comp.
          --ātmajā the daughter of the mountain, N. of Pārvatī.
          --okas m. [agaḥ parvataḥ oko yasya] 1. a mountain-dweller. 2. a bird (vṛkṣavāsī). 3. the animal śarabha supposed to have 8 legs. 4. a lion.
          --ja a. (agāt parvataśilāto jāyate; jaṇ-ḍa.) produced on a mountain or from a tree; roaming or wandering through mountains, wild (giricara); kacācitau viṣvagivāgajau gajau Ki. 1. 36. (
          --jaṃ) bitumen.

agaccha a. [gam bāhu. śa, na. ta.] Not going. --cchaḥ A tree.

agaṇya a.
     (1) Countless, immense; -paṇyavistāritamaṇi Dk. 1.
     (2) Not deserving to be counted (arhe yat); worthless, immaterial.

agatiḥ f. [na. ta.]
     (1) Want of resort or recourse, necessity.
     (2) Want of access (lit. & fig.); agatistatra rāmasya yatra gamiṣyāmi vihāyasā Ram; manorathānāmagatirnavidyate Ku. 5. 64, See under gati.

agati(tī)ka a.
     (1) Helpless, without any resort or resource; bālamenamagatimādāya Dk. 9; daṃḍastvagatikā gatiḥ Y. 1. 346 the last resource or shift; agatīkā gatirhyeṣā pāpā rājopasevinām . Mb.

agada a. [nāsti gado rogo yasya]
     (1) Healthy, sound, free from disease, in good health; naro'gadaḥ Ms. 8. 107.
     (2) (gad-bhāṣaṇe ac, na. ta.) Not speaking or telling.
     (3) Free from judicial affliction. --daḥ [nāsti gado rogo yasmāt]
     (1) A medicine, a medicinal drug; iti ciṃtāviṣaghnoyamagadaḥ kiṃ na pīyate H. Pr. 29; viṣaghnairagadaiścāsya sarvadravyāṇi yojayet Ms. 7. 218.
     (2) Health, freedom from disease; auṣadhānyagado vidyā devī ca vividhā sthitiḥ . tapasaiva prasidhyaṃti tapasteṣāṃ hi sādhanaṃ Ms. 11. 238 (agadaḥ gadābhāvaḥ nairujyamiti yāvat Kull.)
     (3) The science of antidotes; one of the 8 parts of medical science.

agadaṃkāraḥ [agadaṃ karoti; agada kṛ-aṇ mumāgamaśca P. VI. 3. 70] A physician.

agadyati Den. P. To have good health.

agama a. = aga q. v.

agamya a. [na gaṃtumarhati, gam-yat na. ta.]
     (1) Not fit to be walked in or approached, unapproachable, inaccessible (lit. & fig.); yogināmapyagamyaḥ &c.,
     (2) Inconceivable, incomprehensible; manaso'gamya īśvaraḥ God transcends mind (conception or thought); yāḥ saṃpadastā manasopyagamyāḥ Śi. 3. 59, See under gamya also.
     -- Comp.
          --rūpa a. of unsurpassed or inconceivable nature, form, &c.; -rūpāṃ padavīṃ prapitsunā Ki. 1. 9.

agamyā A woman not deserving to be approached (for cohabitation), one of the low castes; -myāṃ ca striyaṃ gatvā, -gamanaṃ caiva jātibhraṃśakarāṇi vā &c.
     -- Comp.
          --gamanaṃ illicit intercourse.
          --gāmin a. practising illicit intercourse.
          --gamanīya a. relating to illicit intercourse; -nīyaṃ tu (pāpaṃ) vratairebhirapānudet Ms. 11. 170.

agarī [nāsti garo viṣaṃ yasyāḥ paṃ. ba. gau. ṅīṣ]
     (1) A kind of grass or plant (devatāḍa vṛkṣa) commonly called Deotar, Andropogon Serratus. It is said to be an antidote against the poison of rats and mice.
     (2) Any substance that removes poison (viṣahāridravyamātraṃ)

agaru n. [na girati; gṝ-u, na. ta.] Agallochum, Amyris Agallocha.

agavyūti a. Ved. Without good pasture grounds for cattle, barren (kṣetraṃ) Rv. 6. 47. 20.

agasti [viṃdhyākhyaṃ agaṃ asyati; asktic śakaṃdhvādi-, Uṇ. 4. 179, or agaṃ viṃdhyācalaṃ styāyati stabhnāti, styai-ka; or agaḥ kuṃbhaḥ tatra styānaḥ saṃhataḥ ityagastyaḥ]
     (1) 'Pitcher-born', N. of a celebrated Ṛṣi or sage.
     (2) N. of the star Canopus, of which Agastya is the regent.
     (3) N. of a plant (bakavṛkṣa) Sesbana (or Aeschynomene) Grandiflora.
     [The sage Agastya is a very reputed personage in Hindu mythology. In the Ṛgveda he and Vasiṣṭha are said to be the off-spring of Mitra and Varuṇa, whose seed fell from them at the sight of the lovely nymph Urvaśi at a sacrificial session. Part of the seed fell into a jar and part into water; from the former arose Agastya who is, therefore, called Kumbhayoni, Kumbhajanman, Ghaṭodbhava, Kalaśayoni &c.; from the latter Vasiṣṭha. From his parentage Agastya is also called Maitrāvaruṇi, Aurvaśeya, and, as he was very small when he was born, he is also called Mānya. He is represented to have humbled the Vindhya mountains by making them prostrate themselves before him when they tried to rise higher and higher till they wellnigh occupied the sun's disc and obstructed his path, See Vindhya. (This fable is supposed by some to typify the progress of the Āryas towards the south in their conquest and civilization of India, the humbling of the mountain standing metaphorically for the removal of physical obstacles in their way). He is also known by the names of Pītābdhi, Samudra-chuluka &c., from another fable according to which he drank up the ocean because it had offended him and because he wished to help Indra and the gods in their wars with a class of demons called Kāleyas who had hid themselves in the waters and oppressed the three worlds in various ways. His wife was Lopāmudra. She was also called Kauśī1takī and Varaprada. She bore him two sons, Dṛḍhāsya and Dṛḍhasyu. In the Rāmāyaṇa Agastya plays a distinguished part. He dwelt in a hermitage on mount Kunjara to the south of the Vindhya and was chief of the hermits of the south. He kept under control the evil spirits who infested the south and a legend relates how he once ate up a Rākṣasa named Vātāpi, who had assumed the form of a ram, and destroyed by a flash of his eye the Rākṣasa's brother who attempted to avenge him. In the course of his wanderings Rāma with his wife and brother came to the hermitage of Agastya who received him with the greatest kindness and became his friend, adviser and protector. He gave Rāma the bow of Viṣṇu and accompanied him to Ayodhyā when he was restored to his kingdom after his exile of 14 years. The superhuman power which the sage possessed is also represented by another legend, according to which he turned king Nahusha into a serpent and afterwards restored him to his proper form. In the south he is usually regarded as the first teacher of science and literature to the primitive Dravidian tribes, and his era is placed by Dr. Caldwell in the 7th or 6th century B. C. The Purāṇas represent Agastya as the son of Pulastya (the sage from whom the Rākṣasas sprang) and Havirbhuvā the daughter of Kardama. Several 'hymn-seers' are mentioned in his family, such as his two sons, Indrabāhu, Mayobhuva and Mahendra, also others who served to perpetuate the family. The sage is represented as a great philosopher, benevolent and kind-hearted, unsurpassed in the science of archery and to have taken a principal part in the colonization of the south; nirjitāsi mayā bhadre śatruhastādamarṣiṇā . agastyena durādharṣā muninā dakṣiṇeva dik .. Rām.; agastyācaritāmāśāṃ R. 4. 44; cf. also: agastyo dakṣiṇāmāśāmāśritya nabhasi sthitaḥ . varuṇasyātmajo yogī viṃdhyavātāpimardanaḥ .. and R. 6. 61, Mv. 7. 14.]

agastī A female descendant of Agastya.

     (1) = agasti See above.
     (2) N. of Śiva.
     -- Comp.
          --udayaḥ 1. the rise of Canopus which takes place about the end of Bhādra; with the rise of this star the waters become clear; cf. R. 4. 21 prasasādodayādaṃbhaḥ kuṃbhayonermahaujasaḥ. 2. the 7th day of the dark half of Bhādra.
          --gītā [agastyena gītā vidyābhedaḥ] N. of a sort of vidyā mentioned in the Bhārata Śāntiparvan; (pl.) Agastya's hymn.
          --cāraḥ [ṣa. ta.] the course of Canopus, the time of its rise which ushers the Śarat season and then every thing on earth assumes a lovely appearance.
          --tīrthaṃ N. of a celebrated Tīrtha in the south.
          --vaṭaḥ N. of a holy place on the Himālaya.
          --saṃhitā Agastya's collection of law.

agā a. Ved. Not going.

agādha a. [gādh-pratiṣṭhāyāṃ ghañ na. ba.] Unfathomable, very deep, bottomless; agādhasalilātsamudrāt H. 1. 52; (fig.) profound, sound, very deep, -satva Mk. 1. 3, R. 6. 21; so -jñānaṃ, -buddhi; great; as -bhayaṃ; yasya jñānadayāsiṃdhoragādhasyānaghā guṇāḥ Ak. unfathomable, incomprehensible, inscrutable. --dhaḥ --dhaṃ a deep hole or chasm. --dhaḥ N. of one of the 5 fires at the svāhākāra [cf. Gr. agathos].
     -- Comp.
          --jalaḥ [agādhaṃ jalaṃ yatra] a deep pool or pond, deep lake.

agāram [agaṃ na gacchaṃtaṃ ṛcchati prāpnoti aga-ṛ-aṇ Tv.] A house; śūnyāni cāpyagārāṇi Ms. 9. 265; -dāhin an incendiary 3. 158, See āgāra.

agiraḥ (naḥ?) [na gīryate duḥkhena; gṝ. bā -ka. na. ta. Tv.]
     (1) Heaven.
     (2) The sun or fire?
     (3) A Rākṣasa.
     -- Comp.
          --okas a. [agiraḥ svargaḥ oko vāsasthānaṃ yasya] dwelling in the heaven (as a god); Rv. 1. 135. 9; not to be stopped by threatening shouts (?)

agu a. [nāsti gauryasya] Ved.
     (1) Destitute of cows or rays; poor.
     (2) Wicked (?). --guḥ
     (1) N. of Rāhu.
     (2) Darkness.

aguṇa a.
     (1) Destitute of attributes (referring to God).
     (2) Having no good qualities, worthless; aguṇoyamaśokaḥ M. 3, Mk. 4. 22. --ṇaḥ [na. ta.] A fault, defect, demerit, vice; tadvaḥ sarṣaṃ pravakṣyāmi prasave ca guṇāguṇān Ms. 3. 22; guṇāguṇajña knowing merit and demerit; lobhaścedaguṇena kiṃ Bh. 2. 55; aguṇeṣu tasya dhiyamastavataḥ Ki. 6. 21 vices.
     -- Comp.
          --vādin a. fault-finding, censorious; not appreciating merits.
          --śīla a. of a worthless character.

aguru a. [na. ta.]
     (1) Not heavy, light.
     (2) (In prosody) Short.
     (3) Having no teacher.
     (4) One different from a teacher. --ru n. (m. also) [na gururyasmāt]
     (1) The fragrant aloe wood and tree; Aquiluria Agallocha.
     (2) That which yields Bdellium, Amyris Agallocha.
     (3) The Śiśu tree (śiṃśapā).
     -- Comp.
          --śiṃśapā [aguruḥ sāro yasyāstādṛśī śiṃśapā madhyamapadalo.] the Śiśu tree.
          --sāraḥ a sort of perfume.

agūḍha a. Not hidden, or concealed, manifest, clear: -sadbhāvaṃ Ku. 5. 62.
     -- Comp.
          --gaṃdha a. having an unconcealed smell. (
          --dhaḥ) Asafoetida (the smell of which is not easily concealed).
          --bhāva a. 1. having an open or unreserved disposition. 2. having an obvious meaning or import.

agṛbhīta a. [na. ta.] Ved.
     (1) Not seized or overcome; unsubdued; -śocis of unsubdued splendour.
     (2) Inconceivable.

agṛhaḥ [na. ba.] A houseless wanderer, a hermit (vānaprastha).

agocara a. Imperceptible by the senses, not obvious, See gocara; vācāmagocarāṃ harṣāvasthāmaspṛśat Dk. 169 beyond the power of words, indescribable. --raṃ
     (1) Anything beyond the cognizance of the senses.
     (2) Not being seen or observed, or known; kathaṃ devapādānāmagocareṇaivaṃ kriyate H. 2 without the knowledge of; -tāṃ gatān Pt. 2.
     (3) Brahma; agocare vāgiva copareme Ki. 17. 11.

agotā Ved. Want of cows or rays or praise.

agopā a. Ved. Without a cowherd; paśurnaiti svayuragopāḥ Rv. 2. 4. 7.

agorudha a. Ved. Not disdaining praise.

agohya a. Not to be concealed or covered, bright.

agniḥ [aṃgati ūrdhvaṃ gacchati aṃg-ni, nalopaśca Uṇ. 4. 50, or fr. aṃc 'to go.']
     (1) Fire kopa-, ciṃtā-, śoka-, jñāna-, rāja-, &c.
     (2) The God of fire.
     (3) Sacrificial fire of three kinds (gārhapatya, āhavanīya and dakṣiṇa); pitā vai gārhapatyo'gnirmātāgnirdakṣiṇaḥ smṛtaḥ . gururāhavanīyastu sāgnitretā garīyasī .. Ms. 2. 231.
     (4) The fire of the stomach, digestive faculty, gastric fluid.
     (5) Bile (nābherūrdhvaṃ hṛdayādadhastādāmāśayamācakṣate tadgataṃ sauraṃ tejaḥ pittaṃ ityācakṣate).
     (6) Cauterization (agnikarman).
     (7) Gold.
     (8) The number three.
     (9) N. of various plants:
          (a) citraka Plumbago Zeylanica;
          (b) raktacitraka;
          (c) bhallātaka Semicarpus Anacardium;
          (d) niṃbaka Citrus Acida. (10) A mystical substitute for the letter r. In Dvandva Comp. as first member with names of deities, and with particular words agni is changed to agnā, as -viṣṇū, -marutau, or to agnī, -parjanyau, -varuṇau, -ṣomau [cf. L. ignis.]
     [Agni is the God of Fire, the Ignis of the Latins and Ogni of the Slavonians. He is one of the most prominent deities of the Ṛgveda. He is an immortal, has taken up his abode among mortals as their guest; he is the domestic priest, the successful accomplisher and protector of all ceremonies; he is also the religious leader and preceptor of the gods, a swift messenger employed to announce to the immortals the hymns and to convey to them the oblations of their worshippers, and to bring them down from the sky to the place of sacrifice. He is sometimes regarded as the mouth and the tongue through which both gods and men participate in the sacrifices. He is the lord, protector and leader of people, monarch of men, the lord of the house, friendly to mankind, and like a father, mother, brother &c. He is represented as being produced by the attrition of two pieces of fuel which are regarded as husband and wife. Sometimes he is considered to have been brought down from heaven or generated by Indra between two clouds or stones, created by Dyau, or fashioned by the gods collectively. In some passages he is represented as having a triple existence, which may mean his three-fold manifestations as the sun in heaven, lightning in the atmosphere, and as ordinary fire on the earth, although the three appearances are also elsewhere otherwise explained. His epithets are numberless and for the most part descriptive of his physical characteristics: dhūmaketu, hutabhuj, śuci, rohitāśva, saptajihva, tomaradhara, ghṛtānna, citrabhānu, ūrdhvaśocis, śociṣkeśa, harikeśa, hiraṇyadaṃta, ayodaṃṣṭra &c. In a celebrated passage he is said to have 4 horns, 3 feet, 2 heads, and 7 hands. The highest divine functions are ascribed to Agni. He is said to have spread out the two worlds and produced them, to have supported heaven, formed the mundane regions and luminaries of heaven, to have begotten Mitra and caused the sun to ascend the sky. He is the head and summit of the sky, the centre of the earth. Earth, Heaven and all beings obey his commands. He knows and sees all worlds or creatures and witnesses all their actions. The worshippers of Agni prosper, they are wealthy and live long. He is the protector of that man who takes care to bring him fuel. He gives him riches and no one can overcome him who sacrifices to this god. He confers, and is the guardian of, immortality. He is like a water-trough in a desert and all blessings issue from him. He is therefore constantly supplicated for all kinds of boons, riches, food, deliverance from enemies and demons, poverty, reproach, childlessness, hunger &c. Agni is also associated with Indra in different hymns and the two gods are said to be twin brothers. Such is the Vedic conception of Agni; but in the course of mythological personifications he appears as the eldest son of Brahmā and is called Abhimānī [Viṣṇu Purāṇa]. His wife was Svāha; by her he had 3 sons-Pāvaka, Pavamāna and Śuchi; and these had forty-five sons: altogether 49 persons who are considered identical with the 49 fires. He is also represented as a son of Angiras, as a king of the Pitṛs or Manes, as a Marut and as a grandson of Sandila, and also as a star. The Harivamśa describes him as clothed in black, having smoke for his standard and head-piece and carrying a flaming javelin. He is borne in a chariot drawn by red horses and the 7 winds are the wheels of his car. He is accompanied by a ram and sometimes he is represented as riding on that animal. Agni was appointed by Brahmā as the sovereign of the quarter between the south and east, whence the direction is still known as Āgneyi. The Mahābhārata represents Agni as having exhausted his vigour and become dull by devouring many oblations at the several sacrifices made by king Śvetaki, but he recruited his strength by devouring the whole Khāṇḍava forest; for the story see the word khāṃḍava].
     -- Comp.
          --a(ā)gāraṃ --raḥ, --ālayaḥ, --gṛhaṃ [agnikāryāya agāraṃ śāka- ta.] a fire-sanctuary, house or place for keeping the sacred fire; vasaṃścaturthognirivāgnyagāre R. 5. 25.
          --astraṃ firemissile, a rocket.
          --ātmaka a. [agnirātmā yasya] of the nature of fire; somātmikā strī, -kaḥ pumān. --ādhānaṃ consecrating the fire; so -āhiti. --ādheyaḥ [agnirādheyo yena] a Brahmaṇa who maintains the sacred fire. (--yaṃ) = -ādhānaṃ. --āhitaḥ [agnirāhito yena, vā paranipātaḥ P. II. 2. 37.] one who maintains the sacred fire; See āhitāgni. --idh m. (agnīdhraḥ) [agniṃ iṃddhe sa agnīdh] the priest who kindles the sacred fire (mostly Ved).
          --iṃdhanaḥ [agniridhyate anena] N. of a Mantra. (
          --naṃ) kindling the fire.
          --utpātaḥ [agninā divyānalena kṛtaḥ utpātaḥ] a fiery portent, meteor, comet &c. In Bri. S. 33 it is said to be of five kinds: divi bhuktaśubhaphalānāṃ patatāṃ rūpāṇi yāni tānyulkāḥ . dhiṣṇyolkāśanividyuttārā iti paṃcadhā bhinnāḥ .. ulkā pakṣeṇa phalaṃ tadvat dhiṣṇyāśanistribhiḥ pakṣaiḥ . vidyudahobhiḥ ṣaḍbhistadvattārā vipācayati .. Different fruits are said to result from the appearances of these portents, according to the nature of their colour, position &c.
          --uddharaṇaṃ, --uddhāraḥ 1. producing fire by the friction of two araṇis. 2. taking out, before sun-rise, the sacred fire from its cover of ashes previous to a sacrifice.
          --upasthānaṃ worship of Agni; the Mantra or hymn with which Agni is worshipped (agnirupasthīyate'nena). --edhaḥ [agnimedhayati] an incendiary.
          --kaṇaḥ, --stokaḥ a spark.
          --karman n. [agnau karma sa. ta.] 1. cauterization. 2. action of fire. 3. oblation to Agni, worship of Agni (agnihotra); so -kārya offering oblations to fire, feeding fire with ghee &c.; nirvartitāgnikāryaḥ K. 16; -ryārdhadagdha 39, Ms. 3. 69, Y. 1. 25.
          --kalā a part (or appearance) of fire; ten varieties are mentioned (dhūmrārcirūṣmā jvalinī jvālinī visphuliṃginī . suśrīḥ surūpā kapilā havyakavyavahe api .. yādīnāṃ daśavarṇānāṃ kalā dharmapradā amūḥ). --kārikā [agniṃ karoti ādhatte karaṇe kartṛtvopacārāt kartari ṇvul] 1. the means of consecrating the sacred fire, the rik called agnīdhra which begins with agniṃ dūtaṃ puro dadhe. 2. = agnikārya. --kāṣṭhaṃ agneḥ uddīpanaṃ kāṣṭhaṃ śāka -ta.] agallochum (aguru). --kukkuṭaḥ [agneḥ kukkuṭaiva raktavarṇasphuliṃgatvāt] a firebrand, lighted wisp of straw.
          --kuṃḍaṃ [agnerādhānārthaṃ kuṃḍaṃ] an enclosed space for keeping the fire, a fire-vessel.
          --kumāraḥ, --tanayaḥ, --sutaḥ 1. N. of Kārttikeya said to be born from fire, See kārttikeya. 2. a kind of preparation of medicinal drugs.
          --ketuḥ [agneḥ keturiva] 1. smoke. 2. N. of two Rākṣasas on the side of Rāvaṇa and killed by Rāma.
          --koṇaḥ --dik the south-east corner ruled over by Agni; iṃdro vahniḥ pitṛpatirnairṛto varuṇo marut . kubera īśaḥ patayaḥ pūrvādīnāṃ diśāṃ kramāt .. --kriyā [agninā nirvartitā kriyā, śāka. ta.] 1. obsequies, funeral ceremonies. 2. branding; bheṣajāgnikriyāsu ca Y. 3. 284.
          --krīḍā [tṛ. ta.] fire-works, illuminations.
          --garbha a. [agnirgarbhe yasya] pregnant with or containing fire, having fire in the interior; -rbhāṃ śamīmiva S. 4. 3. (--rbhaḥ) [agniriva jārako garbho yasya] 1. N. of the plant Agnijāra. 2. the sun-stone, name of a crystal supposed to contain and give out fire when touched by the rays of the sun; cf. S. 2. 7. 3. the sacrificial stick araṇi which, when churned, gives out fire. (
          --rbhā) 1. N. of the Śamī plant as containing fire (the story of how Agni was discovered to exist in the interior of the Śamī plant is told in chap. 35 of anuśāsanaparva in Mb.). 2. N. of the earth (agneḥ sakāśāt garbho yasyāṃ sā; when the Ganges threw the semen of Śiva out on the Meru mountain, whatever on earth &c. was irradiated by its lustre, became gold and the earth was thence called vasumatī). 3. N. of the plant mahājyotiṣmatī latā (agniriva garbho madhyabhāgo yasyāḥ sā). --graṃthaḥ [agnipratipādako graṃthaḥ śaka. ta.] the work that treats of the worship of Agni &c.
          --ghṛtaṃ [agnyuddīpanaṃ ghṛtaṃ śāka. ta.] a kind of medicinal preparation of ghee used to stimulate the digestive power.
          --cit m. [agniṃ citavān; ci-bhūtārthe kvip P. III. 2. 91] one who has kept the sacred fire; yatibhiḥ sārdhamanagnimagnicit R. 8. 25.
          --cayaḥ, --cayanaṃ, --cityā. arranging or keeping the sacred fire (agnyādhāna); cityāgnicitye ca P. III. 1. 132. 2. (
          --yaḥ, --yanaḥ) the Mantra used in this operation. 3. a heap of fire.
          --citvat [agnicayanaṃ astyasmin matup masya vaḥ tāṃtatvānna padatvaṃ Tv.] having agnicayana or agnicit. --ja, --jāta a. produced by or from fire, born from fire. (
          --jaḥ, --jātaḥ) 1. N. of the plant agnijāra (agnaye agnyuddīpanāya jāyate sevanāt prabhavati). 2. N. of Kārttikeya. 3. Viṣṇu. (
          --jaṃ, --jātaṃ) gold; so -janman. --jihva a. 1. having a fiery tongue. 2. having fire for the tongue, epithet of a God or of Viṣṇu in the boar incarnation. (
          --hvā) 1. a tongue or flame of fire. 2. one of the 7 tongues of Agni (karālī dhūminī śvetā lohitā nīlalohitā . suvarṇā padmarāgā ca jihvāḥ sapta vibhāvasoḥ). 3. N. of a plant lāṃgalī (agnerjihveva śikhā yasyāḥsā); of another plant (jalapippalī) or gajapippalī (viṣalāṃgalā). --jvālā 1. the flame or glow of fire. 2. [agnerjvāleva śikhā yasyāḥ sā] N. of a plant with red blossoms, chiefly used by dyers, Grislea Tomentosa (Mar. dhāyaphūla, dhāyaṭī). --tap a. [agninā tapyate; tap --kvip] having the warmth of fire; practising austerities by means of fire.
          --tapas a. [agnibhiḥ tapyate] 1. practising very austere penance, standing in the midst of the five fires. 2. glowing, shining or burning like fire; (tapatīti tapāḥ agniriva tapāḥ) hot as fire.
          --tejas a. having the lustre or power of fire (agneriva tejo yasya). (
          --s n.) the lustre of fire. (
          --s m.) N. of one of the 7 Ṛṣis of the 11th Manvantara.
          --trayaṃ the three fires, See under agni. --da a. [agniṃ dāhārthaṃ gṛhādau dadāti; dā. --ka.] 1. giving or supplying with fire. 2. tonic, stomachic, producing appetite, stimulating digestion. 3. incendiary; agnidān bhaktadāṃścaiva Ms. 9. 278; agnidānāṃ ca ye lokāḥ Y. 2. 74; so -dāyaka, -dāyin. --dagdha a. 1. burnt on the funeral pile; agnidagdhāśca ye jīvā ye'pyadagdhāḥ kule mama Vāyu. 2. burnt with fire. 3. burnt at once without having fire put into the mouth, because destitute of issue (?); (pl.) a class of Manes or Pitṛs who, when alive, kept up the household flame and presented oblations to fire.
          --damanī [agnirdamyate 'nayā; dam-ṇic karaṇe lyuṭ] a narcotic plant, Solanum Jacquini.
          --dātṛ [agniṃ vidhānena dadāti] one who performs the last (funeral) ceremonies of a man; yaścāgnidātā pretasya piṃḍaṃ dadyātsa eva hi. --dīpana a. [agniṃ dīpayati] stimulating digestion, stomachic, tonic.
          --dīpta a. [tṛ. ta.] glowing, set on fire, blazing. (--ptā) [agnirjaṭharānalo dīptaḥ sevanāt yasyāḥ sā] N. of a plant jyotiṣmatī latā, which is said to stimulate digestion.
          --dīptiḥ f. active state of digestion.
          --dūta a. [agnirdūta iva yasmin yasya vā] having Agni for a messenger, said of the sacrifice or the deity invoked; yamaṃ ha yajño gacchatyagnidūto araṃkṛtaḥ Rv. 10. 14. 13.
          --dūṣita a. branded.
          --devaḥ [agnireva devaḥ] Agni; a worshipper of Agni.
          --devā [agnirdevo yasyāḥ] the third lunar mansion, the Pleiades (kṛttikā). --dhānaṃ [agnirdhīyate 'smin] the place or receptacle for keeping the sacred fire, the house of an agnihotṛ; padaṃ kṛṇute agnidhāne Rv. 10. 165. 3.
          --dhāraṇaṃ maintaining the sacred fire; vratināṃ -ṇaṃ K. 55.
          --nayanaṃ = -praṇayanaṃ. --niryāsaḥ [agnerjaṭharānalasyeva dīpako niryāso yasya] N. of the plant agnijāra. --netra a. [agnirnetā yasya] having Agni for the leader or conveyer of oblations, an epithet of a god in general.
          --padaṃ 1. the word Agni. 2. fire-place. 3. N. of a plant.
          --parikri-ṣkri-yā care of the sacred fire, worship of fire, offering oblations; gṛhārtho'gnipariṣkriyā Ms. 2. 67.
          --paricchadaḥ the whole sacrificial apparatus; gṛhyaṃ cāgniparicchadaṃ Ms. 6. 4.
          --paridhānaṃ enclosing the sacrificial fire with a kind of screen.
          --parīkṣā [tṛ. ta.] ordeal by fire.
          --parvataḥ [agnisādhanaṃ parvataḥ] a volcano.
          --pucchaḥ [agneḥ agnyādhānasthānasya puccha iva] tail or back part of the sacrificial place; the extinction of fire.
          --purāṇaṃ [agninā proktaṃ purāṇaṃ] one of the 18 Purāṇas ascribed to Vyāsa. It derives its name from its having been communicated originally by Agni to the sage Vasiṣṭha for the purpose of instructing him in the two-fold knowledge of Brahma. Its stanzas are said to be 14500. Its contents are varied. It has portions on ritual and mystic worship, cosmical descriptions, chapters on the duties of Kings and the art of war, a chapter on law, some chapters on Medicine and some treatises on Rhetoric, Prosody, Grammar, Yoga, Brahmavidyā &c. &c.
          --praṇayanaṃ bringing out the sacrificial fire and consecrating it according to the proper ritual.
          --pratiṣṭhā consecration of fire, especially the nuptial fire.
          --praveśaḥ --śanaṃ [sa. ta.] entering the fire, self-immolation of a widow on the funeral pile of her husband.
          --praskaṃdanaṃ violation of the duties of a sacrificer (agnihomākaraṇa); -parastvaṃ cāpyevaṃ bhaviṣyasi Mb.
          --prastaraḥ [agniṃ prastṛṇāti agneḥ prastaro vā] a flint, a stone producing fire.
          --bāhuḥ [agnerbāhuriva dīrghaśikhatvāt] 1. smoke. 2. N. of a son of the first Manu; of a son of Priyavrata and Kāmyā.
          --bījaṃ 1. the seed of Agni; (fig.) gold (rudratejaḥsamudbhūtaṃ hema bījaṃ vibhāvasoḥ). 2. N. of the letter r. --bhaṃ [agniriva bhāti; bhā-ka.] 1. 'shining like fire', gold. 2. N. of the constellation kṛttikā. --bhu n. [agnerbhavati; bhū-kvip hrasvāṃtaḥ] 1. water. 2. gold.
          --bhū a. [agnerbhavati; bhūkvip] produced from fire. (
          --bhūḥ) 1. 'fire-born', N. of Kārttikeya. 2. N. of a teacher (kāśyapa) who was taught by Agni. 3. (arith.) six.
          --bhūti a. produced from fire. (--tiḥ) [agniriva bhūtiraiśvaryaṃ yasya] N. of a pupil of the last Tīrthaṅkāra. (
          --tiḥ) f. the lustre or might of fire.
          --bhrājas a. Ved. [agniriva bhrājate; bhrāj --asun] shining like fire.
          --maṇiḥ [agnerutthāpako maṇiḥ śāka. ta.] the sunstone.
          --math m. [agniṃ mathnāti niṣpādayati; maṃth-kvip-nalopaḥ] 1. the sacrificer who churns the fuel-stick. 2. the Mantra used in this operation, or the araṇi itself.
          --maṃthaḥ, --thanaṃ, producing fire by friction; or the Mantra used in this operation. (--thaḥ) [agnirmathyate anena maṃth-karaṇe ghañ] N. of a tree gaṇikārikā (Mar. naravela) Premna Spinosa (tatkāṣṭhayorgharṣaṇehi āśu vahnirutpadyate). --māṃdyaṃ slowness of digestion, loss of appetite, dyspepsia.
          --mārutiḥ [agniśca marucca tayorapatyaṃ iñ tato vṛddhiḥ it ca; dvipadavṛddhau pṛ. pūrvapadasya hrasvaḥ Tv.] N. of the sage Agastya.
          --mitraḥ N. of a king of the Śuṅga dynasty, son of Pushpamitra who must have flourished before 150 B. C. -- the usually accepted date of Patanjali-as the latter mentions puṣpamitra by name.
          --mukhaḥ a. having Agni at the head. (--khaḥ) [agnirmukhabhiva yasya] 1. a deity, god, (for the gods receive oblations through Agni who is therefore said to be their mouth; agnimukhā vai devāḥ; agnirmukhaṃ prathamaṃ devatānāṃ &c; or agnirmukhe agre yeṣāṃ, for fire is said to have been created before all other gods.) 2. [agnirmukhaṃ pradhānamupāsyo yasya] one who maintains the sacred fire (agnihotṛdvija). 3. a Brāhmaṇa in general (agnirdāhakatvāt śāpāgnirmukhe yasya, for Brāhmaṇas are said to be vāgvajrāḥ). 4. N. of two plants citraka Plumbago Zeylanica and bhallātaka Semicarpus Anacardium (agniriva sparśāt duḥkhadāyakaṃ mukhamagraṃ yasya, tanniryāsasparśena hi dehe kṣatotpattestayostathātvam). 5. a sort of powder or cūrṇa prescribed as a tonic by cakradatta. 6. 'fire-mouthed', sharp-biting, an epithet of a bug Pt. 1. (--khī) [agniriva mukhamagraṃ yasyāḥ, gaurādi-ṅīṣ] 1 N. of a plant bhallātaka (Mar. bibavā, bhilāvā) and lāṃgalikā (viṣalāṃgalā). 2. N. of the Gāyatrī Mantra (agnireva mukhaṃ mukhatvena kalpitaṃ yasyāḥ sā, or agneriva mukhaṃ prajāpatimukhaṃ utpattidvāraṃ yasyāḥ, agninā samaṃ prajāpatimukhajātatvāt; kadācidapi no vidvān gāyatrīmudake japet . gāyatryagnimukhī yasmāttasmādutthāya tāṃ japet .. gobhila). 3. a kitchen [pākaśāla agniriva uttaptaṃ mukhaṃ yasyāḥ sā]. --mūḍha a. [tṛ. ta.] Ved. made insane or stupefied by lightning or fire.
          --yojanaṃ causing the sacrificial fire to blaze up.
          --rakṣaṇaṃ 1. consecrating or preserving the sacred (domestic) fire or agnihotra. 2. [agniḥ rakṣyaṃte anena atra vā] a Mantra securing for Agni protection from evil spirits &c. 3. the house of an agnihotṛ. --rajaḥ, --rajas m. [agniriva rajyate dīpyate; raṃj-asun, nalopaḥ] 1. a scarlet insect by name iṃdragopa. 2. (agneḥ rajaḥ) the might or power of Agni. 3. gold.
          --rahasyaṃ mystery of (worshipping &c.) Agni; N. of the tenth book of the Śatapatha Brahmaṇa.
          --rāśiḥ a heap of fire, burning pile.
          --ruhā [agniriva rohati ruh-ka] N. of the plant māṃsādanī or māṃsarohiṇī (tadaṃkurasya vahnitulyavarṇatayā utpannatvāttathātvaṃ tasyāḥ) --rūpa a. [agneriva rūpaṃ varṇo yasya] fire-shaped; of the nature of fire. (
          --paṃ) the nature of fire.
          --retas n. the seed of Agni; (hence) gold.
          --rohiṇī [agniriva rohati; ruh-ṇini] a hard inflammatory swelling in the armpit.
          --lokaḥ the world of Agni, which is situated below the summit of Meru; in the Purāṇas it is said to be in the aṃtarikṣa, while in the Kāśī Khaṇḍa it is said to be to the south of iṃdrapurī; etasyā dakṣiṇe bhāge yeyaṃ pūrdṛśyate śubhā . imāmarciṣmatīṃ paśya vītihotrapurīṃ śubhām .. --vadhūḥ Svāhā, the daughter of Daksha and wife of Agni.
          --varcas a. [agnervarca iva varco yasya] glowing or bright like fire. (--n.) the lustre of Agni. (--m.) N. of a teacher of the Puraṇas.
          --varṇa a. [agneriva varṇo yasya] of the colour of fire; hot, fiery; surāṃ pītvā dvijo mohādagnivarṇāṃ surāṃ pibet Ms. 11. 91; gomūtramagnivarṇaṃ vā pibedudakameva vā 92. (
          --rṇaḥ) 1. N. of a prince, son of Sudarśana. 2. of a King of the solar race, See R. 19. 3. the colour of fire. (
          --rṇā) a strong liquor.
          --vardhaka a. stimulating digestion, tonic. (
          --kaḥ) 1. a tonic. 2. regimen, diet (pathyāhāra). --vallabhaḥ [agnervallabhaḥ sukhena dāhyatvāt] 1. the Śāla tree, Shorea Robusta. 2. the resinous juice of it.
          --vāsas a. [agniriva śuddhaṃ vāso yasya] having a red (pure like Agni) garment. (--n) a pure garment.
          --vāha a. [agniṃ vāhayati gamayati anumāpayati vā] 1. smoke. 2. a goat.
          --vāhanaṃ a goat (chāga). --vid m. 1. one who knows the mystery about Agni. 2. an agnihotrin q. v.
          --vimocanaṃ ceremony of lowering the sacrificial fire.
          --visarpaḥ pain from an inflamed tumour, inflammation.
          --viharaṇaṃ, --vihāraḥ 1. taking the sacrificial fire from agnīdhra to the sadomaṃḍapa. 2. offering oblations to fire; pratyāsannā -velā K. 348.
          --vīryaṃ 1. power or might of Agni. 2. gold.
          --veśaḥ [agnerveśa iva] N. of an ancient medical authority (caraka). --śaraṇaṃ --śālā --laṃ a fire-sanctuary; -mārgamādeśaya S. 5; a house or place for keepingi the sacred fire; -rakṣaṇāya sthāpitohaṃ V. 3.
          --śarman a. [agniriva śṛṇāti tīvrakopatvāt; śṝ-manin] very passionate. (--m.) N. of a sage.
          --śikha a. [agneriva agniriva vā śikhā yasya]. fiery, fire-crested; dahatu -khaiḥ sāyakaiḥ Ram. (
          --khaḥ) 1. a lamp. 2. a rocket, fiery arrow. 3. an arrow in general. 4. safflower plant. 5. saffron. 6. jāṃgalīvṛkṣa. (--khaṃ) 1. saffron. 2. gold. (
          --khā) 1. a flame; śarairagniśikhopamaiḥ Mb. 2. N. of two plants lāṃgalī (Mar. vāgacabakā or kaLalāvī) Gloriosa Superba; of another plant (Mar. also kaLalāvī) Menispermum Cordifolium.
          --śuśrūṣā careful service or worship of fire.
          --śekhara a. fire-crested. (
          --raḥ) N. of the kusuṃbha, kuṃkuma & jāṃgalī trees. (
          --raṃ) gold.
          --śauca a. [agneriva śaucaṃ yasya] bright as fire; purified by fire K. 252.
          --śrī a. [agneriva śrīryasya] glowing like fire; lighted by Agni.
          --ṣṭut, --ṣṭubh, --ṣṭoma &c. see
          --stut, --stubh &c.
          --saṃskāraḥ 1. consecration of fire. 2. hallowing or consecrating by means of fire; burning on the funeral pile; yathārhaṃ -raṃ mālavāya dattvā Dk. 169; nāsya kāryo'gnisaṃskāraḥ Ms. 5. 69, R. 12. 56.
          --sakhaḥ, --sahāyaḥ 1. the wind. 2. the wild pigeon (smoke-coloured) 3. smoke.
          --saṃbhava a. [paṃ. ba.] sprung or produced from fire. (
          --vaḥ) 1. wild safflower. 2. lymph, result of digestion. (
          --vaṃ) gold.
          --sākṣika [agniḥ sākṣī yatra, kap] a. or adv. keeping fire for a witness, in the presence of fire; paṃcabāṇa- M. 4. 12; -maryādo bhartā hi śaraṇaṃ striyāḥ H. 1. v. l., R. 11. 48.
          --sāraṃ [agnau sāraṃ yasya atyaṃtānalottāpanepi sārāṃśādahanāt Tv.] rasāṃjana, a sort of medical preparation for the eyes. (
          --raḥ --raṃ) power or essence of fire.
          --sūtraṃ a thread of fire. 2. a girdle of sacrificial grass (mauṃjīmekhalā) put upon a young Brāhmaṇa at the time of investiture.
          --staṃbhaḥ 1. stopping the burning power of Agni. 2. N. of a Mantra used in this operation. 3. N. of a medicine so used.
          --stut m. (agniṣṭut) [agniḥstūyate'tra; stu-ādhāre kvip ṣatvaṃ] the first day of the Agniṣṭoma sacrifice; N. of a portion of that sacrifice which extends over one day; yajeta vāśvamedhena svarjitā gosavena vā . abhijidviśvajidbhyāṃ vā trivṛtāgniṣṭutāpi vā .. Ms. 11. 75.
          --stubh (-ṣṭubh) m. [agniḥ stubhyate'tra; stubh-kvip ṣatvaṃ] 1. = agniṣṭoma. 2. N. of a son of the sixth Manu.
          --stomaḥ (-ṣṭomaḥ) [agneḥ stomaḥ stutisādhanaṃ yatra] N. of a protracted ceremony or sacrificial rite extending over several days in spring and forming an essential part of the jyotiṣṭoma. 2. a Mantra or Kalpa with reference to this sacrifice; -me bhavo maṃtraḥ -maḥ; -masya vyākhyānaṃ, kalpaḥ -maḥ P. IV. 3. 66. Vārt. 3. N. of the son of the sixth Manu. 4. a species of the Soma plant; -sāman a part of the Sāma Veda chanted at the conclusion of the Agniṣṭoma sacrifice.
          --stha a. (ṣṭha) [agnau sthātumarhati; sthāka ṣatvaṃ] placed in, over, or near the fire. (
          --ṣṭhaḥ) an iron frying-pan; in the aśvamedha sacrifice the 11th Yūpa which of all the 21 is nearest the fire.
          --svāttaḥ (written both as -svātta and -ṣvātta) (pl.) [agnitaḥ i. e. śrāddhīyaviprakararūpānalāt suṣṭhu āttaṃ grahaṇaṃ yeṣāṃ te] N. of a class of Pitṛs or Manes who, when living on earth, maintained the sacred or domestic fires, but who did not perform the Agniṣṭoma and other sacrifices. They are regarded as Manes of Gods and Brāhmaṇas and also as descendants of Marīchi, Ms. 3. 195 (manuṣyajanmanyagniṣṭomādiyāgamakṛtvā smārtakarmaniṣṭhāḥ saṃto mṛtvā ca pitṛtvaṃ gatāḥ iti sāyaṇaḥ). --hut, --hotṛ Ved. sacrificing to Agni, having Agni for a priest.
          --hotraṃ [agnaye hūyate'tra, hu-tra, ca. ta.] 1. an oblation to Agni (chiefly of milk, oil and sour gruel.). 2. maintenance of the sacred fire and offering oblation to it; (agnaye hotraṃ homo'smin karmaṇīti agnihotramiti karmanāma); or the sacred fire itself; tapovanāgnihotradhūmalekhāsu K. 26; hotā syāt -trasya Ms. 11. 36; -tramupāsate 42; strīṃ dāhayet -treṇa Ms. 5. 167, 6. 4, Y. 1. 89. The time of throwing oblations into the fire is, as ordained by the sun himself, evening (agnaye sāyaṃ juhuyāt sūryāya prātarjuhuyāt). Agnihotra is of two kinds; nitya of constant obligation (yāvajjīvamagnihotraṃ juhoti) and kāmya occasional or optional (upasadbhiścaritvā māsamekamagnihotraṃ juhoti). (--tra) a. Ved. 1. destined for, connected with, Agnihotra. 2. sacrificing to Agni; -havanī (ṇī) a ladle used in sacrificial libations, or agnihotrahavirgrahaṇī ṛk Tv.; See havirgrahaṇī; -hut offering the agrihotra; -āhutiḥ invocation or oblation connected with agrihotra. --hotrin a. [agnihotra-matvarthe ini] 1. one who practises the Agnihotra, or consecrates and maintains the sacred fire. 2. one who has prepared the sacrificial place.

agnāyī [agni-aiṅ-ṅīṣ]
     (1) The wife of Agni and Goddess of Fire, Svāhā. She is said to be a daughter of Daksha; she longed to be the wife of Agni, and Skanda was pleased to give her a place with Agni at every sacrificial act (havyaṃ kavyaṃ ca yatkiṃcid dvijānāmatha saṃskṛtaṃ . hoṣyaṃtyagnau sadā devi svāhetyuktvā samuddhṛtaṃ .. adya prabhṛti dāsyaṃti suvṛttāḥ satpathe sthitāḥ . evamagnistvayā sārdhaṃ sadā vatsyati śobhane).
     (2) The Tretā age.

agnikaḥ [agnivat kāyati prakāśate; kai-ka] N. of an insect, coccinella.

agnidh m. [agniṃ dadhāti maṃtravidhinā sthāpayati; dhā-kvip ni. ālopaḥ Tv.] One who consecrates the sacred fire.

agnimat, --vat Ved. a. [agniḥ astyasya matup, masya vaḥ P. VIII. 2. 15]
     (1) Having fire or enjoying it.
     (2) Maintaining the sacrificial fire; pitṛyajñaṃ tu nirvartya vipraścaṃdrakṣaye'gnimān Ms. 3. 122.
     (3) Having a good digestion.

agnisāt ind. To the state of fire; used in comp. with kṛ 'to burn', 'to consign to flames', bhrātṛśarīramagnisātkṛtvā M. 5; na cakāra śarīramagnisāt R. 8. 72; -bhū to be burnt.

agnīdhraḥ [agnimādadhāti dhṛ-ka dīrghaḥ Tv.]
     (1) N. of a priest, also called brahmā who kindles the sacred fire.
     (2) (agniṃ dhārayatyasmai saṃpradāne ghañarthe ka dīrghaḥ) Sacrifice, sacrifical act. See āgnīdhra.

agnīya a. [agneḥ adūrabhavaṃ sthānādi; utkarā-cha] Situated near the fire; relating to fire, fiery.

agnīṣoma m (mau) [agniśca somaśca dvaṃdva īt ṣatvaṃ] Agni and Soma; -praṇayanaṃ bringing out Agni and Soma; a ceremony in the jyotiṣṭoma sacrifice; (-nī) the rik or vessel used in consecrating them.

agnīṣomīya a. [agnīṣomau devate yasya cha] Relating or sacred to Agni and Soma; -nirvāpaḥ making libations with the cake sacred to Agni and Soma; -paśuḥ a victim sacred to them; -puroḍāśaḥ an oblation sacred to them &c.

agman n. Battle, conflict, See ajman.

agra a. [aṃg-ran nalopaḥ Uṇ. 2. 28]
     (1) First, foremost, chief, best, prominent, principal, pre-eminent; -mahiṣī chief queen; -vātamāsevamānā M. 1 front (and hence, fresh) breeze; -āsanaṃ chief seat, seat of honour Mu. 1. 12.
     (2) Excessive, over and above, surplus; supernumerary, projecting (adhika). --graṃ
          (a) The foremost or topmost point, tip, point (opp. mūlaṃ, madhyaṃ); (fig.) sharpness, keenness; dharmasya brāhmaṇo mūlaṃ agraṃ rājanya ucyate Ms. 11. 84; darvyāṃ agraṃ mūlaṃ madhyaṃ &c; nāsikā- tip of the nose; sūci- &c.; samastā eva vidyā jihvāgre'bhavan K. 346 stood on the tip of the tongue; amuṣya vidyā rasanāgranartakī N. 1. 5.
          (b) Top, summit, surface; kailāsa-, parvata-, &c.
     (2) Front, van; agre kṛ put in the front or at the head; tāmagre kṛtvā Pt. 4 See agre.
     (3) The best of any kind; syaṃdanāgreṇa with the best of chariots; prāsādāgraiḥ Ram.
     (4) Superiority, excellence (utkarṣa); agrādagraṃ rohati Tāṇḍya.
     (5) Goal, aim, resting place (ālaṃbanaṃ); manumekāgramāsīnaṃ Ms. 1. 1, See -bhūmi also.
     (6) Beginning, See agre.
     (7) A multitude, assemblage.
     (8) Overplus, excess, surplus; sāgraṃ strīsahasraṃ Ram. 1000 women and more; so sāgrakoṭī ca rakṣasāṃ.
     (9) A weight = pala q. v. (10) A measure of food given as alms (brāhmaṇabhojanaṃ occurring in agrahāra).
     (11) (Astr.) Amplitude of the sun (-grā, agrakā also). In compounds as first member meaning 'the forepart', 'front', 'tip' &c.; e. g. -pādaḥ, --caraṇaḥ the forepart of the foot, toe; so -hastaḥ, -karaḥ; -pāṇiḥ &c.; -saroruhaṃ the topmost lotus Ku. 1. 16; -kāyaḥ forepart of the body; so -nakhaṃ, -nāsikā tip of the nail, nose &c., --adv. In front, before, ahead.
     -- Comp.
          --aṃśuḥ [agraṃ aṃśoḥ] the focal point.
          --akṣi n. [karma.] sharp or pointed vision, side-look (apāṃgavīkṣaṇa); agrākṣṇā vīkṣamāṇastu tiryag bhrātaramabravīt Rām.
          --advan a. having precedence in eating.
          --anī (ṇī) kaḥ (kaṃ) vanguard; dīrghāṃllaṃghūṃścaiva narānagrānīkeṣu yodhayet Ms. 7. 193; agrāṇīkaṃ raghuvyāghrau rākṣasānāṃ babhaṃjatuḥ Ram.
          --ayaṇīyaṃ [agraṃ śreṣṭhaṃ ayanaṃ jñānaṃ tatra sādhu cha] N. of a Buddhistic tenet (utpādapūrvamagrāyaṇīyamatha vīryatā pravādaḥ syāt-hemacaṃdraḥ). --avalehitaṃ [agraṃ avalehitaṃ āsvāditaṃ yasya] food at a Śraddha ceremony, the chief part of which has been tasted.
          --upaharaṇaṃ first supply.
          --upaharaṇīya a [agre upahriyate karmaṇi anīyar] 1. that which is first offered or supplied. 2. [agraṃ upahriyate yasmai hṛ-saṃpradāne anīyar] śrāddhādyarthamupakalpitasya annāderagre dānoddeśyaḥ vāstudevādiḥ Tv.
          --karaḥ 1. = agrahastaḥ q. v. 2. the focal point.
          --keśaḥ front line of hair; -śeṣu reṇuḥ apaharati K. 86.
          --gaḥ [agre gacchatītiṃ, gam-ḍa] a leader, a guide; taking the lead; marching foremost.
          --gaṇya a. [agre gaṇyate'sau] foremost, to be ranked first.
          --gāmin a. [agre gacchati] a leader; praṣṭho'gragāmini P. VIII. 3. 92.
          --ja a. [agre jāyate; jaṇ-ḍa.] first born or produced; ānaṃdenāgrajeneva R. 10. 78. (
          --jaḥ) 1. The first born, an elder brother; sumatiṃ mamāgrajamavagaccha M. 5; astyeva manyurbharatāgraje me R. 14. 73. 2. a Brahmaṇa. (
          --jā) an elder sister; so -jāta, -jātaka, -jāti. --jaṃghā the forepart of the calf.
          --janman m. [agre janma yasya saḥ] 1. the first-born, an elder brother; janakāgrajanmanoḥ śāsanamatikramya Dk. 2. 2. a Brahmaṇa (varṇeṣu madhye agrajātatvāt, or agrāt pradhānāṃgāt mukhāt jātatvāt, brāhmaṇosya mukhamāsīt, tasmāt trivṛt stomānāṃ mukhaṃ ... agnirdevatānāṃ brāhmaṇo manuṣyāṇāṃ; tasmād brāhmaṇo mukhena vīryaṃ karoti mukhato hi sṛṣṭaḥ Taṇḍya); ativayasamagrajanmānaṃ K. 12; avocat -nmā Dk. 13. 3. N. of Brahma, as he was the first to be born in the waters.
          --jihvā the tip of the tongue.
          --jyā (Astr.) the sign of the amplitude.
          --dānin [agre dānaṃ asya; agradāna-ini] a (degraded) Brahmaṇa who takes presents offered in honour of the dead (pretoddeśena yaddānaṃ dīyate tatpratigrāhī); lobhī vipraśca śūdrāṇāmagredānaṃ gṛhītavān . grahaṇe mṛtadānānāṃ (grahaṇāttiladānānāṃ Tv.) agradānī babhūva saḥ .. --dānīyaḥ [agre dānamarhaticha] = agradānin. --dūtaḥ a harbinger; kṛṣṇākrodhāgradūtaḥ Ve. 1. 22; -dūtikā Dk. 20; mahīpatīnāṃ praṇayāgradūtyaḥ R. 6. 12.
          --nirūpaṇaṃ predestination; prophecy, determining beforehand.
          --nīḥ (ṇīḥ) [agre nīyate asau nī-kvip, ṇatvaṃ] 1. a leader, foremost, first, chief; -ṇīrvirāgahetuḥ K. 195; apyagraṇīrmaṃtrakṛtāmṛṣīṇāṃ R. 5. 4 chief. 2. fire.
          --parṇī [agre parṇaṃ yasyāḥ sā-ṅīp] cowage, Carpopogon Pruriens (ajaloman). --pātin a. [agre ādau patati; pat-ṇini] happening beforehand, antecedent; -tīni śubhāni nimittāni K. 65.
          --pādaḥ the forepart of the foot; toes; navakisalayarāgeṇāgrapādena M. 3. 12; -sthitā standing on tiptoe. S. 6.
          --pāṇiḥ = -hastaḥ q. v.
          --pūjā the highest or first mark of reverence or respect; -jāmiha sthitvā gṛhāṇedaṃ viṣaṃ prabho Rām.
          --peyaṃ precedence in drinking.
          --bīja a. [agraṃ śākhāgraṃ bījamutpādakaṃ yasya] growing by means of the tip or end of branches, growing on the stock or stem of another tree, such as 'kalama'. (--jaḥ) a viviparous plant.
          --bhāgaḥ [karma.] 1. the first or best part (śrāddhādau prathamamuddhṛtya deyaṃ dravyaṃ). 2. remnant, remainder (śeṣabhāga). 3. fore-part, tip, point. 4. (astr.) a degree of amplitude.
          --bhāgin a. [agrabhāgo'syāsti; astyarthe ini] first to take or claim (the remnant); alaṃkriyamāṇasya tasya anulepanamālye -gī bhavāmi V. 5 claiming the first share of the remnant &c.
          --bhuj a. 1. having precedence in eating. 2. gluttonous, voracious (audarika). --bhūḥ [agre bhavati bhū-kvip] = -ja. --bhūmiḥ f. 1. goal of ambition or object aimed at; tatograbhūmiṃ vyavasāyabuddheḥ Ki. 17. 55; tvamagrabhūmirnirapāyasaṃśrayā Śi. 1. 32 (prāpyasthānaṃ). 2. the topmost part, pinnacle; vimāna- Me. 69.
          --māṃsaṃ [agraṃ bhakṣyatvena pradhānaṃ māṃsaṃ] flesh in the heart, the heart itself; -saṃ cānītaṃ Ve. 3. 2. morbid protuberance of the liver.
          --yaṇaṃ [agraṃ ayanāt uttarāyaṇāt ṇatvaṃ śakaṃ- tadvidhānakālo'sya ac (?) Tv.] a kind of sacrificial ceremony See āgrayaṇa. --yāna a. [agre yānaṃ yasya, yā--lyuṭ] taking the lead, foremost. (
          --naṃ) an army that stops in front to defy the enemy.
          --yāyin a. [agre yāsyati yā-ṇini] taking the lead, leading the van; putrasya te raṇaśirasyayamagrayāyī S. 7. 26, R. 5. 62, 18. 10, 5. 3.
          --yodhin [agre sthitvā yudhyate] the principal hero, champion; rākṣasānāṃ vadhe teṣāṃ -dhī bhaviṣyati Rām.; so -vīra; karmasu cāgravīraḥ. --raṃdhraṃ opening, fore-part; nāsā- Mal. 1. 1.
          --lohitā [agraṃ lohitaṃ yasyāḥ sā] A kind of pot-herb (cillīśāka). --saṃkhyā the first place or rank; putraḥ samāropayadagrasaṃkhyāṃ R. 18. 30.
          --saṃdhānī [agre phalotpatteḥ prāk saṃdhīyate jñāyate 'nayā kāryaṃ, Tv.] the register of human actions kept by Yama (yatra hi prāṇivargasya prāgbhavīyakarmānusāreṇa śubhāśubhasūcakaṃ sarvaṃ likhyate sā yamapaṃjikā). --saṃdhyā early dawn; karkaṃdhūnāmupari tuhinaṃ raṃjayatyagrasaṃdhyā S. 4 v. l.
          --sara = yāyin taking the lead; R. 9. 23; āyodhanāgrasaratāṃ tvayi vīra yāte 5. 71.
          --sārā [agraṃ śīrṣamātraṃ sāro yasyāḥ sā] 1. a sprout which has tips without fruits. 2. a short method of counting immense numbers.
          --hara a. [agre hriyate dīyate'sau; hṛ-ac] 1. that which must be given first. 2. = agrahārin. --hastaḥ (---karaḥ, ---pāṇiḥ) the forepart of the hand or arm; agrahastena gṛhītvā prasādayaināṃ Ratn. 3; forepart of the trunk (of an elephant); often used for a finger or fingers taken collectively; śītalaste -staḥ Mk. 3; atisādhvasena vepate me -staḥ Ratn. 1; kusumita iva te -staḥ pratibhāti M. 1; prasārite -ste M. 4; -hastātprabhraṣṭaṃ puṣpabhājanaṃ S. 4 slipped from the fingers; also the right hand; atha -haste mukulīkṛtāṃgulau Ku. 5. 63 (agraścāsau hastaśca Malli.), Ki. 5. 29.
          --hāyanaḥ (ṇaḥ) [agraḥ śreṣṭhaḥ hāyano vrīhiḥ atra, ṇatvaṃ] the beginning of the year; N. of the month mārgaśīrṣa; (māsānāṃ mārgaśīrṣohaṃ Bg. 10. 35); -iṣṭiḥ navaśasyeṣṭiryāgabhedaḥ. --hāraḥ a grant of land given by kings (to Brahmaṇas) for sustenance (agraṃ brāhmaṇabhojanaṃ, tadarthaṃ hriyaṃte rājadhanāt pṛthak kriyaṃte te kṣetrādayaḥ-nīlakaṃṭha; kṣetrotpannaśasyāduddhṛtya brāhmaṇoddeśena sthāpyaṃ dhānyādi, gurukulādāvṛttabrahmacāriṇe deyaṃ kṣetrādi, grāmabhedaśca Tv.); kasmiṃścidagrahāre Dk. 8, 9.

agrataḥ adv. [agre agrādvā, agra-tasil] (with gen.)
     (1) Before (opp. pṛṣṭhataḥ) in front of, at the head of; forward; na gaṇasyāgrato gacchet H. 1. 29; gacchāgrataḥ lead the way; -to vilokya seeing before him.
     (2) In the presence of; meghanādasya- Pt. 1; amātyasyāgrataḥ Mu. 5; dhanurbhṛtāmagrata eva rakṣiṇāṃ R. 3. 39 in the very presence of.
     (3) First; puruṣaṃ jātamagrataḥ Rv. 10. 90. 7; agrataḥkṛ to give precedence to, consider most important; to put in front or at the head of.
     -- Comp.
          --sara a. [agrataḥ sarati; sṛ. ṭa] going in front, taking the lead. (
          --raḥ) a leader.

agrima a. [agre bhavaḥ; agra-ḍimac P. IV. 3. 23. Vārt.]
     (1) First (in order, rank &c); foremost, best, excellent, preferable, superior; vīrāṇāmagrimo bhūtvā yuyudhe pārthivaiḥ saha Mb.
     (2) Prior, preceding.
     (3) Elder, eldest.
     (4) Furthest, advanced, first ripe.
     (5) Further. --maḥ An elder brother. --mā A kind of fruit, Annona Reticulata.

agriya a. [agre bhavaḥ; agra-gha] Foremost, best &c. --yaḥ An elder brother. --yaṃ The first fruits; the best part.

agrīya a. [agre bhavaḥ; agra-cha] Foremost, best &c.

agre adv.
     (1) In front of, before(in time or space); agre yāṃti rathasya reṇupadavīṃ ghanāḥ V. 1. 4, R. 2. 56, V. 2. 7, Bh. 3. 36.
     (2) In the presence of, before; mamāgre stuvaṃti H. 1.
     (3) At the head, ahead; balāgre tiṣṭhate vīro nalaḥ Ram.
     (4) Further on, subsequently, in the sequel; evamagre vakṣyate, evamagrepi draṣṭavyaṃ &c.
     (5) In the beginning; at first, first; pratāpogre tataḥ śabdaḥ parāgastadanaṃtaraṃ R. 4. 30; ātmaivedamagra āsīt Br. Ar. Up., Ms. 2. 169.
     (6) First, in preference to others; savarṇāgre dvijātīnāṃ praśastā dārakarmaṇi 3. 12; atithibhyo 'gra evaitān bhojayet 3. 114.
     -- Comp.
          --gaḥ a leader.
          --gāḥ going in front or before.
          --didhiṣuḥ --ṣūḥ a man (of one of the first three castes) who marries a wife married before (punarbhūvivāhakārī). (--ṣūḥ) f a married woman whose elder sister is still unmarried (jyeṣṭhāyāṃ yadyanūḍhāyāṃ kanyāyāmuhyate'nujā . sā cāgredidhiṣūrjñeyā pūrvā ca didhiṣūḥ smṛtā); -patiḥ the husband of such a woman.
          --pāḥ [agre sthitvā pāti, aluk] first to protect.
          --pūḥ [agre pūyate, pū-kvip] purifying in one's presence; having precedence in drinking.
          --vanaṃ --ṇaṃ [vanasyāgraṃ rājadaṃtā- pūrvanipātaḥ; aluk ṇatvaṃ P. VIII. 4. 4] the border or skirt of a forest.
          --sara a. [agramagreṇāgre vā saratisṛ. ṭa. aluk P. III. 2. 18] going in front, taking the lead, a leader, foremost, first; nirapatrapāṇāṃ agresarīkṛtāsmi K. 169; maraṇa-ro bhavāmi Pt. 1, Mal. 9 first to die; mānamahatāmagresaraḥ kesarī Bh. 2. 29.
          --sarikaḥ [agresare agragatau prasṛtaḥ ṭhan] 1. a servant (who precedes his master). 2. a leader.

agrya a. [agre jātaḥ, agra-yat]
     (1) Foremost, best, choicest, most essential or important, highest, pre-eminent, first; tadaṃgamagryaṃ maghavan mahākratoḥ R. 3. 46; -mahiṣī 10. 66; upeyuṣaḥ svāmapi mūrtimagryāṃ 6. 73, 8. 28, 14. 19, 18. 39, Ku. 7. 78, Ms. 5. 166, 12. 30, V. 5. 14: also with loc.; agryāḥ sarveṣu vedeṣu Ms. 3. 184. --gryaḥ An elder brother --gryaṃ The roof of a house.

agrabhaṇa a. Ved. Having nothing acceptable.

agrāmya a.
     (1) Not rustic or rural, town-made.
     (2) Not tame, wild.

agrāhya a. Not acceptable, that which ought not to be taken or accepted as a gift, present &c.; -hyaṃ śivanirmālyaṃ patraṃ puṣpaṃ phalaṃ jalaṃ; not to be perceived, admitted or trusted; not to be considered or taken into account. --hyā N. of the clay or mṛttikā which ought not to be taken for purposes of purification.

agruḥ --grūḥ f. [aṃg-kru nalopaḥ vā ūṅ]
     (1) A finger.
     (2) A river; (according to others) single, unmarried (as a young woman).

agha = aṃgh q. v. --(10 U.) To wrong, sin.

agha a. [agh-kartari ac]
     (1) Bad, sinful, evil, wicked; aghāyuriṃdriyārāmo moghaṃ pārtha sa jīvati Bg. 3. 16. --ghaṃ [agh bhāve ac]
     (1) Sin; aghaṃ sa kevalaṃ bhuṃkte yaḥ pacatyātmakāraṇāt Ms. 3. 118, Bg. 3. 13; aghaughavidhvaṃsavidhau paṭīyasīṃḥ Śi. 1. 18, 26; -marṣaṇa &c.; misdeed, fault, crime; śreyān dvijātiriva haṃtumaghāni dakṣaṃ Śi. 4. 37 sins and griefs also.
     (2) An evil, mishap, misfortune, accident, injury, harm; na vadhūṣvaghāni vimṛśaṃti dhiyaḥ Ki. 6. 45 do not think of doing harm or evil; kriyādaghānāṃ maghavā vighātaṃ 3. 52, 11. 80; prajānāṃ tamaghāvahaṃ R. 15. 51, 19. 52, See anagha.
     (3) Impurity (aśaucaṃ); anurudhyādaghaṃ tryahaṃ Ms. 5. 63; na rājñāmaghadoṣosti 93; na vardhayedaghāhāni 84.
     (4) Pain, suffering, grief, distress; dayālumanaghaspṛṣṭaṃ R. 10. 19 not subject to grief.
     (5) Passion. --ghaḥ N. of a demon, brother of Baka and Pūtanā and commander-in-chief of Kamsa. [Being sent by Kamsa to Gokula to kill Kṛṣṇa and Balarāma he assumed the form of a huge serpent 4 yojanas long, and spread himself on the way of the cowherds, keeping his horrid mouth open. The cowherds mistook it for a mountain cavern and entered it, cows and all. But Kṛṣṇa saw it, and having entered the mouth so stretched himself that he tore it to pieces and rescued his companions.] --ghā The Goddess of sin; (pl.) the constellation usually called Maghā.
     -- Comp.
          --asuraḥ See agha above.
          --ahaḥ (ahan) a day of impurity (aśauca dinaṃ). --āyus a. leading a wicked life.
          --kṛt a. sinful, wicked, evildoer.
          --ghnaḥ = -nāśana. --nāśa, --nāśana a. [aghaṃ nāśayati] expiatory, destroying sin (such as gifts, muttering holy prayers &c.). (
          --naḥ) destroyer of the demon agha; N. of Kṛṣṇa.
          --bhojin a. [aghaṃ pāpaphalakaṃ bhuṃkte] a sinful eater (one who cooks and eats for his own sake and not for Gods, Manes guests &c).
          --marṣaṇa a. [aghaṃ mṛṣyate utpannatvepi nāśanena karmākṣamatvāt sahyate anena mṛṣ-lyuṭ] expiatory, removing or destroying sin, usually applied to a prayer repeated by Brāhmaṇas (the 190th hymn of Rv. 10.); sarvainasāmapadhvaṃsi japyaṃ triṣvaghamarṣaṇaṃ Ak.; yathāśvamedhaḥ kraturāṭ sarvapāpāpanodanaḥ . tathāghamarṣaṇaṃ sūktaṃ sarvapāpapraṇāśanaṃ ... The most heinous crimes, such as illicit intercourse with a preceptor's wife, one's own mother, sister, daughterin-law &c, are said to be expiated by repeating this sūkta thrice in water; pavitrāṇyaghamarṣaṇāni japaṃtyāṃ K. 179, 38.
          --māra a. [aghaṃ mārayati nāśayati; mṛ ṇic-aṇ] destroying sin, an epithet of Gods (yamo mṛtyuraghamāro nirṛtaḥ). --rud a. [aghaṃ roditi svakarmākṣamatayā yasmāt, ruda-apādāne kvip] 1. 'making sin weep and fly', N. of a Mantra which destroys sin; fearfully howling (?). 2. [aghe vyasane roditi na tatpratīkārāya ghaṭate, kvip] one who only weeps in times of calamity, but does not try to get over them.
          --viṣaḥ [aghaṃ vyasanakāri viṣaṃ yasya] a serpent; fearfully venomous (?).
          --śaṃsaḥ [aghasya śaṃsaḥ; śaṃs bhāve ac] 1. indication or reporting of sin. 2. [aghaṃ aniṣṭaṃ śaṃsati icchati; śaṃs-aṇ] a wicked man, such as a thief. 3. wicked; sin-destroying (?).
          --śaṃsin a. reporting or telling one's sin or guilt.
          --hāraḥ a noted robber; rumour of guilt (?).

aghala a. [aghaṃ lāti nāśayati lā-ka] Destroying sin.

aghāyati Den. P. To sin, to be malicious; threaten with ruin.

aghāyu a. Malicious, wicked, sinful, harmful, injurious.

aghārin a. [aghaṃ vyasanaṃ ṛcchati; ṝṇini] Suffering from evil or calamity (vyasanayukta); not anointing (?)

agharma a. Not hot, cold; -aṃśu, -dhāman the moon whose rays are cold.

aghora a. Not terrific or fearful. --raḥ [nāsti ghoro yasmāt]
     (1) N. of Śiva or of one of his forms, (īśānāghoranāmānau vāmadevastataḥ param . sadyojātaiti proktaḥ kramaśo'rcanakarmaṇi)
     (2) A worshipper of Śiva and Durgā. --rā [aghoraḥ śivaḥ upāsyatvena asyāṃ sā, aghoraac] the fourteenth day of the dark half of Bhādra sacred to Śiva (bhādramāsyasite pakṣe hyaghorākhyā caturdaśī . tasyāmārādhitaḥ sthāṇurnayecchivapuraṃ dhruvaṃ).
     -- Comp.
          --ghorarūpaḥ N. of Śiva.
          --pathaḥ, --mārgaḥ a follower of Śiva.
          --pramāṇaṃ a terrific oath or ordeal.

aghoṣa a. [nāsti ghoṣo yasya yatra vā]
     (1) Hard-sounding, See below.
     (2) Devoid of cow-herds. --ṣaḥ The hard sound of a consonant, hollowness of sound with which all hard consonants and the Visarga are pronounced (one of the 11 kinds of bāhyaprayatna, See P. VIII. 2. 1), or the consonants so pronounced (khayāṃ yamāḥ khayaḥ ZkaVpau visargaḥ śaraeva ca . ete śvāsānupradānā aghoṣāśca vivṛṇvate).

aghos ind. A vocative particle, another form for aghavan (Ved.)

aghnya a. Not to be killed. --ghnyaḥ [na haṃti sṛṣṭikartṛtvāt na han-yak nipātaḥ Tv.]
     (1) Brahmā (aghnyaḥ prajāpatiḥ Uṇ. 4. 111.)
     (2) A Bull. --ghnyā [na hanyate strīhatyāyāḥ niṣiddhatvāt] A cow.

aghreya a. Not fit to be smelt. --yaṃ Liquor (madyaṃ).

aṃk 1 A. To move in acurve. (10) U. (aṃkayati-te, aṃkayituṃ)
     (1) To mark, stamp; hemapādāṃkitāyāṃ pīṭhikāyāṃ K. 192; svanāmadheyāṃkita S. 4 stamped with his name; nayanodabiṃdubhiḥ aṃkitaṃ stanāṃśukaṃ V. 4. 7; so R. 3. 55, 68.
     (2) To enumerate, count.
     (3) To brand, stain, stigmatize; tatko nāma guṇo bhavetsuguṇināṃ yo durjanairnāṃkitaḥ Bh. 2. 54 branded, censured, condemned; vastreṇa veṣṭayitvā -taṃ śiraḥ Ks. 13. 152 branded head.
     (4) To walk, stalk, go.

aṃkaḥ [aṃk kartari karaṇe vā ac]
     (1) The lap (n. also); aṃkādyayāvaṃkamudīritāśīḥ Ku. 7. 5 passed from lap to lap.
     (2) A mark, sign; alaktakāṃkāṃ padavīṃ tatāna R. 7. 9; padapaṃktiralaktāṃkā Rām.; rativalayapadāṃke kaṃṭhe Ku. 2. 64 marked with the signs or traces &c.; madgotrāṃkaṃ geyaṃ Me. 86; a stain, spot, stigma, brand; iṃdoḥ kiraṇeṣvivāṃkaḥ Ku. 1. 3; kaṭyāṃ kṛtāṃko nirvāsyaḥ Ms. 8. 281.
     (3) A numerical figure; a number; the number 9.
     (4) A side, flank; proximity, reach (connected with 1 above); samutsukevāṃkamupaiti siddhiḥ Ki. 3. 40; premṇopakaṃṭhaṃ muhuraṃkabhājo ratnāvalīraṃbudhirābabaṃdha Śi. 3. 36; siṃho jaṃbukamaṃkamāgatamapi tyattvā nihaṃti dvipaṃ Bh. 2. 30; Ki. 17. 64, See --āgata below.
     (5) An act of a drama, for its nature &c, See S. D. 278.
     (6) A hook or curved instrument.
     (7) A species of dramatic composition, one of the ten varieties of rūpaka, See S. D. 519.
     (8) An ornament (bhūṣā).
     (9) A sham fight, military show (citrayuddha). (10) A coefficient.
     (11) A place.
     (12) A sin, misdeed.
     (13) A line, curved line; a curve or bend generally, the bend in the arm.
     (14) The body.
     (15) A mountain. [cf. L. uncus; Gr. ogkos].
     -- Comp.
          --aṃkaṃ [aṃke madhye aṃkāḥ śatapatrādicihnāni yasya Tv.] water.
          --avatāraḥ when an act, hinted by persons at the end of the preceding act, is brought in continuity with the latter, it is called aṃkāvatāra (descent of an act), as the sixth act of Śakuntalā or second of Mālavikāgnimitra (aṃkāṃte sūcitaḥ pātraistadaṃkasyāvibhāgataḥ . yatrāṃkovataratyerṣokāvatāra iti smṛtaḥ S. D. 311). The Daśarupa defines it differently; aṃkāvatārastvaṃkāṃte pātoṃkasyāvibhāgataḥ . ebhiḥ saṃsūcayetsūcyaṃ dṛśyamaṃkaiḥ pradarśayet 1. 56.
          --āgata, --gata a. [dvi. ta.] come within the grasp or reach; siṃhatvaṃ -sattvavṛtti R. 2. 38; śriyaṃ yuvāpyaṃkagatāmabhoktā R. 13. 67.
          --karaṇaṃ marking, branding &c.
          --taṃtraṃ the science of numbers (arithmetical or algebraical).
          --dhāraṇaṃ --ṇā 1. bearing or having marks, such as those on the body of a Vaiṣṇava. 2. manner of holding the person, figure.
          --parivartaḥ [sa. ta.] 1. turning on the other side. 2. rolling or dallying in the lap or on the person; api karṇajāhaviniveśitānanaḥ priyayā tadaṃkaparivartamāpnuyāṃ Māl. 5. 8 (an occasion for) embrace (aṃke kroḍe sarvatobhāvena vartanaṃ hṛdayāliṃganaṃ ityarthaḥ --Jagaddhara; so -parivartin; bhartuḥ -nī bhava M. 3.
          --pādavrataṃ N. of a Vrata; title of a chapter in the bhaviṣyottarapurāṇa. --pāliḥ --lī [pā-ali ṣa. ta. vā. ṅīp] 1. the extremity or region of the lap (kroḍaprāṃta or pradeśa); a seat in the lap; hence, an embrace; tāvadgāḍhaṃ vitara sakṛdapyaṃkapālīṃ prasīda Mal. 8. 2. 2. [aṃkena pālayati pāl-i. tṛ. ta.] a nurse. 3. (
          --lī) a variety of plant, Piring or Medicago Esculenta; vedikākhyagaṃdhadravyaṃ]. --pāśaḥ [aṃkaḥ pāśa iva baṃdhaneneva pātanaheturyatra Tv.] an operation in arithmetic by which a peculiar concatenation or chain of numbers is formed by making the figures 1, 2 &c. exchange places (sthānāṃtamekādicayāṃkaghātaḥ saṃkhyāvibhedā niyataiḥ syuraṃkaiḥ . bhaktoṃkamityāṃkasamāsanighnaḥ sthāneṣu yukto miṃtisaṃyutiḥ syāt See Lī1la. 240); (na guṇo na haro na kṛtirna ghanaḥ pṛṣṭastathāpi duṣṭānāṃ . garvitagaṇakabahūnāṃ syāt pāto'vaśyamaṃkapāśe'smin). --pūraṇaṃ multiplication of numbers or figures.
          --baṃdhaḥ. forming the lap, bending the thighs into a curve and squatting down. 2. branding with a mark that resembles a headless trunk (aśiraḥpuruṣākāroṃkaḥ). --bhāj [aṃkaṃ bhajate upa. sa.] 1. seated in the lap or carried on the hip, as an infant. 2. being within easy reach, drawing near, soon to be obtained; avirahitamanekenāṃkabhājā phalena Ki. 5. 52. 3. premature, early ripe, forced fruit.
          --mukhaṃ (or āsyaṃ) that part of an act, wherein the subject of all the acts is intimated, is called aṃkamukha, which suggests the germ as well as the end, e. g. in Mal. 1 kāmaṃdakī and avalokitā hint the parts to be played by bhūrivasu and others and give the arrangement of the plot in brief (yatra syādaṃka ekasminnaṃkānāṃ sūcanākhilā . tadaṃkamukhamityāhurbījārthakhyāpakaṃ ca tat .. S. D. 312). The Daśarūpa defines it thus: aṃkāṃtapātrairaṃkāsyaṃ chinnāṃkasyārthasūcanāt . i. e. where a character at the end of an act cuts short the story and introduces the beginning of another act; as in the second of Mv.
          --loḍyaḥ [aṃkena loḍyate asau] a kind of tree (ciṃcoṭa) ginger.
          --lopaḥ subtraction of numbers.
          --vidyā the science of numbers, arithmetic.

aṃkanam [aṃk-karaṇe bhāve vā lyuṭ]
     (1) A mark, token; snehāṃkanāni Mal. 9. 46 marks of love.
     (2) Act of marking.
     (3) Means of marking, stamping, &c.

aṃkasam [aṃkosminnasti-ac] Having marks; trappings (?) (vastraṃ āprapadikaṃ).

aṃkin m. n. [aṃkaḥ āliṃganasthānatvena asyāsti, aṃk-ini] A sort of drum or tabor (aṃkenāliṃgya vādanīyo mṛdaṃgādivādyabhedaḥ krīḍāviśiṣṭaśca) --nī [aṃkānāṃ samūhaḥ; khalādi- ini ṅīp]
     (1) A number of marks or signs.
     (2) A woman having marks (of branding &c.).

aṃkya a. [aṃk-ṇyat] Fit to be branded, marked or counted. --kyaḥ [aṃke kroḍe sthāpayitvā vādyate asau, yat, or aṃke sādhuḥ, aṃka-ya] A sort of drum or tabor (sārdhatālatrayāyāmaḥ caturdaśāṃgulānanaḥ . harītakyākṛtiryaḥ syādaṃkyoṃke sa hi vādyate).

aṃkatiḥ [aṃc-gatau ati kutvaṃ; aṃceḥ ko vā Uṇ. 4. 61; aṃkatiḥ aṃcatirvā]
     (1) Wind.
     (2) Fire.
     (3) Brahma.
     (4) A Brāhmaṇa who keeps the sacred fire. --tiḥ --tī f. Going; one who goes.

aṃkas n. [aṃc-asun kutvaṃ]
     (1) A mark.
     (2) The body.

aṃkuṭaḥ (ety. ?) A key.

aṃkupam Ved. Water.

aṃkuraḥ --ram [aṃk-urc Uṇ. 1. 38] A sprout, shoot, blade; darbhāṃkureṇa caraṇaḥ kṣataḥ S. 2. 10; oft. in comp. in the sense of 'pointed', 'sharp' &c.; makaravaktradaṃṣṭāṃkurāt Bh. 2. 4 pointed jaws; nṛsiṃhasya nakhāṃkurā iva K. 4 pointed nails; kuraṃṭakavipāṃḍuraṃ dadhati dhāma dīpāṃkurāḥ Vb. 4. 1; pataṃgapavanavyāloladīpāṃkuracchāyācaṃcalaṃ Bh. 3. 68 unsteady like the pointed flame of a lamp; (fig.) scion, offspring, progeny; anena kasyāpi kulāṃkureṇa S. 7. 19 sprout or child of some one; anvayāṃkuraṃ Dk. 6.
     (2) Water.
     (3) Blood.
     (4) A hair.
     (5) A tumour, swelling.

aṃkurita a. [aṃkurā asya saṃjātāḥ, tārakā- itac] Having sprouts; -taṃ manasijeneva V. 1. 12 as if Love has put forth sprouts; -gharmasalilaḥ Dk. 125 with drops of perspiration bursting forth.

aṃkurakaḥ [aṃkyate tṛṇādinā saṃcīyate'sau; aṃc-ghurac tataḥ ka] An abode of birds, animals, a nest (of birds).

aṃkuśaḥ [aṃk-lakṣaṇe uśac Uṇ. 4. 107] A hook, a goad; Proverb: vikrīte kariṇi kimaṃkuśe vivādaḥ why higgle about a trifling thing when the whole bargain (of which it forms part) has been struck (the goad ought to follow the elephant); saṃniveśya kuśāvatyāṃ ripunāgāṃkuśaṃ kuśaṃ R. 15. 97; (fig.) one who checks, a corrector, governor, director; tyajati tu yadā mohānmārgaṃ tadā gururaṃkuśaḥ Mu. 3. 6; kuśaṃ dviṣāmaṃkuśaṃ R. 16. 81; a restraint or check; niraṃkuśāḥ kavayaḥ poets have free license or are unfettered. --śī one of the 24 Jaina Goddesses. [cf. Germ. angel.]
     -- Comp.
          --grahaḥ an elephant-driver; anvetukāmo'vamatāṃkuśagrahaḥ Śi. 12. 16
          --durdharaḥ [tṛ. ta. aṃkuśena duḥkhena dhāryate] a restive elephant.
          --dhārin m. a keeper of an elephant.
          --mudrā [aṃkuśākārā mudrā] a mark resembling a goad in form (ṛjvīṃ ca madhyamāṃ kṛtvā tanmadhyaṃ parvamūlataḥ . tarjanīṃ kiṃcidākuṃcet sā mudrāṃkuśasaṃjñitā).

aṃkuśita a. [itac] Urged on by a hook, goaded.

aṃkuśin a. [astyarthe ini] Having a hook or goad; laying hold of with a hook.

aṃkṛyat a Ved. Moving tortuously to escape.

aṃkūraḥ [aṃk-kharjūrāditvāt ūrac] A sprout, See aṃkura; daśarathakulāṃkūramādyaṃ Mv. 6. 45.

aṃkūṣaḥ [aṃk ūṣac] = aṃkuśa q. v.

aṃkoṭaḥ --ṭhaḥ --laḥ [aṃkyate lakṣyate kīlākārakaṃṭaiḥ; aṃk oṭa-ṭha-la] N. of a tree (Mar. piste), Alangium Hexapetalum; so aṃkolakaḥ, svārthe kan; aṃkolikā.
     -- Comp.
          --sāraḥ a sort of poison prepared from the Ankola plant.

aṃkolikā (probably a corruption of aṃkapālikā) An embrace.

aṃkh 10 P. (aṃkhayati)
     (1) To crawl.
     (2) To cling.
     (3) To check, hold back.

aṃg 1 P. (aṃgati, ānaṃga, aṃgituṃ) To go, walk. --10 P.
     (1) To walk, go round.
     (2) To mark (cf. aṃk). --With pari (pali) to stir up. --vipali to envelop, veil.

aṃga ind. A vocative particle meaning 'well,' 'well, sir,' 'indeed,' 'true;' 'assent' (as in aṃgīkṛ); aṃga kaccitkuśalī tātaḥ K. 221; prabhurapi janakānāmaṃga bho yācakaste Mv. 3. 5; aṃga asti kaścidvimardako nāmātrabhavataḥ Dk. 59; aṃga kuru aṃga paca P. VIII. 1. 33 Sk; aṃgādhīṣva bhaktaṃ tava dāsyāmi P. VIII. 2. 96 Sk.; samanaddha kimaṃga bhūpatiḥ Śi. 16. 34, 2. 12; Ki. 10. 55, 13. 65; used with kiṃ in the sense of 'how much less', or 'how much more;' śaktirasti kasyacidvideharājasya chāyāmapyavaskaṃdituṃ kimaṃga jāmātaraṃ Mv. 3; tṛṇena kāryaṃ bhavatīśvarāṇāṃ kimaṃga vāghastavatā nareṇa Pt. 1. 71. Lexicographers give the following senses of aṃgaḥ -kṣipre ca punararthe ca saṃgamāsūyayostathā . harṣe saṃbodhane caiva hyaṃgaśabdaḥ prayujyate ..

aṃgam [am gatyādau bā---gan; according to Nir. aṃgaṃ aṃganāt aṃcanāt vā]
     (1) The body.
     (2) A limb or member of the body; śeṣāṃganirmāṇavidhau vidhātuḥ Ku. 1. 33; kleśasyāṃgamadattvā Pt. 5. 32 without undergoing troubles; iti svapnopamānmasvā kāmānmā gāstadaṃgatāṃ . Ki. 11. 34 do not be influenced or swayed by them (do not be subject to them).
     (3) (a.) A division or department (of any thing), a part or portion, as of a whole; as saptāṃgaṃ rājyaṃ, caturaṃgaṃ balaṃ, catuḥṣaṣṭyaṃgaṃ jyotiḥśāstraṃ see the words; gītāṃgānāṃ Pt. 5. 56; yajñaścetpratiruddhaḥsyādekenāṃgena yajvanaḥ Ms. 11. 11. (Hence) (b.) A supplementary or auxiliary portion, supplement; ṣaḍaṃgaḥ or sāṃgaḥ vedaḥ. (c.) A constituent part, essential requisite or component; sarvairbalāṃgaiḥ R. 7. 59; tadaṃgamagryaṃ maghavan mahākratoḥ R. 3. 46. (d.) An attributive or secondary part; secondary, auxiliary or dependent member (serving to help the principal one) (opp. pradhāna or aṃgin); aṃgī raudrarasastatra sarveṃ'gāni rasāḥ punaḥ S. D. 517; atra svabhāvoktirutprekṣāṃgaṃ Malli. on Ki. 8. 26. (e.) An auxiliary means or expedient (pradhānopayogī upāyaḥ or upakaraṇaṃ); sarvakāryaśarīreṣu muktvāṃgaskaṃdhapaṃcakaṃ . maṃtro yodha ivādhīraḥ sarvāṃgaiḥ saṃvṛtairapi .. Śi. 2. 28--29; See aṃgāṃgi, paṃcāṃga also (the angas of the several sciences or departments of knowledge will be given under those words).
     (4) (Gram.) A name for the base of a word; yasmātpratyayavidhistadādipratyaye aṃgaṃ P. I. 4. 13; yaḥ pratyayo yasmātkriyate tadādiśabdasvarūpaṃ tasminpratyaye pare aṃgasaṃjñaṃ syāt Sk. The aṃga terminations are those of the nominative, and accusative singular and dual.
     (5) (Drama) (a.) One of the sub-divisions of the five joints or sandhis in dramas; the mukha has 12, pratimukha 13, garbha 12, vimarṣa 13 and upasaṃhāra 14, the total number of the angas being thus 64; for details see the words. (b.) The whole body of subordinate characters.
     (6) (Astr.) A name for the position of stars (lagna), See aṃgādhīśa.
     (7) A symbolical expression for the number six (derived from the six Vedāṅgas).
     (8) The mind; hiraṇyagarbhāṃgabhuvaṃ muniṃ hariḥ Śi. 1. 1, See aṃgaja also. --gaḥ (pl.) N. of a country and the people inhabiting it, the country about the modern Bhagalpur in Bengal. [It lay on the south of Kauśikī Kachchha and on the right bank of the Ganges. Its capital was Champa, sometimes called Angapuri, Lomapādapuri, Karṇapurī or Mālini. According to Daṇḍin (aṃgeṣu gaṃgātaṭe bahiścaṃpāyāḥ) and Hiouen Thsang it stood on the Ganges about 24 miles west of a rocky island. General Cunningham has shown that this description applies to the hill opposite Patharghata, that it is 24 miles east of Bhagalpur, and that there are villages called Champanagar and Champapura adjoining the last. According to Sanskrit poets the country of the Angas lay to the east of Girivraja the capital of Magadha and to the north-east or south-east of Mithila. The country was in ancient times ruled by Karṇa.] --a.
     (1) Contiguous.
     (2) Having members or divisions.
     -- Comp.
          --aṃgi, --aṃgībhāvaḥ [aṃgasya aṃgino bhāvaḥ] the relation of a limb to the body, of the subordinate to the principal, or of that which is helped or fed to the helper or feeder (gauṇamukhyabhāvaḥ, upakāryopakārakabhāvaśca); e. g. prayāja and other rites are to darśa as its angas, while darśa is to them the aṅgī; aṃgāṃgibhāvamajñātvā kathaṃ sāmarthyanirṇayaḥ . paśya ṭiṭṭibhamātreṇa samudro vyākulīkṛtaḥ .. H. 2. 149; atra vākye samāsagatayorupamayoḥ sādhyasādhanabhāvāt -vena saṃbaṃdhaḥ Malli. on Ki. 6. 2; aviśrāṃtijuṣāmātmanyaṃgāṃgitvaṃ tu saṃkaraḥ K. P. 10 (anugrāhyānugrāhakatvaṃ). --adhipaḥ, --adhīśaḥ 1. lord of the Angas, N. of Karṇa (cf. -rājaḥ, -patiḥ, -īśvaraḥ, -adhīśvaraḥ). 2. 'lord of a lagnaṃ, the planet presiding over it; (aṃgādhipe balini sarvavibhūtisaṃpat; aṃgādhīśaḥ svagehe budhagurukavibhiḥ saṃyuto vīkṣito vā Jyotisha).
          --apūrvaṃ effect of a secondary sacrificial act.
          --karman -n. kriyā 1. besmearing the body with fragrant cosmetics, rubbing it &c. Dk. 39. 2. a supplementary sacrificial act.
          --grahaḥ spasm; seizure of the body with some illness.
          --ja --jāta a. [aṃgāt jāyate jan-ḍa.] produced from or on the body, being in or on the body, bodily; -jaṃ rajaḥ, -jāḥ alaṃkārāḥ &c. 2. produced by a supplementary rite. 3. beautiful, ornamental. (--jaḥ) --janus also 1. a son. 2. hair of the body (n also); tavottarīyaṃ karicarma sāṃgajaṃ Ki. 18. 32. 3. love, cupid (aṃgaṃ manaḥ tasmājjātaḥ); intoxicating passion; aṃgajarāgadīpanāt Dk. 161. 4. drunkenness, intoxication. 5. a disease. (
          --jā) a daughter. (
          --jaṃ) blood.
          --jvaraḥ [aṃgamaṃgaṃ adhikṛtya jvaraḥ] the disease called rājayakṣmā, a sort of consumption.
          --dvīpaḥ one of the six minor Dvīpas.
          --nyāsaḥ [aṃgeṣu maṃtrabhedasya nyāsaḥ] touching the limbs of the body with the hand accompanied by appropriate Mantras.
          --pāliḥ f. [aṃgaṃ pālyate saṃbadhyate 'tra, aṃga-pāl-i] an embrace (probably a corruption of aṃkapāli). --pālikā = aṃkapāli q. v.
          --pratyaṃgaṃ [samā. dvaṃdva] every limb, large and small; -gāni pāṇinā spṛṣṭvā K. 167, 72.
          --prāyaścittaṃ [aṃgasya śuddhyarthaṃ prāyaścittaṃ] expiation of bodily impurity, such as that caused by the death of a relative, consisting in making presents (paṃcaśūnājanyaduritakṣayārthaṃ kāryaṃ dānarūpaṃ prāyaścittaṃ Tv.).
          --bhūḥ a. [aṃgāt manaso vā bhavati; bhū-kvip] born from the body or mind. (
          --bhūḥ) 1. a son. 2. Cupid. 3. [aṃgānāṃ aṃgamaṃtrāṇāṃ bhūḥ sthānaṃ] one who has touched and purified, and then restrained, his limbs by repeating the Mantras pertaining to those limbs; brahmāṃgabhūrbrahmaṇi yojitātmā Ku. 3. 15 (sadyojātādimaṃtrāṇāṃ aṃgānāṃ hṛdayādimaṃtrāṇāṃ bhūḥ sthānaṃ, kṛtamaṃtranyāsaḥ Malli.).
          --bhaṃgaḥ 1. palsy or paralysis of limbs; -vikala iva bhūtvā sthāsyāmi S. 2. 2. twisting or stretching out of the limbs (as is done by a man just after he rises from sleep); sāṃgabhaṃgamutthāya Vb.; jṛṃbhitaiḥ sāṃgabhaṃgaiḥ Mu. 3. 21, K. 85.
          --maṃtraḥ N. of a Mantra.
          --mardaḥ [aṃgaṃ mardayati; mṛd ṇic] 1. one who shampoos his master's body. 2. [bhāve ghañ] act of shampooing; so -mardakā or -mardin, mṛṭ-ṇic ṇvul or ṇini) one who shampoos.
          --marṣaḥ [ṣa. ta.] rheumatism; -praśamanaṃ the curing of this disease.
          --yajñaḥ, --yāgaḥ [aṃgībhūtaḥ yajñaḥ] a subordinate sacrificial act which is of 5 sorts: samidho yajati, tanūnapātaṃ yajati, iḍo yajati, barhiryajati, svāhākāraṃ yajati iti paṃcavidhāḥ . eteṣāṃ sakṛdanaṣṭhānenaiva taṃtranyāyena pradhānayāgānāmāgneyādīnāmupakāriteti mīmāṃsā Tv.
          --raktaḥ --ktaṃ [aṃge avayave raktaḥ] N. of a plant guḍārocanī found in kāṃpilya country and having red powder (raktāṃgalocanī). --rakṣakaḥ [aṃgaṃ rakṣati; rakṣ-ṇvul] a body-guard, personal attendant Pt. 3.
          --rakṣaṇī [aṃgaṃ rakṣyate 'nayā] a coat of mail, or a garment. (
          --ṇaṃ) protection of person.
          --rāgaḥ [aṃgaṃ rajyate anena karaṇe ghañ] 1. a scented cosmetic, application of perfumed unguents to the body, fragrant unguent; puṣpagaṃdhena aṃgarāgeṇa R. 12. 27, 6. 60, Ku. 5. 11. 2. [bhāve lyuṭ] act of anointing the body with unguents.
          --ruhaṃ [aṃge rohati; ruh kvip sa. ta.] hair; vihaṃgarājāṃgaruhairivāyataiḥ Śi. 1. 7.
          --lipiḥ f. written character of the Angas.
          --lepaḥ [aṃgaṃ lipyate anena; lipkaraṇe ghañ] 1. a scented cosmetic. 2. [bhāve ghañ] act of anointing.
          --loḍyaḥ (ety. ?) a kind of grass, ginger or its root, Amomum Zingiber.
          --vikala a. [tṛ. ta.] 1. maimed, paralysed. 2 fainting, swooning.
          --vikṛtiḥ f. 1. change of bodily appearance; collapse. 2. [aṃgasya vikṛtiścālanādiryasmāt paṃ. ba.] an apoplectic fit, swooning, apoplexy (apasmāra). --vikāraḥ a bodily defect.
          --vikṣepaḥ 1. movement of the limbs; gesticulation. 2. a kind of dance.
          --vidyā [aṃgarūpā vyākaraṇādiśāstrarūpā vidyā jñānasādhanaṃ] 1. the science of grammar &c. contributing to knowledge. 2. the science of foretelling good or evil by the movements of limbs; N. of chapter 51 of Bṛhat Samhitā which gives full details of this science; na nakṣatrāṃgavidyayā ... bhikṣāṃ lipsetakarhicit Ms. 6. 50.
          --vidhiḥ [aṃgasya pradhānopakāriṇaḥ vidhiḥ vidhānaṃ] a subordinate or subsidiary act subservient to a knowledge of the principal one (pradhānavidhividheyakarmaṇoṃgabodhakatayā aṃgavidhiḥ). --vīraḥ chief or principal hero.
          --vaikṛtaṃ [aṃgena aṃgaceṣṭayā vaikṛtaṃ hṛdayabhāvo jñāpyate yatra bahu.] 1. a sign, gesture or expression of the face leading to a knowledge of internal thoughts (ākāra). 2. a nod, wink. 3 changed bodily appearance.
          --vaiguṇyaṃ a defect or flaw in the performance of some subordinate or subsidiary act which may be expiated by thinking of Viṣṇu); śrāddhādipaddhatau karmāṃte yatkiṃcidaṃgavaiguṇyaṃ jātaṃ taddoṣapraśamanāya viṣṇusmaraṇamahaṃ kariṣye ityabhilāpavākyaṃ Tv.).
          --saṃskāraḥ, --saṃskriyā [aṃgaṃ saṃskriyate anena; kṛ-karaṇe or bhāve-ghañ] 1. embellishment of person, personal decoration, doing whatever secures a fine personal appearance, such as bathing, rubbing the body, perfuming it with cosmetics &c. 2. [kartari aṇ] one who decorates or embellishes the person.
          --saṃhatiḥ f. compactness, symmetry; body; stheyasīṃ dadhatamaṃgasaṃhatiṃ Ki. 13. 50; or strength of the body.
          --saṃgaḥ bodily contact, union; coition.
          --sevakaḥ a personal attendant, body-guard.
          --skaṃdhaḥ [karma.] a subdivision of a science.
          --sparśaḥ fitness or qualification for bodily contact or being touched by others.
          --hāniḥ f. 1. a defect or flaw in the performance of a secondary or subsidiary act (= -vaiguṇyaṃ); daivād bhramāt pramādāccedaṃgahāniḥ prajāyate . smaraṇādeva tadviṣṇoḥ saṃpūrṇaṃ syāditi śrutiḥ .. --hāraḥ [aṃgaṃ hriyate itastataḥ cālyate yatra, hṛ-ādhāre or bhāve ghañ] gesticulation, movements of the limbs, a dance; saṃsaktairaguruvaneṣu sāṃgahāraṃ Ki. 7. 37, Ku. 7. 91.
          --hāriḥ [aṃgaṃ hriyate 'tra; hṛ-bā-ṇi] 1. gesticulation. 2. stage; dancing-hall.
          --hīna a. [tṛ. ta.] 1. mutilated, deprived of some limb, crippled. 2. having some defective limb (aṃgaṃ hīnaṃ yathocitapramāṇāt alpaṃ yasya); according to Suśruta a man is so born, if the mother's dohada has not been duly fulfilled (sā prāptadaurhṛdā putraṃ janayeta guṇānvitam . alabdhadaurhṛdā garbhe labhetātmani vā bhayam .. yeṣu yeṣviṃdriyārtheṣu daurhṛde vai vimānanā . jāyate tatsutasyārtistasmiṃstasmiṃstatheṃdriye).

aṃgakam [aṃgameva aṃgakaṃ svārthe kan]
     (1) A limb; akṛta madhurairaṃbānāṃ me kutūhalamaṃgakaiḥ U. 1. 20, 24.
     (2) The body; haraṃti rataye rahaḥ priyatamāṃgakādaṃbaraṃ Śi. 4. 66.

aṃgikā [aṃgaṃ ācchādayati; aṃga-ini svārthe kan, striyāṃ ṭāp] A bodice or jacket.

aṃgin a. [aṃga-astyarthe ini]
     (1) Corporeal, having limbs, embodied, incarnate; dharmārthakāmamokṣāṇāmavatāra ivāṃgavān R. 10. 84, 38; one who has a body; yenāṃgena vikṛtena aṃgino vikārastasmāt tṛtīyā Sk.; vyāyāme vṛddhiraṃgināṃ Śi. 2. 94.
     (2) Having subordinate parts; chief, principal; ye rasasyāṃgino dharmāḥ, eka eva bhavedaṃgī śṛṃgāro vīra eva vā, aṃgī atra karuṇaḥ, rasasyāṃgitvamāptasya dharmāḥ śauryādayo yathā S. D.

aṃgīya a. [aṃga-cha]
     (1) Belonging to the body.
     (2) Referring to the Anga country.

aṃgya a. [aṃga-yat] Belonging to or connected with the body, corporeal.

aṃgaṇam = aṃganaṃ q. v.

aṃgatiḥ [aṃgati yātyanena, aṃg karaṇe ati]
     (1) A conveyance, vehicle (f. also).
     (2) [aṃgyate gamyate sevādinā karmaṇi ati] Fire.
     (3) Brahmā.
     (4) [kartari ati] A Brāhmaṇa who maintains the sacred fire.

aṃgadam [aṃgaṃ dāyati śodhayati bhūṣayati, aṃgaṃ dyati vā, dai or do-ka] An ornament, bracelet &c. worn on the upperarm, an armlet; taptacāmīkarāṃgadaḥ V. 1. 14; saṃghadṛyannaṃgadamaṃgadena R. 6. 73. --dā
     (1) The female elephant of the south (?).
     (2) A woman who offers her person for use (aṃgaṃ dadāti arpayati). --daḥ
     (1) N. of a son of Vali, monkey-king of Kiṣkindhā. [He was born of Tāra, Vālī's wife, and is supposed to have been an incarnation of Bṛhaspati to aid the cause of Rāma (and hence noted for his eloquence). When, after the abduction of Sītā by Rāvaṇa, Rāma sent monkeys in all quarters to search for her, Angada was made chief of a monkey-troop proceeding to the south. For one month he got no information, and, when consequently he determined to cast off his life, he was told by Sampāti that Sītā could be found in Lanka. He sent Māruti to the island and, on the latter's return with definite information, they joined Rāma at Kishkindha. Afterwards when the whole host of Rāma went to Laṅkā Angada was despatched to Rāvaṇa as a messenger of peace to give him a chance of saving himself in time. But Rāvaṇa scornfully rejected his advice and met his doom. After Sugrīva Angada became king of Kishkindha. In common parlance a man is said to act the part of Angada when he endeavours to mediate between two contending parties, but without any success.].
     (2) N. of a son of Lakṣmaṇa by Urmilā (R. 15.90), his capital being called Aṅgadīyā.
     (3) N. of a warrior on the side of Duryodhana.
     -- Comp.
          --niryūhaḥ the crest-like forepart of the Angada ornament.

aṃganaṃ --ṇam [aṃgyate gṛhānniḥsṛtya gamyate atra; aṃg-lyuṭ, vā ṇatvaṃ Tv.]
     (1) A place to walk in, a courtyard, an area, yard, court; gṛha-; gagana- the wide firmament; -bhuvaḥ kesaravṛkṣasya Mal. 1 situated or being in the courtyard.
     (2) [karaṇe lyuṭ] A conveyance.
     (3) [bhāve lyuṭ] Going, walking &.

aṃganā [praśastaṃ aṃgaṃ yasyāḥ sā; aṃgāt kalyāṇe naḥ P. V. 2. 100.]
     (1) A woman or female in general; nṛpa-, gaja-, hariṇa- &c.
     (2) A woman with wellrounded limbs, a beautiful woman.
     (3) (Astr.) Virgo.
     (4) The female elephant of the north.
     -- Comp.
          --janaḥ 1. the female sex, woman-kind. 2. women.
          --priya a. beloved of women. (
          --yaḥ) N. of a plant (aśoka) Jonesia Aśoka, for women are fond of decking their persons with Aśoka flowers.

aṃgavam [aṃge svāvayave vāti aṃtarbhavati atiśoṣaṇāt saṃkucitāṃgamiva bhavati, vā-ḍa Tv.] Dried fruit.

aṃgas m. [aṃj-asun kutvaṃ] A bird.

aṃgāraḥ --ram [aṃg-āran Uṇ. 3. 134]
     (1) Charcoal (whether heated or not); ghṛtakuṃbhasamā nārī taptāṃgārasamaḥ pumān; uṣṇo dahati cāṃgāraḥ śītaḥ kṛṣṇāyate karaṃ H. 1. 80; tvayā svahastenāṃgārāḥ karṣitāḥ Pt. 1 you have ruined yourself with your own hands; cf. "to diga mine under one's feet"; kurukulāṃgāra Ve. 6 destroyer or pest of the Kuru family.
     (2) The planet Mars.
     (3) A plant hitāvalī, -kuṣṭakaḥ --hitāvalī.
     (4) N. of a prince who fought with king Māndhatri. --ra a. Red, of a red colour. --raṃ Red colour.
     -- Comp.
          --avakṣepaṇaṃ [aṃgārā avakṣipyaṃte anena karaṇe lyuṭ] a vessel to throw or extinguish coals.
          --kārin a. [aṃgāraṃ karoti kṛ-ṇini] one who prepares coal for sale.
          --kuṣṭhakaḥ [aṃgāravarṇaṃ kuṣṭhamiva-kan] N. of a plant hitāvalī. --dhānī [aṃgārā dhīyaṃte asyāṃ; dhā-ādhāre lyuṭ ṅīp], --dhānikā [svārthe kan] a portable fire-pan, brazier.
          --paripācitaṃ [tṛ. ta.] roasted food or meat.
          --parṇaṃ [aṃgāramiva parṇaṃ yasya] N. of a grove or forest. (--rṇaḥ) [astyarthe ac] N. of Chitraratha, king of the Gandharvas. [On one occasion, while he was sporting with his wife, he saw Kuntī with her five sons proceeding to the capital of Pānchāla in disguise. He accosted them and asked them to tell him where they were going, or to fight. Arjuna accepted the challenge; but Aṅgāraparṇa finding Arjuna to be a very skilful warrior gave him a secret lore called chākṣuṣī (endding one to see the smallest things) and took from him in return a lore called Agniśirāstra and became a friend of the Pāṇḍavas.]
          --pātrī --śakaṭī a portable fire-pan.
          --puṣpaḥ [aṃgāramiva lohitavarṇaṃ puṣpaṃ yasya saḥ] the plant iṃgudī. --maṃjarī, --maṃjī [aṃgārā raktavarṇā maṃjarī yasyāḥ] a shrub Cesalpinia Banducella (raktakaraṃjavṛkṣa). --vallarī, --vallī [aṃgārā iva raktaphalatvāt raktā] N. of various plants, karaṃja, bhārgī, guṃjā. --veṇuḥ [karma,] a sort of bamboo.

aṃgārakaḥ --kam [aṃgāra svārthe kan]
     (1) Charcoal.
     (2) Mars; -viruddhasya prakṣīṇasya bṛhaspateḥ Mk. 9. 33; -cāraḥ course of Mars, See chapter 6 of Bṛhat Samhitā.
     (3) Tuesday (--dinaṃ, --vāsaraḥ).
     (4) N. of a prince of Sauvīra.
     (5) N. of two plants kuraṃṭaka and bhṛṃgarāja, Eclipta (or Verbesina) Prostrata, and white or yellow Amaranth. --kaṃ [alpārthe kan]
     (1) A small spark.
     (2) A medicated oil in which turmeric, Dū1rva, Mañjiṣṭha and other substances have been boiled.
     -- Comp.
          --maṇiḥ [aṃgārakasya priyaḥ maṇiḥ śāka. ta.] a coral (pravāla) (tasya ca raktavarṇatvāt tatpriyatvaṃ; māṇikyaṃ bhāskare deyaṃ caṃdre muktāṃ pradāpayet . pravālaṃ ca kuje dadyāt).

aṃgāriḥ f. [aṃgāra matvarthe ṭhan pṛṣoda- kalopaḥ] A portable fire-pan, brazier.

aṃgārakita a. [aṃgārakāḥ asya saṃjātāḥ itac] Charred, roasted.

aṃgārikā [aṃgāraṃ vidyate asyāḥ matvarthe ṭhan kap ca]
     (1) A portable fire-pan.
     (2) The stalk of the sugar-cane.
     (3) The bud of the Butea Frondosa (kiṃśuka).

aṃgāriṇī [aṃgāra-matvarthe ini]
     (1) A small fire-pan.
     (2) The region heated by the sun, though no longer exposed to its rays.
     (3) A creeper in general.

aṃgārita a. [aṃgāraṃ asya saṃjātaṃ; tārakā- itac] Charred, roasted, half-burnt. --taḥ --taṃ [aṃgāramiva ācarati; aṃgāra-kvip tataḥ kartari kta.] An early bud of the kiṃśuka tree. --tā
     (1) = aṃgāradhānī q. v.
     (2) A bud in general.
     (3) A creeper. (latāmātre).
     (4) N. of a river.

aṃgārīya a. [aṃgārebhyaḥ etāni; aṃgāra-cha] To be used for preparing coal; -yāṇi kāṣṭhāni P. V. 1. 12. Sk.

aṃgāryā [pāśādigaṇa] A heap of charcoal.

aṃgir m. N. of a sage who received the brahmavidyā from Atharvan and imparted it to Satyavāha.

aṃgiraḥ, aṃgiras m. [aṃgati-aṃgagatau asi iruṭ;] Uṇ. 4. 235; according to Ait. Br. aṃgiras is from aṃgāra; ye aṃgārā āsaṃsteṃgiraso'bhavan; so Nir; aṃgāreṣu yoba bhūva soṃgirāḥ] N. of a celebrated sage to whom many hymns of the Ṛgveda are ascribed. (Etymologically Angiras is connected with the word Agni and is often regarded as its synonym (śivo bhava prajābhyo mānuṣībhyastvamaṃgiraḥ; aṃgirobhiḥ ṛṣibhiḥ saṃpāditatvāt aṃgasauṣṭhavādvā aṃgirā agnirūpaḥ). According to Bhārata he was a son of Agni. When Agni began to practise penance, Angiras himself became Agni and surpassed him in power and lustre, seeing which Agni came to the sage and said: --nikṣipāmyahamagnitvaṃ tvamagniḥ prathamo bhava . bhaviṣyāmi dvitīyohaṃ prājāpatyaka eva ca .. Angiras said: kuru puṇyaṃ prajāsargaṃ bhavāgnistimirāpahaḥ . māṃ ca deva kuruṣvāgne prathamaṃ putramaṃjasā .. tacchrutvāṃgiraso vākyaṃ jātavedāstathā'karot. He was one of the 10 mind-born sons of Brahma. His wife was Śraddhā, daughter of Kardama and bore him 3 sons, Bṛhaspati, Utathya and Samvarta, and 4 daughters Kuhu, Sinīvāli, Rākā and Anumati. The Matsya Purāṇa says that Angiras was one of the three sages produced from the sacrifice of Varuṇa and that he was adopted by Agni as his son and acted for some time as his regent. Another account, however, makes him father of Agni. He was one of the seven great sages and also one of the 10 Prajāpatis or progenitors of mankind. In latter times Angiras was one of the inspired lawgivers, and also a writer on Astronomy. As an astronomical personification he is Bṛhaspati, regent of Jupiter or Jupiter itself. He is also regarded as the priest of the gods and the lord of sacrifices. Besides Śraddhā his wives were Smṛti, two daughters of Maitreya, some daughters of Daksha, Svadhā and Sati. He is also regarded as a teacher of the Brahmavidya. The Vedic hymns are also said to be his daughters. According to the Bhāgavata Purāṇa, Angiras begot sons possessing Brāhmanical glory on the wife of Rathītara, a Kshatriya who was childless and these persons were afterwards called descendants of Angiras. The principal authors of vedic hymns in the family of Angiras were 33. His family has three distinct branches kevalāṃgirasa, gautamāṃgirasa and bhāradvājāṃgirasa, each branch having a number of subdivisions. --(pl.)
     (1) Descendants of Angiras, [Angiras being father of Agni they are considered as descendants of Agni himself who is called the first of the Angirasas. Like Angiras they occur in hymns addressed to luminou objects, and at a later period they became for the most part personifications of light, of luminous bodies, of divisions of time, celestial phenomena and fires adapted to peculiar occasions, as the full moon and change of the moon, or to particular rites, as the aśvamedha, rājasūya &c.]
     (2) Hymns of the Atharvaveda.
     (3) Priests, who, by using magical formulas of the Atharvaveda, protect the sacrifice against the effects of inauspicious accidents.

aṃgirastama a. [tamap] Ved. Very rapid, especially like Agni in devouring food (?).

aṃgirasvat a. [aṃgirāḥ agniḥ sahāyatvena vidyate'sya; matup masya vaḥ] Accompanied by Angiras, epithet of wind.

aṃgirasaḥ An enemy of Viṣṇu in his incarnation of Paraśurāma.

aṃgirasāmayanam [aluk sa.] A Sattra sacrifice.

aṃgīkṛ 8 U. [connected with aṃga, or aṃga-cvi; anaṃgaṃ asvopakaraṇaṃ svakīyaṃ aṃgaṃ kriyate]
     (1) To accept, to betake oneself to, to take to; lavaṃgī kuraṃgīdṛgaṃgīkarotu Jagannātha; dakṣiṇāmāśāmaṃgīkṛtya gaṃtavyaṃ K. 121 in the southern direction, towards the south; aṃgīkṛtya ayaśaḥ 160; yadi mṛtyumaṃgīkaromi ibid.; evamaṃgīkārayituṃ mayā bhaṇitaṃ Mk. 8 to make her consent.
     (2) To promise to do, to agree or consent to, undertake; kiṃtvaṃgīkṛtamutsṛjan kṛpaṇavat ślāghyo jano lajjate Mu. 2. 18.
     (3) To own, acknowledge, confess, admit, grant.
     (4) To subdue, to make one's own.

aṃgīkāraḥ --kṛtiḥ --karaṇam
     (1) Acceptance.
     (2) Agreement, promise, undertaking &c.

aṃguḥ [aṃg-un] A hand(occurring in aṃguṣṭha q. v.).

aṃguriḥ --rī = aṃguli q. v.

aṃgulaḥ [aṃg-ul]
     (1) A finger.
     (2) The thumb, aṃgau pāṇau līyate (n. also).
     (3) A finger's breadth (n. also), equal to 8 barley-corns, 12 Angulas making a vitasti or span, and 24, a hasta or cubit; śaṃkurdaśāṃgulaḥ Ms. 8. 271.
     (4) (Astr.) A digit or 12th part.
     (5) N. of the sage Chāṇakya or Vātsyāyana.

aṃguliḥ --lī --riḥ --rī f. [aṃga-uli Uṇ. 4. 2] A finger (the names of the 5 fingers are aṃguṣṭha thumb, tarjanī forefinger, madhyamā middle finger, anāmikā ring-finger, and kaniṣṭhā or kaniṣṭhikā the little finger); a toe (of the foot); ekaviṃśoyaṃ puruṣaḥ daśa hastyā aṃgulayo daśa pādyā ātmaikaviṃśaḥ Ait. Br.
     (2) The thumb, great toe.
     (3) The tip of an elephant's trunk.
     (4) The measure aṃgula.
     (5) N. of the tree gajakarṇikā.
     (6) Penis (?).
     -- Comp.
          --toraṇaṃ [aṃguleḥ toraṇamiva kṛtaṃ] a mark on the forehead of the form of the half moon made with sandal &c.
          --traṃ, --trāṇaṃ [aṃguliṃ trāyate, aṃgulistrāyate anena traika.] a finger-protector (a contrivance like a thimble used by archers to protect the thumb or finger from being injured by the bow-string).
          --paṃcakaṃ the five fingers collectively.
          --mudrā, --mudrikā a seal-ring.
          --moṭanaṃ, --sphoṭanaṃ [aṃgulyormoṭanaṃ mardanaṃ sphoṭanaṃ tāḍanaṃ vā yatra] snapping or cracking the fingers (Mar. cuṭakī). --saṃgā [aṃgulau saṃgo yasyāḥ sā] sticking to the fingers; -gā yavāgūḥ : -gā gāḥ sādayati P. VIII. 3. 80 Sk. (aṃgulisaṃlepakārakaṃ yavāgūdravyaṃ Tv.). (
          --gaḥ) contact of the fingers; act of fingering.
          --saṃjñā [tṛ. ta.] a sign made by the finger; mukhārpitaikāṃgulisaṃjñayaiva Ku. 3. 41.
          --saṃdeśaḥ making signs with fingers; cracking or snapping the fingers as a sign.
          --saṃbhūta a. [sa. ta.] produced from or on the finger. (
          --taḥ) a finger-nail.

     (1) = aṃguli.
     (2) A sort of ant.

aṃgulī(rī)yaṃ-kaṃ, --yakam  [aṃgulau-rau bhavaṃ, svārthe kan] A finger-ring; tava sucaritamaṃgulīya nūnaṃ pratanu mameva S. 6. 10; m. also; kākutsthasyāṃgulīyakaḥ Bk. 8. 118.

aṃguṣṭhaḥ [aṃgau pāṇau prādhānyena tiṣṭhati; aṃgu-sthā P. VIII. 3. 97]
     (1) The thumb; great toe.
     (2) A thumb's breadth, usually regarded as equal to aṃgula. [cf. Zend angusta, Pers. angust.]
     -- Comp.
          --mātra a. [parimāṇārthe mātrac] of the length or size of a thumb; -traṃ puruṣaṃ niścakarṣa balādyamaḥ Mb.

aṃguṣṭhyaḥ [aṃguṣṭhe bhavaḥ cha] The thumbnail.

aṃgūṣaḥ [aṃg-ūṣan]
     (1) An ichneumon.
     (2) An arrow.

aṃgh A. (aṃghate, ānaṃghe)
     (1) To go.
     (2) To commence, set about.
     (3) To hasten.
     (4) To scold, blame.

aṃghas n. [aṃghate gacchati narakamanena aṃgh-asun] A sin; Ve. 1. 12 v. l.

aṃghāri a. [ṛ-iṇ pṛṣo.] Ved. Of a bright or splendid form or nature (dīptiśīla); an enemy to sin or evil (?).

aṃghri(aṃhriḥ) [aṃgh-krin nipātoyaṃ Uṇ. 4. 66]
     (1) A foot.
     (2) The root of a tree.
     (3) A quarter of a stanza (caturthapāda.)
     -- Comp.
          --paḥ [aṃghriṇā pibati siktajalaṃ; pā-ka] a tree; dikṣu vyūḍhāṃghripāṃgaḥ Ve. 2. 18.
          --parṇī --rṇikā, --vallī, --vallikā [aṃghrau mūle tadārabhya vā parṇānyasyāḥ, svārthe kan; aṃghrerārabhya vallīva parṇatvena] N. of a plant siṃhapucchī Hedysarum Lagopodioides (Mar. ḍavalā, piṭhavaṇa). --pāna a. [aṃghriḥ pānaṃ yasya] or aṃghriṃ pibati] sucking his foot or toes, as an infant.
          --skaṃdhaḥ [aṃghreḥ skaṃdha iva] the ankle.

ac 1 U. (acati, --aṃcati, ānaṃca, aṃcituṃ, akta)
     (1) To go, move; to honour; request, ask &c. &c.; connected with aṃc q. v. --c m. (Gram.) A term for vowels.

acakra a.
     (1) Having no wheels.
     (2) Immoveable.
     (3) Not wavering.

acakṣus a. Eyeless, blind; -viṣaya a. invisible; -yaṃ durgaṃ Ms. 4. 77. --n. A bad or miserable eye.

acaṃḍa a. Not hot-tempered, mild, gentle. --ḍī A mild or tractable cow.

acatura a. [avidyamānāni catvāri yasya --nipātaḥ] P. V. 4. 77.]
     (1) Destitute of four.
     (2) (na. ta.) Not skilful.

acara a. Immoveable; carācaraṃ viśvaṃ Ku. 2. 5; carāṇāmannamacarāḥ Ms. 5. 29.
     (2) (Astr.) Epithet of the zodiacal signs vṛṣabha, siṃha, vṛścika and kuṃbha.

acarama a. Not last, middle &c.; vayasyacarame P. IV. 1. 20. Vārt.

acala a. Steady, immoveable, motionless, fixed, permanent; citranyastamivācalaṃ cāmaraṃ V. 1. 4; tapase'dhivastumacalāmacalaḥ Ki. 6. 18; samādhau -lā buddhiḥ Bg. 2. 53; yatra sthāṇurivācalaḥ S. 7. 11 immoveable. --laḥ
     (1) A mountain; (rarely) a rock.
     (2) A bolt or pin (śaṃku).
     (3) The number seven.
     (4) N. of Śiva, of the soul, of the first of the 9 deified persons among Jainas. --lā The earth (so called because the earth is immoveable according to one view, or, according to Ārya Bhaṭṭa who rejects this view, acalāḥ parvatāḥ saṃtyatra, astyarthe ac; acalatvāt svakakṣāto bahirgamanāṃbhāvādvā). --laṃ Brahma.
     -- Comp.
          --kanyakā, --sutā, --duhitā, --tanayā &c. N. of Pārvatī, daughter of the Himālaya mountain.
          --kīlā (ba. the earth (immoveably fixed or pinned).
          --ja, --jāta a. mountain-born. (
          --jā --jātā) N. of Pārvatī.
          --tviṣ a. [acalā tviṭ yasya] of fixed or permanent lustre or colour. (--m, -ṭ) a cuckoo (bahuprakṣālanenāpi mālinyānapagamāt sthirā tviṭ). (f.) permanent colour.
          --dviṣ m. [acalān dveṣṭi, dviṣ-kvip] the enemy of mountains, epithet of Indra who clipped off their wings.
          --dhṛtiḥ f. a metre of four lines of 16 short syllables each (gītyāryā). --patiḥ, --rāṭ lord of mountains, N. of Himālaya; so -adhipaḥ, -śreṣṭhaḥ. --saptamī N. of a book in the bhaviṣyottarapurāṇa; the 7th day of the bright half of Aśvina.

acāpala --lya a. [bahu.] Devoid of fickleness, steady. --laṃ --lyaṃ [na. ta.] Steadiness.

acit a. Ved.
     (1) Devoid of understanding.
     (2) Irreligious, unrighteous.
     (3) Material (opp. cit).

acita a. Ved.
     (1) Gone.
     (2) [na. ta.] Not thought of.
     (3) Not collected.

acitta a.
     (1) Inconceivable.
     (2) [nāsti cittaṃ yasya] Destitute of intellect, senseless, stupid.
     (3) Unnoticed, unexpected, not thought of.

acittiḥ f. Want of sense, infatuation, ignorance.

aciṃtya --tanīya a. [na. ta.] Inconceivable, incomprehensible, unexpected; -yastu tava prabhāvaḥ R. 5. 33; -tyarūpa, -karman of inconceivable form or action. --tyaḥ Śiva.

aciṃtita a. Not thought of, unexpected, sudden; -upanataṃ occurring unexpectedly; -to vadho'jñānāṃ mīnānāmiva jāyate Pt. 2. 3.

acitvas a. Ved. Ignorant of, not knowing.

acira a. [na. ta.]
     (1) Brief, transitory, of short duration; -dyuṃti, -bhās, -prabhā &c. q. v.
     (2) Recent, late, new; akarodacireśvaraḥ kṣitau R. 8. 20 the new lord. In compounds acira may be rendered by 'recently', 'just', 'not long ago'; -pravṛttaṃ grīṣmasamayamadhikṛtya S. 1 just set in; -prasūtā S. 4 having recently brought forth (who died not long after delivery, said of a doe); or a cow that has recently calved. --raṃ adv. (also acireṇa, acirāya, acirāt, acirasya in the same senses)
     (1) Not long since, not long ago.
     (2) Recently, lately.
     (3) Soon, quickly, not long hence.
     -- Comp.
          --aṃśu, --ābhā, --dyutiḥ, --prabhā, --bhās, --rocis f. [acirāḥ aṃśavaḥ, acirā ābhā-prabhā &c. yasyāḥ sā] lightning; -śuvilāsacaṃcalā lakṣmīḥ Ki. 2. 19; -bhāsāṃ tejasā cānuliptaiḥ S. 7. 7, Ki. 4. 24, 5. 6. 2. (karma.) transitory lustre, short gleam.

aciṣṇu --ṣṭu a. Ved. [ac gatau bā- iṣṇu-ṣṭu-c] Going every where, allpervading.

acetana a. [na. ba.] Inanimate, not sentient, irrational; cetana -neṣu Me. 5; -naṃ brahma inanimate Brahma; -naṃ nāma guṇaṃ na lakṣayet S. 6. 12 destitute of life, lifeless (object &c.); -neṣvapi cetanāvapaducāraḥ Mbh.
     (2) Not conscious, insensible; senseless; buddhiśatamacetane naṣṭaṃ H. 2. 161.

acetas a. [na. ba.] Destitute of consciousness; insensible, inanimate, lifeless.

acetāna a. [cit śānac na. ta.] Ved. Void of consciousness, ignorant; silly, infatuated.

aceṣṭa a. [nāsti ceṣṭā yasya]
     (1) Effortless, motionless.
     (2) Not requiring direct effort.

acaitanyam [na. ta.]
     (1) Unconsciousness, insensibility; ignorance in spiritual matters.
     (2) The material world, matter.

acodas a. Ved. [nāsti codanā yasya] Spontaneous, not influenced by external force or compulsion.

accha a. [na chyati dṛṣṭiṃ, cho-ka. na. ta., nirmale hi vastuni dṛṣṭiḥ prasarati na tu samale ābhyaṃtaraparyaṃtaṃ dhāvati Tv.] Clear, pellucid, transparent, pure; muktācchadaṃtacchavidaṃtureyaṃ U. 6. 27; -sphaṭikaviśadaṃ Me. 51; -śramajalakaṇikā K. 57; kiṃ ratnamacchā matiḥ Bv. 1. 86. --cchaḥ
     (1) A crystal.
     (2) [na chāti bhakṣayati nāśitasattvaṃ; chā bhakṣaṇe-ka na. ta. Tv.] A bear; cf. also -bhalla
     (3) N. of a plant.
     -- Comp.
          --udan a. (i. e. acchoda) [acchaṃ udakaṃ yasya] having clear water. (
          --dā) N. of a river; eteṣāṃ (agniṣvāttānāṃ) mānasī kanyā acchodā nāma nimnagā Harivamśa. (
          --daṃ) N. of a lake on the Himālaya (mentioned in Kādambarī).
          --bhallaḥ a bear.

accha --cchā ind. Ved. To, towards (with acc.). It is a kind of separable preposition or prefix to verbs and verbal derivatives, especially to such as imply some kind of motion, or speaking; (accha gatyarthavadeṣu P. I. 4. 69; -i or gam to go to, attain, as accha gatya; -naś-kṣ to go near, approach; -nī to lead towards; -nu to call out to; -pat to fly towards; -vaṃd to salute; -vac to invite.

acchāvākaḥ [acchaṃ nirmalaṃ accha ābhimukhyena vā vakti śaṃsati; vac kartari saṃjñāyāṃ ghañ nipātasya ceti dīrghaḥ Tv.] The invoker or inviter, a priest or Ṛtvij who is employed at Soma sacrifices, and is a co-adjutor of hotṛ. Each of the four principal priests, hotṛ, adhvaryu, brahman and udrātṛ has three assistants, the total number of priests employed at Soma sacrifices being therefore 16; -sāman n. N. of the Sāman to be chanted by an acchāvāka, also called udvaṃśīya.

acchāvākīya a. [acchāvākaśabdostyatra-cha] Containing the word acchāvāka P. V. 2. 59. --yaṃ [-vākasya karma bhāvo vā] The duty of an acchāvāka, being one P. V. 1. 135.

acchāvākya n. [acchāvākasya idaṃ-yat] Pertaining to, to be repeated by, an acchāvāka.

acchaṃdas a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Not studying the Vedas (as a boy before the muṃja ceremony), or not entitled to that study (as a Śūdra.
     (2) Not metrical, not of the nature of metres, i. e. prose.
     (3) Without fancy or whim.

acchidra a. [na. ba.] Unbroken, uninjured, complete, unimpaired, without holes or weak points, faultless, without defect; acchidraiḥ sustaṃbhairmaṃtribhiḥ Pt. 1. 126; japacchidraṃ tapaśchidraṃ yacchidraṃ śrāddhakarmaṇi . sarvaṃ bhavatu me'cchidraṃ brāhmaṇānāṃ prasādataḥ ..; tattathā kriyatāṃ rājanyathā'cchidraḥ kraturbhavet Rām., -ūti giving perfect protection Rv. 1. 145. 3. --draṃ A faultless action or condition, absence of defect; -dreṇa uninterruptedly, from first to last.
     -- Comp.
          --ūdhan [ūdhnī] having a faultless udder.
          --kāṃḍaṃ N. of a chapter of the taittirīya brāhmaṇa.

acchinna [na. ta.]
     (1) Uninterrupted, continuous, constant; -śivasaṃkalpamaṃtaḥkaraṇamastu te Mv. 4. 36 undisturbed in its holy thoughts, ever cherishing holy thoughts; -amalasaṃtānāḥ saritaḥ kīrtayaśca te Ku. 6. 69.
     (2) Not cut or divided, undivided, uninjured; inseparable.
     -- Comp.
          --parṇaḥ, -patraḥ [acchinnāni satatāni parṇāni patrāṇi vā yasya] N. of trees having constant leaves; particularly of the tree called śākhoṭaka; (of birds) having uncut or uninjured wings.

acchedika, --acchaidika a. [chedanaṃ nārhatiṭhan] Not fit to be cut.

acchedya [na. ta.] Indivisible.

acchuptā [na. ta.] Not touched by sin; N. of one of the 16 Vidyādevīs of the Jainas.

acchoṭanam Hunting.

acyuta a. [na. ta. svarūpasāmarthyāt na cyutaḥ cyavate vā-kālasāmānye kartarikta]
     (1) Not fallen, firm, fixed; not giving way, solid; garuḍamūrtiriva acyutasthitiramaṇīyā K. 52 (acyuta meaning 'Viṣṇu' and 'firm', 'fixed'); -kṣit having solid ground.
     (2) Imperishable, permanent; -ruṣ inveterate enmity.
     (3) [na cyotati kṣarati; cyut-ka. na. ta.] Not melting away or perishing, not leaking or dripping. --taḥ
     (1) N. of Viṣṇu; of the Almighty being; yasmānna cyutapūrvohamacyutastena karmaṇā Bhāg, gacchāmyacyutadarśanena K. P. 5. (where a- also means 'one who is firm, does not yield to passions').
     (3) N. of a plant, Morinda Tinctoria.
     (4) A sort of poetical composition containing 12 cantos.
     -- Comp.
          --agrajaḥ [ṣa. ta.] N. of Balarāma or Indra.
          --aṃgajaḥ, -putraḥ, ātmajaḥ N. of Cupid, son of Kṛṣṇa and Rukmiṇī.
          --āvāsaḥ, -vāsaḥ the sacred fig-tree.
          --jaḥ [paṃ. ta.] a class of Jaina deities said to have been produced from Viṣṇu
          --sthalaṃ N. of a place in the Punjab.

aj 1 P. (optionally replaced by the root in non-conjugational tenses; ajati, ājīt, ajituṃ)
     (1) To go.
     (2) To drive, lead.
     (3) To throw, cast (used with prepositions found only in Vedic literature). [cf. L. ago; Gr. ago; Zend az].

aja a. [na jāyate; jaṇ-ḍa. na. ta.] Unborn, existing from all eternity; yo māmajamanādiṃ ca vetti lokamaheśvaraṃ Bg. 10. 3; ajasya gṛhṇato janma R. 10. 24. --jaḥ
     (1) The 'unborn,' epithet of the Almighty Being; na hi jāto na jāye'haṃ na janiṣye kadācana . kṣetrajñaḥ sarvabhūtānāṃ tasmādahamajaḥ smṛtaḥ .. Mb.; also a N. of Viṣṇu, Śiva or Brahmā.
     (2) The (individual) soul (jīva); ajo nityaḥ śāśvatoyaṃ purāṇo na hanyate hanyamāne śarīre Bg. 2. 20.
     (3) A ram, hegoat [ajena brahmaṇā dakṣayajñabhaṃgasamaye meṣarūpagrahaṇena palāyamānatvāt ajādhiṣṭhitarūpavattvāt meṣasya upacārāt ajatvaṃ Tv.].
     (4) The sign Aries.
     (5) A sort of corn or grain; ajairyaṣṭavyaṃ tatrājā vrīhayaḥ Pt. 3.
     (6) Mover, leader (Ved.), said of Indra, Maruts, Rudra &c.; a drove.
     (7) N. of a mineral substance (mākṣikadhātu).
     (8) N. of the Moon or Kāmadeva (āt viṣṇorjāyate iti; cf. caṃdramā manaso jātaḥ).
     (9) A vehicle of the sun. (10) N. of the father of Daśaratha and grand-father of Rāma; so called because he was born on the Brāhma Muhūrta.
     (11) N. of a Ṛṣi.
     -- Comp.
          --adaḥ [ajaṃ attīti; ad-ghañ] N. of the ancestor of a warrior tribe, P. IV. 1. 71.
          --adanī [ajaiḥ tṛptyā anyaiḥ duḥkhasparśatvepi adyate; ad karmaṇi lyuṭ] a kind of prickly nightshade, durālabhā (Mar. dhamāsā). --aṃtrī [ajasya aṃtramiva aṃtraṃ tadākāravatī maṃjarī yasyāḥ] N. of a pot-herb Convolvulus Argenteus, nīlabuhnā. --avikaṃ [ajāścāvayaśca teṣāṃ samāhāraḥ dvaṃdva] goats and sheep; small cattle; ajāvike tu saṃruddhe Ms. 8 235.
          --aśvaṃ goats and horses. (
          --śvaḥ) the Sun or Puṣan, who has goats for his horses.
          --ekapād-daḥ [ajasya chāgasya ekaḥ pāda iva pādo yasya] N. of one of the 11 Rudras, or of the asterism pūrvābhādrapadā presided over by that deity.
          --eḍakaṃ [ajāśca eḍakāśca teṣāṃ samāhāraḥ] goats and rams.
          --karṇaḥ, --karṇakaḥ [ajasya karṇa iva parṇaṃ yasya-svārthe kan] N. of the plant asanavṛkṣa Terminalia Alata Tomentosa; of another tree sāla Shorea Robusta.
          --gaṃdhā [ajasya gaṃdha iva gaṃdho yasyāḥ sā] the shrubby basil, vanayāmānī. --gaṃdhikā a kind of varvarīśāka (Mar. tilavaṇī, kānaphoḍī). --gaṃdhinī = ajaśṛṃgī q. v.
          --garaḥ [ajaṃ chāgaṃ girati bhakṣayati; gṝ-ac] a huge serpent (boa constrictor) who is said to swallow goats. (
          --rī) N. of a plant.
          --gala See ajāgala below.
          --gallikā [ajasya galla iva] an infantile disease (Mentagra).
          --jīvaḥ, --jīvikaḥ [ajaistaccāraṇena jīvati; ajā eva jīvikā yasya vā] a goat-herd; so
          ---paḥ, ---pālaḥ. --daṃḍī [ajasya brahmaṇo daṃḍo yasyāḥ sā] brahmadaṃḍī a kind of plant (brahmaṇo yajñārthadaṃḍasya tadīyakāṣṭhena karaṇāt tathātvaṃ). --devatā 1. N. of the 25th asterism. 2. fire, the presiding deity of goats (raudrī dhenurvinirdiṣṭā chāga āgneya ucyate). --nāmakaḥ [ajaḥ nāma yasya saḥ kap] a mineral substance.
          --patiḥ 1. the best of goats. 2. N. of Mars; lord of the sign Aries.
          --pathaḥ = ajavīthiḥ q. v.
          --padaḥ, --pād --daḥ N. of a Rudra; See ajaikapāda above.
          --baṃdhuḥ [ajasya baṃdhuriva mūrkhatvāt] a fool (silly like the goat).
          --bhakṣaḥ [ajairbhakṣyate asau bhakṣ-karmaṇi ghañ] N. of the varvarī plant (the leaves of which are very dear to goats).
          --māyu a. Ved. bleating like a goat.
          --māraḥ [ajaṃ mārayati vikrayārthaṃ; mṛ-ṇic-aṇ] 1. a butcher. 2. N. of a country (the modern Ajmeer, which, it is supposed, formerly abounded in butchers).
          --mīḍhaḥ [ajo mīḍho yajñe sikto yatra ba.] 1. N. of the place called Ajmeer. 2. N. of the eldest son of Hasti, born in the family of Puru, son of Yayati. 3. surname of Yudhiṣṭhira.
          --mukha a. goat-faced. (
          --khaḥ) N. of a Prajāpati (Daksha.) When Daksha reviled Śiva at his sacrificial session, Vīrabhadra pulled out his face, and afterwards at the request of Śiva himself he put up a goat's face in place of the original human one. (
          --khī) N. of a Rākṣasī kept to watch over Sītā in the Aśoka garden at Laṅka.
          --modā, --modikā [ajasya moda iva modo gaṃdho yasyāḥ, ajaṃ modayatīti vā] N. of a very useful medicinal plant, Common Carroway; the species called Apium Involucratum or Ligusticum Ajowan (Mar. oṃvā). --laṃbanaṃ [aja iva laṃbyate gṛhyate kṛṣṇavarṇatvāt karmaṇi lyuṭ] antimony.
          --loman, --lomī --mā [ajasya lomeva loma maṃjarī yasya-syā vā] cowage, Carpopogen Pruriens.
          --vastiḥ [ajasya vastiriva vastiryasya] N. of a sage, or of a tribe sprung from him.
          --vīthiḥ --thī f. [ajena brahmaṇā nirmitā vīthiḥ śāka. ta.] one of the three divisions of the southern path comprehending the three asterisms mūla, pūrvāṣāḍhā and uttarāṣāḍhā; a sort of heavenly passage (gaganasetu, yamanālā); pitṛyāno'javīthyāśca yadagastyasya cāṃtaraṃ Y. 3. 184. 2. goat's path.
          --śṛṃgī [ajasya meṣasya śṛṃgamiva phalaṃ yasyāḥ sā] N. of plant, viṣāṇī or Odina Wodier, highly medicinal, (Mar. meṃḍhaśiṃgī), See meṣaśṛṃgī.

ajakā = ajikā below.

ajanam [aj bhāve lyuṭ] Moving, driving. --naḥ Brahma; -yonijaḥ born from Brahmā i. e. Daksha.

ajaniḥ [aj-ani] A path, road.

ajā [na jāyate ityajā]
     (1) (According to Saṅkhya philosophy) Prakṛti or Maya; the verse which refers to ajā, (ajāmekāṃ lohitaśuklakṛṣṇāṃ &c.) is interpreted by the Vedantins as referring to the prakṛti consisting of tejas, ap and anna, See S. B.
     (2) A she-goat.
     -- Comp.
          --galastanaḥ the fleshy protuberance or nipple hanging down from the neck of goats; (fig.) an emblem of anything worthless or useless; dharmārtha kāmamokṣāṇāṃ yasyaikopi na vidyate . -stanasyeva tasya janma nirarthakaṃ .. stanavadavalaṃbate yaḥ kaṃṭhe 'jānāṃ maṇiḥ sa vijñeyaḥ Br. S. 65. 3.
          --jīvaḥ, --pālakaḥ a goat-herd, See ajajīva &c.
          --taulvaliḥ [śāka- gaṇa] N. of a sage who lived on the milk of goats (ajādugdhena vartamānaḥ).

ajakā, --ajikā(svārthe kan ṭāp)
     (1) A young she-goat.
     (2) [ajasya vikāraḥ avayavaḥ galastanaḥ purīṣaṃ vā] The fleshy protuberance on the neck, or its excrement. --3. A disease of the pupil of the eye.
     -- Comp.
          --jātaḥ [ajakeva jātaḥ] the above disease, (ajāpurīṣapratimo rujāvān salohito lohitapicchilāsraḥ . vidārya kṛṣṇaṃ pracayo'bhyupaiti taṃ cājakājātamiti vyavasyet ..

ajakavaḥ --vam The bow of Śiva(śivo hi anenaiva dhanuṣā tripurāsurasya vadhena ajaṃ viṣṇuṃ kaṃ brahmāṇaṃ ca avāt prīṇayāmāsa iti tasya dhanuṣo 'jakavatvaṃ, ajakau vātīti Tv.)

ajakāvaḥ --vam
     (1) Śiva's bow.
     (2) [ajakaṃ chāgaṃ vāti prīṇāti; vā-ka] N. of the tree varvarī, of which goats are said to be very fond.
     (3) [ajakā ajāgalastanaiva vāti prakāśate vā-ka] A sacrificial vessel of wood (of the form of ajāgala) dedicated to Mitra and Varuṇa (--vaṃ in this sense) maitrāvaruṇapātraṃ.
     (4) A disease of the pupil of the eye = ajakājāta q. v.
     (5) A venomous kind of vermin (ajakā rogaviśeṣaḥ, tadviṣaṃ).

ajagam [ajaṃ viṣṇuṃ gacchati śaratvena gam-ḍa] Śiva's bow. --gaḥ
     (1) [ajena brahmaṇā gamyate gīyate vā, karmaṇi gam-ḍa, gai-ka] N. of Viṣṇu.
     (2) [ajena gacchati ajaṃ chāgaṃ yajñāṃgatvena gacchati vā] Fire.

ajagara See under aja.

ajagavam [ajago viṣṇuḥ śaratvena astyasya ajaga-va P. V. 2. 110] Śiva's bow, Pināka.

ajagāvaḥ [ajagaṃ viṣṇuṃ avati av-aṇ]
     (1) Śiva's bow.
     (2) The southern portion of the path of the sun, moon and planets.
     (3) N. of a snake-priest.

ajaṭā [nāsti jaṭā śiphā yasyāḥ sā] N. of a plant bhūmyālakī or kapikacchū, See ajjhaṭā.

ajaḍa a. Not stupid. --ḍā N. of the plants ajaṭā, kapikacchū (ajaḍayati sparśamātrāt).

ajathyā [ajāya hitā ajathyā; ajathyan] P. V. 1. 8]
     (1) N. of the yellow jasmine yūthikā.
     (2) A flock of goats.

ajana --ni See under aj.

ajana a. [na. ba.] Destitute of men, tenantless, desert. --naḥ [kutsitārthe nañ] A bad or insignificant person.

ajananiḥ f. [nañ jan-ākrośe ani P. III. 3. 112] Cessation of existence; tasyājananirevāstu jananīkleśakāriṇaḥ Śi. 2. 45 may he not be born, may he cease to exist!

ajanman a. Unborn, epithet of the Unborn Being, the Eternal being; puruṣasya padeṣvajanmanaḥ R. 8. 78. --m. [nāsti janma yatra] Final beatitude, absolution; tasmātsa yogādadhigamya yogamajanmane'kalpata janmabhīruḥ R. 18. 33.

ajanya a. Not fit to be produced; not favourable to mankind. --nyaṃ [laukikahetubhirna janyate; jan-ṇic-yat] A portentous phenomenon, inauspicious to mankind, such as earth-quake.

ajapaḥ [aspaṣṭaṃ japati niṃdārthe nañ, jap. ac] A Brāhmaṇa who does not (properly) repeat his prayers (kupāṭhaka); ajapā brāhmaṇāstāta śūdrā japaparāyaṇāḥ . bhaviṣyaṃti kalau Mb.; one who reads heretical works. --pā [prayatnena na japyā aprayatnoccāritatvāt; karmaṇi ac] N. of a Mantra called haṃsa, which consists of a number of inhalations and exhalations (śvāsapraśvāsayoḥ bahirgamanāgamanābhyāṃ akṣaraniṣpādanarūpo japaḥ, sa ca haṃsaḥ sohaṃ ityākāra eva; ucchvāsaireva niśvāsairhaṃsa ityakṣaradvayaṃ . tasmātprāṇaśca haṃsākhya ātmākāreṇa saṃsthitaḥ ..

ajaṃbha a. [nāsti jaṃbho daṃto yasya] Toothless. --bhaḥ
     (1) A frog.
     (2) The sun.
     (3) Toothless state (of a child).

ajaya a. [nāsti parairjayo yasya] Invincible, unsurpassed, unconquerable. --yaḥ [na. ta.] A defeat; lābhālābhau jayājayau Bg. 2. 38.
     (2) N. of Agni (ajena chāgena yāti; yā-ka), or of Viṣṇu (according to some); of a lexicographer. --yā [nāsti jayo mādakatvena asyāṃ]
     (1) Hemp or bhāṃga.
     (2) N. of a friend of Durgā.
     (3) Māyā or illusion.

ajayya a. [na. ta.] Invincible; sakhyuste sa kila śatakratorajayyaḥ S. 6. 29, R. 18. 8.
     (2) Not proper to be won at play; -yyaṃ jigāya tān Bopadeva.

ajara a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Not subject to old age or decay; ever young; ajaraṃ vṛddhatvaṃ K. 103; cf. vṛddhatvaṃ jarayā vinā R. 1. 23.
     (2) Undecaying, imperishable; purāṇamajaraṃ viduḥ R. 10. 19; anaṃtamajaraṃ brahma Bh. 3. 76, H. Pr. 3, Pt. 1. 151, Ms. 2. 148. --raḥ
     (1) A god (who is not subject to old age).
     (2) N. of a plant vṛddhadāraka or jīrṇaphaṃjī (-rā also). --rā
     (1) N. of a plant gṛhakanyā or ghṛtakumārī Aloe Perfoliata.
     (2) A house-lizard (godhālikā). --raṃ [na jīryate kṣīyate jṝ-ac] The Supreme Spirit.

ajarya a. [na jīryati; jṝ kartari yat P. III. 1. 105]
     (1) Not digestible.
     (2) Not decaying, imperishable, everlasting, perpetual. --ryaṃ (with saṃgataṃ expressed or understood) Friendship; mṛgairajaryaṃ jarasopadiṣṭaṃ R. 18. 7.

ajarat, --rayu, --ras a. Ved. Not old.

ajavas a. [ju-asun] Not quick, inactive.

ajastuṃdam [ajasya iva tuṃdaṃ asya suṭ nipātoyaṃ] N. of a town, P. VI. 1. 155.

ajasra a. [na jas-ra P. III. 2. 167; jasirnañpūrvaḥ kriyāsātatye vartate Sk.] Not ceasing, constant, perpetual; -dīkṣāprayatasya R. 3. 44. --sraṃ ind. Ever, constantly, perpetually; vṛthaiva saṃkalpaśatairajasraṃ S. 3. 5; tacca dhūnotyajasraṃ U. 4. 26.

ajahatsvārthā [na jahat svārtho'tra, hāśatṛ na. ba.] A kind of lakṣaṇā, in which the primary or original sense of a word (which is used elliptically) does not disappear; as kuṃtāḥ praviśaṃti = kuṃtadhāriṇaḥ puruṣāḥ; śveto dhāvati = śvetavarṇo 'śvo dhāvati; also called upādānalakṣaṇā q. v.; svasiddhaye parākṣepaḥ; kuṃtāḥ praviśaṃti, yaṣṭayaḥ praviśaṃti ityādau kuṃtādibhirātmanaḥ praveśasiddhyarthaṃ svasaṃyoginaḥ puruṣā ākṣipyaṃte K. P. 2.

ajahalliṃgam [na jahat liṃgaṃ yaṃ; hā-śatṛ] A noun which does not change its original gender, even when used like an adjective; e. g. vedaḥ or śrutiḥ pramāṇaṃ (not pramāṇaḥ or -ṇā).

ajahā [na jahāti śūkān hā-śa.] N. of a plant, cowage, Carpopogon Pruriens.

ajāgara a. [na. ba.] Not wakeful, not requiring keeping up. --raḥ [jāgarayatīti jāgaraḥ na jāgaro yasmāt] A plant, Verbesina Prostrata (bhṛṃgarājavṛkṣa) (sevanena nidrārāhityakārakaḥ, yadapekṣayā anyasmin jāgaraṇakartṛtvaṃ nāsti.)

ajājiḥ --jī f. [ajena chāgena vīyate gaṃdhotkaṭatvāt tyajyate, aj-in vībhāvābhāvaḥ] Cumin seed (śvetajīraka); kṛṣṇajīraka Nigella Indica; kākoduṃbarikā Ficus Oppositifolia.

ajāta [na. ta.] Unborn; ajātamṛtamūrkhebhyo mṛtājātau sutau varaṃ Pt. 1.; not yet born, produced, or fully developed; -kakud, -pakṣa &c.
     -- Comp.
          --ari, --śatru a. [na jātaḥ śatruḥ asya; jātasya jaṃtumātrasya na śatruḥ] having no enemy or adversary, not an enemy of any one. (
          --riḥ --truḥ) epithet of Yudhiṣṭhira; haṃta jātamajātāreḥ prathamena tvayāriṇā Śi. 2. 102; na dvekṣi yajjanamatastvamajātaśatruḥ Ve. 3. 13; also of Śiva and various other persons.
          --kakut-d m. (ba.) a young bull whose hump is not yet fully developed, P. V. 4. 146.
          --daṃta a. [na jātā daṃtā yasya yasmin vayasi vā] one without teeth, or (a state) in which one has got no teeth.
          --pakṣa a. having undeveloped or unfledged wings.
          --vyaṃjana a. having no distinctive marks or features (as a beard.)
          --vyavahāraḥ a minor (who has not attained his majority.

ajāti a. [na. ba.] 1 Having no caste, race &c.
     (2) Eternal, not produced. --ti f. Non-production.

ajāniḥ [nāsti jāyā yasya] Without a wife; a widower.

ajānika a. [ajena tadvikrayapālanādinā āno jīvanaṃ astyasya; ṭhan Tv.] A goat-herd.

ajāneya a. Of high breed, powerful, fearless, undaunted (as a horse). --yaḥ A horse of high breed. See ājāneya.

ajāpakvam N. of a sort of medicinal preparation of ghee (used as a remedy against cough, asthma, consumption &c.) (ajādugdhādibhyojātaṃ).

ajāmi a. Ved. [na. ta.]
     (1) Not of kin or related; yatra jāmayaḥ kṛṇavannajāmi Rv. 10. 10. 10 (ajāmikarmāṇi bhrātṛṇāṃ ajāmiyogyāni maithunasaṃbaṃdhānikarmāṇi kariṣyaṃti Nir.)
     (2) Not parallel or correct.

aji a. [ajati; aj-i Uṇ. 4. 139] Going, moving; as padājiḥ walking on foot. --jiḥ f. [bhāve in]
     (1) Motion, going.
     (2) Throwing &c.

ajita a. Invincible, unconquerable, irresistible; -taṃ puṇyaṃ ... mahaḥ U. 5. 27.
     (2) Not conquered or won (as a country &c.); not restrained, curbed, controlled, -ātman; -iṃdriya of uncontrolled soul or passion. --taḥ
     (1) N. of Viṣṇu or Śiva or of Buddha.
     (2) N. of a powerful antidote, or a poisonous sort of rat. --(pl.) A class of deities in the first Manvantara.
     -- Comp.
          --āpīḍaḥ having an invincible crown; N. of a King.
          --balā N. of a Jaina deity who acts under orders from the Arhat Ajita.
          --vikramaḥ 'of unsubdued power', N. of Chandragupta II.

ajinam [ajati kṣipati rajaādi āvaraṇena; aj-inac, ajeraja ca Uṇ. 2. 48, vībhāvabādhanārthaṃ]
     (1) The (hairy) skin of a tiger, lion, elephant &c., especially of a black antelope (used as a seat, garment &c.); athājināṣāḍhadharaḥ Ku. 5. 30, 67, Ki. 11. 15; aiṇeyenājinena brāhmaṇaṃ rauraveṇa kṣatriyaṃ ājinena vaiśyaṃ Asval.
     (2) A sort of leather bag or bellows.
     -- Comp.
          --patrā --trī --trikā [ajinaṃ carmaiva suśliṣṭaṃ patraṃ pakṣo yasyāḥ sā, gaurā- ṅīp svārthe kan] a bat.
          --phalā [ajinaṃ bhastreva phalaṃ yasyāḥ sā] N. of a plant (bhastrākāraphalo vṛkṣaḥ). --yoniḥ [ajinasya yoniḥ prabhavaḥ] a deer, an antelope.
          --vāsin a. [ajinaṃ vaste, vas ṇini] clad in an antelope-hide.
          --saṃdhaḥ [ajinaṃ saṃdadhāti] a furrier.

ajira a. [aj gatau kiran vībhāvābhāvaḥ Uṇ. 1. 53.] Quick, swift (śīghra) --raḥ
     (1) A sort of mouse, hairy mole.
     (2) A kind of ceremony in pronouncing curses. --raṃ
     (1) A court-yard, an enclosed space, arena; uṭajājiraprakīrṇa K. 39, Ki. 1. 16; so raṇa-, gṛha- &c.
     (2) The body.
     (3) Any object of sense.
     (4) The wind, air.
     (5) A frog. --rā
     (1) N. of a river.
     (2) N. of Durgā. --raḥ N. of a snake priest.
     -- Comp.
          --adhirājaḥ [karma-] Ved. 'a quick emperor,' epithet of death.
          --śocis a. [ajiraṃ śociryasya] glittering, having tremulous or flashing light.

ajirīya a. [ajiraṃ utkarā- cha] Connected with a court.

ajihma a. [na. ta.]
     (1) Straight.
     (2) Upright, straight-forward, honest; ajihmāmaśaṭhāṃ śuddhāṃ jīvet brāhmaṇajīvikāṃ Ms. 4. 11, 7. 32; -gāmibhiḥ Śi. 1. 63 straight and honest, 3. 57, 9. 62. --hmaḥ
     (1) A frog.
     (2) A fish (probably a corruption of ajihva below).
     -- Comp.
          --ga a. [upa. sa.] going straight on; vrajeddiśamajihmagaḥ Ms. 6. 31 (
          --gaḥ) an arrow.

ajihvaḥ [na. ba.] A frog (which is supposed to have been deprived of its tongue by the curse of Agni whom frogs had offended.)

ajīkavam [ajyā śarakṣepaṇena kaṃ brahmāṇaṃ vāti prīṇāti; vā-ka] Śiva's bow.

ajīgartaḥ [ajyai gamanāya gartaṃ asya]
     (1) (One that has a hole to go into) a serpent.
     (2) N. of a Brāhmaṇa in the family of bhṛgu and father of śunaḥśepha.

ajīta a. [na. ta.] Not faded or withered, not faint.
     -- Comp.
          --punarvaṇyaṃ N. of a two-fold rite to be performed by Kshatriyas (aprāptaprāptikaraṇārtho vidhiḥ).

ajītiḥ f. Prosperity, freedom from decay.

ajīrṇa a. Undigested; undecomposed. --rṇaṃ, --rṇiḥ f.
     (1) Indigestion; ajīrṇe bheṣajaṃ vāri jīrṇe vāri balapradam, ajīrṇe bhojanaṃ viṣaṃ; kairajīrṇabhayādbhrātarbhojanaṃ parihīyate H. 2. 57, Ms. 4. 121.
     (2) Vigour, energy, absence of decay.

ajīva a. [na. ba.] Devoid of life; lifeless, as a jar or a dead person. --vaḥ [na. ta.]
     (1) Non-existence, death.
     (2) (With Jainas) All that is not a living soul, i. e. the whole of jaḍa or inanimate and unsentient substance (opp. jīva).

ajīvana a. [na. ba.] Devoid of livelihood. --naṃ Non-existence, death.

ajīvaniḥ f. [na-jīv-ani P. III. 3 112]
     (1) Death, non-existence (used as an imprecation); ajīvaniste śaṭha bhūyāt Sk. may death seize thee, rogue! mayest thou cease to live!

ajura --rya a. [aj-kurac na vyādeśaḥ] Ved. Not subject to decay or old age; strong, very swift or speedy.

ajuṣṭiḥ f. Non-enjoyment; feeling of dissatisfaction or disappointment.

ajeya a. [na. ta.] Not fit to be conquered. --yaṃ A sort of medicinal preparation of ghee said to serve as an antidote; pibet ghṛtamajeyākhyaṃ Sus.

ajoṣa a. [na. ta.] Not gratified or satisfied.

ajju(jjū)kā  [arjayati yā sā, arjūka, pṛ. rakārasya jatvam Tv.] A courtezan (used only in dramas.).

ajjhaṭā [Said to be fr. aj] N. of a plant bhūmyāmalakīṃ Flacourtia Cataphracta.

     (1) A shield.
     (2) A live coal.

ajña a. [na jānāti, jñā-ka, na. ta.]
     (1) Not knowing, unaware of, unconscious, devoid of knowledge or experience; ajño bhavati vai bālaḥ Ms. 2. 153; jñājñau (jñaḥ īśvaraḥ ajñaḥ jīvaḥ) the knowing and unknowing, supreme and individual soul.
     (2) Ignorant, unwise, foolish, silly, stupid (said of men as well as animals); ajñaḥ sukhamārādhyaḥ Bh. 2. 3, Pt. 2. 3.
     (3) Inanimate; not endowed with the power of understanding (acetana.)

ajñakā [svārthe kan] An ignorant woman.

ajñāta a. Unknown, unexpected, unconscious, unaware; -bhukta Ms. 5. 21 eaten unconsciously or unawares; -kulaśīlasya whose family and character are unknown; -pātaṃ salile mamajja R. 16. 72.
     -- Comp.
          --ketu a. [ba] Ved. of secret designs.
          --caryā, --vāsaḥ remaining incognito (said of the Pāṇḍavas); haṃsāḥ saṃprati pāṃḍavā iva vanādajñātacaryāṃ gatāḥ Mk. 5. 6.

ajñātiḥ [na. ta.] Not a kinsman.

ajñāna a. [na. ba.] Ignorant, unwise. --naṃ [na. ta.] Ignorance, unconsciousness; especially, spiritual ignorance (avidyā) which makes one consider his self as distinct from the Supreme spirit and the material world as a reality. According to the Vedāntins, ajñāna is not merely a negative principle (jñānasya abhāvaḥ), but a distinct positive principle; oft. identified with māyā, prakṛti &c. See avidyā also. In compounds ajñāna may be translated by 'unawares,' 'inadvertently,' 'unconsciously'; -ācarita, -uccārita &c.; -nataḥ, --nena, -nāt unawares, inadvertently, unconsciously, unwillingly; -taḥ svacaritaṃ nṛpatiḥ śaśaṃsa R. 9. 77 committed unintentionally or unconsciously.

ajñānin = ajña above.

ajman f. [ajati gacchati svargaṃ dānena anayā, aj-karaṇe manin na vībhāvaḥ] A cow. --n. Career, passage; battle; house (?)

ajyeṣṭha a. Not the eldest or best, having no elder brothers; -vṛtti not acting like the eldest brother; or acting like one who has no elder brother.

ajra a. [fr. aj to go] Ved. Agile, quick. --jraḥ A field, plain. [cf. L. ager; Gr. agros.]

ajvin a. Ved. [fr. aj] Quick, agile, active.

aṃc 1 U. (aṃcu) (aṃcati-te, ānaṃcace, aṃcituṃ, acyāt or aṃcyāt, akta or aṃcita)
     (1) To bend, incline, curl, curve; śiroṃcitvā Bk. 9. 40.
     (2) To go, move, tend towards; svataṃtrā kathamaṃcasi Bk. 4. 22; also in avāṃc tending downward, prāṃc, udaṃc; viṣvagaṃcati, sahāṃcati, tiroṃcati &c.; tasminnadya rasālaśākhini daśāṃ daivāt kṛśāmaṃcati Bv. 1. 48 having gone, being reduced, to &c.; tvaṃ cedaṃcasi lobhaṃ 46 art greedy; saṃkocamaṃcati saraḥ 17.
     (3) To worship, honour, reverence; bhīmoyaṃ śirasāṃcati Ve. 5. 27 salutes; to adorn, grace; See aṃcita below.
     (4) To request, ask or call for, desire.
     (5) To murmur, speak indistinctly. --Caus. or 10 U. To manifest, unfold; mudamaṃcaya Gīt. 10. [cf. Zend anku; Gr. ankulos; L. uncus.] With apa to put away, drive away; (intr.) to run away. --ā to bend; dakṣiṇaṃ jānvācya; jānvāka with bent knees. --upa to draw or raise (water). --pari to cause to revolve, whirl, twist. --vi to draw or bend asunder; to extend, stretch out. --saṃ to crowd or drive together, to bend together, See samakna also; to go properly.

aṃcita pp.
          (a) Curved, bent; -utthita Dk. 125 bent and raised; kiṃcidaṃcitāṃ dṛṣṭiṃ saṃcārayaṃtī 143 bent or oblique look; dorlīlāṃcitacaṃdraśekharadhanuḥ Mv. 1. 54 bent; -savyajānuḥ R. 18. 51, Bk. 2. 31, 9. 40; -lāṃgūlaḥ (kapiḥ), -skaṃdhaḥ (vṛkṣaḥ).
          (b) Arched and handsome (as eyebrows); -akṣipakṣman R. 5. 76; crisped, curled (as hair); svasitāṃcitamūrdhajā Mb.
     (2) Gone.
     (3) Honoured; adorned, graced, graceful, handsome, dordaṃḍāṃcitamahimā Mv. 7. 8 graced, adorned; gateṣu līlāṃcitavikrameṣu Ku. 1. 34 sportively handsome; -tābhyāṃ gatābhyāṃ R. 2. 18, līlāṃcitabhrūlatā Dk. 124, 151; samadhuraṃ madhuraṃcitavikramaḥ R. 9. 24 of esteemed or adorable prowess; Ki. 15. 53.
     (4) Sewn or woven, arranged; ardhāṃcitā satvaramutthitāyāḥ (raśanā) R. 7. 10 halfstrung or woven (guṃphita Malli.).
     -- Comp.
          --patraṃ [ba.] a lotus with curved leaves.
          --bhrūḥ a woman having arched or handsome eyebrows.

aṃcatiḥ [aṃc-gatau kartari ati]
     (1) Wind.
     (2) Fire.
     (3) One who goes.

aṃcalaḥ --lam [aṃcati prāṃtaṃ; aṃc-alac]
     (1) The border or end (of a garment), skirt or hem (Mar. padara); kṣīṇāṃcalamiva pīnastanajaghanāyāḥ Udbhata.
     (2) Corner or outer angle (as of the eye); dṛgaṃcalaiḥ paśyati kevalaṃ manāk ibid.; yadi calāṃcale locane Mv. 6. 9.

aṃj 7 P. (rarely A.) (anakti or aṃkte, ānaṃja, aṃjiṣyati-aṃkṣyati, aṃjitvā-aṃktvā-attavā, aṃjituṃ, aṃktuṃ, akta)
     (1) To anoint, smear with, bedaub.
     (2) To make clear, show, represent, characterize; mā nāṃjī rākṣasīrmāyāḥ Bk. 9. 49
     (3) To go.
     (4) To shine, be beautiful.
     (5) To honour, celebrate.
     (6) To decorate. --Caus.
     (1) To smear with, nāṃjayaṃtīṃ svake netre Ms. 4. 44.
     (2) To speak or shine.
     (3) To cause to go. [cf. Zend anj; L. unctum, ungo.] --With adhi to fit out, equip, furnish. --ā 1. to anoint, smear. 2. to smooth, polish, prepare. 3. to honour, respect. --ni 1. to smear. 2. to conceal or hide oneself. --prati 1. to smear. 2. to adorn, decorate. --saṃ 1. to smear. 2. to fit out, equip, harness. 3. to honour. 4. to join together, to consume, devour; to adorn, decorate, beautify (mostly Ved. in these senses). 5. to unite, to put together, compose.

     (1) A kind of lizard.
     (2) N. of a tree or mountain.
     (3) N. of the guardian elephant (of the west or s. w.) --naṃ [ajyate anena; aṃj lyuṭ]
     (1) Anointing, smearing with; daṃtadhāvanamaṃjanaṃ pūrvāhṇa eva kurvīta Ms. 4. 152; mixing; unfolding, manifesting.
     (2) Collyrium or black pigment used to paint the eye-lashes; vilocanaṃ dakṣiṇamaṃjanena saṃbhāvya R. 7. 8 salve; amṛta- U. 4. 19 ambrosial salve; kurvan -mecakā iva diśo meghaḥ samuttiṣṭhate Mk. 5. 8, 1. 34; (fig. also) ajñānāṃdhasya lokasya jñānāṃjanaśalākayā . cakṣurunmīlitaṃ yena tasmai pāṇinaye namaḥ Śik. 45; paṭutaravivekāṃjanajuṣāṃ Bh. 3. 84; cf. also dāridryaṃ paramāṃjanaṃ; (fig.) impurity, as in niraṃjana, q. v.
     (3) Paint, a cosmetic ointment.
     (4) Magic ointment.
     (5) A special kind of material of the black pigment, such as antimony (used as collyrium, lamp-black &c. (sauvīra)
     (6) Ink.
     (7) Fire.
     (8) Night.
     (9) (naṃ nā) (Rhet.) A suggested meaning; also the process by which such meaning is suggested. It is the power of suggestion (founded on abhidhā or lakṣaṇā denotation or indication), by which something else is understood from a word which, though having more meanings than one, has been restricted to a single meaning by relations of conjunction, disjunction &c. (saṃyoga, viprayoga, sāhacarya, virodhitā &c.), or, briefly, the use of a word of several meanings in a special sense determined by the context; e. g. saśaṃkhacakro hariḥ the adjective restricts Hari to mean 'Viṣṇu' alone, and not 'a lion' or 'monkey'; so rāmalakṣmaṇau dāśarathī, rāmārjunau bhārgavakārtavīryau &c.; cf. anekārthasya śabdasya vācakatve niyaṃtrite . saṃyogādyairavācyārthadhīkṛdvyāpṛtiraṃjanaṃ .. K. P. 2., S. D. 23--6; See vyaṃjanā also.
     -- Comp.
          --adhikā [aṃjanādadhikā kṛṣṇatvāt] a kind of lizard.
          --adriḥ-giriḥ (karma. [aṃjanamiva kṛṣṇaḥ giriḥ] N. of a mountain, See nīlagiri. --aṃbhas n. eye-water.
          --keśī [aṃjanamiva keśo yasyāḥ] N. of a vegetable perfume (haṭṭavilāsinīnāmakaṃ gaṃdhadravyaṃ yatsaṃyogātkeśasyātīva kṛṣṇatvaṃ (Mar. nakhalā). --nāmakā [ṣa. ta.] a swelling of the eye-lid, stye.
          --śalākā a stick or pencil for the application of collyrium.

aṃjanakaḥ A portion of the Vedas containing the word aṃjana. --kī N. of a medicinal plant.

aṃjanā N. of the female elephant of the north.
     (2) N. of the mother of Māruti or Hanūmat. [She was the daughter of a monkey named Kunjara and wife of Kesarin, another monkey. She was in a former birth a celestial nymph by name Punjikasthali and was born on earth owing to a curse. One day while she was seated on the summit of a mountain, her garment was slightly displaced, and the God of Wind being enamoured of her beauty assumed a visible form, and asked her to yield to his desires. She requested him not to violate her chastity, to which he consented; but he told her that she would conceive a son equal to himself in strength and lustre by virtue of his amorous desire fixed on her, and then disappeared. In course of time Añjanā conceived and brought forth a son who was called Māruti being the son of Māruta.]

aṃjanāvatī [aṃjanaṃ vidyate asyāḥ adhikakṛṣṇavarṇatvāt]
     (1) N. of the female elephant of the north-east quarter.
     (2) N. of a tree kālāṃjanavṛkṣa.

aṃjanikā [aṃjanā svārthe kan]
     (1) A species of lizard; a small mouse.
     (2) N. of the mate of the elephant supratīka.

aṃjanī [ajyate caṃdanakuṃkumādibhirasau, aṃj-karmaṇi-lyuṭ ṅīp]
     (1) A woman decorated with the application of pigments, ointments, sandal &c., or one fit for such application.
     (2) [karaṇe-lyuṭ] N. of two plants kaṭukāvṛkṣa and kālāṃjanavṛkṣa.

aṃjaliḥ [aṃj-ali Uṇ. 4. 2]
     (1) A cavity formed by folding and joining the open hands together, the hollow of the hands; hence, a cavity-ful of anything (changed to aṃjala or -li after dvi and tri in dvigu comp., P. V. 4. 102); na vāryaṃjalinā pibet Ms. 4. 63; supūro mūṣikāṃjaṃliḥ Pt. 1. 25; araṇyabījāṃjalidānalālitāḥ Ku. 5. 15; prakīrṇaḥ puṣpāṇāṃ haricaraṇayoraṃjāleraṃyaṃ Ve. 1. 1 a cavityful of flowers; so jalasyāṃjalayo daśa Y. 3. 105 10 cavity-fuls or libations of water; śravaṇāṃjalipuṭapeyaṃ Ve. 1. 4 to be drunk by the cavity of the ear; aṃjaliṃ rac, baṃdh, kṛ or ādhā fold the hands together and raise them to the head in supplication or salutation; baddhaḥ kātaryādaraviṃdakuḍmalanibho mugdhaḥ praṇāmāṃjaliḥ U. 3. 37.
     (2) Hence a mark of respect or salutation; kaḥ śakreṇa kṛtaṃ necchedadhimūrdhānamaṃjalim Bk. 8. 84; badhyatāmabhayayācanāṃjaliḥ R. 11. 78.
     (3) A measure of corn = kuḍava; another measure = prasṛta, or one-half of a mānikā.
     -- Comp.
          --karman n. folding the hands, respectful salutation; lubdhamarthena gṛhṇīyāt kruddhaṃ cāṃjalikarmaṇā Chāṇ. 33.
          --kārikā 1. an earthen doll making the aṃjali (?). 2. N. of a plant, Mimosa Pudica (lajjālu). --puṭaḥ-ṭaṃ the cavity formed by joining the hands together; hollowed palms of the hand.

aṃjalikā [aṃjaliriva kāyate prakāśate; kai-ka ṭāp Tv.] A small mouse. --kaḥ N. of one of Arjuna's arrows.

aṃjas n. (--jaḥ) [anaktiṃ gacchati miśrayati vā anena; aṃj gatau miśraṇe ca asan] Speed, velocity, strength; fitness, propriety; ointment, preparation (?).
     -- Comp.
          --pā drinking Soma offering.
          --savaḥ rapid preparation of Soma.

aṃjasa a. [aṃj-asac] Not crooked, straight; honest, upright.

aṃjasā adv. (instr. of aṃjas)
     (1) Straight on.
     (2) Truly, correctly, accurately, properly, justly, rightly; sākṣād dṛṣṭosi na punarvidmastvāṃ vayamaṃjasā Ku. 6. 22 we do not know you rightly or correctly; vidmahe śaṭha palāyanacchalānyaṃjasā R. 19. 31, na hi kaścitpriyaḥ strīṇāmaṃjasā Subhāṣita; sarvamevāṃjasā vada Ms. 8. 101.
     (3) Directly (sākṣāt),
     (4) Soon, quickly, instantly; sa gacchatyaṃjasā sadma śāśvataṃ Ms. 2. 244.
     -- Comp.
          --ayana a. going straight on.
          --kṛta a. [tṛ. aluk] done rightly or justly.

aṃjasīna a. [aṃjas-kha] Ved. Straightforward, going straight on.

aṃji a. Ved. [aṃj-in] Unctuous, slimy; lubricated; shining, brilliant. --jiḥ
     (1) A mark made with sandal &c. a Tilaka mark; rohitāṃjiranaḍvān Yaj. (raktatilaka).
     (2) A commander, sender &c. --jiḥ --jī f.
     (1) An ointment, pigment.
     (2) Colour, hue.
     (3) The sexual organ (?).
     -- Comp.
          --saktha a. having coloured thighs.

aṃjiva a. Slippery, smooth(?)

aṃjiṣṭhaḥ --ṣṇuḥ [anakti svakiraṇaiḥ viśvaṃ; aṃjiṣṭhac-iṣṇuc Uṇ. 4. 2] The sun.

akta pp. Smeared over, bedaubed, anointed &c.; mostly as latter part of compounds; ghṛta-, taila-, śoṇita- &c. --ktā Night.

aṃjī [aṃji, vā ṅīp]
     (1) A blessing, auspicious desire.
     (2) A pounding machine (peṣaṇayaṃtraṃ).

aṃjīraḥ --ram [aṃj-bāhu-īran; perhaps a Persian word]. A species of the fig-tree and its fruit.

aṭ 1 P. (rarely A.) (aṭati, āṭa, aṭituṃ, aṭita). To wander or roam about (with loc.); roam over (sometimes with acc.); bho baṭo bhikṣāmaṭa Sk. go to beg alms; āṭa naikaṭikāśramān Bk. 4. 12; mahīmaṭan Dk. 38 --desid. aṭiṭiṣati; --freq. aṭāṭyate to wander about habitually, as a religious mendicant.

aṭa a. Wandering; kṣapāṭaḥ Bk. 2. 30 a night-roamer.

aṭanam Wandering, roaming; bhikṣā-, rātri- &.

aṭaniḥ --nī f. [aṭati maurvīṃ; aṭ-ani vā ṅīp] The notched extremity of a bow; sumanaso namayannaṭanau dhanuḥ N. 4. 96; ninyatuḥ sthalaniveśitāṭanī līlayaiva dhanuṣī adhijyatāṃ R. 11. 14.

aṃṭā [aṭ vā aṅ] The habit of roaming about (as a religious mendicant); so aṭyā, aṭāṭyā.

aṭala a. [na. ta.] Firm, steady, solid.

aṭaru --rū --ṣaḥ (Ety. doubtful) N. of a very useful medicinal plant, the shrub vāsaka Justicia Adhatoda, or Adhatoda Vasika (Mar. aḍuLasā).

aṭaviḥ --vī f. [aṭaṃti carame vayasi mṛgayāvihārādyarthe vā yatra; aṭ ani, vā ṅīp] A forest, wood; āhiṃḍyate aṭhavyā aṭavīṃ S. 2.

aṭavikaḥ A forester = āṭavikaḥ q. v.

aṭṭ 1 A.
     (1) To kill.
     (2) To transgress, go beyond (fig. also). --Caus.
     (1) To lessen, diminish.
     (2) To despise, contemn, disregard.

aṭṭa a. [aṭṭayati anādriyate anyat yatra; aṭṭ-ghañ]
     (1) High, lofty; loud.
     (2) Frequent, constant (in comp).
     (3) Dried, dry. --ṭṭaḥ --ṭṭaṃ [ādhāre ghañ]
     (1) An apartment on the roof or upper story, a garret.
     (2) A turret, buttress, tower; gopura- Mal. 9. 1; nareṃdramārgāṭṭaiva R. 6. 67, 16. 11.
     (3) A market-place, market (probably for haṭṭa).
     (4) A fine linen cloth.
     (5) A palace, palatial building.
     (6) Killing, injuring.
     (7) Excess, superiority. --ṭṭaṃ Food, boiled rice; aṭṭaśūlā janapadāḥ Mb. (aṭṭaṃ annaṃ śūlaṃ vikreyaṃ yeṣāṃ te Nīlakaṇṭha).
     -- Comp.
          --aṭṭahāsaḥ very loud laughter.
          --sthalī [aṭṭapradhānā sthalī śāka. ta.] a place or country full of palaces &c.
          --hāsaḥ, --hasitaṃ, --hāsyaṃ [karma-] a loud or boisterous laughter, a horse-laugh, cachinnation, usually of Śiva; tryaṃbakasya Me. 58; giriśa- Dk. 1.
          --hāsin [aṭṭaṃ hasati-has-ṇini] 1. N. of Śiva. 2. one who laughs very loudly.
          --hāsakaḥ [aṭṭahāsena kāyate; kai-ka] N. of a plant (kuṃda) Jasminum Multiflorum or Hirsutum (śubhrapuṣpatvācchubhrahāsatulyatā).

aṭṭakaḥ An apartment on the roof of a house; a palace also.

aṭṭaṭṭa ind. [aṭṭo'nādaraḥ aṭṭaprakāraḥ aṭṭasya guṇavācitayā dvitvaṃ śakaṃdhvā- pararūpaṃ Tv.] Very loud.

aṭṭanam [aṭṭyate anādriyate ripuranena, aṭṭakaraṇe lyuṭ] A weapon shaped like a discus (cakrākāraphalakāstraṃ). --naṃ [bhāve lyuṭ] Disregard.

aṭṭāṭṭaḥ [aṭṭaṭṭavat na pararūpaṃ]
     (1) Overbearing conduct, contempt, disdain.
     (2) Excess, superiority.

aṭṭālaḥ --lakaḥ [aṭṭaiva alati paryāpto bhavati, al-ac svārthe kan] An apartment on the roof, an upper story; a palace; sarvatobhadraṃ nāmāṭṭālakamāruhya Mv. 6.

aṭṭālikā [aṭṭāla, svārthe kan]
     (1) A palace, a lofty mansion
     (2) N. of a country.
     -- Comp.
          --kāraḥ [upapada ta.] a mason, a bricklayer (one who builds royal mansions); kulaṭāyāṃ ca śūdrāyāṃ citrakārasya vīryataḥ . bhavedaṭṭālikākāraḥ patito jāradoṣataḥ). --baṃdhaḥ [ṣa. ta.] a kind of base or foundation in architecture; -dhaṃ baddhaḥ P. III. 4. 42.

aṭh 1 U. To go.

aṭhillā N. of a metre.

aḍ 1 P. To try, exert, attempt.
     (5) P. To pervade, attain (Ved.).

aḍḍ 1 P.
     (1) To join.
     (2) To attack.
     (3) To argue, infer, discern, meditate.

aḍḍanam [karaṇe lyuṭ] A shield. See aṭṭanaṃ.

aḍḍacalaḥ A part of the plough.

aṇ 1 P. To sound.
     (2) (4A) To breathe, live (for an).

aṇa(na)ka a. [aṇati yathecchaṃ nadati, aṇ-ac kutsāyāṃ kan ca] Very small, contemptible, mean, insignificant, wretched; pāpāṇake kutsitaiḥ P. II. 1. 54; oft. in comp. in the sense of deterioration or contempt; -kulālaḥ Sk. a contemptible potter. --kaḥ A kind of bird.

aṇavyam [aṇoḥ sūkṣmaśasyacīnādikasya bhavanaṃ kṣetraṃ; aṇu-yat] A field of aṇu, see below.

aṇiḥ m. --ṇī [aṇati śabdāyate aṇ-in]
     (1) The point of a needle.
     (2) A linchpin, the pin or bolt at the end of a pole of carriage.
     (3) A limit.
     (4) The corner of a house (used for killing animals &c.).
     -- Comp.
          --māṃḍavyaḥ [aṇyā cihnito māṃḍavyaḥ] N. of a sage said to have been impaled on an aṇī or linch-pin.

aṇu a. (ṇu-ṇvī f.) [aṇ-un] Minute, small, little, atomic (opp. sthūla, mahat); aṇoraṇīyān Bg. 8. 9; sarvopyayaṃ nanvaṇuḥ Bh. 3. 26 insignificantly small; aṇvapi bhayaṃ Ms. 6. 40; aṇvapi yācyamānaḥ Pt. 4. 26 asked but an atom, a very small quantity, Ms. 3. 51. --ṇuḥ
     (1) An atom, a very small particle (an exceedingly small measure); the mote in a sunbeam, the smallest perceptible quantity; asthūlamanaṇvahrasvamadīrghaṃ brahma; aṇuṃ parvatīkṛ Bh. 2. 78 to magnify; cf. also 'To make mountains of molehills.'
     (2) An atom of time (vyaṃjanamardhamātrā tadardhaṃ aṇu); it is said to be 54,675,000th part of a Muhūrta (48 minutes).
     (3) N. of Śiva.
     (4) N. of very small grain such as sarṣapa, cīnaka &c., anaṇuṣu daśamāṃśo'ṇuṣvathaikādaśāṃśaḥ Līlā. --ṇu n. the fourth part of a Matra.
     -- Comp.
          --aṃtaḥ [aṇuḥ aṃto yasya] a hair-splitting question; (aṇvaṃtaḥ sūkṣmāṃtaḥ sūkṣmavastunirṇayāṃtaḥ praśnaḥ Śaṅkara).
          --tailaṃ N. of a medicinal oil.
          --bhā [aṇvī sūkṣmā bhā prabhā yasyāḥ sā] lightning.
          --mātra a. [aṇuḥ parimāṇaṃ yasya aṇu-mātrac] of the size of an atom.
          --reṇuḥ [karma.] atomic dust.
          --revatī [aṇuḥ sūkṣmā revatītāreva] N. of a plant (daṃtīvṛkṣa) Croton Polyandrum.
          --vādaḥ the doctrine of atoms, atomic theory, the theory that all material substances are primarily atoms and secondarily aggregates, and that all atoms are eternal.
          --vīkṣaṇaṃ [ṣa. ta.] 1. minute observation, observation of very minute parts. 2. [aṇuḥ sūkṣmo vīkṣyate anena karaṇe lyuṭ] an instrument, like the microscope, enabling one to discern the smallest objects.
          --vrīhiḥ [karma.] a fine sort of grain, rice &c.

aṇiman m. [aṇu-imanic], aṇutā-tvaṃ
     (1) Minuteness, smallness, thinness, leanness, fineness.
     (2) Atomic nature.
     (3) The superhuman power of becoming as small as an atom, one of the 8 powers or siddhis of Śiva; (aṇimā laghimā prāptiḥ prākāmyaṃ mahimā tathā . īśitvaṃ ca vaśitvaṃ ca tathā kāmāvasāyitā)

aṇuka a. [svārthe kan]
     (1) Very small, atomic.
     (2) Subtle, too fine.
     (3) Acute. --kaḥ A small kind of grain, See aṇu.

aṇvī Ved. A finger(?)

aṇvam Ved. A fine hole in the strainer for the Soma juice (?)

aṇīyas, aṇiṣṭha a. [aṇu-īyasun, iṣṭac] Smaller, smallest, very small; aṇoraṇīyāṃsaṃ Bg. 8. 9 very small; aṇīyasi kāraṇe'naṇīyānādaro dṛśyate Dk. 142

aṇūbhū 1 P. To become minute or atomic.

aṃṭh 1 A. (also aṭh) aṃṭhate, aṭhate To go, move.

aṃṭhita p. p
     (1) Gone.
     (2) Rained.

aṃḍaḥ --ḍam [amaṃti saṃprayogaṃ yāṃti anena; am-ḍa Uṇ. 1. 111]
     (1) The testicles.
     (2) The scrotum.
     (3) An egg; oft. used with reference to the world as having sprung from the primordial egg of Brahma; brahmāṃḍacchatraṃdaḍaḥ Dk. 1.
     (4) The musk bag.
     (5) Semen virile.
     (6) N. of Śiva.
     -- Comp.
          --ākarṣaṇaṃ castration.
          --ākāra, --ākṛti a. [bahu.] egg-shaped, oval, elliptical. (
          --raḥ --tiḥ) an ellipse.
          --kaṭāhaḥ, --haṃ [aṃḍaṃ brahmāṃḍaṃ kaṭāhamiva] the shell of the brahmāṃḍa or mundane egg.
          --koṭarapuṣpī [aṃḍamiva koṭare madhye puṣpaṃ yasyāḥ] N. of a plant ajāṃtrī or nīlavuhnā. --kośaḥ --ṣaḥ, --ṣakaḥ [ṣa. ta.] the scrotum.
          --ja a. [aṃḍāt jāyate; jan-ḍa] born from an egg. (
          --jaḥ) 1. a bird, oviparous being; mūkāṃḍajaṃ (kānanaṃ) Ku. 3. 42. 2. a fish. 3. a snake. 4. a lizard. 5. Brahmā. (
          --jā) musk.
          --dharaḥ [ṣa. ta.] N. of Śiva.
          --vardhanaṃ, --vṛddhiḥ f. swelling of the scrotum, hydrocele.
          --sū a. oviparous.

aṃḍakaḥ [aṃḍa, svārthe kan] The scrotum. --kaṃ [alpārthe kan] A small egg; jagadaṃḍakaikatarakhaṃḍamiva Śi. 9. 9.

aṃḍāluḥ [aṃḍaḥ asti asya; aṃḍa āluc] A fish.

aṃḍīraḥ [aṃḍaḥ asti asya; aṃḍa-īran] A full-grown or full-developed man, a strong or powerful person; cirādaṃḍīreṇa tvayi tadapi rāmeṇa guṇitaṃ A. R. 4.

at 1 P. (aṃti), atati, atituṃ, atta-atita
     (1) To go, walk; wander, to go constantly.
     (2) To obtain (mostly Ved.)
     (3) To bind.
     (4) (aṃtati) To bind.

atakaḥ [atati satataṃ gacchati; at-kan] A wanderer, a passer-by, traveller.

atanam [at-lyuṭ] Going, wandering. --naḥ A wanderer, a passer-by.

atajjña a. [na tat-jānāti] Not knowing that (tat i. e. Brahma).

ataṭa a. [na. ba.] Having no shore or beach; precipitate, steep. --ṭaḥ
     (1) A precipice, a steep crag.
     (2) N. of a hill.
     (3) The lower part of the earth.
     -- Comp.
          --prapātaḥ a steep precipice; a fall headlong from a precipice; a precipitate fall; manorathānāmataṭaprapātaḥ S. 6. 9 of my hopes there is a precipitate fall (some read the line as manorathā nāma taṭaprapātaḥ and take it to mean 'verily our desires are like the crumblings of river banks).

atathā ind. Not so; -ucita a. not deserving that, not used to such things; kleśānāmatathocitaḥ Ram.

atadarham ind. Unjustly, undeservedly.

atadguṇaḥ (Rhet.) The 'nonborrower', N. of a figure of speech in which the thing in question does not assume the quality of another though there is a reason for it; paraguṇānanuhārastvasya tatsyādatadguṇaḥ; e. g. dhavalosi yadyapi suṃdara tathāpi tvayā mama raṃjitaṃ hṛdayam . rāgapūritepi hṛdaye subhaga nihito na raktosi .. K. P. 10; or saṃgatānyaguṇānaṃgīkāramāhuratadguṇam . ciraṃ rāgiṇi maccitte nihitopi na rajyasi .. Kuval.
     -- Comp.
          --saṃvijñānaḥ N. of a variety of Bahuvrīhi; e. g. dṛṣṭasamudramānaya; atra guṇībhūtasya samudrasya nānayane'nvayaḥ iti -naḥ bahuvrīhiḥ; laṃbakarṇamānaya iti tu tadguṇasaṃvijñānaḥ. Tv.

ataṃtra a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Having no ropes or musical strings (as a musical instrument); nātaṃtrī vādyate vīṇā Ram.
     (2) Unrestrained; not necessarily binding; not being the object of the rule under consideration; thasvagrahaṇamataṃtraṃ, klībatvaṃ -traṃ Sk.
     (3) Without formulas or empirical actions.

ataṃdra --drita --n --la a. Alert, unwearied, careful, vigilant; ataṃdritā sā svayameva vṛkṣakān Ku. 5. 14, R. 17. 39, H. Pr. 33.

atapa a.
     (1) Not excited, cool.
     (2) Unostentations.
     (3) Unemployed. --pāḥ (pl.) N. of a class of deities among Buddhists.

atapas --ska [na. ba.] One who neglects his religious austerities; atapāstvanadhīyānaḥ Ms. 4. 190; an irreligious or impious man; idaṃ te nātapaskāya Bg. 18. 67.

atapta a. Not heated &c.
     -- Comp.
          --tanu a. 1. One whose body is not marked (with red mudrās &c.). 2. who has not fully mortified his body by penance. 3. whose body or mass is cool (?)

atarka a. [na. ba.] Illogical, void of reasoning. --rkaḥ
     (1) Absence of argument or reasoning, bad logic.
     (2) An illogical reasoner.

atarkita a. Unthought of, unexpected; samameva gatosyatarkitāṃ gatimaṃgena ca jīvitena ca. Ku. 4. 22; Bh. 3. 137; -gamanena Mu. 4. --taṃ adv. Unexpectedly.
     -- Comp.
          --āgata, --upanata a. occuring or befalling unexpectedly, quite accidental, sudden; -darśanollāsitalocanayā anayā Mal. 3; -upapannaṃ darśanaṃ Ku. 6. 54.

atarkya a. Inconceivable; baffling thought or reasoning.

atala a. Bottomless. --laṃ [asya bhūkhaṃḍasya talaṃ pṛṣo- idamo'ttvam] N. of a pātāla or lower region, one of the 7 Patalas, being the first among them. --laḥ N. of Śiva.
     -- Comp.
          --spṛś,sparśa a. [na tale spṛśyate karmaṇi kvip; na talasya sparśo yatra] bottomless, very deep, unfathomable.

atavyas a. Ved. Not very strong.

atas ind. [idaṃ-tasil]
     (1) Than this; from this (having a comparative force); ato devā avaṃtu no yato viṣṇurvicakrame Rv. 1. 22. 16; kimu paramato nartayasi māṃ Bh. 3. 6; ato'nyathā Ms. 5. 31.
     (2) From this or that cause, hence, consequently, so, therefore (corr. to yat, yasmāt or hi, expressed or understood); aṃtargataṃ prāṇabhṛtāṃ hi veda sarvaṃ bhavānbhāvamatobhidhāsye R. 2. 43, 3. 50, Ku. 2. 5; athāto brahmajijñāsā S. B. now therefore &c.
     (3) Hence, from this place; henceforth (of time or place); (-paraṃ, ūrdhvaṃ), afterwards.
     (4) Then (corr. of yadi-yad).
     -- Comp.
          --arthaṃ --nimittaṃ on this account, hence, for this reason.
          --eva for this very reason.
          --ūrdhvaṃ henceforth; afterwards.
          (a) further on, any longer (with abl.); hereafter; nivasiṣyasi mayyeva ata urdhvaṃ Bg. 12. 8.
          (b) beyond this, further than this; bhāgyāyattamataḥparaṃ S. 4. 16 more than this; ataḥparaṃ nāsti mamottaraṃ V. 2 now I have nothing more to say;
          (c) afterwards.

atasaḥ [atati gacchati ityatasaḥ atasac Uṇ. 3. 117]
     (1) Wind, air.
     (2) The soul.
     (3) A garment made of the fibre of flax (-saṃ generally).
     (4) A weapon.

atasiḥ Ved. [at-asic] A wandering mendicant.

     (1) Common flax.
     (2) Hemp.
     (3) Linseed.
     (4) A thicket, copse (?)

ati ind. [at-i]
     (1) A prefix used with adjectives and adverbs, meaning 'very', 'too', 'exceedingly', 'excessively', 'very much,' and showing utkarṣa; nātidūre not very far from; -kṛśa very lean; -bhṛśaṃ very much; also with verbs or verbal forms; -siktameva bhavatā Sk.; svabhāvo hyatiricyate &c.
     (2) (With verbs) Over, beyond; ati-i go beyond, overstep; so -kram, -car, -vah &c. In this case ati is regarded as a preposition upasarga.
          (a) (With nouns or pronouns) Beyond, past, surpassing, superior to, eminent, respectable, distinguished, higher, above, (used with acc. as a karmapravacanīya, or as first member of Bah. or Tat. Comp.; in which last case it has usually the sense of eminence or higher degree: atigo, -gārgyaḥ, = praśastā gauḥ, śobhano, gārgyaḥ; -rājan an excellent king; or the sense of atikrāṃta must be understood with the latter member which will then stand in the accusative case; atimartyaḥ = martyamatikrāṃtaḥ; -mālaḥ, atikrāṃto mālāṃ; so atikāya, -keśara, q. v.); ati devān kṛṣṇaḥ Sk.; mānuṣānatigaṃdharvān sarvāngaṃdharva lakṣaye Mb; -mānuṣaṃ karma a deed which is beyond human power, i. e. a superhuman action; -kaśaḥ past the whip (as a horse), unmanageable; -tyad surpassing that; -tvāṃ, -tvān him or them that surpasses or surpass thee, so -māṃ, -yūyaṃ &c.
          (b) (With nouns derived from roots) Extravagant, exaggerated, inordinate, excessive, extraordinary; e. g. -ādaraḥ excessive regard; -āśā extravagant hope; so -bhayaṃ, -tṛṣṇā, -ānaṃdaḥ &c. &c.; atidānāt balirbaddho naṣṭo mānātsuyodhanaḥ . vinaṣṭo rāvaṇo laulyādati sarvatra varjayet; cf. 'extremes are ever bad.'
          (c) Unfit, idle, improper, in the sense of asaṃprati or kṣepa 'censure'; atinidraṃ = nidrā saṃprati na yujyate Sk. The gaṇaratnamahodadhi gives the following senses of atiḥ-vikramātikramābuddhibhṛśārthātiśayeṣvati . e. g. atirathaḥ rathādhikaṃ vikramavān; -matiḥ buddhyatikramaḥ; -gahanaṃ buddheraviṣayaḥ; -taptaṃ bhṛśataptaṃ; -vegaḥ atiśayito vegaḥ.

     (1) An exaggerated tale.
     (2) Idle or meaningless talk. --tha a.
     (1) Exaggerated, incredible (aśraddheya).
     (2) Unfit to be told.
     (3) Past narration or mention, dead, lost.
     (4) Swerving from one's caste traditions &c; lawless.

atikaṃdakaḥ [atiriktaḥ kaṃdo yasya] N. of a tree hastikaṃda.

atikarṣaṇam a. Afflicting very much, excessive exertion.

atikāya a. [atyutkaṭaḥ kāyo yasya.] Of an extraordinary size, gigantic. --yaḥ N. of a Rākṣasa, son of Ravaṇa who was killed by Lakṣmaṇa.

atikṛcchra [prādi- sa.] a. Very difficult. --cchraṃ-cchraḥ [atikrāṃtaṃ kṛcchraṃ prājāpatyaṃ] Extraordinary hardship, a kind of severe penance to be finished in 12 nights Ms. 11. 213-4.

atikṛtam Overdone, done too much, excess; sarvatrātikṛtaṃ loke vyasanāyopakalpate Ram.

atikṛtiḥ f.
     (1) Overdoing.
     (2) N. of a metre of 4 lines, each line containing 25 syllables.

atikeśaraḥ [atiriktāni keśarāṇi yasya] N. of an aquatic plant kubjaka Trapa Bīpinosa.

atikram 1 U., 4 P.
          (a) To step or pass beyond, get across, go over, cross; yatkathayituṃ pravṛttastatparityajya atidūramatikrāṃtosmi K. 346 led far away from my story, rambled, made a great digression; sapta kakṣāṃtarāṇyatikramya 92; nimiṣamātreṇātidūramatikrāmati 120; samīpepyatikrāmaṃtī M. 1 going so near; atikramya tāṃstānviśeṣān Me. 57.
          (b) To pass over, pass by, walk past, go beyond; senāniveśadeśamatikramya Dk. 4, 10; kathamatikrāṃtamagastyāśramapadaṃ Mv. 7 is it passed or left behind; tasminnatikrāmati S. 7. 31 idaṃ kadalīgṛhamatikramya dṛśyate Ratn. 3 beyond the plantain-bower; taccātikramya kailāsagiriḥ K. 121; jaṃbudvīpamatikramya śiśiro nāma parvataḥ Ram.; atikrāmatyayaṃ K. 85 is going or departing.
     (2) To excel, surpass; exceed (in number, strength &c.); irāvatīmatikrāmaṃtī bhava M. 4; atikrāmaṃtīmiverāvatīṃ prekṣe M. 1; vṛddhirnātikrāmati paṃcatāṃ Ms. 8. 151; karṇīsutamapyatikrāṃtaḥ Dk. 74; kalāsu rūpe cāpsarasopyatikrāṃtā 78 surpassing, superior to; śaktimanatikramya = yathāśakti Sk.
     (3) To transgress, violate, go beyond, overstep; janakāgrajanmanoḥ śāsanamatikramya Dk. 2; nālaṃ puruṣo niyatilikhitāṃ lekhāmatikramituṃ 61; evamatikrātamaryāde tvayi Ve. 1, Ms. 9. 78; aye vātsalyādatikrāmati prasaṃgaḥ Māl. 6 Oh, the event through excessive affection transgresses all due limits; atikramya sadācāraṃ K. 160, 181.
     (4) To exclude, pass by, neglect, set aside, leave; kiṃvā parijanamatikramya bhavān saṃdiṣṭaḥ M. 4; prathitayaśasāṃ prabaṃdhānatikramya M. 1 to the exclusion of.
     (5) To go or pass away, elapse, roll on (as time); sā niśā aticakrāma Pt. 1; yathā yathā yauvanamaticakrāma K. 59; śaiśavaṃ 74; bhavatāmapyatikrāmati devārcanavidhivelā 47 is passing away (is being violated).; atikrāṃte daśāhe Ms. 5. 76; also trans. allow to pass; dvitrāṇi dinānyatikramya Dk. 100; atyakrāmamimānmāsāṃstadvadhaṃ pariciṃtayan Ram.; nāhāravelātikramaṇīyā K. 266.
     (6) To overcome, overpower, seize; vyāladvipa ivāsmābhiratikramyaiva damyase Mv. 3. 31 by seizing or falling upon, by main force; kenāpi sattvena atikramya S. 6.
     (7) To lose; sa hi svāmyādatikrāmet ṛtūnāṃ pratirodhanāt Ms. 9. 93 --Caus. To let pass, allow to go.

     (1) Act of overstepping, going beyond &c.
          (a) Breach of decorum or duty; aho atikramaḥ Mal. 7.
          (b) Transgression, violation; upacāra- M. 4, 5.
          (c) Trespass; disrespect, injury, opposition; brāhmaṇa- tyāgo bhavatāmeva bhūtaye Mv. 2. 10 refraining from all trespass against Brāhmaṇas; diśatyapāyaṃ hi satāmatikramaḥ Ki. 14. 9; kulānyakulatāṃ yāṃti brāhmaṇātikrameṇa ca Ms. 3. 63; etasminnatikrame paravatīyaṃ M. 3; gurujanātikramāt K. 160; śaśino jyeṣṭhātikramaḥ 56 transgression (passing through); marṣaṇīyoyamārohaṇātikramaḥ 81; vātsalyādatikramopi Mv. 1 violation (of due limits or propriety); Mv. 4. 25.
     (3) Lapse, passing away (of time); anekasaṃvatsarātikramepi U. 4; velā- maṃ kṛtvā āgataḥ Pt. 1; ucitavelātikrame M. 2; saṃdhyā- Rām.
     (4) Overcoming, conquering, surpassing; mostly with dur; svajātirduratikramā, svabhāvo duratikramaḥ &c.
     (5) Neglect, omission, disregard; Ms. 11. 120.
     (6) A vigorous attack, determined onset (= abhikrama q. v.).
     (7) Excess.
     (8) Abuse, misapplication.
     (9) Imposition.

atikrāṃta pp.
     (1) Exceeded, surpassed, gone beyond &c.; sotikrāṃtaḥ śravaṇaviṣayaṃ Me. 103; sudūramatikrāṃtaḥ K. 35 departed, gone; manoratha -darśanā Mal. 10 beyond the reach even of desire; vicārātikrāṃtaḥ Mu. 5. 4 past the stage of thought; cakṣurviṣayātikrāṃteṣu pakṣiṣu H. 1.
     (2) Past, gone by; -kunṛpati K. 5, past, former; 169Pt. 1. 333, Pt. 2, Bh. 3. 32; -pārthivaguṇān Mu. 1 former kings. --taṃ A past thing, a thing of the past, the past; -taṃ bhagavatī kathayati M. 5 your ladyship is speaking of the past; -te dhairyamavalaṃbyatām U. 3; kiṃ -upālaṃbhena H. 1; cf. 'let bygones be bygones.' -yogin a. with the moon in conjunction.

atikramaṇam Overstepping, spending of time, excess; fault, offence; tenātikramaṇena duḥkhayati naḥ Mv. 3. 43.

atikramaṇīya pot. p. To be transgressed or violated, to be disregarded, passed by, neglected or avoided; -yaṃ me suhṛdvākyaṃ S. 2, 3, 6, 7; anatikramaṇīyasya janmamṛtyorivāgamaṃ H. 4. 74.

atikruddha a. Very angry. --ddhaḥ [prā. sa.] N. of a Mantra mentioned in Tantras; aṣṭāviṃśatyakṣaro ya ekatriṃśadathāpi vā .. atikruddhaḥ sa vijñeyo niṃditaḥ sarvakarmasu).

atikrūra a. Very cruel. --raḥ [prā. sa.]
     (1) A malignant planet such as Saturn, Mars &c. (krūrā vakrā atikrūrāḥ).
     (2) N. of a Mantra in Tantras (triṃśadakṣarako maṃtrastrayastriṃśadathāpi vā . atikrūraḥ sa vijñeyo niṃditaḥ sarvakarmasu).

atikṣipta a. [kṣip-kta] Thrown beyond. --ktaṃ A kind of sprain or dislocation.

atikhaṭva a. Without a bedstead, able to dispense with a bed-stead.

atigam 1 P.
     (1) To pass, elapse, pass away (as time); daśāhe'tigate Ram.
     (2) To overcome, exceed, excel, See atiga.
     (3) To pass over, pass by, neglect.
     (4) To pass away, die.
     (5) To escape.

atiga a. [gam-ḍa] (in comp.) Exceeding, going beyond, transcending, excelling, surpassing; sarvaloka- Mu. 1. 2; kimauṣadhapathātigairupahato mahāvyādhibhiḥ Mu. 6 by diseases defying the powers of medicine, past the stage of physicking; bāṇairdehātigaiḥ R. 12. 48 piercing through their bodies; vayo- Ms. 7. 149 advanced in years, aged; saṃkhyātigāḥ saṃpadaḥ Bh. 3. 132; vapuḥ prakarṣeṇa janātigena Ki. 3. 2.

     (1) N. of a star of the 6th lunar asterism.
     (2) A large cheek or temple.
     (3) One who has large cheeks.

atigaṃdha a. Having an excessive or overpowering smell. --dhaḥ
     (1) Sulphur.
     (2) N. of various plants: caṃpaka, bhūtatṛṇa lemon-grass & mudgara.

atigaṃdhālu N. of the plant putradātrī.

atigava a. [atikrāṃto gāṃ]
     (1) Very foolish, quite stupid.
     (2) Inexpressible, indescribable.

atigahana, --gavhara a. Very deep, impenetrable.

atiguṇa a.
     (1) Having excellent or superior qualities.
     (2) Devoid of merits, worthless [guṇamatikrāṃtaḥ]. --ṇaḥ Excellent merits.

atiguru a. Very heavy(such as mercury &c.). --ruḥ A very respectable person, such as a father, mother &c. (trayaḥ puruṣasya atiguravo bhavaṃti pitā mātā ācāryaśca).

atiguhā [atikrāṃtā guhāṃ madhyāvakāśena] N. of the plant pṛśriparṇī.

atigraha 9 P. To take beyond the usual measure.

atigraha a. [atikrāṃto grahaṃ] Difficult to be comprehended, incomprehensible. --haḥ, --grāhaḥ
     (1) Object of an apprehensive organ, such as sparśa 'touch' the object of tvac, rasa of jihvā &c. The Grahas are eight in number; prāṇa, vāc, jihvā, cakṣus, śrotra, manas, hastau & tvac; the corresponding atigrāhas being apāna, nāman, rasa, rūpa, śabda, kāma, karman & sparśa.
     (2) Right knowledge, correct apprehension.
     (3) Act of overtaking, surpassing &c.
     (4) One who seizes or takes to a very great extent.

atigrāhya a. To be held in check, to be controlled. --hyaḥ N. of three libations made at the Jyotiṣṭoma sacrifice.

atigha [atiśayena haṃti; han]
     (1) A weapon.
     (2) Worth.

atighna a. Very destructive. --ghnī [atiśayena haṃti duḥkhaṃ; han-ṭhak] A happy state of complete oblivion which drowns all thought of whatever is disagreeable in the past; atighnīmānaṃdasya gatvā Bri. Ar. Up.

aticamū a. [camūmatikrāṃtaḥ] Victorious over armies.

aticar 1 P.
     (1) To transgress, violate; be unfaithful to, offend (as a wife &c.); svaṃ svamācāramatyacāriṣuḥ Dk. 162; yathā cāhaṃ nāticare patīn; putrāḥ pitṝnatyacarannāryaścātyacaran patīn Mb.
     (2) To pass by, neglect, omit.
     (3) To overtake, overcome; surpass, excel.

aticara a. Very changeable, transient. --rā [atikramya svasthānaṃ saroṃtaraṃ gacchati] N. of the shrub Hibiscus Mutabilis (padminī, sthalapadminī or padmacāriṇīlatā).

aticaraṇam Excessive practice, overdoing.

     (1) Transgression.
     (2) Excelling,
     (3) Overtaking &c.
     (4) Accelerated motion of planets (kujādipaṃcagrahāṇāṃ svasvākrāṃtarāśiṣu bhogakālamullaṃghya rāśyaṃtaragamanaṃ); passage from one zodiacal sign to another.

aticārin a. Transgressing, surpassing &c.

aticiram adv. Very long; -raṃ mayā kṛtaṃ Ratn. 1 I have been very late; nāticiraṃ gatāyāṃ ca tasyāṃ K. 178 she had not long left when &c.

aticchatraḥ --trā,--cchatrakā [atikrāṃtaḥ chatraṃ tulyākāreṇa] A mushroom, anise, principally Anesum or Anethum Sowa; N. of another plant, Barleria Longifolia. (-traḥ is said by Amara to be jalatṛṇabhedaḥ Mar. śetagavata; and -trā = śatapuṣpā Mar. śopa).

aticchaṃdaḥ --das a. [atikrāṃtaḥchaṃdaḥdaṃ vā]
     (1) Free from worldly desires.
     (2) Exceeding thought or will.
     (3) One who violates Vedic traditions of conduct. --s f. n.
     (1) N. of two classes of metres (atikrāṃtā chaṃdaḥ vṛttānusārivarṇavinyāsabhedaṃ)
     (2) Fondness, inclination.

atijagatī [atikrāṃtā jagatīṃ dvādaśākṣarapādāṃ ekākṣarādhikyāt] N. of a class of metres belonging to the aticchaṃdas class, with 13 letters in each line (prathamā'tijagatyāsāṃ sā dvipaṃcāśadakṣarā.)

atijana a. [atikrāṃto janaṃ] Not tenanted or inhabited.

atijāgara a. Always wakeful. --raḥ The black Curlew (nīlavaka).

atijāta a. [atikrāṃto jātaṃ-jātiṃ janakaṃ vā] (opp. apajāta) Superior to his parentage.

atijīv 1 P. 1. To survive, outlive.
     (2) To surpass (in the mode of living); atyajīvadamarālakeśvarau R. 19. 15.

atijīvanam Surviving &c.

atiḍīnam Extraordinary flight (of birds).

atitarāṃ, --atitamām ind. [ati-tara (ma) p-āmu] more, higher (abl.); nṛttādasyāḥ sthitamatitarāṃ kāṃtaṃ M. 2. 7.
     (2) Exceedingly, very much; excessive, great; -suduḥsahaḥ R. 3. 37; -rāṃkāṃtimāpatsyate Me. 15 will attain great splendour.
     (3) Above, higher in rank (acc.); tasmādvā ete devā -rāmivānyāndevān Ken.

atitīvra --tīkṣṇa a. Very sharp, pungent. --kṣṇaḥ N. of the plant śobhāṃjana. --vrā dūb grass.

atitṛṣṇā Rapacity, excessive greed or desire; -ṣṇā na kartavyā Pt. 5 one should not be too greedy. --ṣṇa a. Rapacious, very greedy.

atitṝ 1 P. To cross, pass or get over, surmount, overcome; durgāṇyatitaratiṃ te H. 4. v. l.; tayorātmanaśca kṣudhamatyatārṣaṃ Dk. 165 satisfied or appeased hunger; tepi cātitaraṃtyeva mṛtyuṃ śrutiparāyaṇāḥ Bg. 13. 25 cross beyond death.

atitaraṇam Crossing, surmounting.

atitārin a. Crossing, overcoming.

atithiḥ [atati gacchati na tiṣṭhati; at-ithin Uṇ. 4. 2; lit. a 'traveller'; according to Manu ekarātraṃ tu nivasannatithirvrāhmaṇaḥ smṛtaḥ . anityaṃ hi sthito yasmāttasmādatithirucyate 3. 112]
     (1) A guest (fig. also); atithineva niveditaṃ S. 4; kusumalatāpriyātithe S. 6 dear or welcome guest; puraṃdarapurātithiṣu pitṛṣu Dk. 2 the guests of Indra's capital i. e. dead; so samare yamanagarātithirakāri 12; dhanyānāṃ śravaṇapathātithitvameti (uktaṃ) Ratn. 2. 7 becomes a guest of, i. e. goes to or falls on the ears of the fortunate only; karoti te mukhaṃ tanvi capeṭāpātanātithiṃ K. P.
     (2) Wrath.
     (3) N. of a son of Kuśa and Kumudavatī and grandson. of Rāma.
     -- Comp.
          --kriyā --pūjā, --satkāraḥ --satkriyā, --sevā hospitable reception of guests, rite of hospitality, hospitality attention to the guests.
          --deva a. [atithirdeva iva pūjyo yasya] treating the guest as a God.
          --dharmaḥ title or claim to hospitality; hospitality due to guests; gṛhyatāṃ -rmaḥ Pt. 1; yadi tvatithidharmeṇa kṣatriyo gṛhamāvrajet Ms. 3. 111 should come as a guest.
          --dharmin a. entitled to hospitality as a guest Ms. 3. 112.
          --patiḥ the host or entertainer.

atithin a. Ved. Travelling, wandering. --m. (thī) N. of a King, also called suhotra and atithi.

atithigvaḥ An epithet of Divodāsa whom the gods helped in overcoming Śambara.

atidagdha a. Badly or excessively burnt. --gdhaṃ A bad kind of burn.

atidānam Munificence, liberality; atidāne balirbaddhaḥ Chāṇ. 50.

atidāhaḥ Violent inflammation.

atidiś 6 P.
     (1) To assign, to make over, transfer.
     (2) To extend the application of, extend by analogy; pradhānamallanibarhaṇanyāyena atidiśati SB.; janapadatadavadhyośceti prakaraṇe ye pratyayā uktāste'trātidiśyaṃte P. IV. 3. 100 Sk., IV. 1. 151 Mbh.

     (1) Transfer, making over, assigning.
     (2) (Gram.) Extended application, application by analogy, transference of one attribute to another, attraction of one case or rule to another; atideśo nāma itaradharmasya itarasmin prayogāya ādeśaḥ (mīmāṃsā); or anyatraiva praṇītāyāḥ kṛtsnāyā dharmasaṃhateḥ . anyatra kāryataḥ prāptiratideśaḥ sa ucyate.. prākṛtāt karmaṇo yasmāttatsamāneṣu karmasu . dharmapraveśo yena syādatideśaḥ sa ucyate .. This atideśa is of 5 kinds: śāstra-, kārya-, nimitta-, vyapadeśa- & rūpa-. Thus in Grammar prakṛtivat vikṛtiḥ, karmaṇā karmavattulyakriyaḥ or puṃvat, ṇidvat, vyapadeśīvadbhāvaḥ & iṇvadikaḥ are instances. gosadṛśo gavayaḥ is an instance of rūpātideśa or analogy; vākyārthasyātideśasya smṛtirvyāpāra ucyate Bhāṣā. P. 80. atideśa is generally expressed by words showing likeness or resemblance, such as iva, vat, sadṛśa &c.

atidīpyaḥ [atiśayena dīpyate] A plant, Plumbago Rosea (raktacitraka).

atidūra a. Very far; -re, -rāt, -reṇa usually with na (gen.) not far from; tapovanasya- S. 1.

atidevaḥ The Supreme or highest God; N. of Śiva.

atidvaya a. [dvayamatikrāṃtaḥ; nāsti dbayaṃ yasya vā] Surpassing the two (bṛhatkathā and vāsavadattā), or having no second or equal, incomparable, matchless; dhiyā nibaddheyamatidvayī kathā K. 5.

atidhanvan m. [atyutkṛṣṭaṃ dhanuryasya]
     (1) An unrivalled archer or warrior.
     (2) That which surpasses a maru or desert [dhanvānaṃ atikrāṃtaḥ].

atidhṛtiḥ f. [atikrāṃtā dhṛtiṃ aṣṭādaśākṣarapādāṃ vṛttiṃ ekākṣarādhikyāt]
     (1) N. of a class of metres belonging to the aticchadaṃs group, consisting of 4 lines with 19 syllables in each (ṣaṭsaptatistvatidhṛtiḥ).
     (2) Nineteen.

atināṣṭra a. Ved. Out of danger.

atinicṛ(vṛ)t f. N. of a Vedic metre of 3 Padas, the number of syllables in each being respectively 7, 6 and 7; (ṣaṭkaḥ saptakayormadhye stotṝṇāṃvivācīti . yasyāḥ sātinivṛnnāma gāyatrī dvidaśākṣarā).

atinidrā Excessive sleeping. --dra a.
     (1) Given to exessive sleep.
     (2) Without sleep, sleepless. --draṃ ind. Past sleeping time (nidrā saṃprati na yujyate).

atinirhārin a. Very attractive (as an attributive of smell); āmodaḥso'tinirhārī Ak.

atinau --nu a. [atikrāṃto nāvaṃ] Disembarked, landed.

atipaṃcā [paṃcavarṣamatikrāṃtā] A girl past five.

atipat 1 P.
     (1) To pass over; neglect, omit, transgress.
     (2) To fly by, beyond, or over; to cross --Caus.
     (1) To delay, neglect; see atipātya below.
     (2) To disrespect, offend; ye satyameva hi gurūnatipātayaṃti Mu. 3. 34 transgress, violate; atipātitakālasādhanā Ki. 2. 42.
     (3) To cause to fly past or by.
     (4) To make ineffectual; saṃśamanamevaṃ saṃśodhanamatipātayati Suśr.
     (4) To snatch away, drag away.

atipatanam Flying past or beyond; omission, neglect, missing, transgressing; exceeding, going beyond due bounds.

atipātaḥ Passing away, lapse (of time); aho kāla- taḥ Mal. 2.
     (2) Neglect, omission; transgression; na cedanyakāryātipātaḥ S. 1 if no other duty be neglected thereby, if it should not interfere with (the discharge of) any other duty; deviation from established laws or customs.
     (3) Befalling, occurrence; duḥkhātipātena kaluṣīkiyaṃte K. 289; jaladhārātipātaḥ 302 falling.
     (4) Ill-treatment, or usage.
     (5) Opposition, contrariety.

atipātita pp.
     (1) Put off, delayed &c.
     (2) Quite or entirely broken; asthiniḥśeṣataśchinnamatipātitam Suśr. --taṃ Complete fracture of a bone.

atipātin a.
     (1) Acute, running a rapid course.
     (2) Surpassing in speed, swifter than (in comp.); tatāra vidyāḥ pavanātipātibhirdiśo haridbhirharitāmiveśvaraḥ R. 3. 30.

atipātya pot. p. To be delayed or put off; kāmamanatipātyaṃ dharmakāryaṃ devasya S. 5.

atipatraḥ [atiriktaṃ bṛhat patraṃ yasya] The teak tree, or the hastikaṃdavṛkṣa.

atipathin m. A better road than common, a good road.

atipad 4 A.
     (1) To go beyond; spring over.
     (2) To neglect, omit, trangress. --Caus. To allow to pass by.

atipada a. [atikrāṃtaḥ padaṃ]
     (1) Having no feet.
     (2) Too long by one foot.

atipattiḥ f.
     (1) Going beyond, passing, lapse; deśakālātipattau ca gṛhītvā svayamarpayet Y. 2. 169.
     (2) Non-performance, failure; liṅnimitte ḷṅ kriyātipattau P. III. 3. 139 (the conditional is used instead of the potential, when the non-performance of an action is implied).
     (3) [pattiṃ atikrāṃtaḥ] One surpassing a foot-soldier.

atipanna p. p. Gone beyond, transgressed, missed, past &c.

atiparicayaḥ Excessive familiarity or intimacy; Prov. atiparicayādavajñā 'Familiarity breeds contempt.'

atipara a. One who has vanquished his enemies. --raḥ A great or superior enemy.

atiparokṣa a.
     (1) Far out of sight, not discernible; -vṛtti obsolete (words).
     (2) Not hidden, visible.

atipātakam A very heinous sin, incest, (mātṛgamanaṃ duhitṛgamanaṃ snuṣāgamanaṃ, puṃsāṃ; putrapitṛśvaśuragamanaṃ ca strīṇāṃ, atipātakāni ucyaṃte.)

atipādanicṛ(vṛ)t f. N. of a Vedic Metre of 3 padas, the number of syllabes in each being respectively 6, 8 and 7.

atiprabaṃdhaḥ Great continuity; -prahitāstravṛṣṭibhiḥ R. 3. 58 very rapidly or in rapid succession.

atiprage ind. Very early in the morning, in the early dawn Ms. 4. 62.

atipravṛddha a.
     (1) Overbearing Ms. 9. 320.
     (2) Grown very much.

atipraśnaḥ [atikramya maryādāṃ praśnaḥ] A question about transcendental truths; a vexatious or extravagant question that is asked though a satisfactory reply has already been given; e.g. Valaki's question to Yājṇavalkya about Brahma in bṛhadāraṇyakopaniṣad.

atiprasaṃgaḥ, --prasaktiḥ f.
     (1) Excessive attachment; nātiprasaṃgaḥ pramadāsukāryaḥ Pt. 1. 187; strīṣvatiprasaṃgāt Dk. 101.
     (2) Over-rudeness, impertinence; tadviramātiprasaṃgāt U. 5; mā bhūtpunarbata kathaṃcidatiprasaṃgaḥ Mv. 3. 16 indiscretion or imprudence; yadetāvataḥ paribhavātiprasaṃgasya tulyaṃ syāt Mv. 5 an insult.
     (3) Extraordinary or unwarrantable stretch of a (grammatical) rule, or principle; also = ativyāpti q. v.
     (4) A very close contact; atiprasaṃgādvihitāgaso muhuḥ Ki. 8. 33 (avicchedasaṃga).
     (5) Prolixity; alamatiprasaṃgena Mu. 1.

atipreṣitam The time after the ceremony in which the praiṣa Mantras are used.

atiprāḍhā A girl who has attained a marriageable age, a grownup girl.

atibala a. Very strong or powerful; jayatyatibalo rāmo lakṣmaṇaśca mahābalaḥ Ram. --laḥ An eminent or matchless warrior (atiratha). --laṃ
     (1) Great strength or power.
     (2) A powerful army. --lā
     (1) N. of a medicinal plant, Sidonia Cordifolia and Rhombifolia.
     (2) N. of a powerful charm or lore taught by Viśvāmitra to Rāma: --gṛhāṇa dve ime vidye balāmatibalāṃ tathā . na te śramo jarā vābhyāṃ bhavitā nāṃgavaikṛtam .. na ca suptaṃ pramattaṃ vā dharṣayiṣyaṃti nairṛtāḥ . na ca te sadṛśo rāma vīryeṇānyo bhaviṣyati .. sadevanaranāgeṣu lokeṣviha pumāṃstriṣu . na saubhāgye na dākṣiṇye na buddhiśrutipauruṣe .. nottare pratipattavye tvattulyo vā bhaviṣyati . etadvidyādvayaṃ prāpya yaśaścāvyayamāpsyasi .. balāmatibalāṃ caiva jñānavijñānamātarau . kṣutpipāse ca te rāma nātyarthaṃ pīḍayiṣyataḥ .. jayaśca durgakāṃtārapradeśeṣvaṭavīṣu ca . sāratāṃ triṣu lokeṣu gamiṣyasi ca rāghava .. pitāmahasute hyete vidye cāyurbalāvahe . See R. 11. 9 also.
     (3) N. of one of Daksha's daughters.

atibālaka a. Childish, puerile. --kaḥ An infant.

atibālā [atikrāṃtā bālyāvasthāṃ] A cow two years old; varṣamātrā tu bālā syādatibālā dvivārṣikī.

ativrahmacaryam Over-continence, or abstinence (opp. atimaithunaṃ). --ryaḥ [atikrāṃto brahmacaryaṃ] One who has violated the student's life, who cohabits with women.

     (1) Excessive burden, great load; ko'tibhāraḥ samarthānāṃ Pt. 1. 22; iti manasi nyastaciṃtātibhāraḥ Ratn. 3. 5; sā muktakaṃṭhaṃ vyasanātibhārāt cakraṃda R. 14. 68 through excessive grief; duḥkhātibhāropi laghuḥ sa mene Ki. 3. 33.
     (2) Speed.
     (3) Excessive obscurity (of a sentence).
     -- Comp.
          --ga [atibhāraṃ gṛhītvāpi gacchati] a mule.

atibhīḥ f. [ati bibheti asyāḥ darśanāt; bhī-kvip] Lightning; flash of Indra's thunderbolt.

atibhū 1 P.
     (1) To spring forth, arise; śabdaśca ghoro'tibabhūva Mb.
     (2) To surpass, excel; to overcome, subdue, overpower.

atibhavaḥ Surpassing, defeating, conquering.

atibhū a. Surpassing all, epithet of Viṣṇu.

atibhūmiḥ f.
     (1) Excess, culmination, highest pitch; -miṃ gam-yā to go to excess, to reach the climax; -miṃ tasyā abhiniveśo gamiṣyati Mal. 2; miṃ gatonurāgaḥ 7; tatra sarvalokasya- miṃ gataḥ pravādaḥ ibid. widely known, become notorious, noised abroad; -mimayaṃ gato na śakyate nivartayituṃ K. 156; sarvotsavānābhatibhūmimivādhiśayānā 158; sarvapauruṣātibhūmiḥ Dk. 30; -miṃ gatena raṇaraṇakena U. 1, Śi. 9. 78, 10. 80.
     (2) Boldness, impropriety, violation of due limits (amaryādā); vipadi na dūṣitātibhūmiḥ Śi. 8. 20.
     (3) Eminence, superiority.
     (4) Extensive land.

atibhojanam Voracity, surfeiting oneself, excess in eating.

atimaṃgalya a. Very auspicious. --lyaḥ N. of a tree, (bilvavṛkṣa).

atimatiḥ f. --mānaḥ Haughtiness, too great pride; atimāne ca kauravāḥ Chāṇ. 50.

atimartya --mānuṣa a. Superhuman.

atimaryāda a. Exceeding due limits.

atimarśaḥ Close contact.

atimāṃsa a. [atiśayitaṃ māṃsaṃ yatra] Fleshy, plump, fat, as jaṃghā, adharoṣṭha &c.

atimātra a. [atikrāṃto mātrāṃ, atiśayitā mātrā pramāṇaṃ yasya vā] Exceeding the proper measure, inordinate, excessive; -bhāsvaratvaṃ M. 1. 8; (in comp) very much, beyond measure; -suduḥsahāni S. 4. 3 quite insupportable; -lohitatalau 1. 30; munivrataistvāmatimātrakarśitāṃ Ku. 5. 48 --traṃ, --mātraśaḥ ind. Beyond measure, inordinately, excessively.

atimāna a. [mānamatikrāṃtaḥ] Immeasurable, very great or wide (as fame); -nayā kīrtyā Dk. 1.

atimāya a. [māyāmatikrāṃtaḥ] Finally liberated, emancipated from the Maya or illusion of the world.

atimāruta a. Very windy. --taḥ, --vātaḥ A strong hurricane, storm, violent gust of wind.

atimita a.
     (1) Over-measured, excessive.
     (2) [a-timita] Not wet.

atimitram A great friend, epithet of a very friendly constellation.

atimukta a.
     (1) Entirely free from worldly desires, finally emancipated.
     (2) Barren, seedless.
     (3) Surpassing (a necklace of) pearls; atimuktamadgrathitakesarāvalī Mal. 5. 8. --ktaḥ --ktakaḥ
     (1) A kind of creeper (mādhavī, Mar. kusarī or kasturamogarā) represented as twisting itself round the mangotree and as the beloved of that tree; cf. ka idānīṃ sahakāramaṃtareṇātimuktalatāṃ pallavitāṃ sahate S. 3, parigṛhāṇa gate sahakāratāṃ tvamatimuktalatācaritaṃ mayi M. 4. 13.
     (2) N. of a tree, Dalbergia Oujeinensis (tiniśa).
     (3) (-ktakaḥ) Mountain ebony; N. of a tree called harimaṃtha (tiṃdukavṛkṣa, tālavṛkṣa also).

atimuktiḥ f. --mokṣaḥ Final liberation (from death).

atimṛtyu a. Overcoming death. --tyuḥ Final liberation from death (mokṣa); tameva viditvā 'timṛtyumeti nānyaḥ paṃthā vidyate Up.

     (1) Very great fragrance.
     (2) N. of a plant navamallikā, Jasminum Heterophyllum or Arboreum.

atiyavaḥ A kind of barley.

atiyogaḥ Over-flow, excess.

atiraṃhas a. Very fleet or swift; sāraṃgeṇātiraṃhasā S. 1. 5.

atirakta a. Very red or very much attached. --ktā N. of one of the 7 tongues of Agni.

atirathaḥ [atikrāṃto rathaṃ rathinaṃ] An unrivalled warrior, fighting from his car (amitān yodhayedyastu saṃprokto'tirathastu saḥ); dattvā'bhayaṃ sotirathaḥ Ve. 3. 26. Several Atirathas are mentioned in Bhārata Udyogaparvan.

atirabhasaḥ Great speed, precipitateness, head-long speed, rashness; -kṛtānāṃ karmaṇāṃ Bh. 2. 99; darśana- pradhāvitena K. 192 great hurry.

atirasā (Very juicy) N. of various plants, mūrvā, rāsnā and klītanaka.

atirājan m.
     (1) An extraordinary or excellent king.
     (2) One who surpasses a king.

atirātra a. Ved. [atikrāṃto rātriṃ] Prepared over-night. --traḥ [atiśayitā rātriḥ, tataḥ astyarthe ac]
     (1) An optional part of the Jyotiṣṭoma sacrifice (ekarātrasādhyagavāmayane prathamasaṃsthaḥ yāgabhedaḥ).
     (2) Dead of night.

atiric (Gen. used in pass.)
     (1) To surpass, excel, be superior to (with abl.); aśvamedhasahasrebhyaḥ satyamevātiricyate H. 4. 131; gṛhaṃ tu gṛhiṇīhīnaṃ kāṃtārādatiricyate Pt. 4. 81; vācaḥ karmātiricyate 'example is better than precept;' sometimes with acc.; na ca nārāyaṇo'trabhavaṃtamatiricyate K. 203; or used by itself in the sense of 'to be supreme,' 'prevail', 'triumph', 'predominate', 'be mightier'; na kiṃcidatiricyate Ms. 9. 296 none is supreme or higher than another; 12. 25; so daivamatrātiricyate, svabhāvotiricyate H. 1. 17; svalpamapyatiricyate H. 2 is of great importance.
     (2) To be left with a surplus, be redundant or superfluous.

atirikta pp.
     (1) Surpassed, excelled; sarvātiriktasāreṇa R. 1. 14 strength exceeding that of all creatures; sutajanmātiriktena mahotsavena K. 137 surpassing the birth of a son.
     (2) Redundant, superfluous, remaining over and above; paripūritahṛdayātiriktaharṣamiva K. 66 not contained in the heart.
     (3) Excessive, exuberant.
     (4) Unequalled, unsurpassed; supreme, elevated; samaśnuvānāḥ sahasā'tiriktatāṃ Ki. 14. 33 being raised up or elevated.
     (5) Different (generally vyatirikta in this sense, q. v.).
     (6) Quite empty.
     -- Comp.
          --aṃga a. having a redundant limb (a finger, toe &c.). (
          --gaṃ) a redundant limb or member.

ati(tī)rekaḥ [ric-ghañ]
     (1) Excess, exuberance, excellence, eminence; pauruṣātirekaḥ U. 6; so mada-, vīrya-, guṇa- &c.
     (2) Redundancy, surplus, superfluity.
     (3) Difference.

atiruc m. [rocate iti ruk strīṇāṃ ūrudeśaḥ; atikrāṃto rucaṃ Tv.] The knee. --k f. A very beautiful woman.

atirucira a. Very lovely. --rā N. of two metres, the one a variety of atijagatī, and the other also called cūḍi-li-kā.

atirūkṣa a.
     (1) Very rough or barren; devoid of affection, cruel.
     (2) Very affectionate [atikrāṃto rūkṣaṃ]. --kṣaḥ N. of a variety of grain.

atirūpa a.
     (1) Formless, such as wind.
     (2) Very beautiful. --paṃ Great beauty; as -vatī kanyā. --paḥ [atikrāṃto rūpaṃ] the Supreme Being.

atirai a. (ri n) Exceeding one's income, extravagant.

atirogaḥ Consumption.

ati-lo-romaśa a. Very hairy, shaggy. --śaḥ
     (1) A wild goat.
     (2) A large monkey. --śā A pot-herb (nīlabuhnā) Convolvulus Argenteus.

     (1) Excessive fasting.
     (2) Transgression; na yuktamatrāryajanātilaṃghanaṃ Ki. 14. 9.

atilaṃghin a. Erring, committing mistakes; nartakīrabhinayātilaṃghinīḥ R. 19. 14

atilihā N. of a Prākṛta Metre of four lines with 16 Mātrās in each.

ativaktṛ a. Very talkative, garrulous; ākroṣṭācātivaktā ca brāhmaṇānāṃ Mb.

ativakra a. Very crooked. --kraḥ N. of the five planets (bhauma and others); ativakrā nagāṣṭake iti jyotiṣoktaṃ sūryasya saptamāṣṭamasthitivaśāt pūrvagativiparītapaścādgatiśālibhaumādipaṃcakaṃ Tv.

ativayas a. Very old, aged, advanced in years.

ativarṇāśramin m. One who is beyond castes and orders (yo vedāṃtamahāvākyaśravaṇenaiva kevalam . ātmānamīśvaraṃ veda so' tivarṇāśramī bhavet).

ativartula a. Very round. --laḥ N. of a grain or pot-herb (kalāyaviśeṣa.)

ativah 1 P. To carry over or across. --Caus.
     (1) To spend, pass (as time); kiṃ vā mayāpi na dinānyativāhitāni Mal. 6. 13; ativāhayāṃbabhūva triyāmāṃ R. 9. 70; ṛtūn 19. 47.
     (2) To let pass over, get through successfully; guhāvisārīṇyativāhitāni mayā kathaṃcidghanagarjitāni R. 13. 28 allowed to pass over my head, endured; sa śāpastenātivāhitaḥ Ks. 33. 91.
     (3) To rid oneself of, elude, avoid; asmiṃstamālaviṭapāṃdhakāre praviśya enamativāhayāvaḥ Ratn. 2 get out of his way, elude his pursuit (and thus cheat him).
     (4) To transplant, remove (to another place), bring or carry over; alakāmativāhyaiva vasatiṃ vasusaṃpadāṃ Ku. 6. 37.
     (5) To follow, tread (as a path); lokātivāhite mārge Sarva.

ativāhaḥ [atītya dehaṃ anyadehe vāhaḥ prāpaṇaṃ sa. ta.]
     (1) Passing or conveying of the sūkṣmaśarīra, the subtle principle of life, to other bodies at the expiry of good actions (adṛṣṭa) contributing to the enjoyment of worldly pleasures.
     (2) Carrying over.

ativāhakaḥ [atītya etaṃ dehaṃ bāhayati dehāṃtaraṃ prāpayati; vah-ṇvul] The deity or spirit appointed by God to help in the conveying of the jīva or sūkṣmaśarīra in the above manner.

     (1) Passing, spending.
     (2) Excessive toiling or enduring, bearing too much load; too heavy burden; H. 3.
     (3) Despatching, sending away, ridding oneself of; kathamasya- naṃ bhaviṣyati Pt. 5 how shall I rid myself of him?

ativāhika a. [ativāhostyasya ṭhan] Able to convey to other bodies, See ativāha.

ativāhita pp. Spent, passed. --taḥ An inhabitant of the lower world. --taṃ (sūkṣmaśarīraṃ) = ativāha, q. v.

     (1) Very harsh, abusive or insulting language, reproof; ativādāṃstitikṣeta Ms. 6. 47; reprimand, correction; ativādādvadāmyeṣa mā dharmamabhiśaṃkithāḥ Mb.
     (2) Exaggeration, exaggerated talk, hyperbole (atyukti); ativādaṃ śaṃsati ativādena vai devā asurān atyudya athainānatyāyan Ait. Br.

ativādin a. Talkative, very eloquent; exclusively establishing one's own assertion; vijānan vidvān bhavate nātivādī Muṇḍ.

ativāsaḥ Fast on the day preceding a Śrāddha.

ativikaṭa a. Very fierce. --ṭaḥ A vicious elephant.

ativiṣa a.
     (1) Very poisonous.
     (2) Counteracting poison. --ṣā N. of a poisonous yet highly medicinal plant (Mar. ativiṣa or ativikha) Aconitum Ferox.

ativistaraḥ Prolixity, diffuseness; U. 1, Māl. 1.

ativṛt 1 A. (P. in epic poetry).
     (1) To pass over or by, cross (as a place &c.).
          (a) To go beyond, exceed (fig. also); vāgvibhavātivṛttaṃ ācāryakaṃ Māl. 1. 26 exceeding or transcending the powers of speech, indescribable; mukulāvasthāmativṛtteṣu taṃḍuleṣu Dk. 132; kā te stutiḥ stutipathādativṛttadhāmnaḥ Mv. 4. 29 transcending praise.
          (b) To offend, overstep, transgress, violate; yosyāḥ śāsanamativartate Dk. 167; kotivartate daivaṃ 51 who can transgress the decrees of Fate? konyo jīvitukāmo devasya śāsanamativarteta Mu. 3, Śi. 6. 19.
          (c) To neglect, omit, let slip.
          (d) To have no regard to, disregard, slight; offend (especially by unfaithfulness), injure; śapathaśatātivartī Dk. 62 disregarding; ṛtusnātāṃ satīṃ bhāryāṃ ... ativarteta duṣṭātmā; yathāhaṃ karmaṇāvācā śarīreṇa ca rāghavaṃ . satataṃ nātivarteya Rām.; apatyalobhādyātu strībhartāramativartate Ms. 5. 161.
          (a) To surpass, excel; manuṣyasaṃkhyāmativartituṃ vā Ki. 3. 40, Śi. 14. 59; bāṃdhavasnehaṃ rājyalobho'tivartate Ks. 41. 40 to outweigh, preponderate.
          (b) To overcome, subdue, vanquish, get the better of; get over, escape or get loose from; asādhyānativartaṃte pramehā rajanīṃ yathā Suśr.; kimācāraḥ kathaṃ caitāṃstrīn guṇānativartate Bg. 14. 21 transcend these three qualities; daivaṃ pauruṣeṇa Mb., Dk. 73, Ks. 121. 67.
     (4) (Intrans.) To pass away, glide away, elapse (as time); to be late or delay; evaṃ tayoḥ pratyahamanyonyāhārādidānena kālotivartate H. 1; mahatā snehena kālotivartate H. 2; samayo nātivartate Mv. 6; ā ṣoḍaśādbrāhmaṇasya sāvitrī nātivartate Ms. 2. 38 is not late (nātikrāṃtakālā bhavati).
     (5) To go away from, leave, abandon (abl.); yathā em hṛdayaṃ nityaṃ nātivartati rāghavāt Rām. --Caus.
     (1) To slight, not to heed, disregard; suhṛdaścātivartitāḥ Dk. 136.
     (2) To let out, discharge (as excrement).

ativartanam A pardonable offence or misdemeanour; exemption from punishment; ten cases are mentioned in Ms. 8. 290 yānasya caiva yātuśca yānasvāmina eva ca . daśātivartanānyāhuḥ śeṣe daṃḍo vidhīyate.

ativartin a.
     (1) Crossing, surpassing, excelling; bhuvanātivartinā ojasā Ki. 12. 21; passing over, overstepping, transgressing, violating &c.
     (2) Excessive.
     (3) Foremost.

ativṛttiḥ f.
     (1) Surpassing, violation, transgression.
     (2) Exaggeration, hyperbole.
     (3) Violent effusion (as of blood); excessive action.

ativardhanam Excessive growth, increase, adding to, increasing; etatkhalu vyajanānilairati(bhi)vardhanaṃ prabhaṃ janasya yadasmadvidhaiḥ paribodhanamāryasya K. 289; cf. "Carrying coals to New-castle", or "To gild refined gold, to paint the lily, ... or with taper-light the eye of Heaven to garnish is wasteful and ridiculous excess"; See the other phrases on the same page.

ativṛddha a. Very old; very much grown. --ddhaḥ N. of a Mantra in Tantras; catuḥśataṃ samārabhya yāvadvarṇasahasrakam . ativṛddhaḥ sa maṃtrastu sarvaśāstreṣu varjitaḥ .. --ddhā A very old cow (unable to chew grass &c.).

ativṛṣṭiḥ f. Excessive or heavy rain, one of the six calamities of the season. See īti.

ativegita a. Moving or moved with great velocity, quick in motion; maumādayolpamūrtitvācchīghramaṃdoccasaṃjñakaiḥ . daivatairapakṛṣyaṃte sudūramativegitāḥ ..

ativedhaḥ Close contact, N. of the contact of daśamī and ekādaśī (aruṇodayavedhaḥ syāt sārdhaṃ tu ghaṭikādvayam . ativedho dvighaṭikā prabhāsaṃdarśanādraveḥ .. iti smṛtyuktaḥ ekādaśyāḥ daśamīsaṃparkabhedaḥ Tv.).

ativela a. [atikrāṃto velāṃ maryādāṃ kūlaṃ vā]
     (1) Exceeding the due limits or boundary (as the water of the sea).
     (2) Excessive, extravagant; boundless. --laṃ adv.
     (1) Excessively.
     (2) Out of season, unseasonably.

ativyathanaṃ --thā Infliction of great pain; sapatraniṣpatrādativyathane P. V. 4. 61.

ativyāptiḥ f.
     (1) An unwarrantable stretch of a rule or principle.
     (2) Including what is not intended to be included in a proposition; (in Nyāya) including or covering too much, unwarranted extension of a definition to things not intended to be defined by it, so that it includes such things as ought not to fall under it; one of the three faults to which a definition is open; alakṣye lakṣaṇagamanaṃ ativyāptiḥ; yathā manuṣyo brāhmaṇaḥ iti lakṣaṇasya śūdre'tivyāptiḥ, tasyāpi manuṣyatvāt.

atiśakka(kva)rī A class of metres containing 4 lines, with 15 syllables in each. It has 18 varieties.

atiśarvaram Ved. The dead of night.

atiśastra a. Surpassing weapons; -nakhanyāsaḥ R. 12. 73 the nail-wounds surpassed the wounds of swords.

atiśī 2 A.
     (1) To surpass, excel; pūrvānmahābhāga tayā'tiśeṣe R. 5. 14; caritena cātiśayitā munayaḥ Ki. 6. 32, Bk. 7. 46, 8. 1; na śaknumo vayamāryasya matimatiśayituṃ Mu. 3.
     (2) To precede in sleeping; ahaṃ patīnnātiśaye Mb.
     (3) To annoy, act as an incubus. --Caus. (--śāyayati) To excel; dhārmnātiśāyayati dhāma sahasradhāmnaḥ Mu. 3. 17.

atiśayaḥ [śī-ac]
     (1) Excess, preeminence excellence; vīrya- R. 3. 62; mahimnāṃ ... atiśayaḥ U. 4. 21; tasmin vidhānātiśaye vidhātuḥ R. 6. 11 excellence, highest perfection of art.
     (2) Superiority (in quality, rank, quantity &c.); mahārghastīrthānāmiva hi mahatāṃ kopyatiśayaḥ U. 6. 11; oft in comp. with adjectives, in the sense of 'exceedingly', 'excessively'; -ramaṇīyaḥ Mu. 3; āsīdatiśayaprekṣyaḥ R. 17. 25; muktāguṇātiśayasaṃbhṛtamaṃḍanaśrīḥ V. 5. 19; or with nouns, meaning 'excellent', 'excessive', 'very great'; -rayaḥ, aśvātiśayaṃ K. 80 the best of horses; -dāridryopahatāḥ.
     (3) Advantageous result, one of the superhuman qualities attributed to Jaina saints. --a. [atiśayaḥ astyarthe ac] Superior, pre-eminent, excessive, very great, abundant.
     -- Comp.
          --uktiḥ f. 1. exaggerated or hyperbolical language, extreme assertion. 2. a figure of speech, (corr. to hyperbole) said to be of 5 kinds in S. D, but of 4 in K. P.; nigīryādhyavasānaṃ tu prakṛtasya pareṇa yat . prastutasya yadanyatvaṃ yadyarthoktau ca kalpanam . kāryakāraṇayoryaśca paurvāparyaviparyayaḥ . vijñeyātiśayoktiḥ sā; Ex. of the first kind: kamalamanaṃbhāsi kamale ca kuvalaye tāni kanakalatikāyāṃ . sā ca sukumārasubhagetyutpātaparaṃparā keyam .. 3. verbosity.

atiśayana a. [śī-bhāve-lyuṭ] Surpassing, (in comp.); great, eminent; abundant. --naṃ Excess, abundance, superfluity. --nī N. of a metre of four lines, also called citralekhā.

atiśayālu a. Tending to excel or surpass.

atiśayita p. p.
     (1) Excelled, surpassed &c.; -surāsuraprabhāvaṃ U. 5. 4.
     (2) Excessive, exceeding, going beyond.

atiśayin a. [śī-ini] Superior' excellent; pre-eminent; śriyamatiśayinīṃ sametya jagmuḥ Ki. 10. 25; idamuttamamatiśayini vyaṃgye vācyād dhvanirbudhaiḥ kathitaḥ K. P. 1; -yini samāptā vaṃśa evāśiṣaste V. 5. 21.
     (2) Excessive, abundant.

atiśāyanam [śī-lyuṭ] Excellence, superiority, Mv. 4. 15; atiśāyane tamabiṣṭhanau (superlative affixes) P. V. 3. 55.

atiśāyin a. [śī-ṇini]
     (1) Excelling, surpassing; arthakāma- &c.
     (2) Excessive. --nī N. of a metre.

atiśeṣaḥ Remainder; remnant (as of time); a small remainder.

atiśreyasiḥ [śreyasīmatikrāṃtaḥ] A man superior to the most excellent woman.

atiśva a.
     (1) Surpassing in strength a dog (such as a boar &c.).
     (2) Worse than a dog. --śvā Service; cf. sevāṃ lāghavakāriṇīṃ kṛtadhiyaḥ sthāne śvavṛttiṃ viduḥ Mu. 3. --śvaḥ N. of a tribe.

atiśvan m. An excellent dog.

atiṣkadvarī [fr. skaṃd] A transgressor; a very dissolute woman.

atiṣṭhā 1 P. To excel; be over (Ved.); sa bhūmiṃ viśvato vṛtvātyātiṣṭhaddaśāṃgulaṃ Rv. 10. 90. 1 was over and above by 10 Angulas. --ṣṭhā [sthā-kvipṣatvaṃ] Superiority, precedence. --a., -vat-van Surpassing, standing at the head of all.

atisaktiḥ f. Close contact, or proximity; great attachment; atisaktimetya varuṇasya diśā Śi. 9. 7.

atisaṃdhā 3 U.
     (1) To deceive, overreach, cheat; tvayā caṃdramasā ca viśvasanīyābhyāmatisaṃdhīyate kāmijanasārthaḥ S. 3; kathaṃ mayā brahmabaṃdhuratisaṃdheyaḥ V. 2.
     (2) To prejudice, wrong, injure, encroach upon; mūladvāraṃ nānyairdvārairatisaṃdadhīta rūparddhyā Bri. S. 53. 82.

atisaṃdhānam Cheating, deception; parātisaṃdhāna- S. 5. 25; trick, fraud.

atisaṃdhyā The time about the twilights, the time just before and after the morning and evening twilight.

atisarpaṇam Violent motion or movement (of the child in the womb).

atisarva a. Transcending or superior to all, above all. --rvaḥ The Supreme Being; atisarvāya śarvāya Mugdha.

atisāṃtapanam A kind of very austere penance; (gomūtragomayakṣīradadhisarpiḥkuśodakānyekāhaṃ dvitīyamupavasettatsāṃtapanaṃ; tryahābhyastaiścātisāṃtapanaṃ Viṣṇu Smṛti).

atisāṃvatsara a. ( f.) Extending over more than a year; Ms. 8. 153.

atisāmyā [atyaṃtaṃ sāmyaṃ madhunā asyāḥ] N. of the plant madhuyaṣṭi, sweet juice of the Bengal Madder, Rubia Manjith.

atisṛ 1 P. Ved. To extend. --Caus.
     (1) To extend.
     (2) To exert oneself to drive out; give out (as a fluid).

atisara a.
     (1) One who goes beyond or exceeds.
     (2) Leader, foremost. --raḥ Effort or exertion.

ati(tī)sāraḥ [atisārayati malaṃ dravīkṛtya, vā aterdīrghaḥ] Dysentery, violent straining at stool.

ati(tī)sārin m. [atyaṃtaṃ sārayati malaṃ] The disease called atisāra. --a., --atisārakin [atisāro yasyāsti, ini kuk ca] Affected by, afflicted with, dysentery; sātisāro'tisārakī Ak.

atisṛj 6 P.
     (1) To give, present, bestow, grant; atisṛṣṭo rājyārdhavibhāgaḥ Mu. 2; purā nārāyaṇeneyamatisṛṣṭā marutvate V. 1. 15; rāghavāya tanayāṃ ... atisṛṣṭavān R. 11. 48; anasūyātisṛṣṭena 12. 27.
     (2) To dismiss, abandon, part with.
     (3) To permit, allow.
     (4) To remit, forgive (as fine &c.).
     (5) To leave as a remnant.

     (1) Granting(of a wish); giving; sraṣṭurvarātisargāttu mayā tasya durātmanaḥ R. 10.42.
     (2) Granting permission (to do what one likes kāmacārānujñā) P.III. 3. 163, one of the senses of the Potential.
     (3) Dismissal, discharge, parting with; giving away; strīṇāṃ dānavikrayātisargā vidyaṃtena puṃsaḥ Nir. --a. [sargaṃ sṛṣṭimatikrāṃtaḥ] Everlasting, permanent (nitya); emancipated (mukta).

     (1) Giving, granting; consigning; vidhurāṃ jvalanātisarjanāt Ku. 4. 32, consigning to the flames; dīyatāmiti vacotisarjane Śi. 14. 48; tattadīyaviśikhātisarjanāt Ki. 13. 57 giving back.
     (2) Liberality, munificence.
     (3) Killing.
     (4) Deception.
     (5) Separation from, parting with.

atisaurabha a. Very fragrant. --bhaṃ Great fragrance. --bhaḥ The mango tree.

atisauhityam Stuffing oneself with food; na -tyamācaret Ms. 4. 62.

atisparśa a. Not liberal, niggardly, mean-spirited. --rśaḥ Slight contact or absence of contact of the tongue and palate in pronunciation; epithet of the semivowels and vowels.

atisnehaḥ Over-affection; -haḥ kāryadarśī V. 2 sees or finds what is to be done; -haḥ pāpaśaṃkī S. 4 is apt to suspect evil.

atihastayati Den. P. [atihasta-ṇi]
     (1) To stretch out the hands (hastau nirasyati).
     (2) [hastinā atikrāmati] To overtake (one) on an elephant.

atī [ati-i] 2 P.
     (1) To go beyond, pass on, over or beyond, cross (time or space); stokamaṃtaramatītya S. 1; javādatīye himavānadhomukhaiḥ Ki. 14. 54 was gone to or reached; sthātavyaṃ te nayanaviṣayaṃ yāvadatyeti bhānuḥ Me. 34 passes out of sight; atītyaikādaśāhaṃ tu nāmakarma tathā'karot Rām. after 11 days; gṛhapaṃktayaściramatīyire janaiḥ Śi. 13. 53.
     (2) To enter, step over; advāreṇa ca nātīyāt grāmaṃ vā veśma vā vṛtaṃ Ms. 4. 73.
     (3) To excel, surpass, outstrip, be more than a match for; trisrotasaḥ kāṃtimatītya tasthau Ku. 7. 15; satyamatītya harito harīṃśca vartaṃte vājinaḥ S. 1; agnistviṣā nātyeti pūṣaṇaṃ Śi. 2. 23; to exceed, go beyond, transcend; kusīdavṛddhirdvaiguṇyaṃ nātyeti Ms. 8. 151 does not exceed; atītya vācāṃ manasāṃ ca gocaraṃ sthitāya Ki. 18. 41, Śi. 16. 48.
     (4) To overcome, subdue, vanquish, get the better of; na pradīpa iva vāyumatyagāt R. 19. 53 did not overcome, outlive or survive; to overtake, out-do.
     (5) To walk by, walk past, pass by, leave behind; srotovahāṃ pathi nikāmajalāmatītya S. 6. 16; sotyagāt āśramaṃ R. 15. 37.
     (6) To omit, neglect, disregard, violate, transgress, overstep; na diṣṭamarthamatyetumīśo martyaḥ kathaṃcana Mb. avoid; atītya hi guṇān sarvān svabhāvo mūrdhni vartate H. 1. 15; deśaṃ kālaṃ ca yo'tīyāt Y. 2. 195; atīyātsāgaro velāṃ na pratijñāmahaṃ pituḥ Ram.; bhūtānyatyeti paṃca vai Ms. 12. 90 oversteps the five elements (mokṣaṃ prāpnoti Kull.); atyeti tatsarvamidaṃ viditvā Bg. 8. 28, 14. 20.
     (7) (Intrans.) To pass, elapse (time); atyeti rajanī yā tu sā na pratinivartate Rām.; atīte dakṣiṇāyane &c.
     (8) To overflow, be redundant, be in excess.
     (9) To die.

atīta p. p. [i-kta.]
     (1) Gone beyond, crossed.
     (2) (Used actively)
          (a) exceeding, going beyond, avoiding, overstepping, having passed over or neglected &c., with acc. or in comp.; paricchedātītaḥ Mal. 1. 30 beyond or past definition; saṃkhyāmatīta or saṃkhyātīta beyond enumeration, innumerable; tāmatītasya te Me. 29; yamunāmatītamatha śuśruvānamuṃ Śi. 13. 1; vayotītaḥ Ki. 11. 2 past youth, advanced in years; sarvāraṃbhaparityāgī guṇātītaḥ sa ucyate Bg. 14. 25; kairliṃgaistrīn guṇānetānatīto bhavati prabho 14. 21; bāṇapathamatītaḥ kravyabhojanaḥ V. 5 gone beyond the reach of arrows, past bowshot; atītanauke'tinu Ak. who has left the boat, i.e. landed, disembarked. --
          (b) Gone by, passed away, past (as time &c.); atīte niśāṃte Dk. 11; asannivṛttyai tadatītameva S. 6. 9; -anāgatavartamānavedinā Pt. 1; atīte varṣuke kāle Bk. 7. 18; -śaiśavā Ms. 8. 27; atīte kāryaśeṣajñaḥ śatrubhirnābhibhūyate Ms. 7. 179; -lābhasya ca rakṣaṇārthaṃ Pt. 2. 182 of past gains; vetti janmāṃtarāṇyatītāni K. 46. --
          (c) Dead, deceased; sabrahmacāriṇyekāhamatīte kṣapaṇaṃ smṛtaṃ Ms. 5. 71; aprajāyāmatītāyāṃ bhartureva tadiṣyate 9. 196, 197. --taṃ The past, past time.

atyayaḥ [i-ac]
          (a) Passing away, lapse; kāla- Ms. 8. 145.
          (b) End, conclusion, termination, absence, disappearance; tapātyaye Ku. 4. 44, 5. 23; śiśirātyayasya puṣpoccayaḥ 3. 61; ātapa- R. 1. 52.
     (2) Complete disappearance, death, destruction, passing away, perishing; pituratyayāt Dk. 64.
     (3) Danger, risk, harm, injury, evil; jīvitātyayamāpannaḥ Ms. 10. 104 the life being in danger or jeopardy; prāṇānāmeva cātyaye 5. 27; prāṇātyaye ca saṃprāpte Y. 1. 179, Ms. 6. 68, 8. 69; putradārātyayaṃ prāptaḥ 10. 99 (Kull. kṣudavasannaputrakalatraḥ).
     (4) Suffering, misery, difficulty, distress.
     (5) Guilt, fault, offence, transgression; kṣatriyasyātyaye daṃḍo bhāgāddaśaguṇo bhavet Ms. 8. 243; dāpyoṣṭaguṇamatyayaṃ 8. 400 should be made to pay as a fine for his offence.
     (6) Attack, assault Y. 2. 12.
     (7) Overcoming, mastering mentally, comprehending; buddhiśca te lokairapi duratyayā Ram.
     (8) Overstepping; kṣurasya dhārā niśitā duratyayā Ken.
     (9) A class, kind.

atyayika = ātyayika q. v.

atyayita a.
     (1) Exceeded, surpassed.
     (2) Violated, outraged.

atyayin a. [i-ini P. III. 2. 157] Exceeding, surpassing.

atīṃdriya a. [atikrāṃta iṃdriyaṃ] Beyond the cognizance (reach) of the senses; atīṃdriyeṣvapyupapannadarśanaḥ R. 3. 41; yattatsūkṣmamatīṃdriyaṃ jñānaṃ yannirvikalpākhyaṃ tadatīṃdriyamucyate; -jñānanidhiḥ Śi. 1. 11 --yaḥ The Soul or Purusha, (in Sāṅkhya phil.); the Supreme Soul. --yaṃ
     (1) Pradhāna or Nature (in Sāṅkhya phil.).
     (2) The mind (in Vedānta) yosāvatīṃdriyagrāhyaḥ sūkṣmo'vyaktaḥ sanātanaḥ Ms. 1. 7 (Kull. iṃdriyamatītya vartate iti -yaṃ manaḥ).

atīva [ati-iva] ind.
     (1) Exceedingly, excessively, very, very much, quite, too; -pīḍita, -hṛṣṭa &c.
     (2) Surpassing, superior to (acc.); atīvānyān bhaviṣyāvaḥ Mb.

atuṃda a. Not bulky, lean, lank.

atura a. Ved. Not rich or liberal.

atula a. [na. ba.] Unequalled, unsurpassed, matchless, peerless, incomparable, very great; bhayamatulaṃ gurulokāt Pt. 5. 31; so -parākrama, -rūpa &c. --laḥ The sesamum seed and plant (tilakavṛkṣa).

atulya a. Unequalled &c.

atuṣāra a. Not cold.
     -- Comp.
          --karaḥ The Sun; so atuhinakara, -raśmi, -dhāman -ruci &c.

atūtuji a. [na tuj-ki dvitvadīrghe] Not a donor or giver, not liberal (adātṛ).

atūrta a. [na tūryate, tur-hiṃsāyāṃ] Ved. Not obstructed or stopped or injured, unhurt. --rtaṃ The unlimited space, sky.
     -- Comp.
          --dakṣa a. Ved. whose plans cannot be obstructed or are unhurt.
          --pathin a. Ved. whose path cannot be obstructed.

atṛṇādaḥ [na tṛṇaṃ atti, ad-aṇ] 'Not eating grass', a new-born calf; atha vatsaṃ jātamāhuratṛṇāda iti Bṛ. Ār. Up.

atṛṇyā [na. ta.] A small quantity of grass.

atṛdila a. [na tṛdyate vadhyate, tṛdkilac] Ved. Not assailable, immovable, solid, firm (as a mountain).

atejas a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Not bright, dim.
     (2) Weak, feeble.
     (3) Insignificant; so atejaska, atejasvin. --s n. Dimness, shadow, darkness; absence of vigour, feebleness, dullness.

atkaḥ [atati gacchati satataṃ vikṛtiṃ, paṃthānaṃ &c. at-kan kittvaṃ Uṇ. 3. 43] 1 A traveller.
     (2) A limb or member (of the body).
     (3) (Ved.) Water, lightning, garment, armour (?).

atkīlaḥ N. of the author of some Vedic hymns, a descendant of Viśvāmitra.

attā [atati satataṃ saṃbadhnāti; at-tak iḍabhāvaḥ]
     (1) A mother.
     (2) An elder sister.
     (3) A mother-in-law; (rarely) mother's sister.

attiḥ f., attikā [atyate sarvadā saṃbadhyate, karmaṇi ktin] An elder sister &c.

atṛ &c. See under ad.

atnam [atati jayaparājayau atra, at-na] A battle, fight.

atnaḥ [atatisatataṃ gacchati; at-na Uṇ. 3. 6.]
     (1) Wind.
     (2) The sun.
     (3) A traveller. Written also as atnu.

atyaḥ [atati śīghraṃ gacchati, at kartari yat] A courser, steed.

atyaṃhas a. Ved. Emancipated from sin or evil.

atyagni a. Surpassing fire. --gniḥ Morbidly rapid digestion.

atyagniṣṭomaḥ [atikrāṃto'gniṣṭomaṃ adhikaphaladatvāt] The optional second part of the Jyotiṣṭoma sacrifice.

atyaṃkuśa a. [aṃkuśamatikrāṃtaḥ] Past the goad, uncontrollable, unmanageable; -śamivoddāmaṃ gajaṃ Ram.

atyadhvan m. A long or wearisome travelling; a long journey.

atyaṃta a. [atikrāṃtaḥ aṃtaṃ sīmāṃ nāśaṃ]
     (1) Excessive, much, very great or strong; -vairaṃ great enmity; -maitrī; -himotkirānilāḥ Ku. 5. 26.
     (2) Complete, perfect, absolute; -abhāvaḥ absolute non-existence; See below.
     (3) Endless, perpetual, permanent, everlasting, uninterrupted, unbroken; kiṃ vā tavātyaṃtaviyogamoghe hatajīvite R. 14. 65; bhavatyajaramatyaṃtaṃ Pt. 1. 151; -taṃ sukhamaśnute Ms. 5. 46; Bg. 6. 28; kasyātyaṃtaṃ sukhamupanataṃ Me. 109; nāyamatyaṃtasaṃvāso labhyate yena kenacit H. 4. 73. --taṃ ind.
     (1) Exceedingly, excessively, very much, to the highest degree; sthāyībhavati cātyaṃtaṃ rāgaḥ śuklapaṭe yathā Pt. 1. 33; -śiśu Mu. 4. 14 very young.
     (2) For ever, to the end (of life), through life; atyaṃtamātmasadṛśekṣaṇavallabhābhirāho nivatsyati S. 1. 27 for all time, in perpetuity; sā cātyaṃtamadarśanaṃ nayanayoryātā V. 4. 2.; oft in comp.; -gatā See below; priyamatyaṃtaviluptadarśanaṃ Ku. 4. 2 for ever lost to view; R. 14. 49.
     (3) Absolutely, perfectly, completely.
     -- Comp.
          --abhāvaḥ absolute or complete non-existence, absolute non-entity, a thing which does not exist at any one of the three periods of time, or does not exist for all time; traikālikasaṃsargāvacchinnapratiyogikaḥ. (This is considered to be nitya or eternal and different from the other kinds of abhāva). --ga a. going or walking too much or too fast.
          --gata a. gone or departed for ever, gone never to return; kathamatyaṃtagatā na māṃ daheḥ R. 8. 56. 2. always applicable, perfectly intimate or pertinent.
          --gatiḥ f. 1. sense of 'completely'; anatyaṃtagatau ktāt P. V. 4. 4. 2. completion, accomplishment.
          --gāmin a. 1. going or walking very much, going too fast or quickly. 2. excessive, much.
          --nivṛttiḥ f. complete disappearance, absolute cessation.
          --vāsin m. [vas-ṇini] one who constantly stays with his preceptor, as a student.
          --saṃyogaḥ close proximity, uninterrupted continuity; kālādhvanoratyaṃtasaṃyoge P. II. 1. 29. 2. Inseparable co-existence.
          --saṃparkaḥ excessive sexual intercourse.
          --sukumāra a. very tender. (
          --raḥ) a kind of grain.

atyaṃtika a. [atyaṃtaṃ gacchati; atyaṃtaṭhan] 1 Going too much or too fast.
     (2) Very near.
     (3) Not near, distant. --kaṃ [atiśayitaṃ aṃtikaṃ naikaṭyaṃ]
     (1) Close proximity, immediate neighbourhood or being in close proximity.
     (2) [atikrāṃtaṃ aṃtikaṃ] Great distance.

atyaṃtīna a. [atyaṃtaṃ gāmī atyaṃtīnaḥ, bhṛśaṃ gaṃtā; atyaṃta-kha P. V. 2. 11] Going or walking too much, going too fast (atyaṃtagamanaśīla); lakṣmīṃ paraṃparīṇāṃ tvamatyaṃtīnatvamunnaya Bk.

atyamla a. [atiśayitomlo rasaḥphalapatrādau yasya] Very acid or sour. --mlaḥ N. of a tree, Spondias Mangifera. --mlā, -paṇīṃ A species of citron (vanabījapūra).

atyaya, atyayika &c. See under atī.

atyartha a. [atikrāṃtaḥ arthaṃ anurūpasvarūpaṃ] Beyond the proper worth or measure, excessive, very great, intense, exorbitant; -tāpāt M. 2. 13 --rthaṃ adv. Very much, exceedingly, excessively; atyarthaṃ paradāsyametya nipuṇaṃ nītau mano dīyate Mu. 2. 5; priyo hi jñāninotyarthamahaṃ sa ca mama priyaḥ Bg. 7. 17; oft. in comp.; -saṃpīḍitaḥ S. 7. 11 excessively pinched; -kruddha, -tṛṣita &c.

atyavi a. Ved. Passing over or through the sieve or strainer (epithet of Soma.).

atyaṣṭiḥ f. [atikrāṃtā aṣṭiṃ ṣoḍaśākṣarapādāṃ vṛttiṃ ekākṣarādhikyāt] A metre of 4 lines, each containing 17 syllables.

atyahna a. [atikrāṃtamahaḥ] Exceeding a day in duration.

atyākāraḥ [atiśayitaḥ ākāraḥ tiraskāraḥ]
     (1) Contempt, blame, censure; ślāghātyākāratadaveteṣu P. V. 1. 134.
     (2) Bigness of person, a very large body.

atyākam = ākram q. v.

atyācāra a. [ācāramatikrāṃtaḥ] Deviating from established usages or customs, negligent. --raḥ Performance of works not sanctioned by usage (anucitācaraṇaṃ); irreligious conduct.

atyāditya a. Surpassing the (lustre of the) sun; atyādityaṃ hutavahamukhe saṃbhṛtaṃ taddhi tejaḥ Me. 43.

atyānaṃdā Morbid indifference to the pleasures of sexual union.

     (1) Laying on, imposition.
     (2) Transgression.
     (3) Violation of ādhāna, not keeping the sacred fire.

atyāya a. [i or ay-ghañ]
     (1) Transgressing.
     (2) Past going time. --yaḥ
     (1) Transgression, violation.
     (2) Excess.
     (3) Great gain or profit (atiśayitolābhaḥ).

atyāyu n. [ati-ā-yā-ku] A kind of sacrificial vessel.

atyārūḍha a. Grown to excess; -ḍho hi nārīṇāmakālajño manobhavaḥ R. 12. 33. --ḍhaṃ, --ḍhiḥ f. A very high position, great elevation or rise; atyārūḍhirbhavati mahatāmapyapabhraṃśaniṣṭhā S. 4. v. 1.; atyārūḍhaṃ ripoḥ soḍhaṃ caṃdaneneva bhoginaḥ R. 10. 42.

atyālaḥ [atiśayena samaṃtāt alati paryāpnoti; ati-ā-al-ac] N. of a plant raktacitraka Plumbago Rosea.

atyāsaḥ [ati-as-ghañ] Allowing to pass, only in acc. sing. as ṇamul; dvyahātyāsaṃ or dvyahamatyāsaṃ gāḥ pāyayati P. III 4. 57 after an interval of 2 days (adya pāyayitvā dvyahamatikramya punaḥ pāyayati).

atyāhitam [ādhā-ādhāre kta, atyaṃtamādhīyate tannivāraṇārthaṃ mano dīyate yasmin Tv.] A great calamity, danger or evil, misfortune, mishap, accident; na kimapyatyāhitaṃ S. 1, kiṃ atyāhitaṃ sītādevyāḥ; -na kevalaṃ -taṃ sāpavādamapi U. 2; mayā -tamupalabdhaṃ V. 4; kimidamuccairatyāhitaṃ Mv. 6; śrutamatyāhitaṃ M. 4 evil or evil news; oft. as an exclamation, 'Ah, me!' 'alas! alas!', 'how bad it is!' Māl. 3, 7; V. 5.
     (2) A rash or daring deed (jīvānapekṣikarma); atyāhitaṃ kimapi rākṣasakarma kuryāt Mv. 4. 50 rash and demoniacal deed; pāṃḍuputrairna kimapyatyāhitamāceṣṭitaṃ bhavet Ve. 2.

atyuktā --kthā [uktā-kthā ekākṣarapādā vṛttiḥ, tāṃ atikrāṃtā] N. of a class of metres of 4 lines, each of 2 syllables.

atyuktiḥ f. Exaggeration, hyperbole, over-drawn or coloured description; atyuktau na yadi prakupyasi mṛṣāvādaṃ ca no manyase . Udbhata. See atiśayokti also.

atyugra a. Very fierce. --graṃ Asa foetida.

atyupadha a. [upadhāṃ atikrāṃtaḥ] Above guiles, trustworthy, tried; amātye cātyupadhe Ak.

atyūmaśā ind. [ūryādigaṇa] A particle of abuse, occurring in comp. with bhū, kṛ or as.

atyūrmi a. Ved. Overflowing or bubbling over.

atyūhaḥ [atiśayena ūhaḥ tarkaḥ]
     (1) Close or deep meditation or thinking; earnest reasoning.
     (2) [atiśayena ūhate śabdāyate; ati-ūh-ac] A gallinule (dātyūha). --hā A plant (nīlikā) Nyctanthes Tristis, or Jasminum Villosum.

atra (atrā Ved.) ind. [asmin etasmin vā, idaṃ-etadvā saptamyāḥ tral prakṛteḥ aśbhāvaśca Tv.]
     (1) In this place, here; api saṃnihito'tra kulapatiḥ S. 1.; atra gṛhyate atra gṛhyate K. 119 here-here i. e. just now.
     (2) In this respect, matter, or case; as to this, (serving the purpose of asmin viṣaye or of the forms asmin or etasmin, asyāṃ &c. with a substantive or adjectival force); ahiṃsā paramo dharma ityatra aikamatyaṃ H. 1; alaṃ prayatnena tavātra R. 3. 50; bhavaṃtamevātra gurulāghavaṃ pṛcchāmi S. 5; tadatra parigatārthaṃ kṛtvā S. 6 informing him of this matter.
     (3) There, in that direction.
     (4) Then, at that time (Ved.); kaḥ kotra bhoḥ who is there? which of the servants is in attendance? who waits there? (used in calling out to one's servants &c.; cf. Hindustāni ko hai).
     -- Comp.
          --aṃtare adv. in the mean while, meantime S. 3. 11.
          --davna a. (ghnī f.) reaching so far up; as tall as this.
          --bhavat (m. bhavān) an honorific epithet meaning 'worthy', 'revered', 'honourable', 'your or his honour', and referring to a person that is present or near the speaker, (opp. tatrabhavat); -bhavatī f. 'your or her lady-ship' (pūjye tatrabhavānatrabhavāṃśca bhagavānapi); atrabhavān prakṛtimāpannaḥ S. 2; vṛkṣasecanādeva pariśrāṃtāmatrabhavatīṃ lakṣaye S. 1.

atratya a. [atra bhavo jātaḥ etatsthānasaṃbaddho vā; atra-tyap]
     (1) Belonging to, or connected with, this place; daurātmyādrakṣasastāṃ tu nātratyāḥ śraddadhuḥ prajāḥ R. 15. 72.
     (2) Produced or found here, of this place, local.

atra a. Ved. Not giving or enjoying protection. --traḥ Ved. [adtran] An eater, devourer; a demon, Rākṣasa. --traṃ Food.

atrapa a. [na. ba.] Shameless, impudent, immodest.

atravas ind. The year before last (?)

atrasta, atrāsa, --trasnu a. [na. ta.] Not afraid, fearless; jugopātmānamatrastaḥ R. 1. 21.

atri a. [properly attri, Uṇ. 4. 68, adestriniśca, ad-trin] Devourer; Rv. 2. 8. 5. --triḥ N. of a celebrated sage and author of many Vedic hymns. [He appears in the Vedas in hymns addressed to Agni, Indra, the Aśvins and the Viśvedevas. In the Svāyambhuva Manvantara he appears as one of the ten Prajāpatis or mind-born sons of Brahma, being born from his eye. These sons having died by the curse of Śiva, Brahmā performed a sacrifice, at the beginning of the present Vaivasvata Manvantara, and Atri was born from the flames of Agni. Anasūyā was his wife in both lives. In the first she bore him three sons, Datta, Durvāsas and Soma; in the second she had two additional children, a son by name Aryaman and a daughter called Amala. In the Rāmāyaṇa an account is given of the visit paid by Rāma and Sītā to Atri and Anasūyā in their hermitage, when they both received them most kindly; See Anasūya. As a Ṛṣi or sage he is one of the seven sages who were all sons of Brahma, and represents in Astronomy one of the stars of the Great Bear situated in the north. He is also the author of a code of laws known as atrismṛti or atrisaṃhitā. In the Purāṇas he is said to have produced the moon from his eye, while he was practising austere penance, the moon being in consequence called atrija, --jāta, --dṛgja, atrinetraprasūta, ---prabhava, -bhava &c.; cf. also atha nayanasamutthaṃ jyotiratreriva dyauḥ R. 2. 75 and atreriveṃduḥ V. 5. 21.] --(pl.) descendants of Atri.

atrin m. A devourer, a demon.

atsarukaḥ [nāsti tsaruryasya] N. of a sacrificial vessel.

atha (Ved. athā) ind. [arth-ḍa, pṛṣoda- ralopaḥ Tv.] A particle used at the beginning (of works) mostly as a sign of auspiciousness, and translated by 'here,' 'now' (begins) (maṃgala, āraṃbha, adhikāra). (Properly speaking 'auspiciousness' or maṃgala is not the sense of atha, but the very utterance or hearing of the word is considered to be indicative of auspiciousness, as the word is suppossed to have emanated from the throat of Brahmā: oṃkāraścātha śabdaśca dvāvetau brahmaṇaḥ purā . kaṃṭhaṃ bhittvā viniryātau tena māṃgalikāvubhau .. and therefore we find in Śaṅkara Bhāṣya arthāṃtaraprayuktaḥ athaśabdaḥ śrutyā maṃgalamāracayati); atha nirvacanaṃ; atha yogānuśāsanaṃ; athedaṃprārabhyate dvitīyaṃ taṃtraṃ Pt. 2. (usually followed by iti at the end, iti prathamoṃkaḥ here ends &c.).
     (2) Then, afterwards (ānaṃtarya) atha prajānāmadhipaḥ prabhāte vanāya dhenuṃ mumoca R. 2. 1; often as a correlative of yadi or cet; na cenmunikumāroyaṃ atha kosya vyapadeśaḥ S. 7; muhūrtādupari upādhyāyaścedāgacchet atha tvaṃ chaṃdo 'dhīṣva P. III. 3. 9. Sk.
     (3) If, supposing, now if, in case, but if (pakṣāṃtara); atha kautukamāvedayāmi K. 144, S. 5. 27; atha maraṇamavaśyameva jaṃtoḥ kimiti mudhā malinaṃ yaśaḥ kurudhve Ve. 3. 4; atha gṛhṇāti S. 7; Ku. 5. 45; Mu. 3. 25; Ki. 1. 44; atha cāstamitā tvamātmanā R. 8. 51 while, but, on the other hand; oft. followed by tataḥ or tathāpi, Bg. 12. 9, 11; 2. 26; atha cet but if Bg. 2. 33; 18. 58.
     (4) And, so also, as also, likewise (samuccaya); gaṇitamatha kalāṃ vaiśikīṃ Mk. 1. 3; Ms. 2. 1. 31; bhīmo' thārjunaḥ G. M.
     (5) Used in asking or introducing questions (praśna), oft. with the interrogative word itself; atha sā tatrabhavatī kimākhyasya rājarṣeḥ patnī S. 7; arthavān khalu me rājaśabdaḥ . atha bhagavāṃllokānugrahāya kuśalī kāśyapaḥ S. 5; atha śaknoṣi bhoktuṃ G. M.; athātrabhavatī kathamitthaṃbhūtā M. 5; Bg. 3. 36; atha bhavaṃtamaṃtareṇa kīdṛśo 'syā dṛṣṭirāgaḥ S. 2; atha māṭhavyaṃ prati kimevaṃ prayuktaṃ S. 6 (atha may in these two sentences mean 'but').
     (6) Totality, entirety (kārtsnya); atha dharmaṃ vyākhyāsyāmaḥ G. M. we shall explain the whole dharma (dharma in all its details.).
     (7) Doubt, uncertainty (saṃśaya, vikalpa); śabdonityo 'thānityaḥ G. M. The senses of atha usually given by lexicographers are: --athotha syātāṃ samuccaye . maṃgale saṃśayāraṃbhādhikārānaṃtareṣu ca . anvādeśe pratijñāyāṃ praśnasākalyayorapi .. Some of these senses are indentical with those in
     (1), while some are not in general use.
     -- Comp.
          --api moreover, and again &c. (= atha in most cases); -ca likewise, also.
          --kiṃ what else, yes, exactly so, quite so, certainly; sarvathā apsaraḥsaṃbhavaiṣā . atha kiṃ S. 1; api vṛṣalamanuraktāḥ prakṛtayaḥ atha kiṃ Mu. 1.
          --vā 1. or (used like the English disjunctive conjunction 'or' and occupying the same place); vyavahāraṃ parijñāya vadhyaḥ pūjyo'thavā bhavet H. 1. 58; samastairathavā pṛthak Ms. 7. 198; athavā-athavā either-or; vātha is often used in the same sense with vā; kārtike vātha caitre vā Pt. 3. 38; Ms. 7. 182; athāpi vā also used in the same sense; etadeva vrataṃ kuryuścāṃdrāyaṇamathāpi vā 11. 118; 8. 287. 2. or rather, or why, or perhaps, is it not so (correcting or modifying a previous statement); why should there be any thought or hesitation about it, or it is no wonder; api nāma kulapateriyamasavarṇakṣetrasaṃbhavā syāt . athavā kṛtaṃ saṃdehena S. 1., 1. 16; gamiṣyāmyupahāsyatāṃ ... athavā kṛtavāgdvāre vaṃśe 'smin R. 1. 3-4; athavā mṛduvastu hiṃsituṃ 8. 45; dīrye kiṃ na sahasradhāhamathavā rāmeṇa kiṃ duṣkaraṃ U. 6. 40; adhodho gaṃgeyaṃ padamupagatā stokamathavā . vivekabhraṣṭānāṃ bhavati vinipātaḥ śatamukhaḥ Bh. 2. 10.

atho = atha in most senses; atho vayasyāṃ paripārśvavartinīṃ ... aikṣata Ku. 5. 51; striyo ratnānyatho vidyā Ms. 2. 240, 3. 202, Bg. 4. 35, Ki. 5. 16, 6. 1.

athariḥ --rī Ved. m. f. A finger; finger-like or pointed flame (?)

atharyati Den. P. To go constantly.

atharya --ryu a. Ved. Moving constantly, tremulous (gamanaśīla) Rv. 7. 1. 1; pointed like a lance, lambent (?)

atharvaḥ = atharvan below.

atharvaṇaḥ [atharvā taduktavidyā astyasya jñātṛtvāt ac na ṭilopaḥ]
     (1) Śiva.
     (2) N. of the Atharvaveda, See below.

atharvan m. [atha-ṛ-vanip śakaṃdhvādi- Tv.; probably connected with some word like athar fire]
     (1) A priest who has to worship fire and Soma.
     (2) A Brāhmaṇa.
     (3) N. of the priest who is said to have first brought down fire from the heaven, offered Soma and recited prayers. [He is represented as the eldest son of Brahma, sprung from his mouth; as a Prajāpati appointed by Brahmā to create and protect subordinate beings, who first learnt from Brahmā and then taught the Brahma-vidya and is considered to be the author of the Veda called after him. His wife was Santi, daughter of Kardama Prajāpati. He had also another wife called Chitti; he is also considered identical with Angiras and father of Agni.]
     (4) Epithet of Śiva, Vasiṣṭha. --(pl.) Descendants of Atharvan; hymns of this Veda; jiṣṇuṃ jaitrairatharvabhiḥ R. 17. 13. --rvā-rva m. n., -vedaḥ The Atharvaveda, regarded as the fourth Veda. [It contains many forms of imprecations for the destruction of enemies and also contains a great number of prayers for safety and averting mishaps, evils, sins or calamities, and a number of hymns, as in the other Vedas, addressed to the gods with prayers to be used at religious and solemn rites; cf. Mv. 2. 24 mūrtimabhirāmaghorāṃ bibhradivātharvaṇo nigamaḥ. It has nine Sakhās and five Kalpas, and is comprised in 20 Kāṇḍas. The most important Brāhmaṇa belonging to this Veda is the Gopatha-Brāhmaṇa, and the Upanishads pertaining to it are stated to be 52, or, according to another account, 31.] [cf. Zend atharvan, Pers. aturban.]
     -- Comp.
          --adhipaḥ N. of budha Mercury (sāmavedādhipo bhaumaḥ śaśijo 'tharvavedarāṭ). --nidhiḥ, --vid m. receptacle of the (knowledge of) Atharvaveda, or conversant with it; guruṇā'tharvavidā kṛtakriyaḥ R. 8. 4, 1. 59; (atharvavidhipadena duritopaśamananimittaśāṃtikapauṣṭikapravīṇatvaṃ paurohityocitatvaṃ dyotyate Malli.)
          --bhūtāḥ (pl.) those who have become Atharvans, N. of the 12 Maharshis.
          --śikhā, --śiras n. [atharvaṇo vedasya śikhā śira iva vā brahmavidyāpratipādakatvena śreṣṭhatvāt] N. of an Upanishad dealing with Brahmavidyā.

atharvaṇiḥ [atharvaṇi taduktaśāṃtyādau vā kuśalaḥ, is sittvena bhatvābhāvāt na ṭilopaḥ Tv.]
     (1) A Brāhmaṇa versed in this Veda; or skilled in the performance of the rites enjoined by it. --2. A family priest (purodhas).

atharvāṃgiras m. A member of the class of this name. --(pl.)
     (1) Descendants of Atharvan and of Angiras.
     (2) N. of the hymns of the Atharvaveda; daṃḍanītyāṃ ca kuśalamatharvāṃgirase tathā Y. 1. 312.

atharvāṃgirasa a. ( f.) Connected with atharvāṃgiras. --saṃ Office of this person. --sāḥ Hymns of this Veda.

atharvāṇam Ritual of the Atharvaveda. --ṇaḥ, ---vid One studying or versed in this Veda or the ritual.

atharvī a. Ved. [na thurv-ac, pṛṣo- ulopaḥ gaurā---ṅīṣ Tv.] Not injuring or hurting, not destructive; pierced by a lance (?).

athavā, atho See under atha.

ad 2 P. [atti, āda, --jaghāsa, aghasat, atsyati, attuṃ, anna, -jagdha, jagdhvā]
     (1) To eat, devour.
     (2) To destroy.
     (3) = aṃd, q. v. --Caus. To feed with, cause to eat; ādayatyannaṃ baṭunā Sk. --Desid. jighatsati To wish to eat. [cf. L. edo, Gr. edo, Germ. essen, Eng. eat; Lith. edmi, Sans. admi, Goth. at, Zend ad]. With ava to satisfy by food, get rid of with feeding; (fig.) stop the mouth of. --ā to eat &c. --pra --saṃ to use up, consume, devour; samadaṃtyāmiṣaṃ khagāḥ Bk. 18. 12. --vi to gnaw.

attṛ a. [ad-tṛc] One who eats; arakṣitāramattāraṃ nṛpaṃ vidyādadhogatiṃ Ms. 8. 309.

ad --da a. (at the end of comp.) Eating, devouring; māṃsāda carnivorous, feeding on flesh; so matsya-.

adaṃṣṭra a. [na. ba.] Toothless. --ṣṭraḥ A serpent without teeth; one whose fangs have been taken out.

adakṣiṇa a. [na. ta.]
     (1) Not right, left.
     (2) [na. ba.] Not bringing in Dakṣiṇā to the priests; without any gifts (as a sacrifice); mṛto yajñastvadakṣiṇaḥ Pt. 2. 94.
     (3) Simple, weakminded, silly; mene'tha satyameveti parihāsamadakṣiṇā Rām.
     (4) Not handy, skilful or clever; awkward.
     (5) Unfavourable.

adakṣiṇīya --dakṣiṇya a. Not deserving Dakṣiṇā.

adagdha a. Not burnt; not burnt according to the rites.

adaṃḍa a. [na. ba.] Free or exempt from punishment.

adaṃḍya a.
     (1) Not deserving punishment; adaṃḍyān daṃḍayan rājā daṃḍyāṃścaivāpyadaṃḍayan Y. 2.
     (2) Exempt or free from punishment; nādaṃḍyo nāma rājñosti yaḥ svadharme na tiṣṭhati Ms. 8. 335.

adat a. Toothless.

adatta a.
     (1) Not given.
     (2) Unjustly or improperly given.
     (3) Not given in marriage.
     (4) Not having given any thing. --ttā An unmarried girl. --ttaṃ A gift which is null and void (having been given under particular circumstances which make it revocable).
     -- Comp.
          --ādāyin a. the receiver of such a gift; one who takes what has not been given away, such as a thief; adattādāyino hastāllipseta brāhmaṇo dhanaṃ . yājanādhyāpanenāpi yathā stenastathaiva saḥ .. --pūrvā Not affianced or betrothed before; adattapūrvetyāśaṃkyate Mal. 4.

adatra a. [ad-vā- atran] Ved. Fit to be eaten; adatrayā dayate vāryāṇi Rv. 5. 49. 3 (= adanīyāni).

adadhryaṃc [amuṃ aṃcati adas-aṃckvip adhrāgamaḥ P. VIII. 2. 80-81] Going to that, tending to that.

adaṃta a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Toothless.
     (2) Not yet having the teeth formed or grown (said of young ones of men or animals before the teething time).
     (3) Ending in at or a. --taḥ
     (1) A leech.
     (2) N. of Pūṣan, one of the 12 Ādityas, he having lost his teeth at the destruction of Daksha's sacrifice by Vīrabhadra.

adaṃtya a.
     (1) Not dental.
     (2) Not fit for the teeth; injurious to them.

adabdha, --daṃbha a. [na. ta.] Ved. Unbroken or unimpaired, unhurt, uninjured; pure, true; -asu, or -āyuḥ having uninjured or pure life; leaving uninjured the man who sacrifices; -dhīti, -vrata whose works or religious observances are unimpaired.

adabhra a. [daṃbh-rak, na. ta.] Not scanty, plentiful, copious; adabhradarbhāmadhiśayya sa sthalīṃ Ki. 1. 38; -abhranirghoṣa Dk. 35.

adaṃbha a. Honest, undeceitful. --bhaḥ
     (1) Honesty, absence of deceit.
     (2) N. of Śiva.

adaya [na. ba.] Merciless, unkind, cruel. --yaṃ ind. Mercilessly; ardently; fervently, closely (as an embrace) V. 5. 9.

     (1) Day of new moon.
     (2) A mirror (= ādarśa).

     (1) Not seeing, non-vision; absence, not being seen; tamāhitautsukyamadarśanena R. 2. 73; aṃtardhau yenādarśanamicchati P. I. 4. 28 the person whose sight one wishes to avoid; -naṃ gataḥ Pt. 2; -nībhūtaḥ Pt. 1 become invisible; asya -naṃ gatvā Pt. 2 going out of his sight, beyond the reach of vision; sā cātyaṃtamadarśanaṃ nayanayoryātā V. 4. 2 lost to view, become invisible.
     (2) Neglect, or failure to see; brāhmaṇādarśanena ca Ms. 10. 43.
     (3) (Gram.) Disappearance, elision, omission; adarśanaṃ lopaḥ P. I. 1. 60.

adala a.
     (1) Leafless.
     (2) Without parts. --laḥ A plant (hijjala) Eugenia or Barringtonia Acutangula. --lā A plant (ghṛtakumārī) Aloe Indica Royle.

adas pron. a. [na dasyate utkṣipyate aṃguliryatra idaṃtayā nirddhāraṇāya purovartini evāṃgulinirdeśaḥ saṃbhavati nāpurovartini, na-das-kvip Tv.] (asau m. f, adaḥ n). That, (referring to a person or thing not present or near the speaker) (viprakṛṣṭa or parokṣa); idamastu sannikṛṣṭaṃ samīpataravarti caitado rūpam . adasastu viprakṛṣṭaṃ taditi parokṣe vijānīyāt .. amuṣya vidyā rasanāgranartakī N. 1. 6.; asau nāmā'hamasmīti svanāma parikīrtayet . Ms. 2. 122 I am that person, so and so (giving the name); asāvahamiti brūyāt 130, 216; Y. 1. 26. adas is, however, often used with reference to pratyakṣa or sannikṛṣṭa objects &c. in the sense of 'this here', 'yonder'; asau śaraṇyaḥ śaraṇonmukhānāṃ R. 6. 21 (asāviti purovartino nirdeśaḥ Malli.); amī rathyāḥ S. 1. 8.; amī vahnayaḥ 4. 17, 7. 11. It is often used in the sense of tat as a correlative of yat; hiṃsārataśca yo nityaṃ nehāsau sukhamedhate Ms. 4. 170 he who &c. But when it immediately follows the relative pronoun (yosau, ye amī &c.) it conveys the sense of prasiddha 'well-known', 'celebrated', 'renowned'; yosāvatīdriyagrāhyaḥ sūkṣmo' vyaktaḥ sanātanaḥ Ms. 1. 7; yosau kumārasevako nāma Mu. 3; yosau coraḥ Dk. 68; sometimes adas used by itself conveys this sense; vidhurapi vidhiyogādgrasyate rāhuṇā'sau that (so well-known to us all) moon too. See the word tad also and the quotations from K. P --ind. There, at that time, then, thus, ever; correlative to some pronominal forms; yadādaḥ, yatrādaḥ whenever, whereever &c. By ado'nupadeśe P. I. 4. 70 adas has the force of a (gati) preposition when no direction to another is implied; adaḥ kṛtya adaḥ kṛtaṃ; . paraṃ pratyupadeśe tu adaḥ kṛtvā adaḥ kuru . Sk.

adasyati Den. P. To become that P. VIII. 2. 80.

adātṛ a.
     (1) Not giving, miserly; ādānanityāccādātuḥ Ms. 11. 15 not liberal
     (2) Not giving (a daughter) in marriage; kāle'dātā pitā vācyaḥ Ms. 9. 4.
     (3) Not liable to payment.

adādi a. Having ad at the head, a term used to mark roots of the second conjugation.

adāna a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Not giving, miserly.
     (2) Without rut (or not charitable); sadādānaḥ parikṣīṇaḥ śasta eva karīśvaraḥ . adānaḥ pīnagātropi niṃdya eva hi gardabhaḥ Pt. 2. 70.

adānya, adāyin, adāman, adāśu, adāśuri, -dāśvas a. Ved. Not giving, miserly, poor; irreligious, impious.

adābhya a. Ved.
     (1) Faithful, trusty.
     (2) Uninjured, unhurt.
     (3) Pure, undefiled.
     (4) Unapproachable.

adāya a. [nāsti dāyo yasya] Not entitled to a share.

adāyāda a.
     (1) Not entitled to be an heir; pumāndāyādo'dāyādā strī Nir.; kānīnaśca sahoḍhaśca krītaḥ paunarbhavastathā . svayaṃdattaśca śaudraśca ṣaḍadāyādabāṃdhavāḥ .. Ms. 9. 160.
     (2) Destitute of heirs.

adāyika a. ( f.) [dāyamarhati dāya-ṭhak na. ba.]
     (1) That which is not claimed by an heir; destitute of heirs; adāyikaṃ dhanaṃ rājagāmi Kāty.
     (2) Not relating to inheritance.

adāraḥ [na. ba.]
     (1) One who has no wife, a widower or bachelor.
     (2) [na. ta.] Not injuring or tearing.

adāsaḥ A free man; Ms. 10. 32.

adāhya a.
     (1) Incombustible.
     (2) Not fit to be burnt on the funeral pile.
     (3) Not capable of being burnt, epithet of paramātman.

adikka a. Ved. Having no direction or region of the world for oneself; banished from beneath the sky.

aditi a. [na dīyate khaṃḍyate badhyate bṛhattvāt, do-ktic] Free, not tied; boundless, unlimited, inexhaustible; entire, unbroken; happy, pious (mostly Ved. in all these senses). --tiḥ [atti prāṇijātaṃ; ad-itic]
     (1) Devourer i. e. death; yadyadevāsṛjata tattadattumadhriyata, sarvaṃ vā attīti tadaditeradititvaṃ Bṛ. Ār. Up.
     (2) An epithet of God. --tiḥ f. [na dātuṃ śaktiḥ]
     (1) Inability to give, poverty.
     (2) [dātuṃ chettuṃ ayogyā]
          (a) The earth.
          (b) The goddess Aditi, mother of the Adityas, in mythology represented as the mother of gods; see further on.
          (c) Freedom, security; boundlessness, immensity of space (opp. to the earth).
          (d) Inexhaustible abundance, perfection.
          (e) The lunar mansion called punarvasu.
          (f) Speech; yā prāṇena saṃbhavatyaditirdevatāmayī (śabdādīnāṃ adanāt aditiḥ Śaṅkara).
          (g) A cow.
          (h) Milk; wife (?). --tī (dual) Heaven and earth. [aditi literally means 'unbounded', 'the boundless Heaven,' or, according to others, 'the visible infinite, the endless expanse beyond the earth, beyond the clouds, beyond the sky.' According to Yaska aditiradīnā devamātā, and the verse beginning with aditirdyauḥ &c. Rv. 1. 89. 16 he interprets by taking aditi to mean adīna i. e. anupakṣīṇa, na hyeṣāṃ kṣayosti iti. In the Ṛgveda Aditi is frequently implored 'for blessings on children and cattle, for protection and for forgiveness'. She is called 'Devamātā' being strangely enough represented both as mother and daughter of Daksha. She had 8 sons; she approached the gods with 7 and cast away the 8th (Mārtaṇḍa, the sun.) In another place Aditi is addressed as 'supporter of the sky, sustainer of the earth, sovereign of this world, wife of Viṣṇu', but in the Mahābhārata, Rāmāyaṇa and Purāṇas, Viṣṇu is said to be the son of Aditi, one of the several daughters of Daksha and given in marriage to Kaśyapa by whom she was mother of Viṣṇu in his dwarf incarnation, and also of Indra, and she is called mother of gods and the gods her sons, 'aditinandanas'; See Daksha and Kaśyapa also].
     -- Comp.
          --jaḥ, --naṃdanaḥ a god, divine being.

adīna a. Not low or depressed, high-spirited; mighty, not poor; rich, happy.
     -- Comp.
          --ātman, --vṛtti, --sattva a. not depressed in spirit, highspirited, high-mettled.

adīrgha a. Not long.
     -- Comp.
          --sūtra, --sūtrin a. [na dīrghaṃ sūtraṃ sūtravat vistāro yasya] quick, prompt in action.

aduḥkha a. [na. ba.] Free from evil, propitious.
     -- Comp.
          --navamī the propitious 9th day in the bright half of bhādrapada when women worship Devī to avert evil for the ensuing year.

aducchuna a. Ved. Free from evil, propitious.

adurga a.
     (1) Not inaccessible, not difficult of access.
     (2) Destitute of forts; -viṣayaḥ an unfortified country.

adurmukha a. Ved. Unremitting, zealous, cheerful.

adū a. Ved. Not zealous, dilatory; not worshipping.

adūra a. Not distant, near(in time or space); -vartinīṃ siddhiṃ rājan vigaṇayātmanaḥ R. 1. 87; -ujjhitavartmasu mṛgadvaṃdveṣu 1. 40; -triṃśāḥ Sk. not far from 30, i. e. nearly 30; -kopā hi munijanaprakṛtiḥ K. 142 easily provoked, irascible. --raṃ Proximity, vicinity; vasannadūre kila caṃdramauleḥ R. 6. 34; triṃśato'dūre vartaṃte iti adūratriṃśāḥ Sk.; adūre, --raṃ, --reṇa, --rataḥ --rāt (with gen. or abl.) not far from, at no great distance from; adūre priyāsamāgamaṃ te prekṣe V. 3 not far distant, very near.

adūṣita a. Not vitiated, uncorrupted, unspotted, irreproachable; -dhī possessing an uncorrupted soul.

adṛpta a. Not proud, not vain; -kratu not proud-minded, sober, calm.

adṛś a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Sightless, blind.
     (2) Not seeing, not perceiving.

adṛśya a.
     (1) Invisible; kimapi bhūtamadṛśyarūpaṃ Ku. 4. 45.
     (2) Not capable of being seen, epithet of parameśvara.
     -- Comp.
          --karaṇaṃ rendering invisible, a part of a conjurer's legerdemain.

adṛṣṭa a.
     (1) Invisible, not seen; -pūrva not seen before.
     (2) Not known or experienced, not felt; -virahavyathaṃ H. 1. 145.
     (3) Unforeseen, not observed or thought of; unknown, unobserved.
     (4) Not permitted or sanctioned, illegal; na cādṛṣṭāṃ (vṛddhiṃ) punarharet Ms. 8. 153. --ṣṭaḥ N. of some venomous substance or vermin. --ṣṭaṃ
     (1) The invisible one.
     (2) Destiny, fate, luck (good or bad); daivamiti yadapi kathayasi puruṣaguṇaḥ sopyadṛṣṭākhyaḥ Pt. 5. 30.
     (3) Virtue or vice as the eventual cause of pleasure or pain. (Fate is supposed to be the result of good or bad actions done in one state of existence and experienced in another, the performance of good deeds being rewarded with residence in Heaven, and of bad deeds, visited with condemnation to Hell; dharmādharmāvadṛṣṭaṃ syāt dharmaḥ svargādisādhanam ... adharmo narakādīnāṃ heturniditakarmajaḥ Bhaṣā. P. 161-2. The Vedāntins do not recognize adṛṣṭa or luck; tairhi karmaṇaḥ sūkṣmāvasthāpannasaṃskāraviśeṣa eva adṛṣṭasthānīyatvenāṃgīkriyate; adṛṣṭaṃ ātmadharma iti naiyāyikā vaiśeṣikādayaśca, sāṃkhyapātaṃjalāstu buddhidharma ityabhyupagacchaṃti Tv.).
     (4) An unforeseen calamity or danger (such as from fire, water &c.).
     -- Comp.
          --artha a. [ba.] having a metaphysical or occult meaning, metaphysical; having an object not evident to the senses.
          --karman a. one who has had no practice or practical experience, not practical, inexperienced; karmasvadṛṣṭakarmā yaḥśāstrajñopi vimuhyati H. 3. 54.
          --naraḥ, --puruṣaḥ one of the 20 ways of peace-making, in which no third person is seen, said of a treaty concluded by the parties themselves without a mediator H. 4. 119.
          --phala a. [ba.] that of which the consequences are not yet visible. (
          --laṃ) the (future) result of good or bad actions; the result or consequence hidden in the future.
          --han a. destroying poisonous vermin (?).

adṛṣṭiḥ f. [viruddhā dṛṣṭiḥ]
     (1) An evil or malicious eye, evil look, an angry or envious look.
     (2) Not being seen. --a. [na. ba.] Blind, sightless.

adeya a. Not to be given; what cannot or ought not to be given away; adeyamāsīttrayameva bhūpateḥ R. 3. 16. --yaṃ That which it is not right or necessary to give. Wife, sons, deposits, and a few other things belong to this class: anvāhitaṃ yācitakamādhiḥ sādhāraṇaṃ ca yat . nikṣepaḥ putradārāśca sarvasvaṃ cānvaye sati .. āpatsvapi ca kaṣṭāsu vartamānena dehinā . adeyānyāhurācāryā yaccānyasmai pratiśrutam ..
     -- Comp.
          --dānaṃ an unlawful gift.

adeva a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Not god-like or divine, not pertaining to a deity.
     (2) Godless, impious, irreligious. --vaḥ [na. ta.] One who is not a god.
     -- Comp.
          --tra a. [na devāḥ trāyaṃte prīyaṃte anena, trai karaṇe ka] not gratifying the gods, such as food.
          --mātṛka a. [na devo megho mātā vṛṣṭikārakaḥ yasya] not rained upon; (lit.) not having the god of rain as mother to suckle or water; hence (artificially) supplied with the water of rivers, canals &c., irrigated; vitanvati kṣemamadevamātṛkāścirāya tasminkuravaścakāsate Ki. 1. 17.

adevayat --yu a. [na devaṃ yāti prāpnoti] Not reaching the gods by prayers, impious, irreligious.

adeśaḥ [na. ta.]
     (1) A wrong place, not one's proper place or strong position; -stho hi ripuṇā svalpakenāpi hanyate H. 4. 45; striyaṃ spṛśedadeśe yaḥ Ms. 8. 358; nādeśe tarpaṇaṃ kuryāt &c.
     (2) A bad country. The Smṛtis mention several places of this description: mleccha, ānartaka, aṃga, magadha, surāṣṭra, dakṣiṇāpatha, vaṃga, kaliṃga &c.
     -- Comp.
          --kālaḥ wrong place and time; adeśakāle yaddānamapātrebhyaśca dīyate . Bg. 17. 22.
          --stha a. [sa. ta.] in the wrong place, out of place; absent from one's country.

adeśya a. [na. ta. na deṣṭuṃ yogyaḥ]
     (1) Not fit to be ordered, advised, indicated or pointed out; adeśyaṃ yaśca diśati Ms. 8. 53.
     (2) Not on the spot or pertaining to the place or occasion referred to.

adreśya a. Ved. Invisible(adṛśya).

adainya a. Involving no humiliation or self-degradation Bh. 3. 144.

adaiva a. ( f.)
     (1) Not predestined or predetermined (by Gods or by Fate).
     (2) Not connected with the Gods or their action, not divine; adaivaṃ bhojayecchrāddhaṃ Ms. 3. 247 (Kull. vaiśvadevabrāhmaṇabhojanarahitaṃ).
     (3) Unfortunate, ill-fated.

adogdhṛ a. Not exacting; considerate (as a king.).

adomada --dha a. Ved. Not causing inconvenience.

     (1) The time when milking is not practicable.
     (2) Not milking; adohaṃ cādiśadgavāṃ R. 17. 19.

adoṣa a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Free from faults, demerits, vices, or defects &c.; innocent; jāyāmadoṣāmuta saṃtyajāmi R. 14. 34.
     (2) Free from the faults of composition, such as aślīlatā, grāmyatā &c., See doṣa; adoṣau śabdārthau K. P. 1; adoṣaṃ guṇavat kāvyaṃ Sar. K. 1. --ṣaḥ Not a fault; kimityadoṣeṇa tiraskṛtā vayaṃ Ki. 14. 11 though not at fault.

adgaḥ [adyate devaiḥ, ad-karmaṇi gan Uṇ. 1. 120, = puroḍāśa] A sacrificial oblation called puroḍārśa, q. v.

addhā ind. [atyate at taṃ saṃtataṃ gamanaṃ jñānaṃ vā dadhāti kvip Tv.]
     (1) Truly, clearly, surely, undoubtedly, in truth, really, certainly, indeed; addhā śriyaṃ pālitasaṃgarāya pratyarpayiṣyati R. 13. 65.
     (2) Manifestly, clearly; vyālādhipaṃ ca yatate parirabdhumaddhā Bv. 1. 95.
     (3) In this way, thus; -kṛ = sākṣātkṛ.
     -- Comp.
          --puruṣaḥ A right or true man.
          --bodheyāḥ (pl.) N. of a school of the Śukla Yajurveda.
          --lohakarṇa a. having ears clearly or quite red.

addhātiḥ Ved. A wise man, seer.

adbhuta a. [Uṇ. 5. 1 adi bhuvo ḍutac; according to Nir. na bhūtaṃ 'the like of which did not take place before.]
     (1) Wonderful, marvellous; -karman of wonderful deeds; -gaṃdha having wonderful smell; -darśana, -rūpa; prodigious, extraordinary, transcendental, supernatural.
     (2) Ved. Unobserved, invisible (opp. dṛśya). --taṃ
     (1) A wonder; a wonderful thing or occurrence, a prodigy, miracle; deva adbhutaṃ khalu saṃvṛttaṃ S. 5 a wonderful or unexpected occurrence; akālikamanadhyāyaṃ vidyātsarvādbhuteṣu ca Ms. 4. 118.
     (2) Surprise, astonishment, wonder (m.) also; -udbhrāṃtadevāsurāṇi vikrāṃtacaritāni U. 6 lost in wonder. --taḥ One of the 8 or 9 Rasas, the marvellous sentiment; jagati janitātyadbhutarasaḥ U. 3. 44.
     (2) N. of the Indra of the 9th Manvantara.
     -- Comp.
          --enas a. Ved. in whom no sin is visible.
          --dharmaḥ a system of prodigies.
          --brāhmaṇaṃ N. of a portion of a Brāhmaṇa belonging to the Sāmaveda.
          --saṃkāśa a. resembling a marvel; so -upama. --sāraḥ the wonderful resin (of the khadira or Catechu plant); Mimosa Catechu.
          --svana a. having a wonderful sound. (
          --naḥ) N. of Śiva.

adman n. Ved. Eating, a meal; a house (?).

admaniḥ [atti sarvān; ad-manin Uṇ. 2. 104 adermuṭca] Fire.

admara a. [attuṃ śīlamasya; ad-kartari kmarac] Voracious, gluttonous.

adya a. Eatable. --dyaṃ Food, anything eatable --ind. [asminnahani idaṃśabdasya nipātaḥ saptamyarthe; asmin dyavi ahani vā Nir.]
     (1) To-day, this day; adya tvāṃ tvarayati dāruṇaḥ kṛtāṃtaḥ Mal. 5. 25; -rātrau to-night, this night; -prātareva this very morning; oft. in comp. with dina, divasa, &c.; -divasanakṣatraṃ of this day, to-day's; adyaiva this very day.
     (2) Now; adya gaccha gatā rātriḥ Ks. 4. 68.
     (3) At present, now-a-days. [cf. L. ho-die.].
     -- Comp.
          --api still, yet, even now, to this day, down to the present time or moment; adyāpi te manyuviṣayaḥ U. 3; adyāpi nocchvasiti ibid.; na- not yet; guruḥ khedaṃ khinne mayi bhajati nādyāpi kuruṣu Ve. 1. 11; (every one of the 50 stanzas of Ch. P. begins with adyāpi). --avadhi 1. from to-day; -dhi bhavadbhyo bhinnohaṃ Ve. 1. 2. till to-day.
          --pūrvaṃ before now; adyapūrvoccārita &c.
          --prabhṛti ind. from to-day, this day forward, henceforth; adyaprabhṛtyavanatāṃgi tavāsmi dāsaḥ Ku. 5. 86.
          --śvīna a. [adya śvaḥ paradine vā janiṣyate prasoṣyate vā, adya-śvas-kha ṭilopaḥ P. V. 2. 13] likely to happen to-day or tomorrow, imminent; -naṃ maraṇaṃ, -naḥ viyogaḥ Sk. (= āsanna). (--nā) a female near delivery (āsannaprasavā); adyaśvīnāvaṣṭabdhe P.; adya śvo vā vijāyate iti adyaśvīnā vaḍavā Sk.
          --sutyā extraction and consecration of Soma juice on the same day.

adyatana a. ( f) [adya bhavaḥ; adya ṭyu tuḍāgamaśca]
     (1) Pertaining or referring to, extending over, to-day; -divasa, -kāla &c.
     (2) Current now-a-days, prevalent at present, modern. --naḥ The current or this day, period of the current day (Kāśi. on P. I. 2. 57); See anadyatana also. --nī (scil. vṛttiḥ) A name given to the Aorist tense, as it denotes an action done to-day or on the same day (= -bhūtaḥ).

adyatanīya = adyatana
     (1) Of to-day; -himapāto vyarthatāṃ nīyate Pt. 3.
     (2) Modern.

adyu a. Ved. Blunt.

adyut a. Not bright.

adyūtya a. [na dyūtalabdhaṃ na. ta.] Not obtained by gambling, honestly got. --tyaṃ Unlucky gambling; the watch just before the dawn (?).

adrava a. [na. ta.] Not liquid, not of the nature of a liquid. --vaḥ Not a liquid.

adravyam [na. ta.] A worthless thing, an object which is good for nothing; nādravye vihitā kācitkriyā phalavatī bhavet H. Pr. 43; hence, a worthless or bad pupil or recipient of instruction; vineturadravyaparigraha eva buddhilāghavaṃ prakāśayati M. 1; adravyametya bhuvi śuddhanayopi maṃtrī Mu. 7. 14.

adriḥ [ad-krin Uṇ. 4. 65; according to Nir. fr. dṝ to tear or ad to eat.]
     (1) A mountain.
     (2) A stone, especially one for pounding Soma with or grinding it on.
     (3) A thunderbolt (ādṛṇāti yena Nir.).
     (4) A tree.
     (5) The sun.
     (6) A mass of clouds (probably so called from its resemblance to a mountain); a cloud (ādarayitavyo bhavati hyasau udakārthaṃ Nir.) mostly Ved.
     (7) A kind of measure.
     (8) The number 7.
     -- Comp.
          --īśaḥ, patiḥ, nāthaḥ &c. 1. the lord of mountains, the Himālaya. 2. N. of Śiva (Lord of Kailāsa).
          --karṇī a plant (aparājitā) Clitoria Ternatea Lin.
          --kīlā [adrayaḥ kulaparvatāḥ kīlāḥ śaṃkava iva yasyāḥ] the earth. (
          --laḥ) N. of the mountain viṣkuṃbha. --kukṣiḥ a mountain cave, mountain side R. 2. 38.
          --ja a. [adrau jāyate; jaṇ-ḍa] produced from, or found among, mountains, mountain-born. (
          --jā) 1. a plant (saiṃhalī). 2.
          --kanyā, --tanayā-sutā &c. Pārvatī. (
          --jaṃ) red chalk (śilājatu). --jāta a. mountain-born. (
          --taḥ) 1. forest conflagration. 2. the 'Sun-born', Hamsa or Swan. 3. form. 4. the Supreme Being.
          --jūta, --dugdha Ved. [tṛ. ta.] expressed or extracted by means of stones.
          --tanayā, --naṃdinī 1. N. of Pārvatī. 2. N. of a metre of 4 lines, each having 23 syllables.
          --dviṣ-bhid m. [adriṃ dveṣṭi bhinatti vā, dviṣ-bhid-kvip] the enemy or splitter of mountains (or clouds personified), epithet of Indra.
          --droṇi-ṇī f. 1. a mountain valley. 2. a river taking its rise in a mountain.
          --patiḥ --rājaḥ &c. See -īśa. --barhas a. Ved. [adrerbarha iva barho yasya] as strong or hard as a mountain; mountain-high (?).
          --budhna a. [adrerbudhna iva budhno yasya] rooted in a mountain or rock; as hard as a stone or mountain.
          --bhū a. [adrau bhavati jāyate] mountain-born. (
          --bhūḥ) N. of a plant (ākhukarṇī or aparājitā). --mātṛ Ved. [adriḥ meghaḥ tajjalaṃ mimīte, adrermātā vā mā-tṛc] producing water from clouds (maghajalanirmātṛ); having a mountain for the mother (?).
          --vahniḥ forest conflagration.
          --śayyaḥ (having the mountain kailāsa for his bed) N. of Śiva; cf. -īśa, -iṃdra, --śṛṃgaṃ, --sānu mountain peak.
          --suta (-ṣuta), --saṃhata a. prepared or expressed by means of stones.
          --sāraḥ [adreḥ sāra iva ṣa. ta.] 'the essence of mountains', iron. (--a.) hard like a mountain; -maya made of iron or very hard.

adrivat a. Ved. Armed with, or having, stones or thunderbolts.

adruh, --druhvan a. [na. ta.] Ved. Free from malice.

adrogha a. Ved. [druh-ghañ vede ghatvaṃ na. ba.] True, not false, free from malice; -vāc speaking the truth; -avita guarding from malice. --ghaṃ ind. Without malice or falsehood.

adrohaḥ Absence of malice or illfeeling; moderation, mildness Ms. 4. 2.

advaṃdva a. Without duality or enmity; asamastapadavṛttimiva advaṃdvāṃ K. 131.

advaya a. [nāsti dvayaṃ yasya]
     (1) Not two.
     (2) Without a second, unique; sole; advayaṃ brahma Ved. Sūtra. --yaḥ [advayaṃ vijñānābhedaḥ padārthānāṃ astyasya vādakatvena astyarthe ac] N. of Buddha. --yaṃ [na. ta.] Non-duality, unity, identity; especially, the identity of Brahma and the universe, or of spirit and matter; the highest truth.
     -- Comp.
          --ānaṃdaḥ = advaitānaṃdaḥ q. v.
          --vādin (= advaita-) one who propounds the identity of spirit and matter or of Brahma and the universe (sarvameva vastu citsvarūpaṃ nānyadato dvitīyamasti iti yaḥ pratipādayati). 2. Buddha.

advayat, --advayas a. Ved. Having no second; sakhā suśevo advayāḥ Rv. 1. 187. 3 (dvayarahita); free from duplicity, true, sincere (?).

advayāvin a. [advayaṃ astyarthe vini chaṃdasi dīrghaḥ] Not having two ways (devapitṛyānarūpamārgadvayarahita); putrasya pāthaḥ padamadvayāvinaḥ Rv. 1. 159. 3.

advayu a. [dvayaṃ dviprakāro'styasya bā- u, na. ba.] Free from duplicity, the same internally or externally (aṃtarbāhyaikarūpa).

advāram Not a door, any passage or entrance which is not intended to serve as a regular door; advāreṇa na cātīyād grāmaṃ vā veśma vā puraṃ Ms. 4. 73; nādvāreṇa viśet Y. 1. 140.

advitīya a. [nāsti dvitīyaṃyasya]
     (1) Without a second, matchless, peerless; na kevalaṃ rūpe śilpepyadvitīyā mālavikā M. 2; kimurvaśī advitīyā rūpeṇa V. 2.
     (2) Without a companion, alone.
     (3) Sole, only, unique, supreme. --yaṃ Brahma; ekaṃ -yaṃ brahma.

adviṣeṇya [na. ta.] Not malevolent, not to be disliked.

adveṣa a. [na. ba.] Free from hatred or malevolence. --ṣaḥ Freedom from hatred.

adveṣas a. [dviṣa-asun. na. ta.] Friendly, not hating.

advaita a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Not dual; of one or uniform nature, equable, unchanging; -taṃ sukhaduḥkhayoḥ U. 1. 39.
     (2) Matchless, peerless, sole, only, unique. --taṃ [na. ta.]
     (1) Non-duality, identity; especially that of Brahma with the universe or with the soul, or of soul and matter; See advaya also.
     (2) The supreme or highest truth or Brahma itself.
     (3) N. of an Upanishad; advaitena solely, without any duplicity.
     -- Comp.
          --ānaṃdaḥ (advaya-) 1. the joy arising from a knowledge of the identity of the universe and the supreme spirit. 2. N. of an author who, according to Colebrooke, flourished at the close of the 15th century.
          --vādin = advayavādin q. v. above; a Vedāntin.

adha, adhā ind. Ved. Used like atha as an inceptive particle in the sense of 'now', 'then', 'afterwards', 'moreover,' 'and', 'partly', 'so much the more' &c.

adhana a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Without wealth, poor.
     (2) Not entitled or competent to possess independent property (in law); bhāryā putraśca dāsaśca traya evādhanāḥ smṛtāḥ . yatte samadhigacchaṃti yasya te tasya taddhanam .. Ms. 8. 416.

adhanya a. Unhappy, wretched, miserable; haṃta dhiṅ māmadhanyaṃ U. 1. 42.

adhama a. [av-ama; avateḥ amaḥ, vasya pakṣe dhaḥ Uṇ. 5. 54] The lowest, vilest, meanest; very bad, or low, or vile (in quality, worth, position &c.) (opp. uttama); adhamamadhyamottamāḥ or uttamādhamamadhyamāḥ &c.; oft. at the end of comp.; nara-, dvija-; cāṃḍālaścādhamo nṛṇāṃ Ms. 10. 12 lowest in position; adhama- the vilest of the vile, the meanest wretch. --maḥ
     (1) An unblushing sensualist (bhayadayālajjāśūnyaḥ kāmakrīḍāviṣaye kartavyākartavyāvicārakaḥ Śabda K.); vāpīṃ snātumito gatāsi na punastasyādhamasyāṃtikaṃ K. P. 1.
     (2) A sort of yoga or conjunction of planets (nṛṇāṃ vittajñānādiṣu adhamatvasūcakaḥ ravicaṃdrayoḥ sthitiviśeṣarūpo yogabhedaḥ Tv.). --mā A bad mistress (hitakāripriyatame 'hitakāriṇī). [cf. L. infimus].
     -- Comp.
          --aṃgaṃ [karma.] the foot (opp. uttamāṃga). --ardhaṃ [karma.] the lower half of the body (below the navel).
          --ardhya a. [adhamārdhe bhavaḥ] connected with the lower part.
          --ācāra a. [ba.] of the vilest conduct. (--raḥ) (karma-) the meanest conduct.
          --ṛṇaḥ, --ṛṇikaḥ [adhamaḥ adhamāvasthāṃ prāptaḥ ṛṇena, tataḥ ṭhan] a debtor (opp. uttamarṇaḥ) (lit. reduced to a low position by his incurring debt).
          --bhṛtaḥ --bhṛtakaḥ [karma.] a porter, groom, a servant of the lowest class, one of the 3 kinds of servants; uttamastvāyudhīyotra madhyamastu kṛṣīvalaḥ . adhamo bhāravāhī syādityevaṃ triṃvidho bhṛtaḥ ..

adhara a. [na dhriyate; dhṛ-ac, na. ta.]
     (1) Lower (opp. uttara), (lit. not held up); tending downwards; under, nether, downward; -vāsaḥ under garment Ki. 4. 38; cf. -aṃbara Śi. 1. 6; -oṣṭha lower or nether lip, see below. (In this sense adhara partakes of the character of a pronoun).
     (2) Low, mean, vile; -uttaraṃ See below; lower in quality, inferior.
     (3) Silenced, worsted, not able to speak; See hīna, hīnavādin.
     (4) Previous, preceding; as in adharedyuḥ, q. v. --raḥ The nether (or sometimes the upper) lip; a lip in general; -patraṃ Ku. 5. 27 leaf-like lower lip; biṃbādharālaktakaḥ M. 3. 5; pakvabiṃbādharoṣṭhī Me. 82; pibasi ratisarvasvamadharaṃ S. 1. 24; 1. 21, 3. 24; cf. adharaṃkhalu biṃbanāmakaṃ phalamābhyamiti bhavyamanvayam . labhate'dharabiṃbaityadaḥ padamasyā radanacchade vadat .. N. 2. 24. --rā The nadir; (adhodiś) or the southern direction. --raṃ
     (1) The lower part (of the body); pṛṣṭhavaṃśādhare trikaṃ Ak.
     (2) Pudendum Muliebre (also m.).
     (3) Address, speech (opp. uttara); statement, sometimes used for reply also.
     -- Comp.
          --uttara a. 1. higher and lower, inferior and superior, worse and better; rājñaḥ samakṣamevāvayoḥ -vyaktirbhaviṣyati M. 1; vyatyaye karmaṇāṃ sāmyaṃ pūrvavaccādharottaraṃ Y. 1. 96. 2. former; prior and later; sooner and later; yaścādharottarānarthān vigītānnāvabudhyate Ms. 8. 53. 3. in a contrary way, topsy-turvy, upside down (the natural order of things being inverted); śrutaṃ bhavadbhiradharottaraṃ S. 5 you have (certainly) learnt in a contrary way, i. e. to consider good as bad and vice versa; (it might perhaps also mean "have you, i. e. the members of the King's court, heard this mean or base reply (adharaṃ ca taduttaraṃ); (yadi na praṇayedrājā daṃḍaṃ) svāmyaṃ ca na syātkasmiṃścit pravartetādharottaraṃ Ms. 7. 21 (adharaṃ = śūdrādi, uttaraṃ = pradhānaṃ); adharmeṇa jito dharmaḥ pravṛttamadharottaraṃ Mb. 4. nearer and further. 5. question and answer.
          --oṣṭhaḥ the lower lip; aṃgulisaṃvṛta- S. 3. 25; Me. 82. (
          --ṣṭhaṃ) the lower and upper lip.
          --kaṃṭhaḥ the lower part of the neck.
          --kāyaḥ [adharaṃ kāyasya] the lower part of the body.
          --pānaṃ kissing, lit. drinking the lower lip.
          --madhu, --amṛtaṃ the nectar of the lips.
          --svastikaṃ the nadir.

adharīkṛ 8 U., adharayati Den. P. To surpass, excel, beat down, worst; śokaṃ kiṃcidadharīkṛtya Dk. 6 lessening, forgetting; to defeat, vanquish; bhavatā dhīratayā'dharīkṛtaḥ Ki. 2. 40, 6. 21; caritairmunīnadharayañśucibhiḥ Ki. 6. 24 excelling; adharīkṛtasarvasnehena apatyapremṇā K. 25.

adharībhū 1 P. To be worsted (in a lawsuit); to be invalidated Y. 2. 17.

adharīṇa a. [adhare bhavaḥ adhara-kha]
     (1) Lower.
     (2) Traduced, vilified, reproached; adharīṇaḥ pariṇāṃsyate A R. 1.

adharedyuḥ ind. [adhare dine; adhara-edyus]
     (1) On a previous day.
     (2) The day before yesterday; the other day.

adharasmāt, --rataḥ, --stāt, --rāt, --tāt, --reṇa ind. Below, beneath, in the lower regions.

adharāṃc a. [adharāṃ dakṣiṇāṃ diśaṃ aṃcati kvip] Southward; tending downwards, to the nadir or lower region; tending to the south. --cī the southern direction. --k ind. Beneath.

adharācīna-cya a. [adharācibhavaḥ; adharāckha yat vā] Tending downwards; situated in the region below; being downwards.

adharmaḥ [na. ta.]
     (1) Unrighteousness, irreligion, impiousness, wickedness, injustice; -daṃḍanaṃ Ms. 8. 127 unjust punishment; adharmeṇa unjustly, in an improper way; yaścādharmeṇa pṛcchati Ms. 2. 111; an unjust act; a guilty or wicked deed; sin; -cārin committing unjust or unrighteous deeds; so -ātman of an irreligious spirit; tadā kathaṃ -bhīruḥ S. 5; -maya full of wickedness or sin; for definitions &c. of dharma and adharma See Tarka K. P. 19. (dharma and adharma are two of the 24 qualities mentioned in Nyaya, and they pertain only to the soul. They are the peculiar causes of pleasure and pain respectively. They are imperceptible, but inferred from reasoning and from transmigration.)
     (2) N. of a Prajāpati or of an attendant of the sun. --rmā Unrighteousness personified. --rmaṃ Devoid of attributes, an epithet of brahman.
     -- Comp.
          --astikāyaḥ the category of adharma, See astikāya.

adharmin a. Impious, wicked.

adharmya a.
     (1) Wicked, impious.
     (2) Illegal, unlawful; paṃcānāṃ tu trayo dharmyā dvāvadharmyau smṛtāviha Ms. 3. 25.

adhavā [avidyamāno dhavo bhartā yasyāḥ] A widow.

adhas, adhaḥ ind. [adhara-asi, adharaśabdasthāne adh ādeśaḥ P. V. 3. 39.]
     (1) Below, down; patatyadho dhāma visāri sarvataḥ Śi. 1. 2; in the lower region, to the infernal regions or hell; vyasanyadho'dhovrajati svaryātyavyasanī mṛtaḥ Ms. 7. 53. (According to the context adhaḥ may have the sense of the nominative, -aṃkuśaḥ &c.; ablative, adho vṛkṣāt patati; or locative, adho gṛhe śete).
     (2) Beneath, under, used like a preposition with gen.; tarūṇāṃ- S. 1. 14; rarely with abl. also; bāhitthaṃ tu tatopyadhaḥ Hemachandra; (when repeated) lower and lower, down and down; adhodhaḥ paśyataḥ kasya mahimā nopacīyate H. 2. 2; yātyadhodho vrajatyuccairnaraḥ svaireva karmabhiḥ H. 2. 48; adhodho gaṃgeyaṃ padamupagatā stokaṃ Bh. 2. 10; from under, just below (with acc.); navānadho'dho bṛhataḥ payodharān Śi. 1. 4. In comp. with nouns adhaḥ has the sense of
          (a) lower, under, as -bhuvanaṃ, -lokaḥ the lower world; -vāsaḥ or -aṃśukaṃ an under-garment; or
          (b) the lower part; -kāyaḥ the lower part of the body; adhaḥkṛ means to surpass, eclipse, overcome, vanquish, despise, scorn; tapaḥ śarīraiḥ kaṭhinairupārjitaṃ tapasvināṃ dūramadhaścakāra sā Ku. 5. 29; adhaḥ kṛtāśeṣāṃtaḥpureṇa K. 177; -kṛtakusumāyudhaṃ 179; Śi. 1. 35, 3. 52; -kṛtainasaḥ Śi. 16. 8 dispelled.
     -- Comp.
          --akṣa a. situated below the axle or car. (
          --kṣaṃ) adv. below the car, under the axle.
          --akṣajaḥ [akṣāt iṃdriyājjāyate iti akṣajaṃ pratyakṣajñānaṃ, tadadharaṃ grāhakatvābhāvāt hīnaṃ yatya saḥ Tv.; adhaḥkṛtaṃ akṣajaṃ iṃdriyajñānaṃ yena Malli.] N. of Viṣṇu; other etymologies of the name are also found:
     (1) adho na kṣīyate jātu yasmāttasmādadhokṣajaḥ;
     (2) dyaurakṣaṃ pṛthivī cādhastayoryasmādajāyata . madhye vairājarūpeṇa tato 'dhokṣaja iṣyate .. --adhas See above. --upāsanaṃ sexual intercourse. --aṃgaṃ, --dvāraṃ-marma the anus; Pudendum Muliebre. --karaḥ the lower part of the hand (karabha). --karaṇaṃ excelling, defeating, degradation; K. 202; so -kriyā; sahate na janopyadhaḥkriyāṃ Ki. 2. 47 degradation, dishonour. --khananaṃ undermining. --gatiḥ f., --gamanaṃ --pātaḥ 1. a downward fall or motion, descent; going downwards. 2. degradation, downfall. going to perdition or hell; mūlānāmadhogatiḥ K. 41 (where -ti has both senses); -tiṃ āyāti Pt. 1. 150 sinks, comes down (feels dishonoured); Ms. 3. 17; arakṣitāramattāraṃ nṛpaṃ vidyādadhogatiṃ 8. 309 destined to go to hell. --gaṃtṛ m. one who digs downwards, a mouse. --gaṃ-ghaṃ-ṭā [adharāt adhastādārabhya ghaṃṭeva tadākāraphalatvāt] a plant Achyranthes Aspera (apāmārga). --caraḥ [adhaḥ khanitvā carati-ac] 1. thief. 2. one who goes downwards. --jānu n. the lower part of the knee. (-ind.) below the knee. --jihvikā [alpā jihvā jihvikā, adharā jihvikā] the uvula (Mar. paḍajībha). --talaṃ the lower part or surface; śayyā-, khaṭvā-. --diś f. the lower region, the nadir; the southern direction. --dṛṣṭi a. casting a downward look; a posture in Yoga; karaṇānyabahiṣkṛtya sthāṇuvanniścalātmakaḥ . ātmānaṃ hṛdaye dhyāyet nāsāgranyastalocanaḥ .. cf. also Ku. 3. 47. (--ṣṭiḥ) a downward look. --padaṃ [adhovṛtti padaṃ, pādasyādhaḥsthānaṃ vā] the place under the foot, a lower place. --pātaḥ = -gati q. v. above. --puṣpī [adhomukhāni puṣpāṇi yasyāḥ] N. of two plants avākpuṣpī (Pimpinella Anisum) and gojihvā (Elephantopus Scaber). --prastaraḥ a seat of grass for persons in mourning to sit upon. --bhaktaṃ [adharaṃ bhaktaṃ yasmāt] a dose of water, medicine &c. to be taken after meals &c. (bhojanāṃte pīyamānaṃ jalādikaṃ). --bhāgaḥ 1. the lower part (of the body); pūrvabhāgo guruḥ puṃsāmadhobhāgastu yoṣitāṃ Suśr. 2. the lower part of any thing, the region below, down below; -vyavasthitaṃ kiṃcitpuramālokitaṃ Pt. 1. situated down below, See pātāla. --bhūḥ f. lower ground, land at the foot of a hill. --mukha --vadana a. having the face downwards; -khī tiṣṭhati; -khaiḥ patribhiḥ R. 3. 57. 2. head-long, precipitate, flying downwards. 3. upside down, topsyturvy. (--khaḥ) N. of Viṣṇu. (--khākhī) N. of a plant gojihvā Premna Esculenta. (--khaṃ) (nakṣatraṃ) 1. flying downwards, having a downward motion; these nakshatras are: mūlāśleṣā kṛttikā ca viśākhā bharaṇī tathā . maghā pūrvātrayaṃ caiva adhomukhagaṇaḥ smṛtaḥ .. Jyothisha. 2. N. of a hell. --yaṃtraṃ a still. --raktapittaṃ discharge of blood from the anus and urethra. --rāma a. [adhobhāge rāmaḥ śuklaḥ, dṛṣṭitarpakatvāt tasya rāmatvaṃ] having a white colour or white marks on the lower part of the body (said of a goat) --laṃbaḥ 1. a plummet. 2. a perpendicular. 3. the lower world. --varcas a. strong in the lower regions; whose lustre penetrates downwards. --vaśaḥ Pudendum Muliebre. --vāyuḥ [adhogāmī vāyuḥ śāka. ta.] breaking wind, flatulency. --śaya-yya a. sleeping on the ground. (--yyā) sleeping on the ground; agnīṃdhanaṃ bhaikṣacaryāmadhaḥśayyāṃ gurorhitam . āsamāvartanāt kuryātkṛtopanayano dvijaḥ .. Ms. 2. 108. --śiras a. = mukha. (--n.) N. of a hell. --stha, --sthita a. situated below. --svastikaṃ the nadir.

adhopahāsaḥ [adhaḥ adhobhāgasya yonyāḥ upahāsaḥ chāṃdasaḥ saṃdhiḥ, strīṇāmadhobhāgasya upahasanaṃ Tv.] Ved. Sexual intercourse.

adhastana a. ( f.) [adhobhavaḥ adhas-ṭyu tuṭca]
     (1) Lower, situated beneath.
     (2) Prior, previous.

adhastarā(mā)m ind. [atiśayenādhaḥ] Very low.

adhastāt adv. or prep. [adhara-astāti, adh ādeśaḥ P. V. 3. 39-40.] Down, below, under, beneath, under-neath &c. (with gen.), See adhaḥ; adhastānnopadadhyācca Ms. 4. 54; dharmeṇa gamanamūrdhvaṃ gamanamadhastādbhavatyadharmeṇa Saṅkhya K; -tādāgataḥ Pt. 3.; tasyādhastādvayamapi ratāsteṣu parṇoṭajeṣu U. 2. 25; yasya sarvamevādhastādgataṃ K. 289 gone to hell.

adhamārgavaḥ [na dhīyate adhāḥ, tādṛśaṃ mārgaṃ vāti vā-ka Tv.] = apāmārga q. v.

adhāraṇaka a. [na. ta.] Not profitable; -kaṃ mamaitatsthānaṃ Pt. 2.

adhiḥ [ādhīyate duḥkhamanena ādhā ki vā pṛ. thasvaḥ]
     (1) Mental pain or agony. See ādhiḥ
     (2) A woman in her courses. (= avi.) --ind.
     (1) (As a prefix to verbs) over, above; (adhikāra); -sthā to stand over; -kṛ to place over or at the head of; -ruh to grow over or above; over and above, besides, in addition (ādhikya); fully, completely (atiśaya, viśeṣa), to get something in addition to another; adhigatyajagatyadhīśvarāt having obtained fully, adhi intensifying the meaning of the root; ito vā sātimīmahe divo vā pārthivādadhi Rv. 1. 6. 10; (adhīmahe ādhikyena yācāmahe).
     (2) (As a separable adverb) Over, above, from above (mostly Vedic); ṣaṣṭirvīrāso adhi ṣaṭ Rv. 7. 18. 14.
     (3) (As a preposition) with acc.
          (a) Above, over, upon, in (upari); yaṃ daṃtamadhijāyate nāḍī taṃ daṃtamuddharet Suśr. adhyadhi just above; lokānuparyuparyāste'dho'dho'dhyadhi ca mādhavaḥ Bopadeva; with gen. also; ye nākasyādhi rocane divi Rv. 1. 19. 6 above the sun; -viṭapi Śi. 7. 35; -tvat 7. 41; -rajani 52 at night.
          (b) With reference to, concerning, in the case of, on the subject of (adhikṛtya) (mostly in adverbial compounds in this sense); harau iti adhihari; so adhistri; kṛṣṇamadhikṛtya pravṛttā kathā adhikṛṣṇaṃ; so -jyotiṣaṃ, -lokaṃ, -daivaṃ, -daivataṃ treating of stars &c.; -puraṃdhri Śi. 6. 32 in the case of women.
          (c) (With abl.) Just over, more than (adhika); sattvādadhi mahānātmā Kath.; aviditādadhi Ken.
          (d) (With loc.) Over, on or upon, above (showing lordship or sovereignty over something) (aiśvarya); adhirīśvare P. I. 4. 97; adhi bhuvi rāmaḥ P. II. 3. 9 Sk. Rāma rules over the earth; the country ruled over may be used with loc. of 'ruler'; adhi rāme bhūḥ ibid; prahāravarmaṇyadhi videhā jātāḥ Dk. 77 subject to, under the government of, become the property or possession of (adhi denoting svatva in this case); under, inferior to (hīna); adhi harau surāḥ (Bopadeva) the gods are under Hari.
     (4) (As first member of Tatpurusha compounds)
          (a) Cheif, supreme, principal, presiding; -devatā presiding deity; -rājaḥ supreme or sovereign ruler; -patiḥ supreme lord &c.
          (b) Redundant, superfluous (growing over another); -daṃtaḥ = adhyārūḍhaḥ (daṃtasyopari jātaḥ) daṃtaḥ P. VI. 2. 188.
          (c) Over, excessive; -adhikṣepaḥ high censure. According to G. M. adhi has these senses: adhiradhyayanaiśvaryavaśitvasmaraṇādhike . e. g.; upādhyāyādadhīte; iṅo'dhyayanārthakatvasya adhidyotakaḥ; adhipatiḥ (aiśvarye); adhīnaḥ (vaśitve) adhigataḥ inaṃ; māturadhyeti (smaraṇe); adhikaṃ (adhike). In the Veda adhi is supposed by B. and R. to have the senses of 'out of', 'from,' 'of,' 'among,' 'before', 'beforehand', 'for', 'in favour of', 'in' 'at'.

adhika a. [abbreviation of adhyārūḍha; adhyārūḍhaśabdāt kan uttarapadalopaśca P. V. 2. 73].
     (1) More, additional, greater (opp. ūna or sama); tadasminnadhikaṃ P. V. 2. 45. (In comp. with numerals) plus, greater by; aṣṭādhikaṃ śataṃ 100 plus 8 = 108; catvāriṃśato'dhikāḥ = -catvāriṃśāḥ more than 40; navādhikāṃ navatiṃ R. 3. 69; ekādhikaṃ harejjyeṣṭhaḥ Ms. 9. 117.
          (a) Surpassing in quantity, more numerous, copious, excessive, abundant; in comp. or with instr.; śvāsaḥ pramāṇādhikaḥ S. 1. 30 more than the usual measure.
          (b) Inordinate, grown, increased, become greater; abounding in, full of; strong in; -krodha R. 12. 90; vayo'dhikaḥ Ms. 4. 141 senior in years; śiśuradhikavayāḥ Ve. 3. 30 old, advanced in years; bhavaneṣu rasādhikeṣu pūrvaṃ S. 7. 20; karoti rāgaṃ hṛdi kautukādhikaṃ K. 2; rasādhike manasi Śi. 17. 48 abounding in.
          (a) More, greater, stronger, mightier, more violent or intense; adhikāṃ kuru devi gurubhaktiṃ K. 62; ūnaṃ na sattveṣvadhiko babādhe R. 2. 14 the stronger animal did not prey on the weaker; pumānpuṃso'dhike śukre strī bhavatyadhike striyāḥ Ms. 3. 49; adhikaṃ menire viṣṇuṃ Ram.; adhikaṃ mitraṃ Pt. 2; yavīyānguṇato'dhikaḥ Ms. 11. 186, 9. 154.
          (b) Superior to, better than; higher than (with abl. or in comp.); pramāṇādadhikasyāpi mattadaṃtinaḥ Pt. 1. 327; senāśatebhyo'dhikā buddhiḥ Mu. 1. 25 surpassing, more than a match for &c.; vidheradhikasaṃbhāraḥ R. 15. 62 more than what was sanctioned by rules; tapasvibhyo'dhiko yogī Bg. 6. 46; brahma pradānebhyo'dhikaṃ Y. 1. 212; aśvādhiko rājā H. 3. 84 strong in cavalry; dhanadhānyādhiko vaiśyaḥ H. 4. 21 excels in, is superior by reason of; lokādhikaṃ tejaḥ Mu. 4. 10 superior to; sometimes with gen.; paṃcadaśānāṃ bhrātṝṇāmadhiko guṇaiḥ K. 136.
     (4) Later, subsequent, further than (of time); rājanyabaṃdhordvāviṃśe (keśāṃto vidhīyate), vaiśyasya dvyadhike tataḥ Ms. 2. 65 2 years later i. e. in the 24th year; sometimes with gen.; mamādhikā vā tulyā vā Rām.
     (5) Eminent, uncommon, special, peculiar (asādhāraṇa); vidyā nāma narasya rūpamadhikaṃ Bh. 2. 20 superior or uncommon form or beauty; dharmo hi teṣāmadhiko viśeṣaḥ H. Pr. 25; ījyādhyayanadānāni vaiśyasya kṣatriyasya ca . pratigraho 'dhiko vipre yājanādhyāpane tathā .. Y. 1. 118; sometimes used in the comparative in the above senses; kleśodhikatarasteṣāṃ Bg. 12. 5; -taramidānīṃ rājate rājalakṣmīḥ V. 5. 22; svargādadhikataraṃ nirvṛtisthānaṃ S. 7.
     (6) Redundant, superfluous; -aṃga having a redundant limb; nodvahetkāpilāṃ kanyāṃ nādhikāṃgīṃ na rogiṇīṃ Ms. 3. 8.
     (7) Intercalated, intercalary (as a month &c.)
     (8) Inferior, secondary. --kaṃ
     (1) Surplus, excess, more; lābho'dhikaṃ phalaṃ Ak.
     (2) Abundance, redundancy, superfluity.
     (3) A figure of speech equivalent to hyperbole; āśrayāśrayiṇorekasyādhikye'dhikamucyate . kimadhikamasya brūmo mahimānaṃ vāridherhariryatra . ajñāta eva śete kukṣau nikṣipya bhuvanāni .. atra āśrayasyādhikyaṃ . yugāṃtakālapratisaṃhṛtātmano jagaṃti yasyāṃ savikāśamāsata . tanau mamustatra na kaiṭabhadviṣastapodhanābhyāgamasaṃbhṛtā mudaḥ .. S. D; mahatoryanmahīyāṃsāvāśritāśrayayoḥ kramāt . āśrayāśrayiṇai syātāṃ tanutve'pyadhikaṃ tu tat .. K. P. 10. --adv.
     (1) More, in a greater degree; sa rājyaṃguruṇā dattaṃ pratipadyādhikaṃ babhau R. 4. 1 shone the more; 3. 18; yasminnevādhikaṃ cakṣurāropayati pārthivaḥ Pt. 1. 243; oft. in comp.; iyamadhikamanojñā S. 1. 20; -surabhi Me. 21.
     (2) Exceedingly, too much.
     -- Comp.
          --aṃga a. ( f.) having a redundant limb. (--gaṃ) [adhikoṃ'gāt] a sash, girdle or belt worn over the mail coat.
          --adhika a. more and more, out-doing one another.
          --artha a. exaggerated; -vacanaṃ exaggeration, an exaggerated statement or assertion (whether of praise or of censure); kṛtyairadhikārthavacane P. II. 1. 33; (-naṃ = stutiniṃdāphalakamarthavādavacanaṃ; e. g. vātacchedyaṃ tṛṇaṃ i. e. so light and weak; kākapeyā nadī so deep and full).
          --ṛddhi a. abundant, prosperous. R. 19. 5.
          --tithiḥ, f.
          --dinaṃ, --divasaḥ an intercalated day.
          --daṃtaḥ = adhidaṃtaḥ. --māṃsārman = adhimāṃsa q. v.
          --vākyoktiḥ f. exaggeration, hyperbole.
          --ṣāṣṭika-sāptatika a. containing or costing more than 60 or 70.

adhikāma a. [adhikaḥ kāmo yasya] Of vehement desires, impassioned, lustful. --maḥ [karma.] Strong desire.

adhikṛ 8 U.
     (1) To authorize, qualify for the discharge of some duty; be entitled to, have a right to; naivādhyakāriṣmahi vedavṛtte Bk. 2. 34; guṇāḥ priyatvedhikṛtā na saṃstavaḥ Ki. 4. 25 merits are calculated to produce liking, not mere intimacy.
     (2) To place at the head of, appoint, set; pāṃḍavena hyahaṃ tāta aśveṣvadhikṛtaḥ purā Mb.; dṛptavinayādhikṛtaḥ R. 9. 62 appointed to humble the proud; śithilīkṛte'dhikṛtakṛtyavidhau Ki. 6. 30 set or appointed to duty; devāḥ prasahya tamadhikuryuḥ Mv. 2 set on, incite or appoint as their chief.
     (3) To aim at, allude or refer to, make the subject of; adhikṛtya kṛte graṃthe P. IV. 3. 87; kirātārjunau adhikṛtya kṛtaṃ kāvyaṃ kirātārjunīyam Sk.; nāṭakaṃ prayogeṇa adhikriyatām S. 1 should be made the subject of representation, should be represented on the stage.
     (4) To be used as the head or governing rule; samarthānāṃ prathamādvā P. IV. 1. 82; idaṃ padatrayamadhikriyate Sk.
     (5) To superintend, be at the head.
     (6) (A.) To bear, endure or overpower, be superior to; śatrumadhikurute Sk.; adhicakre na yaṃ hariḥ Bk. 8. 20.
     (7) To feel, enjoy; bhavādṛśāścedadhikurvate ratiṃ nirāśrayā haṃta hatā manasvitā Ki. 1. 43.
     (8) To refrain or desist from.

adhikaraṇam [kṛ-lyuṭ]
     (1) Placing at the head of, appointing &c.
     (2) Relation, reference, connection; rāmādhikaraṇāḥ kathāḥ Rām. referring to.
     (3) (In gram.) Agreement, concord, government or grammatical relation (as of subject and predicate &c.); tatpuruṣaḥ samānādhikaraṇaḥ karmadhārayaḥ P. I. 2. 42 having the members (of the compound) in the same relation or apposition; samānādhikaraṇo or vyadhikaraṇo bahuvrīhiḥ; pītāṃbaraḥ, cakrapāṇiḥ &c.
     (4) A receptacle or subject, technically substratum; jñānādhikaraṇaṃ ātmā T. S. the soul is the substratum of knowledge.
     (5) Location, place, the sense of the locative case; ādhārodhikaraṇaṃ P. I. 4.45; kartṛkarmavyavahitāmasākṣāddhārayat kiyām . upakurvat kriyāsiddhau śāstredhikaraṇaṃ smṛtam .. Hari; as gehe sthālyāmannaṃ pacati.
     (6) A topic, subject; section, article or paragraph; a complete argument treating of one subject; the Sūtras of Vyāsa and Jaimini are divided into Adhyayas, the Adhyayas into Padas and the Pādas into Adhikaraṇas or sections. (According to the Mīmamsakas a complete Adhikaraṇa consists of five members: --viṣaya the subject or matter to be explained, viśaya or saṃśaya the doubt or question arising upon that matter, pūrvapakṣa the first side or prima facie argument concerning it, uttara or uttarapakṣa or siddhāṃta the answer or demonstrated conclusion, and saṃgati pertinency or relevancy, or (according to others nirṇaya the final conclusion); viṣayo viśayaścaiva pūrvapakṣastathottaraṃ . nirṇayaśceti siddhāṃtaḥ śāstre'dhikaraṇaṃ smṛtam .. The Vedāntins put saṃgati in the 3rd place, and siddhāṃta last; tatra ekaikamadhikaraṇaṃ paṃcāvayavaṃ, viṣayaḥ saṃdehaḥ saṃgatiḥ pūrvapakṣaḥ siddhāṃtaśca. Generally speaking, the five members may be taken to be viṣaya, saṃśaya, pūrvapakṣa, uttarapakṣa and siddhāṃta or rāddhāṃta).
     (7) Court of justice, court, tribunal; svāndoṣān kathayaṃti nādhikaraṇe Mk. 9. 3; -raṇe ca sādhanaṃ Dk. 40.
     (8) Stuff, material; vipratiṣiddhaṃ cānadhikaraṇavāci P. II. 4. 13 (adravyavāci); -etāvattveca 15 fixed number of things, as daśa daṃtoṣṭhāḥ Sk.
     (9) A claim. (10) Supremacy. --ṇī One who superintends.
     -- Comp.
          --bhojakaḥ a judge, Mk. 9.
          --maṃḍapaḥ court or hall of justice Mk. 9.
          --vicālaḥ [adhikaraṇasya vicālaḥ anyathākaraṇaṃ] changing the quantity of any thing, increasing or decreasing it so many times; -vicāle ca P. V. 3. 43; dravyasya saṃkhyāṃtarāpādane saṃkhyāyā dhā syāt; ekaṃ rāśiṃ paṃcadhā kuru Sk.
          --siddhāṃtaḥ a conclusion which involves others.

adhikaraṇikaḥ [adhikaraṇaṃ āśrayatayā astyasya ṭhan]
     (1) A judge, magistrate; Mk. 9.
     (2) A government official.

adhikaraṇyam Authority, power.

adhikarman n [adhikaṃkarma]
     (1) A higher or superior act.
     (2) Superintendence. --m. One who is charged with superintendence.
     -- Comp.
          --karaḥ, --kṛt a sort of servant, overseer of workmen.
          --kṛtaḥ [adhikarma kṛtaṃ yena niṣṭhāṃtasya paranipātaḥ] one appointed to superintend an institution or establishment; sarveṣvadhikṛto yaḥ syāt kuṭuṃbasya tathopari . sodhikarmakṛto jñeyaḥ sa ca kauṭuṃbikaḥ smṛtaḥ .. In families he is the head or paterfamilias.

adhikarmikaḥ [adhikṛtya karmaṇe alaṃ, adhikarma ṭhan] The overseer of a market whose duty it is to recover toll or duties from the traders.

     (1) Superintendence, watching over; strīṣu kaṣṭodhikāraḥ V. 3. 1; yaḥ pauraveṇa rājñā dharmādhikāre niyuktaḥ S. 1 superintendence of religious matters.
     (2) Duty, office, charge; power, post of authority; authority; nirṇayādhikāre bravīmi M. 1 I say this in the capacity of a judge; aviśrāmoyaṃ lokataṃtrādhikāraḥ S. 5; dvīpinastāṃbūlādhikāro dattaḥ Pt. 1, V. 2. 1; artha- administration of pecuniary matters; svādhikārāt pramattaḥ Me. 1; adhikāre mama putrako niyuktaḥ M. 5; yaḥ sarvādhikāreniyuktaḥ pradhānamaṃtrī sa karotu, anujīvinā para- carcā na kartavyā H. 2; śilpādhikāre yogyeyaṃ dārikā M. 1 fit to be initiated into the fine arts.
     (3) Sovereignty, government or administration, jurisdiction, rule; svādhikārabhūmau vartiṣyate S. 7 seat of government or jurisdiction; -khedaṃ nirūpya S. 5.
     (4) Position, dignity, rank; hṛtādhikārāṃ malināṃ Y. 1. 70 deprived of the position or rights or privileges of a wife.
          (a) Right, authority, privilege, claim, title (as to wealth, property &c.); right of ownership or possession; adhikāraḥ phale svāmyamadhikārī ca tatprabhuḥ S. D. 296; vatse'dhikāraḥ sthitaḥ Mv. 4. 38 it now belongs to the child.
          (b) Qualification or authority to perform certain specified duties, civil, sacrificial, religious &c.; as the adhikāra of a king to rule and protect, of a Brāhmaṇa to sacrifice, of a Vaiśya to till or trade &c.; śūdro'dhikārahīnopi Y. 3. 262; with loc.; niṣekādiśmaśānāṃto maṃtrairyasyodito vidhiḥ . tasya śāstre'dhikāro'smin jñeyo nānyasya kasyacit Ms. 2. 16; śrāddhādhikārasaṃpadastu iti bhavaṃto bruvaṃtu (repeated in Śrāddha ceremonies).
     (6) Prerogative of a king.
     (7) Effort, exertion; karmaṇyevādhikāraste mā phaleṣu kadācana Bg. 2. 47 your business is with action alone &c.
     (8) Relation, reference; kathā vicitrāḥ pṛtanādhikārāḥ Mb.
     (9) Place = adhikaraṇa; mahatkhalu puruṣādhikāraṃ jyotiḥ M. 1. (10) A topic, paragraph or section; prāyaścitta- Mit.; See adhikaraṇa.
     (11) Counting, enumeration, occasion for counting; saṃsatsu jāte puruṣādhikāre Ki. 3. 51 (gaṇanāprastāve).
     (12) (In gram.) A head or governing rule, which exerts a directing or governing influence over other rules; e. g. sarvasya dve P. VIII. 1. 1; IV. 1. 82-3; tatpuruṣaḥ II. 1. 22; adhikāroyaṃ Sk. (This adhikāra is of three kinds: siṃhāvalokitaṃ caiva maṃḍūkaplutameva ca . gaṃgāpravāhavaccāpi adhikārastridhā mataḥ ...)
     -- Comp.
          --vidhiḥ determination or statement of qualifications to do particular acts; as rājārājasūyena yajet. --stha-āḍhya a. possessed of authority, invested with office.

adhikārin, adhikāravat a. [astyarthe in matup vā]
     (1) Possessed of authority, having power; nispṛho nādhikārī syāt Pt. 1. 164; saṃdhivigrahakārya-, kārya- H. 3.
     (2) Entitled to, having a right to; sarve syuradhikāriṇaḥ; so uttarādhikārin heir; dhanagrahaṇa- &c; tapasyanadhikāritvāt R. 15. 51 not qualified or authorised.
     (3) Belonging to, owned by.
     (4) Fit for. --m. (rī-vān)
     (1) An official, officer; na niṣprayojanaṃ adhikāravaṃtaḥ prabhubhirāhūyaṃte Mu. 3; a functionary, superintendent, head, director, governor.
     (2) A rightful claimant, proprietor, master, owner.
     (3) One qualified to sacrifice or perform sacred works.
     (4) Man as the lord of creation.
     (5) One well versed in the Vedānta.

adhikāritā --tvam Authority, rightful claim, qualification &c.

adhikṛta p. p. [kṛ-kta] Authorised, appointed &c; one possessed of authorised qualification, &c.; rājñaścādhikṛto vidvān brāhmaṇaḥ Ms. 8. 11; pātrāṇi nāṭye'dhikṛtāḥ. --taḥ An officer, official, functionary, superintendent, head, one in charge of any thing; saṃbhāvanā hyadhikṛtasya tanoti tejaḥ Ki. 6. 46; prāsāda- Mu. 3; Pt. 1. 424; rāṣṭra- Y. 1. 337.

adhikṛtiḥ f. Right, privilege, ownership. See adhikāra.

adhikṛtya ind. With reference to, regarding, concerning; grīṣmasamayamadhikṛtya gīyatāṃ S. 1; śakuṃtalāmadhikṛtya bravīmi S. 2 I refer to, speak of, Śakuntalā; 3. 4; R. 11. 62. See adhikṛ above.

     (1) U. To ascend, mount upon.
     (2) To attack, scale.

adhikramaḥ, --kramaṇam An attack, invasion.

adhikṣit m. [adhikṣi bhāve kartari vā kvip tukca Tv.] Decay or one that causes decay; a lord or ruler (?)

adhikṣip 6 P.
     (1) To insult, abuse, asperse, vilify, traduce, censure; kiṃ māṃ saṃbhṛtadoṣairadhikṣipatha S. 5 heap accusations on me; nṛpatāvadhikṣipati śauriṃ Śi. 15. 44; na me pādarajasā tulya ityadhikṣiptaḥ M. 1.
     (2) To throw or lay upon, bespatter.
     (3) To superinduce (disease).
     (4) To surpass.

     (1) Abuse, insulting, insult; prajñā- Dk. 52 insult to, reflection on, the understanding; bhavatyadhikṣepa ivānuśāsanaṃ Ki. 1. 28.
     (2) Laying upon; fixing; throwing.
     (3) Dismissal.

adhigam 1 P.
          (a) To acquire, obtain, get, attain, secure; ājñākaratvamadhigamya V. 3. 19; adhigacchati mahimānaṃ caṃdropi niśāparigṛhītaḥ M. 1. 13; bhartāramadhigacchet Ms. 9. 91 marry; śreyāṃsi sarvāṇyadhijagmuṣaste R. 5. 34.
          (b) To find, meet with, fall in with, see, discover.
          (c) To accomplish; arthaṃ sapratibaṃdhaṃ prabhuradhigaṃtuṃ sahāyavāneva M. 1. 9; na me buddhirniścayamadhigacchati Mu. 5 is not able to decide; for
          (a) see also Ms. 2. 218, Bg. 2. 64, R. 2. 66.
     (2) To approach, reach, go towards or near; guṇālayopyasanmaṃtrī nṛpatirnādhigamyate Pt. 1. 384; tasyāṃtaṃ nādhigacchati does not reach or go to the end.
     (3) To study, learn; know; tebhyo'dhigaṃtuṃ nigamāṃtavidyāṃ U. 2. 3; śrutamapyadhigamya Ki. 2. 41; 6. 38; Ms. 7. 39; 12. 109; Y. 1. 99, Bk. 7. 37.
     (4) To cohabit with.

adhigata p. p.
     (1) Acquired, obtained &c; -paramārthānpaṃḍitānmāvamaṃsthāḥ Bh. 2. 17.
     (2) Studied, known, learnt, mastered; kimityevaṃ pṛcchasyanadhigatarāmāyaṇa iva U. 6. 30.

adhigamaḥ --manam
     (1) Acquisition, obtaining, getting, finding &c.; duradhigamaḥ parabhāgaḥ Pt. 5. 34; vaṃśasthiteradhigamāt V. 5. 15; dārādhigamanaṃ Ms. 1. 112 marriage.
     (2) Mastery, study, knowledge; asacchāstrādhigamanaṃ Ms. 11. 66.
     (3) Mercantile return, profit; acquiring property; nidhyādeḥ prāptiḥ Mit. or dhanaprāptiḥ; sthāpayaṃti tu yāṃ vṛddhiṃ sā tatrādhigamaṃ prati Ms. 8. 157.
     (4) Acceptance.
     (5) Intercourse.

adhigamya, --gamanīya, --gaṃtavya pot. p. Attainable &c.

adhigaṃtṛ a. [gam-tṛc] One who attains or acquires.

adhigava a. or adv. [gavi ityadhigavaṃ avyayī-sa.] Found in or derived from a cow; svādīyo yadadhigavaṃ kṣīraṃ.

adhiguṇa a. [adhikā guṇā yasya]
     (1) Possessing superior qualities, worthy, meritorious; yācñā moghā varamadhiguṇe nādhame labdhakāmā Me. 6.
     (2) [adhigato guṇo jyā yena] well strung (as a bow); -śarāsanaṃ janāḥ Ki. 12. 14. --ṇaḥ A superior or eminent merit.

adhicar 1 P. To walk or move over or on something.

adhicaraṇam Act of walking over something.

adhijananam Birth; māturagre'dhijananaṃ Ms. 2. 169.

adhijihvaḥ [adhikā jihvā yasya] A serpent (who has a forked tongue). This arose from the attempt of the serpents to lick the nectar placed on a bed of Kuśa grass, the sharp points of which pricked the tongue and split it into two. --hvā-jihvikā [adhirūḍhā jihvā, svārthe kan]
     (1) The uvula.
     (2) A sort of swelling of the tongue or epiglottis.

adhijya a. [adhyārūḍhā jyā yatra, adhigataṃ jyāṃ vā] Having the bow-string stretched, well strung (as a bow).
     -- Comp.
          --dhanvan-kārmuka a. having the bow strung; tvayi cādhijyakārmuke S. 1. 6.

     (1) The state of being strung; -tāṃ nī to string; R. 11. 14.

adhityakā [adhi-tyakan P. V. 2. 34; parvatasya ārūḍhasthalamadhityakā Sk.] A table-land, highland; sthāṇuṃ tapasyaṃtamadhityakāyāṃ Ku. 3. 17; adhityakāyāmiva dhātumayyāṃ R. 2. 29.

adhidaṃḍanetṛ m. N. of Yama.

adhidaṃtaḥ [adhyārūḍho daṃtaḥ] A redundant tooth growing over another.

adhidārva a. Wooden.

adhidīdhiti a. Of superior or transcendental lustre; Śi. 1. 24.

adhidevaḥ --vatā [adhiṣṭhātā-trī devaḥ devatā vā]
     (1) A presiding or tutelary deity; yayāce pāduke paścātkartuṃ rājyādhidevate R. 12. 17; 13. 68; 16. 9; Bv. 3. 3; sā rāmaṇīyakanidheradhidevatā vā Mal. 1. 21. (The eleven organs of sense are said to have each a presiding deity: śrotrasya dik, tvaco vātaḥ, netrasya arkaḥ, rasanāyā varuṇaḥ, ghrāṇasya aśvinau, vāgiṃdriyasya vahniḥ, hastasya iṃdraḥ, pādasya upeṃdraḥ, pāyoḥ mitraḥ, upasthasya prajāpatiḥ, manasaḥ caṃdraśca.
     (2) [adhikṛto devo yena guṇātiśayāt] The supreme or highest god, Almighty.

adhidevanam Gambling table, board for gambling (adhi upari dīvyate yatra.)

adhidaivaṃ --daivatam [adhiṣṭhātṛ daivaṃ-daivataṃ vā]
     (1) The presiding god or deity; adhidaivaṃ kimucyate Bg. 8. 1, 4, 7. 30; śivādhidaivataṃ dhyāyet vahnipratyadhidaivataṃ; tamabhinaṃdaṃti ... yaḥ adhidaivatamiva stauti K. 109.
     (2) The supreme deity or the divine agent operating in material objects.

adhināthaḥ [adhiko nāthaḥ] The Supreme lord.

adhinī 1 P. To lead away from; to enhance, increase.

adhināyaḥ [nī-ghañ, --adhinīyate vāyunā] Fragrance, odour.

adhinirṇij a. Veiled.

adhipaḥ [adhipāti, adhi-pā-ka] A lord, ruler, king, soverign, head; atha prajānāmadhipaḥ prabhāte R. 2. 1; mostly in comp; narādhipaḥ lord of men, king; gaja- a lordly elephant &c.

adhipatiḥ [adhikaḥ patiḥ]
     (1) = adhipaḥ.
     (2) A part of the head where the wound proves immediately fatal; (mastakābhyaṃtaropariṣṭāt śirāsaṃdhisannipāto romāvartodhipatiḥ, tatrāpi sadyo maraṇam Suśr.)

adhipatnī Ved. A female ruler, mistress (svāminī).

adhipāḥ [adhipāti-pā kvip] Ved. A king, ruler, lord.

adhipāṃśula a. Dusty from above.

adhipu(pū)ruṣaḥ  [adhikaḥ pu-pūruṣaḥ] The Supreme Being.

adhipeṣaṇam [piṣ-lyuṭ] Pounding or grinding upon, serving to pound or grind upon.

adhipraja a. [adhikā prajā yasya] Having many children (as a man, woman &c.) --jaṃ adv. [prajāmadhikṛtya] Regarding creation (of the world) as a means of preserving the world.

adhipraṣṭiyugam [praṣṭau nihitaṃ yugaṃ] A yoke laid on the praṣṭi or foremost of the three horses, used on certain sacrificial occasions. --gaḥ The fourth horse thus attached (?)

adhibalam An interlocation of high words in mutual defiance; S. D. 526.

adhibhūḥ [adhibhavati svāmībhavati; bhū-kvip] A master, superior; foremost; rākṣasānāmadhibhuvi Mv. 6. 47; raghūṇāmadhibhuvā 56.

adhibhūtam [adhiṣṭhāyibhūtaṃ or bhūtaṃ prāṇimātramadhikṛtya vartamānaṃ] The highest being; the Supreme Spirit or its all-pervading influence; the whole inanimate creation; adhibhūtaṃ ca kiṃ proktaṃ Bg. 8. 1; adhibhūtaṃ kṣaro bhāvaḥ 8. 4 'adhibhūta is all perishable things.'

adhibhojanam [adhikaṃ bhojanaṃ]
     (1) Excess in eating.
     (2) [adhikaṃ bhojanaṃ dhanaṃ mūlyaṃ vā yasya] Very costly or valuable; daśa vastrādhibhojanā Rv. 6. 47. 23; a supplementary or additional gift (?).

adhimaṃthaḥ [adhikaṃ mathyate anena; maṃthkaraṇe ghañ]
     (1) Severe ophthalmia; utpāṭyata ivātyarthaṃ netraṃ nirmathyate tathā . śirasordhaṃ tu taṃ vidyādadhimaṃthaṃ svalakṣaṇaiḥ.
     (2) = adhimaṃthanaṃ.

adhimaṃthanam [maṃth-bhāve karaṇevā lyuṭ] Rubbing together for producing fire; suitable for such friction (as wood).

adhimaṃthita a. [adhimaṃtho'sya saṃjātaḥ itac] Suffering from eye-disease.

adhimāṃsaḥ [adhikaṃ māṃsaṃ yatra] A sort of disease in the white of the eye, a sort of cancer or protuberance of flesh; vistīrṇaṃ mṛdu bahulaṃ yakṛtprakāśaṃ śyāvaṃ vā tadadhimāṃsajārma vidyāt Suśr.

adhimāṃsakaḥ [adhikaṃ māṃsaṃ yatra] A sort of cancer in the back of the gums; hanūsye paścime daṃte mahāśotho mahārujaḥ . lālāsrāvī (kālāsnāyī) kaphakṛto vijñeyaḥ sodhimāṃsakaḥ Suśr.

adhimātra a. [adhikā mātrā yasya] Beyond measure, excessive, inordinate. --traṃ On the subject of prosody.

adhimāsaḥ [adhiko ravimāsāt atiriktaḥ śuklapratipadādidarśāṃtaścāṃdro māsaḥ] An intercalary (lunar) month.

adhimuktiḥ f. Trust, confidence.

adhimuhyaḥ N. of Buddha in one of his 34 former births.

adhiyajña a. Pertaining to a sacrifice; -jñaṃ brahma japet Ms. 6. 83. --jñaḥ Principal sacrifice; the agency effecting or causing such sacrifice; -jñohamevātra dehe dehabhṛtāṃ vara Bg. 8. 4 the adhiyajña is I myself in this body (i. e. Kṛṣṇa); atrāsmindehe aṃtaryāmitvena sthitohamadhiyajñaḥ yajñādikarmapravartakastatphaladātā ceti śrīdharaḥ. --jñaṃ adv. On the subject of sacrifices, so adhiyāga.

adhiyāṃga = adhikāṃga, q. v.

adhiyogaḥ [adhiko yogaḥ] An auspicious conjunction of stars for departure, expedition &c. (jyotiṣaprasiddho yātrikaśubhayogaḥ); yoge kṣemamathādhiyogagamane kṣemaṃ ripūṇāṃ vadhaḥ Muhurta.

adhiyodhaḥ [ādhikyena yudhyate; yudhac] The foremost hero or warrior (in fighting); na hi kopaparītāni harṣavīryotsukāni ca . bhavaṃti adhiyodhānāṃ mukhāni nihate patau Ram.

adhirajju a. Ved. [adhigatā rajjuryena] Fastening, fettering.

adhiratha a. [adhyārūḍho rathaṃ rathinaṃ vā] Being on or over a car. --thaḥ
     (1) A charioteer, driver.
     (2) N. of a charioteer who was king of Anga and foster-father of Karṇa. --thaṃ Ved. A cart-load.

adhirāj m. --jaḥ [adhirājate; rāj kvip, rājan-ṭac vā] A sovereign or supreme ruler, an emperor; prāyopaviṣṭo gaṃgāyāmanādṛtyādhirād śriyaṃ Bhāg.; adyāstametu bhuvaneṣvadhirājaśabdaḥ U. 6. 16; king, head, lord (of men, animals &c.); himālayo nāma nagādhirājaḥ Ku. 1. 1; so mṛga-, nāga- &c.

adhirājyaṃ --ṣṭram [adhikṛtaṃ rājyaṃ rāṣṭraṃ atra]
     (1) Imperial or sovereign sway, supremacy, sole sovereignty, imperial dignity, an empire.
     (2) N. of a country.

adhirukma a. [adhigataṃ rukmaṃ ābharaṇaṃ yena] Having ornaments (of gold &c.).

adhiruh 1 P.
     (1) To ascend, mount (a throne, hill &c.); go up to, find access to, sit in or on (acc.); pādāhataṃyadutthāya mūrddhānamadhirohati Śi. 2. 46; purādhirūḍhaḥ śayanaṃ mahādhanaṃ Ki. 1. 38. lying on; turagādhirūḍhaṃ R. 7. 37 riding a horse; 12. 104; baṃdhujanādhirūḍhairgajānāṃ vṛṃdaiḥ Ku. 7. 52 mounted or seated on; yogādhirūḍhāḥ R. 13. 52; engaged or lost in contemplation; so Pt. 1; sadyaḥ parasparatulāmadhirohatāṃ dve R. 5. 68 bear or acquire; pratijñāṃ- enter on; kīrtirdyāmadhirohati Śi. 2. 52.; sarvamanorathānāmagramivādhirūḍhā K. 158 mounted on the summit or pinnacle; tvāṃ dhūriyaṃ yogyatayādhirūḍhā Ki. 3. 50 this responsibility lies on your shoulders.
     (2) To string; adhirohati gāṃḍīvaṃ maheṣau Ki. 13. 16.
     (3) (Intran.) To rise or grow over or above. --Caus. [roha -(pa) yati]
     (1) To raise, place, seat, cause to mount or ascend; tāḥ svamaṃkamadhiropya R. 19. 44 having placed or seated; Śi. 12. 46.
     (2) To restore, give back; purāṇaśobhāmadhiropitāyāṃ (vasatau) R. 16. 42 restored to its former grandeur.
     (3) To string (as a bow); kārmukaṃ ca balinādhiropitam R. 11. 81.
     (4) To give, confer &c.; udāraka iti prītalokādhiropitāparaślādhyanāmani Dk. 50.

adhiruh a. (At the end of comp.) Growing on; dharaṇiruhādhiruho latāyāḥ Śi. 7. 46.

adhirūḍha p. p.
     (1) Mounted, ascended &c.
     (2) Increased; -samādhiyogaḥ engaged in profound meditation.

adhiropaṇam Act of raising, exalting or causing to mount.

adhirohaḥ An elephant rider Śi. 11.7.

adhirohaṇam Ascending, mounting; citā- R. 8. 57. --ṇī [adhiruhyate anayā, ruh karaṇe lyuṭ] A ladder, flight of steps (of wood &c.) (Mar. śiḍī).

adhirohin a. Ascending, mounting, rising above &c. --ṇī [adhirohaḥ sādhanatvena astyasyāḥ] A ladder, flight of steps.

adhivac 2 P. To speak in favour of, advocate, side with.

adhivaktṛ m.
     (1) One who advocates a particular cause (pakṣapātena vaktṛ), an advocate.
     (2) An orator.
     (3) A comforter.

     (1) Advocacy, speaking in favour of (pakṣapātena kathanaṃ vacanaṃ.).
     (2) A name, epithet, appellation.

adhivākaḥ [vac-ghañ] Advocacy; tamiddhaneṣu hiteṣvadhivākāya havaṃte Rv. 8. 16. 5 (pakṣapātavacanāya).

adhivas 1 P.
     (1) To inhabit, fix one's abode or residence in, settle, dwell or reside in (with acc. of place); girimadhivasestatra viśrāmahetoḥ Me. 25; yāni priyāsahacaraściramadhyavātsaṃ U. 3. 8; bālyātparāmiva daśāṃ madanodhyuvāsa R. 5. 63; 11. 61; 13. 79; Śi. 3. 59; Bk. 5. 6; 1. 3; 8. 79.
     (2) To settle, alight or perch on.
     (3) (2 A.) To put on (clothes). --Caus.
     (1) To cause to stay overnight.
     (2) To consecrate, set up (as an image).

adhivastra a. [adhyāvṛtaṃ vastraṃ yena] Clad, veiled; Rv. 8. 26. 13.

     (1) Abode, residence; dwelling; satata-subhagārpitastanaṃ Māl. 5. 8; tasyāpi sa eva giriradhivāsaḥ K. 137; lakṣmī bhṛtoṃbhodhitaṭādhivāsān Śi. 3. 71 situated on; settlement, habitation.
     (2) An inhabitant, neighbour.
     (3) Obstinate pertinacity in making a demand, sitting without food before a person's house till he ceases to oppose or refuse it (Mar. dharaṇā).
     (4) [adhivāsayati devatā anena, karaṇe ghañ] Consecration of an image especially before the commencement of a sacrificial rite; see adhivāsanaṃ also.
     (5) A garment, mantle (adhīvāsaḥ also).

adhyuṣita p. p. Inhabited, resorted to; vidyādharādhyuṣitacāruśilātalāni sthānāni Bh. 2. 70; balairadhyuṣitāstasya R. 4. 46; 9. 25; 14. 30; saptarṣimaṃḍala- K. 48.

adhivās 10 P. To scent, perfume; karpūrapallavarasena adhivāsaya gaṃdhapātrāṇi K. 184; maṃdārapuṣpairadhivāsitāyāṃ V. 4. 35.

adhivāsaḥ Application of perfumes or fragrant cosmetics; scenting, perfuming; fragrance, scent, fragrant odour itself; adhivāsaspṛhayeva mārutaḥ R. 8. 34; Śi. 2. 20, 5. 42; K. 183.

adhivāsanam [vas-ṇic, or --vās lyuṭ.]
     (1) Scenting with perfumes or odorous substances (saṃskāro gaṃdhamālyādyaiḥ Ak.).
     (2) [vas-ṇic-lyuṭ] Preliminary consecration (pratiṣṭhā) of an image, its invocation and worship by suitable Mantras &c. before the commencement of a sacrifice; (yajñāraṃbhātprāk devatādyāvāhanapūrvakaḥ pūjanādikarmabhedaḥ); making a divinity assume its abode in an image.

adhivāsin a.
     (1) Inhabiting, dwelling or siting in.
     (2) Scenting &c.

adhivāsita p. p.
     (1) Invested or clothed with.
     (2) Scented, perfumed.

adhivāhanam Taking up, carrying over, conveying.

adhivikartanam The act of cutting off or cutting through.

adhivid 6 U. To marry in addition to, supersede (as a wife) (said also of wives); adhivividuramātyairāhṛtāstasya yūnaḥ prathamaparigṛhīte śrībhuvau rājakanyāḥ R. 18. 53.

adhivinnā [vid-kta] A superseded wife, one whose husband has married again; according to Hindu Śastras a wife may be superseded for any one of these 8 defects: --surāpī vyādhitā dhūrtā vaṃdhyārthadhnyapriyaṃvadā . strīprasūścādhivettavyā puruṣadveṣiṇī tathā Y. 1. 73, 74; Ms. 9. 80-83.

adhivettṛ m. [vid-karttari tṛc] A husband who supersedes his first wife.

adhivedaḥ Marrying an additional wife. --daṃ adv. concerning the Veda.

adhivedanam [bhāve lyuṭ] = adhivedaḥ.

adhiśī 2A. To lie or sleep upon, sleep in, rest or recline upon; (with acc. of place); bhujāṃtaraṃ R. 19. 32; amuṃ 13. 6; 16. 49; śilāpaṭṭamadhiśayānā S. 3; adhyaśayiṣṭa gāṃ Bk. 15. 114; caṃdrāpīḍaḥ śayanatalamadhiśiśye K. 98, 206; Ki. 1. 38; Dk. 112; to dwell, inhabit Bk. 10. 35; to sit in; athādhiśiśye prayataḥ pradoṣe rathaṃ R. 5. 28. --Caus. To cause to sleep on; darbhaśayyāmadhiśāyya Dk. 105 placing on.

adhiśayita p. p. Reclining upon, used for reclining upon.

adhiśri 1 U.
     (1) To sleep on, ascend, mount, resort to; vilocane bibhradadhiśritaśriṇī Śi. 1. 24 possessed of beauty; adhiśrayaṃtīrgajatāḥ 12. 50.
     (2) To place over.
     (3) (adhiśrī also) To put on fire, make hot.

adhiśrayaḥ [śri-bhāve ac]
     (1) A receptacle.
     (2) [śrī-ac] Boiling, making hot (by putting on fire).

adhiśrayaṇaṃ --paṇam [śri-śrī-bhāve-lyuṭ] Placing a kettle on fire; warming, boiling. --ṇī [adhiśrīyate pacyate'tra, ādhāre lyuṭ ṅīp] An oven, a fire-place.

adhiśrī a. [adhikā śrīryasya] Of exalted dignity, supreme; very rich, sovereign lord; iyaṃ maheṃdraprabhṛtīnadhiśriyaścaturdigīśānavamatya māninī Ku. 5. 53; R. 7. 29.

adhiṣavaṇam [adhiṣūyate somo'tra; adhisu-ādhāre lyuṭ]
     (1) A contrivance (like a hand-press) of leather &c. to extract and strain the Soma juice, or (a.) used for the act of straining &c.
     (2) [bhāve lyuṭ] Straining Soma juice.

adhiṣavaṇyā [adhiṣavaṇāya hitā, yat] The board or wooden plank (phalaka) used in the act of extracting Soma juice.

adhiṣṭhā 1 P. (used with acc. P. I. 4. 46)
          (a) To stand on or upon, to sit in or upon, occupy (as a seat &c.), resort to; ardhāsanaṃ gotrabhido'dhitaṣṭhau R. 6. 73; śākhinaḥ kecidadhyaṣṭhuḥ Bk. 15. 31; pratanubalānyadhitiṣṭhatastapāṃsi Ki. 10. 16 practising; māmadhiṣṭhāya Ram. depending on me.
          (b) To stand, be; adhyatiṣṭhadaṃguṣṭhena śataṃ samāḥ Mb.
          (c) To stand over, mount.
          (d) To stand by, be near; āśramabahirvṛkṣamūlamadhitiṣṭhati U. 4.
     (2) To be in, dwell in, inhabit, reside, stay; bhujaṃgapihitadvāraṃ pātālamadhitiṣṭhati R. 1. 80; mādhiṣṭhā nirjanaṃ vanaṃ Bk. 8. 79; śrījayadevabhaṇitamadhitiṣṭhatu kaṃṭhataṭīmavirataṃ Gīt. 11.
     (3) To make oneself master of, seize, take possession of, overpower, conquer; saṃgrāme tānadhiṣṭhāsyan Bk. 9. 72; tvamadhiṣṭhāsyasi dviṣaḥ 16. 40; sa sadā phalaśālinīṃ kriyāṃ śaradaṃ loka ivādhitiṣṭhati Ki. 2. 31 obtains; adhitiṣṭhati lokamojasā sa vivasvāniva medinīpatiḥ 2. 38; yakṣaḥ kutaścidadhiṣṭhāya bālacaṃdrikāṃ nivasati Dk. 18.
          (a) To lead, conduct as head or chief; mahārājadaśarathasya dārānadhiṣṭhāya vasiṣṭhaḥ prāptaḥ U. 4, See adhiṣṭhita also.
          (b) To be at the head of, govern, direct, preside over, rule, superintend; prakṛtiṃ svāmadhiṣṭhāya Bg. 4. 6 governing, controlling; śrotraṃ cakṣuḥ sparśanaṃ ca rasanaṃ ghrāṇameva ca . adhiṣṭhāya manaścāyaṃ viṣayānupasevate 15. 9 presiding over and thus turning to use.
     (5) To use, employ.

adhiṣṭhita p. p. [adhiṣṭhā-kta]
     (1) (Used actively)
          (a) Standing, being; daṃtāṃtaramadhiṣṭhitaṃ Ms. 5. 141; (oft. with a dropped; jñānaṃ jñeyaṃ jñānagamyaṃ hṛdi sarvasya dhiṣṭhitaṃ Bg. 13. 17.); vīralokamadhiṣṭhitastātaḥ Mv. 5 gone to; rājaprasāda- Pt. 1 being in or enjoying royal favour.
          (b) Possessed of, dependent on.
          (c) Directing, presiding over; dharmādhikaraṇādhiṣṭhitapuruṣaiḥ Pt. 1.
     (2) (Passively)
          (a) Inhabited or resorted to by, occupied, possessed by; danukabaṃdhādhiṣṭhito daṃḍakāraṇyabhāgaḥ U. 1; Ms. 5. 97; acirādhiṣṭhitarājyaḥ śatruḥ M. 1. 8 an enemy who has newly (not long ago) ascended the throne, a newly established king; acira- adhikāraḥ Dk. 64 newly established; so graheṇa possessed by; mayūra- K. 97; -purobhāgāṃ K. 10, 130, 147, 152.
          (b) Full of, seized with, taken possession of, smitten, affected, overpowered; anenādhiṣṭhitānāṃ kāminīnāṃ K. 236, 161, 194; kāmādhiṣṭhitacetasā H. 1; Śi. 13. 39.
          (c) Watched over, guarded, superintended; rakṣāpuruṣādhiṣṭhite prāsāde Pt. 1; āryāruṃdhatīvasiṣṭhādhiṣṭhiteṣu raghukulakadaṃbakeṣu U. 2; pranaṣṭādhigataṃ dravyaṃ tiṣṭhedyuktairadhiṣṭhitaṃ Ms. 8. 34.
          (d) Led, conducted, commanded by, presided over; sāṃkhyamiva kapilādhiṣṭhitaṃ K. 40; anenādhiṣṭhitaṃ bhuvanatalaṃ 43, 44, 228; vasiṣṭhādhiṣṭhitā devyo gatā rāghavamātaraḥ U. 1. 3; tava pratāpādhiṣṭhitena upāyena H. 4 aided or supported; tātādhiṣṭhitānāmapi balānāṃ Ve. 3; svāminādhiṣṭhitaḥ śvāpi H. 3. 136.
          (e) Ridden, mounted upon; mūṣakādhiṣṭhitaṃ tamavalokya Pt. 2 with the mouse seated upon him; vilokya vṛddhokṣamadhiṣṭhitaṃ tvayā Ku. 5. 70.

adhiṣṭhātṛ [sthā-tṛc] Superintending, watching over, presiding over, guiding, governing; tutelary, guardian; as -trī devatā a guardian or presiding deity. --m. () A superintendent, head, chief, protector, controller, regulator, ruler; sarveṃdriyādhiṣṭhātā Bhaṣā P.; especially with reference to the Almighty who is the ruler of the universe. See adhideva also.

adhiṣṭhānam [adhi-sthā-lyuṭ]
     (1) Standing or being near, being at hand, approach (sannidhi); atrādhiṣṭhānaṃ kuru take a seat here.
     (2) Resting upon, occupying, inhabiting, dwelling in, locating oneself in; prāṇādhiṣṭhānaṃ dehasya &c.
     (3) A position, site, basis, seat; tryadhiṣṭhānasya dehinaḥ Ms. 12. 4; iṃdriyāṇi mano buddhirasyādhiṣṭhānamucyate Bg. 3. 40, 18. 14 the seat (of that desire.)
     (4) Residence, abode; nagaraṃ rājādhiṣṭhānaṃ Pt. 1.; so dharma-; a place, locality, town; sarvāvinayādhiṣṭhānatāṃ gacchaṃti K. 106; kasmiṃścidadhiṣṭhāne in a certain place.
     (5) Authority, power, power of control, presiding over; anadhiṣṭhānaṃ H. 3. 90 loss of position, dismissal from a post (of authority); samarthastvamimaṃ jetumadhiṣṭhānaparākramaiḥ Ram.; yatheha aśvairyukto rathaḥ sārathinā'dhiṣṭhitaḥ pravartate tathā ātmādhiṣṭhānāccharīraṃ Gaudapāda; mahāśvetā kṛtācca satyādhiṣṭhānāt K. 346 appeal or reference to truth.
     (6) Government, dominion.
     (7) A wheel (of a car &c.)
     (8) A precedent, prescribed rule.
     (9) A benediction.
     -- Comp.
          --śarīraṃ A body which forms the medium between the subtle and the gross body.

adhistri ind. [striyamadhikṛtya] Concerning a woman or wife. --strī [adhikā strī] A superior or distinguished woman.

adhisyaṃdam ind. [adhikaḥ syaṃdo vego yathā syāttathā] More quickly Śi. 17. 50.

adhī [adhi-i] 2 A.
     (1) To study, learn (by heart), read; (with abl. of person) learn from; upādhyāyādadhīte Sk.; sodhyaiṣṭa vedān Bk. 1. 2.
     (2) (P.)
          (a) To remember, think of, long or care for, mind, (with regret) with gen.; rāmasya dayamāno'sāvadhyeti tava lakṣmaṇaḥ Bk. 8. 119; 18. 38; mamaivādhyeti nṛpatistṛpyanniva jalāṃjaleḥ Ki. 11. 74 thinks of me only.
          (b) To know or learn by heart, study, learn; gacchādhīhi gurormukhāt Mb.
          (c) To teach, declare.
          (d) To notice, observe, understand.
          (e) To meet with, obtain; tena dīrghamamaratvamadhyaguḥ Śi. 14. 31 --Caus. [adhyāpayati] To teach, instruct (in); (with acc. of the agent of the verb in the primitive sense; (tau) sāṃgaṃ ca vedamadhyāpya R. 15. 33; vidyāmathainaṃ vijayāṃ jayāṃ ca ... adhyāpipad gādhisuto yathāvat Bk. 2. 21, 7. 34; adhyāpitasyośanasāpi nītiṃ Ku. 3. 6.

adhīta p. p. Learnt, studied, read, remembered, attained &c.
     -- Comp.
          --vidya a. who has studied the Vedas or finished his studies.

adhītiḥ f. [i-ktin]
     (1) Study, perusal; -bodhācaraṇapracāraṇaiḥ N. 1. 4.
     (2) Remembrance, recollection.

adhītin a. [adhītamanena; adhīta-ini] Well-read, proficient in (with loc.) adhītī caturṣvāmnāyeṣu Dk. 120; vede, vyākaraṇe &c.; tvaguttarāsaṃgavatīmadhītinīṃ Ku. 5. 16 muttering holy prayers, engaged in repeating sacred texts.

adhīyānaḥ pres. p. A student, one who goes over the Vedas.

adhyayaḥ [i-bhāve ac]
     (1) Learning, study; remembrance.
     (2) = adhyāya, q. v.

adhyayanam [i-lyuṭ] Learning, study, reading (especially the Vedas); one of the six duties of a Brāhmaṇa. The study of the Vedas is allowed to the first 3 classes, but not to a Śū1dra Ms. 1. 88--91. adhyayanaṃ ca akṣaramātrapāṭha iti vaidikāḥ, sārthākṣaragrahaṇamiti mīmāṃsakāḥ; the latter view is obviously correct; cf. yathā paśurbhāravāhī na tasya bhajate phalaṃ . dvijastathārthānabhijño na vedaphalamaśnute .. or better still, Yāska's Nirukta: sthāṇurayaṃ bhārahāraḥ kilābhūdadhītya vedaṃ na vijānāti yo'rthaṃ . arthajña it (arthavid) sakalaṃ bhadramaśnute nākameti jñānavidhūtapāpmā .. See also under anagni.

adhyāpakaḥ [adhi-i-ṇic-ṇvul] A teacher, preceptor, instructor; especially of the Vedas; vyākaraṇa-, nyāya- professor or teacher of grammar, logic &c.; bhṛtaka- a hired teacher, mercenary teacher; -uditaḥ styled a professor. According to ViṣṇuSmṛti an adhyapaka is of 2 kinds: he is either an Acharya i. e. one who invests a boy with the sacred thread and initiates him into the Vedas, or he is an Upadhyaya i. e. one who teaches for livelihood (vṛttyarthaṃ) See Ms. 2. 140--141 and the two words.

adhyāpanam [i-ṇic, bhāve-lyuṭ] Teaching, instructing, lecturing, especially on sacred knowledge; one of the six duties of a Brahmaṇa. According to Indian law-givers adhyāpana is of three kinds:
     (1) undertaken for charity,
     (2) for wages and
     (3) in consideration of services rendered; cf. Hārīta: adhyāpanaṃ ca trividhaṃ dharmārthamṛkthakāraṇam . śuśrūṣākaraṇaṃ ceti trividhaṃ parikīrtitam ..

adhyāpayitṛ m. [i-ṇic-tṛc] A teacher, instructor.

adhyāya a. [i-ghañ P. III. 3. 21] (At the end of comp.) A reader, student, one who studies; vedādhyāyaḥ a student of the Vedas; so maṃtra---yaḥ
     (1) Reading, learning, study, especially of the Vedas; praśāṃtādhyāyasatkathā (nagarī) Rām.
     (2) Proper time for reading or for a lesson; -jñāḥ pracakṣate Ms. 4. 102, see anadhyāya also.
     (3) A lesson, lecture; adhīyate'smin adhyāyaḥ P. III. 3. 122; so svādhyāyo'dhyetavyaḥ
     (4) A chapter, a large division of a work, such as of the Ramayaṇa, Mahābhārata, Manu Smiṛti, Pāṇini's Sūtras &c. The following are some of the names used by Sanskrit writers to denote chapters or divisions of works: --sargo vargaḥ paricchedodghātādhyāyāṃkasaṃgrahāḥ . ucchvāsaḥ parivartaśca paṭalaḥ kāṃḍamānanaṃ . sthānaṃ prakaraṇaṃ caiva parvollāsāhnikāni ca . skaṃdhāṃśau tu purāṇādau prāyaśaḥ parikīrtitau ..

adhyāyin a. [i-ṇini] Studying.

adhyetṛ m., --trī f. A student, learner.

adhīkāraḥ [kṛ-ghañ upasargadīrghatvaṃ] = adhikāra q. v.; svāgataṃ svānadhīkārānabalaṃbya Ku. 2. 18; Ms. 11. 64.

adhīna a. [adhi-kha P. V. 4. 7; adhigataḥ inaṃ prabhuṃ vā] Subject to, subservient, dependent on; usually in comp.; sthāne prāṇāḥ kāmināṃ dūtyadhīnāḥ M. 3. 14; tvadadhīnaṃ khalu dehināṃ sukhaṃ Ku. 4. 10; ikṣvākūṇāṃ durāpe'rthe tvadadhīnā hi siddhayaḥ R. 1. 72; kena nimittena bhavadadhīno jātaḥ Dk. 7 consigned to your care.

adhīmaṃtha = adhimaṃtha, q. v.

adhīra a.
     (1) Not bold, timid.
     (2) Confused, lacking self-command, excited, excitable.
     (3) Fitful, capricious.
     (4) Unsteady, not fixed, tremulous, rolling; -viprekṣitamāyatākṣyā Ku. 1. 46; -locanaḥ Śi. 1. 53; 6. 25.
     (5) Querulous, foolish, weak-minded. --rā
     (1) Lightning.
     (2) A capricious or quarrelsome mistress; see under nāyikā.

adhīvāsaḥ [vas ācchādane karaṇe ghañ] A long coat or mantle covering the whole person (upariṣṭādāvarakaṃ vāsaḥ).

adhīśaḥ [adhikaḥ īśaḥ] Lord, supreme lord or master, sovereign ruler; aṃga-, mṛga-, manuja- &c.

adhīśvaraḥ [adhikaḥ īśvaraḥ]
     (1) A supreme lord or an employer.
     (2) An Arhat (among Jainas).

adhīṣṭa a. [adhi-iṣ divādi-kta] Honorary, solicited. --ṣṭaḥ [bhāve-kta] Honorary office or duty; one of the cases in which liṅ or the Potential may be used; P. III. 3. 161 (adhīṣṭaḥ = satkārapūrvako vyāpāraḥ Sk.).

adhunā ind. [asmin kāle; idamaḥ idaṃśabdasya saptamyaṃtātkālavācinaḥ svārthe adhunāpratyayaḥ syāt P. V. 3. 17 Sk.] Now, at this time; pramadānāmadhunā viḍaṃbanā Ku. 4. 12.

adhunātana a. ( f) [adhunā bhavārthe ṭyul tuṭca] Belonging to the present times, modern.

adhura a. [nāsti dhūḥ ciṃtābhāro vā yasya] Not laden, free from the burden of cares &c. --dhūḥ [na. ta.] Absence of burden or cares.

adhūmakaḥ [na. ba.] 'Smokeless', burning or blazing fire.

adhṛta a. Not held or controlled &c. --taḥ One of the 1000 names of Viṣṇu (sarveṣāṃ dhārakatvena kenāpi na dhṛtaḥ svapratiṣṭhitaḥ parameśvaraḥ).

adhṛtiḥ f.
     (1) Want of firmness or control, looseness.
     (2) Incontinence.
     (3) Unhappiness.

adhṛṣṭa a.
     (1) Not bold, modest, shy.
     (2) Invincible, irresistible; unhurt; hūtāso vasavo 'dhṛṣṭāḥ Rv. 6. 50. 4.

adhṛṣya a.
     (1) Invincible, unassailable; manasāpyadhṛṣyaṃ Ku. 3. 51 unassailable even in thought; unapproachable (opp. abhigamya); adhṛṣyaścābhigamyaśca yādoratnairivārṇavaḥ R. 1. 16.
     (2) Modest, shy.
     (3) Proud.

adhenuḥ [na. ta.] A cow not yielding milk.

adhairya a. [na. ba.] Without selfpossession, courage &c., swayed by excitement. --ryaṃ Absence of courage, firmness or control; excitability.

adho'kṣa, adhoṃśuka, adho'kṣaja See under adhas.

adhyakṣa a. [adhigataḥ akṣaṃ iṃdriyaṃ vyavahāraṃ vā]
     (1) Perceptible to the senses, visible; yairadhyakṣairatha nijasakhaṃ nīradaṃ smārayadbhiḥ Bv. 4. 17.
     (2) One who exercises supervision, presiding over. --kṣaḥ
     (1) A superintendent, president, head, lord, master, controller, ruler; mayā'dhyakṣeṇa prakṛtiḥsūyate sacarācaraṃ Bg. 9. 10; yadadhyakṣeṇa jagatāṃ vayamāropitāstvayā Ku. 6. 17; oft. in comp.; gaja-, senā-, grāma-, dvāra-.
     (2) An eye-witness (Ved.).
     (3) N. of a plant (kṣīrikā) Mimusops Kauki.

adhyakṣaram ind. On the subject of syllables; above all syllables. --raṃ The mystic syllable om.

adhyagni ind. [agnau agnisamīpe vā] Over, by or near the nuptial fire. --n. (gni) One of the six kinds of strīdhana (woman's property) mentioned in Ms. 9. 194; a gift made to a woman at the time of marriage: vivāhakāle yatstrībhyo dīyate hyagnisannidhau . tadadhyagnikṛtaṃ sadbhiḥ strīdhanaṃ parikīrtitam .. So adhyagnikṛtaṃ-adhyagnyupāgataṃ; pitṛmātṛpatibhrātṛdattamadhyagnyupāgatam . ādhivedanikādyaṃ ca strīdhanaṃ parikīrtitam.

adhyaṃc [adhi-aṃc-kvip]
     (1) Tending upwards; superior, eminent.
     (2) One who obtains or acquires.

adhyaṃḍā [adhikamaṃḍamiva bījaṃ yasyāḥ sā] N. of two plants (ajaśṛṃgī) Carpopogon Pruriens, and bhūmyāmalakī Flacourtia Cataphracta.

adhyadhi ind. On high(acc.); -dhi lokaṃ Sk.

adhyadhikṣepaḥ [adhikaḥ adhikṣepaḥ] Excessive abuse or censure, gross abuse; Y. 3. 228.

adhyadhīna a. [ādhikyena adhīnaḥ] Completely subject or dependent, as a slave; nādhyadhīno na vaktavyo na dasyurna vikarmakṛt . Ms. 8. 66 (Kull. atyaṃtaparataṃtro garbhadāsaḥ).

adhyaya, adhyayanam &c. See under adhī.

adhyardha a. [adhikamardhaṃ yasya] Having an additional half; ekādhikaṃ harejjyeṣṭhaḥ putro'dhyardhaṃ tato'nujaḥ Ms. 9. 117; śatamadhyardhamāyatā Mb., i. e. 150; -yojanaśatāt Pt. 2. 18. (In comp. with a following noun) Amounting to or worth one and a half; -kaṃsa amounting to one and a half Kamsa; so -kākiṇīka, kārṣāpaṇa-ṇika, -khārīka, -paṇya, -pādya, -pratika, -māṣya, -viṃśatikīna, -śata-tya, -śa-śā-tamāna -śāṇa, -śāṇya, -śūrpa, -sahasra, -sauvarṇa &c. (P. V. 1. 28--35.). --rdhaḥ Wind (yadasmin idaṃ sarvaṃ adhyārdhnot adhikamavardhayat tena adhyardhaḥ pavanaḥ iti sthitam Bri. Up.).

adhyarbudam [adhikaṃ or adhijātaṃ arbudaṃ] A tumour, goitre; yajjāyate'nyatkhalu pūrvajati jñeyaṃ tadadhyarbudamarbudajñaiḥ Suśr.

adhyavaso 4 P.
     (1) To determine, resolve; kathamidānīṃ durjanavacanādevaṃ adhyavasitaṃ devena U. 1; adurlabhaṃ maraṇamadhyavasitaṃ K. 171; kimadhyavasyaṃti guravaḥ Ve. 1; abhidhātumadhyavasasau na girā Śi. 9. 76; resolve or mean to do.
     (2) To attempt, exert, undertake; mā sāhasaṃ adhyavasyaḥ Dk. 123; vrataṃ duṣkaramadhyavasitaṃ H. 1.
     (3) To grapple with.
     (4) To conceive, apprehend, think; akāryaṃ kāryavadadhyavasya Dk. 86.

adhyavasānam [bhāve-lyuṭ]
     (1) Effort, determination &c. See adhyavasāya.
     (2) (In Rhet.) Identification of two things (prakṛta and aprakṛta) in such a manner that the one is completely absorbed into the other; nigīryādhyavasānaṃ tu prakṛtasya pareṇa yat K. P. 10; on such identification is founded the figure called atiśayokti, and the lakṣaṇā called sādhyavasānā. See K. P. 2.

     (1) An attempt, effort, exertion; na svalpamapyadhyavasāyabhīroḥ karoti vijñānanidhirguṇaṃ hi H. 1. v. l.; -sahacareṣu sāhaseṣu Dk. 161.
     (2) Determination, resolution; mental effort or apprehension; saṃbhāvanaṃ nāma astitvādhyavasāyaḥ P. VI. 2. 21.
     (3) Perseverance, diligence, energy, constancy; tatkoyaṃ pade pade mahānanadhyavasāyaḥ U. 4 absence of energy or resolution, drooping of spirits; (with mahānadhyavasāyaḥ as the reading, the meaning would be 'why this effort on your part i. e. to determine whether you should go or not, hesitation'.).

adhyavasāyin a. [so-ṇini] Attempting; resolute, persevering, energetic.

adhyavasita p. p. Attempted, mentally apprehended, determined.

adhyavahananam [adhi upari avahananaṃ] Beating again what is being threshed and peeled (pūrvāvaghātena vituṣīkaraṇepi punaravaghātaḥ).

adhyaśanam [adhikamaśanaṃ] Excessive eating, eating again before the last meal is digested; sājīrṇe bhujyate yattu tadadhyaśanamucyate Suśr.

adhyasthi n. [adhirūḍhamasthi] A bone growing over another.

adhyas 4 P.
     (1) To place upon another, add or append to.
     (2) (In Phil.) To attribute or ascribe falsely, attribute the nature of one thing to another; sarvo hi puro'vasthite viṣaye viṣayāṃtaramadhyasyati, bāhyadharmānātmanyadhyasyati S. B.

adhyasta p. p. [as-kta]
     (1) Placed upon or over.
     (2) Attributed, wrongly ascribed or supposed; as śuktau rajatamadhyastaṃ, brahmaṇi jagadadhyastaṃ &c.

adhyāsaḥ [as-ghañ]
     (1) False attribution, wrong supposition (mithyājñānaṃ, atasmiṃstadbuddhiḥ or ayathārthānubhavaḥ); smṛtirūpaḥ paratra pūrvadṛṣṭāvabhāsaḥ; for full explanation see S. B. 8-22 and adhyāropa also.
     (2) An appendage.
     (3) Putting down upon; pādādhyāse śataṃ damaḥ Y. 2. 217.

adhyākram 1 U.
     (1) To fix upon, to occupy.
     (2) To attack.

adhyākrāṃta a. Taken possession of, occupied; -tā vasatiramunā S. 2. 14.

adhyātma a. [ātmanaḥ saṃbaddhaṃ, ātmani adhikṛtaṃ vā] Belonging to self or person; concerning an individual. --tmaṃ ind. [ātmānamadhikṛtya] Concerning self. --tmaṃ The supreme spirit (manifested as the individual self) or the relation between the supreme and the individual soul; akṣaraṃ brahma paramaṃ svabhāvo'dhyātmamucyate Bg. 8. 3 (svasyaiva brahmaṇa evāṃśatayā jīvasvarūpeṇa bhāvo bhavanaṃ sa eva ātmānaṃ dehamadhikṛtya bhoktṛtvena vartamāno'dhyātmaśabdenocyate Śrīdhara.) 'Brahma is the supreme, the indestructible; its manifestation (as an individual self) is adhyātma' --Telang's Bhagavadgītā; -cetasā 3. 30.
     -- Comp.
          --jñānaṃ --vidyā knowledge of the supreme spirit or ātman, theosophical or metaphysical knowledge (the doctrines taught by the Upanishads &c.); trayī vigrahavatyeva samamadhyātmavidyayā M. 1. 14; -vidyā vidyānāṃ vādaḥ pravadatāmaham Bg. 10. 32 (adhyātmavidyā nyāyavaiśeṣikamate dehabhinnatvena, sāṃkhyādimate prakṛtibhinnatvena ātmanaḥ svarūpādipratipādikā, vaidāṃtimate tu brahmābhinnatvena iti bhedaḥ; sarveṣāṃ mate'pi ātmatattvajñānarūpatvāttasyā adhyātmavidyātvam.. --dṛś-vid a. [adhyātmaṃ paśyati vetti vā] one proficient in this knowledge; nahyanadhyātmavitkaścit kriyāphalamupāśnute Ms. 6. 82.
          --yogaḥ [ātmānaṃ kṣetrajñamadhikṛtya yogaḥ] concentration of the mind on the Ātman drawing it off from all objects of sense.
          --rati a. [sa. ba.] one who delights in the contemplation of the supreme spirit; Ms. 6. 49.
          --rāmāyaṇaṃ N. of a Ramayaṇa which treats of the relation between the supreme and the individual soul, while it narrates Rama's story.

adhyātmika a. ( f.) Relating to adhyātma.

adhyāpaka --panaṃ, adhyāya See under adhī.

adhyāruh 1 P.
     (1) To ascend, mount; viṣṇupadaṃ dvitīyamadhyāruroheva rajaśchalena R. 16. 28; (fig.) to gain ascendancy over, domineer or lord it over; lateva viṭapakānadhyārohati K. 105; buddhihīno'tyucchrito'pi bhūbhṛt parairadhyāruhyamāṇamātmānaṃ na cetayate Dk. 154. --Caus. [-rohayati]
     (1) To cause to ascend, mount or sit in.
     (2) (--ropayati)
          (a) To place one in, entrust or appoint to; to cause, produce, bring about; kusumāyudhasya durjayatāmadhyāropayaṃtī K. 148; kasya na baṃdhutvamadhyāropayasi 202.
          (b) To attribute falsely; doṣānapi guṇapakṣamadhyāropayadbhiḥ K. 108 (falsely) representing even vices as virtues.
          (c) To overdo, exaggerate.

adhyārūḍha p. p.
     (1) Mounted, ascended.
     (2) Raised above, elevated.
     (3) Above, superior to, more than (with instr.); below, inferior; tato'dhyārūḍhānāṃ padamasujanadveṣajananaṃ Mu. 5. 12 of those in high office; āyudhaparigrahaṃ yāvadadhyārūḍho duryogaḥ U. 6 my insolence went the length of taking up arms.

     (1) Raising, elevating &c.
     (2) (In Vedānta phil.) Act of attributing falsely or through mistake; erroneously attributing the properties of one thing to another; considering through mistake a rope (which is not really a serpent) to be a serpent, or considering Brahma (which is not really the material world) to be the material world; asarpabhūtarajjau sarpāropavat, ajagadrūpe brahmaṇi jagadrūpāropavat, vastuni avastvāropo'dhyāropaḥ Vedantasāra.
     (3) Erroneous knowledge.

     (1) Raising &c.; alīka- K. 222, 108.
     (2) Sowing (seed).

adhyāropita p. p. Falsely attributed or supposed; hyperbolical.

adhyāvāpaḥ [adhi-ā-vap-ghañ]
     (1) Act of sowing or scattering (seed &c.).
     (2) [ādhāre ghañ] A field wherein seed &c. is sown.

adhyāvāhanikam [adhyāvāhanaṃ pitṛgṛhātpatigṛhagamanaṃ, tatkāle labdhaṃ; labdhārthe ṭhan] One of the six kinds of strīdhana or woman's property, the property which she receives when leaving her father's house for her husband's; yat punarlabhate nārī nīyamānā tu paitṛkāt (gṛhāt) . adhyāvāhanikaṃ nāma strīdhanaṃ parikīrtitam ...

adhyās 2 A.
          (a) To lie down, settle upon; occupy, dwell in (as a seat or habitation); seat oneself in or upon, enter upon, get into (as a path &c.) (with acc. of place); tvaritataramadhyāsyatāmiyaṃ vanasthalī K. 28; 36, 40; parṇaśālāmadhyāsya R. 1. 95; dvitīyamāśramamadhyāsituṃ samayaḥ V. 5; dvāradeśamadhyāste Dk. 3 is waiting at the door; R. 2. 17; 4. 74; 6. 10; 12. 85; 13. 22, 76; 15. 93; Me. 76; Bk. 1. 5; Ms. 7. 77; aye siṃhāsanamadhyāste vṛṣalaḥ Mu. 3; bhagavatyā prāśnikapadamadhyāsitavyaṃ M. 1 occupy the seat of judge, accept the office of judge.
          (b) To take possession of, grasp, seize; dhenvā tadadhyāsitakātarākṣyā R. 2. 52 with eyes tremulous on account of her being seized by him (adhyāsitaṃ = ākramaṇaṃ).
          (c) To resort to, inhabit; yadadhyāsitamarhadbhistaddhi tīrthaṃ pracakṣate Ku. 6. 56.
     (2) To live in conjugal relation; cohabit with.
     (3) To be directed or fixed upon.
     (4) To rule, govern, influence; affect, concern (mostly Ved.). --Caus. To cause one to sit down upon; bhavaṃtamadhyāsayannāsanaṃ Bk. 2. 46.

     (1) Sitting down upon, occupying, presiding over.
     (2) A seat, place.

adhyāsaḥ See under adhyas.

adhyāhāraḥ --haraṇam
     (1) Supplying an ellipsis (ākāṃkṣāviṣayapadānusaṃdhānaṃ).
     (2) Arguing; inferring; new supposition; inference or conjecture.

adhyuṣṭa a. (Ety?) Coiled up three and a halftimes; -valayaḥ a snake forming a ring coiled up three and a half times; avāpya svāṃ bhūmiṃ bhujaganibhamadhyuṣṭavalayaṃ svamātmānaṃ kṛtvā A. L. 10.

adhyuṣṭraḥ [adhigataḥ uṣṭraṃ vāhanatvena] A carriage drawn or borne by camels.

adhyūḍha a. [adhi upari ūḍhaḥ]
     (1) Raised, exalted, elevated, hanging over.
     (2) Abundant, increased, copious.
     (3) Rich, affluent. --ḍhaḥ Śiva. --ḍhā A wife whose husband has married another wife and thus superseded her (= adhivinnā q. v.).

adhyūdhnī [adhikaṃ ūdho yasyāḥ anaṅ ṅīp ca]
     (1) A cow with full and fat udders.
     (2) The vessel (in the body) above the udder or above the scrotum; perhaps urethra (?).

adhyūh 1 U.
     (1) To overlay, place on or upon.
     (2) To raise above.

adhyūhanam Putting of a layer(of ashes &c.).

adhyeṣaṇam [adhi-iṣ preraṇe-lyuṭ] Causing one to do a thing, especially a preceptor &c, as an honorific duty. --ṇā [adhikā eṣaṇā prārthanā] Solicitation, entreaty.

adhri a. [na-dhṛ-ki] Not restrained, irresistible.
     -- Comp.
          --gu-gū a. [adhri-gam-kū-ḍic ūṅādeśovā] of irresistible motion or course (adhṛtagamana), impetuous; yadadhrigāvo adhrigūidā cidahno aśvinā Rv. 8. 22. 11 (
          --guḥ) N. of a heavenly killer of sacrificial victims, or the name of the formula itself ending with an invocation of Agni.
          --ja a. [adhriṃ janayati, jan-ḍa] making irresistible.
          --puṣpalikā the betelnut plant.

adhriyamāṇa a.
     (1) Not held, not to be got hold of; not forthcoming.
     (2) Not surviving, dead.

adhruva a.
     (1) Uncertain, doubtful.
     (2) Unsteady, moving, not fixed or permanent; svāṃge'dhruve P. III. 4. 54; separable (which can be severed or detached without fatal or disastrous effects) (yena vinā na jīvanaṃ so 'dhruvaḥ Sk.) --vaṃ An uncertainty; yo dhruvāṇi parityajya adhruvāṇi niṣevate . dhruvāṇi tasya naśyaṃti adhruvaṃ naṣṭameva ca; cf. the English phrase 'A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush.'

adhruṣaḥ Quinsy; a kind of disease attended with fever arising from the affection of blood; śothaḥ sthūlastodadāhaprakāśo raktājjñeyaḥ so'dhruṣo rugjvarāḍhyaḥ Suśr.

adhvan m. [atti balaṃ; ad-kvanip dhādeśaḥ Uṇ. 4. 115; perhaps from at also]
          (a) A way, road; passage, orbit (of planets &c.); muktādhvānaṃ ye laṃghayeyurbhavaṃtaṃ Me. 54.
          (b) Distance, space (traversed or to be traversed); paṃcadaśayojanamātramadhvānaṃ jagāma K. 119, 120; kiyatyadhvani sā ujjayinī 207; Dk. 13; api laṃghitamadhvānaṃ bubudhe na budhopamaḥ R. 1. 47; ullaṃghitādhvā Me. 45; kālādhvanoratyaṃtasaṃyoge &c.
          (c) Journey, travel, course, march; naikaḥ prapadyetādhvānaṃ Ms. 4. 60 undertake a journey; adhvasu triṣu visṛṣṭamaithilaḥ R. 11. 57 after three marches; pariklāṃtaḥ kilādhvanā Ki 11. 2 way-worn; U. 1. 34; Me. 17, 38; adhvā varṇakaphasthaulyasaukumāryavināśanaḥ Suśr.
     (2) A recension of the Vedas and the school upholding it (śākhā, avayava); ekaviṃśatyadhvayuktamṛgvedamṛṣayo viduḥ . sahasrādhvā sāmavedo yajurekaśatādhvakaṃ .. adhvā devagatiḥ śākhā iti paryāyavācakāḥ .
     (3) Time (Kāla), time personified, (being the eater of all).
     (4) Air; sky, atmosphere.
     (5) Place.
     (6) Means, resource; method.
     (7) Attack (adhikadurārohaṇaṃ). adhvan is changed to adhva after prepositions; prādhvaḥ, vyadhvaḥ &c.
     -- Comp.
          --atiḥ [adhvānamatati, at-i] 1. a traveller. 2. an intelligent person.
          --adhipaḥ, --īśaḥ [ṣa. ta.] an officer in charge of the public roads.
          --ayanaṃ [adhvanyayanaṃ] journey, travel.
          --gaḥ 1. one who travels; a traveller, way-farer; saṃtānakatarucchāyāsuptavidyādharādhvagaṃ Ku. 6. 46 (-gāmin). 2. a camel. 3. a mule. 4. the sun; -bhogyaḥ N. of a tree, Spondias Mangifera (āmrātakavṛkṣa) adhvagaiḥ ayatnalabhyaphalatvāt bhogyaḥ. (--gā) the Ganges.
          --gat m. [adhvānaṃ gacchati; gam-kvip P. VI. 4. 40] a traveller.
          --gatyaṃtaḥ --gaṃtavyaḥ [ṣa. ta.] measure of length applicable to roads; deśakālādhvagaṃtavyaḥ Vārt.
          --jā [adhvani jāyate; jan-ḍa] A plant (svarṇulī or svarṇapuṣpī). --patiḥ 1. the sun (divaiva pathikānāṃ gamanāt rātrau ca gamananiṣedhāt sūryasya adhvapālakatvaṃ or adhvanaḥ ākāśasya patiḥ). 2. inspector of the road.
          --rathaḥ [adhvane hitaḥ paryāpto rathaḥ śāka. ta.] 1. a travelling coach. 2. [adhvaiva ratho yasya] a messenger skilled in travelling (pathi prajño dūtaḥ). --śalyaḥ [adhvani śalyamiva ācaratīti kvip-ac Tv.] N. of a tree (apāmārga) (adhvagānāṃ pādavastrādau śalyavadvedhakārakatvāt tathātvaṃ).

adhvanīna, adhvanya a. [adhvānaṃ alaṃ gacchati; adhvan-kha-yat vā; adhvano yatkhau P. V. 2. 16] Able to undertake a journey, speedingona journey; kṣipraṃ tato 'dhvanyaturaṃgayāyī Bk. 2. 44. --naḥnyaḥ A traveller going fast, way-farer.

adhvara a. [na dhvarati kuṭilo na bhavati dhvṛ-ac. na. ta.; dhvaratirhiṃsākarmā tatpratiṣedho nipātaḥ ahiṃsraḥ Nir.]
     (1) Not crooked, not broken, uninterrupted; imaṃ yajñamavatāmadhvaraṃ naḥ Yv. 27. 17 (adhvaraṃ = akuṭilaṃ śāstroktaṃ).
     (2) Intent, attentive.
     (3) Durable, sound. --raḥ [adhvānaṃ satpathaṃ rāti dadāti phalatvena, rā-ka] A sacrifice, a religious ceremony; also a Soma sacrifice; tamadhvare viśvajiti R. 5. 1. --raḥ --raṃ
     (1) Sky or air (ākāśa).
     (2) The second of the 8 Vasus.
     -- Comp.
          --kalpā an optional sacrifice (kāmyeṣṭi). --kāṃḍaṃ [ṣa. ta.] part of the śatapathabrāhmaṇa which treats of sacrifices.
          --ga [adhvaraṃ gacchati] intended for a sacrifice.
          --dīkṣaṇīyā [ṣa. ta.] consecration connected with an Adhvara; so -prāyaścittiḥ an expiation &c.
          --mīmāṃsā [ṣa. ta.] N. of Jaimini's Pūrvamīmansā.
          --śrīḥ [ṣa. ta.] glory of the Adhvara.
          --samiṣṭayajuḥ n. N. of an aggregate of libations connected with a sacrifice.

adhvarīyati, adhvaryati Den. P. To desire to have a sacrifice performed; or to perform one.

adhvaryuḥ [adhvaramadhīte Nir.; adhvara-kyac --yuc tatoṃ'tyākāralopaḥ Tv.]
     (1) Any officiating priest, technically distinguished from hotṛ, udgātṛ and brahman. His duty was "to measure the ground, build the altar, prepare sacrificial vessels, to fetch wood and water, light the fire, bring the animal and immolate it," and while doing this to repeat the Yajurveda; hotā prathamaṃ śaṃsati tamadhvaryuḥ protsāhayati Sk. See acchāvāka also.
     (2) The Yajurveda itself. --pl. Adherents of that Veda.
     -- Comp.
          --vedaḥ Yajurveda.

adhvasman a. [dhvaṃs manin kicca na. ta.] Imperishable; bright (?).

adhvāṃtam [na. ta.] Twilight, gloom, slight darkness, shade. --taḥ [ṣa. ta.] End of the journey.
     -- Comp.
          --śātravaḥ [adhvāṃtasya mārgasīmāyāḥ śātrava iva Tv.] A plant (śconāka) Cassia Fistula or Bignonia Indica (blossoming in shade).

an 2 P. [aniti, āna-nī-t, āna, anituṃ, anita]
     (1) To breathe; ānīdavātaṃ svadhayā tadekaṃ Rv. 10. 129. 2.
     (2) To move, go about, live; ko hyevānyāt yadyeṣa ākāśa ānaṃdo na syāt Taitt. Up.
     (3) To gasp, pant with thirst (Ved). --Caus. ānayati; desid. aniniṣati. -- (4 A.) To live.

an m. [kvip] The soul; viśve canedanā Rv. 4. 30. 3.

anaḥ [an-ac] Breath, respiration; prāṇo'pāno vyāna udānaḥ samāno'naḥ ityetatsarvaṃ prāṇa iti Bri. Up. [cf. L. animus, Gr. anemos].

ananam [an lyuṭ] Act of breathing, living &c.

anaṃśa a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Not entitled to a share in the inheritance; -śau klībapatitau jātyaṃdhabadhirau tathā . unmattajaḍamūkāśca ye ca kecinniriṃdriyāḥ .. Ms. 9. 201. Other persons are also mentioned by Devala, Baudhayana, Katyayana and Narada.
     (2) Without parts, undivided, portionless; an epithet of the sky or the Supreme Being.

anaṃśumatphalā [na aṃśumat mocakābhyaṃtarasyatvāt phalaṃ yasyāḥ] The plantain tree.

anaka a. Mean, base; See aṇaka.

anakṣ a. [na akṣṇoti vyāpnoti viṣayamiṃdriyeṇa, akṣ-kvip na. ta.] Without sight, blind.

anakṣa a.
     (1) Without an axle-tree.
     (2) Sightless, blind.

anakaduṃdubhiḥ = ānakaduṃdubhi q. v.

anakasmāt ind. [na. ta.] Not causelessly, not suddenly or accidentally.

anakṣara a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Unable to speak, mute, dumb, unlettered; mukhamanakṣaraṃ svākṛteḥ Bh. 2. 56.
     (2) Unfit to be uttered. --raṃ [apraśastānyakṣarāṇi yatra] Abusive language, foul or abusive words, censure. --adv. Without the use of words, not expressed by words, mutely, dumbly; -raṃ papraccha K. 219, 143; -vyaṃjitadaurhṛdena R. 14. 26.

anakṣi n. [apraśastaṃ akṣi] A bad eye, weak eye.

anagāra a. [na. ba.] Houseless. --raḥ A vagrant ascetic.

anagārikā The houseless state of a vagrant ascetic.

anagni [na. ta.]
     (1) Non-fire, substance other than fire; yadadhītamavijñātaṃ nigadenaiva śabdyate . anagnāviva śuṣkaidho na tajjvalati karhicit Nir.
     (2) Absence of fire. --a.
     (1) Not requiring fire, dispensing with fire, without the use of fire; vidadhe vidhimasya naiṣṭhikaṃ yatibhiḥ sārdhamanagnimagnicit R. 8. 25; said of a sacrifice also (agnicayanarahito yajñaḥ).
     (2) Not maintaining the sacred fire; anagniraniketaḥ syānmunirmūlaphalāśanaḥ Ms. 6. 25, 43; irreligious, impious.
     (3) Dyspeptic.
     (4) Unmarried.
     -- Comp.
          --tra-trā a. Ved. not maintaining the sacred fire, sinful, irreligious Rv. 1. 189. 3.
          --dagdha a. Not burnt with fire or on the funeral pile, Rv. 10. 15. 14 (śmaśānakarma na prāptāḥ); a class of Manes Ms. 3. 199.

anagha a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Sinless, innocent; avaimi caināmanagheti R. 14. 40.
     (2) Free from blame, faultless, handsome; rūpamanaghaṃ S. 2. 10; yasya jñānadayāsiṃdhoragādhasyānaghā guṇāḥ Ak.; -sarvagātrī Dk. 123.
     (3) Without mishap or accident, free from danger, calamity &c.; safe, unhurt; yāstvāmanaghamadrākṣma Dk. 108; kaccinmṛgīṇāmanaghā prasūtiḥ R. 5. 7; mṛgavadhūryadā anaghaprasavā bhavati S. 4 safely delivered or brought to bed; -prasūteḥ R. 14. 75.
     (4) Without grief or sorrow; dayālumanaghaspṛṣṭaṃ R. 10. 19.
     (5) Free from dirt, impurities &c., pure, spotless; R. 13. 65; 10. 80; Śi. 3, 31. --ghaḥ
     (1) White mustard.
     (2) N. of Viṣṇu; anagho vijayo jetā; also of Śiva and of several other persons, a Gandharva, Sadhya &c.

anaṃkuśa a. [aṃkuśena avaśyaḥ]
     (1) Ungovernable, unruly.
     (2) Taking license (as a poet).

anaṃga a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Bodiless, without a body; formless, incorporeal; tvamanaṃgaḥ kathamakṣatā ratiḥ Ku. 4. 9.
     (2) Different from the body.
     (3) Without a supplement or auxiliary. --gaḥ Cupid (the bodiless one; so called from his having been reduced to ashes by Śiva with the fire of his third eye, when he tried to seduce the God's mind towards Pārvati for the birth of a deliverer of the gods from Tāraka). --gaṃ
     (1) Sky, air, ether.
     (2) The mind (ākāśasya niravayavatvāt nyāyavaiśeṣikamate cittasya aguṇatvena tasya tathātvaṃ).
     -- Comp.
          --krīḍā [tṛ. ta.] 1. amorous sports. 2. N. of a metre of two lines, the first with 16 long, and second with 32 short, syllables.
          --da a. [upa. sa.] inspiring love; -detanubhūte bhujalate K. 220 (also without Angada); bāhvoranaṃgadatvasya bāle te kāraṇe ubhe Bhār. Ch.
          --dvādaśī N. of the 83rd chapter of bhaviṣyottarapurāṇa; -trayodaśīvataṃ, see under vrata. --lekhaḥ (madanalekhaḥ) a love letter; -lekhakriyayopayogaṃ (vrajaṃti) Ku. 1. 7.
          --raṃgaḥ N. of an erotic work describing the several postures (āsana) pertaining to sexual intercourse.
          --śatruḥ, --asuhṛt &c. N. of Śiva.
          --śekharaḥ N. of a metre of four lines, each with 15 iambic feet.

anaṃgakam The mind.

anaṃguri --li a. [na. ba.] Destitute of fingers.

anaccha a. Not clear, dirty.

anajakā, anajikā [apraśastā ajā] A miserable or small goat.

anaṃjana a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Without collyrium, pigment, or paint; netre dūramanaṃjane S. D.
     (2) Faultless, taintless.
     (3) Without any connection (niḥsaṃbaṃdha). --naṃ
     (1) The sky, atmosphere.
     (2) The supreme spirit (parabrahma), Viṣṇu or Narayaṇa.

anaḍuh m. [anaḥ śakaṭaṃ vahati] (anaḍvān, -ḍvāhau, -ḍudbhyāṃ &c.)
     (1) An ox, bull.
     (2) The sign Taurus. --hī or anaḍvāhī A cow.
     -- Comp.
          --jihvā [anaḍuho jihveva patrāṇi yasyāḥ sā] a plant (gojihvā) (anaṃtamūla. --da a. [upa. sa.] a giver of oxen.

anaḍutka a. Having oxen.

anaḍuhaḥ N. of a sage.

anaṇu a. [na. ta.] Not small or minute or fine, coarse. --ṇuḥ Coarse grain, peas &c.

anati ind. Not very much; compounds beginning with anati may be analysed by referring to ati; e. g. anatikramaḥ moderation; anatikramaṇīya not to be transgressed, inviolable; anatidṛśya opaque; anatidbhuta unsurpassed, real true, proper; anativyādhya invulnerable; anatyaṃtagati sense of diminutive words; anatyaya imperishable, undecaying &c.; anatipraśna not to be asked to excess; anativilaṃbitā absence of delay; fluency as a speaker's qualification, one of the 35 Vāgguṇas, q. v.

anaddhā ind. [na. ta.] Ved. Not truly or clearly, not certainly or definitely.
     -- Comp.
          --puruṣaḥ not a true man; one who is not of use, either to gods, men or the manes.

anadryaḥ [na adyaḥ bhakṣyaḥ aprāśastye nañ] White mustard.

anadyatana a. ( f.) [na. ta.] Not pertaining to this or the current day; a term used by Pāṇini to denote the sense of the Imperfect or the Periphrastic future P. III. 2. 111, III. 3. 15; -bhūte laṅ-apacat; -ne bhaviṣyati luṭ-paktā; parokṣānadyatane liṭ papāca. --naḥ Not the current day; atītāyāḥ rātreḥ paścārdhena āgāminyā rātreḥ pūrvārdhena sahito divaso'dyatanaḥ Sk., tadbhinnaḥ kālaḥ.

anadhika a. [na. ta.]
     (1) Not more or excessive.
     (2) Boundless; perfect.
     (3) Not capable of being enlarged or surpassed.

anadhikāraḥ [na. ta.] Absence of authority, right, claim &c.
     -- Comp.
          --carcā intermeddling, officiousness.

anadhikārin a. Not entitled to.

anadhigata a. [na. ta.] Not obtained, acquired or studied.
     -- Comp.
          --manoratha a. foiled in one's expectations.
          --śāstra a. who has not learnt the Śastras.

anadhīna a. [na. ta.] Independent. --naḥ --nakaḥ [saṃjñāyāṃ kan] An independent carpenter working on his own account (kauṭatakṣaḥ); sa hi kuṭyāṃ vasan na kasyacidadhīnaḥ.

anadhyakṣa a. [na. ta.]
     (1) Not perceptible or observable, invisible; mano'pi na tathājñānādanadhyakṣaṃ tadā bhavet . Bhāṣā P.
     (2) Without controller or ruler &c.

anadhyāyaḥ, anadhyayanam [na. ta.] Not studying, intermission of study; the time when there is or ought to be such intermission, a holiday (-divasaḥ); adya śiṣṭānadhyāyaḥ U. 4 a holiday (given) in honor of distinguished guests. See Ms. 2. 105-6; 4. 103-4; 105-8, 117-8, 126 &c.

ananubhāvuka a. Unable to comprehend; -tā non-comprehension, unintelligibility.

     (1) Not repeating a statement or proposition.
     (2) Tacit assent.

anaṃta a. [nāsti aṃto yasya] Endless, infinite, eternal, boundless, inexhaustible; -ratnaprabhavasya yasya Ku. 1. 3. --taḥ
     (1) N. of Viṣṇu; gaṃdharvāpsarasaḥ siddhāḥ kinnaroragacāraṇāḥ . nāṃtaṃ guṇānāṃ jānaṃti (nāsyāṃtamadhigacchaṃti) tenānaṃto'yamucyate ..; also of Viṣṇu's couch, the serpent Śeṣa; of Kṛṣṇa and his brother; of Śiva, the 14th Arhat; Vāsuki, the lord of serpents.
     (2) A cloud.
     (3) Talc.
     (4) N. of a plant (siṃduvāra) Vitex Trifolia.
     (5) The 23rd asterism śravaṇa.
     (6) A silken cord with 14 knots tied round the right arm on the anaṃtacaturdaśī day.
     (7) The letter ā. --tā
     (1) The earth (the endless).
     (2) The number one.
     (3) N. of various females; of Parvati.
     (4) N. of various plants; śārivā, anaṃtamūla (a very medicinal plant) dūrvā, āmalakī, guḍūcī, agnimaṃtha, kaṇā, lāṃgalī, durālabhā, harītakī, agniśikhā, śyāmalatā, pippalī. --tī A small silken cord tied round the left arm of a woman. --taṃ
     (1) The sky, atmosphere.
     (2) Infinity, eternity.
     (3) Absolution, final beatitude; tadanaṃtāya kalpate Pt. 2. 72.
     (4) The supreme spirit, Brahma (parabrahma,); satyaṃ jñānamanaṃtaṃbrahmeti śrutiḥ . na vyāpitvāddeśatoṃ'to nityatvānnāpi kālataḥ . na vastuto'pi sarvātmyādānaṃtyaṃ brahmaṇi tridhā ..
     -- Comp.
          --ātman m. the Supreme spirit.
          --kara a. magnifying to any extent; P. III. 2. 21.
          --ga a. moving for ever.
          --guṇa a. possessed of endless merits; of countless or infinite number; plavaṃgānāmanaṃtaguṇataidhate Mv. 6. 55.
          --caturdaśī, ---vrataṃ [anaṃtasya ārādhanaṃ yasyāṃ sā caturdaśī] the 14th day of the bright half of Bhadrapada when Ananta is worshipped.
          --jit (anaṃtāni bhūtāni jitavān) 1. N. of Vāsudeva, the conqueror of all. 2. N. of an Arhat deity.
          --tāna a. of endless width, extensive.
          --tīrthakṛt m. 1. one who visits many places of pilgrimage. 2. a Jaina deity.
          --tṛtīyā the third day of the bright half of bhādrapada, mārgaśīrṣa or vaiśākha; nabhasye vātha vaiśākhe mārgaśīrṣe'thavā punaḥ . śuklapakṣatṛtīyāyāṃ ... uktānaṃtatṛtīyaiṣā sutānaṃdaphalapradā. --dṛṣṭiḥ [anaṃtā dṛṣṭayo netrāṇi yasya] N. of Śiva, or of Indra.
          --devaḥ [anaṃtodeva iva] 1. the serpent Śeṣa. 2. [anaṃte dīvyati; div-ac] N. of Nārayaṇa who sleeps on Śeṣa.
          --pāra a. of endless width, boundless; -raṃ kila śabdaśāstraṃ Pt. 1.
          --māyin a. of endless tricks, endlessly deceitful.
          --mūlaḥ a medicinal plant; (śārivā). --rāśiḥ an infinite quantity.
          --rūpa a. of innumerable forms or shapes; epithet of Viṣṇu.
          --vātaḥ a disease of the head, resembling tetanus.
          --vijayaḥ [anaṃtān vijayate dhvanidvārā anena] N. of Yudhiṣṭhira's conchshell Bg. 1. 16
          --vīryaḥ N. of the 23rd Jaina Arhat of a future age.
          --vrataṃ see anaṃtacaturdaśī above.
          --śakti a. of boundless power, omnipotent, epithet of the Supreme Being.
          --śayanaṃ Travancore; Śriraṅgapaṭṭaṇa (?)
          --śīrṣa N. of Viṣṇu or the Supreme Being. (
          --rṣā) N. of the wife of Vasuki.
          --śuṣma a. Ved. possessing endless strength; endlessly blowing.
          --śrī a. of boundless magnificence, an epithet of the Supreme Being.

anaṃtaka a. [svārthe kan] Endless, eternal &c. --kaṃ The Eternal or Infinite (among the Jainas).

anaṃtya a. [anaṃtasya idaṃ-yat] Endless, eternal, infinite. --tyaṃ
     (1) Eternity, infinity.
     (2) The foot of hiraṇyagarbha.

anaṃtavat a. [astyarthe matup] Endless, eternal. --m. One of Brahma's four feet; earth, intermediate region, heaven, and ocean.

anaṃtara a. [nāsti aṃtaraṃ vyavadhānaṃ, madhyaḥ, avakāśaḥ &c. yasya]
     (1) Having no interior or interior space, limitless; tadetat brahma apūrvamanaṃtaraṃ abāhyaṃ.
     (2) Having no interval or interstice or pause (of space or time); compact, close; halo'naṃtarāḥ saṃyogaḥ P. I. 1. 7, See saṃyoga.
          (a) Contiguous, neighbouring, adjoining; anayat prabhuśaktisaṃpadā vaśameko nṛpatīnanaṃtarān R. 8. 19; bhāratavarṣāduttareṇa anaṃtare kiṃpuruṣanāmni varṣe K. 136; immediately adjoining; Ki. 2. 53, R. 7. 21; not distant from (with abl.); ātmanonaṃtaramamātyapadaṃ grāhitaḥ Mu. 4; brahmāvartādanaṃtaraḥ Ms. 2. 19 (Kull. anaṃtaraḥ kiṃcidūnaḥ); areḥ anaṃtaraṃ mitraṃ 7. 158; or in comp; viṣayānaṃtaro rājā śatruḥ Ak. who is an immediate neighbour.
     (4) Immediately before or after; tadidaṃ kriyatāmanaṃtaraṃ bhavatā baṃdhujanaprayojanaṃ Ku. 4. 32 soon after, just afterwards; anaṃtarodīritalakṣmabhājau pādau yadīyāvupajātayastāḥ Chand. M. having characteristics mentioned just before.
     (5) Following, coming close upon (in comp); śaṃkhasvanānaṃtarapuṣpavṛṣṭi Ku. 1. 23; 2. 53; -karaṇīyaṃ S. 4 the next duty, what should be done next.
     (6) Belonging to the caste immediately following; putrā ye'natarastrījāḥ Ms. 10. 14.
     (7) Uninterrupted, unbroken, continuous. --raṃ [na. ta.]
     (1) Contiguity, proximity; anaṃtaravihite cāsyāsane K. 93.
     (2) Brahma, the supreme soul (as being of one entire essence). --raṃ ind. [Strictly it is acc. of time kālātyaṃtasaṃyogaḥ; nāsti aṃtaraṃ yathā syāttathā]
     (1) Immediately after, afterwards.
     (2) (With a prepositional force) After (with abl.); purāṇapatrāpagamādanaṃtaraṃ R. 3. 7; tyāgācchāṃtiranaṃtaraṃ Bg. 12. 12.; godānavidheranaṃtaraṃ R. 3. 33, 36.; 2. 71; svāminonaṃtaraṃ bhṛtyāḥ Pt. 1.; rarely with gen.; aṃgadaṃ cādhirūḍhastu lakṣmaṇo'naṃtaraṃ mama Rām.; or in comp.; ghanodayaḥ prāk tadanaṃtaraṃ payaḥ S. 7. 30.; R. 4. 2.; Ms. 3. 252, Y. 2. 41; vacanānaṃtarameva K. 78 immediately after those words.
     -- Comp.
          --jaḥ or jā [anaṃtarasyā anaṃtaravarṇāyā mātuḥ jāyate] the child of a Kṣatriya or Vaiśyā mother, by a father belonging to the caste immediately above the mother's, Ms. 10. 4. 2. born immediately before or after; a younger or elder brother. (
          --jā) a younger or elder sister; anuṣṭhitānaṃtarajāvivāhaḥ R. 7. 32.; so -jāta.

anaṃtarīya a. Next in succession.

anaṃtarayaḥ [aṃtarayaḥ dūrīkaraṇaṃ, na. ta] Not leaving, non-abandonment.

anaṃtarāya a. [na. ba.] Uninterrupted, without a break.

anaṃtargarbhin m. [aṃtargarbho yasya; astyarthe ini na. ta.] N. of Kuśa grass used for the pavitra, q. v.

anaṃda a. [na naṃdayati; naṃd-ṇic ac] Joyless, cheerless. --daḥ N. of a purgatory.

anannam Not food, that which is undeserving of being eaten.

ananya a.
     (1) Not different, identical, same, not other than, self; ananyā rāghavasyāhaṃ bhāskarasya prabhāyathā . sā hi satyābhisaṃdhānātathānanyā ca bhartari Rām.
     (2) Sole, unique, without a second.
     (3) [nāsti anyaḥ viṣayo yasya] Undivided, undistracted (mind &c.); having no other object or person to think of &c.; ananyāściṃtayaṃto māṃ ye janāḥ paryupāsate Bg. 9. 22. In comp. ananya may be translated by 'not by another,' 'directed or devoted to no one else', 'having no other object.'
     -- Comp.
          --artha a. not subservient to any other object, principal.
          --āśrita a. independent, not resorting to another. (
          --taṃ) unencumbered estate (in law).
          --gatiḥ f. sole resort or resource.
          --gatika a. [na. ba.] having no other resource or help, having no other resource left; ananyagatike jane vigatapātake cātake Udb.
          --guru a. than which nothing is greater Śi. 1. 35.
          --citta, --ciṃta, --cetas, --manas, --mānasa, --hṛdaya a. giving one's undivided thought or attention to, with undivided mind; viciṃtayaṃtī yamananyamānasā S. 4. 1; K. 75.
          --jaḥ, --janman m. [nānyasmāt janma yasya; ātmabhūcittabhū ityādi tasya vyapadeśatvāt or nāsti anyadyasmātso'nanyaḥ viṣṇuḥ; tasmājjātaḥ] Cupid, the god of love; mā mūmuhatkhalu bhavaṃtamananyajanmā Mal. 1. 32.
          --dṛṣṭi a. gazing intently or steadfastly at; -ṣṭiḥ savitāramaikṣata Ku. 5. 20.
          --deva a. having no other (superior) God, epithet of the Supreme Being.
          --paratā exclusive devotion or attachment; puraścakṣūrāgastadanu manaso'nanyaparatā Mal. 6. 15.
          --parāyaṇa a. devoted to no other (woman) S. 3. 19.
          --pūrvaḥ [nānyā pūrvā yasya] having no other wife; varasyānanyapūrvasya viśokāmakarodguṇaiḥ Ku. 6. 92. (--rvā) [na anyaḥ pūrvo yasyāḥ sā] a virgin (who never before belonged to another), a woman having no other husband; R. 4. 7.
          --bhāj a. [na anyaṃ anyāṃ vā bhajate] not devoted to any other person; ananyabhājaṃ patimāpnuhiṃ Ku. 3. 63.
          --viṣaya a. not applicable or belonging to any one else, exclusively applicable; V. 1. 1; Mv. 1. 25.
          --vṛtti a. 1. of the same nature. 2. having no other means of livelihood. 3. closely attentive.
          --śāsana a. not ruled over by any one else; R. 1. 30; Dk. 2.
          --sāmānya, --sādhāraṇa a. not common to any one else, uncommon, exclusively devoted, applicable or belonging to one; ananyanārīsāmānyo dāsastvasyāḥ purūravāḥ V. 3. 18; -rājaśabdaḥ R. 6. 38; M. 5; 4. 10; not capable of being performed by any one else, Ku. 3. 19.
          --sadṛśa a. (śī f.) having no equal, matchless, peerless; yathaitānananyasadṛśān vidadhāsi Pt. 1.

ananyatā, --tvam Identity, sameness.

ananyādṛśa a. (śī f.) Not like others, singular.

ananvayaḥ [na. ta.]
     (1) Want of connection.
     (2) (Rhet.) A figure of speech in which a thing is compared to itself, the object being to show that it is matchless and can have no other upamāna; upamānopameyatvaṃ yadekasyaiva vastunaḥ . iṃduriṃduriva śrīmānityādau tadananvayaḥ .. gaganaṃ gaganākāraṃ sāgaraḥ sāgaropamaḥ . rāmarāvaṇayoryuddhaṃ rāmarāvaṇayoriva ...

ananvita a. [na. ta.]
     (1) Unconnected.
     (2) Irregular, desultory; irrelevant, incoherent.
     (3) Not attended with, devoid of; as putra-, bhāryā- &c.

anapa a. [na saṃti ādhikyena āpo yatra] Destitute of much water (as a puddle).

anapakaraṇaṃ --karman, --kriyā
     (1) Not injuring.
     (2) Non-delivery.
     (3) (In law) Non-payment; dattasyānapakarma ca Ms. 8. 4; dattasya or vetanasya -kriyā 214.

anapakāraḥ Harmlessness. --a., --kārin a. Harmless, innocent.

anapajayya a. Ved. Whose victorious character cannot be reversed.

anapatya a.
     (1) Without issue, childless, without heir; -tyaśca kila tapasvī S. 6; K. 59, 63.
     (2) Not propitious or favourable to children; causing fall (patanakāraṇa) Rv. 3. 54. 18. -tā, ---tvaṃ childlessness; nūnamanapatyatā māṃ vatsalayati S. 7.

anapatrapa a. Impudent, shameless.

anapanihita a. Ved. Not mutilated or curtailed.

anapabhraṃśaḥ Not a corrupt word; a properly formed word.

anapayati ind. Very early(before the sun starts on his journey).

anapara a. Having no other or second, having no follower, sole; tadetad brahmāpūrvamanaparaṃ S. B.

anaparādha --dhin a. Innocent, guiltless, harmless. --dhaḥ Innocence.

anapavācana a. Ved. Impossible to be talked away or wished away.

anapavyayat a. Ved. Not letting go; able.

anapasara a. Having no egress or passage to creep out of, unjustifiable, inexcusable; niranvayo'napasaraḥ Ms. 8. 198 (apasaraḥ pratigrahakrayādiḥ) --raḥ -- An usurper.

anapaspṛś a. Not obstinate.

anapasphur --ra --rat a. (of a cow) Not refusing to be milked.

anapāya a.
     (1) Free from loss or decay.
     (2) Imperishable, undiminished, undecaying; praṇamaṃtyanapāyamutthitaṃ (caṃdraṃ) Ki. 2. 11. --yaḥ
     (1) Imperishable nature, freedom from decay or wear and tear; permanence.
     (2) N. of Śiva.

anapāyin a. Imperishable, firm, steady, unfailing, constant, durable, not transient; prasādābhimukhe tasmiñ śrīrāsīdanapāyinī R. 17. 46.; 8. 17; anapāyini saṃśrayadrume gajabhagne patanāya vallarī Ku. 4. 31; caleṣvartheṣu lubdhena na yaśaḥsvanapāyiṣu Mu. 5. 14; Ki. 14. 37, 2. 43; Śi. 8. 50, 14. 65, 17. 26.

anapāvṛt [na. ba.] Not returning or coming back, non-recurrent (punarāvṛttiśūnya); unremitting (?).

anapekṣa --kṣin a. [na. ta.]
     (1) Regardless.
     (2) Careless, not minding or heeding, indifferent.
     (3) Independent or irrespective (of another), not requiring any other thing.
     (4) Impartial.
     (5) Irrelevant, unconnected, unconcerned. --kṣā Disregard, indifference, carelessness. --kṣaṃ adv. Without regard to, independently or irrespectively of; carelessly, accidentally; -tvāt since it has no reference to.

anapeta a.
     (1) Not gone off, not past; anapetakālaṃ kathayāṃbabhūvuḥ Ki. 6. 30 without loss of time, without delay.
     (2) Not deviating from, faithful to, not leaving (with abl.); arthādanapetaṃ arthyaṃ Sk.; dharmapathyarthanyāyādanapete P. IV. 4. 92. See apeta also.
     (3) Not devoid of, possessed of; aiśvaryādanapetamīśvaramayaṃ loko'rthataḥ sevate Mu. 1. 14.

anapta a. Ved. [na āptaḥ, vede pṛṣo- hrasvaḥ] Not seized or overcome by the enemy (śatrubhiranāpta); not watery (?).

anapnas a. [nāsti apnaḥ rūpaṃ yasya] Ved. Destitute of form or shape, shapeless, actionless (karmahīna).

anapsaras --rā f. Not an Apsaras, unworthy of a celestial nymph; apsareva pratibhāsi V. 2.

anaphā A particular configuration of planets; ravivarjaṃ dvādaśagairanaphā; sacchīlaṃ sukhānvitaṃprabhuṃ khyātiyuktamanaphāyām Dīpikā.

anabhijña a. Ignorant of, unacquainted with, unused to, (usually with gen.); -jñaḥ kaitavasya S. 5; vṛttāṃtānāmanabhijñāsmi K. 236; -jñaḥ parameśvaragṛhācārasya Mv. 2; Ku. 6. 43.

anabhimlāna a. [na. ta.] Not faded.
     -- Comp.
          --varṇa a. Ved. of unfaded or undiminished lustre, resplendent.

anabhilakṣitaḥ An impostor.

anabhilāṣa a. Free from desire. --ṣaḥ
     (1) Want of appetite or desire.
     (2) Non-relish.

anabhiśasta, --sti, --stya a. Ved. Blameless, faultless; -śastenī leading to perfection or to heaven.

anabhisaṃdhānam Absence of design or purpose; so anabhisaṃdhiḥ; -kṛta done undesignedly.

anabhihita a.
     (1) Not named or asserted; see abhihita under abhidhā.
     (2) Not fastened (Ved.). --taḥ N. of the chief of a Gotra.

anabhyāvṛttiḥ f. Non-repetition; manāganabhyāvṛttyā vā kāmaṃ kṣāmyatu yaḥ kṣamī Śi 2. 43.

anabhyāśa, --sa a. Not near, distant &c.; -samitya a. to be shunned from afar Sk.

anabhra a. Cloudless; iyamanabhrā vṛṣṭiḥ this is (like) a shower from a cloudless sky, i. e. something quite unexpected or sudden.

anabhri a. Ved. Epithet of rainwater; requiring no shovel (?).

anamaḥ [na namati anyān] A Brāhmaṇa (one who does not bow down to others and returns salutations made to him by others with a blessing).

anamitaṃpaca (= mitaṃpaca) a. Miserly, niggardly.

anamitra a. Having no enemies. --traṃ A state of having no enemies.

anamīva a. Ved. [nāsti amīvo roge yasya na. ba.] Well, happy, free from disease; comfortable, salubrious, sinless. --vaṃ Good or comfortable state, happiness, prosperity.

anaṃbara a. Wearing no garment. --raḥ A Buddhist mendicant.

anamra a. Not humble, haughty, proud; anamrāṇāṃ samuddhartuḥ R. 4. 35.

anayaḥ [apraśasto nayaḥ]
     (1) Bad management or conduct; injustice; unfairness; samṛddhiranayādvinaśyati Pt. 1. 169; Bh. 2. 42.
     (2) Bad policy or course of conduct, evil course; anayo nayasaṃkāśo hṛdayānnāpasarpati Pt. 3. 184.
     (3) Adversity, calamity, distress; jīvedetena rājanyaḥ sarveṣvapyanayaṃ gataḥ Ms. 10. 95 reduced to straits; 102.
     (4) [ayaḥ śubhāvaho vidhistadanyaḥ anayaḥ] Misfortune, adversity; ill-luck.
     (5) A variety of dice-play, gambling (śārāṇāṃ vāmāvartena abhīṣṭasthānanayanaṃ).

anaraṇyaḥ N. of a king of the solar race, a descendant of Ikṣvāku and king of Ayodhya, who was overthrown by Ravaṇa.

anarus a. [na. ba.] Ved. Not wounded, healthy, sound.

anargala a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Free from bar or obstruction, free to move, unrestrained, unhampered; turaṃgamutsṛṣṭamanargalaṃ R. 3. 39.
     (2) Unlocked.

anargha a. [nāsti argho mūlyaṃ yasya na. ba.] Invaluable, priceless, inestimable; R. 5. 2; Śi. 14. 88. --rghaḥ [na. ta.] Wrong or improper value.
     -- Comp.
          --rāghavaṃ N. of a drama in 7 acts by Murari Miśra; also called Murari Naṭaka after its author and supposed to have been written between the 12th and the 14th century.

anarghatvaṃ --tā Pricelessness, invaluable nature; H. Pr. 4.

anardhya a. Invaluable; unsurpassed in reverence due from others, highly respected; anarghyamargheṇa tamadrināthaḥ Ku. 1. 58.

anartha a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Useless, worthless; śunaḥ pucchamivānarthaṃ pāṃḍityaṃ dharmavarjitaṃ Pt. 3. 97.
     (2) Unfortunate, unhappy.
     (3) Harmful, disastrous, bad; cittajñānānuvartino'narthā api priyāḥ syuḥ Dk. 160; wicked (opp. dakṣiṇa).
     (4) Not having that meaning (but another); having no meaning, nonsensical, meaningless.
     (5) Poor. --rthaḥ [na. ta.]
     (1) Non-use or value.
     (2) A worthless or useless object.
     (3) A reverse, evil, calamity, misfortune; R. 18. 14; raṃdhropanipātino 'narthāḥ S. 6; ekaikamapyanarthāya kimu tatra catuṣṭayaṃ H. 1; cf. chidreṣvanarthā bahulībhavaṃti &c.; Ms. 4. 193, H. 4. 92; harmful object, danger; arthamanarthaṃ bhāvaya nityaṃ Moha M. 2.
     (4) Nonsense, want of sense.
     (5) N. of Viṣṇu (āptasarvakāmatvāttasya tathātvaṃ).
     -- Comp.
          --aṃtaraṃ [na arthāṃtaraṃ] sameness or identity.
          --kara a. ( f.) 1. doing useless or unprofitable things. 2. mischievous, harmful; unprofitable, productive of evil.
          --nāśin m. N. of Śiva (destroyer of calamities).
          --bhāva a. malicious.
          --lupta a. [dṛṣṭārthena aluptaḥ] not devoid of the apparent meaning; free from all that is worthless.
          --saṃśayaḥ [anarthakārī saṃśayaḥ śāka. ta.] 1. a great evil, hazardous adventure; pratinivartatāmasmādanarthasaṃśayāt Mal. 5. 2. [na. ta.] not a risk of one's money; safety of one's wealth.

anarthya, anarthaka a.
     (1) Useless; meaningless; sarvamapyetadanarthakaṃ Ve. 1; -āyāsa K. 108; not significant, as a particle used expletively.
     (2) Nonsensical.
     (3) Unprofitable.
     (4) Unfortunate. --kaṃ Nonsensical or incoherent talk.

anarva a. Ved. Not lax or loose (aśithila) Rv. 1. 164. 2.; free, unobstructed, permanent.

anarvan a. [arv-hiṃsāyāṃ kanin, arvā sapatnaḥ na. ta.]
     (1) Not inimical, not hostile or to be hated (adveṣya); Rv. 1. 136. 5.
     (2) Having no horse.

anarviś m. [anasā śakaṭena viśati prāpnoti; viś-kvip, aharā- ruḥ]
     (1) One who sits in a cart to fetch fuel &c.
     (2) [ṛkarmaṇi vic, araṃ gaṃtavyaṃ prati viśati, viś-kvip, na. ta.] One who is not able to reach the destination.

anarśarāti a. [anarśāya apāpiṣṭhāya rātirdānaṃ yasya] One who does not give to sinful persons, a sinless donor.

anarha a.
     (1) Not deserving, not fit, not worthy of (with gen. or in comp); anarhā gṛhavāsasya Pt. 4.; tān havyakavyayorviprānanarhān manurabravīt Ms. 3. 150.
     (2) Inadequate, unsuitable.
     (3) Undeserving of reward or punishment.

analaḥ [nāsti alaḥ paryāptiryasya, bahudāhyadahanepi tṛpterabhāvāt] Tv.; cf. nāgnistṛpyati kāṣṭhānāṃ; said by some to be from an to breathe].
     (1) Fire.
     (2) Agni or the god of fire. See agni.
     (3) Digestive power, gastric juice; maṃdaḥ saṃjāyate'nalaḥ Suśr.
     (4) Wind.
     (5) Bile.
     (6) One of the 8 Vasus, the fifth.
     (7) N. of Vāsudeva.
     (8) N. of various plants; citraka, raktacitraka Plumbago Zeylanica and Rosea, bhallātaka the marking nut tree.
     (9) The letter r. (10) The number three.
     (11) (Astr.) The 50th year of Bṛhaspati's cycle.
     (12) The third lunar mansion kṛttikā.
     (13) A variety of Pitṛdeva or manes (kavyavāho'nalaḥ somaḥ).
     (14) [anān prāṇān lāti ātmatvena] The soul (jīva).
     (15) N. of Viṣṇu (na nalati gaṃdhaṃ prakaṭayati na vadhyate vā nal-ac).
     (16) The Supreme Being.
     -- Comp.
          --da a. [analaṃ dyati] 1. removing or destroying heat or fire; kariṇāṃ mude sanaladā'naladāḥ Ki. 5. 25. 2. = agnida q. v.
          --dīpana a. [analaṃ dīpayati] promoting digestion, stomachic.
          --prabhā [analasya prabheva prabhā yasya] N. of a plant (jyotiṣmatī) Helicacabum Cardiospermum.
          --priyā N. of Agni's wife svāhā. --sādaḥ loss of appetite, dyspepsia.

analasa a.
     (1) Not lazy, active, diligent, watchful, R. 9. 15.
     (2) Unable, incompetent.

analiḥ [aniti-ac anaḥ aliryatra ba. śakaṃdhvā.] N. of a tree (bakavṛkṣa) Sesbana Grandiflora (tatpuṣpāṇāṃ madhupūrṇatayā tanmadhubhirbhramarāṇāṃ jīvanadhāraṇāttathātvaṃ Tv.).

analpa a.
     (1) Numerous.
     (2) Not a little; not small, liberal, noble (as mind &c.); Ki. 14. 18; much; jalpaṃtyanalpākṣaraṃ Pt. 1. 136 profusely, in many words; vikasitavadanāmanalpajalpepi Bv. 1. 100; 2. 138.
     -- Comp.
          --ghoṣa a. very clamorous or noisy.
          --manyu a. greatly enraged.

anavakāśa a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Having no scope or occasion, uncalled for.
     (2) Inapplicable.
     (3) Having no opportunity or space. --śaḥ [na. ta.] Absence of room or scope.

anavagraha a. [na. ba.] Irresistible, uncontrolled, impetuous, resistless; sukumārakāyamanavagrahaḥ smaraḥ (abhihaṃti) Mal. 1. 39.

anavacchinna a.
     (1) Not bounded or marked off, not separated or cut.
     (2) Unlimited, immoderate, excessive.
     (3) Undefined; dikkālādi- Bh. 2. 1; 3. 1; undiscriminated, unmodified.
     (4) Uninterrupted, continuous.

anavadya a. [na avadyaḥ niṃdyaḥ] Faultless, blameless, unobjectionable, irreproachable; Bh. 2. 21; R. 7. 70. --dyā N. of a damsel.
     -- Comp.
          --aṃga, --rūpa a. having faultless limbs or form, exquisitely handsome; rūpasya anavadyatā M. 2. (
          --gī) a woman with a faultless form.

anavadrāṇa a. Not sleepy.

anavadhāna a. [na. ba.] Careless, inattentive. --naṃ Inadvertence, inattention; -tā carelessness, remissness in duty (pramāda); kartavyākaraṇaṃ yatrākartavyasyāthavā kriyā . ucyate dvitayaṃ tatra pramādo'navadhānatā ...

anavadhi a. Unlimited, infinite.

anavana a. [na. ba.] Affording no help or protection.

anavanāmita a. Not lowered or bent down; -vaijayaṃtaḥ a Buddhist term for a future universe (lit. having banners unlowered).

anavapṛgṇa a. Ved. Spreading all around, not closely united.

anavabrava a. [avabrū-ac na vacādeśaḥ na. ta.] Irreproachable, not open to censure (apavādavarjita); speaking authoritatively.

anavabhra a. [na bhraṃśate bā. ḍa. Tv.] Undiminished, undecaying, durable, lasting (avabhraṃśaśūnya); -rādhas Rv. 1. 166. 7 having undiminished wealth.

anavama a. Not low or infeior; high, exalted, superior; sudharmānavamāṃ sabhāṃ R. 17. 27, 9. 14.

anavarata a. Incessant, continuous, uninterrupted; -dhanurjyāsphālanakrūrapūrvaṃ S. 2. 4. --taṃ adv. Incessantly, continuously.

anavarārdhya a. [avarasmin ardhe bhavaḥ, yat na. ta.] Chief, best, excellent.

anavalaṃba --bana a. [na. ba.] Having no prop or support; not dependent. --baḥ --banaṃ Independence.

anavalobhanam [na avalupyate pumānyena, avalup-lyuṭ pṛṣo- pasya bhaḥ Tv.] A sort of purificatory ceremony to be performed in the case of a pregnant woman in the third month after conception.

anavasa a. [av-asac avasaḥ bhojanaṃ prītikaratvāt na. ba.] Ved. Having no (wholesome) food to eat (pathyāśanarahita); Rv. 6. 66. 7; not stopping to eat by the way (?).

anavasara a.
     (1) Busy, having no leisure or interval of repose.
     (2) Illtimed, inopportune.
     (3) Out of place, baseless; -royaṃ ghaṃṭānādaḥ H. 3. --raḥ
     (1) Absence of leisure.
     (2) Illtimedness, unseasonableness; kaṃ yāce yatra tatra dhruvamanavasaragrasta evārthibhāvaḥ Mal. 9. 30.

anavasāna a. [na. ba.] Endless, having no setting; free from death.

anavasita a. [na. ta.] Not ended or finished; not determined. --tā N. of a kind of Triṣṭubh metre, consisting of four lines with 11 feet in each.

anavaskara a. Free from dirt pure, clear.

anavastha a. [nāsti avasthā yatra] Unsteady; -stho niṣkaruṇaśca Dk. 135; unsettled, not fixed; -stho vāyuḥ Śi. 11. 28. --sthā [na. ta.]
     (1) Instability, unsettled condition, disorder, confusion.
     (2) Loose or unsteady conduct, incontinence.
     (3) (In phil.) Absence of finality or conclusion, an endless series of statements or causes and effects, one of the faults of reasoning (upapādyopapādakayoraviśrāṃtiḥ); evamapyanavasthā syādyā mūlakṣatikāriṇī K. P. 2; evaṃ ca -prasaṃgaḥ S. B.
     (4) Not being 10 days old (daśāhābhāvaḥ).

anavasthāna a. Unstable, unsteady, fickle. --naḥ Wind. --naṃ
     (1) Instability, uncertainty, unsettled nature; jayaparājayānavasthānāt Dk. 161.
     (2) Looseness of conduct, incontinence.

anavasthita a.
     (1) Unsteady, fickle, unsettled; -stimitamūḍhaghūrṇannayanaḥ U. 3 with unsteady eyes; Ku. 4. 28.
     (2) Changed, altered; aho -to bhūmisaṃniveśaḥ U. 2.
     (3) Faithless, loose in morals or moral conduct, dissolute (vyabhicārin); nārīrhatvā'navasthitāḥ Ms. 11. 139.
     (4) Unable to stay or remain; prasthitaṃ tamanavasthitaṃ priyāḥ R. 19. 31; -tvaṃ, -sthitiḥ instability, looseness of conduct.

anavahvara a. [avahvṛ-kauṭilye-ac. na. ta.] Not crooked, straightforward.

anavāṃc a. Not tending downwards, looking up.

anavānam ind. [avānaḥ śvāsocchvāsaḥ sa yathā na syāttathā] Without breathing between, in one breath, without a pause, uno tenore.

anavāya a. [ava-i-ghañ avāyaḥ avayavaḥ, na. ba.] Without parts (niravayava); uninterrupted, unyielding.

anavekṣaka a. Regardless of; careless, indifferent.

anavekṣa-kṣā = anapekṣa-kṣā q. v.

     (1) Carelessness, inattention; anavekṣaṇādapi kṛṣiḥ Pt. 1. 169.
     (2) Want of supervision.

anavrata a. [na. ba.] Not altogether destitute of holy or ascetic performances. --taḥ A Jaina devotee who is so.

anaśanam Fasting, abstinence from food, fasting oneself to death; -naṃ ca śāyayitvā Dk. 156 making him fast; -nāt uttiṣṭhati Pt. 4. --a. Without food, fasting &c.

anaśanāya a. Ved. Not hungry.

anaśnat a. Not eating; -sāṃgamanaḥ the sacrificial fire in the sabha which is approached before eating or breakfast.

anaśva a. Having no horse or horses. --śvaḥ Something that is not a horse.

anaśvara a. ( f.) Imperishable.

anas n. [aniti śabdāyate an-asun]
     (1) A cart; udgātā cāpyanaḥ kraye Ms. 8. 209; Y. 1. 184, 3. 269, Śi. 12. 26.
     (2) [aniti jīvatyanena] Food, boiled rice.
     (3) Birth.
     (4) A living being.
     (5) A kitchen.
     (6) A parent (father or mother); said to be f. in these two senses. At the end of Avyayībhāva comp. anas is changed to anasa; as adhyanasaṃ &c.; also at the end of Tat. Comp.; mahānasaṃ &c.

anasūya --yaka a. [na. ba.] Free from malice, not envious, not spiteful; śraddadhāno'nasūyaśca Ms. 4. 158; Bg. 18. 71. --yā [na. ta.]
     (1) Absence of envy, charity of disposition, freedom from spite or ill-will; na guṇān guṇino haṃti stauti cānyaguṇānapi . na haseccānyadoṣāṃśca sānasūyā prakīrtitā.
     (2) N. of a friend of Śakuntalā.
     (3) N. of Atri's wife, the highest type of chastity and wifely devotion. [She was very pious and given to austere devotion by virtue of which she had obtained miraculous powers. Several stories are told to illustrate them. When the earth was devastated by a terrible drought which lasted for 10 years, Anasūya created water, fruits, roots &c. by means of her ascetic powers and saved many lives. On one occasion when the sage Māṇḍavya was about to be impaled, the wife of a sage happened to touch the stake as she passed by, where upon Māṇḍavya cursed her that she would become a widow at sunrise. She, however, prevented the sun from rising, and all actions of men being consequently stopped, the gods, sages &c. went to Anasūya, her friend, who, by the force of her penance, made the sun rise without, at the same time, bringing widowhood on her friend. Another legend is also told in which Anasūyā changed Brahma, Viṣṇu and Maheśa into infants, when, at the instigation of their wives, they attempted to test her chastity, but restored them to their former shapes at the importunities of their humbled consorts. She is also said to have caused the three-streamed Ganges to flow down on the earth near the hermitage of her husband for the ablutions of sages; see R. 13. 51. In the Rāmāyaṇa she is represented as having been very kind and attentive to Sītā whom she favoured with sound motherly advice on the virtues of chastity, and at the time of her departure gave her an unguent (See R. 12. 27, 14. 14) which was to keep her beautiful for ever and to guard her person from the attempts of rapacious beasts, demons &c. She was the mother of the irascible sage Durvasas].

anasūyu a. = anasūya; idaṃ tu te guhyatamaṃ pravakṣyāmyanasūyave Bg. 9. 1.

anastha --sthika [na. ba.] Boneless. --sthaḥ
     (1) A boneless limb or member.
     (2) Without parts, epithet of pradhāna of the Sāṅkhyas or īśvaramāyā.

anahan n. [na ahaḥ apraśastamahaḥ] A bad or unlucky day.

anā ind. Ved. Thus, hereby, indeed.

anākāra a. Formless, shapeless, epithet of the Supreme Being.

anākālaḥ [na. ta. nipātaḥ]
     (1) Inopportune time.
     (2) [āsamyak annādisaṃpannaḥ kālaḥ ākālaḥ na. ta. Tv.] Famine (perhaps an irregular form for annākāla).
     -- Comp.
          --bhṛtaḥ one who, to save himself from starvation in a famine, voluntarily becomes a slave of another.

anākāśa a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Opaque, not transparent.
     (2) Having no transparent atmosphere; differing from it. --śaḥ --śaṃ Not an atmosphere, one undeserving of its name.

anākula a. 1 Not perplexed or confused, calm, collected, self-possessed.
     (2) Regular, consistent.

anākṛta a. Not prevented (anivārita); unreclaimed.

anākrāṃta a. Unassailed. --tā [ākramitumayogyā sarvataḥ kaṃṭakāvṛtatvāt, na. ta.] Prickly nightshade, Solanum Jacquini (kaṃṭakārivṛkṣa).

anākṣit a. Ved. Not staying.

anāga a. [na ā samyag gacchati svargaṃ anena nāgaḥ adharmaḥ; na. ba. Tv.] Sinless; Rv. 10. 12. 9 (anāgān = apāpān). --gā N. of a river.

anāgata a. [na āgataḥ, na. ta.]
     (1) Not come or arrived; tāvadbhayasya bhetavyaṃ yāvadbhayamanāgataṃ H. 1. 57.
     (2) Not got or obtained; vardhiṣṇumāśrayamanāgatamabhyupaiti Śi. 5. 14; so -ārtava.
     (3) Future, to come; see compounds below.
     (4) Not learnt or attained, unknown. --taṃ The future time, future; -taṃ yaḥ kurute sa śobhate Pt. 3. 164 he shines (thrives, prospers) who provides for the future; anāgatavatīṃ ciṃtāmasaṃbhāvyāṃ karoti yaḥ Pt. 5. 71.
     -- Comp.
          --avekṣaṇaṃ looking to the future, provident thought, foresight.
          --ābādhaḥ [anāgataḥ ābādhaḥ duḥkhaṃ] future (physical) trouble or calamities, illness &c. affecting the body in times to come; -pratiṣedhanīyaṃ N. of chapter 24 of the cikitsitasthāna in Suśruta.
          --ārtavā [strīpuṣpavikāsanaṃ ārtavaṃ, na āgatamārtavaṃyasyāḥ] a maiden who has not yet arrived at puberty.
          --vidhātṛ m. [anāgataṃ uddiśya vidadhāti] one who provides for the future, provident, prudent (used as the name of a fish in Pt. 1. 318; H. 4. 5); anāgatavidhātā ca pratyutpannamatistathā . dvāvetau sukhamedhete yadbhaviṣyo vinaśyati .. (where Dr. Peterson translates the three names by 'Mr. Provider-against-afuture-evil', 'Mr. Cool-head,' and 'Mr. what-will-be-will-be').

anāgatiḥ f. Non-arrival, non-attainment, non-access.

anāgama a.
     (1) Not come, not present.
     (2) [na. ba.] (In law) Without the title-deed or document of possession (such as purchase deed &c.), anything possessed from time immemorial and without any documentary proof; -upabhogaḥ enjoyment of property without such a deed. --maḥ
     (1) Non-arrival.
     (2) Non-attainment.

anāgamya a. Unapproachable.

anāgāmin a.
     (1) Not coming, not arriving.
     (2) Not future, not likely to return. --m. An epithet of the third among the 4 Buddhist orders.

anāgāmuka a. Not likely to return.

anāgaṃdhita a. Not smelt; (fig.) not touched or affected; sarvadoṣānāgaṃdhitaṃ prativacanamāha Śaṅkara.

anāgas a.
     (1) Innocent, blameless; ārtatrāṇāya vaḥ śastraṃ na prahartumanāgasi S. 1. 11.
     (2) Conferring bliss or happiness.

anācāra a. Devoid of customary observances or duties, improper in behaviour, unprincipled, regardless of custom, law or propriety &c.; also anācārin in this sense. --raḥ, -anācaraṇaṃ Absence of due observances or customary duties, improper conduct, departure from established usage or principle; anācāra is of two kinds vihitasya ananuṣṭhānaṃ niṣiddhasya cānuṣṭhānam.

anājñāta a.
     (1) Unknown, not properly known.
     (2) Surpassing all that has yet been known.

anātapa a. Free from or devoid of heat or the blaze of the sun, not exposed to heat, cool, shady; vāṃchandeśamanātapaṃ vidhivaśāttālasya mūlaṃ gataḥ Bh. 2. 90. --paḥ Coolness, shade.

anātura a.
     (1) Not eager, indifferent; -rotkaṃṭhitayoḥ v. l. for anādara M. 3. 15.
     (2) Not fatigued, unwearied; bheje dharmamanāturaḥ R. 1. 21.
     (3) Not ill or diseased, well, healthy, in good health; anāturaḥ saptarātramavakīrṇivrataṃ caret Ms. 2. 187; 4. 144.

anātman a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Destitute of spirit or mind.
     (2) Not spiritual, corporeal.
     (3) One who has not restrained his self; anātmanastu śatrutve vartetātmaiva śatruvat Bg. 6. 6. --m. [apraśasto bhinno vā ātmā na. ta.] Not self, another, something different from ātman (spirit or soul) i. e. the perishable body; aprāptaḥ prāpyate yoyamatyaṃtaṃ tyajyate 'thavā . jānīyāttamanātmānaṃ buddhyaṃtaṃ vapurādikam .. anātmanyātmabuddhiryā sā'vidyā parikīrtitā ..
     -- Comp.
          --jña, vedin a. 1. devoid of spiritual knowledge or true wisdom. 2. not knowing oneself, foolish, silly; mā tāvadanātmajñe S. 6; kathaṃ kāryavinimayena vyavaharati mayi -jñaḥ M. 1; sphuṭamāpadāṃ padamanātmaveditā Śi. 15. 22.
          --pratyavekṣā reflection that there is no spirit or soul (with Buddhists).
          --saṃpanna a. foolish, destitute of qualities (of the soul), not selfpossessed; na tvevānātmasaṃpannād vṛttimīheta paṃḍitaḥ Pt. 1. 49.

anātmaka a. [nāsti ātmā sthiro yatra] Unreal, transitory, of an unenduring character, an epithet (with Buddhists) for the world.

anātmanīna a. Not adapted to, or for the benefit of, self; disinterested.

anātmavat a. [ātmā vaśyatvena nāstyasya] Not self-possessed; having no control over the senses; anātmavaṃtaḥ paśuvat bhuṃjate ye'pramāṇataḥ Suśr.

anātmya a. [ātmanaḥ idaṃ ātmyaṃ śarīraṃ na. ba.] Impersonal, incorporeal (aśarīra). --tmyaṃ Want of affection for one's own family.

anātyaṃtika a.
     (1) Not constant or perpetual, not final.
     (2) Intermittent, recurrent.

anātha a. [na. ba.] Helpless, poor, forlorn, parentless, orphan (as a child); widowed (as a wife); having no master or natural protector, without a protector in general; nāthavaṃtastvayā lokāstvamanāthā vipatsyase U. 1. 43; R. 12. 12. --thaṃ Ved. Helplessness.
     -- Comp.
          --piṃḍadaḥ, -piṃḍikaḥ 'giver of food to the poor,' N. of a merchant in whose garden Buddha Gautama used to instruct his pupils.
          --sabhā a poor-house.

anādara a. [na. ba.] Showing no respect, indifferent, calm, regardless; M. 3. 15. --raḥ [na. ta.]
     (1) Disregard, disrespect, disdain, contempt; ṣaṣṭhī cānādare P. II. 3. 38, manyakarmaṇi anādare vibhāṣā' prāṇiṣu 17.
     (2) Ease, facility (one of the senses of ādara being 'effort or care', see the word); -khaṃḍitaśaṃkaraśarāsanaḥ U. 1 (perhaps also 'without any respect for the bow of the great god'); anādaropāttadhṛtaikasāyakaṃ Ki. 14. 36.

anādaraṇam Disrespectful conduct, neglect.

anādarin a. Disrespectful, irreverent.

anādi a. [ādiḥ kāraṇaṃ pūrvakālo vā nāsti yasya saḥ] Having no beginning, eternal, existing from eternity, epithet of parameśvara; jagadādiranādistvaṃ Ku. 2. 9; anādirādirgoviṃdaḥ sarvakāraṇakāraṇaṃ; also of hiraṇyagarbha.
     -- Comp.
          --anaṃta, aṃta a. without beginning and end; eternal. (
          --taḥ) N. of Śiva.
          --nidhana a. having neither beginning nor end, eternal.
          --madhyāṃta a. having no beginning, middle or end; eternal.

anāditā --tvam State of having no beginning.

anādimat a. Not produced or effected, having no beginning.

anādīnava a. Faultless; yadvāsudevenādīnamanādīnavamīritaṃ Śi. 2. 22.

anādṛta a.
     (1) Disrespected, despised; Ms. 2. 234; -satkāra not accepting the hospitality.
     (2) Not careful, regardless of, indifferent to; anādṛtasyāmarasāyakeṣvapi Ki. 14. 10. --taṃ Disrespect, contempt.

anādeya a. Not fit to be taken, unacceptable; inadmissible; anādeyasya cādānādādeyasya ca varjanāt Ms. 8. 171.

anādeśaḥ Absence of direction or command.
     -- Comp.
          --kara a. doing what is not commanded; or (an-ādeśakara) not doing what is ordered.

anādya a.
     (1) = anādi q. v.
     (2) Not eatable; what ought not to be eaten.

anādhāra a. Without support, an epithet applicable, according to the Naiyayikas, to eternal objects only (such as sky), or to Brahma according to the Vedāntins.

anādhi a.
     (1) Without mental pain or anxiety; R. 9. 54.

anādhṛṣ a. Ved. Not checking or not being checked.

anādhṛṣṭa --ṣya a.
     (1) Invincible, unchecked, irresistible.
     (2) Perfect, unimpaired.

anānukṛtya a. Ved. Inimitable, unparalleled.

anānuda a. Ved. [anu dadāti; dāka na. ta., pṛ. dīrghaḥ] Unsurpassed in giving (atulyadātṛ).

     (1) Separation of the different members of compounds by the intervention of others.
     (2) Not coming in regular order.

anānubhūtiḥ f. Ved. Neglect, absence of experience or observation, inattention. --(pl.) Neglectful people.

anāpad f. Absence of calamity or misfortune; Ms. 4. 2.

anāpi a. āpyate-āp karmaṇi in āpiḥ āpto baṃdhuśca, na. ba. Tv.] Without friends or kindreds.

anāpta a.
     (1) Not obtained.
     (2) Not reaching or attaining, unsuccessful in the attempt to get.
     (3) Unfit, not apt, unskilful; yugyasthāḥ prājake'nāpte sarve daṃḍyāḥ śataṃ śataṃ Ms. 8. 294. --ptaḥ A stranger.

anāptiḥ f. Non-attainment.

anāpta a. Not getting &c.; anāpturenasāṃ Śi. 16. 38 not touched by sin.

anābhayin a. Ved. [ābibheti ābhī-uṇā-ini, ābhayin na. ta.] Not at all afraid, fearless, undaunted; anābhayinnarimā te Rv. 8. 2. 1.

anābhū a. Ved. [ābhimukhyena bhavatītyābhūḥ stotā na. ta.] Not praising or worshipping, irreligious (astotṛ); not coming in front.

anāman a.
     (1) Nameless.
     (2) Infamous. --m.
     (1) 'The nameless' month, an intercalary month.
     (2) The ringfinger; see anāmikā below. --n. [ananamanaḥ, anaṃ jīvanaṃ amayati rujati, am-kanin Tv.] Piles (arśoroga).

anāmaka a. [na. ba. svārthe kan] Nameless, infamous. --kaḥ-kaṃ = anāman above.

anāmā, anāmikā [nāsti nāma anyāṃgulivat yasyāḥ, svārthe kan] The ring-finger; so called because it has no name like the other fingers; cf. Tv. tayā hi śivena brahmaśiraśchinnaṃ, tena tasyā apavitrajātīyatā; ataeva tasyāḥ pavitrīkaraṇārthaṃ yajñādau pavitranāmakakuśadhāraṇaṃ tatra kriyate . anāmikādhṛtā darbhā hyekānāmikayāpi vā . dvābhyāmanāmikābhyāṃtu dhārye darbhapavitrake ..; also purā kavīnāṃgaṇanāprasaṃge kaniṣṭhikādhiṣṭhitakālidāsā . adyāpi tattulyakaverabhāvādanāmikā sārthavatī babhūva ... Subhaṣ.

anāmaya a. [nāsti āmayaḥ rogo yasya] Free from disease, healthy, sound; janmabaṃdhavinirmuktāḥ padaṃ gacchaṃtyanāmayaṃ Bg. 2. 51 where there is no unhappiness. --yaḥ --yaṃ Good or sound health; health, well-being, welfare; sa bhavaṃtamanāmayapraśnapūrvakamāha S. 5; mahāśvetā kādaṃbarīmanāmayaṃ papraccha K. 192 inquired about her health; apyanāmayaṃ rājñaḥ Mv. 1 how does the king do? brāhmaṇaṃ kuśalaṃ pṛcchetkṣātrabaṃdhumanāmayaṃ . vaiśyaṃ kṣemaṃ samāgamya śūdramārogyameva ca Ms. 2. 127. --yaḥ [nāsti bhayaṃ yasmāt] N. of Viṣṇu (or Śiva according to some); puṇyakīrtiranāmayaḥ; viṣṇurhi bāhyābhyaṃtarapīḍāṃ nivārayati tasmādanāmayaḥ.

anāmayat a. Ved. Not causing pain or hurt, not hurting. --n. Health (?)

anāmayitnu a.
     (1) Not injuring or paining; hastābhyāmanāmayitnubhyāṃ Rv. 10. 137. 7.
     (2) Salubrious, curative.

anāmiṣa a. Without flesh or any bait; bootless, profitless.

anāmṛṇa a. [āmṛṇāti hinasti āmṛṇka. na. ba.] Having no injurer or an enemy that can injure (hiṃsakarahita).

anāmṛta a. Immortal.

anāyaka a. Without a leader, disorderly.

anāyata a.
     (1) Unrestrained, unchecked.
     (2) Not propped or supported.
     (3) Not long, of short duration; anāyatasvabhāvabhaṃgurāṇi sukhāni K. 175.
     (4) Continuous, close, unseparated.

anāyatta a. Not dependent; -tto roṣasya K. 45 not swayed by; uncontrolled, independent; etāvajjanmasāphalyaṃ yadanāyattavṛttitā H. 2. 22 freedom, independent livelihood, independence of life.

anāyana a. [na āyanaṃ cālanaṃ yatra] Invariable (ekāṃta).

anāyāsa a. Not troublesome or difficult, easy; mamāpyekasmin -se karmaṇi tvayā sahāyena bhavitavyaṃ S. 2. --saḥ
     (1) Facility, ease, absence of difficulty or exertion; śarīraṃ pīḍyate yena śubhenāpyaśubhena vā . atyaṃtaṃ tanna kurvīta anāyāsaḥ sa ucyate ..
     (2) Idleness, neglect; -sena easily, without difficulty, readily.
     -- Comp.
          --kṛta a. done easily or readily. (
          --taṃ) an infusion prepared without effort or exertion (prepared extemporaneously) Ak. See phāṃṭa.

anāyuṣya a. [āyuṣe na hitaṃ na. ta.] Not giving long life, fatal to long life (such as excessive food, sexual union &c.); anārogyamanāyuṣyamasvargyaṃ cātibhojanaṃ Ms. 2. 57, 4. 134.

anārata a.
     (1) Not ceasing or stopping, continuous, uninterrupted.
     (2) Eternal. --taṃ
     (1) Continuity.
     (2) Absolute non-entity (atyaṃtābhāva). --adv. Continuously, always; eternally; anārataṃ tena padeṣu laṃbhitāḥ Ki. 1. 15, 40.

anāraṃbhaḥ Non-commencement, not undertaking; vikāraṃ khalu paramārthato'jñātvā -bhaḥ pratīkārasya S. 3; -bho hi kāryāṇāṃ prathamaṃ buddhilakṣaṇam.

anārabhya a. Unfit to be commenced or undertaken --ind. Without commencing; without reference to any particular thing; e. g. -vādaḥ detached remark (upon sacrifices &c); kiṃcitkarmārabhya udyate ucyate ityārabhyavādaḥ na ārabhyavādaḥ.
     -- Comp.
          --adhīta a. [na ārabhya kiṃcidadhītaḥ] studied or taught or read without reference to any particular subject (not as part of a regular or authoritative work); learnt as a detached subject; yeṣāṃ maṃtrāṇāṃ karmaviśeṣe viniyogo noktaḥ teṣāṃ maṃtrāṇāṃ anārabhyādhītatvāt brahmayajñe eva viniyoga iti mīmāṃsā.

anāraṃbhaṇa a. Having no support (for anālaṃbana); also written anāraṃbaṇa.

anārogya a. [nāsti ārogyaṃ yasmāt na. ba.] Unwholesome, not conducive to good health, fatal to health; anāyuṣyamanārogyamasvargyaṃ cātibhojanaṃ Ms. 2. 57. --gyaṃ Sickness, indisposition; -kara unhealthy, unwholesome.

anārjava a. Crooked; dishonest. --vaṃ
     (1) Crookedness (moral also), fraud, insincerity Śi. 8. 11.
     (2) [nāsti ārjavaṃ sāralyaṃ svācchaṃdyaṃ vā yasmin] Disease.

anārtava a. ( f.) Unseasonable, inopportune, premature (as a flower blossoming out of season). --vā A girl who has not attained to puberty (the menstruation period).

anārya a. Not respectable(not deserving to be styled ārya), not polite or decent; vulgar; not belonging to an Ārya, unworthy, vile, base, mean, wretched; anāryānāryaliṃginaḥ Ms. 9. 260; anāryāyāṃ samutpanno brāhmaṇāt 10. 66; H. 4. 25; kīṭakā nāma deśo'nāryanivāsaḥ Nir. void of Āryas; śakuṃtalāyāmanāryamācaritaṃ tena rājñā S. 4 the king has behaved basely or unworthily towards Śakuntalā; kadācidasminnapyanāryo'nāryamācariṣyati Ve. 4. --ryaḥ
     (1) One who is not an Ārya.
     (2) A country not inhabited by the Āryas.
     (3) A Śūdra.
     (4) A Mlechchha.
     (5) An ignoble person.
     -- Comp.
          --karmin a. doing work unbecoming an Ārya or becoming only a non-Ārya.
          --ja a. of vile or base origin. (--jaṃ) [anāryadeśe jātaṃ] agallochum (being produced in the country of the Mlechchhas &c.).
          --juṣṭa a. discarded by the good, not practised or observed by the Āryas or respectable people.
          --tiktaḥ [anāryāpriyaḥ tiktaḥ śāka. ta] N. of the plant Gentiana Cherayta Rox. (Mar. kirāīta).

anāryakam [anārye deśe bhavaṃ anāryakaṃ] Agallochum or aloe wood.

anārṣa a.
     (1) Not belonging to the Ṛṣis, not Vedic; not belonging to the text of a Vedic hymn (as iti used in the Padapāṭha with certain words not followed in the Śamhitā by iti); saṃbuddhau śākalyasyetau anārṣe P. I. 1. 16 (= avaidike Sk.).
     (2) Not added to a Ṛṣi's name (as an affix); P. IV. 1. 78.

anārṣeya = anārṣa.

anālaṃba a. Without support or stay; kathaṃkāramanālaṃbā kīrtirdyāmadhirohati Śi. 2. 52. --baḥ Want of support; despondency. --bī Śiva's lute.

anālaṃbu(bhu)kā A woman during menstruation (rajasvalā).

anālāpa a. [na. ba.] Reserved, taciturn. --paḥ Reserve, taciturnity.

anālocita a. Unseen, unheeded, unconsidered, unexpected, not well considered or examined, rash.

anāvayā a. Ved. Not yielding or desisting.

anāvartiḥ f. Non-return (to birth), final emancipation.

anāvartin a. Not recurring or returning; -rtī kālo vrajati sa vṛthā tanna gaṇitaṃ Bh. 3. 115.

anāviddha a.
     (1) Not pierced or wounded; unperforated; -ddhaṃ ratnaṃ S. 2. 10.
     (2) Unhurt, uninjured.

anāvila a.
     (1) Not turbid or muddy, pure, clear.
     (2) Not marshy, wholesome, salubrious, as a country Ms. 7. 69 (rogopasargādyairanākula).

anāvṛtta a. Not returning, not repeated, being for the first time; malamāsepyanāvṛttāṃ tīrthayātrāṃ vivarjayet.

anāvṛttiḥ f.
     (1) Non-return, absence of repetition or recurrence.
     (2) Nonreturn (to birth), final emancipation.

anāvṛṣṭiḥ f. Drought, one of the kinds of īti q. v.

anāvraskaḥ Uninjured condition.

anāśa a. [na. ba. nāsti āśā yasya]
     (1) Hopeless, despondent.
     (2) [nāsti nāśo yasya] Imperishable, living, undestroyed.

anāśaka a. [na ā samyak yathecchaṃ āśaḥ aśanaṃ yasya, na nāśo yasya vā, na. ba. kap] Devoid of full enjoyment or indestructible, not hurtful. --kaṃ Fast, abstaining from eating even to death; yajñena dānena tapasā'nāśakenaitameva viditvā munirbhavati Bṛ. Ār. Up; Y. 3. 154.

anāśakāyanam [na naśyati anāśakaḥ ātmā tasyāyanaṃ prāptyupāyaḥ] The state of brahmacarya, unmarried or student's life, devoted to contemplation and knowledge of the soul; atha yadanāśakāyanamityācakṣate brahmacaryameva tat . eṣa hyātmā na naśyati yaṃ brahmacaryeṇānuviṃdate Ch. Up.; a course of fasting as a penance (?).

anāśasta a. Not praised.

anāśin a. [na naśyati or na karmaphalamaśrute; na. ta.] Imperishable, indestructible, as the Soul or Supreme Being; anāśino'prameyasya Mb. (īśvarasya karmaphalabhoktṛtvābhāvāt).

anāśu a. [naś uṇ, na. ta.]
     (1) Imperishable, indestructible.
     (2) [aś uṇ, na. ta.] Not pervading or occupying.
     (3) [na-āśu] Not quick, slow.

anāśramin m. One who does not belong to, or follow, any of the 4 orders of life (gṛhasthādyāśramaśūnya); anāśramī na tiṣṭhettu kṣaṇamekamapi dvijaḥ; anāśrama-me-vāsaḥ not dwelling in any Asrama.

anāśraya a. Defenceless, unprotected, isolated. --yaḥ Self-dependence, isolation, absence of support.

anāśrava a. Not listening to, obstinate, turning a deaf ear to; tathānuśiṣṭāpi anāśravaivāsīt Dk. 57; K. 350; bhiṣajāmanāśravaḥ R. 19. 49.

anāśrita a. Not connected with, or dependent on, independent, detached; non-inherent.

anāśvas a. [aś bhojane kvasu nipātaḥ na. ta. P. III. 2. 109] Not having eaten or enjoyed, fasting; dhṛtajayadhṛteranāśuṣaḥ Ki. 12. 2; Śi. 14. 49.

anās a. [āsyate nirāsyate ṣṭhīvanamanena iti āḥ mukhaṃ, tannāsti sādhanatvena asya] Without mouth or face; without the power of speech (āsyavyāpāraśabdarahita).

anāsādita a. Not obtained, not found or met with; not encountered or attacked; not occurred or having happened, non-existent.
     -- Comp.
          --vigraha a. unused to war, having had no occasion to fight.

     (1) Indifference, unconcern, want of consideration; anāsthā bāhyavastuṣu Ku. 6. 63; piṃḍeṣvanāsthā khalu bhautikeṣu R. 2. 57; strī pumānityanāsthaiṣā vṛttaṃ hi mahitaṃ satāṃ Ku. 6. 12 a male or female is no consideration &c.; Ki. 4. 34.
     (2) Want of faith or confidence, want of devotedness, disrespect; atyadbhutairmama hṛtasya tathāpyanāsthā Mv. 2. 39 diffidence. --a. (stha) Indifferent.

anāsthāna a.
     (1) Having no fixed seat or site.
     (2) Having or yielding no basis or fulcrum, unfit for a fixed seat (as water); Rv. 1. 116. 5.

anāsvāda a. Without taste, insipid. --daḥ Insipidity.

anāsvādita a. Untasted; S. 2. 10.

anāsrāva a. Without injury or hurt (kleśarahita).

anāhata a.
     (1) Unbeaten, unwounded, intact.
     (2) [āhataṃ chedo bhogo vā tannāsti yasya] New and unbleached (as cloth) (Mar. koreṃ).
     (3) Not produced by beating (as sound).
     (4) Not multiplied. --taṃ --taḥ The 4th of the mystical Chakras in the body, (taṃtraśāstre prasiddhaṃ hṛdayasthitaṃ suṣumṇāmadhyasthaṃ dvādaśadalapadmaṃ); śabdo brahmamayaḥ śabdo'nāhato yatra dṛśyate . anāhatākhyaṃ tat padmaṃ munibhiḥ parikīrtitam ..

anāhāra a. Abstaining from food, fasting. --raḥ
     (1) Abstinence from food, fasting; anāhāreṇātmānaṃ vyāpādayiṣyāmi H. 1.
     (2) Non-production.
     (3) Non-seizure.

anāharin a. Fasting.

anāhārya a.
     (1) Not artificial, natural, not producible.
     (2) Not eatable.

anāhutiḥ f. Not sacrificing; a sacrifice not worthy of that name; also an improper oblation.

anāhūta a. Not called, uninvited.
     -- Comp.
          --upajalpin an uncalledfor speaker or boaster.
          --upaviṣṭa a. seated as an uninvited guest.

aniketa a. Houseless, vagrant; having no fixed abode (as a recluse); Ms. 6. 25, 43.

anikṣuḥ [na ikṣuḥ sādṛśye aprāśastye vā nañ] Not (true) sugarcane, a sort of long grass or reed producing coarse sugar; Saccharum Spontaneum.

anigīrṇa a. 1. Not swallowed.
     (2) (In Rhet.) Not hidden or concealed, present, not to be supplied (anapahnutabheda); e. g. in aśvaḥ śveto dhāvati, the śvetatva of the horse is not nigīrṇa or hidden.

anigraha a. Unrestrained, invincible, unconquerable. --haḥ
     (1) Nonrestraint.
     (2) Non-refutation.
     (3) Not admitting one's defeat in argument; -sthānaṃ occasion of non-refutation.

aniṃgya a. Not divisible, a word not divisible.

aniccha, --cchaka, --cchu, --cchuka, --cchat a. Not desirous, unwilling, averse, reluctant; anicchaṃtamapi māṃ against my will.

anicchā Unwillingness, indifference, reluctance.

anita a. [an-ita] Not gone with, unattended, destitute of; -bhā having no splendour; vanitayā'nitayā rajanīvadhūḥ R. 9. 38; Śi. 6. 60.

anitya a.
     (1) Not eternal or everlasting, transient, non-eternal, perishable (naśvara) (opp. nitya); gaṃdhavatī pṛthvī sā dvividhā nityā'nityā ca T. S. 9 (anityā = kāryarūpā); See nitya; yadi nityamanityena nirmalaṃ malavāhinā . yaśaḥ kāyena labhyeta tanna labdhaṃ bhavennu kiṃ .. H. 1. 48; Ms. 6. 77; dharmo'nityaḥ sukhaduḥkhepyanitye jīvo'nityo heturasyāpyanityaḥ Mb.
     (2) Occasional, temporary, casual; not peremptory or obligatory as a rule &c., special.
     (3) Unusual, extraordinary; varṇe cānitye P. V. 4. 30 (lohitakaḥ kopena anyathā tu śvetavarṇa iti bhāvaḥ); ānāyyo'nitye III. 1. 127 (sa hi gārhapatyādānīyate'nityaśca satatamaprajvalanāt Sk.) See VI. 1. 147.
     (4) Unsteady, fickle, not permanent; anityaṃ yauvanaṃ rūpaṃ H. 4. 68; -hṛdayā hitāḥ Ram.
     (5) Uncertain, doubtful; anityo vijayo yasmāddṛśyate yudhyamānayoḥ Ms. 7. 199; vijayasya hyanityatvāt Pt. 3. 22. --tyaṃ adv. Occasionally, not permanently, incidentally, casually; anityaṃ hi sthito yasmāt Ms. 3. 102.
     -- Comp.
          --karmankriyā an occasional act, such as a sacrifice for a special purpose, a voluntary and occasionalact.
          --dattaḥ, dattakaḥ, -datrimaḥ a son given by his parents to another temporarily (for temporary or preliminary adoption).
          --pratyavekṣā (with Buddhists) the consciousness that every thing is perishable and is passing away.
          --bhāvaḥ transitoriness, transient state, limited nature or existence; so anityatā-tvaṃ frailty, instability.
          --samaḥ a sophism or fallacious reasoning which generalizes what is exceptional (as anityatvaṃ). --samāsaḥ a compound which it is not obligatory to form in every case (the sense of which may be equally expressed by resolving it into its constituent members.).

anidra a. Sleepless, awake; (fig.) vigilant, watchful, --drā sleeplessness, vigilance.

anidhṛṣṭa a. Unchecked, unsubdued.

anina a. Ved. Having no master or lord (ina).

aniṃdra a. [na. ba.] Dispensing with or disregarding Indra or his worship; (iṃdropāsanāśūnya); māmaniṃdrāḥ kṛṇavannanukthāḥ Rv. 5. 2. 3.

     (1) Reason (that which is not the senses).
     (2) Not an organ of sense, the mind.

anipadyamāna a. Not falling down (to sleep), untiring.

anipātaḥ Not a fall, continuance of life.

anibaddha a. Not bound, incoherent; -pralāpin prattling (talking incoherently).

anibādha a. Unobstructed; Rv. 3. 1. 11. --dhaḥ Liberty.

anibhṛta a.
     (1) Not private or reserved, public, open, not hidden.
     (2) Immodest, bold.
     (3) Unsteady, not firm, tremulous; -kareṣvākṣipatsu priyeṣu Me. 68; -velāvīcibāhuḥ Ki. 3. 60, 13. 66; asau saṃdhyāśaṃkhadhvaniranibhṛtaḥ khe vicarati Māl. 2. 12 not hidden, loud; Śi. 10. 66. See nibhṛta also.

anibhṛṣṭa a. [ni-bhraṃś-kta, nipātaḥ na-ta.] Unobstructed, unimpaired, unabated; Rv. 2. 25. 4, 10. 116. 6.

anibhya a. Not wealthy (ibhya).

animakaḥ [an-jīvane śabde ca, bhāve bāhu- iman ityanimaḥjīvanaṃ, tena kāyati prakāśate, kai-ka. Tv.]
     (1) A frog (tasya maraṇepi punarujjīvanāt).
     (2) A cuckoo.
     (3) A bee (ubhayorapi tayoḥ madhuraśabdena prakāśamānatvāt).
     (4) The filament of a lotus, padmakeśara.
     (5) N. of the tree madhūka Med.

animāna a. Unbounded, immense (aparicchinna); -no dhūmaketuḥ Rv. 1. 27. 11.

animitta a. Causeless, groundless; casual, incidental; ālakṣyadaṃtamukulānanimittahāsaiḥ S. 7. 17; -ttaṃ mitraṃ disinterested, Dk. 25; -utkaṃṭhā M. 3. 9. --ttaṃ
     (1) Absence of an adequate cause or occasion, causelessness, groundlessness.
     (2) A bad omen, illomen; cārudattasyaiva darśanamanimittaṃ pramārjayiṣyati Mk. 6; mamānimittāni hi khedayaṃti 9. 10; śamanārthaṃ animittasya Ve. 2, 3. --adv., ---taḥ Groundlessly, causelessly, without any adequate cause; animittamiṃduvadane kimatrabhavataḥ parāṅmukhī bhavasi M. 1. 18; Ms. 4. 144.
     -- Comp.
          --nirākriyā averting ill omens.
          --liṃganāśaḥ a kind of ophthalmic disease ending in total darkness.

animiṣaṃ --ṣā --meṣam ind. Ved. Without winking, vigilantly; incessantly.

animi(me)ṣa a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Not winking, steadfastly or intently fixed; -locanaṃ suciramālokya K. 102; -pakṣmaṇā 131; śataistamakṣṇāmanimeṣavṛttibhiḥ R. 3. 43; -darśanaramaṇīyaiḥ K. 50 fish and twinkleless glances.
     (2) Vigilant, watchful.
     (3) Open (as eyes, flowers). --ṣaḥ
     (1) A god (for the eyes of gods do not twinkle); Śi. 5. 57.
     (2) A fish.
     (3) Viṣṇu.
     (4) N. of Mahakala.
     -- Comp.
          --dṛṣṭi, -nayana, -locana a. looking steadfastly or with a fixed gaze, gazing intently.

animiṣīya a. Relating to the gods.

aniyata a.
     (1) Uncontrolled, unrestricted.
     (2) Indefinite, uncertain, not fixed; irregular (forms also); -velaṃ āhāro'śyate S. 2 at irregular hours.
     (3) Causeless, casual, incidental, occasional; -ruditasmitaṃ (vadanakamalakaṃ) U. 4. 4; Mal. 10. 2.
     -- Comp.
          --aṃkaḥ an indeterminate digit (in Math.).
          --ātman a. not self-possessed, whose soul is not properly controlled.
          --puṃskā a woman loose in conduct, unchaste.
          --vṛtti a. 1. having no regular or fixed employment or application (as a word). 2. having no regular income.

aniyaṃtraṇa a. Unrestrained, uncontrolled, free; -anuyogo nāma tapasvijanaḥ S. 1.

     (1) Absence of rule, control, regulation or fixed order; no settled rule or direction; paṃcamaṃ laghu sarvatra saptamaṃ dvicaturthayoḥ . ṣaṣṭhe pāde guru jñeyaṃ śeṣeṣvaniyamo mataḥ .. Ch. M.
     (2) Irregularity, uncertainty, indefiniteness, vagueness, doubt.
     (3) Improper conduct. --a., aniyamita a. Irregular.

aniyuktaḥ An assessor at a court who has not been formally appointed and who is not entitled to vote.

anira a. [na īrayituṃ śakyate, īr-ka pṛ- thasvaḥ] That cannot be propelled or driven along; apa tyā asthuranirā Rv. 8. 48. 11 (prerayitumaśakya). --rā
     (1) Want of food; utter destitution (annarahitadāridryaṃ); yuyutamasmadanirāmamīvāṃ Rv. 7. 71. 2.
     (2) [nāsti irā annaṃ yasyāḥ paṃ. ba.] A calamity such as ativṛṣṭi, anāvṛṣṭi (= īti).

anirākaraṇam Not obstructing or warding off.

anirukta a.
     (1) Not articulated or clearly spoken.
     (2) Not clearly stated or explained, vague, not plain or well-defined; -ktaprātaḥsavanaḥ prathamaḥ Katy.; etasminnadṛśye'nātmye'nirukte Ait. Br.
     -- Comp.
          --gānaṃ indistinct singing or humming, a particular mode of chanting the sāmaveda.

aniruddha a. Unobstructed, free, uncontrolled, self-willed, unruly, ungovernable. --ddhaḥ
     (1) A spy, secret emissary.
     (2) N. of a son of Pradyumna. [Aniruddha was the son of Kāma and grandson of Kṛṣṇa. Usha, the daughter of a demon named Bāṇa, fell in love with him and had him brought by magic influence to her apartments in her father's city of Śoṇitapura. Bāṇa sent some guards to seize him, but the brave youth slew his assailants with only an iron club. At last, however, he was secured by means of magic powers. On discovering where Aniruddha had been carried, Kṛṣṇa, Balarāma and Kāma went to rescue him and a great battle was fought. Bāṇa, though aided by Śiva and Skanda, was vanquished, but his life was spared at the intercession of Śiva, and Aniruddha was carried home to Dvārakā with Uṣā as his wife. He had also another wife Rochana, grand-daughter of king Rukmin of Vidarbha, who bore him a son named Vajra.].
     (3) Also N. of Viṣṇu; and of Śiva; of an Arhat, a contemporary of Buddha. --ddhaṃ A cord or rope (for fastening cattle).
     -- Comp.
          --pathaṃ [na niruddhaḥ paṃthā yatra ba.] 1. unobstructed path. --2. the sky, atmosphere (tatra kasyāpi gatirodhanābhāvāt). --bhāvinī Aniruddha's wife Uṣā.

anirṇayaḥ Uncertainty, indecision.

anirdaśa, anirdaśāha a. [na nirgatāni daśāhāni yasya] Within the 10 days of impurity caused either by childbirth or death; vigataṃ tu videśasthaṃ śṛṇuyādyo hyanirdaśaṃ Ms. 5. 75; anirdaśāyā goḥ kṣīraṃ 5. 8; 5. 79; 4. 212, 217; not ten days old; anirdaśāhāṃ gāṃ sūtāṃ Ms. 8. 242.

anirdiṣṭa a. Undefined, not specified; kva -kāraṇaṃ gamyate V. 2 without a definite aim.

anirdeśaḥ Absence of positive rule or direction.

anirdeśya a. Undefinable, ineffable, indescribable, inexplicable, incomparable; -sukhaḥ svargaḥ kastaṃ vismārayiṣyati V. 3. 18. --śyaṃ An epithet of the Supreme Being.

anirdhārita a. Not determined or ascertained.

anirmala a. Dirty, foul.

anirvacanīya a.
     (1) Unutterable, indescribable, undefinable, epithet of the Supreme Being.
     (2) Improper to be mentioned. --yaṃ (In Vedānta)
     (1) Māyā or illusion, ignorance.
     (2) The world.
     -- Comp.
          --sarvasvaṃ N. of a work by Śrīharṣa, also called khaṃḍanakhaṃḍakhādya; tatra sarveṣāṃ padārthānāṃ idaṃtayā nirvaktumaśakyatā darśitā.

anirvāṇa a. Unwashed; unbathed; aruṃtudamivālānamanirvāṇasya daṃtinaḥ R. 1. 71.

     (1) Non-completion; nonaccomplishment.
     (2) Inconclusiveness.
     (3) Insufficiency of income, being straitened in means.

anirvida a. Not fatigued or tired; anirvidāyā vidadhe vidhātrā Śi. 3. 34.

anirviṇṇa a. Not depressed or fatigued; an epithet of Viṣṇu.

anirvedaḥ Non-depression, absence of dejection or despondency; self-reliance, plucking up courage; anirvedaḥ śriyo mūlamanirvedaḥ paraṃ sukhaṃ . anirvedo hi satataṃ sarvārtheṣvanuvartate Ram.; anirvedaprāpyāṇi śreyāṃsi V. 4; cf. 'Faint heart never won fair lady'.

anirvṛta a.
     (1) Ill at ease, uneasy, discomposed, unhappy.
     (2) Unaccomplished, unfulfilled (anirvṛtta also in this sense).

anirvṛtiḥ --ttiḥ f.
     (1) Uneasiness, anxiety, disquietude.
     (2) Poverty, destitution; anirvṛtiniśācarī mama gṛhāṃtarālaṃ gatā Udb.

anirveśa a. Destitute of employment, wretched, miserable.

anilaḥ [aniti jīvati anena, an ilac Uṇ. 1. 54]
     (1) Wind; prāṇānāmanilena vṛttirucitā S. 7. 12; sa sakhā dīpa ivānilāhataḥ Ku. 4. 30. (The number of winds is 7: --āvaho nivahaścaiva udvahaḥ saṃvahastathā . vivahaḥ pravahaścaiva parivāhastathaiva ca .. and these are again subdivided into 7 divisions, the total number being 49).
     (2) The god of wind.
     (3) One of the subordinate deities, 49 of whom form the class of winds.
     (4) N. of one of the 8 Vasus, i. e. the fifth.
     (5) The wind in the body, one of the humours; -han, -hṛt, -ghna.
     (6) Rheumatism or any disease referred to disorder of the wind.
     (7) The letter y.
     (8) Symbolical expression for the number 49.
     (9) N. of the lunar asterism svāti. (10) N. of Viṣṇu (tasya prāṇātmanā sarvadehadhāraṇāt tathātvaṃ).
     -- Comp.
          --ayanaṃ way or course of the wind.
          --aśana, -āśin a. [anilamaśrātīti] 1. feeding on the wind, fasting. --2. a serpent.
          --aṃtakaḥ (wind-destroying) N. of a plant (Iṅgudī) or aṃgārapuṣpa. --ātmajaḥ son of the wind, epithet of Bhīma and Hanūmat.
          --āmayaḥ [anilakṛtaḥ āmayaḥ śāka. ta.] 1. flatulence. --2. rheumatism (vātaroga). --ghna, -han, -hṛt a. curing disorders from wind.
          --ghnakaḥ a large tree (bibhītaka) Terminalia Belerica.
          --paryāyaḥ pain and swelling of the eyelids and outer parts of the eye.
          --prakṛti a. of a windy nature. (-tiḥ) N. of the planet Saturn.
          --vyādhiḥ derangement of the bodily (internal) wind.
          --sakhaḥ fire (the friend of wind); so -baṃdhuḥ.

aniloḍita a. Inexperienced.

anirloḍita a. Not well considered; -kāryasya vāgjālaṃ vāgmino vṛthā Śi. 2. 27.

anivartana a.
     (1) Not turning away, firm, steadfast.
     (2) Right, not fit to be abandoned.

anivartin a.
     (1) Brave, not retreating; also an epithet of Viṣṇu and the Almighty God.
     (2) Not returning; yauvanamanivarti yātaṃ tu K. P. 10.

aniviśamāna a. Not sitting down or retiring to rest, ever going, restless; punānā yaṃtyaniviśamānāḥ Rv. 7. 49. 1.

aniveśana a. Ved. Having no place of rest.

aniśa a. Ved.
     (1) Nightless, i. e. uninterrupted, incessant (niśā taddhetukatvenopacārāt ceṣṭavināśaḥ sā nāsti yasya).
     (2) Ever afraid. --śaṃ ind. Incessantly, ceaselessly; aniśamapi makaraketurmanaso rujamāvahannabhimato me S. 3. 4; Bv. 2. 162.

aniśita a. Ved. Not resting or reposing, incessant; -sarga incessantly flowing; Rv. 10. 89. 4.

aniṣiddha, aniṣedhra Ved. a. Unforbidden, unchecked, unopposed.

aniṣkṛta a. Unfinished, not settled.
     -- Comp.
          --enas, -pāpa having the guilt not settled, i. e. unexpiated.

aniṣṭa a.
     (1) Unwished, undesirable; unfavourable, disagreeable, ill (with gen.); dhyāyatyaniṣṭaṃ yatkiṃcitpāṇigrāhasya cetasā Ms. 9. 21 whatever ill she thinks of her husband.
     (2) Evil, forbidden.
     (3) Bad, unlucky, ominous.
     (4) Not honoured with a sacrifice. --ṣṭaṃ An evil, mishap, misfortune, calamity, disadvantage, a crime, offence, wrong, unwelcome thing; -ekabuddhi Māl. 8. 12; bhavatyaniṣṭādapi nāma duḥsahānmanasvinīnāṃ pratipattirīdṛśī Ku. 5. 42; ill-omen; prātareva -darśanaṃ jātaṃ H. 1.
     -- Comp.
          --anubaṃdhin a. followed by or attended with calamities; viṣayopabhogeṣu -dhiṣu yaḥ sukhabuddhimāropayati K. 155.
          --āpattiḥ f.,
          --āpādanaṃ getting what is not desired, an undesired occurrence.
          --āśaṃsin a. (-sūcaka) indicating or boding ill.
          --grahaḥ an evil or malignant planet.
          --duṣṭadhī a. having an evil and corrupt mind.
          --prasaṃgaḥ 1. an undesired occurrence. --2. connection with a wrong object, argument or rule.
          --phalaṃ an evil result.
          --śaṃkā fear of evil.
          --hetuḥ an evil omen.

aniṣṭin a. One who has not sacrificed.

aniṣṭṛta a. Ved. Unhurt.

aniṣpattiḥ f. Non-accomplishment, non-completion.

aniṣpatram ind. [niḥsṛtaṃ patraṃ pakṣo yatra tādṛśaṃ na bhavati] So that the arrow (the feathery portion of it) does not come out on the other side; i. e. not with great force.

anistīrṇa a.
     (1) Not crossed, set aside or got rid of.
     (2) Unanswered, unrefuted (as a charge).
     -- Comp.
          --abhiyogaḥ a defendant who has not cleared himself of a charge (by refuting it).

anīkaḥ --kam [aniti jīvatyanena; anīkan Uṇ. 4. 16-17]
     (1) Army, forces; troop, host; dṛṣṭvā tu pāṃḍavānīkaṃ Bg. 1. 2; padātīṃśca mahīpālaḥ puro'nīkasya yojayet H. 3. 80.
     (2) A collection, group, mass; navāṃbudānīkamuhūrtalāṃchane R. 3. 53.
     (3) Battle, fight, combat.
     (4) A row, line, marching column.
     (5) Front, head; chief; ratheṣu no'nīkeṣvadhiśriyaḥ Rv. 8. 20. 12. (senāmukheṣu); agnirvai devānāmanīkaṃ Śat. Br; agnimanīkaṃ kṛtvā.
     (6) Face, countenance, ibid. (mukhaṃ) (tasya prāṇavāyunissāraṇāt tathātvaṃ); splendour; brilliance; form (tejas); svanīka Rv. 7. 2. 23, 3. 6 (mostly Ved. in these two senses).
     (7) Edge, point.
     -- Comp.
          --sthaḥ 1. a warrior, combatant. --2. a sentinel, (armed) watch. --3. an elephantdriver, or its trainer. --4. a war-drum or trumpet. --5. a signal, mark, sign.

anīkavat a. Ved. forming the face or front rank; occupying the foremost rank.

anīkaśaḥ adv. In rows or columns.

anīkinī [anīkānāṃ saṃghaḥ; anīkaṃ yuddhaṃ prayojanatayā astyasyāḥ iti vā, anīka-ini]
     (1) An army, host, forces.
     (2) Three chamūs or one-tenth of a complete army (akṣauhiṇī); 10935 foot, 6561 horse, 2187 elephants and as many chariots.
     (3) A lotus.

anīca a.
     (1) Not low or vile, decent, respectable.
     (2) Not pronounced with the anudātta accent.
     -- Comp.
          --anuvartin a. not associating with low or vile persons. (--m.) a faithful husband.

anīḍa a. Having no abode(body), incorporeal, epithet of Agni.

anītiḥ f.
     (1) Impropriety, immorality; injustice, wrong act; indiscretion, foolish conduct.
     (2) (na-ītiḥ) Freedom from calamity.
     -- Comp.
          --jña, --vid a. impolite, not discreet, not conversant with policy.

anīla a. Not blue, white &c.; -vājin m. 'white-horsed'; N. of Arjuna; Ki. 14. 26, 42.

anīśa a.
     (1) Having no lord or superior, paramount, supreme, without a controller, uncontrolled; sarvaprabhuranīśastvaṃ R. 10. 20.
     (2) Not a master or lord, having no mastery or control over, not master of (with gen.); powerless; gātrāṇāmanīśo'smi saṃvṛttaḥ S. 2; anīśayā śarīrasya hṛdayaṃ svavaśaṃ mayi nyastaṃ V. 2. 19; Ms. 9. 104.
     (3) Not one's own master, not independent (asvataṃtra); eko hyanīśaḥ sarvatra. --śaḥ N. of Viṣṇu (sarvaniyaṃtā ananyasvāmiko hi saḥ). --śā Helplessness (dīnabhāva); samāne vṛkṣe puruṣo nimagno'nīśayā śocati muhyamānaḥ Muṇḍ.

anīśvara a.
     (1) Having no superior, uncontrolled.
     (2) Unable; śayitā savidhepyanīśvarā saphalīkartumaho manorathān Bv. 2. 182.
     (3) Not relating to God; dhyānenānīśvarān guṇān-dahet Ms. 6. 72.
     (4) Not acknowledging God, atheistical. --raṃ The godless one (with Saṅkhyas), epithet of the world; jagadāhuranīśvaram.
     -- Comp.
          --vādaḥ atheism, not acknowledging God as the Supreme Ruler.
          --vādin m. one who maintains the doctrine of no god or atheism, an atheist.

anīha a. Indifferent, listless. --haḥ N. of a king of Ayodhya. --hā Disregard, apathy, indifference, disinclination; anīhayā Ki. 2. 10 carelessly.

anīhita a. Undesired, disagreeable, unpleasant. --taṃ Displeasure.

anu ind. (Either used with nouns to form adverbial compounds, or as a prefix to verbs and verbal derivatives, or as a separable preposition with acc. and regarded as a karmapravacanīya)
     (1) After, behind, along after (paścāt); sarve nāradamanu upaviśaṃti V. 5; pramadāmanu saṃsthitaḥ śucā nṛpatiḥ san R. 8. 72; taṃ gacchaṃtyanu ye vipattiṣu sadā te tatpratiṣṭhāśayā Mu. 1. 14; asau kumārastamajonujātaḥ R. 6. 78; ratyā ca sāśaṃkamanuprayātaḥ Ku. 3. 23; krameṇa suptāmanu saṃviveśa suptotthitāṃ prātaranūdatiṣṭhat R. 2. 24; anuviṣṇu = viṣṇoḥ paścāt P. II. 4. 18 Sk.; tadanu katheyarmādhavīyāmavasthāṃ Mal. 9. 26 afterwards.
     (2) Along, along-side, by the side of, lengthwise (yasya ca āyāmaḥ); jalāni sā tīranikhātayūpā vahatyayodhyāmanu rājadhānīṃ R. 13. 61; so'śvamedhaśateneṣṭvā yamunāmanu vīryavān . triśatāśvān sarasvatyāṃ gaṃgāmanu catuḥśatān Mb.; anugaṃgaṃ vārāṇasī = gaṃgāmanvāyataṃ (gaṃgādairghyasadṛśadairghyopalakṣitā) situated alongside the Ganges P. II. 1. 16 Sk.; āvirbhūtaprathamamukulāḥ kaṃdalīścānukacchaṃ Me. 21; giririva anutaṭapuṣpitakarṇikārayaṣṭiḥ V. 3. 3 along the sides or slopes.
     (3) After, in consequence of, being indicated by; japamanu prāvarṣat P. II 3. 8 Sk. (hetubhūtajapopalakṣitaṃ varṣaṇaṃ); so vṛkṣamanu vidyotate vidyut.
     (4) With, along with (sahārthe); connected with; nadīmanu avasitā semā P. I. 4. 85 Sk. (nadyāsaha saṃbaddhā); umāstanodbhedamanu pravṛddhaḥ Ku. 7. 24 along with, contemporaneously; Śi. 8. 56; divasonumitramagamadvilayaṃ 9. 17.
     (5) Inferior or subordinate to (hīne); mitralābhamanu lābhasaṃpadaḥ Ki. 13. 52 inferior, lower in value or importance; anu hariṃ surāḥ = harerhīnāḥ P. I. 4. 86 Sk.
     (6) In a particular relation or state (itthaṃbhūtākhyāne prakāraviśeṣanirūpaṇe); bhakto viṣṇumanu Sk. (viṣṇoritthaṃbhūtaḥ, bhaktiviśeṣayuktaḥ) an ardent devotee of Viṣṇu; yastvāṃ dveṣṭi sa māṃ dveṣṭi yastvāmanu sa māmanu Ram. favourably inclined or devoted to.
     (7) Having a part or share, participation; or one that claims a share of (bhāge); bhāgo'syāsti iti bhāgasvāmī; lakṣmīrharimanu (harerbhāgaḥ) Sk., harisvāmikabhāgavatītyarthaḥ.
     (8) Repetition, in a distributive sense, mostly in comp. (vīpsārthe, viṣayatāyāṃ); anudivasaṃ day by day, every day; anukṣaṇaṃ every moment; -velaṃ every time, frequently; vṛkṣaṃ vṛkṣamanu siṃcati Sk. waters tree after tree, i. e. every tree (yāvadvṛkṣavyāpakaḥ sekaḥ).
     (9) Towards, in the direction of near, to, at (anuryatsamayā P. II. 1. 15); anuvanamaśanirgataḥ Sk.; -nadi Śi. 7. 24 near the river; prajighāya kāṃtamanu mugdhataraḥ 9. 55 to (prati); on or in, with the force of the locative; yadetadasyānutaṭaṃ vibhāti 4. 39, 7. 1; tasmādgaccheranukanakhalaṃ śailarājāvatīrṇāṃ (jahnoḥ kanyāṃ) Me. 50. (10) In orderly succession, according to; anukramaṃ in regular order; anujyeṣṭhaṃ = jyeṣṭhasyānupūrvyeṇa in order of seniority; -pūrvaṃ; anurūpaṃ = rūpasya yogyaṃ Sk.
     (11) Corresponding with, like, in imitation of; sarvaṃ māmanu te priyāvirahajāṃ tva tu vyathāṃ mānubhūḥ V. 4. 25; so anugarj to roar after or in imitation of.
     (12) Following, conformable to (anugata); tathaiva so'bhūdanvartho rājā prakṛtiraṃjanāt R. 4. 12 (anugato'rtho yasya).
     (13) With regard to, towards, in respect of; ardhyadānamanu codito vacaḥ Śi. 14. 53; sādhurdevadatto mātaramanu.
     (14) On account of, by reason of (with abl.); samasto bata loko'yaṃ bhajate kāraṇādanu . tvaṃ tu niṣkāraṇādeva prīyase varavarṇini .. Rām. As a separable adverb anu is used only in the Vedas and means after, afterwards, later on, now, at this time, again, once more, then, and further. (The senses of anu as given by G. M. are: --anu vedādhyayanānuṣṭhānasāmīpyapaścādbhāvānubaṃdhasāmyābhimukhahīnavisargalakṣaṇeṣu; e. g. vede anuvākaḥ; anuṣṭhāne anutiṣṭhati; sāmīpye anumeghaṃ varṣati; paścādbhāve tadanu; anubaṃdhane anuśete; sāmye anukaroti; ābhimukhye mātaramanudhāvati vatsaḥ; hīne anuhariṃ surāḥ; visarge anujānīte; lakṣaṇe anuvanamaśanirgataḥ). The senses of anu may be thus expressed in verse: āyāme'parabhāve ca (paścādarthe) vīpsāyāṃ sannidhau tathā . itthaṃbhūte lakṣaṇe ca bhāgasādṛśyayorapi .. yogyatāyāṃ tathā hīne tṛtīyārthe hyanukrame . artheṣveteṣu bahuśo hyanuśabdaḥ prayujyate ...

anuḥ Ved.
     (1) A man.
     (2) N. of a son of Yayāti.

anuka a. [anu-kan P. V. 2. 74, anukāmayate iti anukaḥ kamitā Sk.]
     (1) Greedy; desirous.
     (2) Libidinous, lustful (as a lover).
     (3) Sloping.

anukath 10 P. To relate after (some one else), mention subsequently.

     (1) Subsequent mention; ādeśaḥ kathanaṃ, anvādeśo'nukathanaṃ Kaśi. on P. II. 4. 32.
     (2) Relation, narration; discourse, conversation.

anukanīyas a. The next youngest.

anukaṃp 1 A. To take pity or compassion on, sympathize with, pity (with acc.); kimujjihānajīvitāṃ varākīṃ nānukaṃpase Mal. 10; kathaṃ brāhmaṇī māmanukaṃpate Mk. 3; kaṃpase nānukaṃpase 4. 8; with loc. also; sauhṛdena tathā premṇā sadā mayyanukaṃpase Mb. --Caus. To pity &c.; śapharīṃ prathamā vṛṣṭirivānvakaṃpayat Ku. 4. 39.

anukaṃpaka a. Pitying, taking compassion on, sympathizing with.

anukaṃpana a. One who pities, kindhearted, compassionate. --naṃ Compassion, pity, tenderness, sympathy.

anukaṃpā [kaṃp-aṅ] Compassion, commiseration, pity; with gen.; teṣāmevānukaṃpārthaṃ Bg. 10. 11; or with loc.; bhaktyā gurau mayyanukaṃpayā ca R. 2. 63; or in comp.; bhūtānukaṃpā tava cet R. 2. 48; anukaṃpāyāṃ kan P. V. 3. 76.

anukaṃpita p. p. Pitied; -ātman having a compassionate spirit.

anukaṃpin a. Pitying(in comp.); sympathizing with.

anukaṃpya pot. p. Pitiable, worthy of sympathy; kiṃ tanna yenāsi mamānukapyā R. 14. 74; duhitaramanukaṃpyāmadrirādāya dorbhyāṃ Ku. 3. 76. --pyaḥ
     (1) A courier, express messenger.
     (2) An ascetic.

anukāṃkṣā Desire, wish.

anukāma a. [kāmasya sadṛśaḥ anurūpo vā]
     (1) Agreeable to desire, according to one's desire.
     (2) [anukāmayate kamac] Desirous, lustful. --maṃ ind. At will, according to desire or wish, as desired, at pleasure. --maḥ [anurūpaḥ kāmaḥ] Proper or worthy desire; desire; -kṛt fulfilling one's desires.

anukāmīna a. [kāmasya sadṛśaṃ anukāmaṃ; kha pratyayaḥ; anukāmaṃ gāmī yatheṣṭaṃ gaṃtā ityarthaḥ P. V. 2. 11 Sk.] Going at will or pleasure; one who acts as he pleases; anukāmīnatāṃ tyaja Bk.

anukāla a. [kālasya yogyaḥ] Opportune, timely, adapted or suited to the time. --laṃ ind. Opportunely, on a proper occasion.

anukīrtanam Act of proclaiming or publishing.

anukūla a. [anugataḥ kūlaṃ taṭaṃ snehādibaṃdhanaṃ vā]
     (1) Favourable, agreeable (lit. following the bank or slope, according to the current, with the grain;), as wind, fate &c.; maṃdaṃ maṃdaṃ nudati pavanaścānukūlo yathā tvāṃ Me. 9; śāṃta-pavanaśca S. 4. 10; -pariṇāmā saṃvṛttā S. 7; V. 3. 20.
     (2) Friendly, kind, well or kindly disposed.
     (3) Conformable to; pleasing, agreeable or favourable to, conducing to, capable of; oft. in comp.; sparśānukūlā iva sūryakāṃtāḥ S. 2. 7; ananukūlo'bhimānasya K. 45 not inclined to pride; darśanānukūlāhamasya na veti 197; kuśalaviracitānukūlaveśaḥ R. 5. 76 befitting, suitable. --laḥ
     (1) A faithful or kind husband, (ekaratiḥ S. D. or ekanirataḥ ekasyāmeva nāyikāyāṃ āsaktaḥ), a variety of nāyaka.
     (2) 'Favourable to all,' epithet of Viṣṇu. --lā
     (1) N. of a tree (daṃtī) Croton Polyandrum.
     (2) N. of a metre. --laṃ
     (1) Favour, kindness; nārīṇāmanukūlamācarati cet K. P. 9.
     (2) (Rhet.) A figure in which unfavourableness turns into kindness; anukūlaṃ prātikūlyamānukūlyānubaṃdhi cet S. D.; kupitāsi yadā tanvi nidhāya karajakṣatam . badhāna bhujapāśābhyāṃ kaṃṭhamasya dṛḍhaṃ tadā ...

anukūlatā --tvam
     (1) Favour, conformity, kindness, good will; pavanasyānukūlatvāt R. 1. 42 the wind being favourable.
     (2) Prosperity.

anukūlayati Den. P. To conciliate, propitiate, act in a friendly way towards; (taṃ) anukūlayatīṃdro'pi kalpadrumavibhūṣaṇaiḥ Ku. 2. 39; Ki. 13. 71; Śi. 7. 11.

anukṛ 8 U.
     (1) To do after or afterwards; follow; especially to imitate, do after or in imitation of, resemble, equal, copy (with gen.); tato'nukuryādviśadasya tasyāḥ ... smitasya Ku. 1. 44; śyāmatayā harerivānukurvatīṃ K. 10; anukaroti bhagavato nārāyaṇasya 6, 282; nanu kalabhena yūthapateranukṛtam M. 5; (also with acc.); sarvābhiranyābhiḥ kalābhiranucakāra taṃ vaiśaṃpāyanaḥ K. 76; śailādhipasyānucakāra lakṣmīṃ Bk. 2. 8; bahutaraṃ bhavaṃtamanukaroti V. 5; Ms. 2. 199.
     (2) To requite, recompense.
     (3) To try on, adjust, adapt; baṃdhaṃ tato'nukurvīta Suśr.

anukara a. Imitating. --raḥ An assistant.

anukaraṇaṃ, --kṛtiḥ f.
     (1) Imitation; tvadīyasucaritaikadeśasyānukaraṇaṃ kilaitat Mu. 7.
     (2) Copy, resemblance, similarity; śabdānukaraṇaṃ onamatopoeia; avyaktānukaraṇasyāta itau P. VI. 1. 98; V. 4. 57; I. 4. 62; dhūmodgārānukṛtinipuṇāḥ Me. 69.
     (3) Compliance; omityetadanukṛtihasma vai Taitt. Up.

anukartṛ m.
     (1) An imitator.
     (2) Actor, performer.

anukarman n.
     (1) Imitation.
     (2) [paścātkṛtaṃ karma] A subsequent rite.

anukāraḥ [kṛ-ghañ] Imitation, resemblance; sulabhānukāraḥ khalu jagati vedhaso nirmāṇasaṃniveśaḥ Mal. 9.

anukārin a. Imitating, resembling (with gen. or in comp.); priyāyāḥ kiṃcidanukāriṇīṣu latāsu dṛṣṭiṃ vilobhayāmi S. 6; anukāriṇi pūrveṣāṃ yuktarūpamidaṃ tvayi S. 2. 16; 1. 21; R. 1. 43, 3. 50.

anukārya, --karaṇīya, --kartavya pot. p. Fit to be imitated. --ryaṃ, -anukriyā A subsequent rite or ceremony.

anukrīḥ [anu --kṛ uṇā- bā. ī. kicca Tv.] A kind of sacrifical rite called sādyaskra.

anukṛpāyate Den. A. To sympathize or condole with.

anukṛṣ 1 P. To drag after oneself, to attract (in gram.); see anukarṣa below. --Caus. To subject.

anukarṣaḥ --rṣaṇam
     (1) Dragging after, drawing along; attraction in general.
     (2) Summoning or invoking (by means of spells).
     (3) Grammatical attraction, application or attration of a word in a preceding rule to a subsequent rule, word &c.; nāyamanukarṣaṇārthaścakāraḥ Mbh. on P. II. 2. 4; see also Sk. on P. VI. 1. 127.
     (4) [anukṛṣyate svasaṃbaddhena cakreṇa] The axle-tree or bottom of a carriage.
     (5) Delayed performance of a duty.

anukarṣan m. The bottom of a carriage.

anukḷp 1 A. To follow duly. --Caus. To cause others to follow duly.

anukalpaḥ [anugataḥ mukhyaṃ kalpaṃ]
     (1) A secondary direction or precept, a substitute or alternative to be used in times of necessity when the primary one (prathamakalpa) is not possible; as the direction to use godhūma or taṃḍula in the absence of yava; prabhuḥ prathamakalpasya yo'nukalpena vartate Ms. 11. 30, 3. 147.
     (2) A work connected with kalpa (one of the six auxiliaries of the Vedas).

anukta a.
     (1) Unuttered, unsaid (in gram.) = anabhihita q. v. under abhidhā.
     (2) Unheard of, extraordinary.
     (3) Not told; asāvanukto'pi sahāya eva Ku. 3. 21.

anuktha a. Without hymns or songs of praise; Rv. 5. 2. 3.

anukrakaca a. [anugataḥ krakacaṃ] Serrated, dentated like a saw.

anukraṃd 1 P. To cry after, reply to the sound; vīrunnīḍakapotakūjitamanukraṃdaṃtyamī kukkuṭāḥ Māl. 9. 7.

anukraṃdanam A cry in reply.

anukram 1 U., 4 P.
     (1) To go after, follow (fig. also); maharṣibhiranukrāṃtaṃ dharmapaṃthānamāsthitaḥ Ram.; to betake oneself to; tīrthayātrāmanukrāman Mb.; vyavasāyamanukrāṃtā kāṃte tvamatiśobhanaṃ Ram.
     (2) To count up, enumerate, state or go through in order; yaccānukrāṃtaṃ yaccānukraṃsyate Mbh. on P. I. 1. 72; give a table of contents, used frequently in the Nirukta.

anukrama a. [anugataḥ kramaṃ] In due order. --maḥ
     (1) Succession, order, sequence, arrangement, method, due order; pracakrame vaktumanukramajñā R. 6. 70; śvaśrūjanaṃ sarvamanukrameṇa 14. 60; Y. 2. 41.
     (2) A table of contents, index, such as that of the Vedic Samhitās.

     (1) Proceeding in order.
     (2) Following. --ṇī, --ṇikā [svārthe kan] A table of contents, an index showing the successive contents of a work.

anukruś 1 P. To shout at or after. --Caus. To join in lamenting, condole with, show sympathy.

     (1) Pity, compassion, tenderness (with loc.); bhagavankāmadeva na te mayyanukrośaḥ S. 3; Me. 115; kimapi sānukrośaḥ kṛtaḥ made to relent S. 4; na te māṃ prati anukrośaḥ S. 3.
     (2) One who has gone over a krośa (2 miles) (anugataḥ krośaṃ).

anukṣaṇam ind. Every instant, constantly, frequently.

anukṣattṛ m. (ttā) The attendant of a door-keeper or charioteer.

anukṣetram Stipend given to certain temple-worshippers in Orissa (?).

anukhyā 2 P. Ved. To descry, see from a distance.

anukhyātiḥ f.
     (1) Descrying.
     (2) Reporting, revealing.

anukhyātṛ m. () A discoverer; reporter.

anugam 1 P.
     (1) To go after, follow, attend, accompany; anabhijño guṇānāṃ yo na bhṛtyairanugamyate Pt. 1. 73; odakāṃtātsnigdho jano'nugaṃtavyaḥ S. 4; kekāravairanugamyamāno bhūṣaṇaninādaḥ K. 84; mārgaṃ manuṣyeśvaradharmapatnī śruterivārthaṃ smṛtiranvagacchat R. 2. 2; chāyeva tāṃ bhūpatiranvagacchat 6; Ms. 12. 115; Ki. 5. 2.
     (2) To follow, practise, observe, obey, act up to; pratiśbdaka iva rājavacanamanugacchati jano bhayāt K. 104; pūrvairayamabhipreto gato mārgo'nugamyate Ram.; viṣattau ca mahāṃlloke dhīratāmanugacchati H. 3. 44.
     (3) To seek, wander through; kānanaṃ vāpi śailaṃ vā yaṃ rāmo'nugamiṣyati Ram.; kṛtsnāṃ pṛthvīmanugacchata ibid. go in quest of.
     (4) To come, arrive, approach, present oneself (as time); kāle tvanugate Bhag.
     (5) To answer or respond to; correspond with, be suitable to; imitate, resemble; dhanuḥśriyaṃ gotrabhido'nugacchati Ki. 4. 36; āsphālitaṃ yatpramadākarāgrairmṛdaṃgadhīradhvanimanvagacchat R. 16. 13; na cāpi kādaṃbarīṃ lakṣmīranugaṃtumalaṃ K. 203.
     (6) To go or die out, be extinguished; yadyeṣa ukhyo'gniranugacchet Śat. Br.
     (7) To enter into. --Caus. [--gamayati] To cause to follow, follow; udgrīvairanugamitasya puṣkarasya M. 1. 21 followed or accompanied in sound.

anuga a. [anugacchatīti, gam-ḍa] (In comp.) Following, going after; corresponding or tallying with, adequate to; sadā pṛṣṭhānugaḥ pure Pt. 1. 59; gītānugaṃ vāri mṛdaṃgavādyaṃ R. 16. 64; Me. 47; kāmakrodhavaśānugaṃ Ms. 2. 214; gotrarikthānugaḥ piṃḍaḥ 9. 142 governed or regulated by; 8. 239. --gaḥ A follower, (obedient) servant, companion; tadbhūtanāthānuga R. 2. 58, 9. 82; bala- followed by an army, being the head of an army.

anugata p. p.
     (1) (Used passively)
          (a) Followed (lit. & fig.), attended; anugatamalivṛṃdairgaṃḍabhittīrvihāya R. 12. 102; M. 3. 9; Ms. 11. 71.
          (b) Full of, filled with; dāridryeṇābhibhūtena tvatsnehānugatena ca Mk. 4. 5; varṣadharakalamūkānugatena parijanena K. 159 consisting or made up of; ciṃtānugatasarvātman Mb.
          (c) Covered, as by a dress hanging behind; śivamivānugataṃ gajacarmaṇā Ki. 5. 2 (paścādvyāptaṃ).
          (d) Extinguished &c.
          (e) Acquired, obtaind.
     (2) (Used actively)
          (a) Following, obeying, observing; svamatamanugataḥ Mu. 5. 19; vibhavānugatā bhāryā Mk. 3. 28; digvijayaprasaṃgenānugato bhūmimimāṃ K. 191 come to; Ms. 9. 267; K. 166; Mu. 6. 5; H. 2. 56; R. 15. 9.
          (b) Corresponding or tallying with, adapted or answering to, in harmony with; sūtreṇānugataṃ bhavati S. B.; pādanyāso layamanugataḥ M. 2. 9 in accompaniment to the musical time; mṛdaṃga -taḥ saṃgītamadhuraḥ Ratn. 1; -vīṇaiḥ Śi. 11. 10.
          (c) Adequate or suitable to, fit for; prastāvānugataṃ pṛṣṭaḥ Pt. 5.
          (d) Imitating; parituṣṭo'smi yatpitaramanugato vatsaḥ M. 5 I am glad that the boy takes after his father. --taṃ Moderate time in music.
     -- Comp.
          --artha a. having a corresponding or easily discoverable sense.

anugatiḥ f.
     (1) Following; balasya caturaṃgasya nāyakānugatirnayaḥ Ram.; gatānugatikro lokaḥ following, imitating; see under gata.
     (2) Consent, approval; akāma- forced consent.

anugamaḥ --manam
     (1) Following; ātmānugamanena gāṃ prasādayitumarhasi R. 1. 88; bṛhaterdhātorarthānugamāt S. B.
     (2) Comprehending, grasping (as a sense); rasādyanugataḥ S. D.
     (3) Following in death, post-cremation, self-immolation of a widow on her husband's funeral pile.
     (4) Imitating; approaching.
     (5) Conformity, accordance; śrutyanugamācca S. B.

anugāmin a. Following. --m. A follower = anuga.

anugāmuka a. Habitually or constantly following.

anugarj 1 P. To roar after or in imitation of.

anugarjita p. p. Roared. --taṃ A roaring echo, Ku. 6. 40.

anugava a. [goḥ sadṛśaḥ āyāmaḥ, ac] Suiting (the length of) the oxen.

anugiram ind. By the mountainside R. 13. 49.

anugavīnaḥ [anugu goḥ paścātparyāptaṃ yathā gacchati so'nugavīnaḥ gopālaḥ; anugu kha P. V. 2. 15 Sk.] A cowherd.

anugādin a. [gad-ṇini] Repeating, following in speaking, echoing.

anugīti See under anugai.

anuguṇa a. [anukūlo guṇo yasya] Having similar qualities, of the same nature; kāṃtāratāpasāvikṣū vaṃśakānuguṇau smṛtau Suśr.; conformable to, favourable or agreeable to, suitable, according to; manorathasyānuguṇaṃ sarvadā yasya ceṣṭitaṃ Mv. 7. 7 obedient to the will; 7. 38; guṇasaṃpadānuguṇatāṃ gamitaḥ Ki. 6. 33; 10. 13; congenial, suitable, fit; -annalābhāt Dk. 64, 94; ananuguṇadārāṇāṃ Dk. 130 not having wives worthy of themselves; (vīṇā) utkaṃṭhitasya hṛdayānuguṇā vayasyā Mk. 3. 3 agreeable or pleasing to the heart, exactly after the heart (Tv. here takes -ṇā to mean taṃtrīyuktavīṇā itself); atra dvāvapyupadhmānīyāveva na śāṃtānuguṇau R. G.; rasānuguṇatāmeti S. D.; -ṇaṃ sarvāsvavasthāsu yat U. 1. 39 --ṇaḥ A natural peculiarity. --ṇaṃ adv.
     (1) Favourably, conformably to one's desires; cireṇānuguṇaṃ proktā pratipattiparāṅmukhī Bk. 8. 95.
     (2) Agreeably or conformably to (in comp.); tadādeśānuguṇaṃ bhavadāgamanamabhūt Dk. 11.
     (3) Naturally.

anuguṇatvam Favourableness.

anuguṇayati Den. P. To make favourable, conciliate; bring about, secure; saṃpado'nuguṇayan sukhaiṣiṇāṃ Ki. 13. 44.

anugupta a. Covered, sheltered.

anugai 1 P.
     (1) To sing after (a person), sing to (a tune); follow in singing; anugāyati kācidudaṃcitapaṃcamarāgaṃ Gīt. 1; anujaguratha divyaṃ duṃdubhidhvānamāśāḥ Ki. 3. 60 sent back, echoed.
     (2) To sing; to celebrate in song.

anugītam Singing in response to; Ratn. 1. 19.

anugītiḥ f. N. of a metre of two lines, the first having 27 and the second 32, mātras, a species of the Ārya metre.

anugrah 9 P. (Ved. --gṛbhṇāti).
     (1) To favour, oblige, treat with kindness; śilātalaikadeśamanugṛhṇānu vayasyaḥ S. 3 our friend will be so good as to, or kindly, take a seat on the stone; ayaṃ viṣṭaro'nugṛhyatāṃ V. 5 be pleased to sit down &c.; maheṃdreṇa punaranugṛhītā V. 3 favoured (by modifying the curse); with instr. or abl. of that which is an obligation; anugṛhīto'hamanayā maghavataḥ saṃbhāvanayā S. 6; kataratkulamanugṛhītaṃ bhagavatyā janmanā K. 135; anugṛhīto'smi ahamupadeśādbhavataḥ V. 4 I am much obliged to you &c. (anugṛhīta is oft. used by itself in the sense of 'much obliged', 'many thanks,' 'I thank you', 'I esteem it a favour').
     (2) To foster, cherish, protect, maintain (as fire); agnirnityānugṛhītaḥ syāt Asval.
     (3) To receive, welcome.
     (4) To hold up, support, uphold.
     (5) To follow in robbing, seizing or depriving.
     (6) To keep to, conform or correspond to, follow, take after; ākṛtimanugṛhṇaṃti guṇāḥ Vb. 2; kṣātradharmaścānugṛhīto bhavati U. 5. --Caus. To cause to favour, or to favour; āryasya darśanenātmānamanugrāhayituṃ Mu. 4.

anugrahaḥ, --haṇam
     (1) A favour, kindness, obligation; showing favour, obliging, rewarding (opp. nigraha); nigrahānugrahakartā Pt. 1; pādārpaṇānugrahapūtapṛṣṭhaṃ R. 2. 35; anugraha iveyamabhyarthanā S. 1; anugrahaṃ saṃsmaraṇapravṛttaṃ Ku. 3. 3.
     (2) Assistance, help (shown to the poor in feeding them &c. daridrādipoṣaṇaṃ).
     (3) Facilitating by spells.
     (4) Acceptance.
     (5) Rear-guard.
     -- Comp.
          --kātara a. anxious to please or for favour.
          --sargaḥ creation of feelings or mental conditions.

anugrāhya pot. p. Fit to be favoured or obliged; tataḥ kathanenātmānamanugrāhyamicchāmi K. 134; na vayamanugrāhyāḥ prāyo devatānāṃ 61.

anugrāhaka a.
     (1) Favouring, furthering, promoting.
     (2) Gracious, kind.

anugrāsakaḥ A mouthful; the equivalent of a mouthful.

anughaṭanam Linking together with; kṣiptā kathānughaṭanāya mayāpi vāṇī K. 240.

anucar 1 P.
     (1) To follow, pursue, go after; to serve, attend or wait upon; pitroḥ pādānanucaran K. 368 serving.
     (2) To traverse, seek after, go through, wander.
     (3) To conduct oneself, behave.

     (1) A companion, follower, attendant, servant; tenānucareṇa dhenoḥ R. 2. 4; ātmānucarasya bhāvaṃ jijñāsamānā 26, 52; Me. 3; Ms. 12. 47. In comp. attended or followed by; vānara-, rākṣasa- &c.
     (2) Following a spy (caramanugataḥ). --rī, --rā
     (1) A female attendant.
     (2) A logical or due strophe.

anucarita p. p. Followed &c. --taṃ Walk; walk in life; conduct.

anucārakaḥ A follower, servant &c. --rikā A female servant.

anucarciḥ f. Ved. Repeating(in a chorus).

anucita a.
     (1) Wrong, improper.
     (2) Unusual; unfit.

anuciṃt 10 P. To consider, think of, call to mind; dhāturvibhutvamanuciṃtya vapuśca tasyāḥ S. 2. 9; Bg. 8. 8; Ms. 4. 92.

anuciṃtā, --ciṃtanam
     (1) Calling to mind, thinking of, meditating upon.
     (2) Recalling, recollecting.
     (3) Constant thinking, anxiety.

anucchādaḥ The part of a man's under-garment which is allowed to hang down in front from the waist to the feet (Mar. nityā).

anucchittiḥ f., anucchedaḥ Nonextirpation; non-destruction; indestructibility.

anucchiṣṭa a. Not rejected; pure, holy; fresh, unused; -yauvanā Dk. 112.

anujan 4 A.
     (1) To be born after, arise or be produced after, to follow in being born, arising &c.; putrikāyāṃ kṛtāyāṃ tu yadi putro'nujāyate Ms. 9. 134; athavā jāyamānasya yacchīlamanujāyate Mb.
     (2) To take after (one's parents); to be born similar to.

anuja --jāta p. p. Born after, later, younger; rāmamanujātaḥ P. III. 4. 72; asau kumārastamajo'nujātaḥ R. 6. 78; pumāṃsamanurudhya jātā pumanujā Sk.; so stryanujā. --jaḥ, --jātaḥ
     (1) A younger brother; Ms. 5. 58.
     (2) A cadet; born again, after born, younger, later.
     (3) Taking after.
     (4) Born again, invested with the sacred thread. --jā, --jātā
     (1) A younger sister.
     (2) N. of a plant (trāyamāṇālatā). --jaṃ N. of a plant (prapauṃḍarīka).
     -- Comp.
          --avara a. lower than the younger, youngest.

anujanman m. [anu janma yasya] A younger brother; jananātha tavānujanmanāṃ Ki. 2. 17; Śi. 13. 2, 14.

anujīv 1 P.
     (1) To depend upon for subsistence, hang on, live by or upon (something); ye ca tvāmanujīvaṃti nāhaṃ teṣāṃ na te mama Ram.; sa tu tasyāḥ pāṇigrāhakamanujīviṣyati Dk. 122 hang or depend on, live (submissively) under, live as a subordinate to.
     (2) To see without envy; yāṃ tāṃ śriyamasūyāmaḥ purā dṛṣṭvā yudhiṣṭhire adya tāmanujīvāmaḥ Mb.
     (3) To live for any one.
     (4) To follow or imitate in living; R. 19. 15 v. l.
     (5) To survive.

anujīvin a. Dependent, living on or upon. --m. A dependent, servant, follower; avaṃcanīyāḥ prabhavo'nujīvibhiḥ Ki. 1. 4, 10; bhartuściṃtānuvartitvaṃ suvṛttaṃ cānujīvinām Pt. 1. 69.

anujīvya a. To be served(as a master).

anujñā 9 U.
     (1) To permit, allow (a person or thing); assent or consent to, approve; authorise, sanction; tadanujānīhi māṃ gamanāya U. 3 so let me go; seyaṃ yāti śakuṃtalā patigṛhaṃ sarvairanujñāyatāṃ S. 4. 8 permitted to go; Bk. 1. 23; M. 1. 19; Ms. 2. 116; tanmayā prītimatā'nujñātaṃ S. 5 approved, agreed to.
     (2) To betroth, affiance; māṃ jātamātrāṃ dhanamitranāmne'nvajānādbhāryāṃ me pitā Dk. 50.
     (3) To excuse, forgive; anupraveśe yadvīra kṛtavāṃstvaṃ mamāpriyaṃ . sarvaṃ tadanujānāmi Mb.
     (4) To repent, be sorry for.
     (5) To request, entreat, beg; tvāṃ sāhamanujānāmi na gaṃtavyamito vanaṃ Ram.
     (6) To treat or behave kindly, favour; te māṃ vīryeṇa yaśasā ... astraiścāpyanvajānata Mb.
     (7) To dismiss, bid farewell (usually in caus.). --Caus (-jñāpayati)
     (1) To ask or beg for, request.
     (2) To ask permission, ask for leave; take leave of, bid adieu to; so'pi tacchrutvā ... vānaramanujñāpya svāśrayaṃ gataḥ Pt. 4; taṃ cakradharamanujñāpya svagṛhaṃ gataḥ 5; Ms. 4. 122; 9. 82; sa mātaramanujñāpya tapasyeva mano dadhe . jagmatuśca yathākāmamanujñāpya parasparaṃ Mb.

anujñā, --jñānam [jñā-aṅ-lyuṭ vā]
     (1) Permission, consent, sanction; guroranujñāmadhigamya mātaḥ R. 2. 66.
     (2) Permission or leave to depart.
     (3) Excusing, forgiving, allowance made for faults.
     (4) An order, command.
     -- Comp.
          --eṣaṇā, --prārthanā requesting permission, taking leave.

anujñāta p. p. Permitted, allowed, assented to, granted, honoured, favoured, authorised, dismissed.

anujñāpakaḥ One who commands or orders.

anujñāpanaṃ, --jñāptiḥ f.
     (1) Authorising.
     (2) Issuing an order or command.

anujyeṣṭha a. [anugato jyeṣṭhaṃ] Next to the eldest. --ṣṭhaṃ adv. According to seniority.

anutap 1 P.
     (1) To heat; vex, annoy (fig.).
     (2) (4 A. or pass.) To repent, grieve, be sorry for, be stung with remorse; vividhairanutapyaṃte dayitānunayairmanasvinyaḥ V. 3. 5 (v. l. for nibhṛtairvyapatrapaṃte &c.); Ki. 17. 40. --Caus. To pain, afflict, distress virahaḥ kimivānutāpayedvada bāhyairviṣayairvipaścitaṃ R. 8. 89.

anutapta p. p.
     (1) Heated.
     (2) Filled with regret, repentant.

     (1) Repentance, remorse, contrition, subsequent regret or sorrow; jātānutāpeva sā V. 4. 38 stung with remorse; Ms. 11. 228.
     (2) Heat.

anutāpana a. Causing distress or regret or sorrow.

anutāpin a. Repentant, sorry.

anutara See under anutṝ.

anutarṣaḥ [tṛṣ-ghañ]
     (1) Thirst, desire to drink; sopacāramupaśāṃtavicāraṃ sānutarṣamanutarṣapadena Śi. 10. 2 (thirst and liquor).
     (2) Wish, desire.
     (3) Drinking spirituous liquors.
     (4) A drinking vessel (used in drinking spirituous liquors).
     (5) Liquor itself.

anutarṣaṇam = anutarṣa 3 and 4.

anutila a. Following tila(as a field). --laṃ ind. Grain after grain, i. e. by grains or very minutely.

anutunna a. Ved. Depressed or repressed (in sound), unruffled.

anutūlayati Den. P. To rub(as the point or end of grass) with cotton; P. III. 1. 25.

anutūlanam Rubbing in this manner.

anutṝ 1 P.
     (1) To go across or to the end.
     (2) To stretch lengthwise.

anutaram [anutīryate anena; karaṇe ap] Fare, freight.

anutka a. Not over-anxious, not repentant or regretful; self-complacent.

anutta a. Ved. [ud-kta na. ta.]
     (1) Not moistened or wet; tubhyamidadrivo'nuttaṃ Rv. 1. 80. 7.
     (2) Not set driven forth or urged (aprerita); invincible (?).

anuttama a. [na uttamo yasmāt]
     (1) Than which there is nothing better, having no superior or better, unsurpassed, the very best or highest, incomparably or pre-eminently the best; sarvadravyeṣu vidyaiva dravyamāhuranuttamaṃ H. Pr. 4; kāṃkṣan gatimanuttamāṃ Ms. 2. 242; Y. 1. 87; adastvayā nunnamanuttamaṃ tamaḥ Śi. 1. 27 all-pervading; Bg. 7. 18; Ms. 2. 9; 5. 158; 8. 81.
     (2) Not the best.
     (3) (In gram.) Not used in the uttama or first, person. --maḥ N. of Śiva or Viṣṇu.
     -- Comp.
          --aṃbhas, -aṃbhasikaṃ a term in Saṅkhya philosophy, said to mean'indifference to and abstinence from sensual enjoyment, as fatiguing or involving injury to external objects.'

anuttara a. [nāsti uttaro yasmāt]
     (1) Principal, chief.
     (2) Best, excellent; anuttarāṇi vilasitāni Dk. 162 unsurpassed.
     (3) [nāsti uttaraṃ yasya] Without a reply, silent, unable to answer; bhavatyavajñā ca bhavatyanuttarāt Naishadha.
     (4) Fixed, firm (na uttarati calati).
     (5) Low, inferior, base, mean.
     (6) Southern. --raṃ [na. ta.] No reply, a reply which, being evasive, is considered to be no reply. --rāḥ (pl.) A class of gods among Jainas (-upapātika). --rā The south.

anuttaraṃga a. Steady, not ruffled (by waves); apamivādhāramanuttaraṃgaṃ Ku. 3. 48.

anutthānam Absence of exertion.

anutpattiḥ f. Failure, non-production. --a., --ttika a. Not yet produced.
     -- Comp.
          --dharmakṣāṃtiḥ preparation for a future state, acquiescence in the state and moral condition which is yet to come.
          --samaḥ --mā a method of arguing against a thing by attempting to prove that nothing exists from which it could spring.

anutpanna a. Not produced or born, unborn, unproduced &c.

anutpādaḥ Not coming into existence, not taking effect.
     -- Comp.
          --kṣāṃti see anutpattidharmakṣāṃti.

anutsāha a. Destitute of energy or determination. --haḥ Want of determination, energy &c.; listlessness, languor, indifference.

anutsuka a. Moderate, not overeager, retiring, calm.

anutsūtra a. Not deviating from the Sutra (of Paṇini or of morality); not anomalous or irregular; -padanyāsā sadvṛttiḥ sannibaṃdhanā Śi. 2. 112.

anutsekaḥ Absence of haughtiness or pride; -ko lakṣmyāṃ Bh. 2. 63; modesty; -kaḥ khaluvikramālaṃkāraḥ V. 1; cf. "Modesty is the handmaid of heroism".

anutsekin a. Not puffed up, not proud or arrogant; bhāgyeṣu- nī bhava S. 4. 17.

anuda a. [na nudati or anudadāti tulyaṃ dadāti, dā-ka] Ved. Not urging or driving onward; or, emulating others in giving (tulyarūpadātṛ); see anānuda.

anudaka a.
     (1) Waterless(as a desert).
     (2) Having very little water (as a puddle).
     (3) Devoid of the libations of water (a sort of śrāddha).

anudagra a.
     (1) Not lofty, low.
     (2) Soft, tender; weak, not sharp.

anudara a.
     (1) Having a slender waist; thin, lank; -rājakanyā Sk. (alpārthe nañ, see a).

anudā 3 U. To give back, restore; to yield, grant, remit.

     (1) Restoration.
     (2) A female companion.

anudātta a. Grave(accent); not elevated or raised (not pronounced with the Udatta accent); uccairudāttaḥ, nīcairanudāttaḥ; accentless, having the neutral, general tone; udāttaścānudāttaśca svaritaśca trayaḥ svarāḥ; uttered with the grave accent (as a vowel); prayatnaprerito vāyuryadordhvabhāge pratihato'caṃ niṣpādayati sa udāttaḥ; evamadhoniṣpanno'c anudāttaḥ; tālvādiṣu sabhāgeṣu sthāneṣu nīcabhāge niṣpanno'c anudāttaḥ; -ttaṃ padamekavarjaṃ Sk. (The term anudātta is used by Paṇini for the grave accent which immediately precedes the Udatta, and also for the general accentless tone neither high nor low, termed ekaśruti, the one monotonous intonation belonging to the generality of syllables in a sentence). --ttaḥ The grave accent.
     -- Comp.
          --ādiḥ a nominal base of which the first syllable is anudātta. --it a verbal root having for its anubaṃdha the grave accent (denoting that it takes the Ātm. terminations only).
          --udayaṃ a syllable followed (immediately) by the grave accent.
          --tara a. more than anudātta; still lower or graver accent, i. e. that which immediately precedes a syllable having the udātta or svarita accent and is thus more depressed than the ordinary anudātta accent.

anudāra a.
     (1) Not liberal, niggardly; not high or noble.
     (2) Having none more liberal, very liberal, or great.
     (3) (anugato dārān) Adhering to or followed by a wife; yasminprasīdasi punaḥ sa bhavatyudāro'nudāraśca K. P. 4 (used in sense 1 also).
     (4) Having a suitable or worthy wife (anurūpāḥ dārāḥ yasya).

anudita a.
     (1) Unsaid, not uttered.
     (2) Not risen or appeared forth.

anudinaṃ --divasam ind. Daily, day after day; pārāvataḥ khalu śilākaṇamātrabhojī kāmī bhavedanudinaṃ vada ko'tra hetuḥ Udb.; anudivasaṃ parihīyaseṃ'gaiḥ S. 3.

anudiś 6 P. To point out, assign.

     (1) Pointing back; a rule or direction which refers or points back to a previous rule; yathāsaṃkhyamanudeśaḥ samānāṃ P. I. 3. 10; subsequent mention of things (words, suffixes &c.) in the order of things previously mentioned, respective enumeration or statement, first for first, second for second; as in samūlākṛtajīveṣu hankṛñgrahaḥ P. III. 4. 36.
     (2) Direction, order, injunction.

anudeśin a. Pointing or referring back; being the object of an anudeśa.

anudṛś 1 P. To survey, behold; to keep in view or mind, see in prospect; na ca śreyo'nupaśyāmi hatvā svajanamāhave Bg. 1. 31; Bh. 3. 3. --Caus. To show, tell, inform as follows; senāpatiḥ putramagnimitraṃ pariṣvajya anudarśayati M. 5 writes or informs as follows.

anudarśanam Inspection, survey; utthitaścāpramattaśca balānāmanudarśane Ram.; consideration, regard; janmamṛtyujarāvyādhiduḥkhadoṣānudarśanaṃ Bg. 13. 8 perception.

anudṛṣṭi a. Having a favourable look. --ṣṭiḥ f. A favourable look.

anudairghya a. [dairghyamanugataḥ] Longitudinal, lengthwise.

anuddhata a. Not raised or puffed up; -tāḥ satpuruṣāḥ samṛddhibhiḥ S. 5. 12; humble; modest; unsurpassed.

     (1) Not removing or taking away.
     (2) Not offering, establishing or proving.

     (1) Non-partition; not taking a share (viṃśoddhāraśūnyo vibhāgaḥ).
     (2) Non-removal.

anuddhṛta a. Undivided, unremoved, uninjured, unharmed, undestroyed, unoffered or established &c.
     -- Comp.
          --abhyastamayaḥ taking place of sunset, while the āhavanīya fire continues to be unremoved from the gārhapatya.

anudbhaṭa a.
     (1) Not bold; soft, mild.
     (2) Not exalted or lofty.

anudyata, anudyama a. Not diligent, idle, inactive.

anudyūtam Repeated playing or gambling; N. of a part of the Sabhāparvan.

anudyoga a. Lazy, not industrious. --gaḥ Idleness, inactivity.

anudru 1 P.
     (1) To run after, follow, accompany; dhanurdharaṃ rājasutairanudrutaṃ R. 3. 38; 12. 67; 16. 25; Śi. 1. 52; 5. 59.
     (2) To chase, pursue.

anudruta p. p.
     (1) Followed, pursued; (sometimes used actively).
     (2) Sent or brought back (as sound). --taṃ A measure of time in music = half druta, or one-fourth of a Matrā (or of the time taken to utter a short vowel); ardhamātraṃ drutaṃ jñeyaṃ drutārdhaṃ cāpyanudrutaṃ.

anudvāhaḥ Non-marriage, celibacy.

anudvigna a. Easy in mind, secure.

anudvega a. Free from anxiety or apprehension. --gaḥ Security or freedom from fear.

anudhāv 1 P.
     (1) To run after; follow; ṛṣīṇāṃ punarādyānāṃ vācamartho'nudhāvati U. 1. 10 the sense follows the words (the words being not uttered with a view to a particular sense); svaruciṃ niścayato'nudhāvati Śi. 16. 44 follows his own will.
     (2) To run up to, approach.
     (3) To cleanse, wash.

     (1) Going or running after, following, pursuing; turaga -kaṃḍitasaṃdheḥ S. 2.
     (2) Close pursuit of an object (for the knowledge of truth); research, investigation.
     (3) Seeking a mistress, though unattainable.
     (4) Cleansing, purification.

anudhyai 1 P.
     (1) To think of, muse, consider attentively.
     (2) To wish well of, to bless, favour; prajāniṣekaṃ mayi vartamānaṃ sūnoranudhyāyata cetaseti R. 14. 60 bless; anudadhyuranudhyeyaṃ sāṃnidhyaiḥ pratimāgataiḥ 17. 36 favoured.

anudhyā [dhyai-aṅ] Thinking or wishing well of, favouring, attachment.

anudhyāna p. p. Mused, thought of &c. --taṃ --naṃ [dhyai-lyuṭ]
     (1) Thought; anudhyānānaṃtarameva K. 262; meditation, religious contemplation.
     (2) Thinking of, remembrance; yā naḥ prītirvirūpākṣa tvadanudhyānasaṃbhavā Ku. 6. 21.
     (3) Wishing well of, affectionate solicitude for; anudhyātairupetavyaṃ vatsayorbhadramastu vaḥ U. 7. 11; sā tvamaṃba snuṣāyāmaruṃdhatīva sītāyāṃ śivānudhyānaparā bhava U. 1.

anudhyāyaḥ [dhyai kartari ghañ] One who wishes well of.

anudhyeya a. To be favoured or wished well of; anudadhyuranudhyeyaṃ R. 17. 36.

anunad 1 P. To sound towards or at (with acc.). --Caus. To cause to sound, make resonant, fill with echo; pṛthivīṃ cāṃtarikṣaṃ ca sāgarāṃścānunādayan; sādhu sādhviti nādena pṛthivīmanvanādayan; vihaṃgairanunāditaṃ Mb. made musical or resonant.

anunādaḥ [anurūpo nādaḥ] Sound, noise; Śi. 7. 18; reverberation, echo.

anunādin a. Echoing, sounding, resonant.

anunaya, --nāyikā See under anunī.

anunāsika a. [anugato nāsikāṃ]
     (1) Nasal, pronounced through the nose; mukhasahitanāsikayā uccāryamāṇo varṇo'nunāsikasaṃjñaḥ syāt Sk.; mukhanāsikāvacano'nunāsikaḥ P. I. 1. 8; amo'nunāsikā na thau Śikṣā; anunāsika being a name for the 5 nasal consonants, the vowels or the consonants y, v, l (under certain circumstances); i. e. the letters included in the pratyāhāra am except h and r.
     (2) The sign used to mark the nasalization in the case of y, v or l. --kaṃ The nasal twang.
     -- Comp.
          --ādiḥ a conjunct consonant beginning with a nasal.

anunirdeśaḥ Description or relation following the previous order or sequence; bhūyasāmupadiṣṭānāṃ kriyāṇāmatha karmaṇām . kramaśo yo'nunirdeśo yathāsaṃkhyaṃ taducyate S. D.

anunirvāpaḥ Subsequent libation (with clarified butter).

anunirvāpyā A ceremony connected with this libation.

anunī 1 P.
     (1) To conciliate, win over, induce, persuade, prevail upon; request, supplicate, entreat, propitiate, pacify, appease (anger &c.); sa cānunītaḥ praṇatena paścāt R. 5. 54; vigrahācca śayane parāṅmukhīrnānunetumabalāḥ sa tatvare 19. 38, 43; Bk. 6. 137; 5. 46, tvatsaṃgamena mama tattadivānunītaṃ V. 3. 20 pacified, made favourable or agreeable; Ki. 13. 67; M. 5; K. 168, 178; Dk. 3, 4, 7.
     (2) To cherish love; vidviṣopyanunaya Bh. 2. 77; cf. Shakespeare "Cherish those hearts that hate thee".
     (3) To bring near to (with dat. of person).
     (4) To train, discipline.
     (5) To honour.

anunaya a. [nī-ac] Kind, conciliatory, pacifying (as words). --yaḥ
     (1) Conciliation, propitiation, pacification (of anger), friendly persuasion; kathaṃ nu śakyo'nunayo maharṣerviśrāṇanāccānyapayasvinīnāṃ R. 2. 54; kathaṃ vā teṣāmanunayaḥ kṛtaḥ H. 4; prakṛtivakraḥ sa kasyānunayaṃ pratigṛhṇāti S. 4.
     (2) Courtesy, civility, courteous or polite behaviour, modesty, modest or respectful deportment, conciliatory act (such as salutation); showing respect (to a guest, deity &c.); vividhairanutapyaṃte dayitānunayairmanasvinyaḥ V. 3. 5; dayitajana- 2. 22; vākyaiḥ snigdhairanunayo bhavedarthasya sādhanaṃ S. D. 458.
     (3) An humble supplication or entreaty, a request in general; bhadra priyaṃ naḥ . kiṃtu tvadabhiprāyāparijñānāṃtarito'yamasmadanunayaḥ Mu. 2; R. 6. 2; niṣedhavākyālaṃkārajijñāsānunaye khalu Ak; -āmaṃtraṇaṃ conciliatory address.
     (4) Discipline, training, regulation of conduct. --yaḥ adv. Fitly, suitably.

anunayin a. Courteous, polite, humble, supplicating.

anunītiḥ = anunaya q. v.; sānunītiśca sītāyai nākrudhyat Bk. 8. 75 adopting a conciliatory tone; Śi. 16. 55.

anunāyaka a. Submissive, humble, supplicating.

anunāyika a. Conciliating; priyatameṣu vadhūranunāyikā Śi. 6. 7. --kā A female character subordinate to the Nayika or leading character, such as a friend, nurse, maid-servant &c.; sakhī pravrajitā dāsī preṣyā dhātreyikā tathā . anyāśca śilpakāriṇyo vijñeyā hyanunāyikāḥ ..

anunnata a. Not raised or elevated, not lifted up.
     -- Comp.
          --ānata a. level (neither raised nor lowered).
          --gātra a. having limbs not stout or prominent.

anunmāda, --anunmatta a. Not mad or frantic, sober, calm, sane.

anupa = anūpa, q. v.

anupakārin a.
     (1) Not obliging, ungrateful, not making a return for benefits received.
     (2) Worthless, useless.

anupakṣita p. p. Not injured or destroyed (anupakṣīṇa).

anupagīta a. Not praised. --taṃ ind. So that no other person accompanies in singing.

anupaghātaḥ Absence of damage or detriment; -arjita obtained without any detriment (to the paternal estate).

anupajīvanīya a. Not yielding or granting livelihood, having no livelihood.

anupaṭh 1 P. To say after, repeat.

anupaṭhita p. p. Read through, repeated in imitation of the teacher's instruction.

anupaṭhitin a. Who has read through, proficient.

anupat 1 P.
     (1) To fly to or towards.
     (2) To fly or run after, follow (fig. also); pursue, chase; muhuranupatati syaṃdane dattadṛṣṭiḥ S. 1. 7; kathamanupatata eva me prayatnaprekṣaṇīyaḥ saṃvṛttaḥ S. 1.; na yatra pratyāśāmanupatati no vā rahayati (cetaḥ) Mal. 9. 8 does not run after (cherish) hope or leave it; yasyaivaṃ bhavaṃtaḥ kuṭuṃbavṛttimanupatitāḥ Mv. 1; Śi. 11. 40.
     (2) To fall upon, attack; prāgvīrānanupatya Mal. 8. 9. --Caus.
     (1) To fly to.
     (2) To throw another down along with oneself.

anupatanaṃ, pātaḥ
     (1) Falling upon, alighting upon in succession.
     (2) Following, going after, pursuit; upavanapavanānupātadakṣaiḥ Śi. 7. 27.
     (3) Going or proceeding in order or as a consequence.
     (4) [anurūpaḥ trairāśikena pātaḥ] Proportion.
     (5) Rule of three.
     (6) A degree of latitude, opposite to one given. --taṃ ind. (regarded as a ṇamul from pat) Following in succession, going after; latānupātaṃ kusumānyagṛhṇāt Bk. 2. 11 (latāṃ latāmanupātya going to creeper after creeper, or after bending the creepers).

anupātin a. Following as a result. --m. A follower; madanupātināmeṣa paṃthāḥ Dk. 168.

anupatha a. [paṃthānamanugataḥ] Following the road. --thaḥ A road, favourable road; aṃtaspathā anupathāḥ Rv. 5. 52. 10 (anukūlamārgāḥ). --thaṃ adv. Along the road.

anupad 4 A. (P. in epic poetry)
     (1) To go after, follow, attend.
     (2) To be fond of, be attached to (as a wife); utathyasya yavīyāṃstu mamatāmanvapadyata Mb.
     (3) To enter, go to or into.
     (4) To fall down, come down (to the earth); vasudhāmanvapadyetāṃ vātanunnāviva drumau Mb.
     (5) To enter upon, betake oneself to; jitamityeva tānakṣānpunarevānvapadyata, dhyānamevānvapadyata Ram.; putrau dṛṣṭvā susaṃbhrāṃtā nānvapadyata kiṃcana Mb. did not do anything else.
     (6) To find, discover, see, notice; dīrghaṃ dadhyau ... nimittaṃ so'nvapadyata Bhag.
     (7) To lose (with abl.); mahatvānnānvapadyetāṃ Mb.
     (8) To handle.
     (9) To fall to the share of (Ved.)

anupad a. [pad-kvip] Ved. Coming to pass. --f. Food (got every day) (anudinalabhyamannaṃ).

anupada a. [padānyanugataḥ]
     (1) Following the feet closely.
     (2) Following every word; -sūtraṃ a commentary (of a Brahmaṇa) explaining the text word for word. --daḥ N. of a man or tribe. --daṃ A chorus, burden of a song or words sung again at regular intervals. --ind. [padānāṃ paścāt]
     (1) Along the feet, near the feet; anupadaṃ baddhā anupadīnā Sk.
     (2) Step by step, at every step; Śi. 9. 78.
     (3) Word for word.
     (4) On the heels of, close behind or after, immediately after (of time or space); anupadamanveṣṭā anupadī Sk.; gacchatāṃ puro bhavaṃtau . ahamapyanupadamāgata eva S. 3 I shall be close behind you, just follow you; -damuccalita eva K. 263, 264; oft. with gen. or in comp. in this sense; lakṣmīvānanupadamasya saṃpratasthe Ki. 12. 54; (tau) āśiṣāmanupadaṃ samaspṛśat pāṇinā R. 11. 31; amoghāḥ pratigṛhṇaṃtāvardhyānupadamāśiṣaḥ 1. 44, 14. 81; Śi. 14. 48.

anupadika a. [anupadamastyasya gaṃtṛtvena, ṭhan] Following, gone after.

anupadin a. [anupad-ini P. V. 2. 90] Following, seeking after or for, a searcher, inquirer; anupadamanveṣṭā gavāmanupadī Sk.; kṣaṇadākare'nupadibhiḥ prayaye Śi. 9. 70.

anupadīnā [āyāmārthe anu, padasyāyāmatulyāyāmaḥ, tena badhdā kha] A shoe (boot, buskin, or slippers) of the length of the foot (anupadaṃ baddhā anupadīnā upānat P. V. 2. 9 Sk.)

anupadavī A way, road.

anupadhaḥ 'Having no upadhā or penultimate', a letter or syllable not preceded by another.

anupadhi a. [na. ba.] Guileless, without fraud; rahasyaṃ sādhūnāmanupadhi viśuddhaṃ vijayate U. 2. 2.

     (1) Not mentioning; non-statement.
     (2) Uncertainty, doubt, failure of proof.

anupapattiḥ f.
     (1) Failure, failing to be; lakṣaṇā śakyasaṃbaṃdhastātparyānupapattitaḥ Bhāṣā. P. 82 (tātparya- being the failure of the meaning aimed at, or of any connected meaning).
     (2) Inapplicability, not being applicable.
     (3) Inconclusive reasoning; absence of reasonable grounds (yuttayabhāva); pīno devadatto divā na bhuṃkte ityatra divā'bhojinaḥ pīnatvaṃ rātribhojanaṃ vinānupapannam; see arthāpātti also.
     (4) Penury, adversity.

anupapanna a. Improper, impossible, inapplicable, impracticable, inconclusive, irrelevant.

anupama a. [na. ba.] Incomparable, matchless, peerless, best, most excellent. --mā The female elephant of the south-west (mate of kumuda).

anupameya --mita a. Matchless, incomparable.

anupamardanam Non-refutation of a charge.

anupayukta a.
     (1) Not used(as food).
     (2) Unsuited, unfit, improper, useless, unserviceable S. 7.

anupayoga a. Useless. --gaḥ Uselessness, not being used (as food).

anuparata a.
     (1) Not dead.
     (2) Not stopped, uninterrupted.

anupalabdha a. Unobserved, unperceived.

anupalabdhiḥ f. Non-recognition, non-perception (pratyakṣādyabhāva); nāsti ghaṭo'nupalabdheḥ (the knowledge of ghaṭābhāva is possible because the pratiyogī or counter-entity is not found with the non-entity or abhāva (that is, there being no upalabdhi or knowledge of the ghaṭa); one of the instruments of knowledge according to the Mīmamsakas, but not according to the Naiyayikas.
     -- Comp.
          --samaḥ a fallacy, trying to establish a fact (say, the eternity of sound) from the impossibility of seeing the nonperception of it.

anupalaṃbhaḥ Want of apprehension; non-perception.

anupavītin m. One who does not wear the sacred thread (belonging to his caste).

anupaśayaḥ Any thing or circumstance that aggravates a malady.

anupaśya a. Following with his looks, keeping in view.

anupasaṃhārin m. A kind of hetvābhāsa or fallacy in Nyaya, a subdivision of the anaikāṃtikahetvābhāsa; vastumātrapakṣako'nupasaṃhārī that is, that which includes every known thing in the pakṣa and thus prevents the corroboration of a general rule of causation by illustrations, positive or negative; as sarvaṃ nityaṃ prameyatvāt; atra sarvasyaiva pakṣatvāt prameyatvaṃ heturanupasaṃhārī anvaye vyatireke vā dṛṣṭāṃtābhāvāt.

     (1) A word(particle &c.) that is not, or has not the force of, an Upasarga.
     (2) That which has no Upasarga.
     (3) That which needs no additions (as a divine being).

anupasecana a. Having no upasecana i. e. some condiment, sauce, curds &c. to moisten food with.

anupaskṛta a.
     (1) Unpolished, (as silver).
     (2) Genuine, blameless.
     (3) Not cooked or dressed (as food).
     (4) Not requiring any evident object.

anupaskāra a. Not elliptical(adhyāhāradoṣarahita) Ki. 11. 38.

anupasthānam Absence, not being at hand.

anupasthāpanam Not placing, offering or producing, not having ready or at hand.

anupasthāpita a. Not ready or at hand, not offered or produced.

anupasthāyin a. Not present, absent, distant.

anupasthita a. Not present, absent, not at hand or near; not current. --taṃ A word that is not upasthita q. v.

anupasthitiḥ f.
     (1) Absence; mama -tiṃ kṣamaṃtāṃ bhavaṃtaḥ your honour will be pleased to excuse my absence.
     (2) Inability to remember.

anupahata a.
     (1) Not injured, unimpaired, unvitiated.
     (2) Not used, unbleached, new (as cloth); -taṃ dukūlayugalaṃ K. 110, 229. See anāhata.

anupā 2 P.
     (1) To drink after(a person or thing), drink along with; (madhu pītvā) ... anupāsyasi bāṣpadūṣitaṃ jalāṃjaliṃ R. 8. 68; kalmāṣānbhakṣayanmadhu cānupibet Suśr.; Bri. S. 76. 6.
     (2) To follow in drinking.
     (3) (2 P.) = anupāl q. v.

     (1) A drink taken with or after medicine (anu bheṣajena saha paścādvā yat kiṃcinmadhukṣīrādi pīyate tat); a fluid vehicle in medicine.
     (2) A drink close at hand.

anupānīya a. Serving as a liquid vehicle of medicine. --yaṃ An afterdrink, what is fit to be drunk after.

anupā 2 P, --pāl 10 P.
     (1) To guard, watch over, protect, defend; bāladāyādikaṃ rikthaṃ tāvadrājānupālayet Ms. 8. 27 keep in custody.
     (2) To conform to, obey, observe; daśarathavacanamanupālayan K. 21; satyonupālayetsatyaṃ H. 4. 23; so pratijñāṃ, dharmaṃ, mārgaṃ &c.; keep, preserve; anupālayatāṃ prabhuśaktiṃ Ki. 2. 10 watching.

anupālanam Preserving, keeping up, obeying.

anupākṛta a. Not rendered fit for or consecrated for sacrificial purposes.
     -- Comp.
          --māṃsaṃ flesh of an animal not prepared for sacrifice.

anupāta, --tin see under anupat.

anupākhya a. Not clearly visible or discernible.

anupātakam [pātakaṃ brahmahatyādi tatsadṛśaṃ] A heinous crime such as theft, murder, adultery &c. 35 such sins are enumerated in Viṣṇusmṛti; Manu mentions 30 kinds; See 11. 54--58.

anupārśva a. Lateral, along or by the side.--(pl.) N. of a people.

anupāvṛtta a. Ved. Western.

anupuruṣaḥ [anugataḥ anyaṃ puruṣaṃ] A follower.

anupuṣpaḥ [anugataḥ puṣpaṃ tadvikāraṃ] A kind of reed (śaravṛkṣa).

anupūrva a. [anugataḥ pūrvaṃ paripāṭīṃ kramaṃ vā]
     (1) Regular, having a suitable measure, regularly shaped, symmetrical; vṛttānupūrve ca na cātidīrghe Ku. 1. 35; tatonupūrvāyatavṛttabāhuḥ Ki. 17. 50 (gopucchākāra Malli.); jaṃghe anupūrvavṛtte Dk. 131; -tāmrāṃgulī bāhulate ibid.; -keśa who has regular hair; -gātra having regularly shaped limbs; so -daṃṣṭra, -nābhi, pāṇi.
     (2) Orderly, successive, in due order or succession; coming in the order, following.
     (3) The lowest (nikṛṣṭapramāṇa); anupūrvā itare Katy.
     -- Comp.
          --ja a. descended in a regular line.
          --vatsā a cow that calves regularly.

anupūrvaśaḥ, --pūrveṇa adv. In regular order, one by one, successively, from above, downwards; from the beginning or first; varṇānāmanupūrvaśaḥ Ms. 8. 142; 3. 39, 7. 35.

anupūrvya a. Regular, orderly, successive. --rvī = ānupūrvī q. v.

anupṛṣṭhya a. [anupṛṣṭhaṃ badhyate, anupṛṣṭha-yat] (A rope, cord &c.) Fastened along the back, tied lengthwise.

anupeta a. 1 Not endowed with.
     (2) Not invested with the sacred thread (anupanīta).

anupta a. Not sown(as seed); -śasya fallow, meadow, (ground &c.).

anuptrima a. Grown without being sown.

anuprajñānam Tracing, tracking.

     (1) A gift, donation.
     (2) A sort of external effort of the vocal organs giving rise to particular letters (bāhyaprayatna); ete śvāsānupradānā aghoṣāśca vibṛṇvate Sk.

anuprapātaṃ --dam ind. Going in succession; geha -taṃ --daṃ āste gehaṃ gehaṃ anuprapātaṃ-daṃ P. III. 4. 56 Sk.

anuprayuj 7 A. To employ, apply, employ in addition.

anuprayogaḥ Additional use, repetition; P. I. 3. 63; III. 4. 4--5.

anupravacanam Repetition or reproduction of what has been said by the teacher; -ādi a class of words given in P. V. 1. 111.

anupraviś 6 P.
     (1) To enter into, join; pathikasārthaṃ vidiśāgāminamanupraviṣṭaḥ M. 5; (fig. also); viśramya laukikāḥ saṃstyāyamanupraviśaṃti Mv. 1 enter into familiar talk or conversation.
     (2) To accommodate or adapt oneself to; yasya yasya hi yo bhāvastasya tasya hi taṃ naraḥ . anupraviśya medhāvī kṣipramātmavaśaṃ nayet Pt. 1. 68; sakhe vāmadeva tvamapi gādhinaṃdanamanupraviṣṭo'si A. R. 1 you too share in his opinion, or think with him.
     (3) To follow in entering; sleep with.
     (4) To attack.

     (1) Entrance into; pupoṣa vṛddhiṃ haridaśvadīdhiteranupraveśādiva bālacaṃdramāḥ R. 3. 22; 10. 51.
     (2) Adapting oneself to the will of; balavatābhibhūtasya videśagamanaṃ tadanupraveśo vā nītiḥ Pt. 1; bhajate videśamadhikena jitastadanupraveśamathavā kuśalaḥ Śi. 9. 48.
     (3) Imitation.

anapraśnaḥ A subsequent question (having reference to what the teacher has previously said).

anuprasaktiḥ f.
     (1) Very close attachment.
     (2) Very close logical connection (of words).

anuprasad Caus. To propitiate, conciliate; priyaṃ V. 3.

anuprasādanam Propitiation, conciliation; priya -naṃ nāma vrataṃ V. 3.

anuprastha a. Latitudinal, following the breadth or latitude.

anuprāṇ 2 P. To breathe after. --Caus. To animate, support, feed, help; mostly used in the statement of Alaṅkaras in a sentence; utprekṣānuprāṇitā svabhāvoktiḥ &c.

anuprāṇanam Breathing after, animation.

anuprāp 5 P.
     (1) To get, obtain.
     (2) To reach, go to, overtake; gaṃgānadīmanuprāptāḥ Mb.
     (3) To imitate; līlākhelamanuprāpurmahokṣāstasya vikramaṃ R. 4. 22.
     (4) To arrive, come (intrans.); kathamimāṃ bhūmimanuprāptaḥ K. 132; Ve. 6.
     (5) To get back.

anuprāpta p. p. Reached, got, obtained.

anuprāptiḥ f. Getting to, reaching, arriving &c.

anuprāsaḥ [anugataḥ rasādyanuguṇaṃ prakṛṣṭamāsaṃ varṇanyāsaṃ samavarṇaracanāṃ samavarṇoccāraṇaṃ vā] Alliteration, repetition of similar letters, syllables or sounds; varṇasāmyamanuprāsaḥ K. P. 9; (svaravaisādṛśye'pi vyaṃjanasadṛśatvaṃ varṇasāmyaṃ rasādyanugataḥ prakṛṣṭo nyāsaḥ; anuprāsaḥ śabdasāmyaṃ vaiṣamyepi svarasya yat S. D. 633.) anuprāsa is of 5 kinds;
     (a) cheka- or single alliteration; bakulagaṃdhānaṃdhīkurvan, kāverīvāripāvanaḥ pavanaḥ; mūrdhnāmudvṛttakṛttāviralagarala &c. K. P. 7.
     (b) vṛtti- or harmonious.
     (c) śruti- or melodious.
     (d) aṃtya- or final; as maṃdaṃ hasaṃtaḥ pulakaṃ vahaṃtaḥ.
     (e) lāṭa-; smerarājīvanayane nayane kiṃ nimīlite. For definitions and examples see S. D. 633--38 and K. P. 9th Ullasa.

anuplu 1 A. To run after, follow; idamanyato vānaradvayaṃ āryasya pārṣṇigrāhamiva saṃśrayādanuplavate A. R. 5.

anuplavaḥ A follower, servant; sānuplavaḥ prabhurapi kṣaṇadācarāṇāṃ R. 13. 75; Mv. 2, 7. 19.

anubaṃdh 9 P.
     (1) To bind or fasten to, attach, tie, connect; sīmaṃtaṃ nijamanubadhnatī karābhyāṃ Śi. 8. 69 forming, arranging; ubhayorapi rājeṃdra saṃbaṃdhenānubadhyatāṃ (ikṣvākukulaṃ) Rām.; sakhījanānubaddhāṃ kathāṃ Dk. 114 connected with.
          (a) To have in the train (fig. also); na śiṣyānanubadhnīta Bhag.
          (b) To bring about, cause, lead to, result in, produce as a consequence; nānubadhnāti kuśalaṃ Mb.; he vṛṣala te tathā vikṣepo'stu yathā hiṃsāmanubadhnāti P. VI. 1. 141 com.
     (3) To press, importune, urge, request; punaḥ punaścānubadhyamānā K. 69, 133, 207, 233.
          (a) To attend or follow closely, follow at the heels of, follow; ko nu khalvayamanubadhyamānastapasvinībhyāmabālasattvo bālaḥ S. 7; madhukarakulairanubadhyamānaṃ K. 139; diṣṭyā tāvadayamanaṃgo māmiva tamapyanubadhnāti K. 158, 194, 319, 347; Ki. 6. 8; Mv. 7. 18; Śi. 5. 26.
          (b) To chase, pursue; taccānubadhyamānaṃ K. 120; anubadhnatā turagamukhamithunaṃ 132.
          (c) To adhere or stick to, cling to; dhanyā citralekhā yāmanubadhnāti devīprasādaḥ K. 221.
          (d) To continue, take up; tadevānubadhyatāṃ tapaḥ 322; tānyeva ciraparicitānyakṣarāṇi māmanubadhnaṃti U. 3 v. l. for anuruṃdhaṃti; vaiśaṃpāyanāgamanālāpamevānubadhya K. 262.
          (e) To follow, succeed, come close upon; satyo'yaṃ janapravādo yadvipadvipadaṃ saṃpatsaṃpadamanubadhnātīti K. 73; see anubaṃdhi below.
     (5) To foster, cherish, entertain, harbour; teṣu kiṃ bhavataḥ snehamanubadhnāti mānasaṃ Mark. P.
     (6) To bear, endure; Ks. 49. 47.
     (7) Not to burst or break loose, hold or keep together; bhaṃge'pi hi mṛṇālānāmanubadhnaṃti taṃtavaḥ H. 1. 95. --pass. To be related to or connected with.

anubaddha p. p.
     (1) Bound, attached, tied to.
     (2) Following in the train, coming as a consequence; anubaddhārthānarthasaṃśayān vicārya Dk. 41.
     (3) Connected with, related to, relating or belonging to.
     (4) Constantly sticking to, being in; continued, continuous; nityānubaddhakulavairaḥ Ve. 1; -mugdhakākalīhasitaṃ U. 3; -vijṛṃbhakaṃ K. 66; -biṃdubhiraśrubhiḥ 135 constantly flowing.
     (5) Fixed upon, directed towards; kalahaṃsa- vaktrāyāḥ Dk. 33.

     (1) Binding or fastening on, connection, attachment, tie (lit. & fig.); yasyāṃ manaścakṣuṣoranubaṃdhastasyāmṛddhiḥ Mal. 2; etasyedṛśena darśanena kīdṛśo me hṛdayānubaṃdhaḥ iti na jānāsi U. 3 state of feeling; K. 257.
     (2) Uninterrupted succession, unbroken sequence, continuous flow, continuity; series, chain; bāṣpaṃ kuru sthiratayā viratānubaṃdhaṃ S. 4. 14; maraṇa- K. 236 following up death, desire for dying; anubaṃdhādviramedvā K. 280; yadā nātyākṣīdevānubaṃdhaṃ 309 (persistence in) following me, 317; vaira-, matsara-, Dk. 63, 161; mucyatāṃ devi śokānubaṃdhaḥ K. 63 continuous sorrow; durlabhajanaprārthanā- Ratn. 1; 4. 16; sānubaṃdhāḥ kathaṃ na syuḥ saṃpado me nirāpadaḥ R. 1. 64 continuous, uninterrupted; parivṛddharāgamanubaṃdhasevayā R. 9. 69 continuous enjoyment; ayaṃ so'rtho'narthānubaṃdhaḥ saṃvṛttaḥ V. 5 giving rise to a chain of evils.
     (3) Descendants, posterity; sānubaṃdhā hatā hyasi Ram.
     (4) Consequence, result (good or bad); ātmadoṣānubaṃdhena K. 319 in consequence of; yadagre cānubaṃdhe ca sukhaṃ Bg. 18. 39, 25; anubaṃdhamajānaṃtaḥ karmaṇāmavicakṣaṇāḥ Rām.
     (5) Intention; design, motive, cause; anubaṃdhaṃ parijñāya deśakālau ca tattvataḥ . sārāpaṃrādhau cālokya daṃḍaṃ daṃḍyeṣu pātayet Ms. 8. 126; pāpa- of evil designs.
     (6) An adjunct of a thing, a secondary member (mukhyānuyāyi, apradhānaṃ); a secondary symptom, symptomatic affection, attendant on the principal disease (vātapittādidoṣāṇāmaprādhānyaṃ); mūrchānubaṃdhā viṣamajvarāḥ Suśr.
     (7) Connecting link or adjunct of a subject or topic; theme, matter of discussion; introductory reasons; (viṣayaprayojanādhikārisaṃbaṃdhaḥ anubaṃdhaḥ) (an indispensable element of the Vedanta).
     (8) (Gram.) An indicatory syllable or letter intended to denote some peculiarity in the inflection, accent &c. of the word to which it is attached; as the in gamḷ, ṇ in iṇ; ripurāpa parābhavāya madhyaṃ prakṛtipratyayayorivānubaṃdhaḥ Ki. 13. 19.
     (9) Offence, fault. (10) An obstacle, impediment; also the clog or encumbrance of a family; domestic ties or attachment.
     (11) A child or pupil who follows the example set by his parent or teacher (mukhyānuyāyī śiśuḥ).
     (12) Beginning, commencement.
     (13) Repeated application or devotion (paunaḥ punyena abhiniveśa).
     (14) Course, pursuit.
     (15) A small bit or part, a trifle.
     (16) The junction of a fraction (with an integer), as bhāgāmubaṃdhapūrṇākaḥ.
     (17) Base, stem (prakṛti). --dhī [anubadhyate atiśvāsena vyāpriyate anayā]
     (1) Thirst.
     (2) Hickup.

anubaṃdhaka a. Connected, related.

anubaṃdhanam Connection, succession, series &c.

anubaṃdhin a. (oft. at the end of comp.)
          (a) Connected with, attached or related to; aho sarasaramaṇīyānubaṃdhinī strījanakathā Māl. 1 having for its contents or subject matter &c.; paricaryānubaṃdhī Dk. 101 continuing.
          (b) Mixed or blended with; nīlakaṃṭhakalakekānubaṃdhinā maṃdrahuṃkṛtena māmanumanyate Māl. 9.
     (2) Followed by, accompanied with; having in its train, resulting in, having as a consequence; tadiyamāpatsamaṃtato'narthānubaṃdhinī Dk. 60; ayamartho'rthānubaṃdhī 67; śāstraṃ śāstrāṃtarānubaṃdhi 156; duḥkhaṃ duḥkhānubaṃdhi V. 4 one misfortune closely follows another, or misfortunes never come single; K. 349; Ki. 1. 20; Bg. 15. 2; guṇā guṇānubaṃdhitvāttasya saprasavā iva R. 1. 22 being associated with.
     (3) Lasting, thriving, prosperous, growing apace, continuous, uninterrupted; api tvadāvarjitavārisaṃbhṛtaṃ pravālamāsāmanubaṃdhi vīrudhāṃ Ku. 5. 34; ūrdhvaṃ gataṃ yasya na cānubaṃdhi R. 6. 77 continuous, uninterrupted or all-pervading; K. 246, 393.

anubaṃdhya a.
     (1) Principal, chief, primary (which may receive an adjunct, as a root, a disease &c.).
     (2) [vadhārthaṃ baṃdhaḥ anubaṃdhaḥ karmaṇi ṇyat] To be killed (as a bull), one of the three principal sacrificial animals at the jyotiṣṭoma sacrifice; gauranubaṃdhyaḥ K. P. 2.

anubalam [anu paścātsthitaṃ balaṃ] A rearguard, an auxiliary army following another.

anubudh 4 A. To awake, to recollect; learn, obtain information of, know, be aware of; na satyamanubudhyate K. 104 does not perceive or recognise. --Caus.
     (1) To remind, put in mind of; aye samyaganubodhito'smi S. 1 well reminded.
     (2) To advise, inform; iti śiṣyeṇa kilānvabodhayat R. 8. 75.

     (1) An after-thought, recollection.
     (2) Reviving the scent-of faded perfumes, replacing them when removed by bathing.

anubodhanam Recollection, reminding.

anubrāhmaṇam A work resembling a Brahmaṇa (brāhmaṇasadṛśo graṃthaḥ P. IV. 2. 62 Sk.).

anubrāhmaṇin, --ka a. [tadadhīte veda vā iti inipratyayaḥ] One who learns or knows an anubrāhmaṇa.

anubhava --bhāva &c. See under anubhū.

     (1) Repetition of an assertion to refute it.
     (2) Repeating what has been said.
     (3) Conversation, dialogue (anu saha bhāṣaṇaṃ).

anubhāṣitṛ a. Speaking in reply; R. 16. 86.

anubhāsaḥ A kind of crow.

anubhuj 7 A. To enjoy, experience (good or bad things), suffer (as the due consequences of one's deeds); meghamuktaviśadāṃ sa caṃdrikāṃ anvabhuṃkta R. 19. 39; sā maṃḍanānmaṃḍanamanvabhuṃkta Ku. 7. 5.

     (1) Enjoyment.
     (2) A grant of land in perpetuity for service done.

anubhū 1 P.
     (1) To enjoy; taste, experience, feel, have experience or knowledge of, notice, perceive (by the senses &c.); to suffer, bear, undergo (as misery &c.); anvabhavaṃ ca madhukara iva navamālikāmārdrasumanasaṃ Dk. 121; asaktaḥ sukhamanvabhūt R. 1. 21; Ku. 2. 45; R. 7. 28; ātmakṛtānāṃ hi doṣāṇāmanubhavitavyaṃ phalamātmanaiva K. 121; anubhavati hi mūrdhnā pādapastīvramuṣṇaṃ S. 5. 7; Ku. 4. 41; saṃvatsaramātraṃ preṣyabhāvamanubhūya M. 5 undergoing the state of a servant; ṣaṣṭhamanubhavan varṣaṃ K. 77 being in the sixth year, six years old.
     (2) To learn, hear, understand; vedānnānubhavasi Ch. Up.
     (3) To try, test, put to the test; na tvaṃ tenānvabhāviṣṭhā nānvabhāvi tvayāpyasau . anubhūtā mayā cāsau tena cānvabhaviṣyahaṃ .. Bk. 5. 35.
     (4) To comprise, include, grasp; dve vāmalake anubhavati Ch. Up.
     (5) To come up with, arrive at, get, obtain (mostly Ved. in these senses). --Caus.
     (1) To cause to enjoy, feel, or experience; anubhāvayituṃ manye yatnaḥ saṃprati māṃ vidheḥ Mu. 6. 15; snānabhojanādikamanubhāvitosmi Dk. 125; āmodo na hi kastūryāḥ śapathenānubhāvyate Bv. 1. 120.
     (2) To reflect on, meditate, think of; manasā tameva vṛttāṃtamanvabhāvayat K. 176, 279.
     (3) To infer, know; tasmātparokṣavṛttīnāṃ phalaiḥ karmānubhāvyate H. 4. 101.

     (1) Direct perception or cognition, knowledge derived from personal observation or experiment, notion, apprehension, the impression on the mind not derived from memory, one of the kinds of knowledge; sarvavyavahāraheturjñānaṃ buddhiḥ . sā dvividhā smṛtiranubhavaśca . saṃskāramātrajanyaṃ jñānaṃ smṛtiḥ . tadbhinnaṃ jñānamanubhavaḥ which again is yathārtha right & ayathārtha wrong. See T. S. 34. (The Naiyāyikas recognize pratyakṣa, anumāna, upamāna and śābda as the four sources of knowledge; the Vedantins and Mīmāmsakas add two more arthāpatti and anupalabdhi; the Vaiśeṣikas and Bauddhas admit the first two only, the Saṅkhyas exclude upamā, while the Charvakas admit pratyakṣa only. Other sections of philosophical schools add three more to the six sources of knowledge recognised by the Mīmāmsakas; --saṃbhava 'equivalence'; aitihya 'fallible testimony', and ceṣṭā 'gesture'.)
     (2) Experience; anubhavaṃ vacasā sakhi luṃpasi N. 4. 105
     (3) Understanding.
     (4) Result, consequence.
     -- Comp.
          --siddha a. established by experience.

     (1) Dignity, consequence or dignity of person, majestic lustre, splendour, might, power, authority; (parimeyapuraḥsarau) anubhāvaviśeṣāttu senāparivṛtāviva R. 1. 37; saṃbhāvanīyānubhāvā asyākṛtiḥ S. 7; anubhāvasaubhāgyamātrapariśeṣadhūsaraśrīḥ U. 1, 3; 6. 20, 41, 4. 22, K. 108, 240; V. 1; Ki. 1. 6; Dk. 29, 113; Mv. 6. 53; aho mahānubhāvaḥ pārthivo duṣyaṃtaḥ S. 3 of great might or power; jāne vo rakṣasākrāṃtāvanubhāvaparākramau R. 10. 38, 2. 75 greatness (dignity) &c., valour; Ki. 6. 28; mahānubhāvaprakṛtiḥ kāpi tata evāgatavatī Mal. 1 very noble or dignified.
     (2) (In Rhet.) An external manifestation or indication of a feeling (bhāva) by appropriate symptoms, such as by look, gesture &c., called by some ensuant (bhāvabodhaka-na); bhāvaṃ manogataṃ sākṣāt svagataṃ vyaṃjayaṃti ye te'nubhāvā iti khyātāḥ; yathā bhrūbhaṃgaḥ kopasya vyaṃjakaḥ; udbuddhaṃ kāraṇaṃ svaiḥ svairbahirbhāvaṃ prakāśayan . loke yaḥ kāryarūpaḥ so'nubhāvaḥ kāvyanāṭyayoḥ .. S. D. 162, 163 &c.; dhigeva ramaṇīyatāṃ tvadanubhāvabhāvādṛte Mal. 9. 35.
     (3) Firm opinion or resolution, determination, belief; anubhāvavatā gurusthiratvāt Ki. 13. 15.

anubhāvaka a. Causing to understand, making one apprehend, indicative; -tā understanding, knowledge; yatpadena vinā yasyānanubhāvakatā bhavet Bhāṣā. P. 84.

anubhāvanam Indication of feelings by signs, gestures &c.

anubhāvin a.
     (1) Perceiving, knowing, showing signs of feeling.
     (2) An eye-witness; anubhāvī tu yaḥ kaścitkuryātsākṣyaṃ vivādināṃ Ms. 8. 69.
     (3) Being or coming after.

anubhū a. [bhū-kvip] Perceiving, understanding. --bhūḥ f. Experience, direct knowledge or perception; ayamātmā sarvānubhūḥ Bṛ. Up.

anubhūtiḥ f.
     (1) Perception, apprehension, experience.
     (2) (In Nyaya) Knowledge derived from four sources: namely direct perception, inference, comparison, and verbal knowledge; see Bhāṣā. P. 51-52.
     (3) Dignity, consequence.
     -- Comp.
          --prakāśaḥ N. of the gloss or paraphrase of the principal Upanishads by Madhavacharya.

anubhṛ 1. 3. P. To praise conformably; to throw or commit into.

anubhartṛ m. Praising conformably, imitating.

anubhrātṛ m. A younger brother (anugato bhrātaraṃ).

anumad 1 P. Ved. To rejoice over, gladden.

anumatta p. p. Intoxicated with joy.

anumādya pot. p. To be praised in succession, to be granted with praise.

anuman 4 A.
     (1) To agree or consent to, comply with, approve, sanction, grant; to permit, allow; tatra nāhamanumaṃtumutsahe moghavṛtti kalabhasya ceṣṭitam R. 11. 39; M. 1. 12; rājanyān svapuranivṛttaye'numene R. 4. 87; 14. 20; śuśrūṣamāṇāṃ giriśonumene Ku. 1. 59, 3. 60, 5. 68; kṛtābhimarṣāmanumanyamānaḥ sutāṃ S. 5. 20; imāṃ svasāraṃ ca yavīyasīṃ me kumudvatīṃ nārhasi nānumaṃtuṃ R. 16. 85 be pleased not to reject or refuse; Bh. 3. 22.
     (2) To follow, have recourse to; dharmārthāvabhisaṃtyajya saṃrabhaṃ yonumanyate Mb. --Caus.
     (1) To ask for leave or permission; ask the consent of; anumānyatāṃ mahārājaḥ V. 2 ask for leave to go; take counsel with; bhūyo'pi sakhījanamanumānayiṣyāmi S. 3.
     (2) To ask for, request or beg; Y. 1. 240.
     (3) To honour.
     (4) To put to account.

anumata p. p.
     (1) Approved, assented to, agreed to, permitted, allowed, granted &c.; kṛtamanumataṃ dṛṣṭaṃ vā yauridaṃ gurupātakaṃ Ve. 3. 22; -gamanā S. 4. 9 allowed to depart; anumato gṛhāya R. 5. 10; ubhaya-taḥ sākṣī Y. 2. 72 admitted by both parties &c.
     (2) Liked, beloved, pleasant, loved, agreeable, desired by, dear to; vṛṣṭiṃ ca karṣakajanānumatāṃ karoti Bṛ. S. 5. 72.
     (3) Being of one opinion, agreeing or concurring with. --taḥ A lover; ghanamato namatonumatān priyāḥ Śi. 6. 65. --taṃ Consent, approval, permission; prathamaṃ kasyānumate coritametattvayā hṛdayaṃ V. 3. 17.

anumatiḥ f.
     (1) Permission, consent, approval, assent.
     (2) The 15th day of the moon's age on which she rises one digit less than full, when the gods and manes receive oblations with favour; personified as a goddess or worshipped in the Rajasūya sacrifice (kalāhīnacaṃdravatī śuklacaturdaśīyutapūrṇimātithiḥ); anumatyai haviraṣṭākapālaṃ puroḍāśa nirvapati Śat. Br.; Ms. 3. 86-87.
     -- Comp.
          --patraṃ a deed expressing assent.

     (1) Assent; sufferance.
     (2) Independence.

anumaṃtṛ a. Consenting to, permitting, allowing, suffering (opp. to active agent); Bg. 13. 22; Ms. 5. 51 adviser.

anumaṃtr 10 A. To consecrate or accompany with sacred hymns or magical formulas; to dismiss with sacred and auspicious words, dismiss with a blessing; visṛṣṭaśca vāmadevānumaṃtrito'śvaḥ U. 2 (v. l. for abhimaṃtrita); rathamāropya kṛṣṇena yatra karṇo'numaṃtritaḥ Mb.

anumaṃtraṇam Consecration by hymns and prayers.

anumaraṇam See under anumṛ.

anumaruḥ A country next to a desert.

anumā 3 A, 2 P.
     (1) To infer, (as from some signs, premises &c.); aliṃgāṃ prakṛtiṃ tvāhurliṃgairanumimīmahe Mb.; conclude, guess, conjecture; dhūmādagnimanumāya T. S. 41; paryākulatvānmarutāṃ vegabhaṃgo'numīyate Ku. 2. 25; R. 15. 77, 17. 11; tejoviśeṣānumitāṃ dadhānaḥ 2. 7, 68; 5. 12; Ki. 5. 47.
     (2) To reconcile, equal. --Caus (--māpayati) To lead one to infer or guess, bespeak, indicate; ākṛtirevānumāpayatyamānuṣatāṃ K. 132, 202.

anumā [mā-aṅ] Inference, conclusion from given premises; see anumiti.

anumātṛ a. One who infers; na hi kariṇi dṛṣṭe cītkāreṇa tamanumimate'numātāraḥ.

     (1) Inferring as the instrument of an anumiti, conclusion from given premises; an inference, conclusion; one of the four means of obtaining knowledge according to the Nyaya system; (anumitikaraṇamanumānaṃ tacca dhūmo vahnivyāpya iti vyāptijñānaṃ. It is of two kinds svārthānumānaṃ & parārthānumānaṃ); pratyakṣaṃ cānumānaṃ ca śāstraṃ ca vividhāgamaṃ . trayaṃ suviditaṃ kāryaṃ dharmaśuddhimabhīpsatā .. Ms. 12. 105.
     (2) A guess, conjecture, sign to know; iṃgitairanumānaiśca mayā jñeyā bhaviṣyati Ram.
     (3) Analogy, similarity; ātmano hṛdayānumānena prekṣase S. 5 you judge (of others) by the analogy of your own heart; svānumānātkādaṃbarīmutprekṣya K. 305.
     (4) (In Rhet.) A figure which consists in a notion, expressed in a peculiarly striking manner, of a thing established by proof; S. D. 711; yatra patatyabalānāṃ dṛṣṭirniśitāḥ pataṃti tatra śarāḥ . taccāparopitaśaro dhāvatyāsāṃ puraḥ smaro manye .. anumānaṃ taduktaṃ yatsādhyasādhanayorvacaḥ K. P. 10.
     -- Comp.
          --ukti f. reasoning; logical inference.

anumāpaka a. (pikā f.) Causing an inference as an effect, being the ground of an inference.

anumitiḥ f. Inference from given premises; the knowledge obtained by means of anumāna; parāmarśajanyaṃ jñānamanumitiḥ the knowledge that arises from deduction or syllogistic reasoning.

anumitsā Desire of inferring.

anumeya pot. p. Inferable, to be inferred; phalānumeyāḥ prāraṃbhāḥ R. 1. 20.

anumārgam adv. Along the way, according to a (particular) way, on or in the way; anumārgāgatayā K. 100 come by this way.

anumāṣam adv. Like a kidney bean or in it.

anumāsaḥ [anugato māsaḥ] The following month. --saṃ ind. Every month, month after month.

anumud 1 A. (P. in epic poetry)
     (1) To rejoice with, join in rejoicing or sympathizing with; muditāmanumodate Bhāg.
     (2) To express approval; tadeva rāmamātṛbhiranumoditaṃ U. 2; approve, second, applaud; niṣeddhumāsīdanumodituṃ vā R. 14. 43; to allow with pleasure, permit; anumoditamācāryaiḥ K. 77; ananumoditāmātrā 160. --Caus. To gladden, delight, favour, permit.

     (1) The feeling of pleasure arising from sympathy, subsequent pleasure.
     (2) = anumodanaṃ see below.

     (1) Approval, assent, seconding, acceptance, compliance.
     (2) Causing pleasure.

anumṛ 6A. To follow in death; rudatā kuta eva sā punarbhavatā nānumṛtāpi labhyate R. 8. 85 followed in death by you; gativibhramasādanīravā na śucā nānumṛteva lakṣyate 58 (used actively).

anumaraṇam Following in death; tanmaraṇe cānumaraṇaṃ kariṣyāmīti me niścayaḥ H. 3; post-cremation of a widow (anumaraṇaṃ hi bharturdeśāṃtarādimaraṇe dehādyalābha eva); deśāṃtaramṛte patyau sādhvī tatpādukādvayaṃ . nidhāyorasi saṃśuddhā praviśejjātavedasaṃ .. This is allowed to Kshatriya, Vaiśya and other women, but not to Brāhmaṇa women; pṛthak citāṃ samāruhya na viprā gaṃtumarhati. Bāṇa severely condemns this practice; see K. 173-4.

anuyā 2P.
     (1) To follow, go after (fig. also); anuyāhi sādhupadavīṃ Bh. 2. 77; anuyāsyanmunitanayāṃ S. 1. 29; tvāmanuyāmi yadyapi Ku. 4. 21.
     (2) To imitate, equal; na kilānuyayustasya rājāno rakṣituryaśaḥ R. 1. 27; 9. 6; anuyātalīlaḥ 16. 71; Śi. 12. 3 followed and imitated.
     (3) To attend, accompany; iyaṃ musalamanuyāti kalena huṃkṛtena Mu. 1. 4; anuyātāruṃdhatīko vasiṣṭhaḥ U. 3. 48.

anuyā a. Following. --yāḥ Ved. Food.

anuyātṛ m. A follower.

anuyātraṃ --trā Retinue, train; attendance upon; following; tyaktabhogasya me rājan vane vanyena jīvataḥ . kiṃ kāryamanuyātreṇa Ram. --traṃ adv. In or after a procession.

anuyātrikaḥ [anuyātrā anugamanamastyasya ṭhan] A follower, attendant; S. 1, 2.

anuyānam Following.

anuyāyin a. [P. III. 2. 78]
     (1) Following; attending, consequent.
     (2) Like, similar.
     (3) Following a principal person as a teacher (mukhyasya anugaṃtā śiśuḥ). --m. A follower (lit. & fig.); rāmānujānuyāyinaḥ followers of the doctrines of R.; a dependent or attendant; nyaṣedhi śeṣo'pyanuyāyivargaḥ R. 2. 4, 19.

anuyājaḥ [yaj-ghañ, kutvābhāvaḥ] P. VII. 3. 62] A part of a sacrificial ceremony (yajñāṃgaṃ); secondary or supplementary sacrificial rite; usually written anūyāja q. v.

anuyuj 7 A.
     (1) To ask, question; kiṃ vastu vidvangurave pradeyaṃ tvayā kiyadveti tamanvayuṃkta R. 5. 18; anvayuṃkta gurumīśvaraḥ kṣiteḥ 11. 62; Śi. 13. 68.
     (2) To examine (as an accused), put on trial; Ms. 8. 79, 259.
     (3) To impart or give, as instruction.
     (4) To order, enjoin.
     (5) To select as husband.

anuyukta p. p.
     (1) Asked, questioned, examined, ordered &c.
     (2) Censured, reproached.

anuyuktin a. [astyarthe ini] One who has ordered, examined; cf. gṛhītin, adhītin.

anuyoktṛ m. An examiner, interrogator; inquirer; a teacher, especially hired or mercenary (bhṛtakādhyāpaka).

     (1) A question, inquiry, examination; aniyaṃtraṇānuyogastapasvijanaḥ S. 1; nigṛhyānuyoge P. VIII. 2. 94; vārtā-madhurākṣarayā ca vācā R. 13. 71.
     (2) Censure, reproof.
     (3) Solicitation.
     (4) Exertion, effort; anuyogaṃ vinā tailaṃ tilānāṃ nopajāyate Pt. 2. 140.
     (5) Religious meditation; spiritual union.
     (6) Comment.
     -- Comp.
          --kṛt 1. an interrogator. --2. a teacher, spiritual preceptor (anuyogaṃ kṛṃtati praśnaviṣayasaṃśayaṃ chinatti).

anuyogin a.
     (1) What combines or unites; connected with, situated in or on.
     (2) Examining, questioning.

anuyojya pot. p. Fit to be questioned, asked; asked with a reproof. --jyaḥ A servant; obedient and humble servant; ubhābhyāmapi vāsavānuyojyo duṣyaṃtaḥ praṇamati S. 7; Ms. 8. 31.

anuyojanam A question, inquiry.

anuraṃj 4 U.
     (1) To be red; bhṛśamanvarajyadatuṣārakaraḥ Śi. 9. 7 (became red or attached).
     (2) To be delighted, find pleasure; tava prakīrtyā jagatprahṛṣyatyanurajyate ca Bg. 11. 36.
     (3) To be attached or devoted to, be fond of, love, like (with acc. or loc.); samasthamanurajyaṃti viṣamasthaṃ tyajaṃti ca Ram.; aśuddhaprakṛtau rājñi janatā nānurajyate Pt. 1. 301; bhrāturmṛtasya bhāryāyāṃ yo'nurajyeta kāmataḥ Ms. 3. 173. --Caus.
     (1) To make red, redden, dye, colour; sarasakisalayānuraṃjitairvā Śi. 7. 64, 8. 17, 12. 68; Dk. 168; Ki. 12. 23, 4. 27.
     (2) To attach oneself to, please, gratify, conciliate, keep contented or satisfied; anuraktaḥ prajābhiśca prajāścāpyanvaraṃjayat Ram.; kaṃṣṭaṃ janaḥ kuladhanairanuraṃjanīyaḥ U. 1. 14; śiṣyaguṇānurāṃjitamanasaṃ Pt. 1 pleased, gratified.

anurakta p. p.
     (1) Reddened, dyed, coloured; kuṃḍalamaṇiprabhānuraktagaṃḍasthalaḥ K. 170.
     (2) Pleased, contented; loved, beloved; loyal, loyally devoted; anuraktaḥ śucirdakṣaḥ Ms. 7. 64; guṇānuraktāmanuraktasādhanaḥ Ki. 1. 31 having all means favourable to him; -prajaḥ --lokaḥ beloved by people; attached or devoted to, fond of (with loc. or acc.); api vṛṣalamanuraktāḥ prakṛtayaḥ --atha kim-caṃdragupte dṛḍhamanuraktāḥ prakṛtayaḥ Mu. 1; kathaṃ vasaṃtasenā āryacārudattamanuraktā Mk. 1; eṣā bhavaṃtamanuraktā S. 6. 18; alabhyamanuraktavān kathaya kiṃnu nārījanaṃ Mu. 6.

anuraktiḥ f. Love, attachment, devotion, affection.

anuraṃjaka a. Gratifying, pleasing.

anuraṃjanam Conciliating, satisfying, gratifying, pleasing, keeping contented; yuktaḥ prajānāmanuraṃjane syāḥ U. 1. 11.

anuraṃjita p. p. Pleased, conciliated, kept contented &c.

anurāga a. Become red, reddened. --gaḥ
     (1) Redness.
     (2) Devotion, attachment, contentment, loyalty (opp. aparāgaḥ); love, affection, passion (with loc. or in comp.); āvirbhūtānurāgāḥ Mu. 4. 21; kaṃṭakitena prathayati mayyanurāgaṃ kapolena S. 3. 15; R. 3. 10; -iṃgitaṃ a gesture or external sign expressive of love; prasādastu śabdaḥ syādanurāgajaḥ Ak.

anurāgin, anurāgavat a.
     (1) Attached, enamoured, impassioned, inspired with love; sa vṛddhastasyāmatīvānurāgavān H. 1; sā kenāpi vaṇikputreṇa sahānurāgavatī babhūva ibid.
     (2) Causing or inspiring love. --ṇī Personification of a musical note.

     (1) Sounding conformably to; a continuous tinkling echo produced by the sounds of bells, anklets &c.
     (2) The power of words called vyaṃjana q. v.; the meaning suggested by what is actually stated; kramalakṣyatvādevānuraṇanarūpo yo vyaṃgyaḥ S. D. 4.

anuratiḥ f. Love, attachment.

anurathyā [rathyāmanvāyataṃ sthitā] A foot-path, a by-road, the margin of a street, (a path along the margin of a road); prakāśīkaraṇārthaṃ ca niśāgamanaśaṃkayā . dīpavṛkṣāṃstathā cakruranurathyāsu sarvaśaḥ Rām.

anurasita a. Sounding, echoing; udgrīvairanurasitasya puṣkarasya M. 1. 21 accompanied in sound.

anurasaḥ, --rasitam Echo, reverberation; -guru magnified by echo; U. 2. 21; Mal. 9. 6; Mv. 5. 41.

anurasaḥ [anugato rasaṃ]
     (1) A secondary feeling (in Rhet.).
     (2) A secondary flavour; lavaṇa- saltish taste; madhurānurasaṃ rūkṣaṃ lavaṇānurasaṃ laghu . nāryāstu madhuraṃ stanyaṃ kaṣāyānurasaṃ himaṃ Suśr.

anurahasa a. [anugataṃ rahaḥ] Secret, solitary, private. --saṃ adv. In secret, apart, privately; Śi. 7. 50.

anurātra a. Following the night. --traṃ adv. In the night; every night, night after night.

anurādha a.
     (1) Causing welfare; also written as anūrādha; iṃdraṃ vayamanūrādhaṃ havāmahe Av.
     (2) Born under the asterism anurādhā P. IV. 3. 34. --dhā [anugatā rādhāṃ viśākhāṃ] N. of the 17th of the 27 lunar mansions or asterisms (so called because it follows rādhā or viśākhā). It consists of four stars.
     -- Comp.
          --grāmaḥ, --puraṃ the ancient capital of Laṅka or Ceylon; also called anurodhapura, described by Rajaśekhara as full of curiosities. It is a large town in the north of Ceylon "with 1600 square granite pillars which supported the floor of an enormous monastery called 'The Great Brazen Palace' said to have been built in 161 B. C."

anurud 2 P. To weep along with, condole with, sympathize; guruśokāmanuroditīva māṃ Ku. 4. 15; anuroditīva karuṇena patriṇāṃ Śi. 4. 47.

anurodanam Condolence, sympathy.

anurudh 7 U.
     (1) To obstruct, block up; śilābhirye mārgamanuruṃdhaṃti Mb.; to surround, hem in; rudrānucarairmakho mahān ... anvarudhyata Bhag.
     (2) To bind, fasten.
     (3) To stick or adhere to, follow closely, observe, practise; anurudhyādaghaṃ tryahaṃ Ms. 5. 63 should observe impurity (be in mourning); pumāṃsamanurudhya jātā pumanujā P. III. 2. 100 Sk. born immediately after a male.
     (4) To love, be fond of, or devoted to, attach oneself to; samasthamanurudhyaṃte viṣamasthaṃ tyajaṃti ca Ram.; sadvṛttimanurudhyaṃtāṃ bhavaṃtaḥ Mv. 2 follow or adopt; svadharmamanuruṃdhaṃte nātikramaṃ Ki. 11. 78; nānurotsye jagallakṣmīṃ Bk. 16. 23 love, like.
     (5) To conform to, obey, follow, adapt oneself to, act up to; niyatiṃ loka ivānurudhyate Ki. 2. 12; haṃta tiryaṃco'pi paricayamanurudhyaṃte U. 3 remember or cherish (act up to it); madvacanamanurudhyate vā bhavān K. 181, 298; vātsalyamanurudhyaṃte mahātmanaḥ Mv. 6 feel the force of compassion; tenāpi rāvaṇe maitrīmanurudhya vyapekṣyate Mv. 5. 35 following up; yadi guruṣvanurudhyase Mv. 3 regard with respect, obey; anurudhyasva bhagavato vasiṣṭhasyādeśaṃ U. 4; caṃdraketorvacanaṃ U. 5.
     (6) To coax, gratify, flatter, soothe; ityādibhiḥ priyaśatairanurudhya mugdhāṃ U. 3. 26; abhinavasevakajane'pi evamarunudhyate K. 207 please by carefully attending to &c., show regard for; 248.
     (7) To urge, press, entreat, request; āgamanāya anurudhyamānaḥ K. 277; tayā cāhamanurudhyamānastāṃ bakulamālāṃ dattavān Māl. 1; sā ca bhīmadhanvanā balavadanuruddhā Dk. 122 courted, wooed.
     (8) To assent or agree to, approve; like, comply with; prakṛtayo na me vyasanamanurudhyaṃte Dk. 106; yadi bhagavānanurudhyate Mv. 4 agree with me.

anurudh a. [rudha-kvip]
     (1) One who obeys, conforms to &c.
     (2) Obeyed, observed, practised, wanted (apekṣita), written as anūrudh Rv. 3. 55. 5.

anurodhaḥ --dhanam
     (1) Compliance, gratification, fulfilling one's wishes &c.
     (2) Conformity, accordance, obedience, regard, consideration; dharmānurodhāt K. 160, 180, 192; atra nānurodhaṃ tarkaye Mv. 7 pleasure or gratification; ādhārānurodhāt Mu. 1. 2 out of regard for; kaviśramānurodhādvā Ve. 1 in consideration of; Mv. 5, 3. 28; tadanurodhāt --dhena accordingly, in accordance with it; vadedvipaścinmahatonurodhāt Pt. 1. 100 after great consideration; humouring H. 2. 103; reference (of a rule.)
     (3) Pressing, urging, coaxing; entreaty, solicitation, request; ka ivātrānurodhaḥ K. 209; tadanurodhāt 135; vinānurodhātsvahitecchayaiva Śi. 20. 81.
     (4) Bearing of a rule.

anurodhin, --dhaka a. Compliant, complying with, obeying or conforming to, having regard to, caring for; pativratānāṃ samayānurodhinī Ram.

anurūpa a. [rūpasya sadṛśaḥ yogyo vā]
     (1) Like, resembling, corresponding to; śabdānurūpeṇa parākrameṇa bhavitavyaṃ Pt. 1; worthy of; ātmānurūpaṃ varaṃ S. 1; rūpānurūpa K. 192, 203.
     (2) Suitable or fit, adapted to, according to; with gen. or in comp.; naitadanurūpaṃ bhavataḥ K. 146, 158; bhava pituranurūpastvaṃ guṇairlokakāṃtaiḥ V. 5. 21; kāmamananurūpamasyā vapuṣo valkalaṃ S. 1; svapramāṇānurūpaiḥ secanaghaṭaiḥ ibid.; Bg. 17. 3; R. 1. 33; Me. 13. --paṃ
     (1) Resemblance, likeness, conformity.
     (2) Suitability, fitness; U. 6. 26. --paḥ The antistrophe, having the same metre as the stotriya or strophe; the second of the three verses (tṛca) recited together, the other two being stotriya and paryāsa; ekastotriyeṣvahassu yo'nyo'naṃtaraḥ so'nurūpaḥ Asval.

anurūpataḥ --peṇa, --paśaḥ adv. Conformably or agreeably to.

anulagna a. Attached to, intent on, seeking or pursuing after; yena āryāyāḥ susnigdhā dṛṣṭiranulagnā Mk. 4 intently fixed.

anulāpaḥ Repetition, tautology.

anulāsaḥ, --syaḥ [las-nartane-ghañ] A peacock.

anulip 6 P. To anoint, besmear (with perfumes &c. after bathing); smear, daub, cover over; vapuranvalipta na vadhūḥ Śi. 9. 51, 9. 15; prabhānuliptaśrīvatsaṃ R. 10. 10 covered with; tacchāyānuliptabhūtalāṃ K. 131; haribhiracirabhāsā tejasā cānuliptaiḥ S. 7. 7; so snātānuliptaḥ; timirānulipta enveloped in darkness; snāpito'nulopitaśca Dk. 71 besmeared with perfumes &c.

anulepaḥ --lepanam
     (1) Unction, anoint ing, smearing.
     (2) Ointment, unguent such as sandal juice, oil &c.; any emollient or oily application; -ārdramṛdaṃgadhvani K. 28 rubbed with paste; surabhi kusumadhūpānulepanāni K. 324.

anulepaka, --lepin a. One who anoints (the body) with unguents &c.

anulīna a. Hidden, clinging to, attached; Śi. 5. 46; janādanulīnaḥ Dk. 104 concealed from the people.

anuloma a. [anugataḥ loma P. V. 4. 75.]
     (1) 'With the hair,' regular, in natural order, successive (opp. pratiloma); (hence), favourable, agreeable; -sukho vāyuranusārayatīva māṃ Ram.; trirenāmanulomāmanumārṣṭi Śat. Br.; -kṛṣṭaṃ kṣetraṃ pratilomaṃ karṣati Sk. ploughed in the regular direction.
     (2) Mixed as a tribe. --mā A woman of the lower caste than that of the man's whom she marries; Y. 2. 288. --maṃ adv. In regular or natural order; pratilomamāliṃpennānulomaṃ Suśr. --māḥ (pl.) Mixed castes.
     -- Comp.
          --aya a. having fortune favourable.
          --artha a. speaking in favour of; jaḍānapyanulomārthān pravācaḥ kṛtināṃ giraḥ Śi. 2. 25.
          --ja, --janman a. born in due gradation, offspring of a mother inferior in caste to the father; said of the mixed tribes; Ms. 10. 25; Y. 1. 95.

     (1) Regular gradation, sending or putting in the right direction.
     (2) (In medicine) Carrying off by the regular channels, such as purging; alleviation.

anulomayati Den. P.
     (1) To stroke or rub with the hair or with the grain, go with the grain; tatra pratilomamanulomayet Suśr.
     (2) To evacuate, purge, carry off by the regular channels.

anulvaṇa a.
     (1) Not excessive, neither more nor less (anatirikta, anyūnādhika); smoothed, free from disturbing circumstances (?).
     (2) Not clear or manifest.

anuvaṃśaḥ [vaṃśamanugato vṛttāṃtaḥ] 1 A genealogical table; yaṃtrānuvaṃśaṃ bhagavān jāmadagnyastathā jagau Mb.
     (2) Modern race or species; new family.

anuvaṃśya a. [anuvaṃśe bhavaḥ yat] Relating to a genealogical table.

anuvakra a. [anukrameṇa vakraḥ] Very crooked; somewhat crooked or oblique; -ga moving somewhat obliquely or retrogressively (said of planets).

anuvac 2 P.
     (1) To say or speak after or for one; yeṣāṃ dvijānāṃ sāvitrī nānūcyeta yathāvidhi Ms. 11. 191.
     (2) To repeat, recite, reiterate; śatamanūcyamāyuṣkāmasya Ait. Br.; learn, study; parovaraṃ yajño'nūcyate Śat. Br.; araṇye'nūcyamānatvādāraṇyakaṃ Say., see anūcāna below.
     (3) To concede the point, assent to, yield.
     (4) To name, call. --Caus. To cause to recite; to read to oneself (before reading aloud); oft. used in dramas; ubhe nāma mudrākṣarāṇyanuvācya parasparamavalokayataḥ S. 1; nipu --(gṛhītvā) kathaṃ vācyatāṃ; devī-anuvācaya tāvat yadyaviruddhaṃ śroṣyāmi V. 2; Mu. 1; anuvācitalekhamamātyamavalokya M. 1.

anuvaktṛ m. Repeating, reciting(gurumukhoccāritānurūpapāṭhaka); replying &c.

     (1) Repetition, recitation; teaching, instruction, lecture, Y. 3. 190.
     (2) A chapter, section, lesson, division.
     (3) Repetition of Mantras or texts in conformity with praiṣa or injunction said by other priests.

anuvākaḥ [anūcyate iti, vac ghañ kutvaṃ P. II. 4. 29 Vart.] 1 Repeating, reciting, reading.
     (2) A subdivision of the Vedas, section, chapter.
     (3) Chapter or section referring to a compilation from the Ṛgveda or Yajurveda (ṛgyajuḥsamūha).
     -- Comp.
          --anukramaṇī N. of a table of contents attributed to Śaunaka.

anuvākyā [vac-ṇyat-kutvaṃ] A verse recited by the Hotṛ priest, in which the god is invoked to accept the offering prepared for him, or a sort of priest; Śi. 14. 20 (praśāstṛpāṭhyā tadabhāve hotṛpāṭhyā devatāhvānī ṛk Malli.).

anuvāc f. [vac-ṇic kvip] Repetition, recitation &c. See anuvacanaṃ. --m. A lecture.

     (1) Recitation of passages of the Ṛgveda by the Hotṛ priest in obedience to the injunction (praiṣa) of the adhvaryu priest.
     (2) Causing to recite, teaching, instructing.
     (3) Reading to oneself; see above.

anūkta p. p. Repeated, recited after; occurring in the text studied. --ktaṃ, --ktiḥ f.
     (1) Subsequent mention; repetition by way of explanation or illustration.
     (2) Study of the Vedas.

anūcāna a. or --naḥ [anuvac-kānac nipātaḥ P. III. 2. 109; vedasya anuvacanaṃ kṛtavān anūcānaḥ Sk.]
     (1) One devoted to study, learned; especially one wellversed in the Vedas with their Angas so as to be able to repeat, read and teach them; yo'nūcānaḥ sa no mahān Ms. 2. 154; 5. 82; Y. 3. 24; idamūcuranūcānāḥ Ku. 6. 15.
     (2) Modest, unassuming; humble, well-behaved.

anuvatsaraḥ [anukūlo vatsaro dānādiviśeṣāya]
     (1) A year.
     (2) The 4th year in the 5 years' cycle; or the 5th of 5 cycles of 12 years in the Bṛhaspati cycle.

anuvad 1 P.
     (1) To imitate in speaking, mock (with acc.); giraṃ naḥ ... anuvadati śukaste maṃjuvāk paṃjarasthaḥ R. 5. 74 repeat; uktamanuvadati Sk.; (P. & A.) to resound, echo; anuvadati vīṇā P. I. 3. 49 Sk. anuvadate kaṭhaḥ kalāpasya ibid.; sabhābhittipratidhvānairbhayādanvavadanniva Śi. 2. 67 echoed and approved also; ghoṣasyānvavadiṣṭeva laṃkā pūtakratoḥ puraḥ Bk. 8. 29.
     (2) To repeat or say again by way of explanation, illustration or corroboration; See Kull. on Ms. 1. 74; 2. 6.
     (3) To repeat, tell, say (generally); nijamanorathamanuvadaṃtyā Dk. 21.
     (4) To abuse, rail at. --Caus. To cause to resound or echo.

     (1) Repetition (in general); guṇa- K. 206.
     (2) Repetition by way of explanation, illustration or corroboration; anuvāde caraṇānāṃ P. II. 4. 3 (siddhasyopanyāse Sk.).
     (3) Explanatory repetition or reference to what is already mentioned, such as paraphrase or free translation; particularly, any portion of the Brahmaṇas which comments on, illustrates, or explains a Vidhi or direction previously laid down and which does not itself lay down any directions; a supplementary repetition, opp. to vidhi 'authoritative or direct injunction'; vidhivihitasya anuvacanamanuvādaḥ . nānuvādapunaruktayoḥ viśeṣaḥ śabdābhyāsopapatteḥ Nyaya sūtra. It is of 3 kinds: bhūtārtha- (sadeva saumyedamagra āsīt); stutyartha- (vāyurvai kṣepiṣṭhā devatā) and guṇa- (agnihotraṃ juhoti ityukte dadhnā juhoti iti guṇavidhānāṃt); see arthavāda also.
     (4) Corroboration, confirmation.
     (5) Slander, abuse, reviling.
     (6) Advertisement, notice; report, rumour.
     (7) Commencement of speech (vācāraṃbhaṇamātraṃ.).

anuvādaka, --vādin a.
     (1) Explanatory, corroborative, repeating with comment, explanation or illustration; āraṃbhaśca sāhasānuvādī Dk. 95 bespeaks.
     (2) Conformable to, in harmony with, like; yuktagītānuvādinā Ram.; tadanuvādiguṇaḥ kusumodgamaḥ R. 9. 30. --n m. N. of any one of the three notes of the gamut.

anuvādya pot. p.
     (1) To be explained or illustrated.
     (2) (In gram.) To be made the subject of an assertion (in a sentence), opposed to vidheya which affirms or denies something about the subject. In a sentence the anuvādya or subject which is supposed to be already known is repeated to mark its connection with the vidheya or predicate and should be placed first; anuvādyamanuktvaiva na vidheyamudīrayet; in vṛddhirādaic ādaic should have been placed first, though the construction is defended by Patanjali.

anuvartana, --vartin &c. see anuvṛt.

anuvaśa a. [vaśamanugataḥ] Subject to the will of another, obedient. --śaḥ Subjection, obedience (to the will of another).

anuvas 1 P. To dwell near to or along with (with acc.).

anuvāsin a. One who dwells near; resident.

anuvasita a. [vas-kta]
     (1) Dressed clothed, wrapped up.
     (2) Fastened, or bound to, attached to.

anuvahaḥ One of the 7 tongues of fire.

anuvātaḥ [anugato vātaḥ] The windward direction; the wind which blows from the pupil to the preceptor &c.; prativāte'nuvāte ca nāsīta guruṇā saha Ms. 2. 203.

anuvāram ind. Time after time, repeatedly, frequently.

anuvās 10 P.
     (1) To scent, perfume.
     (2) To use the oily enema (see the next word); treat by using such enema; avaśyaṃ sthāpanīyāśca nānuvāsyāḥ kathaṃcana Suśr.

anuvāsaḥ --sanam
     (1) Perfuming or scenting (in general,) with incense &c.
     (2) Perfuming clothes by dipping the ends.
     (3) (-naḥ also) A syringe, clyster-pipe (Mar. picakārī); an oily enema or the operation itself; asādhyatā vikārāṇāṃ syādeṣāmanuvāsanāt Suśr.; dvidhā vastiḥ parijñeyo nirūhaścānuvāsanaṃ . kaṣāyādyairnirūhaḥ syāt snehādyairanuvāsanam .. (anuvasati anuvāsaraṃ vā dīyate anuvasannapi na duṣyati anudivasaṃ vā dīyate iti anuvāsanaḥ).

anuvāsita a.
     (1) Fumigated, perfumed.
     (2) Administered as an enema; treated by this operation.

anuvid 6 U.
     (1) To find, discover, see, obtain.
     (2) To deem, consider.
     (3) To marry.

anuvittiḥ f. Finding, obtaining.

anuviddha See under anuvyadh.

anuvidhā 3 U.
     (1) To lay down a rule, regulate.
     (2) To obey, act up to, follow, conform to; See anuvidhāyin; padamanuvidheyaṃ ca mahatāṃ Bh. 2. 28 the foot-steps of the great have to be trodden in.
     (3) To resemble, imitate. --pass. To be trained to follow rules; obey.

     (1) Obedience.
     (2) Acting in conformity to (orders &c.)

anuvidhāyin a.
     (1) Obedient, submissive, compliant, conforming to orders; sā strī yānuvidhāyinī H. 2. 141; bhavitavyānuvidhāyīnīṃdriyāṇi V. 3.
     (2) Resembling; nijavadhūśvasitānuvidhāyini Śi. 6. 23, 15. 96.

anuvinaś 4 P. To disappear, vanish or perish after or along with another.

anuvināśaḥ Perishing after.

anuviś 6 P. To enter or go after, follow.

anuveśaḥ --śanam
     (1) Following, entering after.
     (2) Marriage of a younger brother before the elder is married; (jyeṣṭhātikrameṇa kaniṣṭhasya vivāhaḥ); yavīyaso'nuveśo hi jyeṣṭhasya vidhilopakaḥ Mb.

anuveśya a. [anukrameṇa veśamarhati, yat] A next-door neighbour.

anuviśvaḥ (pl.) N. of a people in the north-east.

anuviṣṭaṃbhaḥ Being obstructed in consequence of.

anuvṛt 1 A. (sometimes P. also)
     (1) (Transitively used)
          (a) To go or roll after, follow, pursue; (fig.) to follow, conform to, act according to, obey, adapt oneself to, be guided by; humour; ahaṃ tāvatsvāminaścittavṛttimanuvartiṣye S. 2; te'pi paricayamanuvartaṃte K. 289; kimatra citraṃ yadi viśākhe śaśāṃkalekhāmanuvartete S. 3 approve of her choice; laukikānāṃ hi sādhūnāmarthaṃ vāganuvartate U. 1. 10 words conform to the sense; na kulakramamanuvartate K. 104 follow; madhu dvirephaḥ kusumaikapātre papau priyāṃ svāmanuvartamānaḥ Ku. 3. 36 followed his mate in drinking, drank after her; Bh. 2. 110; Bg. 3. 23; Dk. 80, 96, 126; kṛtajñatāmanuvartamānena Mu. 3 following the path of gratitude; prabhucittameva hi jano'nuvartate Śi. 15. 41; Mal. 3. 2.
          (b) To imitate, resemble; equal; te'nvavartan pitṝnsarve yaśasā ca balena ca Mb.
          (c) To gratify, humour, please; Dk. 65.
     (2) (Intransitively used)
          (a) To follow, come after; saṃgrāhya ityanuvartate H. 3.
          (b) To continue, endure.
          (c) To act towards, behave.
          (d) (In gram.) To be repeated or supplied from a preceding rule, Sūtra or assertion (said of a word or rule which continues to exercise influence on what follows); e. g. in P. IV. 3. 95 bhaktiḥ so'sya (occurring in Sutra 89 before) ityanuvartate Sk. --Caus.
     (1) To cause to revolve, turn round; evaṃ pravartitaṃ cakraṃ nānuvartayatīha yaḥ Bg. 3. 16.
     (2) To act up to, follow, obey; tathāpi lokayātrānuvartanīyā Mv. 7; putraiḥ pitaro lokadvayepyanuvartanīyāḥ Ve. 3; K. 367.
     (3) To favour, oblige; comply with one's request; vidhināpi bhavateva vayamanuvartitāḥ K. 73; yathācittamanuvartanīyaḥ Mal. 7.
     (4) To put in, carry out.
     (5) To repeat or supply from a preceding Sūtra; kecittu vijāyate iti nānuvartayaṃti P. V. 2. 13 Sk.
     (6) To use, employ.
     (7) To lead one to, attach to.
     (8) To speak in favour of, speak for; to approve.
     (9) To imitate, do after one; satāṃ caritānyanuvartitāni nadriyāṇi K. 298.

     (1) Following(fig. also); attending, compliance, obedience, conformity; prakṛtasyānuvartane Ak.; idamāścaryamathavā lokasthityanuvartanaṃ Mv. 7. 4; dākṣiṇya- Dk 161.
     (2) Gratifying, obliging.
     (3) Approval of, concurrence in.
     (4) Continuance; result, consequence.
     (5) Supplying from a preceding Sūtra.

anuvartin a.
     (1) Following, obeying, conforming to, with acc. or in comp.; rākṣasāścāpi gṛhyaṃte nityaṃ chaṃdānuvartibhiḥ Pt. 1. 69; narādhipā nīcajanānuvartinaḥ 1. 383.
     (2) Guided by, following the advice of; obedient, faithful, compliant; anuvartini kalatre Pt. 1. 101, 298.
     (3) Like, resembling; suitable, worthy.

anuvartman a. [anugato vartma] Following, attending.

anuvṛtta p. p.
     (1) Obeying, following &c.
     (2) Uninterrupted, continuously kept up, continued; anuvṛttastvayā bhagīrathagṛhe prasādaḥ U. 7.
     (3) Rounded off; taperingly round (kramaśaḥ vartulākāra); dīrghānuvṛttapīnabāhunā K. 179.
     (4) Supplied from a preceding rule &c.
     (5) Conforming to the character (śīlānugata). --ttaṃ Obedience, conformity, compliance; mūrkhaṃ chaṃdo'nuvṛttena (gṛhṇīyāt) Chaṇ. 33.

anuvṛttiḥ f.
     (1) Assenting to, approval; tavānuvṛttiṃ na ca kartumutsahe Ku. 5. 65.
     (2) Obedience, conformity, following, continuance in (opp. vyāvṛtti); taking up; continuity; jyeṣṭhānuvṛttijaṭilaṃ R. 13. 78 by following the example of; anuvṛttyā pramārṣṭumāgataḥ Dk. 100 service; tatāna vahniḥ pavanānuvṛttyā Ki. 16. 52 in consequence of.
     (3) Acting according or suitably to, compliance, acquiescence; gratifying, pleasing; kāṃtā-cāturyamapi śikṣitaṃ vatsena U. 3; Mal. 9; Śi. 9. 58; Dk. 55; K. 265; M. 2. 9; rājyaṃ hi nāma rājadharma- parasya nṛpatermahadaprītisthānaṃ Mu. 3 who conforms to or is true to the duties of kings; (previous) compliant or obedient spirit, previous course of conduct; U. 7. 5.
     (4) Remembrance Ki. 18. 18.
     (5) (Gram.) Being supplied or repeated in a following rule; continued influence of a preceding on a following rule.
     (6) Imitating, resembling &c.
     (7) Repetition; varṇānāmanuvṛttiranuprāsaḥ.

anuvṛddhi a. Ved. Increasing in regular ratio.

anuvelam ind. Ever and anon, constantly; iti sma pṛcchatyanuvelamādṛtaḥ R. 3. 5; Śi. 3. 79.

anuvellita a. [vell-kta] Bent in conformity with; bent under. --taṃ Securing with bandages, bandaging; a sort of bandage (vraṇalepanabaṃdhabhedaḥ) one of the 14 kinds mentioned by Suśruta.

anuvya a. [anuvyayati anugacchati vyeka] Following (anugata); -vyamivāsuḥ Kāty. (nyagbhūmiṃ prāptā iva).

anuvyaṃjanam A secondary token.

anuvyadh 4 P.
     (1) To hit or pierce again; viddhamanuvidhyataḥ Ms. 9. 43.
     (2) To wound, pierce; kāmaśarānuviddhaḥ &c.
     (3) To fill or mix with, blend with, see anuviddha below.
     (4) To impel, urge.

anuviddha p. p.
     (1) Pierced, bored; kīṭānuviddharatnādisādhāraṇyena kāvyatā S. D.
     (2) Overspread, intertwined; surrounded, full of; pervaded by, replete or filled with, abounding in, mixed or blended with, intermixed; sarasijamanuviddhaṃ śaivalenāpi ramyaṃ S. 1. 20; kvacitprabhālepibhiriṃdranīlairmuktāmayī yaṣṭirivānuviddhā R. 13. 54 interwoven with emeralds; 16. 48, 6. 18; alake bālakuṃdānuviddhaṃ Me. 65; saurabhya- Mk. 1; kopānuviddhāṃ ciṃtāṃ nāṭayan Mu. 3; Ku. 3. 35; pāṃḍutānuviddheva dehacchaviḥ Dk. 112; 137; Mal. 1.
     (3) Connected with, relating to; adhering to; deśavārtānuviddhā saṃkathā Dk. 117, 124; udrūrṇaloṣṭalaguḍaiḥ parito'nuviddhaṃ Śi. 5. 25 chased, closely followed or pursued.
     (4) Set, inlaid; variegated; ratnānuviddhārṇavamekhalāyā diśaḥ sapatnī bhava dakṣiṇasyāḥ R. 6. 63, 14; Śi. 4. 49.

anuvedhaḥ, --vyādhaḥ
     (1) Hurting, piercing, perforating; na hi kīṭānuvedhādayo ratnasya ratnatvaṃ vyāhaṃtumīśāḥ S. D. 1.
     (2) Contact, union; mukhāmodaṃ madirayā kṛtānuvyādhamudvaman Śi. 2. 20.
     (3) Blending, mixture; fusion.
     (4) Obstructing.

anuvyavasāyaḥ (In Nyaya) Consciousness of the perception; (in Vedānta phil.) perception of a sentiment or judgment.

anuvyākhyānam [anurūpaṃ vyākhyānaṃ] That which comments on and explains Mantras, Sūtras &c. (maṃtravivaraṇaṃ); especially, that portion of a Brahmaṇa which explains difficult Sūtras, texts &c. occurring in another place (maṃtrādīnāmanurūpārthaprakāśakaṃ vyākhyānaṃ.)

anuvyāharaṇaṃ, --vyāhāraḥ
     (1) Repetition, repeated utterance; mentioning along with something else.
     (2) A curse, imprecation.

anuvyāhārin a. Cursing; execrating.

anuvraj 1 P.
     (1) To follow, go after; tāṃ vrajaṃtīmanuvavrāja K. 132, 210; attend especially a departing guest (as far as the bank of water, lake, &c.) as a mark of respect; Y. 1. 113; taṃ mātaro devamanuvrajaṃtyaḥ Ku. 7. 38; yamicchetpunarāyāṃtaṃ nainaṃ dūramanuvrajet Ram.
     (2) To visit in order, seek.
     (3) To go to or near; betake oneself to; mṛgā mṛgaiḥ saṃgamanuvrajaṃti Pt. 1 deer herd or associate with deer.
     (4) To obey, to do homage to.

anuvrajanaṃ, --vrajyā Following, going after, especially a departing guest; Ms. 3. 107.

anuvrājya pot. p. To be followed as by the relatives of a dead person to the cemetery.

anuvrata a. [anukūlaṃ vrataṃ karma yasya]
     (1) Devoted or faithful to, attached to (with acc. or gen.); priyatamā kā anuvratā Bh. 2. 103; vaiśyāḥ kṣatramanuvratāḥ Ram.
     (2) Duly performing the vows or duties prescribed (opp. apavrata). --taḥ A class of Jaina ascetics.

anuśatika a. Accompanied with, or bought for, a hundred; -ādiḥ a class of words or gaṇa mentioned in P. VII. 3. 20, where both members undergo Vṛddhi.

anuśaya, --śayin &c. See under anuśī.

anuśaraḥ [anu-śṛṇāti, śṝ-ac] A sort of evil-spirit, Rākṣasa.

anuśastram [anugataṃ śastraṃ śastrārthe prayuktaṃ] Anything used (for the time being) instead of a regular instrument, such as a finger-nail; a secondary weapon or instrument.

anuśās 2 P.
          (a) To advise, persuade, prevail upon, address; iti dhruvecchāmanuśāsatī sutāṃ śaśāka menā na niyaṃtumudyamāt Ku. 5. 5; pūrvānuśiṣṭāṃ nijagāda bhojyāṃ R. 6. 59.
          (b) To direct, tell, order, enjoin; to teach, instruct (how to act); daśarathaprabhavānuśiṣṭaḥ R. 13. 75; vatse tvamadhunā'nuśāsanīyāsi S. 4; rājapatnīniyogasthamanuśādhi purījanaṃ Bk. 20. 17; ko nu khalu māmevamanuśāsti V. 4 tells, directs; maghavā vanagamanāya kṛtabuddhiṃ bhavaṃtamanuśāsti V. 5 tells, directs; māṇavakaṃ dharmamanuśāsti Sk.; Ms. 6. 86.
     (2) To rule, govern.
     (3) To chastise, punish, correct; iyameva tāvatprathamamanuśāsanīyā Ve. 2; arikulamanuśāsanīyaṃ 3; svakarma khyāpayanbrūyānmāṃ bhavānanuśāstviti Ms. 11. 100, 9. 233.
     (4) To praise, extol.
     (5) To accomplish, perform, execute.

anuśāsaka, --śāsin, --śāstṛ, or śāsitṛ a. One who directs, instructs, governs or punishes; kaviṃ purāṇamanuśāsitāraṃ Bg. 8. 9 ruler; eṣa corānuśāsī rājeti bhayādutpatitaḥ V. 4.

anuśāsanam Advice, persuasion, direction, order, command; instruction, laying down rules or precepts; a law, rule, precept; treatment (of a subject), (with the object in comp. or with gen., the agent, if expressed, being put in the instr. or gen.); bhavatyadhikṣepa ivānuśāsanaṃ Ki. 1. 28 words of advice; tanmanoranuśāsanaṃ Ms. 8. 139; 6. 50; 2. 159; yauvana- K. 146; nāmaliṃga- laying down rules on the gender of nouns, explanation of gender &c.; śabdānuśāsanaṃ Sk.; śabdānāmanuśāsanamācāryasya ācāryeṇa vā P. II. 3. 66 Sk.
     -- Comp.
          --para a. obedient.
          --parvan N. of the 13th book of the Mahabharata (so called because it lays down precepts of advice).

anuśiṣṭiḥ f. Instruction, teaching; order, command.

anuśikṣin a. Practising, learning.

anuśiśuḥ f. [anugatā śiśunā] An animal followed by its young one.

anuśī 2 A.
     (1) To lie or sleep with, sleep along with; lie upon, close or along; lay oneself down; to adhere to or follow closely, cling or stick to; śayānaṃ cānuśete hi tiṣṭhaṃtamanutiṣṭhati . anudhāvati dhāvaṃtaṃ karma pūrvakṛtaṃ naraṃ .. Subhaṣita.
     (2) To repent, grieve for; dattamiṣṭamapi nānvaśeta saḥ Śi. 14. 45; purānuśete tava caṃcalaṃ manaḥ Ki. 8. 8.

anuśayaḥ [śī-ac]
     (1) Repentance, remorse; regret, sorrow; nanvanuśayasthānametat Mal. 8; kutaste'nuśayaḥ M. 3 why should you be sorry; bāṣpaṃ pramṛjya vigatānuśayo bhaveyaṃ S. 7. 25; ito gatasyānuśayo mā bhūditi V. 4; Śi. 2. 14.
     (2) Intense enmity or anger; śiśupālo'nuśayaṃ paraṃ gataḥ Śi. 16. 2; yasminnamuktānuśayā sadaiva jāgarti bhujaṃgī Mal. 6. 1.
     (3) Hatred.
     (4) Close connection, as with a consequence; close attachment (to any object).
     (5) (In Vedānta phil.) The result or consequence of bad deeds which very closely clings to them and makes the soul enter other bodies after enjoying temporary freedom from recurring births; (svargārthakarmaṇo bhuktaphalasya avaśeṣaḥ kaścidanuśayo nāma bhāṃḍānusārisnehavat, yathā hi snehabhāṃḍaṃ viricyarmānaṃ sarvātmanā na viricyate bhāṃḍānusāryeva keścit snehaśeṣo 'vatiṣṭhate tathānuśayo'pi Tv.).
     (6) Regret in the case of purchases, technically called rescission; Ms. 8. 222; see krītānuśaya. --yī A disease of the feet, a sort of boil or abscess on the upper part.

anuśayāna a. Regretting &c. --nā A variety of heroine (parakīyanāyikābhedaḥ); one who is sad and dejected, being apprehensive of the loss of her lover (iṣṭahānijanitānutāpavatī).

anuśayin a.
     (1) Devotedly attached to, faithful.
     (2) Repentant, penitent, regretful, sorry.
     (3) Hating intensely.
     (4) Connected as with a consequence.
     (5) Enjoying the fruits of deeds; epithet of the soul.

anuśīlanam Intent or assiduous application, constant pursuit or exercise, constant or repeated practice or study; vijñātasārāṇyanuśīlanena Ki. 16. 28.

anuśīlita a. Assiduously practised, repeatedly done, carefully attended to or studied.

anuśuc 1 P. To bewail, mourn over, regret; kathaṃ tameva caurahatakamanuśocasi Mk. 3; naṣṭaṃ mṛtamatikrāṃtaṃ nānuśocaṃti paṃḍitāḥ Pt. 1. 333; śaiśavaṃ te smṛtvātmānamanuśocāmi K. 333; Ve. 5. 4 condole with, weep with. --Caus. To mourn over, deplore, grieve for, regret; tṛṇamiva vane śūnye tyaktā na vāpyanuśocitā U. 3. 32 nor was she (her loss) regretted.

anuśucikā A ceremony enjoined by the Vedas (?).

anuśokaḥ, --śocanam Sorrow, repentance, regret; anuśu (śo) citaṃ in the same sense.

anuśocaka --śocin a.
     (1) Regretful, penitent.
     (2) Causing regret.

anuśru 5 P.
     (1) To hear (= śru); nānuśuśrumajātvetat Ms. 9. 100; tadyathānuśrūyate Pt. 1 heard, related.
     (2) To hear repeatedly as from a sacred authority, hand down as by Vedic tradition.

anuśravaḥ Vedic or sacred tradition.

anuślokam [anuślokyate gīyate, ślok, karmaṇi ac] A kind of Sama (mahāvratageyaḥ sāmabhedaḥ).

anuṣaṃj (-saṃj) 1 P. To adhere or cling to, follow closely. --pass. (--ṣajyate)
     (1) To stick, cling, adhere to, be attached to (fig. also); dharmapūte ca manasi nabhasīva na jātu rajo'nuṣajyate Dk. 43; sometimes occurring as anuṣajjate (from sasj also); yadā hi noṃdriyārtheṣu na karmasvanuṣajjate Bg. 6. 4; 18. 10.
     (2) To be supplied from a preceding rule or statement. --Caus.
     (1) To fasten or attach (something) to.
     (2) To supply (as an elliptical expression); iti padamatrānuṣaṃjanīyaṃ.

anuṣak --ṭ adv. In continuous or close order, one after another.

anuṣakta p. p.
     (1) Connected with, closely related or attached to; nitya-ktaḥ prakṛtikopaḥ Mv. 2 constant, everarising.
     (2) Clinging or adhering to (actively used); mṛtyurjarā ca vyādhiśca duḥkhaṃ cānekakāraṇaṃ . anuṣaktaṃ sadā dehe Mb.; hṛdi nityānuṣaktena sītāśokena tapyate U. 4. 2 constantly preying on the heart; -maṃdākinīpavitramekhalaṃ Mv. 4.

     (1) Close adherence or attendance; connection, conjunction, association; sānuṣaṃgāṇi kalyāṇāni U. 7 good things closely follow one another (come close upon one another).
     (2) Coalition, commixture.
     (3) Connection of word with word.
     (4) A word or words repeated from the context to supply an ellipsis.
     (5) Necessary consequence, inevitable result.
     (6) Connection of a subsequent with a previous act.
     (7) Incidental mention or relation (prasaṃga).
     (8) Yearning, eager longing.
     (9) Compassion, pity, tenderness. (10) (In Nyaya) Connecting together the upanaya or application and nigamana or conclusion by the use of the pronoun idaṃ (upanayavākyasthasya ayamiti padasya nigamanavākye ākarṣaṇaṃ).
     (11) The nasals connected with certain roots ending in consonants; P. VII. 1. 59 Sk.

anuṣaṃgika a. Following as a necessary result, consequent; concomitant, adhering to, connected with.

anuṣaṃgin a.
     (1) Connected with, adhering or sticking to; anīkaje rajasi mukhānuṣaṃgiṇi Śi. 17. 57.
     (2) Following as a necessary consequence; yasyānuṣaṃgiṇa ime bhogādayo bhavaṃti Bh. 3. 76.
     (3) Related or applicable to, common, prevailing (anukṣaṇaṃ prasakta); saptakasyāsya vargasya sarvatraivānuṣaṃgiṇaḥ Ms. 7. 52; vibhutānuṣaṃgi bhayameti janaḥ Ki. 6. 35 connected with, natural to, greatness.
     (4) Addicted to, devoted or attached to, fond of.

anuṣaṃjanam Concord, grammatical connection or agreement.

anuṣekaḥ --secanam Rewatering, sprinkling over again.

anuṣṭutiḥ f. Praise(in due order.)

anuṣṭubh 1 P. (-stubh) To praise after, follow in praising.

anuṣṭubh f. [anu niraṃtaraṃ stubhyate'nayā anuṣṭup vāk]
     (1) Following in praise; speech.
     (2) Sarasvatī.
     (3) N. of a class of metres consisting of four Padas of 8 syllables each, the whole stanza consisting of 32 syllables (so called because it follows with its praise i. e. anuṣṭobhati the gayatrī, which has 3 Padas), anuṣṭobhanādanuṣṭup. In later metrical systems it stands as a general name for all metres which have 8 syllables in each foot (the highest possible number being computed to be 256); paṃcamaṃ laghu sarvatra saptamaṃ dvicaturthayoḥ . guru ṣaṣṭhaṃ ca pādānāṃ śeṣeṣvaniyamo mataḥ .. which rule is sometimes violated.

anuṣṭhā 1 U. (-sthā)
     (1) To do, perform or carry out, execute, attend to (order, duty &c.); bring about, effect, accomplish (business); vivāhadīkṣāvidhimanvatiṣṭhat Ku. 7. 1, 1. 17; kimanutiṣṭhati bhagavān mārīcaḥ S. 7; ājñāpayatu āryaḥ ko niyogo'nuṣṭhīyatāmiti S. 1; ye me matamidaṃ nityamanutiṣṭhaṃti mānavāḥ Bg. 3. 31 follow; guṃrorvacanamanutiṣṭha V. 5 do as your papa orders; anutiṣṭhasvātmano niyogaṃ M. 1 look or attend to your own duty, do your business.
     (2) To follow, practise, observe (dharma, vrata &c.); commit (a sin).
     (3) To rule, govern, superintend; appoint.
     (4) To stand by or near (with loc.); Ms. 11. 112; sit on; occupy; anuṣṭhāsyati rāmasya sītā prakṛtamāsanaṃ Ram.
     (5) To follow, go after (lit.;) svakāṃtāmanutiṣṭhati Ram.; nārājake patiṃ bhāryā yathāvadanutiṣṭhati Subhāṣ.; follow, obey.
     (6) To imitate, tread in; padaṃ cehānutiṣṭhaṃti pūrveṣāṃ pūrvajaiḥ kṛtaṃ Bhag.
     (7) (Intrans.)
          (a) To place or put oneself on, be in a position, present oneself.
          (b) To remain, continue.
          (c) To be engaged in religious ceremonies (muttering prayers &c.); anutiṣṭhatāṃ brāhmaṇānāṃ M. 5.

anuṣṭha a. [sthā-ka-ṣatvaṃ] Standing after or in succession.

anuṣṭhātṛ, --ṣṭhāyin a. Doing, performing, executing &c.; one who undertakes or begins.

     (1) Doing, performance, practice, execution, accomplishment &c.; obeying, acting in conformity to; uparudhyate tapo'nuṣṭhānaṃ S. 4 practice of religious austerities; ko'pi vadhopāyaściṃtyo yasyānuṣṭhānena Pt. 1; nānuṣṭhānairvihīnāḥ syuḥ kulajā vidhavā iva Pt. 2. 95; H. 1. 103.
     (2) Commencing, undertaking, engaging in; yadi samudreṇa saha vairānuṣṭhānaṃ kāryaṃ Pt. 1.
     (3) Commencement or course of conduct, procedure, course of action; kathaṃ nyāyyamanuṣṭhānaṃ mādṛśaḥ pratiṣedhatu U. 5. 21.
     (4) Practice of religious rites or ceremonies, any religious rite or ceremony; kiṃtvanuṣṭhānanityatvaṃ svātaṃtryamapakarṣati U. 1. 8; Mv. 4. 33. --nī Performance, doing &c.
     -- Comp.
          --śarīraṃ 'the body of action'; (according to the Saṅkhya doctrine) the intermediate body between the sūkṣma or subtle and the sthūla or gross body.

anuṣṭhāpaka a. Causing to perform.

anuṣṭhāpanam Causing to do an act.

anuṣṭhāyin a. Doing, performing.

anuṣṭhita p. p. Done, performed, accomplished &c.; practised, followed, &c.; saṃbaṃdhāḥ sadanuṣṭhitāḥ Ku. 6. 29 brought about; tathānuṣṭhite that being done, thereupon; begun, undertaken; na yuktaṃ hi tyaktuṃ kāryamanuṣṭhitaṃ Ram.; (used actively) following, practising; Ms. 10. 127.

anuṣṭhiḥ --ṣṭhuḥ f. [sthā-ku] Proper order, succession (used only in instr.); -ṣṭhu, anuṣṭhyā, anuṣṭhuyā in proper order, duly, immediately, properly; immediate, direct.

anuṣṭheya, --ṣṭhātavya pot. p. To be effected, performed; followed, done conformably to; vidarbhagatamanuṣṭheyaṃ M. 5 what to do with.

anuṣṇa a.
     (1) Not hot, cold, chilly; anuṣṇairānaṃdāśrubiṃdubhiḥ R. 12. 62.
     (2) Apathetic; lazy, sluggish (alasa). --ṣṇaḥ Cold touch or sensation. --ṣṇā N. of a stream. --ṣṇaṃ A waterlily, blue lotus (utpala).
     -- Comp.
          --guḥ (--go ray) having cold rays, the moon.
          --vallikā N. of a plant nīladūrvā.

anuṣvadha a. [svadhāmanu, svadhayā sahitaḥ] Accompanied by food. --dhaṃ adv.
     (1) Through or after food.
     (2) According to food; after every sacrifice.
     (3) Voluntarily, according to one's will.

anuṣyaṃdaḥ A hind wheel.

anusaṃvaraṇam Concealing in order or succession.

anusaṃcar 1 P.
     (1) To walk alongside, follow, join.
     (2) To pursue, seek after.
     (3) To visit, go towards or to.
     (4) To penetrate, cross, traverse.
     (5) To become assimilated.

anusaṃcaraṇam Following, pursuing. --adv. At every occasion of coming.

anusaṃtan 8 U.
     (1) To extend everywhere; to diffuse, spread about, overspread.
     (2) To continue, join in.

anusaṃtatiḥ f. Continued succession, continuity.

anusaṃdhā 3 U.
     (1) To search into or after, look after, inquire into, investigate, explore, examine, ascertain; prasavayogyaṃ sthānamanusaṃdhīyatāṃ H. 3; Ms. 12. 106.
     (2) To calm, compose, quiet; ātmānamanusaṃdhehi śokacarcāṃ ca parihara H. 4.
     (3) To think of, aim at, refer or allude to, consider, deliberate; yathākartavyamanusaṃdhayitāṃ H. 3; naitadanusaṃdhāya mayoktaṃ Mv. 6 after deliberation, or because I aimed at it; alamanenātītopālaṃbhena prastutamanusaṃdhīyatāṃ H. 3 let us consider what is before us, (turn to the matter in hand); atra ... iti purāvṛttakathānu'saṃdheyā Malli. on Ku. 1. 21 should be sought or referred to.
     (4) To plan, arrange; prepare, set in order; sārasatvaṃ durgamanusaṃdhehi, durgaśodhanamanusaṃdhātavyaṃ H. 3.
     (5) To follow, go after, attend, accompany; careṇa anusaṃdhīyamānaḥ Mu. 6; kaste nirbaṃdhaḥ pade pade māmanusaṃdhātuṃ Mk. 1; etau tau māmanusaṃdhattaḥ Mk. 2 are after me.
     (6) To take up, follow, continue; taccheṣamātmavacasāpya'nusaṃdadhānaḥ K. 240 following, making up the unfinished portion &c.

     (1) Inquiry, investigation; close inspection or scrutiny, examination; Mv. 7.
     (2) Aiming at. H.
     (3) Planning, arranging, getting ready &c.; durgānusaṃdhāne ko niyujyatāṃ H. 3 equipping with the necessary materials.
     (4) A plan, scheme.
     (5) Suitable connection.
     (6) (In the Vais. phil.) The 4th step in a syllogism, the upanaya or application.

anusaṃdhānin, --saṃdhāyin a. Investigating, looking after; skilful in concerting plans.

anusaṃhita p. p. Inquired into, investigated; connected with, in accordance or union with, conformable to; ahiṃsā sarvadharmānusaṃhitā Mb.; arthadharmānusaṃhitaṃ vākyaṃ Ram. --taṃ adv. In the Samhitā text; according to this text.

anusamāpanam Regular completion

anusami 2 P. (-i)
     (1) To go to or visit successively or in order.
     (2) To join in following or being guided by.
     (3) To join, become assimilated.

anusamayaḥ Regular or proper connection, as of words.

anusaṃbaddha a. Connected with.

anusavanam ind.
     (1) After a sacrifice.
     (2) At every sacrifice, after ablutions.
     (3) Every moment.

anusāma a. [sāma anugataḥ] Conciliated, friendly, favourable.

anusāyam ind. Every evening.

anusāryakam A fragrant substance, sandal, aloe &c.

anusūcaka a. Indicative of, pointing out to.

anusūcanam Indication, pointing out.

anusṛ 1 P.
     (1) To follow(in all senses); go after, attend, pursue; to practise, observe; betake oneself to; pūrvoddiṣṭāmanusara purīṃ Me. 30 go to; udīcīṃ diśaṃ 57.
     (2) To go over or through. --Caus.
     (1) To lead, forward; vāyuranusārayatīva māṃ Ram.
     (2) To cause to pursue, follow.

anusaraḥ A follower, companion, attendant.

     (1) Following, pursuing, going after, seeking after; kraṃdanānusaraṇaṃ kriyatāṃ H. 3; kanakasūtra- pravṛttai rājapuruṣaiḥ Pt. 1.
     (2) Conformity to, accordance with, consequence of (in instr. or abl.); iṃdostvadanusaraṇakliṣṭakāṃteḥ Me. 84.
     (3) Custom, usage, habit.

     (1) Going after, following (fig. also); pursuit; vyādhānusāracakitā hariṇīva yāsi Mk. 1. 17; śabdānusāreṇa avalokya S. 7 looking in the direction of the sound; kapaṭānusārakuśalaḥ Mk. 9. 5 following up or tracing fraud.
     (2) Conformity to, accordance with, suitability, conformity to usage; kiraṇānusāragalitena K. 137, 194, 204; dharmaśāstrānusāreṇa Y. 2. 1.
     (3) Custom, usage, established practice; anusārādadhikā (vṛddhiḥ) Ms. 8. 152.
     (4) Received or established authority, especially of codes of law.
     (5) Nature, natural condition of anything.
     (6) Currency, prevalence.
     (7) Consequence, result.

anusārataḥ, anusāreṇa (in comp.) In accordance with, conformably to.

anusāraka, --sārin a.
     (1) Following, pursuing, going after, attendant on; tāmabhyagacchadruditānusārī R. 14. 70; mṛgānusāriṇaṃ pinākinaṃ S. 1. 6.; parimalaḥ pavanānusārī Dk. 91; kṛpaṇānusāri ca dhanaṃ Pt. 1. 278 going after, falling to the lot of.
     (2) According or conformable to, following; yathāśāstra- Ms. 7. 31.
     (3) Seeking, looking out for, investigating, scrutinizing; Ms. 7. 102.

anusāraṇā Going after, pursuit; tasmātpalāyamānānāṃ kuryānnātyanusāraṇāṃ Mb.

anusṛtiḥ f.
     (1) Going after, following; conforming to, accordance with.
     (2) [anusarati kulāṃtaraṃ] An unchaste woman, harlot (kulaṭā).

anusṛp 1 P. To glide along or after, follow.

anusarpaḥ A serpent-like being; a reptile in general.

anusṛṣṭa a. Created in succession.

anusṛṣṭiḥ f.
     (1) Creating in order or succession.
     (2) A ready-witted woman.

anusevin a. Practising, observing, habitually addicted to.

anusainyam [sainyamanugataṃ] The rear of an army, rear-guard.

anuskaṃdam ind. Having entered or gone into in succession; gehaṃ gehamanuskaṃdaṃ Sk.

anustaraṇam Strewing or spreading round. --ṇī [karaṇe lyuṭ]
     (1) A cover, (ācchādanaṃ such as leather); anustaraṇyā vapāmutkhidya śiromukhaṃ pracchādayet Asval.
     (2) A cow; (seyaṃ gauḥ stṛtaṃ dīkṣitamanustṛtatvāddhiṃsitatvāccānustaraṇītyucyate Say.); especially the cow sacrificed at the funeral ceremony, which enables the departed spirit to safely cross the river of Hell called vaitariṇī (anutīryate vaitariṇī nadī anayā tṝ-karaṇe lyuṭ pṛṣo-suṭ Tv.).

anustotram Praising after; N. of a work relating to the Sāmaveda.

anusneham ind. After adding oil.

anuspaṣṭa a. Plain, obvious.

anusphura a. Ved. Whizzing (as an arrow).

anusmṛ 1 P. To remember, think of, call to mind, recollect (with acc. or gen.); varaprārthanāmanusmṛtya S. 1; yadaiva anusmṛtaṃ devena S. 7; tasmātsarveṣu kāleṣu māmanusmara yudhya ca Bg. 8. 7; vyapagatamadarāgasyānusasmāra lakṣmīṃ Ki. 4. 38. --Caus. To remind (painfully), cause to remember with regret; Ki. 5. 14.

     (1) Recollection, remembering.
     (2) Repeated recollection.

anusmṛtiḥ f.
     (1) Cherished recollection; thinking of; anusmṛterbādariḥ S. B.
     (2) Thinking of one thing to the exclusion of others.

anusyūta a. [siv-kta-ūṭh]
     (1) Woven together, regularly and uninterruptedly.
     (2) Sewn on, fastened to.
     (3) Closely attached or linked to.

anusamāhāraḥ Continuing, following.

     (1) Sounding conformably to.
     (2) An after sound; echo; see anuraṇana and K. P. 4

anusvāraḥ [svṛ-ap svarāḥ; svaravarṇā eva svārāḥ, anugataḥ svārān Tv.] The nasal sound which is marked by a dot above the line () and which always belongs to a preceding vowel; anunāsikātparo'nusvāraḥ P. VIII. 3. 4.

anuhavaḥ Inviting, stirring up.

anuhuṃkṛ 8 U. To roar in imitation of, reply to; anuhuṃkurute ghanadhvaniṃ na hi gomāyurutāni kesarī Śi. 16. 25.

anuhuṃkāraḥ Roaring in imitation.

anuhṛ 1 P.
     (1) To imitate, resemble; dehabaṃdhena svareṇa ca rāmabhadramanuharati U. 4; Ki. 9. 67, sometimes with gen. of person; māturanuharati Sk.; see below.
     (2) To take after (one's parents), to always imitate their nature (A. in this sense) (gatatācchīlye); paitṛkamaśvā anuharaṃte mātṛkaṃ gāvaḥ P. I. 3. 21 Vārt.; (gataṃ prakāraḥ, piturmātuścāgataṃ prakāraṃ satataṃ pariśīlayaṃti Sk.)

anuharaṇaṃ, --hāraḥ Imitation, resemblance, similarity.

anuhārya pot. p. To be imitated. --ryaḥ Monthly obsequies on the Darśa or new moon day (cf. anvāhārya).

anuhoḍaḥ A cart (?)

anūkaḥ --kam [anu-uc samavāye kanipātaḥ kutvaṃ; or fr. aṃc with anu]
     (1) The back bone, spine (vaṃkrayādhāraḥ āyataḥ pṛṣṭhāsthiviśeṣaḥ); sadaṃ cānūkaṃ ca gṛhapateḥ Ait. Br. (where Say. remarks anūkaṃ mūtravastiḥ syāt sāsnetyeke vadaṃti ca).
     (2) A kind of sacrificial vessel; according to some, the back part of the altar; ayugmāgaṇamadhyamānūke.
     (3) Former birth or state of existence. --kaṃ
     (1) Family, race.
     (2) Disposition, temperament; character, peculiarity of race; vyādharkṣanakulānūkaiḥ paittikā hi narāḥ smṛtāḥ Suśr.

anūkāśaḥ [anu-kāś-ghañ upasargasya dīrghatvaṃ]
     (1) Reflection (of light).
     (2) Regard, reference, illustration.

anūkti, anūcāna &c. See under anuvac.

anūcīna a. [anvaṃc-kha] Ved. Coming after, successive; -ahaṃ day after day, on the following day; -garbha (go) born in successive order.

anūcyam The plank or board on the side of a bed (dakṣiṇottarayordīrghe khaṭvāṃge anūcyasaṃjñe Śaṅkara); aratnimātrāṇi śīrṣaṇyānyanūcyāni Ait. Br.; (anūcye = pārśvadvayavartinī phalake Say.)

anūḍha a.
     (1) Not borne or carried.
     (2) Unmarried; parivettānujo'nūḍhe jyeṣṭhe dāraparigrahāt Ak. --ḍhā An unmarried woman.
     -- Comp.
          --māna a. bashful, modest.
          --gamanaṃ (-ḍhā-) Fornication.
          --bhrātṛ m. (-ḍhā-) 1. the brother of an unmarried woman. --2. the brother of the concubine of a king.

anūtiḥ f. [ve-ktin, na. ta.] Not coming or going (to aid) (anāgamanaṃ).

anūdakam Want of water; drought, aridity; yathā varṣamanūdake Ram.

anūddeśaḥ 'Relative order,' N. of a figure of speech in which a reference is made in successive order to what precedes; yathāsaṃkhyamanūddeśa uddiṣṭānāṃ krameṇa yat S. D. 732.

anūdya, anūdita &c. See under anuvad.

anūna a.
     (1) Not inferior, not less (with abl. expressed or understood); not wanting or lacking in (with instr.); vṛṃdāvane caitrarathādanūne R. 6. 50; anūnasāraṃ niṣadhānnageṃdrāt 18. 1; ākṛtipratyayādenāmanūnavastukāṃ saṃbhāvayāmi M. 1 of no inferior stuff; imāmanūnāṃ surabheravehi R. 2. 54; guṇairanūnāṃ 6. 37; kiṃcidūnamanūnardheḥ R. 10. 1.
     (2) Full, whole, entire; large; maharṣabhaskaṃdhamanūnakaṃdharaṃ Ki. 14. 40; great; Śi. 4. 11; (before adjectives) very; -gururnitaṃbaḥ S. D. excessively big or heavy.
     (3) Having full power.

anūpa a. [anu-ap ūdanordeśe P. VI. 3. 98, anugatāḥ āpaḥ yasmin] Situated near water, watery, rich or abounding in water, wet, marshy. --paḥ --paṃ
     (1) A watery place or country; syaṃdanāśvaiḥ same yudhyedanūpe naudvipaistathā Ms. 7. 192; Y. 3. 42; nānādrumalatāvīrunnirjharaprāṃtaśītalaiḥ . vanairvyāptamanūpaṃ tatsasyairvrīhiyavādibhiḥ.
     (2) N. of a particular country (--pāḥ pl.); R. 6. 37.
     (3) A marsh, bog.
     (4) A pond or tank of water.
     (5) Bank or side (of a river, mountain); sāgarātparvatānūpāt Ram.; nadīṃ goyutānūpāṃ atarat ibid.
     (6) A buffalo.
     (7) A frog.
     (8) A kind of partridge.
     (9) An elephant.
     -- Comp.
          --jaṃ moist ginger.
          --prāya a. marshy, boggy.

anūpya a. [anūpe deśe bhavaḥ, yat] Being in a pond or bog.

anūbaṃdhya a. Ved. To be fastened as a sacrificial animal; vaśāmanubaṃdhyāmālabheta Śat. Br.; anubaṃdhyayeṣṭvā Asval.

anūyāja, anūrādha = anuyāja, anurādha.

anūru a. [na. ba.] Thighless. --ruḥ Aruṇa, the charioteer of the sun (who is represented as having no thighs); the dawn; see aruṇa.
     -- Comp.
          --sārathiḥ the sun (having anūru for his charioteer); gataṃ tiraścīnamanūrusāratheḥ Śi. 1. 2.

anūrjita a.
     (1) Not strong, weak, powerless.
     (2) Free from pride.

anūrdhva a. Not high, low; -bhās Ved. whose splendour does not rise, who lights no (sacred) fires.

anūrmi a.
     (1) Not waving, unruffled by waves, not fluctuating.
     (2) Inviolable.

anūvṛj m. Ved. A part of the body near the ribs.

anūṣara a.
     (1) Saline, the same as ūṣara; cf. uttama and anuttama.
     (2) Not saline.

anūha a. Thoughtless, careless.

anṛkṣara a. Ved. Thornless (as a path or couch).

anṛc-ca a. [na. ba.]
     (1) Without a hymn, not containing a verse from the Ṛgveda; anṛk sāma P. V. 4. 74 Sk.
     (2) [nāsti ṛk abhyastatayā yasya ac samāsaḥ] Not conversant with, not studying, the Ṛgveda; one not invested with the sacred thread and hence not yet entitled to study the Vedas (as a boy); yathā cājñe'phalaṃ dānaṃ tathā vipro'nṛco'phalaḥ Ms. 2. 158; anṛco māṇavakaḥ Mugdha. (In this case the form should properly be anṛca; anṛcabahvṛcāvadhyetaryeva Sk.; but sometimes anṛc also in the same sense; cf. tathā'nṛce havirdatvā na dātā labhate phalaṃ Ms. 3. 142; sahasraṃ hi sahasrāṇāmanṛcāṃ yatra bhuṃjate 131); anṛkka also in the same sense.

anṛju a. Not straight, crooked; (fig.) unfair, wicked, dishonest; na pāṇipādacapalo na netracapalo'nṛjuḥ Ms. 4. 177; P. V. 2. 75 Sk.

anṛṇa a. Free from debt, who has paid off the debt (due to another) with gen. of person or thing; enāmanṛṇāṃ karomi S. 1; tatrānṛṇāsmi U. 7; prāṇairdaśarathaprīteranṛṇaṃ (gṛdhraṃ) R. 12. 54; Mv. 5. 58; pitṝṇāmanṛṇaḥ Ms. 9. 106; 6. 94. Every one that is born has three debts to pay off: to Sages, Gods, and the Manes; cf. jāyamāno vai brāhmaṇastribhirṛṇavā jāyate brahmacaryeṇarṣibhyaḥ, yajñena devebhyaḥ, prajayāpitṛbhyaḥ; he, therefore, who learns the Vedas, offers sacrifices to Gods, and begets a son, becomes anṛṇa (free from debt); eṣa vānṛṇaḥyaḥ putrī yajvā brahmacārivāsī; cf. also ṛṣidevagaṇasvadhābhujāṃ śrutayāgaprasavaiḥ sa pārthivaḥ . anṛṇatvamupeyivānbabhau paridhermukta ivoṣṇadīdhitiḥ R. 8. 30.

anṛṇatā, --ānṛṇyam Freedom from debt; -tākṛtyenāpakāraṃ kariṣyāmi Pt. 5 do harm by way of retaliation or injury; bhartṛpriyaḥ priyairbharturānṛṇyamasubhirgataḥ M. 5. 11; yena svāmiprasādasya anṛṇatāṃ gacchāmaḥ Pt. 1 repay or requite the favour of our lord.

anṛṇin a. = anṛṇa; ekamapyakṣaraṃ yastu guruḥ śiṣye nivedayet . pṛthivyāṃ nāsti taddravyaṃ yaddatvā so'nṛṇī bhavet ..

anṛta a. [na. ta.]
     (1) Not true, false (words); -taṃ dhanaṃ Ms. 4. 170 wrongly got; priyaṃ ca nānṛtaṃ brūyāt 4. 138. --taṃ Falsehood, lying, cheating; deception, fraud; satyānṛte avapaśyañjanānāṃ Rv. 7. 49. 3; ṛtānṛte Ms. 1. 29; sākṣye'nṛtaṃ vadan 8. 97; oft. in comp.; paśu-, bhūmi-, go-, puruṣa- giving false evidence in the matter of &c.; Ms. 9. 71; cf. also: paṃca kanyānṛte haṃti daśa haṃti gavānṛte . śatamaśvānṛte haṃti sahasraṃ puruṣānṛte .. Pt. 3. 108. anṛta personified is the son of adharma and hiṃsā, husband and brother of nikṛti, father of bhaya, naraka, māyā and vedanā Viṣṇu P.
     (2) Agriculture (opp. satya); Ms. 4. 5.
     -- Comp.
          --deva a. whose gods are not true (Sāy.); Rv. 7. 104. 14; not playing fairly (?).
          --vadanaṃ, --bhāṣaṇaṃ, --ākhyānaṃ lying, falsehood.
          --vādin-vāc a. a liar.
          --vrata a. false to one's vows or promises.

anṛtaka, --anṛtin a. Lying, a liar.

anṛtuḥ [na. ta.]
     (1) Unfit season, improper or premature time; anṛtau cābhradarśane Ms. 4. 104.
     (2) Time before menstruation.
     -- Comp.
          --kanyā a girl before menstruation.

aneka a.
     (1) Not one; more than one, many; anekapitṛkāṇāṃ tu pitṛto bhāgakalpanā Y. 2. 120, Ki. 1. 16; several, various; tathātmaiko'pyanekaśca Y. 3. 144.
     (2) Separated; divided; oft. in comp.; -ākāra having many shapes or forms; diverse, multiform; -kālaṃ-vāraṃ several times, many a time and oft; -bhārya having more wives than one.
     -- Comp.
          --akṣara, --ac a. having more than one vowel or syllable; polysyllabic.
          --agra a. 1. engaged in several pursuits. --2. not concentrated or fixed on one object.
          --aṃta a. 1. [na. ba.] not alone so as to exclude all others, uncertain, doubtful, variable; syādityavyayamanekāṃtavācakaṃ --2. = anaikāṃtika q. v. (
          --taḥ) 1. unsettled condition, absence of permanence. --2. uncertainty, doubtfulness. --3. an unessential part, as the several anubandhas. -vādaḥ scepticism. -vādin m. a sceptic, a Jaina or an Arhat of the Jainas.
          --artha a. 1. having many (more than one) meanings, homonymous; as the words go, amṛta, akṣa &c.; anekārthasya śabdasya K. P. 2. --2. having the sense of the word aneka. --3. having many objects or purposes. (
          --rthaḥ) multiplicity of objects, topics &c.
          --al a. having more than one al (letter) P. I. 1. 55.
          --āśraya, --āśrita a. (in Vais. phil.) dwelling or abiding in more than one (such as saṃyoga, sāmānya); ete'nekāśritā guṇāḥ Bhaṣa. P.; dependence upon more than one.
          --kṛt m. 'doing much', N. of Śiva.
          --guṇa a. of many kinds, manifold, diverse; vigaṇayya kāraṇamanekaguṇaṃ Ki. 6. 37.
          --guptaḥ N. of a king; -arcitapādapaṃkajaḥ K. 3.
          --gotra a. belonging to two families (such as a boy when adopted), i. e. that of his own, and that of his adoptive, father.
          --cara a. gregarious.
          --citta a. not of one mind, fickle-minded; -maṃtraḥ not following the counsels of one; H. 4. 31.
          --ja a. born more than once. (
          --jaḥ) a bird (garbhāṃḍābhyāṃ jātatvāt). --paḥ an elephant (so called because he drinks with his trunk and mouth); cf. dvipa; vanyetarānekapadarśanena R. 5. 47; Śi. 5. 35, 12. 75.
          --mukha a. (khī f.) a. 1. having many faces, many-faced. --2. scattered, dispersed, going in various directions, taking to various ways; (balāni) jagāhire'nekamukhāni mārgān Bk. 2. 54.
          --mūrtiḥ 'having many forms', N. of Viṣṇu who assumed various forms to deliver the earth from calamities.
          --yuddhavijayin, --vijayin a. victorious in many battles; Pt. 3. 9, 11.
          --rūpa a. 1. of various forms, multiform. --2. of various kinds or sorts. --3. fickle, changeable, of a varying nature; veśyāṃganeva nṛpanītiranekarūpā Pt. 1. 425. (
          --paḥ) epithet of the Supreme Being.
          --locanaḥ N. of Śiva; also of Indra, and of the Supreme Being, he being said to be sahasrākṣaḥ sahasrapāt &c.
          --vacanaṃ the plural number; dual also.
          --varṇa a. involving more than one (unknown) quantity (the unknown quantities x. y. z. &c. being represented in Sanskrit by colours nīla, kāla &c.); -samīkaraṇaṃ simultaneous equation; -guṇanaṃ, -vyavakalanaṃ, -hāraḥ multiplication, subtraction or division of unknown quantities.
          --vidha a. various, different.
          --śapha a. cloven-hoofed.
          --śabda a. synonymous.
          --sādhāraṇa a. common to many, the common property of many persons Dk. 83.

anekadhā ind. In various ways, variously; jagatkṛtsnaṃ pravibhaktamanekadhā Bg. 11. 13.

anekaśaḥ ind. [vīpsārthe kārake śas]
     (1) Several or many times, frequently; anekaśo nirjitarājakastvaṃ Bk. 2. 52.
     (2) In various ways or manners.
     (3) In large numbers or quantities; putrā anekaśo mṛtā dārāśca H. 1.

anekākin a. Not alone, accompanied by.

anejat a. [na ejat] Not moving, immovable; of the same form, epithet of Brahma or the Supreme Soul (sarvadaikarūpaṃ brahma).

anekīkṛ, or bhū To make or be manifold; to divide or be divided into.

aneḍaḥ A foolish or stupid person, dolt, fool.
     -- Comp.
          --mūka a. 1. deaf and dumb; -mūkatādyaiśca dyatu doṣairasaṃmatān K. P. 7. --2. blind. --3. dishonest, fraudulent, wicked, perverse.

anedya a. Ved.
     (1) Not to be blamed; praiseworthy, chief (praśasta, pradhāna).
     (2) Not near; infinite.

anena a. Sinless, faultless (Say.); without a variegated set (of horses); Rv. 6. 66. 7.

anenas a. Sinless, blameless; not liable to error.

anenaḥ 'One who has no superior,' a sovereign or paramount lord.

aneman a. Ved. Praiseworthy.

anehas a. [na hanyate, han-asi, dhātoḥ ehādeśaḥ nañi hana eha ca Uṇ. 4. 223] (lit.) Not killed or destroyed or obstructed; Ved. without a rival, incomparable, unattainable, inaccessible; unobstructed, not liable to be hurt or injured; śaṃbhuvaṃ maṃtraṃ devā anehasaṃ Rv. 1. 40. 6, 4; 6. 50. 3. --m. (hā-hasau &c.) Time (not being liable to be destroyed).

anaikāṃta a. Variable, uncertain, unsteady; occasional, casual, (as a cause not invariably attended by the same effects.).

anaikāṃtika a. ( f.)
     (1) Unsteady, uncertain; not to the point, not very important; bhṛtyo'bhṛtya iti -kametat Pt. 1.
     (2) (in Logic) Name of one of the five main divisions of hetvābhāsa (fallacies,) otherwise called savyabhicāra. It is of three kinds:
          (a) sādhāraṇa, where the hetu is found both in the sapakṣa and vipakṣa, the argument being therefore too general.
          (b) asādhāraṇa where the hetu is in the pakṣa alone, the argument being not general enough.
          (c) anupasaṃhārī which embraces every known thing in the pakṣa, the argument being non-conclusive.

     (1) Existence of many; absence of one, plurality.
     (2) Want of union, confusion, disorder, anarchy.

anaikāṃtyam Variable nature.

anaitihyam Absence of traditional sanction or authority, or that which is without such sanction; anāgatamanaitihyaṃ kathaṃ brahmādhigacchati Mb.

ano ind. No, not; abhāve na hyano nāpi Ak.

anokaśāyin m. () Not sleeping in a house, a beggar.

anokaha a. [an-okas-hā] Not leaving the house. --haḥ [anasaḥ śakaṭasya akaṃ gatiṃ haṃti, han, -ḍa] A tree; anokahākaṃpitapuṣpagaṃdhī R. 2. 13; 5. 69.

anoṃkṛta a.
     (1) Not attended with the sacred syllable om Ms. 2. 74.
     (2) Not accepted.

anodana a. Without food (as a vrata).

anovāhya a. To be carried in a carriage (anasā vāhyaḥ).

anaucityam Unfitness, impropriety; anaucityādṛte nānyadrasabhaṃgasya kāraṇaṃ K. P. 7.

anaujasyam Want of vigour, energy, or strength; S. D. thus defines it; daurgatyādyairanaujasyaṃ dainyaṃ malinatādikṛt.

     (1) Freedom from pride, modesty, humility.
     (2) Tranquility, placidity, calmness; nadīranauddhatyamapaṃkatā mahīṃ Ki. 4. 22.

anaurasa a. Not legitimate, not one's own, adopted (as a son).

aṃt 1 P. (aṃtati) To bind.

aṃta a. [am-tan Uṇ. 3. 86]
     (1) Near.
     (2) Last.
     (3) Handsome, lovely; Me. 23; Śi. 4. 40, (where, however, the ordinary sense of 'border' or 'skirt' may do as well, though Malli. renders aṃta by ramya, quoting the authority of śabdārṇava).
     (4) Lowest, worst.
     (5) Youngest. --taḥ (n. in some senses)
          (a) End, limit, boundary (in time or space); final limit, last or extreme point; sa sāgarāṃtāṃ pṛthivīṃ praśāsti H. 4. 50 bounded by the ocean, as far as the sea; apāṃgau netrayoraṃtau Ak.; udyukto vidyāṃtamadhigacchati H. 3. 114 goes to the end of, masters completely; śrutasya yāyādayamaṃtamarbhakastathā pareṣāṃ yudhi ceti pārthivaḥ (where aṃta also means end or destruction); jīvalokasukhānāmaṃtaṃ yayau K. 59 enjoyed all worldly pleasures; ālokitaḥ khalu ramaṇīyānāmaṃtaḥ K. 124 end, furthest extremity; digaṃte śrūyaṃte Bv. 1. 2.
     (2) Skirt, border, edge, precinct; a place or ground in general; yatra ramyo vanāṃtaḥ U. 2. 25 forest ground, skirts of the forest; odakāṃtāt snigdho jano'nugaṃtavyaḥ S. 4; upavanāṃtalatāḥ R. 9. 35 as far as the borders or skirts; vṛttaḥ sa nau saṃgatayorvanāṃte R. 2. 58, 2. 19; Me. 23.
     (3) End of a texture, edge, skirt, fringe or hem of a garment; vastra-; pavanapranartitāṃtadeśe dukūle K. 9 (by itself in Veda).
     (4) Vicinity, proximity, neighbourhood, presence; nādhīyīta śmaśānāṃte grāmāṃte Ms. 4. 116; Y. 2. 162; 1. 143; gaṃgāprapātāṃtavirūḍhaśaṣpaṃ (gahvaraṃ) R. 2. 26; puṃso yamāṃtaṃ vrajataḥ P. 2. 115 going into the vicinity or presence of Yama; anyonyāmaṃtraṇaṃ yatsyājjanāṃte tajjanāṃtikaṃ S. D.; yāṃ tu kumārasyāṃte vācamabhāṣathāstāṃ me brūhi Śat. Br. (These four senses are allied).
     (5) End, conclusion, termination (opp. āraṃbha or ādi); sekāṃte R. 1. 51; dināṃte nihitaṃ R. 4. 1; māsāṃte, pakṣāṃte, daśāhāṃte &c.; ekasya duḥkhasya na yāvadaṃtaṃ gacchāmyahaṃ pāramivārṇavasya Pt. 2. 175; vyasanāni duraṃtāni Ms. 7. 45; daśāṃtamupeyivān R. 12. 1 going to the end of the period of life (end of the wick); vyasanaṃ vardhayatyeva tasyāṃtaṃ nādhigacchati Pt. 2. 180; oft. in comp. in this sense, and meaning 'ending in or with,' 'ceasing to exist with,' 'reaching to the end'; tadaṃtaṃ tasya jīvitaṃ H. 1. 91 ends in it; kalahāṃtāni harmyāṇi kuvākyāṃtaṃ ca sauhṛdaṃ . kurājāṃtāni rāṣṭrāṇi kukarmāṃtaṃ yaśo nṛṇāṃ .. Pt. 5. 76; phalodayāṃtāya tapaḥsamādhaye Ku. 5. 6 ending with (lasting till) the attainment of fruit; yauvanāṃtaṃ vayo yasmin Ku. 6. 44; R. 11. 62, 14. 41; vipadaṃtā hyavinītasaṃpadaḥ Ki. 2. 52; yugasahasrāṃtaṃ brāhmaṃ puṇyamaharviduḥ Ms. 1. 73 at the end of 1000 Yugas; prāṇāṃtaṃ daṃḍaṃ Ms. 8. 359 capital punishment (such as would put an end to life).
     (6) Death, destruction; end or close of life; dharā gacchatyaṃtaṃ Bh. 3. 71 goes down to destruction; yogenāṃte tanutyajāṃ R. 1. 8; ekā bhavetsvastimatī tvadaṃte 2. 48; 12. 75; mamāpyaṃte S. 6; adya kāṃtaḥ kṛtāṃto vā duḥkhasyāṃtaṃ kariṣyati Udb.; oṣadhyaḥ phalapākāṃtāḥ Ms. 1. 46; aṃtaṃ yā To be destroyed, perish, be ruined.
     (7) (In gram.) A final syllable or letter of a word; ajaṃta ending in a vowel; so, halaṃta, subaṃta, tiṅaṃta &c.
     (8) The last word in a compound.
     (9) Ascertainment, or settlement (of a question); definite or final settlement; pause, final determination, as in siddhāṃta; ubhayorapi dṛṣṭoṃtastvanayostattvadarśibhiḥ Bg. 2. 16 (sadasatoḥ ityarthaḥ). (10) The last portion or the remainder (n. also); niśāṃtaḥ, vedāṃtaḥ, &c.
     (11) Underneath, inside, inner part; yuṣmadīyaṃ ca jalāṃte gṛhaṃ Pt. 4 in water, underneath water; suprayuktasya daṃbhasya brahmāpyaṃtaṃ na gacchati Pt. 1. 202 does not penetrate or dive into, sound, fathom; āśaṃkitasyāṃtaṃ gacchāmi M. 3 shall dive deep into, fully satisfy, my doubts.
     (12) Total amount, whole number or quantity.
     (13) A large number.
     (14) Nature, condition; sort, species; etadaṃtāstu gatayo brahmādyāḥ samudāhṛtāḥ Ms. 1. 50.
     (15) Disposition; essence; śuddhāṃtaḥ [cf. Goth. andeis, and; Germ. ende and ent; also Gr. anti; L. ante].
     -- Comp.
          --avaśāyin m. [aṃte paryaṃtadeśe avaśete] a chāṇḍāla.
          --avasāyen [nakhakeśānāmaṃtaṃ avasātuṃ chettuṃ śīlamasya, so-ṇini] 1. a barber. 2. a chāṇḍāla, low-caste. --3. N. of a sage see aṃtyāvasāyin (aṃte paścime vayasi avasyati tattvaṃ niścinoti). --udātta a. having the acute accent on the last syllable. (
          --ttaḥ) the acute accent on the last syllable; P. VI. 1. 199.
          --kara, --karaṇa, --kārin a. causing death or destruction, fatal, mortal, destructive; kṣatriyāṃtakaraṇo'pi vikramaḥ R. 11. 75 causing the destruction of; rājyāṃtakaraṇāvetau dvau doṣau pṛthivīkṣitāṃ Ms. 9. 221; ahamaṃtakaro nūnaṃ dhvāṃtasyeva divākaraḥ Bk.
          --karman n. death, destruction; ṇo aṃtakarmaṇi Dhātupāṭha.
          --kālaḥ, --velā time or hour of death; sthitvāsyāmaṃtakāle'pi brahmanirvāṇamṛcchati Mb.
          --kṛt m. death; varjayedaṃtakṛnmartyaṃ varjayedanilo'nalaṃ Ram.
          --ga a. having gone to the end of, thoroughly conversant or familiar with, (in comp.); śākhāṃtagamathādhvaryuṃ Ms. 3. 145.
          --gati, -gāmin a. perishing.
          --gamanaṃ 1. going to the end, finishing, completing; prārabdhasya -naṃ dvitīyaṃ buddhilakṣaṇaṃ --2. death, perishing, dying.
          --cara a. 1. walking about, going to the borders or frontiers. --2. completing or finishing (as a business &c.).
          --ja a. last born.
          --dīpakaṃ a figure of speech (in Rhetoric).
          --pālaḥ 1. a frontier-guard, guarding the frontiers; -durge M. 1; tvadīyenāṃtapālenāvaskaṃdya gṛhītaḥ ibid. --2. a door-keeper (rare).
          --bhava, --bhāj a. being at the end, last.
          --līna a. hidden, concealed.
          --lopaḥ dropping of the final of a word.
          --vāsin (-te-) a. dwelling near the frontiers, dwelling close by. (--m.) [aṃte gurusamīpe vastuṃ śīlaṃ yasya] 1. a pupil (who always dwells near his master to receive instruction); P. IV. 3. 104; VI. 2. 36.; Ms. 4. 33. --2. a chaṇḍala (who dwells at the extremity of a village).
          --velā = -kālaḥ q. v.
          --vyāpattiḥ f. change of the final syllable, as in megha from mih Nir.
          --śayyā 1. a bed on the ground. --2. the last bed, death-bed; hence death itself. --3. a place for burial or burning. --4. a bier or funeral pile.
          --satkriyā last rites, funeral ceremonies, obsequies.
          --sad m. a pupil; tamupāsate gurumivāṃtasadaḥ Ki. 6. 34.
          --svaritaḥ the svarita accent on the last syllable of a word.

aṃtaka a. [aṃtayati, aṃtaṃ karoti, ṇvul] Causing death, making an end of, destroying; sūryakāṃta iva tāḍakāṃtakaḥ R. 11. 21; krodhāṃdhastasya tasya svayamiha jagatāmaṃtakasyāṃtakohaṃ Ve. 3. 30. --kaḥ
     (1) Death.
     (2) Death personified, the destroyer; Yama, the god of death; nāṃtakaḥ sarvabhūtānāṃ tṛpyati Pt. 1. 137; ṛṣiprabhāvānmayi nāṃtako'pi prabhuḥ prahartuṃ R. 2. 62.
     (3) A border, boundary.
     -- Comp.
          --druh Ved. provoking death; Rv. 10. 132. 4.

aṃtataḥ ind. [aṃta-tasil]
     (1) From the end.
     (2) At last, finally; at length, lastly.
     (3) In part, partly.
     (4) Inside, within.
     (5) In the lowest way; (opp. mukhyataḥ, madhyataḥ); (aṃtataḥ may have all the senses of aṃta).

aṃtavat a. [aṃta astyarthe matup] Having an end; limited; perishable; aṃtavaṃta ime dehā nityasyoktāḥ śarīriṇaḥ Mb., sa haitānaṃtavata upāsteṃ'tavataḥ sa lokāñjayati Bṛ. Ār. Up.

aṃte ind. (loc. of aṃta; oft. used adverbially)
     (1) In the end, at last, at length, lastly, finally.
     (2) Inside.
     (3) In the presence of, near, close by.
     -- Comp.
          --vāsaḥ 1. a neighbour; companion; tava vā imeṃ'tevāsāstvamevaibhiḥ saṃpibasva Ait. Br. --2. a pupil; rutāni śṛṇvanvayasāṃ gaṇoṃ'tevāsitvamāpa sphuṭamaṃganānāṃ Śi. 3. 55; Ve. 3. 7.
          --vāsi ind. in a state of pupilage, (in statu pupilari).
          --vāsin = aṃtavāsin q. v. above.

aṃtama a. Ved. Nearest, next; śikṣā aṃtamasya Rv. 1. 27. 5; tanūpā atamo bhava 6. 46. 10; intimate, very close or familiar.

aṃtar ind. [am-aran tuḍāgamaśca Uṇ. 5. 60, amestuṭca]
     (1) (Used as a prefix to verbs and regarded as a preposition or gati)
          (a) In the middle, between; in, into, inside; -han, -dhā, -gam, -bhū, -i, -lī &c.
          (b). Under
     (2) (Used adverbially)
          (a) Between, betwixt, amongst, within; in the middle or interior, inside (opp. bahiḥ); adahyatāṃtaḥ R. 2. 32 burnt within himself, at heart; aṃtareva viharan divāniśaṃ R. 19. 6 in the palace, in the harem; so -bhinnaṃ bhramati hṛdayaṃ Māl. 5. 20; aṃtarbibheda Dk. 13; yadaṃtastanna jihvāyāṃ Pt. 4. 88; aṃtaryaśca mṛgyate V. 1. 1 internally, in the mind.
          (b) By way of seizing or holding; aṃtarhatvā gataḥ (hataṃ parigṛhya).
     (3) As a separable preposition)
          (a) In, into, between, in the middle, inside, within, (with loc.); nivasannaṃtardāruṇi laṃghyo vahniḥ Pt. 1. 31; aṃtarāditye Ch. Up.; aṃtarveśmani Ms. 7. 223; Y. 3. 302; apsvaṃtaramṛtamapsu Rv. 1. 23. 19.
          (b) Between (with acc.) Ved. aṃtarmahī bṛhatī rodasīme Rv. 7. 87. 2; aṃtardevāt martyāṃśca 8. 2. 4; hiraṇmayyorha kuśyoraṃtaravahita āsa Śat. Br.
          (c) In, into, inside, in the interior, in the midst (with gen.); pratibalajaladheraṃtaraurvāyamāṇe Ve. 3. 5; aṃtaḥkaṃcukikaṃcukasya Ratn. 2. 3; bahiraṃtaśca bhūtānāṃ Bg. 13. 15; tvamagne sarvabhūtānāmaṃtaścarasi sākṣivat Y. 2. 104; laghuvṛttitayā bhidāṃ gataṃ bahiraṃtaśca nṛpasya maṃḍalaṃ Ki. 2. 53; aṃtarīpaṃ yadaṃtarvāriṇastaṭaṃ Ak.; oft. in comp. at the end; kūpāṃtaḥ patitaḥ Pt. 5; sabhāṃtaḥ sākṣiṇaḥ prāptān Ms. 8. 79; daṃtāṃtaradhiṣṭhitaṃ Ms. 5. 141 between the teeth; utpitsavoṃ'tarnadabhartuḥ Śi. 3. 77; also in compound with a following word; ahaṃ sadā śarīrāṃtarvāsinī te sarasvatī Ks. 4. 11.
     (4) It is frequently used as the first member of compounds in the sense of 'internally,' 'inside,' 'within,' 'in the interior,' 'having in the interior,' 'filled with,' 'having concealed within,' or in the sense of 'inward,' 'internal,' 'secret,' 'hidden' &c., forming Adverbial, Bahuvrīhi or Tatpurusha compounds; kuṃdamaṃtastuṣāraṃ (Bah. comp.) S. 5. 19 filled with dew; -toyaṃ (Bah. comp.) Me. 64; aṃtargiri (Adv. comp.) Ki. 1. 34; jvalayati tanūmaṃtardāhaḥ (Tat. comp.) U. 3. 31; so -kopaḥ, -koṇaḥ, -ākūtaṃ &c.
     (5) It is also supposed to be a particle of assent (svīkārārthaka). (Note. In comp. the r of aṃtar is changed to a visarga before hard consonants, as aṃtaḥkaraṇaṃ, aṃtaḥstha &c.). [cf. L. inter; Zend antare; Goth. undar; Pers. andar; Gr. entos;].
     -- Comp.
          --aṃsaḥ the breast (= aṃtarā-aṃsa q. v.).
          --agniḥ inward fire, the fire which stimulates digestion; dīptāṃtaragnipariśuddhakoṣṭhaḥ Suśr.
          --aṃga a. 1. inward, internal, comprehended, included (with abl.); trayamaṃtaraṃgaṃ pūrvebhyaḥ Pat. Sūtra. --2. proximate, related to, essential to or referring to the essential part of the aṃga or base of a word (opp. bahiraṃga); dhātūpasargayoḥ kāryamaṃtaraṃgaṃ P. VIII. 3. 74 Sk. --3. dear, most beloved (atyaṃtapriya); svapiti sukhamidānīmaṃtaraṃgaḥ kuraṃgaḥ S. 4. v. l. (
          --gaṃ) 1. the inmost limb or organ, the heart, mind; saṃtuṣṭāṃtaraṃgaḥ Dk. 11; -vṛtti 21; the interior. --2. an intimate friend, near or confidential person (forming, as it were, part of oneself); madaṃtaraṃgabhūtāṃ Dk. 81, 93, 101; rājāṃtaraṃgabhāvena 135; aṃtaraṃgeṣu rājyabhāraṃ samarpya 159. --3. an essential or indispensable part, as śravaṇa, manana & nididhyāsana in realizing Brahma.
          --avayava an inner part; P. V. 4. 62.
          --ākāśaḥ the ether or Brahma that resides in the heart of man (a term often occurring in the Upanishads).
          --ākūtaṃ secret or hidden intention.
          --āgamaḥ an additional augment between two letters.
          --āgāraṃ the interior of a house; Y. 2. 31.
          --ātman m. (tmā) 1. the inmost spirit or soul, the soul or mind; also the internal feelings, the heart; aṃguṣṭhamātrapuruṣoṃtarātmā Śvet.; gatimasyāṃtarātmanaḥ Ms. 6. 73; jīvasaṃjñoṃtarātmānyaḥ sahajaḥ sarvadehināṃ 12. 13; madgatenāṃtarātmanā Bg. 6. 47 with the heart fixed on me; jāto mamāyaṃ viśadaḥ prakāmaṃ ... aṃtarātmā S. 4. 21, U. 3. 38, Me. 93. --2. (In phil.) the inherent supreme spirit or soul (residing in the interior of man); aṃtarātmāsi dehināṃ Ku. 6. 21.
          --āpaṇaḥ a market in the heart (inside) of a town.
          --āya, --āla; See s. v.
          --ārāma a. rejoicing in oneself, finding pleasure in his soul or heart; yoṃtaḥsukhoṃtarārāmastathāṃtarjyotirevasaḥ Bg. 5. 24.
          --iṃdriyaṃ an internal organ or sense.
          --uṣyaṃ Ved. a secret abode.
          --karaṇaṃ the internal organ; the heart, soul; the seat of thought and feeling, thinking faculty, mind, conscience; pramāṇaṃ -pravṛttayaḥ S. 1. 22; sabāhya -ṇaḥ aṃtarātmā V. 4 the soul in all its senses external and internal, the inner and outer man; dayārdrabhāvamākhyātamaṃtaḥkaraṇairviśaṃkaiḥ R. 2. 11. According to the Vedānta aṃtaḥkaraṇa is of four kinds: mano buddhirahaṃkāraścittaṃ karaṇamāṃtaram . saṃśayo niścayo garvaḥ smaraṇaṃ viṣayā ime .. aṃtaḥkaraṇaṃ trividhaṃ Sāṅkhya 33, i. e, buddhyahaṃkāramanāṃsi; sāṃtaḥkaraṇā buddhiḥ 35, i. e. ahaṃkāramanaḥsahitā. --kalpaḥ a certain number of years (with Buddhists).
          --kuṭila a. inwardly crooked (fig. also); fraudulent. (
          --laḥ) a conch-shell.
          --kṛ (kri) miḥ a disease of worms in the body.
          --koṭarapuṣpī = aṃḍakoṭarapuṣpī. --kopaḥ 1. internal disturbance; H. 3. --2. inward wrath, secret anger.
          --kośaṃ the interior of a store-room.
          --gaṃgā the secret or hidden Ganges (supposed to communicate underground with a secret stream in Mysore).
          --gaḍu a. [aṃtarmadhye gaḍuriva] useless, unprofitable, unnecessary, unavailing; kimanenāṃtargaḍunā Sar. S. (grīvāpradeśajātasya galamāṃsapiṃḍasya gaḍoryathā nirarthakatvaṃ tadvat). --gam-gata &c. See under aṃtargam. --garbha a. 1. bearing young, pregnant. --2. having a garbha or inside; so -garbhin. --giraṃ --ri ind. in mountains.
          --guḍavalayaḥ the sphincter muscle.
          --gūḍha a. concealed inside, being inward; -ghanavyathaḥ U. 3. 1; R. 19. 57; -viṣaḥ with poison concealed in the heart.
          --gṛhaṃ, --gehaṃ, --bhavanaṃ [aṃtaḥsthaṃ gṛhaṃ &c.] 1. the inner apartment of a house, the interior of a house. --2. N. of a holy place in Benares; paṃcakrośyāṃ kṛtaṃ pāpamaṃtargehe vinaśyati. --ghaṇaḥ --ṇaṃ [aṃtarhanyate kroḍībhavatyasmin, nipātaḥ] 1. the open space before the house between the entrance-door and the house (= porch or court); tasminnaṃtarghaṇe paśyan praghāṇe saudhasadmanaḥ Bk. 7. 62 (dvāramatikramya yaḥ sāvakāśapradeśaḥ soṃ'targhaṇaḥ). (--naḥ --ṇaḥ) N. of a country of Bahīka (or Balhīka) (P. III. 3. 78 bāhīkagrāmaviśeṣasya saṃjñeyaṃ Sk.).
          --ghātaḥ striking in the middle P. III. 3. 78.
          --cara a. pervading the body; internally situated, internal, inward Ku. 3. 48; U. 7.
          --ja a. born or bred in the interior (as a worm &c.).
          --jaṭaraṃ the stomach. (--ind.) in the stomach.
          --jaṃbhaḥ the inner part of the jaws (khādanasthānaṃ jaṃbhaḥ, daṃtapaṃktyoraṃtarālaṃ). --jāta a. inborn, innate.
          --jānu ind. between the knees.
          --jñānaṃ inward or secret knowledge.
          --jyotis a. enlightened inwardly, with an enlightened soul. (
          --s n) the inward light, light of Brahma.
          --jvalanaṃ inflammation. (
          --naḥ) inward heat or fire; mental anxiety.
          --tāpa a. burning in wardly. (
          --paḥ) internal fever or heat S. 3. 13.
          --dadhanaṃ [aṃtardadhyate ādhīyate mādakatānena] distillation of spirituous liquor, or a substance used to produce fermentation.
          --daśā a term in astronomy, the time when a particular planet exercises its influence over man's destiny (jyotiṣoktaḥ mahādaśāṃtargato grahāṇāṃ svādhipatyakālabhedaḥ). --daśāhaṃ an interval of 10 days; -hāt before 10 days Ms. 8. 222; -he 5. 79.
          --dahanaṃ-dāhaḥ 1. inward heat; jvalayati tanūmaṃtardāhaḥ U. 3. 31; -hena dahanaḥ saṃtāpayati rāghavaṃ Ram. --2. inflammation.
          --duḥkha a. sad or afflicted at heart.
          --duṣṭa a. internally bad, wicked or base at heart.
          --dṛṣṭiḥ f. examining one's own soul, insight into oneself.
          --deśaḥ an intermediate region of the compass.
          --dvāraṃ a private or secret door within the house (prakoṣṭhadvāraṃ). --dhā, --dhi, hita &c. see s. v.
          --nagaraṃ the palace of a king (being inside the town); cf. -puraṃ; daśānanāṃtarnagaraṃ dadarśa Ram.
          --nihita a. being concealed within; aṃgairaṃtarnihitavacanaiḥ sūcitaḥ samyagarthaḥ M. 2. 9.
          --niṣṭha a. engaged in internal meditation.
          --paṭaḥ --ṭaṃ a screen of cloth held between two persons who are to be united (as a bride and bridegroom, or pupil and preceptor) until the acctual time of union arrives.
          --patha a. Ved. being on the way.
          --padaṃ ind. in the interior of an inflected word.
          --padavī = suṣumṇāmadhyagataḥ paṃthāḥ. --paridhānaṃ the innermost garment.
          --parśavya a. being between the ribs (as flesh).
          --pavitraḥ the Soma when in the straining vessel.
          --paśuḥ [aṃtargrāmamadhye paśavo yatra] the time when the cattle are in the village or stables (from sunset to sunrise); aṃtaḥpaśau paśukāmasya sāyaṃ prātaḥ Katy. (sāyaṃ paśuṣu grāmamadhye āgateṣu prātaśca grāmādaniḥsṛteṣu com.).
          --pātaḥ, pātyaḥ 1. insertion of a letter (in gram.) --2. a post fixed in the middle of the sacrificial ground (used in ritual works); aṃtaḥpūrveṇa yūpaṃ parītyāṃtaḥpātyadeśe sthāpayati Kāty.
          --pātita, --pātin a. 1. inserted. --2. included or comprised in; falling within; daṃḍakāraṇya -ti āśramapadaṃ K. 20.
          --pātraṃ Ved. interior of a vessel.
          --pālaḥ one who watches over the inner apartments of a palace.
          --puraṃ [aṃtaḥ abhyaṃtaraṃ puraṃ gṛhaṃ, or purasyāṃtaḥ sthitaṃ] 1. inner apartment of a palace (set apart for women); female or women's apartments, seraglio, harem (so called from their being situated in the heart of the town, for purposes of safety); vyāyamyāplutya madhyāhne bhoktumaṃtaḥpuraṃ viśet Ms. 7. 216, 221, 224; kanyāṃtaḥpure kaścitpraviśati Pt. 1. --2. inmates of the female apartments, a queen or queens, the ladies taken collectively; -virahaparyutsukasya rājarṣeḥ S. 3; K. 58; tato rājā sāṃtaḥpuraḥ svagṛhamānīyābhyarcitaḥ Pt. 1; kasyacidrājñoṃ'taḥpuraṃ jalakrīḍāṃ kurute ibid.; -pracāraḥ gossip of the harem Ms. 7. 153; -samāgataḥ S. 4; also in pl.; kadācidasmatprārthanāmaṃtaḥpurebhyaḥ kathayet S. 2.; na dadāti vācamucitāmaṃtaḥpurebhyo yadā S. 6. 4. -jana women of the palace, inmates of the female apartments; -cara, --adhyakṣaḥ-rakṣakaḥ,-vartī guardian or superintendent of the harem, cham berlain; vṛddhaḥ kulodgataḥ śaktaḥ pitṛpaitāmahaḥ śuciḥ . rājñāmaṃtaḥpurādhyakṣo vinītaśca tatheṣyate .. (of these five sorts are mentioned:
          --vāmanaka, jaghanya, kubja, maṃḍalaka and sāmin see Bṛ. S.) -sahāyaḥ one belonging to the harem.
          --purikaḥ [aṃtaḥpure niyuktaḥ, -ṭhak] a chamberlain = -cara. (--kaḥ, --kā) a woman in the harem; asmatprārthanāmaṃtaḥpurike (kā) bhyo nivedaya Chaṇḍ. K.
          --puṣpaṃ [karma.] the menstrual matter of women, before it regularly begins to flow every month; varṣadvādaśakādūrdhvaṃ yadi puṣpaṃ bahirnahi . aṃtaḥpuṣpaṃ bhavatyeva panasoḍuṃbarādivat Kaśyapa; -ṣpaṃ is therefore the age between 12 and the menstruation period.
          --pūya a. ulcerous.
          --peyaṃ Ved. drinking up.
          --prakṛtiḥ f. 1. the internal nature or constitution of man. --2. the ministry or body of ministers of a king. --3. heart or soul. -prakopaḥ internal dissensions or disaffection; aṇurapyupahaṃti vigrahaḥ prabhumaṃtaḥprakṛtiprakopajaḥ Ki. 2. 51.
          --prakopanaṃ sowing internal dissensions, causing internal revolts; H. 3. 93.
          --prajña a. knowing oneself, with an enlightened soul.
          --pratiṣṭhānaṃ residence in the interior.
          --bāṣpa a. 1. with suppressed tears; aṃtarbāṣpaściramanucaro rājarājasya dadhyau Me. 3. --2. with tears gushing up inside, bedimmed with tears; kopāt -ṣpe smarayati māṃ locane tasyāḥ V. 4. 5. (
          --ṣpaḥ) suppressed tears, inward tears; nigṛhya -ṣpaṃ Bh. 3. 6; Mal. 5.
          --bhāvaḥ, --bhāvanā see under aṃtarbhū separately.
          --bhinna a. split or broken inside, perforated, bored (said of a pearl) Pt. 4 (also torn by dissensions).
          --bhūmiḥ f. interior of the earth.
          --bhedaḥ discord, internal dissensions; -jarjaraṃ rājakulaṃ Mk. 4 torn by internal dissensions; aṃtarbhedākulaṃ gehaṃ na cirādvinaśiṣyati 'a house divided against itself cannot long stand'.
          --bhauma a. subterranean, underground.
          --madāvastha a. having the rutting state concealed within; R. 2. 7.
          --manas a. 1. sad, disconsolate, dejected, distracted. --2. one who has concentrated and turned his mind inward, lost in abstract meditation.
          --mukha a. (
          --khī f.) 1. going into the mouth, pointing or turned inward; Mv. 5. 26. --2. having an inward entrance or opening (bāhyavastuparihāreṇa paramātmaviṣayakatayā praveśayuktaṃ cittādi). --3. an epithet of the soul called prājña, when it is enjoying the sweet bliss of sleep (ānaṃdabhuk cetomukhaḥ prājñaḥ iti śruteḥ). (--khaṃ) a sort of surgical scissors (having an opening inside), one of the 20 instruments mentioned by Suśruta in chapter 8 of Sū1trasthana.
          --mātṛkā [aṃtaḥsthāḥ ṣaṭcakrasthā mātṛkā akārādivarṇāḥ] a name given in the Tantras for the letters of the alphabet assigned to the six lotuses (padma) of the body; -nyāsaḥ a term used in Tantra literature for the mental assignment of the several letters of the alphabet to the different parts of the body
          --mudra a. sealed inside; N. of a form of devotion.
          --mṛta a. still-born.
          --yāgaḥ mental sacrifice or worship, a mode of worship referred to in the Tantras.
          --yāmaḥ 1. suppression of the breath and voice. --2. -pātraṃ, a sacrificial vessel (graharūpaṃ sāmāparākhyaṃ yajñiyapātraṃ); according to others, a Soma libation made during the suppression of breath and voice; suhavā sūryāyāṃtaryāmamanumatraṃyet Ait. Br.
          --yāmin m. 1. regulating the soul or internal feelings, soul; Providence, Supreme Spirit as guiding and regulating mankind, Brahma; (according to the Bṛ. Ār. Up. aṃtaryāmin 'the internal check' is the Supreme Being and not the individual soul; 'who standing in the earth is other than the earth, whom the earth knows not, whose body the earth is, who internally restrains and governs the earth; the same is thy soul (and mine), the internal check aṃtaryāmin, &c. &c.); aṃtarāviśya bhūtāni yo bibhartyātmaketubhiḥ . aṃtaryāmīśvaraḥ sākṣādbhavet &c. --2. wind; -brāhmaṇaṃ N. of a Brahmaṇa included in the Bṛ. Ār. Up.
          --yogaḥ deep meditation, abstraction.
          --laṃba a. acute-angular. (
          --baḥ) an acute-angled triangle (opp. bahirlaṃba) (the perpendicular from the vertex or laṃba falling within aṃtar the triangle).
          --līna a. 1. latent, hidden, concealed inside; -nasya duḥkhāgneḥ U. 3. 9; -bhujaṃgamaṃ Pt. 1. --2. inherent.
          --loma a. (P. V. 4. 117) covered with hair on the inside. (--maṃ) [aṃtargatamācchādyaṃ loma ac] the hair to be covered.
          --vaṃśaḥ = -puraṃ q. v.
          --vaṃśikaḥ, --vāsikaḥ [aṃtarvaṃśe vāse niyuktaḥ ṭhak] a superintendent of the women's apartments; Pt. 3, K. 93.
          --vaṇa (vana) a. situated in a forest; -ṇo deśaḥ P. VI. 2. 179 Sk. (
          --ṇaṃ) ind. within a forest P. VIII. 4. 5.
          --vat a. being in the interior; having something in the interior.
          --vatī (vatnī) Ved. [aṃtarastyasyāṃ garbhaḥ] a pregnant woman; aṃtarvatnī prajāvatī R. 15. 13.
          --vamiḥ [aṃtaḥ sthita eva udgāraśabdaṃ kārayati, vaṇ-in] indigestion, flatulence; belching.
          --vartin, --vāsin a. being or dwelling inside, included or comprised in.
          --vasuḥ N. of a Soma sacrifice (for rājyakāma and paśukāma). --vastraṃ --vāsas n. an under-garment Ks. 4. 52.
          --vā a. [aṃtaḥ aṃtaraṃgabhāvaṃ aṃtaḥkaraṇaṃ vā vāti gacchati snigdhatvena, vā-vic Tv.] forming part of oneself such as children, cattle &c. -vat a. (astyarthe matup masya vaḥ) having progeny, cattle &c; aṃtarvāvatkṣayaṃ dadhe Rv. 1. 40. 7; abounding with precious things inside. (--adv.) inwardly.
          --vāṇi a. [aṃtaḥ sthitā śāstravākyātmikā vāṇī yasya] skilled or versed in scriptures, very learned (śāstrāvid). --vigāhaḥ --hanaṃ entering within, penetration.
          --vidvas a. Ved. (viduṣī f.) knowing correctly or exactly (knowing the paths between heaven and earth) Rv. 1. 72. 7.
          --vegaḥ inward uneasiness or anxiety, inward fever.
          --vedi a. pertaining to the inside of the sacrificial ground. (--adv.) within this ground. (
          --diḥ --dī f.) [aṃtargatā vediryatra deśe] the tract of land between the rivers Gaṅgā and Yamunā, regarded as a sacred region and the principal seat of Āryan Brāhmaṇas; cf. ete bhagavatyau bhūmidevānāṃ mūlamāyatanamaṃtarvedipūrveṇa kaliṃdakanyāmaṃdākinyau saṃgacchete A. R. 7; it is supposed to have extended from Prayāga to Haridvāra and is also known by the names of śaśasthalī and brahmāvarta. (--m. pl.) inhabitants of this land.
          --veśman n. the inner apartments, interior of a house.
          --veśimakaḥ a chamberlain.
          --śaraḥ internal arrow or disease.
          --śarīraṃ internal and spiritual part of man; the interior of the body.
          --śalya a. having in the interior an arrow, pin or any such extraneous matter; rankling inside.
          --śilā N. of a river rising from the Vindhya mountain.
          --śleṣaḥ --śleṣaṇaṃ Ved. internal support (scaffolding &c.) etāni ha vai vedānāmaṃtaḥśleṣaṇāni yadetā vyāhṛtayaḥ Ait. Br.
          --saṃjña a. inwardly conscious (said of trees &c.); -jñā bhavaṃtyete sukhaduḥkhasamanvitāḥ Ms. 1. 49.
          --sattva a. having inward strength &c. (
          --ttvā) 1. a pregnant woman. --2. the marking nut.
          --saṃtāpaḥ internal pain, sorrow, regret.
          --sarala a. upright at heart, or having Sarala trees inside; K. 51.
          --salila a. with water (flowing) underground; nadīmivāṃtaḥsalilāṃ sarasvatīṃ R. 3. 9.
          --sāra a. having inward strength and vigour, full or strong inside; powerful, strong, heavy or ponderous; -rairmaṃtribhirdhāryate rājyaṃ sustaṃbhairiva maṃdiraṃ Pt. 1. 126; -sārāṇi iṃdhanāni Dk. 132; -raṃ ghana tulayituṃ nānilaḥ śakṣyati tvāṃ Me. 20. (
          --raḥ) internal treasure or store, inner store or contents; vamaṃtyuccairaṃtaḥsāraṃ H. 2. 105 internal matter or essence (and pus).
          --sukha a. whose delight is in self, inwardly happy Bg. 5. 24
          --senaṃ ind. into the midst of armies.
          --stha a. (also written aṃtastha) being between or in the midst. (
          --sthaḥ --sthāḥ) a term applied to the semivowels, y, r, l, v as standing between vowels and consonants and being formed by a slight contact of the vocal organs (īṣatspṛṣṭaṃ aṃtasthānāṃ); or they are so called because they stand between sparśa (ka-ma) letters and uṣman (śa, ṣa, sa, ha). --sthā 1. a deity of the vital organs. --2 N. of one of the Ṛgveda hymns. -mudgaraḥ the malleus of the ear.
          --svedaḥ [aṃtaḥ svedo madajalasyaṃdanaṃ yasya] an elephant (in rut).
          --haṇanaṃ striking in the middle.
          --hananaṃ N. of a country bāhīka P. VIII. 4. 24 Sk.
          --hastaṃ ind. in the hand, within reach of the hand.
          --hastīna a. being in the hand or within reach of the hand.
          --hāsaḥ laughing inwardly (in the sleeves), a secret or suppressed laugh; sāṃtarhāsaṃ kathitaṃ Me. 111 with a suppressed laugh, with a gentle smile.
          --hṛdayaṃ the interior of the heart.

aṃtara a. [aṃtaṃ rāti dadāti, rā-ka]
     (1) Being in the inside, interior, inward, internal (opp. bāhya); yoṃtaro yavayati Śat. Br.; -ra ātmā Tait. Up.; kaścanāṃtaro dharmaḥ S. D.
     (2) Near, proximate (āsanna); kṛṣvā yujaścidaṃtaraṃ Rv. 1. 10. 9.
     (3) Related, intimate, dear, closely connected (ātmīya) (opp. para); tadetatpreyaḥ putrāt ... preyo'nyasmātsarvasmādaṃtarataraṃ yadayamātmā Śat. Br.; ayamatyaṃtaro mama Bharata.
     (4) Similar (also aṃtaratama) (of sounds and words); sthāneṃ'taratamaḥ P. I. 1. 50; hakārasya ghakāroṃtaratamaḥ Śabdak.; sarvasya padasya sthāne śabdato'rthataścāṃtaratame dve śabdasvarūpe bhavataḥ P. VIII. 1. 1 Com.
          (a) Different from, other than (with abl.); yo'psu tiṣṭhannadbhyoṃ'taraḥ Bṛ. Ār. Up.; ātmā svabhāvoṃ'taro'nyo yasya sa ātmāṃtaraḥ anyasvabhāvaḥ P. VI. 2. 166 Sk.
          (b) The other; udadheraṃtaraṃ pāraṃ Ram.
     (6) Exterior, outer, situated outside, or to be worn outside (aṃtaraṃ bahiryogopasaṃvyānayoḥ P. I. 1. 36) (In this sense it is declined optionally like sarva in nom. pl. and abl. and loc. sing); aṃtare-rā vā gṛhāḥ bāhyā ityarthaḥ (caṃḍālādigṛhāḥ); aṃtare-rā vā śāṭakāḥ paridhānīyā ityarthaḥ Sk.; so aṃtarāyāṃ puri, aṃtarāyai nagaryai, namoṃtarasmai amedhasāṃ Bop. --raṃ
          (a) The interior, inside; tatāṃtaraṃ sāṃtaravāriśīkaraiḥ Ki. 4. 29, 5. 5; jalāṃtaragate bhānau Ms. 8. 132; vimānāṃtaralaṃbinīnāṃ R. 13. 33; Mk. 8. 5, Ku. 7. 62; api vanāṃtaraṃ śrayati V. 4. 26; līyaṃte mukulāṃtareṣu Ratn. 1. 26, Ki. 3. 58; aṃtarāt from inside, from out of; prākāraparikhāṃtarānniryayuḥ Ram.; aṃtare in, into; vana-, kānana-, praviśyāṃtare &c.
          (b) Hence, the interior of any thing, contents; purport, tenor; atrāṃtaraṃ brahmavido viditvā Śvet. Up.
          (c) A hole, an opening; tasya bāṇāṃtarebhyastu bahu susrāva śoṇitaṃ.
     (2) Soul, heart; mind; satatamasutaraṃ varṇayaṃtyaṃtaraṃ Ki. 5. 18 the inmost or secret nature (lit. middle space or region); labdhapratiṣṭhāṃtaraiḥ bhṛtyaiḥ Mu. 3. 13 having entered the heart; sadṛśaṃ puruṣāṃtaravido maheṃdrasya V. 3.
     (3) The Supreme Soul.
     (4) Interval, intermediate time or space, distance; ramyāṃtaraḥ S. 4. 10; kiṃcidaṃtaramagamaṃ Dk. 6; alpakucāṃtarā V. 4. 26; krośāṃtareṇa pathi sthitāḥ H. 4 at the distance of; bṛhadbhujāṃtaraṃ R. 3. 54; aṃtare oft. translated by between, betwixt; gītāṃtareṣu Ku. 3. 38 in the intervals of singing; maraṇajīvitayoraṃtare varte betwixt life and death; astrayogāṃtareṣu Ram.; tanmuhūrtakaṃ bāṣpasalilāṃtareṣu prekṣe tāvadāryaputraṃ U. 3 in the intervals of weeping; bāṣpaviśrāmo'pyaṃtare kartavya eva U. 4 at intervals; smartavyosmi kathāṃtareṣu bhavatā Mk. 7. 7 in the course of conversation; kālāṃtarāvartiśubhāśubhāni H. 1. v. l. see kālāṃtaraṃ; sarasvatīdṛṣadvatyoryadaṃtaraṃ Ms. 2. 17, 22; dyāvāpṛthivyoridamaṃtaraṃ hi vyāptaṃ tvayaikena Bg. 11. 20; na mṛṇālasūtraṃ racitaṃ stanāṃtare S. 6. 17 between the breasts; Bg. 5. 27; asya khalu te bāṇapathavartinaḥ kṛṣṇasārasyāṃtare tapasvina upasthitāḥ S. 1; tadaṃtare sā virarāja dhenuḥ R. 2. 20; 12. 29.
          (b) Intervention (vyavadhāna) oft. in the sense of 'through'; meghāṃtarālakṣyamiveṃdubiṃbaṃ R. 13. 38 through the clouds; vastraṃ aṃtaraṃ vyavadhāyakaṃ yasya sa vastrāṃtaraḥ P. VI. 2. 166 Sk.; mahānadyaṃtaraṃ yatra taddeśāṃtaramucyate; jālāṃtarapreṣitadṛṣṭiḥ R. 7. 9 peeping through a window; viṭapāṃtareṇa avalokayāmi S. 1; kṣaṇamapi vilaṃbamaṃtarīkartumakṣamā K. 306 to allow to come between or intervene; kiyacciraṃ vā meghāṃtareṇa pūrṇimācaṃdrasya darśanaṃ U. 3.
     (5) Room, place, space in general; mṛṇālasūtrāṃtaramapyalabhyaṃ Ku. 1. 40; na hyaviddhaṃ tayorgātre babhūvāṃgulamaṃtaraṃ Rām.; mūṣikaiḥ kṛteṃtare Y. 1. 147; guṇāḥ kṛtāṃtarāḥ K. 4 finding or making room for themselves; na yasya kasyacidaṃtaraṃ dātavyaṃ K. 266; dehi darśanāṃtaraṃ 84 room; pauruṣaṃ śraya śokasya nāṃtaraṃ dātumarhasi Rām. do not give way to sorrow; tasyāṃtaraṃ mārgate Mk. 7. 2 waits till it finds room; aṃtaraṃ aṃtaraṃ Mk. 2 make way, make way.
     (6) Access, entrance, admission, footing; lebheṃtaraṃ cetasi nopadeśaḥ R. 6. 66 found no admission into (was not impressed on) the mind; 17. 75; labdhāṃtarā sāvaraṇe'pi gehe 16. 7.
     (7) Period (of time), term; māsāṃtare deyaṃ Ak.; saptaite manavaḥ sve sveṃtare sarvamidamutpādyāpuścarācaraṃ Ms. 1. 63, see manvaṃtara; iti tau virahāṃtarakṣamau R. 8. 56 the term or period of separation; kṣaṇāṃtare-rāt within the period of a moment.
     (8) Opportunity, occasion, time; devī citralekhamavalokayaṃtī tiṣṭhati . tasminnaṃtare bhartopasthitaḥ M. 1; atrāṃtare praṇamyāgre samupaviṣṭaḥ Pt. 1 on that occasion, at that time; asminnaṃtare Dk. 164; kena punarupāyena maraṇanirvāṇasyāṃtaraṃ saṃbhāvayiṣye Māl. 6; kṛtakṛtyatā labdhāṃtarā bhetsyati Mu. 2. 22 getting an opportunity; 9; yāvattvāmiṃdragurave nivedayituṃ aṃtarānveṣī bhavāmi S. 7. find a fit or opportune time; śaktenāpi satā janena viduṣā kālāṃtaraprekṣiṇā vastavyaṃ Pt. 3. 172 waiting for a suitable opportunity or time, sāraṇasyāṃtaraṃ dṛṣṭvā śuko rāvaṇamabravīt Ram.
     (9) Difference (between two things), (with gen. or in comp.); śarīrasya guṇānāṃ ca dūramatyaṃtamaṃtaraṃ H. 1. 49; ubhayoḥ paśyatāṃtaraṃ H. 1. 66, 2. 40; tava mama ca samudrapalvalayorivāṃtaraṃ M. 1; Bg. 13. 34; yadaṃtaraṃ sarṣapaśailarājayoryadaṃtaraṃ vāyasavainateyayoḥ Ram.; drumasānumatāṃ kimaṃtaraṃ R. 8. 90; 18. 15; rarely with instr., tvayā samudreṇa ca mahadaṃtaraṃ H. 2; svāmini guṇāṃtarajñe Pt. 1. 101; difference; saiva viśinaṣṭi punaḥ pradhānapuruṣāṃtaraṃ sūkṣmaṃ Sān. K. (10) (Math.) Difference, remainder.
          (a) Different, another, other, changed, altered (manner, kind, way &c.); (Note that in this sense aṃtara always forms the latter part of a compound and its gender remains unaffected i. e. neuter, whatever be the gender of the noun forming the first part; kanyāṃtaraṃ (anyā kanyā), rājāṃtaraṃ (anyo rājā), gṛhāṃtaraṃ (anyadgṛhaṃ); in most cases it may be rendered by the English word 'another'); idamavasthāṃtaramāropitā S. 3 changed condition; K. 154; Mu. 5; śubhāśubhaphalaṃ sadyo nṛpāddevādbhavāṃtare Pt. 1. 121; jananāṃtarasauhṛdāni S. 5. 2 friendships of another (former) existence; naivaṃ vārāṃtaraṃ vidhāsyate H. 3 I shall not do so again; āmodān haridaṃtarāṇi netuṃ Bv. 1. 15; so digaṃtarāṇi; pakṣāṃtare in the other case; deśa-, rāja-, kriyā-.
          (b) Various, different, manifold (used in pl.); loko niyamyata ivātmadaśāṃtareṣu S. 4. 2; mannimittānyavasthāṃtarāṇyavarṇayat Dk. 118 various or different states; 160; sometimes used pleonastically with anyat &c.; anyatsthānāṃtaraṃ gatvā Pt. 1.
     (12) Distance (in space); vyāmo bāhvoḥ sakarayostatayostiryagaṃtaraṃ Ak.; prayātasya kathaṃciddūramaṃtaraṃ Ks. 5. 80.
     (13) Absence; tāsāmaṃtaramāsādya rākṣasīnāṃ varāṃganā Ram.; tasyāṃtaraṃ ca viditvā ibid.
     (14) Intermediate member, remove, step, gradation (of a generation &c.); ekāṃtaraṃ Ms. 10. 13; dvyekāṃtarāsu jātānāṃ 7; ekāṃtaramāmaṃtritaṃ P. VIII. 1. 55; tatsraṣṭurekāṃtaraṃ S. 7. 27 separated by one remove, see ekāṃtara also.
     (15) Peculiarity, peculiar or characteristic possession or property; a (peculiar) sort, variety, or kind; vrīhyaṃtarepyaṇuḥ Trik.; mīno rāśyaṃtare, veṇurnṛpāṃtare ibid.; prāsaṃgo yugāṃtaraṃ &c.
     (16) Weakness, weak or vulnerable point; a failing, defect, or defective point; praharedaṃtareripuṃ Śabdak. sujayaḥ khalu tādṛgaṃtare Ki. 2. 52; asahadbhirmāmamitrairnityamaṃtaradarśibhiḥ Ram.; parasyāṃtaradarśinā ibid.; kīṭakenevāṃtaraṃ mārgayamāṇena prāptaṃ mayā mahadaṃtaraṃ Mk. 9; athāsya dvādaśe varṣe dadarśa kaliraṃtaraṃ Nala. 7. 2; hanūmato vetti na rākṣasoṃtaraṃ na mārutistasya ca rakṣasoṃtaraṃ Rām.
     (17) Surety, guarantee, security; tena tava virūpakaraṇe sukṛtamaṃtare dhṛtaṃ Pt. 4 he has pledged his honor that he will not harm you; ātmānamaṃtare'rpitavān K. 247; aṃtare ca tayoryaḥ syāt Y. 2. 239; bhuvaḥ saṃjñāṃtarayoḥ P. III 2. 179; dhanikādhamarṇayoraṃtare yastiṣṭhati viśvāsārthaṃ sa pratibhūḥ Sk.
     (18) Regard, reference, account; na caitadiṣṭaṃ mātā me yadavocanmadaṃtaraṃ Rām. with reference to me; tvadaṃtareṇa ṛṇametat.
     (19) Excellence, as in guṇāṃtaraṃ vrajati śilpamādhātuḥ M. 1. 6 (this meaning may be deduced from 11). (20) A garment (paridhāna).
     (21) Purpose, object, (tādarthya) (Malli. on R. 16. 82).
     (22) Concealment, hiding; parvatāṃtarito raviḥ (this sense properly belongs to aṃtar-i q. v.).
     (23) Representative, substitution.
     (24) Destitution, being without (vinā) which belongs to aṃtareṇa. (aṃtaramavakāśāvadhiparidhānāṃtardhibhedatādarthye . chidrātmīyavinābahiravasaramadhyeṃtarātmani ca Ak.) [cf. L. alter]
     -- Comp.
          --apatyā a pregnant woman.
          --cakraṃ a technical term in augury Bri. S. chap. 86.
          --jña a. knowing the interior, prudent, wise; foreseeing; nāṃtarajñāḥ śriyo jātu priyairāsāṃ na bhūyate Ki. 11. 24 not knowing the difference.
          --tat a. spreading havoc.
          --da a. cutting the interior or heart.
          --diśā, aṃtarā dik intermediate region or quarter of the compass.
          --dṛś a. realizing the Supreme Soul (paramātmānusaṃdhāyin). --pu(pū)ruṣaḥ the internal man, soul (the deity that resides in man and witnesses all his deeds); tāṃstu devāḥ prapaśyaṃti svasyaivāṃtarapūruṣaḥ Ms. 8. 85.
          --pūjā = aṃtar-pūjā. --prabhavaḥ [aṃtarābhyāṃ bhinnavarṇamātāpitṛbhyāṃ prabhavati] one of a mixed origin or caste; aṃtaraprabhavāṇāṃ ca dharmānno vaktumarhasi Ms. 1. 2.
          --praśnaḥ an inner question, one contained in and arising out of what has been previously mentioned.
          --śāyin --stha, --sthāyin-sthita a. 1. inward, internal, inherent; -sthairguṇaiḥ śubhrairlakṣyate naiva kena cit Pt. 1. 221. --2. interposed, intervening, separate. --3. seated in the heart, an epithet of jīva.

aṃtarataḥ ind.
     (1) In the interior; internally, between or betwixt.
     (2) Within (prep. with gen.).

aṃtaratama a. Nearest, internal, most immediate, most intimate or related; like, analogous. --maḥ A letter of the same class; for ex. see under aṃtara a.

aṃtarīyam [aṃtare bhavaṃ cha] An under garment; atiśliṣṭacīnāṃśukāṃtarīyaṃ Dk. 69; saṃjajñe yutakamivāṃtarīyamūrvoḥ Ki. 7. 14; 9. 48; nābhau dhṛtaṃ ca yadvastramācchādayati jānunī . aṃtarīyaṃ praśastaṃ tadacchinnamubhayāṃtayoḥ ...

aṃtare Between, amidst, amongst &c.; see aṃtara

aṃtarya a. Interior, internal; being within, in the middle.

aṃtarayati Den. P.
     (1) To cause to intervene, divert, put off; sarvamevānyadaṃtarayati K. 338; bhavatu tāvadaṃtarayāmi U. 6 well, I shall change the topic, divert the course of conversation.
     (2) To oppose prevent; nainamaṃdhakārarāśiraṃtarayati K. 243.
     (3) To remove (to a distance), push after; bhuvo balairaṃtarayāṃbabhūvire Śi. 12. 29; sarvānaṃtarāyānaṃtarayan K. 161; jalāṃtarāṇīva mahārṇāvaughaḥ śabdāṃtarāṇyaṃtarayāṃcakāra Śi. 3. 24 drowned.

aṃtarā ind. (fr. aṃtara)
     (1) (Used adverbially)
          (a) In the interior, inside, within, inwardly; bhavadbhiraṃtarā protsāhya kopito vṛṣalaḥ Mu. 3 inwardly, secrectly.
          (b) In the middle, between; triśaṃkurivāṃtarā tiṣṭha S. 2 stay between the two or in the mid-air; mainamaṃtarā pratibadhnīta S. 6 do not interrupt him (in the middle); akṣetre bījamutsṛṣṭamaṃtaraiva vinaśyati Ms. 10. 71 therein; paśumaṃḍūkamārjāraśvasarpanakulākhubhiḥ . aṃtarā gamane 4. 126; aṃtarā śakalīkṛtaḥ R. 15. 20; lāṭī tu rītirvaidarbhīpāṃcālyoraṃtarā sthitā S. D. 629; -rā sthā to oppose, to stand to oppose; tatra yadyaṃtarā mṛtyuryadi seṃdrā divaukasaḥ . sthāsyaṃti tānapi raṇe kākutstho vihaniṣyati .. Ram.
          (c) On the way, en route, midway; vilaṃbethāṃ ca māṃtarā Mv. 7 28; aṃtarā cāraṇebhyastvadīyaṃ jayodāharaṇaṃ śrutvā tvāmihasthamupāgatāḥ V. 1; aṃtarā dṛṣṭā devī S. 6; aṃtaropalabhya Dk. 52; K. 267, 304-5; kumāro mamāpyaṃtikamupāgacchannaṃtarā tvadīyenāṃtapālena avaskaṃdya gṛhītaḥ M. 1, Y. 2. 107.
          (d) In the neighbourhood, near, at hand; approaching, resembling; na drakṣyāmaḥ punarjātu dhārmikaṃ rāmamaṃtarā Rām. approaching or resembling Rama.
          (e) Nearly, almost.
          (f) In the mean time; nādyāccaiva tathāṃtarā Ms. 2. 56; Y. 3. 20.
          (g) At intervals, here and there; now and then, for sometime, now-now (when repeated); aṃtarā pitṛsaktamaṃtarā mātṛsaṃbaddhamaṃtarā śukanāsamayaṃ kurvannālāpaṃ K. 118; aṃtarāṃtarā nipatita here and there, at intervals; 121, 127; prajānurāgahetoścāṃtarāṃtarā darśanaṃ dadau 58, Dk. 49.
     (2) (Used as a preposition with acc. P. II. 3. 4.)
          (a) Between; paṃcālāsta ime ... kaliṃdatanayāṃ trisrotasaṃ cāṃtarā B. R. 10. 86; yadaṃtarā pitaraṃ mātaraṃ ca Bṛ. Ar. Up.; te (nāmarūpe) yadaṃtarā tad brahma Ch. Up.; aṃtarā tvāṃ ca māṃ ca kamaṃḍaluḥ Mbh.; rarely with loc.; sumaṃtrasya babhūvātmā cakrayoriva cāṃtarā Rām.; pādayoḥ śakaṭaṃ cakruraṃtarorāvulūkhalaṃ Rām.
          (b) Through; tiraskāriṇamaṃtarā ibid.
          (c) During; aṃtarā kathāṃ S. D.
          (d) Without, except; na ca prayojanamaṃtarā cāṇakyaḥ svapnepi ceṣṭate Mu. 3.
     -- Comp.
          --aṃsaḥ the space between the shoulders, breast; atha -se abhimṛśya japati Śat. Br.
          --bhavadehaḥ --bhavasattvaṃ the soul or embodied soul existing between the two stages of death and birth (yo maraṇajananayoraṃtarāle sthitaḥ prāṇī soṃtarābhavasattvaḥ). --diś see aṃtaradiś. --bharaḥ Ved. bringing into the midst or procuring Rv. 8. 32. 12.
          --vediḥ --dī f. 1. a veranda resting on columns, porch, portico. --2. a kind of wall R. 12. 93.
          --śṛṃgaṃ ind. between the horns.

aṃtareṇa ind.
     (1) (Used as a preposition with acc. P. II. 3. 4 aṃtarāṃtareṇa yukte)
          (a) Except, without, leaving; harimaṃtareṇa na sukhaṃ Sk.; ka idānīṃ sahakāramaṃtareṇa pallavitāmatimuktalatāṃ sahate S. 3; kriyāṃtarāṃtarāyamaṃtareṇa āryaṃ draṣṭumicchāmi Mu. 3 without interfering with any other duty; na rājāparādhamaṃtareṇa prajāsvakālamṛtyuścarati U. 2; mārmikaḥ ko maraṃdānāmaṃtareṇa madhuvrataṃ Bv. 1. 117.
          (b) With regard or reference to, with respect to, about, towards, on account of; atha bhavaṃtamaṃtareṇa kīdṛśo'syā dṛṣṭirāgaḥ S. 2; tadasyā devīṃ vasumatīmaṃtareṇa mahadupālaṃbhanaṃ gato'smi S. 5; kiṃ nu khalu māmaṃtareṇa ciṃtayati vaiśaṃpāyanaḥ K. 178; calitaṃ nāma nāṭyamaṃtareṇa kīdṛśī mālavikā M. 2 how M. is faring or progressing in the dance &c.; tatastayā bhavato'vinayamaṃtareṇa parigṛhītārthā kṛtā devī M. 4.
          (c) Within, inside, into (madhye).
          (d) Between, (ubhayormadhye); tvāṃ māṃ cāṃtareṇa kamaṃḍaluḥ Mbh.; aṃtareṇa havanīyaṃ gārhapatyaṃ ca Śat. Br.; aṃtareṇa stanau vā bhruvau vā vimṛjyāt ibid.; Si. 3. 3.
          (e) During, amidst.
     (2) (Used as an adverb)
          (a) Between, amidst; yāvadvā makṣikāyāḥ patraṃ tāvānaṃtareṇāvakāśaḥ Śat. Br.
          (b) At heart, aṃtareṇa susnigdhā eṣā Mk. 1.

aṃtarālaṃ, aṃtarālakam [aṃtaraṃ vyavadhānasīmāṃ ārāti gṛhṇāti, ārā-ka, rasya latvaṃ]
     (1) Intermediate space or region or time, interval; daṃṣṭrāṃtarālalagna K. 30; āsyāṃtarālaniḥsṛtena Dk. 143; diṅnāmānyaṃtarāle P. II. 2. 26; dakṣiṇasyāḥ pūrvasyāśca diśoraṃtarālaṃ dakṣiṇapūrvā Sk.; Śi. 9. 2; payodharāṃtarālaṃ K. 83; rāgalajjāṃtarālavartibhirīkṣaṇaviśeṣaiḥ Dk. 17, 143 half way betwixt love and bashfulness; pratimānaṃ praticchāyā gajadaṃtāṃtarālayoḥ Trik.; oft. used for 'room' or 'space' in general; trastajanadattāṃtarālayā rājavīthyā Dk. 150; bhuvanāṃtarālaviprakīrṇena śākhāsaṃcayena K. 23, 162; aṃtarāle in midway, in the middle or midst; in the interval; bāṣpāṃbhaḥ paripatanodgamāṃtarāle in the interval between the dropping down and starting up of tears U. 1. 31; Māl. 9. 14; ahamāgacchannaṃtarāle mahatā siṃhena abhihitaḥ Pt. 1; kaṃcitpuruṣamaṃtarāla evāvalaṃbya Dk. 15; na mayānyena vāṃtarāle dṛṣṭā Dk. 123.
     (2) Interior, inside, inner or middle part; chidrīkṛtāṃtarālaṃ Dk. 148; viṣamīkṛtāṃtarālayā K. 223.
     (3) Mixed tribe or caste (saṃkīrṇavarṇa); varṇānāṃ sāṃtarālānāṃ sa sadācāra iṣyate.
     -- Comp.
          --diś f. the intermediate point of the compass, such as, northeast &c.

aṃtari 2 P. (aṃtar + i)
     (1) To go between, to stand in one's way, intervene to separate; rātrerenaṃ tadaṃtariyāt Ait. Br.
     (2) To exclude from, to pass over, omit.
     (3) To disappear, see aṃtarita below. (--ayati) To come or step between, interpose; darduraka upasṛtya aṃtarayati Mk. 2 (it may also mean, 'separates the two').

aṃtarayaḥ --rāyaḥ
     (1) An impediment, obstacle, hindrance, what stands in the way; sa cet tvamaṃtarāyo bhavasi cyuto vidhiḥ R. 3. 45, 14. 65; bahvaṃtarāyayuktasya dharmasya tvaritā gatiḥ Pt. 3. 101; asya te bāṇapathavartinaḥ kṛṣṇasārasya aṃtarāyau tapasvinau saṃvṛttau S. 1 vl. standing in the way.
     (2) (In Vedanta) Hindrance to the concentration of mind which is said to be of four kinds, laya, vikṣepa, kaṣāya and rasāsvāda.
     (3) An intervention, a covering, screen; dāhapremṇā sarasabisinīpatramātrāṃtarāyaḥ Mal. 3. 12.
     (4) (With the Jains) Interference or obstruction offered to those who are engaged in seeking deliverance, and consequent prevention of their accomplishment of it; one of the 8 classes of karman.

aṃtarita p. p.
     (1) Gone between, intervening.
     (2) Gone within, hidden, concealed, covered, screened, shielded, protected (from view) by something; pādapāṃtarita eva viśvastāmenāṃ paśyāmi S. 1 hid behind a creeper; sārasena svadehāṃtarito rājā H. 3 screened; viṭapāṃtaritastiṣṭha S. 3; nalinīpatrāṃtaritaṃ priyasahacaramapaśyaṃtī S. 4; śārdūlacarmāṃtaritorupṛṣṭhaṃ Ku. 7. 37 covered; Dk. 21, 146; K. 28, 152, 200; parvatāṃtarito raviḥ set Ak.; tvagaṃtaritatṛtīyalocanaṃ K. 108, R. 10. 8; unmādamohāṃtaritopi Mal. 9; talpamaṃtaritabhūmibhiḥ kuthaiḥ R. 19. 2.
     (3) Gone in, reflected; sphaṭikabhittyaṃtaritān mṛgaśāvakān reflected in the crystal wall.
          (a) Concealed, made dormant, impeded, hindered, prevented; tvadabhiprāyāparijñānāṃtarita evāyamanunayaḥ Mu. 2 prevented from being made; tvadvāṃchāṃtaritāni sādhyāni Mu. 4. 15 prevented from being actually effected &c.; dviṣatpratāpāṃtaritorutejāḥ Ki. 3. 45 obscured; nopālabhyaḥ pumāṃstatra daivāṃtaritapauruṣaḥ Pt. 2. 133.
          (b) Separated, lost to view, made invisible by interposition; muhūrtāṃtaritamādhavā durmanāyamānā Mal. 8; bharturetānyakṣarāṇi biṃbāṃtaritāni M. 3; dhanamitrākhyayāṃtaritaḥ Dk. 36; caṃdrāpīḍanāmāṃtaritasya caṃdramasaḥ K. 338; pratinivartamānayātrājanasaṃkulena aṃtarite tasmin Mal. 2; kriyatāṃ kathamaṃtyamaṃḍanaṃ paralokāṃtaritasya te mayā Ku. 4. 22 separated (from me) by the next world, i. e. dead, deceased; meghairaṃtaritaḥ priye tava mukhacchāyānukārī śaśī S. D.
          (c) Drowned, obscured, removed, eclipsed; paralokabhayamaihikaduḥkhenāṃtaritaṃ Dk. 82 drowned, eclipsed, obscured; vīralokasādhuvādenāṃtaritaḥ samaratūryaravaḥ Ve. 4 drowned; vismayāṃtaritaśokavṛttāṃtā K. 322; kāryāṃtaritotkaṃṭhaṃ V. 3. 4 forgotten, removed; iṃduprakāśāṃtaritoḍutulyāḥ R. 16. 65 obscured by moon-light.
     (4) Disappeared, vanished, departed, retired, withdrawn; aṃtarite tasmiñśabarasenāpatau K. 33; nāthadehasparśena aṃtarita eva saṃtāpaḥ U. 6 has disappeared, has been removed.
     (5) Passed over, omitted; aye madhyamāṃbāvṛttāṃtoṃ'tarita evāryeṇa U. 1; kathāṃtareṇāṃtaritamidaṃ M. 5 put off, delayed.
     (6) Slighted, despised.
     (7) (In Math.) That which remains, the remainder
     (8) A technical term in architecture.

aṃtari --rī --kṣam [aṃtaḥ svargapṛthivyormadhye īkṣyate, īkṣ karmaṇi ghañ, aṃtaḥ ṛkṣāṇi asya vā pṛṣo-pakṣe hasvaḥ ṛkārasya ritvaṃ vā Tv.; according to Nir. aṃtarā dyāvāpṛthivyoḥ kṣāṃtaṃ avasthitaṃ bhavati, or aṃtarā ime dyāvāpṛthivyau kṣayati nivasati; or śarīreṣvaṃtaḥ akṣayaṃ na pṛthivyādivat kṣīyate]
     (1) The intermediate region between heaven and earth; the air, atmosphere, sky (aṃtarā dyāvāpṛthivyormadhye īkṣyamāṇaṃ vyoma Sāy.) divaṃ ca pṛthivīṃ cāṃtarikṣamatho svaḥ Sandhyā Mantra; yoṃ'tareṇākāśa āsīttadaṃtarikṣamabhavadīkṣaṃ haitannāma tataḥ purāṃtarā vā idamīkṣamabhūditi tasmādaṃtarikṣaṃ Śat. Br.
     (2) The middle of the three spheres or regions of life.
     (3) Talc.
     -- Comp.
          --udara a. whose inside is as wide as the atmosphere. (
          --raṃ) the interior of the atmosphere
          --kṣit, --sad a. dwelling in the atmosphere.
          --gaḥ, --caraḥ a bird (moving through the atmosphere).
          --jalaṃ water of the atmosphere, dew.
          --prā a. [aṃtarikṣaṃ prāti pūrayati, prā-vic] filling the atmosphere; illuminating the sky, travelling through the atmosphere.
          --prut a. [aṃtarikṣaṃ pravate gacchati, pru kvip] floating over the atmosphere, sweeping or going through it.
          --lokaḥ the intermediate region, regarded as a distinct world; trayo lokā eta eva vāgevāyaṃ lokaḥ (earth) manoṃtarikṣalokaḥ, prāṇo'sau lokaḥ (heaven) Śat. Br.
          --śaṃsita a. sharpened in the atmosphere.
          --sadyaṃ [aṃtarikṣe sadyaṃ sadanaṃ, sad bhāve yat] dwelling or residence in the atmosphere.

aṃtari --rī --kṣya a. [bhavārthe yat] Aerial, atmospheric.

aṃtarīpaḥ [aṃtaḥ madhye gatā āpo yasya bahu. acsamāsaḥ apa īt] P. VI. 3. 97] A portion of land stretching out into the sea, promontory; an island (being situated in, and surrounded on all sides by, water).

aṃtare, --reṇa See under aṃtara.

aṃtargam 1 P.
     (1) To go between, interpose, intervene (so as to exclude).
     (2) To be included or comprised in.
     (3) To vanish, disappear (mostly used in past part. only).

aṃtargata p. p. --gāmin a.
     (1) Gone into or between, crept into (as a bad word &c.).
     (2) Being or seated in, included in or by, existing in, belonging to; -śave grāme Ms. 4. 108; laghudvīpā jaṃbūdvīpāṃtargatā eva H. 3.; pārthivāni ca bhūtāni sāgarāṃtargatāni ca Rām.
     (3) Being in the interior, hidden, concealed, internal, inward, secret, suppressed; aṃtargatamapāstaṃ me rajasopi paraṃ tamaḥ Ku. 6. 60 inward; saumitriraṃtargatabāṣpakaṃṭhaḥ R. 14. 53 with suppressed tears; K. 60; -tāṃ hṛdayaśuddhiṃ 135 inward; aṃtargataṃ prāṇabhṛtāṃ hi veda sarvaṃ bhavānbhāvam R. 2. 43 internal, seated in the breast or heart; -phalāraṃbhāḥ 10. 59; -to hṛdayābhilāṣaḥ K. 143; -tena caṃdrāpīḍena 198; netravaktravikāraiśca lakṣyateṃ'targata manaḥ inward or secret motives of the mind Pt. 1. 44; bāhyairvibhāvayelliṃgairbhāvamaṃtargataṃ nṛṇāṃ Ms. 8. 25; -gataprārthanaṃ S. 7. 2 inwardly longing (for the same).
     (4) Slipped out of memory, forgotten.
     (5) Vanished, disappeared.
     (6) Destroyed.
     -- Comp.
          --upamā a concealed simile (the particle of comparison being omitted.)
          --manas = aṃtarmanas q. v.

aṃtardhā 3 U.
     (1) To place or keep within, deposit; uduṃbaraśākhāmaṃtardhāya abhiṣiṃcati Ait. Br.
     (2) To receive within or into oneself, admit, take in; tathā viśvaṃbhare devi māmaṃtardhātumarhasi R. 15. 81; contain, comprise, include; (śāstrametat) aṃtardhāsyati tatsarvametadvaḥ kathitaṃ mayā Mb.
     (3) To indicate, exhibit, display.
     (4) To hide or conceal oneself from, avoid the sight of, (with abl. and used in Ātm.); upādhyāyādaṃtardhatte P. I. 4. 28. Com. aṃtardhatsva raghuvyāghrāt Bk. 5. 32; aṃtardadhānāṃ rakṣobhyaḥ 8. 71; matto māṃtardhithāḥ sīte 6. 15.
     (5) To cover up, conceal from view, hide, obscure, envelope, wrap up, veil; eclipse (fig.); anṛtenātmānamaṃtardhāya Ch. Up.; bhaumaṃ (rajaḥ) aṃtardadhe lokamāvṛtya savituḥ prabhāṃ Ram. enveloped, covered; pituraṃtardadhe kīrtiṃ śīlavṛttisamādhibhiḥ Mb. obscured or eclipsed. --pass.
     (1) To be received within, be absorbed; to be covered up or concealed, be obscured or rendered invisible, become invisible; to vanish, disappear, cease to exist; iṣubhirvyatisarpadbhirādityoṃ'taradhīyata Mb.; te cāṃtardadhire nāgāḥ ibid; rātrirādityodayeṃ'tardhīyate Nir. disappears; ātmanyaṃtardadhe, tatraivāṃtaradhīyata &c. --Caus. (--dhāpayati) To render invisible, conceal.

aṃtardhā [dhā bhāve aṅ] Covering, concealment &c.; aṃtardhāmupayayurutpalāvalīṣu Śi. 8. 12.

aṃtardhānam [dhā-lyuṭ] Being invisible, disappearance, passing out of sight; -vyasanarasikā rātrikāpālikīyaṃ K. P. 10; -gam or i to become invisible, disappear.
     -- Comp.
          --gata a. disappeared, invisible.
          --cara a. moving invisibly.

aṃtardhāyaka a. Concealing, rendering invisible.

aṃtardhiḥ f. [dhā-ki] Disappearance, concealment; hiding oneself from (another); aṃtardhau yenādarśanamicchati P. I. 4. 28; Śi. 8. 42.

aṃtarhita p. p.
     (1) Placed between, separated, rendered invisible by interposition, hidden, concealed; aṃtarhitā śakuṃtalā vanarājyā S. 4; covered (with something else); aṃtarhitāśāpatho jaladakāla iva K. 293; śeṣvānaṃtarhitāyāṃ tvaṃ bhūmau Rām. uncovered or bare ground; pātreṣu darbhāṃtarhiteṣu apa āsicya Asval.; aṃtarhite āvāṃ V. 2; aṃtarhitā yadi bhavedvānitā na veti Mk. 3. 4 a disguised male, a female in male dress.
     (2) Disappeared, vanished, become invisible; iti maṃtrayamāṇaḥ svayamaṃtarhitaḥ S. 4 withdrew from sight, became invisible; aṃtarhite śaśini S. 4. 2; tasyāyamaṃtarhitasaudhabhājaḥ R. 13. 40 dwelling in a palace hidden under (the waters).
     -- Comp.
          --ātman m. N. of Śiva.

aṃtarbhū 1 P. To be contained, comprised or included in; be inherent or implied in; kecidaṃtarbhavaṃtyeṣu K. P. 8; guṇāściraṃtanairuktā ojasyaṃtarbhavaṃti te S. D.; aṃtarbhūya rahasyeṣu tairvaśīkriyate hi saḥ Ks. 34. 204; vaidike karmayoge tu sarvāṇyetānyaśeṣataḥ . aṃtarbhavaṃti kramaśastasmiṃstasminkriyāvidhau .. Ms. 12. 87. --Caus. To contain, include, imply, involve; aṃtarbhāvitaṇyartho'tra namiḥ P. III. 1. 88 Sk. involving a causal sense.

aṃtarbhava a. Inward, internal, inwardly situated.

     (1) The being included or comprised in, inclusion; teṣāṃ guṇānāmojasyaṃtarbhāvaḥ K. P. 8.
     (2) Inherent or natural condition or disposition.
     (3) Disappearance, becoming invisible; sarve aṃtarbhāvaṃ gatāḥ Dk. 26.

     (1) Inclusion.
     (2) Inward meditation or anxiety.
     (3) A technical term in arithmetic, rectification of numbers by the differences of the products.

aṃtarbhūta p. p.
     (1) Included or contained in; kālabhāvādhvadeśānāmaṃtarbhūtakriyāṃtaraiḥ . sarvairakarmakairyoge karmatvamupajāyate .. Hari.
     (2) Inward, internal, internally situated; eṣa vai bhagavān viṣṇuraṃtarbhūtaḥ sanātanaḥ.

aṃti ind. [aṃt-i] Ved.
     (1) Near, before, in the presence of; na hī nu vo maruto aṃtyasme Rv. 1. 167. 9; 1. 79. 11.
     (2) (Prep.) To, in the vicinity of (with gen.); mugdhaprabhītavadupeyaturaṃti mātroḥ Bhāg. --tiḥ f. An elder sister (in dramas).
     -- Comp.
          --ūti a. ready with help. (
          --tiḥ f.) protection of what is near (āsannarakṣaṇa) Rv. 1. 138. 1.
          --gṛhaṃ a house near one's own dwelling, the neighbourhood of the house.
          --deva a. being near the god; an adversary (at dice); Rv. 1. 180. 7.
          --mitra, --vāma, --ṣumṇa a. near or at hand with help, wealth, or kindness; aṃtivāmā dūre Rv. 7. 77. 4 (nikaṭasthadhanā).

     (1) An elder sister.
     (2) An oven, fire-place.
     (3) N. of a plant (sā-śā-talākhyauṣadhiḥ).

aṃtika a. [aṃtaḥ sāmīpyaṃ asyāstīti matvarthīyaḥ ṭhan; according to Nir. from ā-nī; aṃtikaṃ kasmāt ānītaṃ bhavati sannikṛṣṭatvāt]
     (1) Near, proximate (with gen. or abl. P. II. 3. 34).
     (2) Reaching to the end of, reaching to; nāsāṃtika Ms. 2. 46.
     (3) Lasting till, until; as far as, up to; Ms. 3. 1; Y. 1. 36. --kaṃ Nearness, proximity, vicinity, presence; na tyajaṃti mamāṃtikaṃ H. 1. 46; oft. in comp.; -nyasta R. 2. 24; karṇa-caraḥ S. 1. 24; siṃhāsanāṃtikacareṇa sahopasarpan M. 1. 12 a servant in attendance upon the throne. --adv. (with abl. or gen. or as last member of comp.) Near (to), in the vicinity; aṃtikaṃ grāmāt-grāmasya vā Sk.; into the presence or proximity of; dūrasthasyaitya cāṃtikaṃ Ms. 2. 197; praviṣṭe pituraṃtikaṃ Ram.; so janāṃtikaṃ, mṛgāṃtikaṃ; aṃtikena near (with gen.); aṃtikena grāmasya P. II. 3. 35; aṃtikāt near, closely, within the presence of; from the proximity of, from near, from (abl. or gen. or acc.); -kādāgataḥ P. VI. 2. 49; rajaḥkaṇaiḥ spṛśadbhirgātramaṃtikāt Rām.; krīṇīyādyastvapatyārthaṃ mātāpitroryamaṃtikāt Ms. 9. 174 from; so naiva pravṛttiṃ śṛṇumastayoḥ kasyacidaṃtikāt Ram.; aṃtike near, closely, in the presence of or proximity of; Bg. 13. 15; damayaṃtyāstadāṃtike nipetuḥ Nala. 1. 22; -ke striyāḥ Ms. 2. 22.
     -- Comp.
          --āśrayaḥ resorting to what is near, contiguous support (that given by a tree to a creeper).

aṃtitaḥ ind. Ved. Near.

aṃtima a. [aṃte bhavaḥ, aṃta ḍimac]
     (1) Immediately following.
     (2) Last, final, ultimate; ajātamṛtamūrkhāṇāṃ varamādyau na cāṃtimaḥ H. 1.
     -- Comp.
          --aṃkaḥ the last digit, the number nine.
          --aṃguliḥ the little finger (kaniṣṭhikā).

aṃtī An oven, fire-place.

aṃtya a. [aṃte bhavati vasati &c, aṃtāya hitaḥ; aṃta-yat]
     (1) Last, final (as a letter, word &c.); last (in time, order or place) P. I. 1. 47; as ha of letters, Revatī of asterisms, Mīna of the zodiacal signs &c.; aṃtye vayasi in old age R. 9. 79; aṃtyaṃ ṛṇaṃ R. 1. 71 last debt; -maṃḍanaṃ 8. 71, Ku. 4. 22.
     (2) Immediately following (in comp.); aṣṭama- ninth.
     (3) Lowest (in rank, degree or position), undermost, worst, inferior, base, vile, wretched; -avasthāṃ gataḥ Pt. 4. 110 reduced to the worst plight; aṃtyāsu daśāsu Pt. 1. 336 at perilous (critical) times; belonging to the lowest caste; caṃḍāla- striyaḥ Ms. 11. 176; -strīniṣeviṇaḥ 12. 59; aṃtyādapi varaṃ ratnaṃ strīratnaṃ duṣkulādapi; śūdrāśca saṃtaḥ śūdrāṇāmaṃtyānāmaṃtyayonayaḥ (sākṣyaṃ kuryuḥ) 8. 68, 3. 9; 4. 79; Y. 1. 148, 2. 294. --tyaḥ
     (1) A man of the lowest caste; see above.
     (2) N. of a plant (mustā) (f. also) (the roots of which are prescribed for colic).
     (3) The last syllable of a word.
     (4) The last lunar month i. e. Falguna.
     (5) A Mlechcha, foreigner, barbarian.
     (6) (In Vaiśeṣika phil.) A name for the category viśeṣa; aṃtyo nityadravyavṛttirviśeṣaḥ parikīrtitaḥ . Bhaṣa P. --tyā
     (1) A technical name for trijyā in astronomy.
     (2) A woman of the lowest tribe. --tyaṃ
     (1) A measure of number; 1000 billions (1000,000,000,000,000.)
     (2) The 12th sign of the zodiac.
     (3) The last member or term of a progression (series), the last figure; sthāpyoṃtavargo dviguṇāṃtyanighnaḥ Līla.
     -- Comp.
          --anuprāsaḥ see under anuprāsa. --avasāyin m. f. (-yī, -yinī) a man or woman of the lowest caste, begotten by a Chaṇḍala on a Niṣadī woman; niṣādastrī tu cāṃḍālātputramaṃtyāvasāyinam . smaśānagocaraṃ sūte bāhyānāmapi garhitaṃ .. Ms. 10. 39; the following 7 are regarded as belonging to this class; cāṃḍālaḥ śvapacaḥ kṣattā sūto vaidehakastathā . māgadhāyogavau caiva saptaiteṃ'tyāvasāyinaḥ ... --āśramin m. one who belongs to the last or mendicant order.
          --āhutiḥ-iṣṭiḥ f.
          --karman, --kriyā last or funeral oblations, sacrifices or rites; -karma Ms. 11. 198, 5. 168; aṃtyāhutiṃ hāvayituṃ saviprāḥ Bk.
          --ṛṇaṃ the last of the three debts which every one has to pay, i. e. begetting children; see anṛṇa. --gamanaṃ intercourse by a woman of the higher caste with a man of the lowest caste.
          --ja a. latest born, younger, belonging to the lowest caste; -jairnṛbhiḥ Ms. 4. 61; -strī 8. 385. (
          --jaḥ) 1. a Śūdra (aṃtyaḥ san jāyate, varṇamadhye śeṣabhavatvāt). --2. one of the 7 inferior tribes; chaṇḍala &c.; rajakaścarmakāraśca naṭo varuḍa eva ca . kaivartamedabhillāśca saptaite cāṃtyajāḥ smṛtāḥ .. Yama; also Ms. 8. 279; Y. 1. 273. (
          --jā) a woman of the lowest caste; Ms. 11. 59, 171; Y. 3. 231.
          --janman, --jāti, --jātīya a. 1. one belonging to the lowest caste; pratigrahastu kriyate śūdrādapyaṃtyajanmanaḥ Ms. 10. 110. --2. a Śūdra; -titā Ms. 12. 9. --3 a chaṇḍala.
          --dhanaṃ the last term of a progression or series.
          --padaṃmūlaṃ the last or greatest root (in a square).
          --bhaṃ 1. the last lunar mansion revatī. --2. the last sign of the zodiac; Pisces.
          --yugaṃ the last or Kali age.
          --yoni a. of the lowest origin; Ms. 8. 68. (
          --niḥ) the lowest source or origin
          --lopaḥ dropping of the last letter or syllable of a word.
          --varṇaḥ, --varṇā a man or woman of the lowest caste, a Śūdra male or female.
          --vipulā N. of a metre.

aṃtyakaḥ A man of the lowest tribe.

aṃtram [aṃtyate badhyate deho'nena, aṃtkaraṇe ṣṭran; according to Uṇ. 4. 163 am ktraṃ] An entrail, intestine; aṃtrabhedanaṃ kriyate praśrayaśca Mv. 3 the vitals of the heart are rent (marmabhidaḥ vācaḥ ucyaṃte ityarthaḥ). --trī N. of a plant (used against colic or wind in the stomach; cf. ajāṃtrī, chagalāṃtrī).
     -- Comp.
          --ādaḥ a worm in the intestines.
          --kūjaḥ. kūjanaṃ, --vikūjanaṃ the rumbling noise in the bowels; pakvāśayasthoṃtrakūjaṃ śūlaṃ nābhau karoti vā Suśr.
          --pācaka [aṃtrasthaṃ doṣaṃ pācayati] N. of a medicinal plant Aeschynomene Grandiflora.
          --māṃsaṃ a kind of roasted flesh.
          --vṛddhiḥ f. inguinal hernia, rupture, swelling of the scrotum.
          --śilā N. of a river rising from the Vindhya mountain.
          --sraj f. a garland of intestines (worn by nṛsiṃha).

aṃtraṃdhamiḥ f. Indigestion, inflammation of bowels; flatulence.

aṃd 1 P. To bind, fasten.

aṃdaḥ Binding.

aṃduḥ --dūḥ f. [aṃdyate badhyate anena, aṃd-kū, kūpratyayāṃtaḥ nipātaḥ] Uṇ. 1. 93] also aṃdukaḥ, aṃdūkaḥ
     (1) A chain or fetter.
     (2) A chain for the elephant's feet; gajamaṃdūriva niścalaṃ cakāra Śi. 20. 51; -ninādaḥ 11. 7.
     (3) A sort of ornament worn round the ankles; cf. nūpura.

     (1) An oven, fire-place.
     (2) An elder sister (cf. -aṃtikā).

aṃdolayati Den. P. To swing, agitate, rock to and fro, oscillate.

aṃdolanam Swinging, oscillating, waving; drākcāmarāṃdolanāt Udb.

aṃdh 10 U.
     (1) To make blind, blind; aṃdhayan bhṛṃgamālāḥ Śi. 11. 19; timire janasya dṛśamaṃdhayati 9. 21.
     (2) To be or become blind.

aṃdha a.
     (1) Blind (lit. and fig.); devoid of sight, unable to see (at particular times); divāṃdhāḥ prāṇinaḥ kecidrātrāvaṃdhāstathāpare; made blind, blinded; srajamapi śirasyaṃdhaḥ kṣiptāṃ dhunotyahiśaṃkayā S. 7. 24; madāṃdhaḥ blinded by intoxication; so darpāṃdhaḥ, krodhāṃdhaḥ; kāma-, lobha-, ajñāna-; sahajāṃdhadṛśaḥ svadurnaye Śi. 16. 29 blind to his own wicked acts.
     (2) Making blind, preventing the sight; utter, pitchy, complete, thick (darkness) Ms. 8. 94; sīdannaṃdhe tamasi U. 3. 38; Mal. 9. 8, 20; See -kūpa, -tāmasaṃ infra. --dhaṃ
     (1) Darkness.
     (2) Spiritual ignorance; ajñāna or avidyā q. v.
     (3) Water; also, turbid water. --dhaḥ
     (1) A kind of mendicant (parivrājaka) who has completely controlled his organs; tiṣṭhato vrajato vāpi yasya cakṣurna dūragam . catuṣpadāṃ bhuvaṃ muktvā parivrāḍaṃdha ucyate ..
     (2) An epithet of the zodiacal signs at particular periods; (naṣṭadravyalābhālābhopayogayukto rāśibhedaḥ); meṣo vṛṣo mṛgeṃdraśca rātrāvaṃdhāḥ prakīrtitāḥ . nṛyukkarkaṭakanyāśca divāṃdhāḥ parikīrtitāḥ .. --dhāḥ? (pl.) N. of a people see aṃdhra.
     -- Comp.
          --alajī a blind boil or abscess in the eyes (one that does not open or suppurate).
          --ahiḥ, --ahikaḥ a blind serpent, i. e. one that is not poisonous. (
          --hiḥ, --hikaḥ) N. of a fish (kucikā). --kāraḥ [aṃdhaṃ karoti] darkness (lit. and fig.); līnaṃ divābhītamivāṃdhakāraṃ Ku. 1. 12; kāma-, madana-; aṃdhakāratāmupayāti cakṣuḥ K. 36 grows dim; bāṣpajaladhārāṃdhakāritamukhī K. 161, 286.
          --kūpaḥ [aṃdhayatītyaṃdhaḥ, aṃdhaḥ kūpaḥ] 1. a well the mouth of which is hidden; a well overgrown with plants &c. --2. [aṃdhasya dṛṣṭyabhāvasya kūpa iva] mental darkness, infatuation. --3. N. of a hell, to which those who tease and kill harmless creatures are condemned.
          --tamasaṃ (P. V. 4. 79),
          --tāmasaṃ, --dhātamasaṃ deep or complete darkness; lokamaṃdhatamasātkramoditau R. 11. 24; aṃdhatamasamiva praviśāmi U. 7 the gloom of hell; pradhvaṃsitāṃdhatamasastatrodāharaṇaṃ raviḥ Śi. 2. 33. (
          --sā) night.
          --tāmisraḥ --śraḥ (sraṃ also). 1. complete or deep darkness (especially of the soul); tamisroṣṭadaśadhā tathā bhavatyaṃdhatāmisraḥ Sān. K. 48 (bhayaviśeṣaviṣayako'bhiniveśaḥ); tasyāmaṃdhatāmisramabhyadhyāyat Mv. 1. --2. spiritual ignorance (dehe naṣṭe ahameva naṣṭaḥitirūpamajñānaṃ); enveloped in utter darkness. (
          --sraḥ, sraṃ) N. of a division of Tartarus or infernal regions, the second of the 21 hells to which those who seduce the wives of others and enjoy them are condemned. According to Bhavabhūti persons committing suicide were condemned to this hell; cf. aṃdhatāmisrā hyasūryā nāma te lokāstebhyaḥ pratividhīyaṃte ya ātmaghātina ityevamṛṣayo manyaṃte U. 4; Ms. 4. 88, 197; Y. 3. 224; doctrine of annihilation after death.
          --dhī a. mentally blind.
          --pūtanā a demoness supposed to cause diseases in children; yo dveṣṭi stanamatisārakāsahikkāchardībhirjvarasahitābhirardyamānaḥ . durvarṇaḥ satatamadhaḥśayo'mlagaṃdhistaṃ brūyurvarabhiṣajoṃdhapūtanārtam Suśr.
          --mūṣā a small covered crucible with a hole in the side.
          --mūṣikā [aṃdhaṃ dṛṣṭyabhāvaṃ muṣṇāti, muṣ-ṇvul] N. of a plant or grass devatāḍa (tatsevanena cakṣuṣmattā bhavatīti vaidyakaprasiddhiḥ). --rātrī dark night (Ved).
          --vartman m. [aṃdhaṃ sūryaprakāśarāhityādvartma yatra] the seventh skandha or region of wind.

aṃdhaṃkaraṇa a. Making blind (P. III. 2. 56).

aṃdhaṃbhaviṣṇu, --bhāvuka a. Becoming blind (P. III. 2. 57).

aṃdhaka a. [aṃdh-kan] Blind; aṃdhakaḥ kubjakaścaiva Pt. 5. 91. --kaḥ
     (1) N. of an Asura, son of Kaśyapa and Diti and killed by Śiva. [He is represented as a demon with 1000 arms and heads, 2000 eyes and feet, and called Andhaka, because he walked like a blind man, though he could see very well; sa vrajatyaṃdhavadyasmādanaṃdhopi hi bhārata . tamaṃdhaṃkoyaṃ nāmneti procustatra nivāsinaḥ .. He was slain by Śiva when he attempted to carry off the Pārijāta tree from heaven; whence Śiva is called Andhakaripu, -ari, -dvish &c. According to the Matsya Purāṇa Andhaka was admitted to the class of Gaṇas by Śiva, at his importunities and humble supplication, when he was about to be killed by the god for having attempted to carry off his wife Pārvatī].
     (2) N. of a descendant of Yadu and ancestor of Kṛṣṇa and his descendants, a grandson of Kroṣṭu, son of Yudhājit who, together with his brother Vṛṣṇi is the ancestor of the celebrated family of Andhakavṛṣṇis; P. IV. 1. 114, VI. 2. 34.
     (3) N. of a sage, son of Mamatā and of Utathya, elder brother of Bṛhaspati.
     -- Comp.
          --ariḥ --ripuḥ, --śatruḥ, --ghātī, --asuhṛd &c. slayer of Andhaka, epithets of Śiva.
          --vartaḥ N. of a mountain.
          --vṛṣṇi m. pl. descendants of aṃdhaka and vṛṣṇi.

aṃdhikā [aṃdh-ṇvul]
     (1) Night.
     (2) A kind of game or sport, probably blindman's-buff; gambling (tayā hi janaḥ aṃdha iva vivekaṃśūnyaḥ kriyate Tv.).
     (3) A woman of a particular character, one of the classes of women.
     (4) A disease of the eye.
     (5) = sarṣapī, = siddhā q. v. (asyā atyaṃtasevanāt dṛṣṭirkṣayo jāyate iti vaidyakaprasiddhiḥ).

aṃdhīkṛ 8 U. To make blind, blind; -kṛtātmā blinded in mind.

aṃdhībhū To become blind.

aṃdhas n. [ad-asun num dhaśca; adernumdhau ca Uṇ. 4. 205] Food; dvijātiśeṣeṇa yadetadaṃdhasā Ki. 1. 39; saśeṣa evāṃdhasi asāvatṛpyat Dk. 133, 157 (supposed to have in the Veda the senses of Soma, the herb itself, or its juice, juice, ghee or boiled rice, but usually taken to mean 'food' only by Indian lexicographers and commentators. [cf. Gr. andhos].

aṃdhuḥ [fr. am Uṇ. 1. 27]
     (1) A well; āpīnoṃ'dhuḥ P. VI. 1. 28 Sk.
     (2) The male organ of generation; vākpāṇipādapāyvaṃdhusaṃjñānyāhurmanīṣiṇaḥ.

aṃdhulaḥ [aṃdh-ulac] A kind of tree, Acacia Sirissa (śirīṣa).

aṃdhraḥ (pl.)
     (1) N. of a people and the country inhabited by them. [The country of the Andhras is said to be the modern Teliṅgaṇa. But the limits were probably confined to the Ghats on the west and the rivers Godāvarī and Kṛṣṇa on the north and south. It bordered on Kalinga (See Dk. 7th Ullāsa), and its capital Andhranagara is probably the old town of Vengi or Vegi. According to Dandin, there was near it a lake 'like the ocean and crested with cranes' which description can only refer to the lake Colair which has an area of over 150 miles; jagannāthādūrdhvabhāgādarvāk śrībhramarātmakāt . tāvadaṃdhrābhidho deśaḥ].
     (2) N. of a dynasty of kings.
     (3) A man of a mixed (low) caste, being born of a Vaideha father and Karavara mother, who lives by killing game; Ms. 10. 36.
     (4) A kind of fowler.
     -- Comp.
          --jātiḥ the Andhra tribe.
          --bhṛtyāḥ N. of a dynasty of kings.

annam [ad-kta; anityanena, an-nan;] according to Yāska, from ad, adyate atti ca bhūtāni; or from ā-nam, ā ābhimukhyena hyetannataṃ prahvībhūtaṃ bhavati bhojanāya bhūtānāṃ]
     (1) Food (in general); adyate'tti ca bhūtāni tasmādannaṃ taducyate Tait. Up.; medo'sṛṅmāṃsamajjāsthi vadaṃtyannaṃ manīṣiṇaḥ Ms. 3. 182; ahamannaṃ bhavānbhoktā H. 1. 54 I am your prey &c.; carāṇāmannamacarāḥ Ms. 5. 29.
     (2) Food as representing the lowest form in which the Supreme Soul is manifested, being the coarsest and last of the 5 vestures (kośa) in which the soul is clothed and passes from body to body in the long process of metempsychosis --"the nutrimentitious vesture or visible body in the world of sense" (sthūlaśarīra called annamayakośa).
     (3) Boiled rice; annena vyaṃjanaṃ P. II. 1. 34.
     (4) Corn (bread corn); tā (āpaḥ) annamasṛjaṃta tasmādyatra kva ca varṣati tadeva bhūyiṣṭhamannaṃ bhavati Ch. Up.; ādityājjāyate vṛṣṭirvṛṣṭerannaṃ tataḥ prajāḥ . Ms. 3. 76; kṛta- 9. 219; 10. 86, 12. 65.
     (5) Water.
     (6) Earth (pṛthivyā annahetutvādannaśabdavācyatā).
     (7) N. of Viṣṇu. --nnaḥ The sun (sa hi annahetuvṛṣṭihetuḥ).
     -- Comp.
          --akālaḥ = anākāla q. v.
          --attṛ, --ādin --āhārin eating food.
          --ada a. 1. eating food. --2. having a good appetite (dīptāgni). (--daḥ) N. of Viṣṇu.
          --adyaṃ proper food, food in general; Ms. 3. 82, 4. 112, 11. 144.
          --ācchādanaṃ, --vastraṃ food and clothing, food and raiment, the bare necessaries of life.
          --āyuḥ (annāyu) consisting of, living by, food, desirous of food (annabaṃdhanaḥ, annajīvanaḥ). --kālaḥ hour of dinner; meal-time.
          --kiṭṭaḥ = -mala q. v.
          --kūṭaḥ a large heap of boiled rice.
          --koṣṭhakaḥ 1. a cupboard; granary. --2. Viṣṇu. --3. the sun.
          --gatiḥ f. the passage of food, gullet (cf. bahiḥsrotas). --gaṃdhiḥ dysentery, diarrhoea.
          --ja, --jāta a. produced from food as the primitive substance.
          --jalaṃ food and water, bare subsistence.
          --tejas a. having the vigour caused by food.
          --da, --dātṛ, --dāyin, --prada a. 1. giving food; vāridastṛptimāpnoti sukhamakṣayyamannadaḥ Ms. 4. 229. --2. epithet of Śiva.
          --dā N. of Durga or Annapūrṇā.
          --dāsaḥ [annena pālito dāsaḥ śāka. ta.] a servant who works for food only, one who becoms a servant or slave by getting food only.
          --devatā the deity supposed to preside over articles of food.
          --doṣaḥ 1. sin arising from eating prohibited food; Ms. 5. 4. --2. a defect in the food eaten; derangement of food or the humours of the body; ālasyādannadoṣācca mṛtyurviprāñ jighāṃsati Ms. 5. 4.
          --dveṣaḥ dislike of food, loss of appetite.
          --patiḥ lord or possessor of food, epithet of Savitṛ, Agni, and Śiva.
          --pākaḥ cooking of food; digestion of food (by the fire in the stomach).
          --pū a. purifying food, epithet of the Sun.
          --pūrṇa a. filled with, possessed of, food. (
          --rṇā) a form of Durgā (the goddess of plenty); -īśvarī N. of Durga or a form of Bhairavī.
          --peyaṃ = vājapeyaṃ q. v.
          --pralaya a. being dissolved into food after death.
          --prāśaḥ, --prāśanaṃ the ceremony of giving a new-born child food to eat for the first time, one of the 16 Samskaras performed between the 5th and 8th month (usually in the sixth, Ms. 2. 34) with preliminary oblations to fire (Mar. uṣṭāvaṇa); Ms. 2. 34; Y. 1. 12.
          --brahman, --ātman m. Brahma as represented by food.
          --bhakta a. [annārthaṃ bhaktaḥ dāsaḥ] = annadāsa q. v.
          --bhuj a. eating food, epithet of Śiva.
          --maya a. see below.
          --malaṃ 1. excrement, feces; P. VI. 1. 148 Sk. --2. spirituous liquor; surā vai malamannānāṃ Ms. 11. 94.
          --rakṣā precautions as to eating food.
          --rasaḥ essence of food, chyle; food and drink, nutriment; nānāvidhānannarasān vanyamūlaphalāśrayān tebhyo dadau Ram.
          --vastraṃ = -ācchādanaṃ q. v.
          --vikāraḥ 1. transformation of food, assimilation. --2. disorder of the stomach caused by indigestion. --3. seminal discharge (of man); semen itself; cf. annādretaḥ saṃbhavati. --vyavahāraḥ the law or custom relating to food, i. e. the custom of eating together or not with other persons.
          --śeṣaḥ leavings of food, offal.
          --saṃskāraḥ consecration of food.
          --homaḥ a sacrifice (with 10 materials) connected with the Aśvamedha sacrifice.

annamaya a. ( f.) Consisting or made of food, composed of or containing boiled rice; -kośaḥ-ṣaḥ the gross material body, the sthūlaśarīra, which is sustained by food and which is the fifth or last vesture or wrapper of the soul; see anna
     (2) above and also kośa; hence, also the material world, the coarsest or lowest form in which Brahma is considered as manifesting itself in the worldly existence. --yaṃ Plenty of food.

annāvṛdh a. [annaṃ vardhate anena vṛdh-karaṇe kvip, pūrvapadadīrghaḥ] Increasing food; Rv. 10. 1. 4.

anya a. [an aghnyādi- ya; anyaḥ, nyasmai, -smāt; n. anyat &c.]
     (1) Another, different, other (bhinna); another, other (generally); sa eva tvanyaḥ kṣaṇena bhavatīti vicitrametat Bh. 2. 40; anyadeva bhāgadheyamete nirvapaṃti S. 2; sarvamanyat everything else; kimutānyahiṃsrāḥ R. 2. 62; changed, altered; saṃpratyanye vayaṃ Bh. 3. 66 quite different persons; oft. in comp. anyasaṃgāt, ananyaparāyaṇa, ananyasādhāraṇa &c.
     (2) Other than, different from, else than (with abl. or as last member of comp.); nāsti jīvitādanyadabhimatataramiha sarvajaṃtūnāṃ K. 35; kosti dhanyo madanyaḥ Bv. 4. 37; utthitaṃ dadṛśe'nyacca kabaṃdhebhyona kiṃcana R. 12 49; kimanyadasyāḥ pariṣadaḥ śrutiprasādanataḥ S. 1; oft. used in addition to ṛte or vinā; ṛte samudrādanyaḥ ko bibharti vaḍavānalaṃ Pt. 5. 35; kiṃ nu khalu me priyādarśanādṛte śaraṇamanyat S. 3.
     (3) Another person, one different from self (opp. sva, ātmīya); vāsaśca dhṛtamanyairna dhārayet Ms. 4. 66.
     (4) Strange, unusual, extraordinary; anya eva sa prakāraḥ K. 168; anyā jagaddhitamayī manasaḥ pravṛttiḥ Bv. 1. 69; dhanyā mṛdanyaiva sā S. D.
     (5) Ordinary, any one; nirātaṃkaḥ kanyāmanyopi yācate Mv. 1. 31; cf. itara.
     (6) Additional, new, more; anyān daśasuvarṇānprayaccha Mk. 2 another ten (coins); anyadanyannalinadalaśayanaṃ K. 157 new and new (changing every now and then); anyasmin divase another day; one of a number (with gen.); anyacca moreover, besides, and again (used to connect sentences together); eka-anya the one the other; Me. 78; see under eka also; anya-anya one-another; anyaḥ karoti anyo bhuṃkte one does, another suffers; anyanmukhe anyannirvahaṇe Mu. 5; anyaduptaṃ jātamanyat Ms. 9. 40, 99; 8. 204; karṇe lagati cānyasya prāṇairanyo viyujyate Pt. 1. 305; anyaducchṛṃkhalaṃ sattvamanyacchāstraniyaṃtritaṃ Śi. 2. 62; anya-anya-anya &c. one, another, third, fourth &c.; jalpaṃti sārdhamanyena paśyaṃtyanyaṃ savibhramāḥ . hṛdgataṃ ciṃtayaṃtyanyaṃ priyaḥ ko nāma yoṣitām Pt. 1. 135; manasyanyadavacasyanyat karmaṇyanyaddurātmanām; (in pl.) kecit-anye some-others; eke-anye-tathānye Ms. 10. 70; 4. 9; 12. 123. [cf. L. alius; Gr. allos for aljos, Zend anya].
     -- Comp.
          --artha a. having a different meaning, sense, or purpose.
          --asādhāraṇa a. not common to others, peculiar.
          --āśrayaṇa a. going or passing over to another.
          --udarya a. born from another. (
          --ryaḥ) a step-mother's son, a half-brother. (
          --ryā) a half-sister.
          --ūḍhā a. married to another; another's wife.
          --kārukā a worm bred in excrement (śakṛtkīṭaḥ). --kṣetraṃ 1. another field. --2. another or foreign territory. --3. another's wife.
          --ga, gāmin a. 1. going to another. --2. adulterous, unchaste; vaṇijāṃ tu kulastrīva sthirā lakṣmīrananyagā Ks. 21. 56; 19. 27.
          --gotra a. of a different family or lineage.
          --citta a. having the mind fixed on some thing or some one else; see -manas. --ja --jāta a. of a different origin.
          --janman n. another life or existence, regeneration, metempsychosis.
          --durvaha a. difficult to be borne by others.
          --devata, --tya, --daivatya a. addressed or referring to another deity (as a Vedic Mantra).
          --dharman a. having another or different property. (
          --rmaḥ) different property or characteristic.
          --dhī a. whose mind is turned away from God.
          --nābhi a. belonging to another family.
          --padārthaḥ 1. another substance. --2. the sense of another word; -pradhāno bahuvrīhiḥ the Bahuvrīhi compound essentially depends on the sense of another word.
          --para a. 1. devoted to another or something else. --2. expressing or referring to something else.
          --puṣṭā,bhṛtā 'reared by another,' epithet of the cuckoo, which is supposed to be reared by the crow (called anyabhṛt); apyanyapuṣṭā pratikūlaśabdā Ku. 1. 45; kalamanyabhṛtāsu bhāṣitaṃ R. 8. 59.
          --pūrvā [anyaḥ patiḥ pūrvo yasyāḥ] 1. a woman already promised or betrothed to another. --2. a remarried widow (punarbhū) see ananyapūrva. --bīja, --bījasamudbhava, --samutpanna an adopted son (born from other parents), one who may be adopted as a son for want of legitimate issue.
          --bhṛt m. a crow (rearing another, it being supposed to sit on the eggs of the cuckoo and to rear its young ones), cf. S. 5. 22.
          --manas, --manaska, --mānasa a. 1. having the mind fixed on something else; inattentive. --2. fickle, versatile, unsteady; anyamanasaḥ striyaḥ H. 1. 111 absentminded; possessed by a demon.
          --mātṛjaḥ a half-brother (born of another mother) Y. 2. 139.
          --rājan, --rāṣṭrīya a. subject to another king or kingdom (Ved.).
          --rūpa a. having another form, changed, altered; padminīṃ vānyarūpāṃ Me. 83. (
          --paṃ) another or changed form; -peṇa in another form.
          --liṃga, ga--ka a. following the gender of another word (i. e. the substantive), an adjective; ūṣavānūṣaro dvāvapyanyaliṃgau Ak.
          --vādin a. 1. giving false evidence. --2. a defendant in general.
          --vāpaḥ the cuckoo leaving the eggs in the nests of other birds.
          --vivardhita a. = puṣṭa a cuckoo.
          --vrata a. following other (than Vedic) observances, devoted to other gods, infidel.
          --śākhaḥ --khakaḥ a Brahmaṇa who has gone over to another school (of religion &c.); an apostate.
          --saṃkrāṃta a. fixed on or transferred to another (woman); -hṛdayaḥ āryaputraḥ M. 3, 4.
          --saṃgamaḥ intercourse with another; illicit intercourse.
          --sādhāraṇa a. common to many others.
          --strī another's wife, a woman not one's own. [In Rhetoric she is considered as one of three chief female characters in a poetical composition, the other two being svīyā and sādhāraṇī strī. anyā may be either a damsel or another's wife. The 'damsel' is one not yet married, who is bashful and arrived at the age of puberty. As 'another's wife' she is fond of festivals and similar occasions of amusement, who is a disgrace to her family and utterly destitute of modesty, see S. D. 108-110]. -gaḥ an adulterer Ms. 8. 386. [Note. Some compounds under anya will be found under ananya.]

anyaka a. Another, other (= anya).

anyat a. (anya n.) Another &c. --ind. Again, moreover, besides &c.
     -- Comp.
          --artha 1. having a different meaning. --2. referring to or expressing another sense. (
          --rthaḥ) a different meaning.
          --āśā desire of something else.
          --āśis f. another's blessing.
          --āsthā devotion or attachment to another.
          --utsuka a. longing for another.
          --rāgaḥ attachment to another.

anyatama a. [anya-ḍatama] (declined like a noun and not a pronoun) One of many, any one out of a large number (with gen. or in comp.); japanvānyatamaṃ vedaṃ Ms. 11. 76; 6. 32, 4. 13; Y. 2. 22, 3. 253; (anyatarānyatamaśabdau avyutpannau prātipadike iti kaiyaṭaḥ).

anyatara a. (declined like a pronoun) One of two (persons or things), either of the two (with gen.); tayormunikumārayoranyataraḥ K. 151; saṃtaḥ parīkṣyānyataradbhajaṃte M. 1. 2 the one or the other; yuvayoranyatarāgacchatu S. 3; Ms. 2. 111.; 9. 171; other, different; anyatara-anyatara the one-the other; anyatarasyāṃ (loc. of -rā) either way, in both ways, optionally; frequently used by Pāṇini in his Sūtras in the sense of or vibhāṣā; hṛkroranyatarasyāṃ, ātmanepadeṣvanyatarasyāṃ &c. &c.

anyatarataḥ adv. On one of two sides; -daṃta having teeth on one side.

anyataredyuḥ adv. [anyatarasminnahani-edyus] On either of two days, on one day or on another, P. V. 3. 22.

anyataḥ adv.
     (1) From another; na cānyatastasya śarīrarakṣā R. 2. 4; tīrthodakaṃ ca vahniśca nānyataḥ śuddhimarhataḥ U. 1. 13.
     (2) On one side; anyataḥ-anyataḥ, ekataḥanyataḥ on the one side, on the other side; tapanamaṃḍaladīpitamekataḥ satatanaiśatamovṛtamanyataḥ Ki. 5. 2; ekavastu sakalāni nimittānyato hi manasaḥ pratipattiḥ Nīti.
     (3) To another place, towards some other person or direction; gaṃtavyaṃ vā tato'nyataḥ Ms. 2. 200; anyatopi nayane prerayaṃtyā S. 2. 2; ārye vrajāmonyataḥ R. 6. 82.
     (4) From another ground or motive.
     (5) On the other side; on the contrary.
     (6) Otherwise; in another place, elsewhere.
     -- Comp.
          --araṇyaṃ Ved. a land which is woody here and there.
          --eta, --etas, --enī Ved. variegated or spotted on one side.
          --ghātin a. striking in one direction.
          --vāta a. suffering occasional wind (rheumatism.). (
          --taḥ) a sort of eye-disease.

anyatastyaḥ [anyato bhavaḥ, tyap] An enemy, adversary.

anyatra adv. [anya-tral] (oft. = anyasmin with a subst. or adj. force.)
     (1) Elsewhere, in another place (with abl.); apatyādhikārādanyatra laukikamapatyamātraṃ gotraṃ P. IV. 2. 39 Com.; sometimes with vinā; vinā malayamanyatra caṃdanaṃ na prarohati Pt. 1. 41; (with verbs of motion) to another place.
     (2) On another occasion, at another time than; oft. (in comp.); madhuparke ca yajñe ca piturdaivatakarmaṇi . atraiva paśavo hiṃsyā nānyatretyabravīnmanuḥ Ms. 5. 41.
     (3) Except, without, other than; yathā phalānāṃ jātānāṃ nānyatra patanādbhayaṃ . evaṃ narasya jātasya nānyatra maraṇādbhayaṃ .. Ram. Mv. 6. 8; R. 14. 32; Bg. 3. 9; Y. 1. 215; anyatra naimiṣeyasatrāt V. 5, Ms. 4. 164; oft. with the force of the nom. case; devā anyatraivāśvibhyāṃ sattraṃ niṣeduḥ Kaus. Br. (anyatra = anye).
     (4) Other wise, in another way, in the other case, in the other sense; surājñi deśe rājanvān syāttatonyatra rājavān Ak.; rājanvatī bhūḥ, rājavānanyatra; carmaṇvatī nadī carmavatī anyatra P. VIII. 2. 12, 14 Sk.
     -- Comp.
          --manas --citta a. whose mind is directed to something else, inattentive.

anyathā ind. [anya-prakārārthe thā]
     (1) Otherwise, in another way or manner, in a different manner; yadabhāvi na tadbhāvi bhāvi cenna tadanyathā H. 1; with ataḥ, itaḥ or tataḥ otherwise than, in a manner different from; atonyathā pravṛttistu rākṣaso vidhirucyate Ms. 5. 31; Bg. 13. 11. anyathā-anyathā in one way, in another (different) way; yonyathā saṃtamātmānamanyathā bhāṣate Ms. 4. 255; sattvabhaṃgabhayādrājñāṃ kathayaṃtyanyathā puraḥ . anyathāvivṛtārtheṣu svairālāpeṣu maṃtriṇaḥ Mu. 4. 8. anyathā kṛ
          (a) to do otherwise, change or alter; na hi daivaṃ śakyamanyathā kartumabhiyuktenāpi K. 62; na svabhāvotra martyānāṃ śakyate kartumanyathā Pt. 1. 258; S. 6. 13;
          (b) to act otherwise, violate, transgress, go against; tvayā kadācidapi mama vacanaṃ nānyathā kṛtaṃ Pt. 4;
          (c) to destroy, undo, frustrate, baffle, defeat (hope, plan &c.), kartumakartumanyathākartuṃ samartha īśvaraḥ; mamecchāṃ mānyathā kṛthāḥ Ks. 22. 51; lābhaṃ kuryācca yonyathā Y. 2. 195;
          (d) to make false, falsify; khyāto lokapravādoyaṃ bharatenānyathā kṛtaḥ Ram.; amātyaḥ prāḍvivāko vā yatkuryuḥ kāryamanyathā Ms. 9. 234 to do wrongly; -grah, --man, --saṃbhāvay, samarthay, -vikalpay &c. to take or think to be otherwise, to misunderstand, understand wrongly; alamanyathā gṛhītvā na khalu manasvini mayā prayuktamidaṃ M. 1. 20; alamasmānanyathā saṃbhāvya S. 1; kiṃ māmanyathā saṃbhāvayasi K. 147; S. 3. 19; janonyathā bhartṛmatīṃ viśaṃkate S. 5. 17 suspects to be otherwise (than chaste); -bhū or to be otherwise, be changed or altered, be falsified; na me vacanamanyathā bhavitumarhati S. 4; śokārtasya pravṛtto me śloko bhavatu nānyathā Ram.; tayormahātmanorvākyaṃ nānyathā yāti sāṃprataṃ Ram.
     (2) Otherwise, or else, in the contrary case; vyaktaṃ nāsti kathamanyathā vāsaṃtyapi tāṃ na paśyet U. 3; steno'nyathā bhavet Ms. 8. 144; Y. 1. 86, 2. 288; on the other hand, on the contrary.
     (3) Falsely, untruly; kimanyathā bhaṭṭinī mayā vijñāpitapūrvā V. 2; kimanyathā bhaṭṭinyai vijñāpitaṃ M. 4; na khalvanyathā brāhmaṇasya vacanaṃ V. 3; yo nyāyamanyathā brūte sa yāti narakaṃ naraḥ Pt. 3. 107; H. 3. 20; Ms. 8. 90.
     (4) Wrongly, erroneously, badly, as in anyathāsiddha q. v. below; see under 1 also.
     (5) From another motive, cause, or ground; durvāsasaḥśāpādiyaṃ tvayā pratyādiṣṭā nānyathā S. 7. [cf. L. aliuta.].
     -- Comp.
          --anupapattiḥ f. see arthāpatti. --kāraḥ changing, altering. (
          --raṃ) adv. in a different manner, differently P. III. 4. 27.
          --khyātiḥ 1. erroneous conception of the Spirit, title of a philosophical work. --2. wrong conception in general (in phil.).
          --bhāvaḥ alteration, change, being otherwise, difference; bahūnāṃ vyaktīnāmekadeśenānyathābhāvaḥ P. V. 4. 53; change of view or mind; mayi -bhāvo na kartavyaḥ Ch. Up.
          --vādin a. speaking differently or falsely; speaking falsely or inconsistently; (in law) a prevaricator, prevaricating witness.
          --vṛtti a. 1. changed, altered. --2. affected, perturbed; disturbed by strong emotions; meghāloke bhavati sukhinopyanyathāvṛtti cetaḥ Me. 3.
          --siddha a. proved or demonstrated wrongly; (in Nyaya) said of a cause (kāraṇa) which is not the true one, but only refers to accidental and remote circumstances (as the ass employed to fetch clay &c. in the case of a ghaṭa or jar) which do not invariably contribute to the result, see kāraṇa; this anyathā- is said to be of 3 kinds in Tarka K., but 5 are mentioned in Bhaṣa P. 19-22.
          --ddhaṃ, --siddhiḥ f. wrong demonstration; one in which arguments, not being true causes, are advanced; an unessential cause, an accidental or concomitant circumstance Bhaṣa P. 16.
          --stotraṃ satire, irony; Y. 2. 204.

anyathayati Den. P. To change, alter.

anyadā ind.
     (1) At another time, on another occasion, in any other case; anyadā bhūṣaṇaṃ puṃsāṃ kṣamā lajjeva yoṣitām Śi. 2. 44, R. 11. 73.
     (2) Once, one day, at one time, once upon a time.
     (3) Sometimes, now and then.

anyadīya a.
     (1) Belonging to another.
     (2) Being or existing in another.

anyarhi ind. At another time (= anyadā).

anyādṛkṣ --ś --śa a. [anya iva paśyati, anyādṛś, karmakartari ksa, kvin, kañ vā] P. III. 2. 60]
     (1) Of another kind, like another.
     (2) Changed, unusual, strange; yātrāpratinivṛttamanyādṛśaṃ bhavaṃtamavadhārayāmi Māl. 1; anyāśadṛmeva bhagavatyā vacanaṃ 2; being different or otherwise; na khalu anyādṛśeṣu yuṣmādṛśyaḥ pakṣapātinyo bhavaṃti 4; anyādṛśyeva kṣaṇamajaniṣṭa Dk. 106, K. 309; anyādṛśīracanā kasyāpi valīmukhasya Mv. 6 strange.

anyedyuḥ ind. [anya-edyus P. V. 3 22]
     (1) On the other or following day; anyedyurātmānucarasya bhāvaṃ jijñāsamānā R. 2. 26.
     (2) One day, once.

anyedyuṣka a. [anyedyurbhavaḥ, kan] Occurring every day, daily, diurnal; anyedyuṣkamahorātrādekakālaṃ pravartate Suśr. --ṣkaḥ A quotidian fever.

anyonya a. [anya-karmavyatihāre dvitvaṃ, pūrvapade suśca] One another, each other, mutual (treated like a pronoun). In many cases the use of this word corresponds to the use of the word 'each other' or 'one another' in English; anyonyaṃ tāḍayataḥ Mk. 9 they strike each other (anyaḥ anyaṃ tāḍayati). Thus anyaḥ may be regarded as the subject and anyaṃ as the object of the verb, as in English. The second anya may, therefore, in many cases stand in the instr., gen., or loc. cases; anyonyairāhatāḥ saṃtaḥ sasvanurbhīmaniḥsvanāḥ Ram.; anyonyasya vyatilunaṃti P. I. 3. 16 Sk. But there are several instances, especially when anyonya enters into compound, in which the first anya loses all its nominative force and becomes a sort of oblique case, or an irregular com pound of anya and anya, see P. VIII. 1. 12 Sk.; anyonyasyāvyabhīcāraḥ Ms. 9. 101; oft. in comp. and translated by 'mutual', 'reciprocal', 'mutually'; -śobhājananāt Ku. 1. 42; so -kalaha, -darśana, &c. --nyaṃ ind. Mutually. --nyaṃ (In Rhet.) A figure of speech, the 'Reciprocal', in which two things do the same act to each other; anyonyamubhayorekakriyāyāḥ karaṇaṃ mithaḥ . tvayā sā śobhate tanvī tayā tvamapi śobhase . rajanyā śobhate caṃdraścaṃdreṇāpi niśīthinī S. D. 724.
     -- Comp.
          --adhyāsaḥ reciprocal attribution of identity (anyonyatādātmyāropaḥ); jalavyomnā ghaṭākāśo yathā sarvastirohitaḥ . tathā jīve ca kūṭasthaḥ sonyonyādhyāsa ucyate .. --apahṛta a. taken from one another, taken secretly.
          --abhāvaḥ mutual non-existence or negation; one of the two main kinds of abhāva; it is reciprocal negation of identity, essence, or respective peculiarity, and is equivalent to difference (bheda); tādātmyasaṃbaṃdhāvacchinnapratiyogiko'nyonyābhāvaḥ, as ghaṭaḥ paṭo na bhavati; it exists between two notions which have no property in common.
          --āśraya a. mutually dependent. (
          --yaḥ) mutual or reciprocal dependence, support, or connection; reciprocal relation of cause and effect (a term in Nyaya).
          --uktiḥ f. conversation.
          --pakṣanayanaṃ transposition of numbers from one side to another.
          --bhedaḥ mutual dissension or enmity; so -kalaha. --mithunaṃ mutual union.
          --vibhāgaḥ mutual partition of an inheritance made by the sharers (without the presence of any other party).
          --vṛttiḥ f. mutual effect of one thing upon another.
          --vyatikaraḥ --saṃśrayaḥ reciprocal action or influence; mutual relation of cause and effect.

anyaṃga a. Ved. Spotless.

anyā a. Not drying up.

anyāya a. [na. ba.] Unjust, improper; -daṃḍaḥ unjust punishment; -yaḥparadārapṛcchāvyavahāraḥ S. 5. --yaḥ
     (1) Any unjust or unlawful action; see nyāya; nareṣvanyāyavartiṣu Ms. 7. 16 acting unjustly, following evil courses; anyāyena unjustly, improperly; nāpṛṣṭaḥ kasyacid brūyānna cānyāyena pṛcchataḥ Ms. 2. 110.
     (2) Injustice, impropriety.
     (3) Irregularity, disorder.

anyāyin a. Unjust, improper.

anyāyya a.
     (1) Unjust, unlawful.
     (2) Improper, unbecoming, indecorous.
     (3) Not authoritative.

anyūna a. Not defective or deficient, complete, whole, entire; -adhika neither deficient nor superfluous.
     -- Comp.
          --aṃga a. not having a defective limb.

anyokas a. Not residing in one's own house (dwelling in another's).

anyonya See under anya.

anvakṣa a. [anugataḥakṣaṃ iṃdriyaṃ gatisamā.]
     (1) Visible, perceptible.
     (2) Following, close on the heels of, immediately following. --kṣaṃ ind.
     (1) Afterwards, after; āroha tvaṃ ... sītāṃ cāropayānvakṣaṃ Rām.
     (2) Immediately after, forthwith, directly; Y. 3. 21.

anvakṣarasaṃdhiḥ A kind of Vedic Sandhi, that of a vowel and consonant.

anvaṃc a. [anu-aṃc-kvip;] nom. anvaṃṅ m., anvak n. anūcī f.]
     (1) Going after, following; tasmādime anvaṃco māsā yaṃti Śat. Br.; tvāmanvaṃco vayaṃ smasi Ait. Br.
     (2) Lying lengthwise, horizontal; anūci in the rear or behind, from behind; āgacchatonūci gajasya ghaṃṭayoḥ Śi. 12. 34 (pṛṣṭhadeśe).

anvak ind.
     (1) Afterwards.
     (2) From behind; pidadhānamanvagupagamya dṛśau Śi. 9. 76.
     (3) Friendly disposed, favourably; anvagbhūtvā, --bhāvaṃ, --āste becoming friendly disposed P. III. 4. 64 Sk. (agrataḥ pārśvataḥ pṛṣṭhato vānukūlo bhūtvā āste; anvagbhūtvā tiṣṭhati = pṛṣṭhato bhūtvā).
     (4) (with acc.) After; tāṃ ... anvagyayau madhyamalokapālaḥ R. 2. 16 went after or followed her; tamanvagiṃdrapramukhāśca devāḥ Ku. 7. 71.

anvan a. [an-vanip] Following.

anvaya See under anvi.

anvartitṛ m. Ved. An inviter.

anvartha a. [anugataḥ arthaṃ] Having the meaning clear or intelligible, having a meaning easily deducible from the etymology of the word; hence, true to the sense, significant; tathaiva sobhūdanvartho rājā prakṛtiraṃjanāt R. 4. 12; anvarthā tairvasuṃdharā Ki. 11. 64; Śi. 12. 23; anvartha evāyamadhunā pralāpo vartate U. 3.; anvarthatopi nanu rākṣasa rākṣasosi Mu. 5. 7 in the true sense of the word, properly so called.
     -- Comp.
          --grahaṇaṃ literal acceptation of the meaning of a word (opp. to rūḍha or conventional).
          --saṃjñā 1. an appropriate name, a technical term which directly conveys its own meaning; e. g. bhaviṣyaṃtī a name for 'future' is an anvarthasaṃjñā compared with ḷṭ. --2. a proper name the meaning of which is obvious.

anvavakiraṇam Scattering about successively.

anvavacāraḥ Descending and following.

anvavasargaḥ [sṛj-ghañ]
     (1) Slackening, letting loose (opp. āyāma).
     (2) Permission to do as one likes (kāmacārānujñā), one of the senses of api P. I. 4. 96; see api.
     (3) Following one's own will.

anvavasita a. Connected with, bound or fastened to.

anvavāyaḥ A race, family, lineage; anvavāyamavadātamākṛtiḥ Ki. 13. 37.

anvavekṣā Regard, consideration.

anvaṣṭakā [anugato'ṣṭakāṃ] The 9th day of the dark half of the three months following the full moon in mārgaśīrṣa, i. e. pauṣa, māgha and phālguna; pitṝṃścaivāṣṭakāsvarconnityamanvaṣṭakāsuca Ms. 4. 150.

anvaṣṭakyam A Śraddha or any such ceremony performed on the anvaṣṭakā days.

anvaṣṭamadiśam ind. Towards the north-west direction.

anvasta a. [fr. as to throw] Shot or hurled along, shot; interwoven (as in silk); chequered.

anvaham ind. Day after day; every day.

anvākhyā 2 P. To repeat in succession, enumerate.

     (1) Subsequent mention or enumeration; an explanation referring to what is mentioned before.
     (2) Section, chapter.

anvācayaḥ [pradhānasya paścādanyaḥ ācīyate bodhyate yatra, ci-ac]
     (1) Statement of a secondary (gauṇa) rite or action after the mention of a primary (pradhāna) one; adding an object of secondary importance to the main object, one of the senses of the particle ca; cānvācaye samāhāre Ak.; anyatarasyānuṣaṃgikatve'nvācayaḥ; as bho bhikṣāmaṭa gāṃ cānaya where going out to beg is enjoined to the beggar as his principal object, and the bringing of a cow (if he can see any) is tack ed on to it as a secondary object.
     (2) Such an object itself.

anvācita a. Secondary, inferior.

anvāje ind. [anu āṃjayatyanena, anuāji-ḍe Tv.] (Used like upāje only with kṛ) So as to assist or support the weak (durbalasya balādhāne); optionally regarded as a preposition; -kṛtya or -kṛtvā supporting, assisting (a weak person); durbalasya balamādhāya P. I. 4. 73 Sk.

anvādiś 6 P. To name or mention again; to mention or refer to in a subsequent place, employ again.

anvādiṣṭa p. p.
     (1) Mentioned after or according to; employed again; anvādiṣṭaḥ puruṣaḥ anupuruṣaḥ P. VI. 2. 190 Sk.
     (2) (Hence) Inferior, of secondary importance.

anvādeśaḥ Subsequent or repeated mention, referring to what has been previously mentioned; reemployment of the same word in a subsequent part of a sentence, or of the same thing to perform a subsequent operation; ādeśaḥ kathanaṃ anvādeśaḥ anukathanaṃ Kāsi. on P. II. 4. 32. (idaṃ and etad are said to assume the forms ene, enau, enān &c. in the sense of anvādeśa; kiṃcitkāryaṃ vidhātumupāttasya kāryāṃtaraṃ vidhātuṃ punarupādānaṃ anvādeśaḥ; e. g. anena vyākaraṇamadhītaṃ enaṃ chaṃdo'dhyāpaya; anayoḥ pavitraṃ kulaṃ enayoḥ prabhūtaṃ svaṃ Sk.).

anvādhānam [agnisthāpanasya paścādādhānaṃ] Putting on or deposting fuel on the sacred fires.

anvādhiḥ [anu paścādādhīyate, dhā-ki] (In civil law) 1 A bail, deposit or security delivered to a third person to be handed over ultimately to the right owner; arthamārgaṇakāryeṣu anyāsminvacanānmama . dadyāstvamiti yo dattaḥ sa ihānvādhirucyate ...
     (2) A second deposit.
     (3) [anugataḥ saṃtataḥ ādhiḥ] Constant anxiety, remorse, repentance, regret (after the committal of a bad act).

anvādheyaṃ --yakam A sort of strīdhana or woman's property, presented to her after marriage by her husband's or father's family, or by her own relatives; vivāhātparato yacca labdhaṃ bhartṛkulātstriyā . anvādheyaṃ tu taddravyaṃ labdhaṃ pitṛ- (v. l. baṃdhu-) kulāttathā .. Kāty. quoted by Kull. on Ms. 9. 195; Y. 2. 144.

anvāhita = anvādhi q. v.

anvādhyaḥ A class of divinities.

anvāṃtrya a. Ved. Being in the entrails.

anvāyatana a. Latitudinal. --naṃ ind. In the house.

anvāyatta a. Ved. In accordance with (anugata &c.); following after.

anvāyātyā A deity invoked by the verb anvāyā.

     (1) A. To begin, commence.
     (2) To touch; aṃse'dhvaryumanvārabhate Asval.; yadi māṃ saṃspṛśedrāmaḥ sakṛdanvārabheta vā . dhanaṃ vā yauvarājyaṃ vā jīveyamiti me matiḥ Ram.

anvārabdha p. p.
     (1) Touched on the back or on any part of the body; viṣṇoḥ karmāṇīti vācayati rūpamanvārabdhamiti Katy.
     (2) That which has touched or on has been placed the body (as the hand).
     (3) Followed.

anvārabhya pot. p. To be touched along with.

anvāraṃbhaḥ, --bhaṇam Touching, contact, especially touching the yajamāna (the performer of a sacrifice) to make him entitled to the fruits and merits of the holy rite.

anvāraṃbhaṇīyā An initiatory or preliminary ceremony.

anvāruh 1 P. To follow in ascending, especially the funeral pile; to ascend, climb, mount; anvārohacca sugrīvaḥ (giriṃ) Ram.

anvārohaṇam A woman's ascending the funeral pile after or with the body of her husband.

anvās 2 A.
     (1) To be seated near or round; sakhāyamanvāste Mb.; to wait upon, serve, attend upon; sakhībhyāmanvāsyate S. 3; anvāsitamaruṃdhatyā svāhayeva havirbhujaṃ R. 1. 56; to sit after one (acc. of person); tāṃ anvāsya R. 2. 24.
     (2) To perform, as a religious ceremony; saṃdhyāmanvāsya paścimāṃ Ram.

     (1) Service, attendance, waiting upon, worship.
     (2) Taking a seat after another.
     (3) Regret, sorrow.
     (4) A place of industry, manufactory, work-shop &c.
     (5) An oily or cooling enema.

anvāsīna pres. p. Sitting down after, seated along side of.

anvāhāryaḥ (also --ryaṃ) --ryakaṃ [anu māsi māsi āhriyate, karmaṇi ṇyat]
     (1) A sacrificial gift or offering presented to the priests (Say. anvāharati yajñasaṃbaṃdhidoṣajātaṃ pariharatyanena ityanvāhāryo nāma ṛtvigbhyo deya odanaḥ).
     (2) The monthly Śraddha performed in honor of the manes on the day of new moon; pitṝṇāṃ māsikaṃ śrāddhamanvāhāryaṃ vidurbudhāḥ Ms. 3. 123.
     -- Comp.
          --pacanaḥ the southern sacrificial fire used in the anvāhārya sacrifice.

anvāhika a. ( f.) Daily, diurnal.

anvāhita = anvādheya q. v.

anvi 2 P. [anu-i]
     (1) To follow, come or go after, succeed; gacchataḥ pṛṣṭhato'nviyāt Ms. 4. 154; enāṃ ... prayatā prātaranvetu R. 1. 90; śunīmanveti śvā Bh. 3. 18; attend, accompany, accrue to; karmaphalaṃ kartāramanveti.
          (a) To follow (in grammar or construction); be connected or construed with; dhāturādeśamanveti Mb. see anvaya below.
          (b) To obey, conform to, be guided by; yaścittamanveti parasya Mb.
     (3) To seek; to fall to one's lot (Ved.).

anvayaḥ [i kartari bhāve vā ac]
     (1) Going after, following; also, follower, retinue, attendants; kā tvamekākinī bhīru niranvayajane vane Bk. 5. 66.
     (2) Association, connection, relation; gaṃdhaḥ kaṭukānvayaḥ = kaṭukānvitaḥ.
     (3) The natural order or connection of words in a sentence, construing, grammatical order or relation; padānāṃ parasparākāṃkṣā yogyatā ca, or śabdānāṃ parasparamarthānugamanaṃ; tātparyākhyāṃ vṛttimāhuḥ padārthānvayabodhane S. D; logical connection of words, atra (in the ex. tiṣṭhatu sarpiḥ) sarpiḥśabdasya sthitikriyāyāmanvayaḥ P. VIII. 3. 44 Sk; parasparanirapekṣasyānekasya ekasminnanvayaḥ samuccayaḥ P. II. 2. 29 Sk.
     (4) Drift, tenor, purport.
     (5) Race, family, lineage; raghūṇāmanvayaṃ vakṣye R. 1. 9, 12; 3. 27; 12. 33; anvayaguṇaḥ Mv. 4. 22 virtue of my race.
     (6) Descendants, posterity; tābhya ṛte anvayaḥ Y. 2. 117; sa- along with the family or descendants; Ms. 2. 168; Pt. 1. 27.
     (7) Logical connection of cause and effect, logical continuance; janmādyasya yato'nvayāditarataḥ Bhag.
     (8) Being seen (pratyakṣa); syātsāhasaṃ tvanvayavat prasabhaṃ karma yatkṛtaṃ . niranvayaṃ bhavetsteyaṃ Ms. 8. 332.
     (9) (In Nyaya) Statement of the constant and invariable concomitance of the hetu (middle term) and the sādhya (major term) of an Indian syllogism (hetusādhyayorvyāptiranvayaḥ). In the familiar instance parvato vahnimān dhūmavattvāt the relation yatra yatra dhūmastatra tatra vahniḥ (wherever there is smoke there is fire) is called anvaya or anvayavyāpti, anvaya, in fact, corresponds to the universal A proposition of European logic 'All A is B.' The 'vyatirekavyāpti' means an assertion of the concomitance of the absence of sādhya and the absence of hetu (tadabhāvayoḥ hetvabhāvasādhyābhāvayoḥ vyāptiḥ) and corresponds to the converted A proposition 'All notB is not-A'; or in Sanskrit yatra yatra vahnirnāsti tatra tatra dhūmopi nāsti; and a cause or hetu is said to be connected with its effect by anvayavyatirekavyāpti when both the affirmative and negative relations between the thing to be proved and the cause that proves can be equally asserted; such a Hetu alone makes the argument perfectly sound and incapable of refutation. This process of arriving at the Vyapti or universal proposition corresponds to the methods of Agreement and Difference in Mill's Logic; sādhye niścitamanvayena ghaṭitaṃ Mu. 5. 10.
     -- Comp.
          --āgata a. hereditary; Pt. 1, 3; -taṃ vairaṃ Pt. 3.
          --jñaḥ a genealogist; atha stute baṃdibhiranvayajñaiḥ R. 6. 8.
          --vyatireka (-kau or -kaṃ) 1. positive and negative assertion; agreement and contrariety or difference; see above.
     (2) rule and exception. --vyāptiḥ f. affirmative assertion or agreement, affirmative universal.

anvayavat a.
     (1) Having a connection or consequence, following.
     (2) Belonging to a race or family; born of a noble family, noble, high-born; satyapi anvayavati avarodhajane K. 7.

anvayin a. Connected as with a consequence.

anvita p. p.
     (1) Followed or attended by, in company with, joined by; amātyaputraiḥ savayobhiranvitaḥ R. 3. 28.
     (2) Possessed of, having, possessing, endowed with; full of, seized or struck with, overpowered by; with instr. or in compound; kulānvitaṃ kukulajā niṃdaṃti Pt. 1. 415; dhairya-; guṇa-, vitta-; vismaya- struck with wonder; bhaya-, krodha-, lobha- &c. &c.
     (3) Connected with, linked to, following (as a consequence).
     (4) Connected grammatically; varṇāḥ padaṃ prayogārhānanvitaikārthabodhakāḥ S. D. 9.
     (5) Understood, reached by the mind.
     -- Comp.
          --artha a. having a meaning which is easily understood from the context. -vādaḥ-abhidhānavādaḥ a doctrine of the Mīmamsakas that words in a sentence convey meanings not independently or generally, but as connected with one another in that particular sentence; see abhihitānvayavādin under abhidhā and K. P. 2.

anviti a. Won over or favourably disposed by means of a salutation. --tiḥ f. 1 Following.
     (2) Food.

anviṣ 6 P. To desire, seek, search for or after, look out for, seek to get; ataḥ siddhisametābhyāmubhābhyāmanviyeṣa saḥ R. 17. 47. (--4 P.) To seek, search, look out for &c.; na ratnamanviṣyati mṛgyate hi tat Ku. 5. 45; anveṣṭavyo yadasi bhuvane bhūtanāthaḥ śaraṇyaḥ U. 2. 13; to inquire, investigate; kiṃ vṛthā tarkeṇa anviṣyate S. 5. --Caus. To seek, search &c; yāmanveṣayatāṃ prayāṃti satataṃ sarve samāptiṃ guṇāḥ Bh. 3. 10.

anviṣṭa p. p. Desired, sought, searched; yadvāyuranviṣṭamṛgaiḥ kirātaiḥ Ku. 1. 15.

anveṣaḥ, --ṣaṇaṃ --ṇā
     (1) Search after, seeking for, inquiry into or after, looking out for, watching; vayaṃ tattvānveṣānmadhukara hatāḥ S. 1. 24; nyāya -ṇatatparau Pt. 3. 91; raṃdhrānveṣaṇadakṣāṇāṃ dviṣāṃ R. 12. 11; asyaivānveṣaṇā vartate V. 2.

anveṣaka, anveṣin, anveṣṭṛ a. Searching after, seeking for, inquiring &c; paurā asmadanveṣiṇaḥ S. 1.; anupadyanveṣṭā P. V. 2. 90; aṃtarānveṣī bhavāmi S. 7; R. 12. 54; H. 4. 102.

anvīkṣ 1 A.
     (1) To keep looking or gazing at, keep in view.
     (2) To search, seek for, inquire into; reflect or meditate upon, think of.

anvīkṣaṇaṃ, --kṣā
     (1) Search, seeking for; investigation.
     (2) Reflection; meditation.

anvīta = anvita q. v.

anvīpa a. [anugatā āpo yatra]
     (1) Near the water, situated near water.
     (2) Attainable or friendly.

anvṛcam ind. Verse after verse.

ap f. [āp-kvip-hrasvaśca] Uṇ. 2. 58] (Declined in classical language only in pl.; āpaḥ, apaḥ, adbhiḥ, adbhyaḥ apāṃ and apsu, but in singular and pl. in Veda)
     (1) Water (regarded in Ved. as sacred divinities, āpo devīḥ); khāni caiva spṛśedadbhiḥ Ms. 2. 60. Water is generally considered to be the first of the 5 elements of creation, as in apa eva sasarjādau tāsu bījamavāsṛjat Ms. 1. 8, S. 1. 1; but in Ms. 1. 78 it is said to have been created from jyotis or tejas after manas, ākāśa, vāyu and jyotis or agni; jyotiṣaśca vikurvāṇādāpo rasaguṇāḥ smṛtāḥ . adbhyo gaṃdhaguṇā bhūmirityeṣā sṛṣṭirāditaḥ ..
     (2) Air, the intermediate region.
     (3) The star S virginis. For the changes of ap at the end of comp. see P. V. 4. 74, VI. 3. 97-98. [cf. L. aqua, Gr. appos; Lith. uppe, Goth. ahva; Pers. ab; Zend ap; Old Germ. aha].
     -- Comp.
          --kṛtsnaṃ deep meditation by means of water.
          --caraḥ an aquatic animal.
          --patiḥ 1. 'Lord of waters', N. of Varuṇa. --2. the ocean. For other comps. see s. v.

apām enters into several compounds; e. g. apāṃsaṃvartaḥ destruction of the world by water; apāṃvatsaḥ 'calf of waters', N. of a star; apāṃnapāt, -naptā, -napttriya, -garbha, apānnapāt, aponapāt Ved. N. of Agni or fire as sprung from water; cf. Ms. 9. 321; apāṃpatiḥ, nidhiḥ nāthaḥ, appatiḥ lord of waters, the ocean; N. of Varuṇa; apāṃpittaṃ, appittaṃ fire.

apa ind. [na pāti rakṣati patanāt pā-ḍa Tv.]
     (1) (As a prefix to verbs it means)
          (a) Away, away from, denoting viyoga; apayāti, apanayati;
          (b) deterioration (vikṛti); apakaroti does wrongly or badly;
          (c) opposition, negation, contradiction (viparīta); apakarṣati, apacinoti;
          (d) direction or mention or illustration (nidarśana); apādiśati;
          (e) exclusion (varjana); apavah, apasṛ caus;
          (f) joy, merriment or laughter (ānada); apahasati;
          (g) concealment or denial (caurya); apalapati, apavadate.
     (2) As first member of Tat. or Bahuvrīhi comp. it has all the above senses; apayānaṃ, apakarma, apapāṭhaḥ; apaśabdaḥ a bad or corrupt word; -bhī fearless; -kalmaṣa stainless; aparāgaḥ discontent (opp. to anurāga); -meghodayaṃ varṣaṃ Ku. 6. 54 &c. In most cases apa may be translated by 'bad', 'inferior', 'corrupt,' 'wrong', unworthy' &c. It also means 'going downwards' as in apānaḥ.
     (3) As a separable preposition (with a noun in the abl.)
          (a) away from; yatsaṃpratyapa lokebhyo laṃkāyāṃ vasatirbhayāt Ram;
          (b) without, on the outside of; apa hareḥ saṃsāraḥ Sk.;
          (c) with the exception of, excepting; apa trigartebhyo vṛṣṭo devaḥ Sk. on the outside of, with the exception of. In these senses apa may form adverbial compounds also (P. II. 1. 12); -viṣṇu saṃsāraḥ Sk. without Viṣṇu; -trigartaṃ vṛṣṭo devaḥ excepting T. &c. It also implies negation, contradiction &c.; -kāmaṃ -śaṃkaṃ. The senses of this word as given by G. M. may be thus put in verse; varjane vikṛtau caurye viparītaviyogayoḥ . apakṛṣṭe ca nirdeśe harṣe cāpaḥ prayujyate. [cf. L. ab; Gr. apo; Goth. af. Eng. of or off; Zend apa].

apakalaṃkaḥ A deep, indelible stain.

apakāmaḥ Ved. Abhorrence, aversion, abominableness; absence of what is dear. --maṃ ind. Unwillingly, against one's will.

apakṛ 8 U.
     (1) To carry or bear away, remove, drag away, insult by dragging away; yo'pacakre vanātsītāṃ Bk. 8. 20 bore forcibly away.
     (2) To hurt, injure, wrong, harm, do harm or injury to (usually with gen. of person); āpadi yenāpakṛtaṃ Pt. 4. 16; Śi. 14. 78; na kiṃcinmayā tasyāpakartuṃ śakyaṃ Pt. 1; kiṃ tasyā mayāpakṛtaṃ 4 what harm have I done to her? kiṃ ca rākṣasarājasya rāmeṇāpakṛtaṃ purā Ram.; sometimes with acc. or loc. also; atha vā saunikāḥ kecidapakuryuryudhiṣṭhiraṃ Mb.; kimiva bata nāpyanyapakṛtaṃ Bh. 3. 115; na pareṣu mahaujasaśchalādapakurvaṃti malimlucā iva Śi. 16. 52. --Caus. To harm, injure &c.

     (1) Acting improperly.
     (2) Doing wrong, injuring; ill-treating, offending.

apakartṛ a.
     (1) Injurious, doing harm or injury, offensive.
     (2) Hostile, inimical. --m. An enemy.

apakarman a. [bahu. sa.] Of bad or degraded actions, corrupted, depraved. --n (-rma)
     (1) Discharge, paying off (of a debt); dattasyānapakarma ca Ms. 8. 4.
     (2) An improper or unworthy act; evil doing, conduct, or course, any degrading or impure act.
     (3) Wickedness, violence, oppression.
     (4) Incompetence, laziness.

     (1) Harm, wrong, injury, hurt, offence, misdeed, wrong deed (opp. apakāra); svalpenāpyapakāreṇa brāhmaṇyamiva duṣyati Pt. 1. 66; upakartrāriṇā saṃdhirna mitreṇāpakāriṇā . upakārāpakārau hi lakṣyaṃ lakṣaṇametayoḥ Śi. 2. 37; apakāropyupakārāyaiva saṃvṛttaḥ. &c.
     (2) Thinking ill of, desire to offend or hurt (aniṣṭaciṃtā).
     (3) Wickedness, violence, oppression, enmity.
     (4) A mean or degraded action.
     -- Comp.
          --arthin a. meaning to harm, malevolent, malicious.
          --gir f. (
          --gīḥ), --śabdaḥ abusive words, menacing or insulting speech; bhartsanaṃ tvapakāragīḥ Ak.

apakāraka, --kārin a. Injuring, doing harm or wrong to, mischievous, offending, harmful, hurtful, injurious; Pt. 1. 95, Śi. 2. 37. --kaḥ, --rī An evil-doer (opp. upaṃkārī), enemy; apakāriṣu yaḥ sādhuḥ sa sādhuḥ sadbhirucyate H. 1; an- harmless, not harmful.

apakṛta p. p.
     (1) Injured, wronged, wickedly or maliciouly committed &c.
     (2) Done or practised as a degrading or impure act, as funeral rites. --taṃ An injury, harm, offence.

apakṛtiḥ f., apakṛtyaṃ
     (1) Harm, injury, hurt, damage, offence.
     (2) Opposition, enmity.
     (3) A degrading or impure act.

     (1) Hurt, injury, disservice; fault, wrong or faulty deed, misdeed; caturthopāyasādhye tu śatrau sāṃtvamapakriyā Śi. 2. 54; Ki. 13. 64 fault.
     (2) Paying or clearing off (debts).

apakṛṣ 1 P., 6 U.
          (a) To draw back or away, draw off or aside, drag down, drag away, take or carry off, take or draw out, extract; ānāyibhistāmapakṛṣṭanakrāṃ R. 16. 55 drawn out; daṃtāgrabhinnamapakṛṣya nirīkṣate ca Rs. 4. 14 pulling off or back.
          (b) To take or carry away, remove; dhairyaṃ śoko'pakarṣati Rām.; kiṃtvanuṣṭhānanityatvaṃ svātaṃtryamapakarṣati U. 1. 8, Mv. 4. 33 prevents or interferes with freedom of action; kṣātraṃtejopakarṣati Mv. 1. 32 destroys, robs one of.
     (2) To diminish, decrease, omit; apakarṣedevaṃ yāvatpaṃcadaśa Suśr.
     (3) To bend (as a bow); dhanuḥ śreṣṭhamapakṛṣya Mb.
     (4) To lower or debase, dishonour, detract from, lessen the value of, disparage; pīḍayan bhṛtyavargaṃ hi ātmānamapakarṣati Mb.
     (5) To bring or draw backwards; anticipate (as a word in a sentence) what occurs later on; agrimasūtrasthaṃ sarvatragrahaṇamihāpakṛṣyate P. IV. 1. 17 Com. --Caus. To remove, take away, lessen, diminish, detract from; kāvyasyātmabhūtaṃ rasamapakarṣayaṃtaḥ kāvyasyāpakarṣakāḥ (doṣāḥ) ucyaṃte S. D. 1.

          (a) Drawing off or down; diminution, decrease, reduction; medo'pakarṣāt Dk. 160; loss, decay, decline, destruction; tejopakarṣaḥ Ve. 1; deterioration, inferiority; utkarṣāpakarṣavihīno madhyaḥ Sk.
          (b) Dishonour, degradation, lowering (of esteem), infamy, disgrace (opp. utkarṣa in all senses); tapobījaprabhāvaistu te gacchaṃti yuge yuge . utkarṣaṃ cāpakarṣaṃ ca manuṣyeṣviha janmataḥ .. Ms. 10. 42; mūlyotkarṣa- rise and fall in price, increase and decrease.
     (2) Anticipated performance of a duty, as of a Śraddha.
     (3) Anticipation of a word occurring later on (in gram., poetry or Mīmamsa &c.).
     -- Comp.
          --samaḥ a sort of fallacy; e. g. sound has not the quality of shape, as a jar, so sound and a jar have no qualities in common.

apakarṣaka a.
     (1) Drawing or taking off or down, removing.
     (2) Lessening, diminishing, detracting from; doṣāstasya (kāvyasya) apakarṣakāḥ S. D. 1.

apakarṣaṇa a. Taking or drawing away, removing, diminishing (opp. vardhaka); na cāsti sadṛśaṃ tena kiṃcitsthaulyāpakarṣaṇaṃ Suśr. --ṇaṃ
     (1) Removing, taking away; drawing away or down, depriving (one) of, drawing out, extracting.
     (2) Lessening, making inferior, detraction.
     (3) Superseding.
     (4) Denying; abolishing.

apakṛṣṭa p. p.
     (1) Drawn or taken away, removed; apakṛṣṭaścāṇakyāccaṃdraguptaḥ Mu. 4 severed, alienated, estranged, cut off; so nṛpopakṛṣṭaḥ sacivāt 4. 14; extracted, drawn out, dragged, lost, diminished, brought down, depressed, lowered &c.
     (2) Drawn or attracted by; sarvaṃ daivāpakṛṣṭaṃ manyate yudhiṣṭhiraḥ Ve. 5, dependent on, or the work of, Fate.
     (3) Low, vile, base, inferior, mean (opp. utkṛṣṭa); na kaścidvarṇānāmapathamapakṛṣṭopi bhajate S. 5. 10; patiṃ hitvā'pakṛṣṭaṃ svamutkṛṣṭaṃ yā niṣevate Ms. 5. 163; 8. 281; 9. 24; sahāpakṛṣṭairmahatāṃ na saṃgataṃ Ki. 14. 22. --ṣṭaḥ A crow.
     -- Comp.
          --cetana a. mentally debased or corrupted, low-minded.
          --jāti a. of a low tribe or origin.

apakṝ 6. P. To scatter, spout out (water); apakirati kusumaṃ; gajo'pa kirati Sk.
     (2) To scrape with the feet (for food &c.) through joy, said of quadrupeds and birds, (changed to apaskṛ A, in this sense apāccatuṣpācchakuniṣvālekhane suṭ P. VI. 1. 142) apāskirate vṛṣo hṛṣṭaḥ, kukkuṭo bhakṣārthī, śvā āśrayārthī ca Sk; śṛṃgairapaskīrṇamahattaṭībhuvāṃ Śi. 12. 74 scratched; chāyāpaskiramāṇaviṣkira &c. U. 2. 9.

apakiraṇam Scattering about &c.

apakauśalī News, information.

apaktiḥ f.
     (1) Unripeness, immaturity.
     (2) Indigestion.

apakva a. Unripe, immature, undigested (as food); uncooked, raw.

apakram 1 P.
     (1) To go away, run away, fly, escape, flee away, leave, retreat, retire (from); nagarādapakrāṃtaḥ Mu. 1; rākṣaso'pakrāmannupekṣitaḥ 3 while escaping.
     (2) To glide away, pass away, (as time).
     (3) To measure off by steps or by pacing.

     (1) Going away, flight, escape, retreat.
     (2) The place or limit to which one may retreat; vikṣipatyeṣa vikṣepaṃ caṃdrādīnāmapakramāt Sūrya S.
     (3) Gliding or passing away (of time. --a. [apagataḥ kramo yasmāt]
     (1) Without order
     (2) Irregular, in wrong order.

apakramaṇaṃ, --krāmaḥ Retreat, retiring, flight, escape &c.

apakramin a. Going forth or away; not going fast, true.

apakrośaḥ Abuse, reviling.

apakṣa a.
     (1) Without wings or the power of flight.
     (2) Not belonging to the same side or party.
     (3) Having no adherents or friends.
     (4) Opposed to, adverse.
     -- Comp.
          --pātaḥ impartiality.
          --pātin a. impartial.

apakṣi 1. 5. 9. P. To bring to an end, destroy, annihilate. --pass. To decline, decay, waste away; wane (as the moon).

apakṣayaḥ Decline, decay, wane.

apakṣīṇa p. p. Declined, wasted, waned.

apakṣip 6 P. To throw away or down, take away, remove.

apakṣepaḥ, --kṣepaṇam
     (1) Casting away or throwing down.
     (2) Throwing or putting down, one of the 5 kinds of karman in the Vaiśeṣika phil., see karman.

apagaṃḍaḥ One who has attained his mojority; see apogaṃḍa.

apagam 1 P.
     (1) To go away, depart; pass away, elapse (as time); K. 73; tanmukhācchāyāpagatā H. 3; saṃpado nāpagacchaṃti Pt. 3. 8.
     (2) To fall off or down; go away, vanish, disappear.

apaga a. Going, turning away. --gā A river (wrongly for āpagā).

apagata p. p.
     (1) Gone away, departed, passed away, gone off; being remote; oft. as first member of comp. in the sense of 'free from', 'devoid of'; -anyavyāpārāḥ K. 43 having no other duties; -matsara 45; 47, 157, 164, 207, 211; -nimeṣeṇa cakṣuṣā 154 devoid of twinkling or winking; -male manasi 102.
     (2) Dead, deceased.

apagamaḥ, --manam
     (1) Going away or off, departure, separation; samāgamāḥ sāpagamāḥ H. 4. 65.
     (2) Falling off, going away, removal, disappearance; nimittamuddiśya hi yaḥ prakupyati bhruvaṃsa tasyāpagame prasīdati .. Pt. 1. 283; tvatsaṃrodhāpagagaviśadaiścaṃdrapādaiḥ Me. 70; purāṇapatrāpagamādanaṃtaraṃ R. 3. 7; lapse, passing away; katipayadivasāpagame K. 66, 193.
     (3) Death, decease.

apagatiḥ f. A bad fate(going to hell &c.); yena cāpagatirbhavet Pt. 2. 108.

apagaraḥ [apa-niṃdārthe gṝ bhāve ap]
     (1) Censure, reviling (niṃdā); abhigarāpagarau Katy.
     (2) One who reviles or says what is disagreeable, reviler.

apagarjita a. Thunderless (as a cloud).

apagopura a. Deprived of its gateways (as a town).

apagalbha a. Ved.
     (1) Wanting in boldness, abortive.
     (2) Being on the side, lateral.
     (3) Separated from the oldest by one.

apaguṇaḥ A demerit, fault; Śi. 15. 32.

apagur 6 A.
     (1) To disapprove, reject.
     (2) To threaten, menace; revile, censure, reproach, rail at.
     (3) To deprive of.

apagāraṃ --goram ind. Having raised or lifted up; asyapagoraṃ-gāraṃ yudhyaṃte P. VI. 1. 53 Sk. lifting their swords.

apaguh 1 U. To hide, conceal.

apagohaḥ Ved. A hiding place, disappearance, concealment.

apaghanaḥ [apahanyate saṃhatya karma kṛtvā viyujyate, han-ap-ghanādeśaḥ P. III 3. 77]. A limb or member of the body, as a hand or foot (apaghanoṃ'gam III. 3. 81; aṃgaṃ śarīrāvayavaḥ sa ca na sarvaṃ kiṃ tu pāṇiḥ pādaścetyāhuḥ Sk. and Kāśikā); but it is also used in the sense of 'the body'; lauhodghanaghanaskaṃdhā lalitāpaghanāṃ striyaṃ Bk. 7. 62 (where the commentators take apaghana to mean the body itself). --a. Free from the obstruction of clouds, cloudless.

     (1) Striking or cutting off, warding off, preventing.
     (2) Killing.
     (3) A violent death, any evil accident proving fatal.

apaghātin a. Killing, murdering.

apacaḥ [paktumaśaktaḥ Sk.]
     (1) Unable to cook, or one who does not cook for himself.
     (2) A bad cook, a term of abuse (ākrośe); apaco jālmaḥ P. VI. 2. 157-8 Sk.

apacar 1 P.
     (1) To depart.
     (2) To go astray, transgress; offend, commit a fault, act wrongly; yo yasteṣāmapacarettamācakṣīta vai dvijaḥ Mb.; tadaṃganāsvapācarannareṃdraḥ Dk. 162 outraged.

apacarita p. p. Gone away, departed; deceased. --taṃ A fault, wrong or wicked deed, misdeed; āhosvitprasavo mamāpacaritairviṣṭaṃbhito vīrudhāṃ S. 5. 9.

     (1) Departure; death; siṃhaghoṣaśca kāṃtakāpacāraṃ nirbhidya Dk. 72.
     (2) Want, absence.
     (3) A fault; offence, misdeed, improper conduct, crime; śiṣyo gurāviva kṛtaprathamāpacāraḥ Mv. 4. 20; na rājāpacāramaṃtareṇa U. 2 (v. l. for -aparādhaṃ); rājanprajāsu te kaścidapacāraḥ pravartate R. 15. 47.
     (4) Injurious or hurtful conduct, injury, Ve. 4. 10.
     (5) A defect, flaw, failure, deficiency; nāpacāramagaman kvacitkriyāḥ Śi. 14. 32; mistake, omission (to do a thing) (lopa); mahādhvare vidhyapacāradoṣaḥ Ki. 16. 48.
     (6) Unwholesome or improper regimen (apathya); kṛtāpacāropi parairanāviṣkṛtavikriyaḥ . asādhyaḥ kurute kopaṃ prāpte kāle gado yathā .. Śi. 2. 84 (where a- also means hurt or injury).

apacārin a. Offending, doing wrong; wicked, bad; bhāryāpacāriṇī Ms. 8. 317 a faithless wife.

apacāy 1 A.
     (1) To fear.
     (2) To respect, honour, worship.

apacāyita a. Feared, honoured.

apaci 3 P.
     (1) To honour, respect.
     (2) To invite respectfully.
     (3) (5 U.) To gather, collect. --pass.
     (1) To be reduced in strength or bulk, sink, waste away; apacitamapi gātraṃ vyāyatatvādalakṣyaṃ S. 2. 9 reduced in bulk, emaciated, lean; to wane, decline, diminish, grow less; rājahaṃsa tava saiva śubhratā cīyate na ca na cāpacīyate K. P. 10.
     (2) To fall away from, be deprived of, lose (with abl.) prakṛtiḥ sūyate tadvadānaṃtyānnāpacīyate Mb.

     (1) Diminution, decrease, decay, decline, fall (fig. also.); kaphāpacayaḥ Dk. 160; tenāsyāpacayaṃ yāṃti vyādhermūlānyaśeṣataḥ Suśr.; H. 3. 130; defeat Mv. 2. 13.
     (2) Loss, privation, failure, defect; H. 3. 133.
     (3) N. of several planetary mansions.

apacita p. p.
     (1) Reduced in bulk, decreased, wasted, expended &c.; emaciated, thin, lean.
     (2) Honoured, respected, saluted --taṃ Honouring.

apacitiḥ f. (P. VII. 2. 30 Vart.)
     (1) Loss, decay, decline, destruction.
     (2) Expense.
     (3) Atonement, amends, compensation, expiation of sin.
     (4) Exclusion.
     (5) Punishing.
     (6) N. of a daughter of Marīchi.
     (7) Honouring, worshipping, showing reverence, worship; vihitāpacitirmahībhṛtā Śi. 16. 9 (where it also means loss, destruction hāni), 1. 17; 15. 34; K. 324; Ki. 6. 46; 11. 9.

apācit f. A noxious flying insect; that which causes decay.

apacī [apakṛṣṭaṃ pacyate asau, pac karmakartari ac gaurā- ṅīṣ] A disease in which the glands of the neck are enlarged and swollen.

apacchatra a. Without a parasol or umbrella.

apacchāya a. [apagatā chāyā yasmāt]
     (1) Shadowless.
     (2) Having a bad or unlucky shadow.
     (3) Devoid of brightness, dim. --yaḥ One that has no shadow, i. e. a god; cf. N. 14. 21; śriyaṃ bhajaṃtāṃ kiyadasya devāśchāyā nalasyāsti tathāpi naiṣām . itīrayaṃtīva tayā niraikṣi sā (chāyā) naiṣadhe na tridaśeṣu teṣu .. --yā An unlucky shadow, apparition, phantom.

apacchedaḥ --danam
     (1) Cutting off or away.
     (2) Loss.
     (3) Interruption.

apacyu 1 A.
     (1) To fall off, go away or off, withdraw, desert.
     (2) To perish, die.

apacyavaḥ Going or coming out (nirgama); Rv. 1. 28. 3.

apacyuta p. p. Fallen off; departed, perished; melted away.

apajātaḥ A bad son who has turned out ill; one inferior to his parents in qualities; mātṛtulyaguṇo jātastvanujātaḥ pituḥ samaḥ . atijātodhikastasmādapajāto'dhamādhamaḥ ..

apajargurāṇa a. (apagṝ-yaṅluk cānaś) Ved. Accustomed to take off or remove the covering &c. (ācchādanādimocanaśīla) Rv. 5. 29. 4.

apaji 1 P. To defeat, conquer; turn off or away, avert, ward or keep off; yena mṛtyumapajayati Śat. Br.

apajayaḥ Defeat, overthrow.

apajñā 9 A. To deny, disown, repudiate, dissemble, conceal; śatamapajānīte P. I. 3. 44 Sk. (apalapati); ātmānamapajānānaḥ śaśamātro'nayaddinaṃ Bk. 8. 26 concealing himself.

apajñānam Denying, concealing.

apaṃcīkṛtam A simple elementary substance not made of the five (paṃca) gross elements; the five subtle elements; paṃcaprāṇamanobuddhidaśeṃdriyasamanvitaṃ apaṃcīkṛtabhūtotthaṃ sūkṣmāṃgaṃ bhogasādhanam .. Vedanta. P.

apaṭāṃtara a.
     (1) Not separated (by a curtain or screen).
     (2) Adjoining, contiguous (= apadāṃtara).

apaṭī [alpaḥ paṭaḥ paṭī, na. ta.]
     (1) A screen or wall of cloth, particularly the screen or kanāt surrounding a tent.
     (2) A curtain.
     -- Comp.
          --kṣepaḥ (apaṭakṣepaḥ) tossing aside the curtain; -kṣepeṇa (= akasmāt) 'with a (hurried) toss of the curtain', frequently occurring as a stage-direction and denoting precipitate entrance on the stage which arises from fear, hurry, agitation &c., as when a character tossing up the curtain suddenly enters without the usual introduction tataḥ praviśati &c.

apaṭu a.
     (1) Not clever or skilful, slow, dull awkward, uncouth.
     (2) Ineloquent (as a speaker).
     (3) Sick.

apaṭha a. Unable to read; not reading; a bad reader; cf. apaca.

apaṃḍita a. Not learned or wise, foolish, ignorant; vibhūṣaṇaṃ maunamapaṃḍitānām Bh. 2. 7.
     (2) Wanting in skill, taste, appreciation &c.

apaṇya a. Not saleable (the Smṛtis name several things which ought not to be sold by particular persons and on particular occasions); jīvikārthe cāpaṇye P. V. 3. 99.

apataṃtrakaḥ [apagataṃ taṃtraṃ bhiṣajāmadhīnatā yatra kap Tv.] A kind of vātaroga, spasmodic contraction of the body or stomach.

apatānakaḥ [apakramya aṃtarāṃtarā tanute tan kartari ṇvul] Spasmodic contraction with occasional convulsive fits; sopatānakasaṃjño yaḥ pātayatyaṃtarāṃtarā Suśr.

apatānakin a. Affected with spasmodic contraction.

apati, tika a. Without a master; without a husband, unmarried. --tiḥ Ved. Not a master or husband.

apatnī Unmarried, without a husband.

apatnīka a.
     (1) Without a wife (when she is either absent or dead).
     (2) To be performed without the company of a wife; apatnīkaḥ pitṛyajñaḥ Katy.

apatīrtha A bad Tīrtha or place of pilgrimage.

apatṛp 10 P. To cause to fast or starve.

     (1) Fasting (in sickness).
     (2) Absence of satisfaction.

apatyam [na pataṃti pitaro'nena, pat bāhu- karaṇe yat, na. ta.; some derive it from apa, the termination tya being added to it, as in tatratya, atratya, sprung from a stock; Yaska gives two etymologies: apatyaṃ kasmāt apatataṃ bhavati pituḥ sakāśādetya pṛthagiva tataṃ bhavati, anena jātena satā pitā narake na patatīti vā] Offspring, child, progeny, issue (of animals and men); offspring in general (male or female); sons or grandsons and other later generations of a Gotra; apatyaṃ pautraprabhṛti gotraṃ P. IV. 1. 162; apatyairiva nīvārabhāgadheyocitairmṛgaiḥ R. 1. 50. (Bhavabhūti calls an apatya 'a knot for tying parents together' anyonyasaṃśleṣaṇaṃpitroḥ; aṃtaḥkaraṇatattvasya daṃpatyoḥ snehasaṃśrayāt . ānaṃdagraṃthirekoyamapatyamiti badhyate .. U. 3. 17).
     (2) A partronymic affix; strīpuṃsayorapatyāṃtāḥ Ak.; -adhikāraprakaraṇaṃ Sk.
     -- Comp.
          --kāma a. desirous of progeny.
          --jīvaḥ N. of a plant.
          --da a. giving offspring (as a Mantra &c.). (
          --dā) N. of a plant (garbhadātrīvṛkṣa). --pathaḥ the vulva.
          --pratyayaḥ a patronymic affix.
          --vikrayin m. a seller of his children, a father who sells his girl for money to a bridegroom.
          --śatruḥ [apatyaṃ śatrurgarbhabhedanena nāśakaṃ yasyāḥ sā] 1. 'having the child for its enemy', a crab (said to die in proḍuciṅg young). --2. a serpent.
          --sāc a. Ved. accompanied with offspring.

apatra a. Leafless, without wings &c. --traḥ
     (1) The shoot of bamboo; a sprout in general (tadavasthāyāṃ tayoḥ patraśūnyatayotpattestathātvaṃ).
     (2) A tree the leaves of which have fallen off.
     (3) A bird without wings.

apatrap 1 A. To be ashamed, be bashful, hang down the face through shame; (with instr. of person or thing); yenāpatrapate sādhurasādhustena tuṣyati Mb; ya ātmanāpatrapate bhṛśaṃ naraḥ sa sarvalokaṃsya gururbhavatyuta ibid; tasmādbalairapatrepe Bk. 14. 84 turned away from with shame.

apatrapa a. Shameless, impudent. --pā-paṇaṃ
     (1) Shame, bashfulness.
     (2) Embarrassment.

apatrapiṣṇu a. [apatrap-iṣṇuc] Bashful; Śi. 8. 46.

apatrasta p. p. Afraid of, deterred from; taraṃgāpatrastaḥ (slightly) afraid of waves; P. II. 1. 38 Sk.

apatha a. [nāsti paṃthā yatra] Pathless, roadless; -tho deśaḥ, -thā nagarī &c. --thaṃ, --thaḥ (also apaṃthāḥ P. V. 4. 72, II. 4. 30)
     (1) Not a way, absence of a way or road, pathless state; a bad or wrong road (lit.); (fig.) irregularity, deviation, a moral irregularity or deviation, a wrong road, bad or evil course; apathe padamarpayaṃti hi śrutavaṃtopi rajonimīlitāḥ R. 9. 74; 17. 54; na kaścidvarṇānāmapathamapakṛṣṭopi bhajate S. 5. 10 follows evil ways; kāritastvamapathe pada mayā Ki. 13. 45, 64.
     (2) Heresy, heterodoxy (in opinions).
     (3) The vulva. --thā N. of several plants. --thaṃ ind. By or in the wrong way, astray; apathaṃ vartate Sk.
     -- Comp.
          --gāmin a. pursuing evil courses; heretical.
          --prapanna a. taking to evil ways (as man); spent or used out of place, misapplied, misspent (as money &c.); H. 3. 123.

apathya a. [na. ta.]
     (1) Unfit, unsuited, improper, inconsistent, obnoxious; akāryaṃ kāryasaṃkāśamapathyaṃ pathyasaṃmitaṃ Rām.
     (2) (In medicin